The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutRIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS/2007 RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS/ 2007 I a. .. t\.t:: r - ob lj__.,,_.~_,,_,__._ K i vt..,-s; de.. t='e...j.: oIa..{ ~ I "'\O"".,~ ts ~ I o-P g 0] DO 7 P. L~s. 7.. $f!lC.$...j- __ff2r~._af__Cb_aL~--. ----.------.----..-.--.......... L~.{JfC.- Dk . K~Q/~~~...... Q_~..... ._~_~_.K ..-~ill;~-~f~-b.L;_~ ._b.!J.A.~:_n,~- -fo~________.______ . ~1A..Ar't" q/ ....c3i70 7. ..~-pJg.~/-S-Fc;.;.Qc~.::k.~~r-~.-_o.f-~~d-:-- ~V'\o~;\lY'\Q.i:&-c:rG- _~~__ft)~_~___R;J.?_~~;4~ __iisrl:;yt.;...l ..~<---.. r()~rn~~... ....?cq;ed /m.....d.,~f.~..}i~.-~dy--~Ie.r.l~:f~-r~k-L,~~l no+', ~(. ..*_s~d_l4.Q,.~'~- .i;-d:,~C?.c..-t~-~3'?~~~ ~. ..... ~~~-t.:~ -b'ly".e_~r. +oFLQ..r;...~. . ~gj.d._rlg..nS___l2.~_.::k_;-' e..-~-c=r-~~-L:l;.. .----- . j (\ ~f?i- c.J:~ ~~-.-n--------.---. L~ ~-~ I J~,- Q7 SJ - <JAN'" 01 ~- h:.8 --07 \ -- - ~ . \ ~"o -\:J NgJ.; CoIL .,f..t...J,/;c".. .Ji~G.t"_:%_-aDd ..~=2-d,.J;c,o,,-kQ~ AcLu-rt,<" .\.; s;~_rY'\~,.J . fc,~.... .~n;~ u ' -. - ~ 1~~<;OIu. i-i unO 7-)~-I~r~vJ' h (J rJ!ll1S/--sr-.c.i{~~.;~---.-~D.-b.d Con~t_-~li~iLo.t~--:fDrJ:hL- PJ\Jof..f'S~d~___Ji.sJi\l~J . $~- ~~W'\'\~ t'\.~?("tJ ~ .... g,s-t%1;~-h;~..-~~---~ _k;l_SeCL.c.1r 0/ o ~O"'f'7 eo.c..hJ,,;J, d:..r"C..C.-.\.~"8- ~+ D 4-t'].I., ~ f......b \~~l... o..d"~r t..s~vd ~~ b_:ds.i.,~~:~--d::-~<-n~?I~~Jo~ -r-e.ci.,rt' of-bi ds .-- .. t{.e.ui -S.e.d .. ?lQ..~. ..fr. ~~~. . ~;qt r[~6 tl. {i1.,f; ~ R-e.so{\..lf;oY\.- 07- 40 Cl.Wqv-d;~ Cl)f1rkc-+ -Pol{ ~ I?iuevsld-e.. ~;C.J::Lt2- S~.~~ 4~l'V\f.V\+~ ~~~d-. ~(t.o~ ~~~\o\'~\\~1.--- ~~ ~~>J""',,"S\d..~ \=:-~-\-\V~ %0-~~ . Iii II II 11 II .;1'(- f$ - 0711 01 H I 1 .at - f='es - 07 ~ vees w>t:. ~n UAL- S-rA-<DE.. I Nt P!2O\J.E. k\~ dJ;brJ7 ~d d- ~J Foe.~ oP- ~n+r~t- P~I/".fo~Y\c.:e.. ~nd... t:\,- .J./- 07 .f\~l\.(.+:oY\ 07... .;J.~3 ctcc.~~r\~ -J.'~,.,JorK. -1'-oV" t-/"'-t. ~~ 10+ -I4..e R,;~..s~de F~~IJ.J ~,e ::TY[rDlle.m.tn.~ f?oj~,}. I , II II ~ - I PROJECT MANUAL Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, Contract Requirements and Technical Specifications RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL 51 AGE IMPROVEMENTS IN CITY PARK SPRING 2007 IOWA CITY, IOWA I':) o g .,.-- ~ ~=; q ~! ~ -Tl N -T1 ::;: ,I, -'''' :---, l,...._j W .::- W _0. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS .....- A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 111 E. COllEGE 51. IOWA CITY, lA 52240 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 000101- PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL FOR RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE RESTROOMS AND SHELTER CITY PARK, IOWA CITY ISSUE DATE: DECEMBER,2006 NM PROJECT NO: 05.038 THIS PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDES PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 East College Street, Suite 303 Iowa City, IA 52240 BIDDERS' NOTE: Addendum information is ONLY available on AE Plans website. Q ",,"-? ....---.- 05.038 ~ I . C-'> '_Un t? ~;. ,-- .,t:- )::> c....> -r\ -- .---- N .,--\1 '-~t \.-..,) -0 - --:-- PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000101 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage - Improvements 05.038 SECTION 000103 - PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY 220 South Gilbert Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Contact person: Terry Trueblood Telephone: (319) 356-5100 Fax: (319) 356-5487 e-mail: Terry-Trueblood@iowa-city.org ARCHITECT: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319) 338-7878 Fax: (319) 338-7879 Principal-in-Charge: Kevin Monson Structural Engineer: Jack Miller Project Manager and Contract Administration: Scott Palmberg e-mail: spalmberg@neumannmonson.com ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS: Mech Engr: A&J Associates 365 Beaver Kreek Centre, Suite B Telephone: (319) 626-4719 Fax: (319) 626-4941 Project Mechanical Engineer: Vic Amoroso, Doug Green Project Electrical Engineer: John Jurca END OF DIRECTORY ~ 9C) ~-- :.:----' -';.:7 -~ -- \~"?\ Ie-] - t....:> -.:) ~ c'r\ \ ....--". '--,,_ .J .-.(\ --:;: t? ~- c.;> y PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY IN FORMATION 00 0101 000103 000107 000110 000115 PROJECT TITLE PAGE . . . . . . . _ , - - . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . PROJECT DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEALS PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 111 3 002113 002213 002613 00 4113 004313 004513 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BID FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BID BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ~~~ .-<\ ~ 4,.~ -Q~/ \ /1 ," / 0/ \.../ '. /(\ ,-:--;' ",,, ,r " \. ~., '/ ~ . '/'. -:'::>' /' ' C'~,) ~, //'-' o f;' V' 1 1 * * 3 1 2 2 2 2 1 00 5100 NOTICE OF AWARD ...... .. .. .. .. .. ...... .... .... .. .. .. .. .... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... 1 00 5200 AGREEMENT FORM * ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .." .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .... .... 005215 AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS .. .. ... .... .... .. .. .. . .... 1 00 6500 CLOSEOUT FORMS .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .......... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2 006513 CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... 3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 006515 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL ...... .. .. .. .. .. .... 2 COMPLETION 007315 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA ...... .. .. .. .. ...... 5 DOCUMENT A107 (1997) SUMMARY 01 1000 SUMMARY PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 01 2100 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ................... ALLOWANCES ..................................... ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 1 3 * 3 Page 1 12/11/2006 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 01 7800 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS , . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS . . . . . , . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 033513 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE , . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . , , , . . . . . . . HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR , , , . . . . . . . FINISHING CONCRETE CURING 03 3900 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 0511 04 2002 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING , . , , . , . , . . . . . . . . SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY . . , , . , , , , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . ("oJ DIVI@N 05 - METALS o ~ / .....--.... ~ 0'$(5000 METAL FABRICATIONS (--,\ 1E. \~:\ -;<. tu c9IVIS~6 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES \ -.r- ::=:. ;6 1~ ROUGH CARPENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- ~ 17539. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES .. _. _. ............ o ~ DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2400 073113 07 6200 07 9005 DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM . . , ,.,.,., " ASPHALT SHINGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ _ _ . . . , , . , . . . . , . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . , . . , , . . , , , . , , , , . , , JOINT SEALERS _ . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 087100 08 9100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES . . . . . _ . _ . _ . . . . . . . DOOR HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . LOUVERS . . , , . , , , . , . . , , . . , . . . , , . , . . , , . . , . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING 05,038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 2 3 4 2 6 3 2 0-- 3 4 , - 2 /,,-', 3 2 . ~ 2 - , 3 2 4 r-- 3 3 2 " " r'_ 5 Page 2 12/11/2006 ,~ DIVISION 10.. SPECIALTIES 102113.19 10 2813 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOILET ACCESSORI~S . . . . . . . . . , - . . . . - - - - . - . . . - - . - . - DIVISION 31 .. EARTHWORK 31 1000 31 2200 31 2316 31 2323 SITE CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRADING . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCAVATION . . . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FILL .. -................................. -........ DIVISION 32 . EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1313 32 9219 ~- CONCRETE PAVING . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SJ ,;:::0 ...:--,.. _....-, ( ,..~r."., ~i5~ :t> 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 2 4. 2 2 2 4 4 3 r--> ~-? (-:::> L:::J~ _0. " (--:" Page 3 12/11/2006 11 N .." :::..: i \1'1 r--'. u <.f! j:- ;;:- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements DIVISION 15 ~ MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15014 BACKFILLING SECTION 15015 TRENCHING SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15100 VALVES SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPs/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS END OF DOCUMENT 00011 b- ~~ _\ /;-f ~ I ,?~, o "/:;/ '-;Y .:< (y\ - " ~ \' -// ,;, \, ";'~..,\/, I.Y ,j l", ~ {//~ ~.. 09- ~ ~ 2 /""...... \,,,..\ \ \-0, v \ /:. \Y 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ,~ ~~ --.:..., ~. . ., .:- -, -? '- ,..~ TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00011-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS NOTICE TO POTENTIAL BIDDERS; Notice is given hereby that the owner will receive sealed bids for construction of the above project until 2 pm, local Time, on January 31,2007. The Project is described in general as: a men's and women's restroom with attached open-air shelter and concrete path. The building structure consists of a slab on grade, CMU walls, and wood trusses with asphalt shingle roofing. The Work includes mechanical and electrical. Offers shall be on a stipulated sum basis for a General Construction Contract, including respective mechanical and electrical work; segregated bids will not be accepted. Bid Security in the amount of five percent of the bid must accompany bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bids will be received at: City Clerks Office, City of Iowa City, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240. Bids will be opened and publicly read aloud immediately after the specified closing time. Bids received after that time will not be accepted. All interested parties are invited to attend. EXAMINATION OF PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS: As many as 4 sets of printed Procurement Documents may be obtained by PRIME BIDDERS only from the Architect's office upon depositing the sum of $50.00 (refundable) for each set of documents. The deposit amount will be refunded within ten calendar days following bid opening, provided complete sets of documents in satisfactory condition are returned, postpaid, to: Neumann Monson Architects, 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240. Procurement documents may be examined on AE Plans website: www.aeplans.com. Any interested party may log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of documents will not be issued to prospective subcontractors and suppliers; however, printed sets or selected sheets/pages may be purchased through authorized printers (indicated on the website) for the direct cost of printing and postage. Related project information, including addenda, will be available only on AE Plans website; all interested parties, including PRIME BIDDERS must log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of Procurement Documents may be examined at: Neumann Monson Architects o ......~-~ :f:~Q -< f'o--..) C:.:i (::..~-"') 0> r:::J ;-'("1 N 11 r-- n 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Construction Update Plan Room 521 3rd Ave. SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 McGraw Hill Dodge Construction 474 First Avenue, Coralville, IA 52241 Dubuque Builders Exchange ('.'i ,- I t I (.-)~ .;::-~.... :'2.: )> :? ;.-.-, \...J w .c- ~ ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 001113-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 801 Cedar Cross Road, Dubuque, IA 52003 Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50309 Construction Update Plan Room 1406 Central Avenue, Box T, Fort Dodge, IA 50501 LL c) U,.J Q N<1Jlh Iowa Builders Exchange -". ~ b 25 West State Street, Suite B, Box 1154, Mason City, IA 50401 if~@ Builders Exchange .:""~.~ <'-- '.-.) ;.::520 - 24th Street, Rock Island, IL 61201 , , ~':- '--' ~ction Update Plan Room U :s-:: ~ ~12 Mulberry, Waterloo, IA 50704 c" t-'.. F.W. Dodge Corporation 939 Office Park Road, Suite 121, W. Des Moines, IA 50265 ,-' N CI .. ..::r f' , \ 1.--.' LL' :-.C 0- (',J -- -' Marshalltown Construction Bureau 709 South Center, Box 1000, Marshalltown, IA 50158 OTHER REQUIREMENTS -... Products and materials incorporated in the Work of this Project are Exempt from Iowa sales tax and local option sales tax. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond will be required in the full amount of the contract. Work required by the proposed contract shall begin upon ISSUANCE OF THE OWNER'S "NOTICE TO PROCEED"; the Work must be completed with all equipment placed in operation on or before the completion date noted on the contractor's bid form, subject to an extension of time which may be granted by the Owner. Provisions in Articles 73.15 through 73.21 of the Code of Iowa seek to provide opportunities for targeted small businesses to participate in the construction of this project. The Owner has established a goal of five percent of the bid price for certified small businesses. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive irregularity in the bids and in the bidding and to enter into such contract as shall be deemed to be in the Owners best interest. SITE ASSESSMENT: SITE EXAMINATION ...:... Examine the project site before submitting a bid. PRE BID CONFERENCE A bidders conference has been scheduled for 10 am on January 25, 2007 at the City of Iowa City. All general contract and subcontract bidders are invited. Representatives of the Owner and Architect will be in attendance. .-., ::- ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 1113 - 2 _._--_..._--~~.- , , Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID r...."-' C::::~"J Q c:.,.... ~'-...:. c.f" ~-~ Q ~- ---n ~-":'~ ,,- (''''~.\ \.. .' fv \-n -- --, ...::-...'...... -p ....-, ,- ::1': "J (, W '-:7':: -<:". ,..;::.'.- J:- "}:> &"" ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 1113 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 002113 -INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS See AlA DocumentA701 (1997 Edition), Instructions to Bidders, following this page. Modifications and additions to the provisions in the Instruction to Bidders are included in Section 002213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. -(<-) ~ :2:0, :.~ (":;:,:::> tf' {.~ en (J -<:..1 q}::.. :--;? ~ INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002113-1 {'0 -0 ...~.,:... ~- --n - -- I \\"\ ,----' \J '-P. :;;.- ~ .:"AIA DocumentA701N 1997 Instructions to Bidders for the following PROJECT: (Name alld location or address): Riverside Festival Stage Restrooms and Park Shelter Iowa City, IA 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 1 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AlA standard lorm. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard lonn lext is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin 01 this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AlA text. This documenf has importanllegal consequences. Consultation wilh an a"orney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modi'ication. THE OWNER: (Name and address): City of Iowa City, Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert SI. Iowa City, IA 52240 THE ARCHITECT: (Name alld address): Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College 51. Iowa City, IA 52240 TABLE OF ARTICLES o /0 ~;_:\ r--~ ;;? c~~ 0"' C:J r'."~ C) N -n ---- r- \Tl ,-1 ~_J \"" ,i [--- (--,:", . ~.. :,,-;', -0 :;:: (.)~-:'. ':- ,"~... ~,. ~ <-:? ..;:- &" AlA Document A70111l -1997. Copyright @ 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is protected by u.s. Copyright law and Internal/onal Treaties. Unaulhorlzed reproduction or distribution 01 this AJA- Document. or any portion of It, may resuttln severe cIvil and crIminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This documenl was produced by AlA software at 08:08:22 on 12/12/2006 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is nol for resale. User Notes: (2505700882) 1 ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS ~ 1,1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid fonn, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. ~ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A20l, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. ~ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions. deletions, clarifications or corrections. ~ 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. ~ 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. ~ 1,6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. ~J ~ 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials. equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. ~ 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. ~ 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS ! 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: ~ 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presenll y under construction. ! 2,1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. (-~" \...--"" . \'\'.:; \ ,.r'~.. \.Y ~ 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be perfonned and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Doc~ents. ~ ~ ~i~pe Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without :..::r eX~K5ii. - ';\\--? ",,: - '\ ' 46---ARTI~!t'f"pIDDING DOCUMENTS ci3.1 COJ~/ i1.1.1 ~ may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the ~?,erti~~r Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be r~ded to Iha'ders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten da~ter receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the dep6sTI. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. ,_I ALA Document A70111l-1997. Copyright @ 1970, 1974,1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 0' Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distributIon of th's AlAe Document, or any portion 0' It. may result In savere civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maxImum extent possible under the 'BW. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:08:22 on 12/1212006 under Order No.1ooo262440_1 which expires on 1 1/1/2007. and is noller resale. User Notes: (2505700882) 2 ~ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. ~ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 93.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. 9 3,2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 93.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted. shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors. inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 9 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids_ 9 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes ofthe Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 9 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS ~ 3.3,1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. r-:> 93.3,2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval h!!S been SS received by the Architect at least ten days priOT to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall inctYa.e the na~ of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the pTOposem€@..titut~. including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A sill(e1115~t ~ setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in1fi~ w()rk oN other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The bui~Q.proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or diS:rp1n-aval ~ a proposed substitution shan be final. -;--;~;) ~ -.:;j- /..... . . ~ 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set ~h in an ~ Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. -r\ - ,....--- :1\ ..-4 \_./ ~ 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. 9 3.4 ADDENDA ~ 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. . 9 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. ~ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. ~ 3.4,4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. AlA Document A701l11 -1997. Copyright @1970, 1974. 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American lnstitute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAf!J Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or dlstrlbUllon of this AJA- Document, or any ponlon ot It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:08:22 on 12/1212006 under Order 11Io.'000262440_' whicll expires on 1111/2007, and is nol for resale. User Notes: (2505700882) 3 ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES ~ 4,1 PREPARATION OF BIDS ~ 4,1,1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. ~ 4.1,2 All blanks on the bid fonn shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. ~ 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern. ~ 4,1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. ~ 4.1,5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." ~ 4,1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award ofless than the combination of Bids stipulaled by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. ~ 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal fonn of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shaH have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. . . !i 4.2 BID SECURITY !i 4.2.1 Each Bid shalJ be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful perfonnance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. ~ 4,2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AlA Document A3] 0, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in. fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ~c ~ 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. !i 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS ~ 4,3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. (-'\ '............ \\,: ---\ \ --;/ 0--'" ~ 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. ~. ~~3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. o ./.t) ~c- '~ff~ral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. 0-- ~ ~FICATlON OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID ~ ~ 4.~:I-'~!!td may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following ~~e ti~ate designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. ,. Documen~01TV-1997. Copyright ~ 1970, 1974. 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARN'NG: Th's Document Is protected by U.S. CopyrIght Law and 'nlernallonal TreatIes. UnauthorIzed reproduction or distribution 01 this AlAe Document, or 8~rtlon of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penal1tes, and wIll be prosecuted to ,he maximum extent possible under the law. This d~ent was produced by AlA software at 08:08:22 on 12/1212006 under Order No.1 000262440_' which expires on 111112007. and Is nol'or resale. User Notes: (2505700882) 4 .. ~ 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confrrrnation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time- stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. ~ 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. ~ 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS ~ 5.1 OPENING.OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. ~ 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. ......:> ~ 5,3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 's::;, ~ 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bi~s been 'd- submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the fun'd('$l]r.tijable~\ The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept~ Bi~ .e" which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. ':~, -'- -;.:, . ~C~~ ~ 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise s,e~ally~ provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base ~id'aifd -- Alternates accepted. ().;;::.. c..? .d-:- r" y ":&- -n -- - '".\\ "~J ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION ~ 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request. a properly executed AlA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. ~ 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. ~ 6.3 SUBMITTALS ~ 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products. and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. ~ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. AlA Document A701'" -1997. Copyright @ 1970, 1974, 1978. 1987 and 1997 by The American Instilute 0' Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING: ThIs AlAe Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 thIs AlA" Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software al 08:08:22 on 12/12/2006 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 1111/2007, and is nol Jor resale. User Notes: (2505700882) 5 ~ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ~- ~ 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND ~ 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS ~ 7,1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. ~, ~ 7.1,2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. ~7.1,3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. ~ 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS ~ 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. ~ 7,2,2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AlA Document A312, Perfonnance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. ~ 7,2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. ~ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents. the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document AWl, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. LL -:.' .-. 0- c.l o :;.r .,;., '0.- ~ ,.. ,,...). \-;;.> o ..J?, '2:" c'-..i 7i, \_~ --- "...-~... I \ --- \.\> \ -r /.,~ Cj'6 ~;r" .(' ,...... L,., i6-':~ <:), AlA Document A701111-1997. Copyright @ 1970. 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Inslilule of Archllecls. A'I rights reserved, WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Inlernlltlonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 Ihls AlA- Document, or 6 any portion o' It, may result In severe civil and crIminal peneltles, and will be prosecuted to the maxImum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08;08:22 on 12/1212006 under Order No.10D0262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (2505700B82) . Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL v .;'~O ",-- ::--, -Y7 ..~'.... r--' c/ 'Cr c?, "_:, \. ,....--,\ INTENT ' -\ C-;. ...0 -~j~ ~~- \ ~'" The following supplements change, delete from or add to "Instructions to Bidders", AIA/1-:;} c...:J Document A701, 1997 edition. Articles or portions thereof, which are not specifically ~rfiM, ~ deleted, or superseded hereby, remain in full effect. y ~ '" ~ ,-::;. ., '/"(\ .. \ -"". \_./ MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF AIA701-1997 Refer to ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS. Add the following subparagraph under 3.2 -INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS: 32.4 Conflicts or inconsistencies between referred standards, specifications, drawings or written instructions not clarified by Addendum prior to the date for receipt of Bids will not be construed as sufficient grounds for adjustment of the proposed contract sum. The Architect shall make the necessary clarification upon receipt of the appropriate written request. 3.2.4.1 Clarifications requested in writing by Bidders and received prior to 7 days before bid date shall be addressed in an Addendum. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. . 3.2.4.2 Direct questions to: Scott Palmberg, Neumann Monson Architects; tel~phone 319-338-7878. Add the following sub-subparagraph under 3.3 - SUBSTITUTIONS: 3.32.1 Make request for approval of substitute products on "Substitution Request Form" included at the end of this section. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form for each proposed substitution; verbal or written requests without completed Substitution Request Form will not be considered. The bidder is advised that vagueness of submittal, inadequate warranty, insufficient data and failure to meet project requirements may be cause for rejection of request. Approval is subject to later reconsideration at any time during the life of the contract. Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 3.4 - ADDENDA: 3.4.1.1 Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. Refer to ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES Add the following sub-subparagraph under 4.1 - PREPARATION OF BIDS: 4.1.8 Iowa Sales Tax Exemption. In accordance with provisions of the Code of Iowa and of the Iowa Administrative Rules, "Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates" will be issued for this project. DO NOT include Iowa sales tax or local option sales tax in determining the project bid amount. Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 4.2 - BID SECURITY: 4.2.2.1 Bid security shall be provided on the form of Bid Bond included in this Project Manual. 4.2.2.2 In-lieu-of a Bid Bond, the required bid security may be U.S. currency or a SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2213 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 cashier's or certified check drawn on an Iowa bank or credit union chartered under the laws of the United States and made payable to the order of Treasurer, City of Iowa City. 4.2.2.3 Attach bid security to the Bid in a manner to permit inspection of the bid security without exposing the Bid. Bids accompanied by improper bid security will be construed as "non-responsive" and will be returned unopened. Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 4.3 - SUBMISSION OF BIDS: 4.3.1.1 Bids submitted via mail shall be clearly marked: "SEALED BID FOR Riverside Festival Stage Improvements" Bids shall be addressed to: City Clerk's Office, City of Iowa City, 410 East Washington S1. Iowa City, Iowa 52240. 4.3.1.2 Attach bid security in separate envelope clearly marked: "BID SECURITY" with bidder's name and project name on the outside. Change subparagraph 4.4.1 under paragraph 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID, to read as follows: 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder for a period of forty five (45) days following the time and date designated forthe receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. Referto ARTICLE 6 - POST-BID INFORMATION Add the following sub-subparagraph under subpagaraph 6.3.1 : .4 The successful bidder, within 48 hours of receipt of "Owner's Notice of Intent to Award a Contract", shall provide to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors selected to perform work on this project. The Subcontractor list shall include each finns' name, tax identification number, and address. ;.- END OF SECTION '- "b ::r ~ ~ l'n ",:.:.;:- ';;? (1/) _ 1,.',""-- ,. ~/..... ()'6 -.-' , ../ L,- \.---:-2:. () "Z- 9 ......... (' ""',::, CY \ \" c::;. ,..... \. /c' t-\ 0/ \~ <;:~. c-' SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 002613 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS MAKE SUBMITTAL DURING THE BIDDING PHASE TO: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECT P.C., 111 East College St, Iowa City, IA 52240 BID DATE: REQUEST FROM: _'_'07. SPECIFICATION SECTION/TITLE: ,2007. DATE: ...-::: ~.(2, --7. ; Article/Paragra~t{--; \.;;c) -JC.~ -- - \_~.\ ___ h.J ~") -- ~ '':.2:~ ;., r":> c?, ';d- c:;:', IC) - r..:> ~ ~ ---\\ ~.- , ,- Description: \\"\ " .,.....--.. \_..J Proposed Substitution: v' .. Manufacturer: )7 ~ ..:- Trade Name: ; Model: ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS AND A TT ACHMENTS In submitting this Request, the Undersigned acknowledges and represents that: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Attachments: The following attachments are considered an integral part of this Request: Product Data, descriptions and specifications necessary for evaluation. Drawings necessary to indicate proper installation in the Work. Tests and Reports consistent with specified performance requirements. Samples: SUBMITTED BY: ,(Title) Firm name: Telephone: Fax: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 002613 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Reviewed by: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Date: 4. c-J o :.:r .,::. 0- -? ""-7 ',.(<- b r.(~ ~. -\ 1.,:,..,J, _,: .i / C)t-:--: - CJ ('-" . \ '\'--'--. U\ ::::'~.... \J- c-J - <-) \.., o ....P c:~:) C~::::.> ~.,..j ,- ..r:.L .0--';' b --- SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 002613 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 004113 - BID FORM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT - STIPULATED SUM THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES Q(; _o_~, y --) /.~ r' c::2 e{'- o ~ - r-J -\\ .---:::::: r '. ~\ :~\ \ /~,-'\ \...-J C). ...0 ":){. 0) .. TO (OWNER): FOR (PROJECT): DATE: City of Iowa City Riverside Festival Stage Improvements , 2007 (Bidder to enter date) \...'\ .. \ \ --;~~ '0,/' "':;;-/' .r_ y {- SUBMITTED BY: (Bidder, enter firm name and address below) BIDDER'S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: In submitting this bid, BIDDER acknowledges and represents that: BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents; BIDDER has visited the Place of Work and become familiar with the general, local, and site conditions; BIDDER is familiar with federal, State, and local laws, ordinances and regulations; BIDDER has correlated the information known to BIDDER, observations obtained from examination of the site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents and additional investigations,explorations, tests and data with the Bidding Documents; This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of an undisclosed person, finn or corporation; BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain an advantage over the OWNER; Contingency Allowance is included in the Bid Price. local and state sales and use taxes are not included in the Bid Price. BIDDER has received the Addenda indicated below, and all costs resulting from modifications to the Bidding Documents have been considered and included in the Bid Price. , Dated , Dated . Dated Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. BASE BID Having examined the Place of The Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by Neumann Monson, P.C. for the above mentioned project, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the Sum of: dollars ($ ). BID FORM 004113-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ALLOWANCES (Refer to Section 01 2100) BIDDER has included the following lump sum allowances in the Base Bid: Contingency Allowance (Lump Sum): $5,000. CONTRACT TIME If this Bid is accepted, Bidder will: Achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work before May 15.2007. ATTACHMENTS The following Supplements are attached to this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form: Bid security in the form of a as required by the Instructions to Bidders is attached to and made a condition of this Bid. Section 004513 - Bidders Pre-Bid TSB Contacts: Targeted Small Business Participation Form. ACCEPTANCE This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for forty five days from the bid closing date. ..~':"- .;1."",,,- 0.-- If 1!is bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will: -... --/, "?)Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award. ~"'_... \- i;~~~umish the required bonds within three days of date of execution of the contract. - "'\ t:-- (.j~mmence work within seven days of receipt of the Owner's written Notice to Proceed. (""J o :; r-\ '--, \ j.-. . \ ::...:~. U-- c-J --- .." ....- c., If thiS bid is accepted within the time stated, and we fail to commence the Work or we fail to ItS pro\ri6~e required Bond(s), the security deposit shall be forfeited as damages to Owner by ,,:reason i:Sf our failure. (,..-:;.) c-.l In the event our bid is not accepted within the time stated above, the required security deposit shall be returned to the undersigned, in accordance with the provisions of the Instructions to Bidders; unless a mutually satisfactory arrangement is made for its retention and validity for an extended period of time. BID FORM SIGNATURE(S) Firm name: Telephone: Type of business entity: , Fax: (Corporation, Partnership, Sole Proprietor). By: (Authorized signing officer, Title). END OF BID FORM BID FORM 004113-2 SECTION 004313 - BID BOND FORM OF BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE, (Firm Name) (Business address) (City, State, Zip Code) as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (Surety) /C.' 9,0 ~ =:::\ .- ...-..,---- ~.038 'C>" c;, .,--\\ \;..., "~ " . .....- ~ ...0 ~ ""'\\ \ ..-'\. \~.) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements u' .. ..' 'i;" y a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of hereinafter called the Surety, are firmly bound unto City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent (5%) of the total Bid, Dollars ($ ) as surety, in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we the said Principal and the said Surety bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, THE PRINCIPAL HAS SUBMITTED THE ACCOMPANYING BID FOR Construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified, within 45 days after said opening, and shall, within the period specified therefore, or, if no period be specified, within seven (7) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, enter into a written contract with the Owner, in accordance with the bid as accepted and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required for the faithful perfomance and proper fulfillment of the contract, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the obligee in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bonds required by the specifications and by law. In witness whereof, the parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by the undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of the governing bodies. Signed and sealed this (Witness) ,2007. (Title) (seal) BID BOND 00 4313 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r-\ \ L---...... I It \ u. N <;;:.) .. .;:r :IC 0- i --.~,: U- (Witness) (Surety) -.., 4:. N --". "'-, ....../ -;::-..... .c'C \.. } CL~- \.1-\",..:: ..--'/ r -j t:: '-.- 0 -,... ~:::. =:-r: O~ Q (...) 1..",,\ o ",.0 c.'} C:='=> c-.... (Title) ---,-~- 05.038 (seal) ......, BID BOND 00 4313 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 004513 - BIDDERS PRE.BID TSB CONTACTS SUBMIT THE LIST BELOW WITH THE BID FORM 05.038 BIDDER CERTIFIES THAT EVERY EFFORT TO SOLICIT QUOTES OR BIDS FROM TARGETED SMALL BUSINESSES AS EVIDENCE OF AFFIRMATIVE ACTION IN CONTRACTING WAS MADE. THE FOllOWING TSB'S WERE CONTACTED PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID PROPOSAL: TSB DATE QUOTE REC'VD QUOTE USED IN BID YES / NO YES/NO YES I NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES I NO YES/NO YES I NO YES/NO A list of Certified Iowa Targeted Small Businesses is available from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at the following website: http://www.iowai.netJiowa/dia/tsb/index,cfm, Bidder's name: (Print the full name of your firm) By: (Authorized signing officer) (Title) END OF PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS o <:" ::-.::: 0 J->:::; i ro........, C:J <:::> 0'", o :,"11 n --n j-n r---. '0 (-) -, :-::j C") .;-< r-- i-i'; ~2~ :<:: )> N ~ ~ .l:"" BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS 004513 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 005100 - NOTICE OF AWARD PROJECT: OWNER: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. ARCHITECT: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction ~ 2.n 4::.- '::..-: ):7 ~:.:2 TO (CONTRACTOR): ~-") 'c:? <G?- O ~--r1 , C""J - (~l \~- ~ - \~i ~~ 7) -;!<- t? ~~/' "'7 Y CONTRACT FOR: ARCHITECT'S RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby recommends that: The Bid submitted by (Contractor) has been reviewed and found, to the Architect's best information and belief, to be in compliance with procurement provisions for the designated Project. The contract sum of $ Base Bid: is determined on the following basis: $ I recommend that the Bidder's Offer be accepted and a Contract be issued for construction of the Project. Neumann Monson Architects P .C. By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID AND INTENT TO ENTER INTO A CONTRACT: The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Bid submitted by your firm pursuant to the procurement requirements of the above referenced Project has been accepted and a Construction Contract has been authorized in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents. By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF SECTION NOTICE OF AWARD 005100 - 1 --\\ ',-::::' \--\\ 'I................" ",-J ...- ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 005215 - AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF AGREEMENT The basis of Contract between the Owner and Contractor is: AlA Document A 107, Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Pr~jects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM, 1997 Edition. A copy of the form of Agreement is bound in the Project Manual following this page. 6 40 ~f;~~ ~~ r-.:> \::;:,:.) <~ c:r o r' c-; - (;} - ir\i 0i12 .....-:;::. /J,.,........ Z )7 AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS 005215-1 N -0 ?' \1 ,- i""'-- i '1\1 \-..-1 \-.J v:> .' ;:- c.Jl \.:: AlA Document A 107'" - 1997 Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Projects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a ST/PULA TED SUM AGREEMENT made as of the day of (It! words, indicate day, mollflt alld year) in the year ADDITIONS AND DELEll0NS: The author of this document has added information needed lor ilS complelion. The author may also have revised Ihe lexl of Ihe original AlA standard fonn. An Additions and Deletions Report Ihat notes added infonnation as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in Ihe left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where Ihe author has added 10 or deleted from the original AlA text. BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, address and other informatioll) City ofIowa City, Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert SI. Iowa City, IA 52240 and the Contractor: (Name, address alld other information) the Project is: (Name alld localion) This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. This Document includes abbreviated General Conditions and should not be used with other general conditions. Riverside Festival Stage Reslrooms and Park Shelter Iowa City. IA the Architect is: (Name, address and other illfonnation) This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College SI. Iowa City, IA 52240 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. o <::;: ','":J r:-...:> , , c:..~ c;:r-..... r-. ~,. ~./ '... ~1 :-:-, 1'1 (0) ~Tl fV f "- .... ..-...., ""7) --:'fC - T01 ' , ;.--' .........1 ,-.n ~~l5~ j; c.,.) CJ1 AlA Document A107T1l-1997. Copyright @1936. 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974. 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is protected by U.s. CopyrIght Law and International Trealles. UnauthDrlzed reproductIon or dlstrlbullon Df this AlAe Document, Dr any port'on of II, may resulttn severe chili and criminal penalties, and will be prDsecuted to the maxImum extent possIble under the law. This document was produced by AlA soltware at 08:11:44 on 1211212006 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on t 1/1/2007. and is not for resale. User Noles: (1349140836) 1 Inlt. ('-\ t...-", l\ '. .;:....-... \ --'< ...--" U- Inil. ARTICLE 1 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 2 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~ 2,1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement. if it differs from the dale of Ihis Agreement or, if applicable, Slale that the date will be fixed in a nOlice to proceed.) ~ 2.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. ~ 2.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of commencement, or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Allernatively. a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the dale of commencement. Vlzless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, inserl any requirements for earlier Substalllial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) ('J ..Q. c> :::: .:.-;,.subj~ rtlJdjustmenlS of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents (JJzserL}n;dVisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus paymellts for 1uly (o..;bp1eiion of the Work.) C'..1 '(.'.0 - t ") \ -::'- ..,-:( A~CLE~~RACTSUM . ~ i:bThe Owheishall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the CO~cl. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deletions as provided in the Contract Documents. ~ 3.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (Stale Ihe numbers or other idelltificalion of accepted allernates. If decisions Oil other alternates are 10 be made by the Owner subsequelll to the execution of this Agreement, auach a schedule of such other alternates showing Ihe amount for each and the date when thaI amount expires.) ~ 3,3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: Description Units Price ($ 0,00) ARTICLE 4 PAYMENTS ~ 4,1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS ~ 4,1,1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: AlA DocumentA107t11-1997. Copyrlgllt @1936, 1951,1958.1961.1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Instilute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.s. Copyright Law and Internadonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproductIon or distribution 01 thIs AlA- Document, or any portion ot It, mey result In severe civil and criminal penaltIes, and will be prosecuted to the max'mum extent possible underthe law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:11:44 on 12/1212006 under Order No.1doo262440_' which expires on 11/112007, and is nollor resale. User Notes: (1349140836) ~, 2 ~ 4.1.2 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the same month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. ~ 4.1.3 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of illlerest agreed upon, if any.) per annum (Usury laws and requiremellls under the Federal Truth ill Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and otller regulations at the Owner's U/ld Contractor's principal places of business, tile location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of tllis provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications, and also regarding requiremetl/s sucll as written disclosures or waivers.) ~ 4.2 FINAL PAYMENT ~ 4.2.1 Pinal payment. constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 17.2, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. ~ 4.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follow: Pinal payment, including 5% retain age, to the contractor can be made 31 days after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner, provided all documents listed in the General Conditions have been submitted. ARTICLE 5 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ~ 5.1 The Contract Documents are listed in Article 6 and. except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. are enumerated as follows: ~ 5.1,1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Document A107-1997. ~ 5.1.2 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated , and are as follows: Document C) ;~: C] ,. "l ~ 5.1.3 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Section 5.1.2, and are -.c~'follbws:c) (Either list the Specifications here or refer to all exhibit aI/ached to this Agreement.) C) --<, Title of Specifications exhibit: --- C2 Title Pages --n N ~ 5.1.4 The Drawings are as follows, and are. dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to all exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of Drawings exhibit: 1--' -, ;~~ :; -a ::-_l':: c.;? i ;-1 , ----1 ~__..J (Rows deleted) r- .... (..Jl (Rows deleted) AlA Document A1071V-1997. Copyright @1936, 1951. 1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 01 Arch"ec's. All rights reserved. WARNING: ThIs AlAe Document Is protected by U.s. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribUtion of this AlAe Document. or any ponlon 0111, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This docUment. was produced by AlA software al 08:11:44 on 1211212006 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007. and is not for resale. User Notes: {1349140836} 3 I nit. ~ 5.1.5 The Addenda. if any, are as follows: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 5. ~ 5.1.6 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List allY additional documellfs which are intended to form part of the Colltract Documents.) ,-.... l..-.-- "~ l \'; :J -",.",- LL IN Q <C GENERAL,"GONDIT/ONS ...:r V._ .;"', .;._ "-....J ~ICLE. 11, _.~eNERAL PROVISIONS 96.1 TH~oNJRACT DOCUMENTS ~ Conlr~d--9ocuments consist of this Agreement with Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and o~~r Co~tiO}ls), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, other dOt:tmenF=l.i~ in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. A Modification is (lt~ writleil ~endment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change D@tive or ~a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The intent of the Contract DOCdments is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; perfonnance by the Contractor shalJ be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as bcing necessary to produce the indicated results. ~ 6.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (l) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. ~ 6.3 THE WORK The tenn "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Projecl. ! 6,4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. ~ 6,5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for Inil AlA Document A107"' -1997. Copyr'ght @ 1936, 1951, 1958. 1961. 1963. 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American InstRule of Archilects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Lew and Intematlona' Treaties. Unauthorfzed reproducllon or distrIbution 01 this AlA- Document. or any portion 01 It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent poSSIble under the law. This documen' was produced by AlA software a' 08:11:44 on 1211212006 under Order NO.l0DD262440_1 which expires on 11/112007, and is nol'or resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 4 additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, suh-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Dra wings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 7 OWNER ~ 7.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 97.1.1 The Owner shall furnish and pay for surveys and a legal description of the site. ~ 7.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of infonnation furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. " 97.1.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents:1b; Owner shall secure and pay for other necessary approvals. easements, assessments and charges requir>Q; for the 'S- construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. 9~ O. <(2; ~':--i.:~~ ~ 97.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK ,. '" ...-:~. -;, If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract r(~me,nts, or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may iSS~I!"~. ....-:J:. written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order is elrmif}at~d; v' however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to ex<<fa)9" ';- this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. s':__-;.-' ....~ y ~ 7.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to perform a provision of the Contract, the Owner, after 10 days' written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. -(\ .--- .~- \ ---, \ ..',,..,....\ , ) 'l,._.../ ARTICLE 8 CONTRACTOR 98.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FiElD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 98.1.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as wen as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 7.1.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, omissions or inconsistencies discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for infonnation in such form as the Architect may require. 98,1.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design proFessional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 9 8,2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES ~ 8,2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention, The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall be fully and AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @1935, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1956. 1970, 1974, 1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architec1s. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproducllon or distribution of thIs AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and crimInal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA sol1ware al 08:11:44 on 12/12/2005 under Order No.loo0262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 5 Init. solely responsible for the jobsite safety thereof unless the Contractor gives timely written notice to the Owner and Architect that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe. ~ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. g 8,3 LABOR AND MATERIALS ~ 8.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. ~ 8.3,2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. ~ 8.3.3 The Contractor shall deliver, handle, store and install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. g 8.3,4 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. ~ 8.4 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear and nonnal usage. {--.. .c.-_J, t.\" ~8,5T~S ~ The C~actor shall pay sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes which are legally enacted when bids are . ;.rece~~ negotiations concluded. - Cf... --- ~ 8.6 ~S, FEES AND NOTICES j ,.6.1<Ub.'~, otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building \ ~t ~her permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and ::~' . C(QlJlpldi~ tSf;the Work. \..1-- \.-,-'. U Z g ",2 The ~ctor shall comply wi th and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful or~ of public authorities applicable to perfonnance of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner if the Drawings and Specifications are observed by the Contractor to be at variance therewith. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. ~8,7 SUBMmALS ~ 8,7,1 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve in writing and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. ~ 8,7.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Jnlt. AlA Documenl A107T1t-1997. CopyrIght @1936. 1951, 1958. 1961. 1963. 1966, 1970. 1974. 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American lnst~ule 01 Archi'ec1s. All rlghls reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is prOlecled by U.s. Copyright Law and InternaUonal Treatfes. Unauthorized reproduction or dlstrlbullon of this AlA- Documen1, or any portlon of II. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This documenl was produced by AlA software al 08:11:44 on 1211212006 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007. and is nOllor resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 6 ~ 8.8 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. ~ 8.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitling or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. ~ 8,10 CLEANING UP The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material. ~ 8.11 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees; shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer o!.~ manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Dra~~s, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect, unless the Contractor has re~ to believ:~ that there is an infringement of patent or copyright and fails to promptly furnish such information to ~~iteiiY\ ~~,.;. ';,..:; ...-- ~ 8.12 ACCESS TO WORK n..J- ,j ~~:~~~tractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress ~2~~~\ -::?: - \ ',." -;-<~):2/.:.. ~ 8.13 INDEMNIFICATION ';:"' l ~ 8.13.1 To the fullest extent permitted by Jaw and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not~ered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Secti6n 16.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 8.13. ''\\ .- -::....- \ ,.n "..........-'\ \_~ c.) .' I-- u"' ~ 8.13.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 8.13 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 8.13.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages. compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 9 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ~ 9.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract and will be an Owner's representative (I) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one- year period for correction of Work described in Section 17.2. ~ 9.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (I) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since In it. AlA Document Al07.... -1997. Copyright @1936. 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963.1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American lns1ilute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Internatlonal Trealfes. Unauthorized reproducllon or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portlon of It. may result In severe civil and crimInal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maKlmum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:11:44 on 12/12/2006 under Order No.10oo262440_1 which expires on 11/112007. and is not lor resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 7 these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. except as provided in Section 8.2.1 . ~ 9,3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perfonn the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors. or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities perfonning portions of the Work. ~ 9.4 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and of the Contractor's Applications for Payment. the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. ~ 9.5 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not confonn to the Contract Documents. ~ 9.6 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for confonnance with infonnation given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. ~ 9.7 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under. and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect will make initial decisions on all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor but will not be liable for results of any interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. ~ 9.8 The Architect's decisions on mallers relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. ,-\ \.--~' U..\ ~ 9.9 Dut~ responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall 'jot be-!78~ted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent ~aJJ n~Jinreasonably withheld. c... \'..J - fg,10 C~~.AND DISPUTES ~O.1 trai~, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to this Contract, including those ~ing ~if.e~.r or ~mission b~ t?e Architect but excluding those ari~ing under Se~tion ]5.2, shall be referred. lnW-alIy t(rffl~chllect for deCISIon. Such mallers, except those relatmg to aesthetIC effect and except those WaIved as ~videdf<t}l1 Section 9.11 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 dayt:ifter subIfilssion of the matter to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the ~itution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. :::::..,: lL- ~ 9.10.2 If a claim, dispute or other matter in question relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such matter may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the matter by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. ~ 9,10,3 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their disputes by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shaH be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. ~ 9.10.4 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to the Contract that are not resolved by mediation, except mailers relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Section 9.11 and Sections ]4.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association and shall be made within a reasonable time after the dispute has arisen. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with tnit. AlA Document A107"'-1997. Copyright @1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963.1966,1970.1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Insliluleol Archkects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document's protected by u.s. Copyright Law andlnJemaUonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproductIon or distribution of th's AlA- Document, or IIny portion of It, mllY result In severe cIvil and crIminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the 'aw. This document was produced by AlA soflware al 08:11:44 on 12/1212006 under Order NO.1 000262440_' which expires on 111112007, and is nol for resale. User Notes: (1349140836) .-. 8 applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Except by wrinen consent of the person or entity sought to be joined, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, any person or entity not a party to the Agreement under which such arbitration arises, unless it is shown at the time the demand for arbitration is filed that (1) such person or entity is substantially involved in a common question of fact or law, (2) the presence of such person or entity is required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbitration, (3) the interest or responsibility of such person or entity in the matter is not insubstantial, and (4) such person or entity is not the Architect or any of the Architect's employees or consultants. The agreement herein among the parties to the Agreement and any other written agreement to arbitrate referred to herein shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ~ 9.11 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, ~.." business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services 6rJ. such persons; and c> q damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compen~.ofj)r \'. \ personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit ) .- except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. C-.~ ,-J ;---- C ~ < r.\. ....-() This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's te~aptl{l -~:. in accordance with Article 19. Nothing contained in this Section 9.1 I shall be deemed to preclude an award-pf..,:}:~, ~? liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents~;?;" / ~~ .<- 0' y .1 .2 ......:;\ ~;;. --('\ \.--, ~) ARTICLE 10 SUBCONTRACTORS ~ 10.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. ~ 10.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of the Subcontractors for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. ~ 10.3 Contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall (I) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect, and (2) allow the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress afforded to the Contractor by these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS ~ 11.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under conditions of the contract identical or substantially similar to these, including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Section 9.10. ~ 11.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's activities with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. AlA Document A1071V -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951,1956,1961.1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. COpyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 0' this AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe clvtl and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA sohware at 08:11:44 on 12/12/2006 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is no\ for resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 9 Init. t 11,3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK ~ 12.1 The Owner. without invalidating the Contract. may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions. deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, or by written Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner and Architect. ~ 12.2 The cost or credit to the Owner from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties or, in the case of a Construction Change Directive, by the Contractor's cost of labor, material, equipment, and reasonable overhead and profit. ~ 12.3 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ~ 12.4 If concealed or unknown physical condilions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 13 TIME ~ 13.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor conflfms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for perfonning the Work. ~ 13.2 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 14.4.2. ('-"\ ....-. , \.~.\. \ - \..1.- ~ 13,3 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by changes ordered in the W~, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions not reasonably ~ anticiP.i!mble, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by other causes which the .' ArGh~~)Ietermines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such .::r reasbilabJe time as the Architect may determine, subject to the provisions of Section 9.10. .;~__ L:.-J, -;..::: v- .-:' ,./ ARTI~l~ PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ~4.1 ~19ATIONS FOR PAYMENT U4.1. ~~nts shall be made as provided in Article 4 of this Agreement. Applications for Payment shall be in a 't-t\n saliJa~y to the Architect. ....t" ,;..-~ ~ f.f"d.2 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims. security interests or other encumbrances adverse to the Owner's interests. ~ 14.2 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ~ 14,2.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Seclion 14.2.3. t 14.2.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to Init. AlA Document A107"'-1997. Copyright C> 1936.1951,1958.1961,1963.1966.1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Inst~ute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document's protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Intemallonal Trealles. Unauthorized reproductIon Or 10 dIstribution of thIs AlA- Document. or any portIon of It, may result In severe civil and crtmlnel penallles, and will be prosecuted to the maxImum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:11:44 01112/1212006 under Order No.l000262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is not'or resale. User Notes: (1349140836) an evaluation of the Work for confonnance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. ~ 14.2.3 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 14.2.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 14.2.1. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner f~ry loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions describe2Jn Sectio~ 8.2.2, because of: O. ~-.n _.:;:.:- ':;...--'. -;'~:7 _ \ -D .- ..~.. .,...- .1 defective Work not remedied; 0- third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims u~() security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; ::-- .',=,:\ failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materialr~-:i;::' -"- equipment; Y -- i--..J .2 ..-c ::;~ ..'t'" . \ \ \~"l (-) l.t' . . .3 ..- ..~ .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; ,6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~ 14.2.4 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. ~ 14.3 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR ~ 14.3.1 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. ~ 14.3.2 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law, ~ 14.3.3 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~ 14.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~ 14.4.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. Init. AlA Document A107111-1997. Copyright @ 1936. 1951, 1956. 1961,1963.1966,1970.1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is prOlected by U.S. Copyrlghl Law and Internadonal TreatIes. Unauthorized reproducdon or dlstrlbutlon of this AlAe Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe cIvil and crImInal penallles, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum eXlent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08: 11 :44 on 12/1212006 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 1111/2007. and is not for resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 11 I. ~ 14.4,2 When the Architect determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Architect will submit it to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. ~ 14.5 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT ~ 14.5.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions stated in Section 14.5.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. ~ 14,5,2 Final payment shall not become due until the Contractor has delivered to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this Contract or receipts in full covering all labor, materials and equipment for which a lien could be filed, or a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. (", l.....- ~ ~ \.J .- \ :::::~-~ ~ 14,5.3 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner except those arising from: c-J .&:l liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; o ';C:2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or :$ ,:t.;. '(J/ terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. _. ,---r__ """S-~\ - Oi 14,~~ptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a ~ivefof C(faJms by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at ~ time~~f:l Application for Payment. \J- A8iJCL~ ~OTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ~ \5:~ SAFET'FPRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS T~ontractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety or, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: r-- .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; ,2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons and property and their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 15.1.2 and 15.1.3, except for damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations or the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.13. Inlt. AlA Document Al07'" -1997. Copyright C> 1936, 1951, 1956. 1961. 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Instltu's of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document's protected by U.S. Copyright law and International Treaties. UnauthorIzed reproductIon or 12 distribution of this AlA. Document. or any portIon 0"1, may result In severe cIvil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maxImum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 08:11 :44 on 12/12/2006 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 111112007. and is not,or resale. User Noles: (1349140836) ~ 15.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ~ 15.2,1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, which adjustments shal~ accomplished as provided in Article 12 of this Agreement. / '::;:, o ..<:, ,,"\ ~ 15.2.2 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contr~9p.. 'C) Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and againSv-. ~ claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or result~.ffmp , performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodiIY~~'l?r :;1. death as described in Section 15.2.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage:-los~~ <.,;) expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death. or to injury to or destruction of tangible pr{Pit)f .;- (other than the Work itself), and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence 6!::a ~ party seeking indemnity. "}7 '< '~'\ \.~, ~.J ~ 15.2.3 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. ARTICLE 16 INSURANCE ~ 16.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located insurance for protection from claims under workers' compensation acts and other employee benefit acts which are applicable, claims for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, to property which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them. This insurance shall be written for not less than limits ofliability specified in the Contract Documents or required by Jaw, whichever coverage is greater, and shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations. Certificates ofInsurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. ~ 16.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. ~ 16.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE ~ 16.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall nol be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability insurance under Section J 6.1. ~ 16.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. ~ 16.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability insurance under Section 16.1. AlA Document A107'" -1997. Copyright @1936. 1951, 1958.1961,1963.1966.1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 0' Architects. All rlghls reserved. WARN'NG: This AlAe Document Is protected by U.s. Copyright Law and lnternadonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or dlslrlbutlon of this AlA- Document, or any portion of It. may resulltn severe clvll and criminal penaltIes, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possIble under the law. This document was produced by AlA sollware at 08:11:44 on 12/12/2006 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007, and is IlOlIer resale. User Noles: (1349140836) 13 tnit. t 16.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE ~ 16.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance on an "all-risk" policy form, including builder's risk, in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus the value of subsequent modifications and cost of materials supplied and installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 14.5 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 16.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub- subcontractors in the Project. S 16.4.2 The Owner shall file a copy of each policy with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. S 16.5 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION S 16,5,1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (I) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article II, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to Section 16.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in ArtiCle II, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, wriuen where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. ~ 16,5,2 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner. \ -:;::..:. """~ ARTICLE 17 CORRECTION OF WORK c--1 ~ 17 .tIThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the (..) reqtii~ents of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or _-r not~~ated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and -i(". insRf:Ji~iQDS and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the 'o--Cone(er-s expense. '0 c:t17.2"~!ia~Jion to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.4, if, within one year after the date of Substantial <,??mpt~~~ the Work or designated porti?n thereof ~r after the date f?r commencement of warranties established ijJUler Secuiij)) 4.4.2, or by terms of an apphcable speCIal warranty reqUIred by the Contract Documents, any of the ;;;-- . ~k is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it J;emptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. (\ \.~.'-', \ \. . ' ~ 17.3 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 7.3. In It. AlA Document Al0T"l-1997. Copyright @1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American lnslilule 01 Archilecls. All rights reserved. WARNING; This AlA- Document Is protected by U.s. CopyrIght Law and 'nternallonal Treaties. Unauthorlud reproducllon or 4 distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may result In aevere civil and crimina' penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum 1 extent possIble under the law. This document was produced by AlA software al 08;11:44 on 1211212006 under Order No.l0D0262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is nol/or resale. User Notes; (1349140836) ~ 17.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work fIrst performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. ~ 17.5 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work perfonnedjw the Contractor pursuant to this Article 17. CJ. . ~~:. (2- ;>/ -'. -.0" (~! .~-- ::=~ i;c:. - r \ .. '___1 SlC;: ,.;::- ~-. f(t C~) ARTICLE 18 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ~ 18,1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other. - -~n --....-- ..-..-- \ N ....~.'" _-J"'"'" ---,-""\ \ \\ '.--....-, \ ' ,-.j -0 ~ 18.2 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. <.:? Y" s:,.... <.J\ ~ 18.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shan bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. ~ 18.4 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD As between Owner and Contractor, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued: .1 not later than the date of Substantial Completion for acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion; .2 not later than the date of issuance of the fInal Certificate for Payment for acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to the issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 not later than the date of the relevant act or failure to act by the Contractor for acts or failures to act occurring after the date of the final Certificate for Payment. ARTICLE 19 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT ~ 19.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR If the Architect fails to recommend payment for a period of 30 days through no fault of the Contractor, or if the Owner fails to make payment thereon for a period of 30 days, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, tenninate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages applicable to the Project. ~ 19.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER ~ 19.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations 9r orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or ,4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. ~ 19.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have and after giving the AlA Document A107lW-1997. Copyright @1936. 1951. 1958.1961,1963.1966,1970.1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Instituteo' Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Documentls protected by US. Copyright Law and InternatIonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or 1 dlslrlbullon of thIs AlAe DOCUment, or any portion 0111, may result In severe civil and criminal penallles, and will be prosecuted to the maxImum 5 extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA soltware a1 08:11:44 on 12/1212006 under Order No.tOOO262440_1 which expires on 11/112007. and is not lor resale. User Notes: (1349140836) Init. ("", l--'--\ \ \ \ l-,} - \ ::::~: Inlt. Contractor seven days' written notice, terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incu~red by the Owner in finishing the Work. ~ 19.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 19.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. ~ 19.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 20 OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER (Signature) Terry Trueblood (Printed name and title) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) - C) :;s 'J(: 0- <l::( ~-~... ....../ ~/..-.... ;:;- "::,.!. t\.J, ..~ ,,1 --.-" , ,.~- O(~... .0 --- '-,- ~~, ~;~: 02 Cl \J-- (_1 \ ,..1 c? .....t? c' '{::.J AlA Document A1D7lV-1997. Copyright e 1936,1951,1958.1961,1963.1966,1970,1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Instijuteol ArcMecls. All rights reserved. WARNING: ThIs AJA- Document Is protected by U.S. CopyrIght Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproducllon or distribution of th,s AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may resullln severe cIvil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was procfuced by AlA sof\wale al 08:11:44 on 12/1212006 under Orcfer No.10oo262440_1 which expires on 111112007, and is not 'or resale. User Notes: (1349140836) 16 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 006500 - CLOSEOUT FORMS THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES SUBMITTED BY : RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, fA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: C'" -......:. ..,.-~.,.r} ~=-. --- ,;;-..; .>7 - , -y\ PROJECT: OWNER: TO (ARCHITECT): - ,."- - \'.) -0 -."" _...'CII>' , \ --;\ , -...-., \.J <-:? j:.- U' CERTIFICATES: INSURANCE CERTIFICATES (File with the Owner upon Notice of Final Completion of the Work.) In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit (in duplicate) the following certificates of insurance: Contractor's Completed Operations Insurance on ACORD Form 25-S. Required insurance coverages will be maintained in force for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion of the Work. CLOSEOUT FORMS: CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit two copies of the fully executed Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion form. CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, and upon satisfactory inspection to determine that the Work is sufficiently complete to permit the Owner to occupy and utilize the Work for its intended purpose, the Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion on AlA Doc. G704-2000 for approval and issuance by the Owner. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit two copies of the Contractor's Statement of Final Completion form. The following Supporting Documents are included with this Notice: _FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT (three copies) CLOSEOUT FORMS 00 6500 - 1 (", \--", '\ \ \ \ ~.". . ............i ~_.....- \.1. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 _AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AlA Doc. G706) _AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AlA Doc. G706A) _CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AlA Doc. G707) _'NSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Fonn 25-S). OWNER'S CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK Upon recommendation from the Architect that the completed Work be accepted and that final payment be made, the Owner will notify the Contractor of the effective date of acceptance of the Work. In accordance with Iowa law, final payment will be made after 31 days following effective date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. END OF SECTION - <:;.) ~ L ~.- ~:~-- 0- '--" \~) c-.l -..-... , . '. ........ ~: \..~ '.--=: -.c.- 0'2 o ;;;-- -~ ~' c'\ c.;; ..-, cs; 'l.'-J CLOSEOUT FORMS 00 6500 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 006513 - CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg. (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: OWNER: TO (ARCHITECT): FROM: COMPLETION DATE: ,2007 q. A...,. 0 .,,:.~- /,'.'. -Y' .:,. ~? 0:...,' ,"if. ,.-, .\~\ ~) '. .-r\ .......~ - ~ '1:J _,..J' ...).-;;lJ' ..,..... \ J.~ 1.._) v' .' ..- A~ .r;..~~." <'-- Y DECLARATION AND REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As of the above date, the construction of the Work of the above Project has progressed sufficiently that the Project (or designated part thereof) can be occupied by the Owner and utilized for its intended purpose. We understand that occupancy and use of the Work designated as substantially complete shall not constitute Owner acceptance of the Work or portions thereof. The Work to which this Declaration of Substantial Completion applies includes the following: CONTRACTOR'S PRE-INSPECTION AND INITIAL PUNCH LIST: In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, We have conducted an inspection of the designated Work for conformance with the Contract Documents. A comprehensive list of incomplete work and items needing correction includes the following: CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 00 6513 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 (....., t__...." U\ \ ,_ , .c::( "'-'"'" --.. ::r !~? ~ :z= ~_.~\ 0- ~;-__~~, (~= ~ \=-~ (3 c) \~ <1 ~ ,---- ,- ~:;,.~)--c:J ~ ..0 0 ~~:.-~- l"'~~ lL. We understand that failure to include an item on the above list does not alter Our responsibility to complete all Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. The above items will be completed or corrected within _ days of the date of this Notice. Please schedule and conduct the Architect's inspection as required to verify the status of the Work. ATTACHMENTS: We have attached evidence of Inspection and Acceptance of the following Authorities having Jurisdiction: CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 006513 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Building Inspector: Fire Marshal: Y N -- Y N -- Y N SUBMITTED BY: (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF DOCUMENT 9,., 0 ;; ':oj. c' /. _., C".) C _~"i_ N .:..-...... CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 00 6513 - 3 -n , r......- -a ::<. 'i? r.- <.J'\ ...-r-' , \ \ , _",,",..~'t <.J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 006515 - CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE OWNER: City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. TO (ARCHITECT): NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 EastCollege Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg /:~ o .< (J -':....- ::;;...."" '~)-'/ ~i~_ ro,' - -, ~~~ C'. '::..) .. -- ~ -(\ ...--- "-t,'~ \-\\ , /\ \._) CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction () /0, ~::::::\ ":'~ :::::.... \~r\ .-....-.....\ .- :-~,-' (0)' :./_ .... ~/ I .:-.-." ..c.':-- -<) ::~ SUBMITTED BY: 0) .' J:.- c.f\ y ,2007 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION: We, the undersigned, do hereby certify that: The Work provided pursuant to the Contract Documents for the above Project has been inspected and determined to be complete and in compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The following Supporting Documents have been fully executed (in duplicate) and are included with this Statement: _FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT _AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AlA Doc. G706) _AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AlA Doc. G706A) _CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AlA Doc. G707) _INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Form 25-S) (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) ARCHITECT'S RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby states that: The Work performed by (Contractor) under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Architect's best knowledge, information and belief, to be in substantial compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The Certificate for Final Payment is a complete and accurate summary of the Work CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION 006515-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all changes and modifications thereto. The total cost of the Work as completed is $ I recommend. under the provisions of the Contract Documents, that the Work be accepted and that final payment be made. Neumann Monson Architects P .C. By Date (Authorized Representative) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: (Title) The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Work perfonned by pursuant to the above referenced Contract is accepted and final payment has been authorized in accordance with provisions of the Contract. By Date (Authorized Representative) END OF DOCUMENT (Title) ~t L-L -~_." .c._..... >:<~ fj C~, ::;- ',-_.-3, -:~_:: ---< (~._.. c' 'e,) - o ~ ('\ \........-.'.. ~ \\.. \ , \ ~:~,:- c--1 -- \...\ .- ,-*. C_'\ \.......... ...::,i._~ \5 ~fs ;;;.- ~~ -, {c:,~ CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION 00 6515 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 007315 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) INTENT ~:, These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the "General Conditig!:lS" inclUftQd in the Abbreviated Fonn of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Docu~M10??\ --\\ 1997 Edition and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below;~fI!.t:\ C) '::::::: provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and eft(~e. ~ \_-(\ MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF AlA DOCUMENT A107, 1997. ;.~~:~ ~ \\~j REFER TO ARTICLE 6 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 'C} Add the following subparagraph under paragraph 6.5: .~ 6.5.1 Copies of the Drawings and Project Manual returned after Bidding will be furnished, free of charge, to the Contractor for use during the construction of the Work. The Contractor may secure additional copies of Project Manual and Drawings from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for reproduction and handling. Add the following paragraph to Article 6: 6.6 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS: v:J .' ;;,- <.JI Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems fanning the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. Provide: To furnish or supply, plus install complete in place, tested and approved. Furnish or Supply: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and ready for use. The tenns "approved," "required," and "as directed" reterto and indicate the work or materials that may be approved, required, or directed by the Architect acting as the Owner's representative. The terms "shown," "indicated," "detailed," "noted," "scheduled," and terms ot similar import, refer to requirements contained in the Contract Documents. REFER TO ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR Add the following subparagraphs under paragraph 8.5 TAXES: 8.5.1 Iowa Sales Tax Exemption. In accordance with provisions of the Code of Iowa and of the Iowa Administrative Rules, "Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates" will be issued for this project. Do NOT include Iowa sales tax or local option sales tax in detennining the project bid amount. The successful bidder, within 48 hours of receipt of "Owner's Notice of Intent to Award a Contract", shall provide to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors selected to perfonn work on this project. The Subcontractor list shall include each firms' name, tax identification number, and address. 8.5.2 Using information provided by the successful bidder, the Owner will apply to SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance for 1) Authorization Letters and 2) Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates, to be issued to the Contractor and each Subcontractor. These documents may be used by the Contractor and designated Subcontractors to purchase materials and products for this project free of sales/use tax and local option taxes that might otherwise apply. Samples of these documents are attached at the end of these Supplementary Conditions. Delete the following from the first sentence of subparagraph 8.13.1 under paragraph 8.13 INDEMNIFICATION: "and to the extent claims, damages, losses, or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 16.3" REFER TO ARTICLE 12 - CHANGES IN THE WORK Delete paragraph 12.2 and substitute the following: 12.2 Adjustment to the Contract Sum resulting from a change in the Work shall be based on mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. The lump sum shall include the expenditures and savings (net cost) of those performing the Work attributable to the change plus a percentage fee for overhead and profit and subsequent markup(s). Expenditures and savings (net cost) attributable to changes in the Work shall be limited to the following: 1) cost of labor, including social security, unemployment insurance, fringe benefits, and workmen's compensation insurance; ......,- ...-? (':;;~.) ,.......... 2) cost of materials, supplies and equipment including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; 3) rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; and 4) cost of field supervision directly attributable to the change, and 5) costs of premimum increases for bonds and insurance; and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work. In case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an allowance for overhead and profit determined as follows: 1) Fee for overhead and profit for those performing the Work attributable to the change is fifteen percent of the sum of 1),2), 3), and 4) above. 2) The Contractor shall be allowed to add a five percent fee to the cost of change order work performed by a subcontractor. 3) A subcontractor shall be allowed to add a five percent fee to the cost of change order work performed by a sub subcontractor. If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment to the Contract Sum based on the method provided in paragraph 12.2, using reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. REFER TO ARTICLE 13 - TIME .<:'( --~ .e_.,.. ,<- C) CL..-=-- \. \ - \.--.--~ -:-~....- - o r' . 1 1-." \.U o. '\ ,. ..::r :;.:' L:- u- c.) ',.I c~ .'.-,~\G \. '.~"; ::.[; u:::::- o .-' C".J -,,,- - Add the following subparagraph under paragraph 13.1 : SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 13.1.1 Contract Time is identified in Section 00 4113 - Bid Form. REFER TO ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add the following to the end of subparagraph 14.1.1: The Contractor shall, before the first application, submit to the Architect a "Schedule of Values" of the various parts of the Work, aggregating the total sum of the contract, made out in such form as the Architect may direct, and if required, supported by evidence as to its correctness. This schedule, when approved by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing applications for progress payments. Payments under this contract will be made monthly, by the Owner, to the extent of ninety-five percent (95%) of the value of the Work performed, including materials stored in approved locations at the construction site as certified by the Architect. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for review and approval, an application for each payment on AlA. Form G702 and G703 and, if required, receipts or other vouchers from subcontractors showing the Contractor's previous payment to them for materials and labor. Applications shall reflect the valuation of work completed and materials suitably stored at the construction site through the date of the ~ Application. Payment shall be made by the Owner within 30 days aftepthe '(;~. Application for Paym~nt i~ received by the Architect providing the con~~~ .,C;; ~-\) format of the application IS found to be complete and acceptable by the-Arehltect..- .. .- and all work covered by the current application is detennined to be com~f~:~nd ~ c\"\ acceptable. '-: \:: ~ ~'-. , -". ~ -="'" Add the following to subparagraph 14.5.2: -;::;1,;, c.,.).. ~? /' ~- In accordance with Iowa Law, Final Payment, or remaining retainage (5 pe~nt of Cf" the Contract Sum), shall not be released until at least thirty-one (31) days arrer completion and final acceptance of all Work of the Contract by the Owner. The Final Application for Payment shall not be certified by the Architect until such time that all requirements of the Contract have been fully met, and required Contract Closeout documentation (including Final Lien Waivers and Sales Tax Reporting Forms) has been submitted and approved. REFER TO ARTICLE 16 - INSURANCE Add the following subparagraphs under paragraph 16.1: 16.1.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until all insurance required under this article has been obtained and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor commence work under this contract until similar insurance for all subcontractors has been so obtained and approved. Such policy or policies shall become effective at the commencement of the work and shall remain in force for the full period of construction and until approval of final payment is made for the completed project, unless a longer period is specified herein for a specific coverage. .1 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the Owner. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance shall set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self insured retention. .2 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are cancelled or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 - Q .' ..::r ,--\ "l_- . \.. ., _..1,,0" " I ---- . _._~..-r"' .,- ,&1'._ 0- ('J -- u- C,), L,~ c.:J ....;? C' ~"..-:~, c-...l modified, or in the event that the Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the Owner may at their discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 16.1.2 Prior to start of construction, submit to the Architect for review and forward to the Owner for approval, Certificates of Insurance as evidence of compliance with the following minimum insurance requirements for the project. The Certificates shall be ACORD Fonn 25-S and AlA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S. Furnish copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. .1 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. .2 Except for Workers' Compensation, Contractor's insurance policies shall name the Owner, the Architect and their Agents as additional insureds. 16.1.3 Contractor's liability insurance shall be written on an "occurrence" basis; insurance coverage shall be not less than the following: .1 Workers' Compensation: Statutory. .2 Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Products and Completed Operations; Contractual Liability; and Broad Form Property Damage ): Combined Single Limit: $2,000,000 each occurrence. Fire Damage: $250,000 on anyone fire. Medical Expense: $10,000 on anyone person. Personal Injury: $1,000,000 each occurrence. General Aggregate: $2,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to this Project only. Products and Completed Operations: $1,000,000 aggregate; maintain for one year after final payment. .3 Contractual Liability: Same limits as general liability. .4 Personal Injury with Employment Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 aggregate. .5 Comprehensive Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): Combined Single Limit: $1,000,000 each occurrence. .6 Umbrella Excess Liability: $5,000,000 over primary insurance. Delete Paragraph 16.3 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE in its entirety. 4. \..~- (=:) 'J"" \',-: .t"~.(_ O'~ o -.'- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315- 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Refer to Paragraph 16.4 - PROPERTY INSURANCE Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 16.4.1: .1 Builder's Risk property insurance provided by the Owner shall not cover any tools, appratus, machinery, scaffolding, hoists, forms, staging, shoring, and other similar items commonly referred to as construction equipment, which may be on the Site and the capital value of which is not included in the Work. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for any insurance he may wish to have on such construction equipment. .2 The Contractor shall pay the DEDUCTIBLE for each Claim made against the Owner's Builder's Risk policy. The deductible amount is $1,000. REFER TO ARTICLE 20 - OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS Add the following paragraph to Article 20: 20.1 BONDS 20.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as follows: Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond on AlA A312. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond on AlA A311. 20.1.2 Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT (2 ::::: 0 . ::..~ , ,0. C-:7 ,";1 C-) \l N -0 ::iC 0) ':-tl \ . j ~,-,- .~; 1.,__) .r:- CT\ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A 107 (1997) 007315.5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1,01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Riverside Festival Stage Improvements. B. Owner's Name: City of Iowa City, Iowa. C. Architect's Name: Neumann Monson Architects, Iowa City, IA. D. The Project consists of the construction of a men's and women's restroom with attached open-air shelter. Also included is a concrete pedestrian path. 1,02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION c' ;'~Q ri"1 _--r.., ~,_~) 5~-~ <"" )> 05.038 c::J r't C') -Tl \._- ..: N ,-n -0 ,----1 ~__..J w .r.- 0"\ SUMMARY 011000- 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 012000. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL r~ ~ '2r G' \~- -:: 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Q n :;;~. ::-!, A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments::' -___.2. S. Change procedures. ...- ,..:> -(\ -:::::- \--\ , \ \-......-....) \_J 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS -;:-:---l '-/"/ Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period~ monetary values of unit prices. Y' ~ -~ A. v' .' s.- t$' B. Document 00 5215 - Agreement with General Conditions. C. Document 00 7315 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AlA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Present required information in typewritten fonn. C. Fonn: AlA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AlA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. D. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. E. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. F. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. G. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. H. Include the following with the application: 1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 2. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 1,05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AlA Form G710. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 - o .' .::r (.., , . J ..-~"'\ \ L,,-,. :~,... 0- - -- u- Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. . Promptly execute the change in Work. Proposal Request: Architect may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifica~ions, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 7 days. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 4. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. ,/ :~~ c. Overhead and profit. (-,~ '::~ d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. \... . I. ::--e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. (ZJ '~~upport each claim for additional costs with additional information: -r (~. Origin and date of claim. \,~ :~~ Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. U 1:; Time records and wage rates paid. ~ Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AlA G701. B. c. D. E. F. N - l;...J ".J C:::.> H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1,06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements END OF SECTION 05.038 Q ;~~~-J. - (}, r-"' L:? c.':::> Cr c? ;" C--j ~- N -0 :::~- :>- PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 - 3 --1\ ....,,"'''\ Ii ..--"\ \,j <.? $0- (1' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT- USED PART 3 EXECUTION Q ~';~. C..J 1",.1 C) -\\ 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, , and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. - .,.-- .--) - - ~(-~) ~~~~-\ - --.,! r' --\:~"'-, ....-::.:.. /.... "':':;;.0 -'- y N -0 ~ ~ .~\ ~ \ . ..,.\ \_,i c.f! $-- 0' D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect. Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, . Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW r-'\ \.....,...,'~.-'.1 0,', A. ~hen the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: -0 -;.t Product data. ::r :!-: t Shop drawings. _ O:;:-K - Samples for selection. c: '>-{~_,samples for verification. ~.."...~ I' ' c::h. ~I(~t t? Arc::hitect for review for the limited purpose ~f checking for confonnance with :;:::;-:- ~\ 1~~t1on given and the design concept expressed In the contract documents. \j..- ~ sam~s will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. c~ o:....l After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for infonnation: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 taken. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. -~o :::,:~-:.:: .-~.~: ~, \:-::::-> (>;} c.,',..... o r'" C") -\\ ,.-- -;r-- B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS Irj '-- .~....\ - r'" ....-.. '\ A. Documents for Review: _ .'-'n 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of"tpp)es <.? which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Arc~ct. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. -0 ~ .-\ (\ , .__-1, \....1 ;.- 0" C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AlA Form G810. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Project identification sign. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. '6 %0. ~)7 -:2. ~ ~ cr" ~~"" 'C"j -\\ .~:::: - ~ (;,(~> :'::\)\ ~(<-) ....-;- ..._..<:~ i' ~-:'-::I' .-::- y .-(1 ?- . '''\\ .....-i \-...., <-? :;;.~ d"' B. Existing facilities may not be used. C. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. S. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 ~ 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. Existing parking areas located at site may be used for construction parking. 1.08 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.09 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION. NOT USED END OF SECTION ( " \......., '-. \.>,., \ ........-' ~ c...\ ........- (~ 'c? fk ~..l LL -%- -~C/, ~J'" ,," ,. \-.... - \),,\ -:,/ <~\::::: v (J ~.t.:.- oi/:'~ '''''-;: -7 O"Z 9- ,........- o :::r ...c.- 0-- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1,01 SECTION INCLUDES qeJ ~~::~ :=:=\ / ..----.. r-' % <:?~ .,.......-1 ~~\ A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling. storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. --- r..:> ----0 ./'" ...-- , ..'\ -\ \ ...-'1 \ ) '.~~ r~) '. . C" ::.-\ .> ::::~~J\ ~ ',_~ r- Z y ,,0 ~" r..? [,:" 6' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications. no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.02 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts. maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. .A:romptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities o :!fe correct, and products are undamaged. :;r E6:};;bvide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, C.:" z: \~igUrement, or damage. \J,; \ ~. -A-rrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically _...:- "teasfble. -- ,---- ~-::;;." D.--3.0:clnol?.<Gi; AND PROTECTION ...P ;;;-- c~';.\ ~ Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION 6 :::-;;0 .r:._.__ .::;...---, ~=r? --"'; ~-' ''6> o~ o r""'"1. \.~-) n "::.-'-, - ,...., -r\ ~-- ", .-,-- --) -0 \\\ \ -~_.."\ .,_J -,;::"" ,." ' -;::::, -::!-:<~ '--c /' L..,. ...:- c.? :;.,,- y cJ' PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ,:l rg~ cr q o. ~;?, ""-:;... ;:.--, ,;:-, -r.' ::::. - ~ (~c: _ / ( ..-0, ;'"~- (\ . :>-""' -- '-:>~ (~/ ~?~~ ..:-"" .-.- y --i\ --- '..c- A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Surveying for laying out the work. C. Cleaning and protection. D. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS , -\ . .'\ . ---' '.-",) <.P. r-- C5' A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Iowa and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ducts. and conduit. as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated. conceal pipes, ducts. and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3,01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. ('-" \''---- \. U.>, \ ......-'. ;...-- 0,- 3,02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. .6- ~03 LA~G OUT THE WORK .' ':?: D :;. A'{;J1~:Jfy locations of survey control points prior to starting work. .~ B. '(~~Ptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. ~ ..-' ~,. ~. ~~t survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference \~S pQ.i)l~Uring construction. ~, Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation c"'required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and layout by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil place~ent; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and . . ~ 2. Grid or axis for structures. .~ 0 c;?, --\\ 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and -'- ~. \c-; .-:;:::. :y. j:' - H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. (2 (,-, ~ _....\- '<-":./ ...-0 I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses;. \~~. -:J!- 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS '0.::').:. ~# Z d' A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturEiPS instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. .-n .."............., "_.J B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3,05 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3,06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.07 ADJUSTING EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.08 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not bum or bury. 3.09 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. D. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. E. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. F. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. END OF SECTION .,............. (' ...r, '\ V\ 6., --" ~- IV -:::< r '->;' '\ -,:; .i;/,~ \,,)/\ (/" ;< r '<'''~ '\.,'~_. cv ../ L--' c-l -./ 6- ~<6~ // .,) n /' '(? ;" 0.... ..P, .;:>;.., 'i? ~ .~ EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents. ---:::. Qo ,,:-::----. -YJ ~2.. f"'.:) ~ 0'" (:;:) ~:;.., ~ . PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES B. Operation and Maintenance Data. - \.:> ....0 ::~ -\\ .~ .,.,. \, ....""' . \ \ \/'. , I ',../ " . '-<\ C', /'(".. ./- /. .....-::: \;'\:~: q-:'i- .....'" 1,02 RELATED SECTIONS Y A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Warranties and bonds. <-? .,.."" ..~ B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1 . For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 3. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field Changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION ~ .~ b- /Z: --1....0... "....:/ ,,/ u...." - \,..\,/\7 /\ .,/ .;:"....\~~, ,-,j c/ ~::. ("\ '0' \.............- \ \.\) \ -::;/ ~.~ ~ '.r ( ___ (/' L_, ~ . ___--7 v' D "/:. \~ t) {t? V' ,,,-oil CLOSEOUT SUBMITI ALS 01 7800 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage - RR and Shelter 05.038 SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1,01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Elevated concrete slabs. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete foundation walls and footings, E. Concrete reinforcement. ---::::: 9;.0 ~;..- ;;.---':, --y;~ ~: r"::> c;;! '?f- e:::', ,;' Ci .- r-:J ---\\ ...-::;:;. ';\,\ ~~, ~...........,\ \...",,,-" (..--) -'. <)~/ ::-- \'.' .- ""() (~~ ~/~-'" 4 ,&-.- Y ,j ~ c.? ~ 6' F. Joint devices associated with concrete work. G. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033513 - High-Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; 1990 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. D. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. F. ACI305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. G. ACI306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. J. ACI 347 - Guide to Fonnworl< for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. K. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. L. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. M. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. N. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. O. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage - RR and Shelter 05.038 P. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete: 2005a. a. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. R. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. S. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. T. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. U. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. V. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. W. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filier for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. X. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI301 and AC1318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 FORMWORK ("\ '~;.\ \ ' \>. " \ --.. ....-' 0-~ A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of AC1117. 4- <8 B. ~rm Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand :;r 1? ~Ydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. ...,.-:.(C)~_: Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Steel. 'c-r~t::: Earth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations c-.l ':: _ Othat maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms. -, ~ :~orm Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with <c~ 0 ~lication of coatings. . ~ 4. F6rm Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. ~ 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Flat Sheets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage - RR and Shelter 05.038 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6. 3. Wire Gage: W 4 x W 4. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1- Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. Q :2;.0 .---- ;.--, -J' -:2_ ~-,., c;.'" t.~:;:.'" 0""" C'\ r\ (-) - ~ ,.-\\ -? \ .,'\,\ '. _.........~..'. \..) .~ '':::'~"\(-':i -~ <":, _M \. \.. -<J'>;~ ( ..../-... .... ,/ /" .,e;:.,,7 1.-- .-.:l ~ t? :::- 6' y B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: See Section 07 B. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. C. Chemical Hardener: See Section 03 D. liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309. Type 2, white pigmented. 1. Acceptable Products: 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. S. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Cement Content: Minimum 525 Ib per cubic yard. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 3. Total Air Content: 5 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage - RR and Shelter 05.038 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify proper installation of vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. 3,02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. --~-" --. LL D. Repair damaged vapor retarder; comply with requirements in Section 07 _' E. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap jOints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. ~3 1~~LLlNG REINFORCEMENT -::- ACe ~ply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and ~ ,'~~urately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete ~ , (:c~rage required for protection. \.- lj :, B.(~~J1 welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both 'EJ c:aK~tions. Splice laps with tie wire. ~~. ve~ that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are (-J accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. (.-..." '1.--..1 1\ \. l_..l--" 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. E. Separate interior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with approved bond break material. F. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. H. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. I. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. J. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold jOints to occur. K. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. l. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 1/8 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. M. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 3/16 inch in 10 ft. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage - RR and Shelter 05.038 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of Section 03 3513. D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces unifonnly to drains at 1:100 nominal. ~-- 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION B. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. ~ Maintain concrete wi~h minimal moisture loss ~t relatively constant temperature for ~oe~' necessary for hydration of cement and hardemng of concrete. ::17 :':' 1. Nonnal concrete: Not less than 7 days. ,/ .~:. --., 'c,,-, .;;::> ,,;)" o "n ~-; A. - r-J --;\ ...--::. ,,,,,- \ --\\ --' C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. ;.c--.. ..." ~ .~/ 3,07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL '8-- ?) -;:;;:.. t? Z' Provide an independent testing agency to perform field quality control tests, as specified iny. Section 014000. ... (p A. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with testing agency. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure confonnance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perfonn one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3,08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 033513 - HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING ~ cg.. (;J (',..... C> /' '" ---\) .~_/ '"/'\\ , _/~\ ...0, \..J ~.. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finishing slabs on grade and monolithic floor slabs. 'Q~ :-rr" ~:. ~:'.'\ ""7 ~=.l ,,----I " "( . .;/)'(:... ~r<' - \...-cl. ~\":-.;. {--j;' I - ,,?- A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive tmfsh. t? r; 0' B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices. C. Section 03 3900 - Concrete Curing. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on concrete hardener and sealer, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing. B. Take appropriate precautions to prevent staining of concrete floor surfaces; Since no satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum and rust stains from concrete, comply with the following: 1. Cover and protect floor surfaces from damage and staining during the construction period. 2. Ensure that construction equipment, particularly components that may drip oil, hydraulic fluid, and other liquids, are provided with suitable diaper. 3. In addition to diaper, equipment such as pipe cutting machines shall be placed on suitable drop cloths. 4. Do not permit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033513 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above the floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished. B. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. C. Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS ~ (--" L__"",J I \ " t_--.; .. ..:1' ::c 0- A. Chemical Densifier I Hardener: Penetrating, liquid type. 1. J3asis of Design: "Liqui-Hard" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Other approved products: a. "Day-Chern Sure Hard" (J-17) manufactured by Dayton Superior Corporation: ~ www.daytonsuperior.com. .c ~?~ Z; "Sonneborn Kure-N-Harden" manufactured by Degussa Building Systems I Ll-; .-.:- Chemrex: www.chemrex.com. \ ...u _ ~_....J k- "Euco Diamond Hard" manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company: e) 1::::, www.euclidchemical.com. C.:d-;;. "L&M Seal Hard" manufactured by l&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: t5 :-~: www.lmcc.com. eg Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. N o o u- c~ I _t) o ,../? C';'" c:.-' PART S-::'EXECUTION 3,01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the wOrk of this section. 3,02 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R to achieve the required "flatness". B. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or terrazzo finish system. C. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting or resilient flooring. D. Steel trowel surfaces that are scheduled to be exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces within 2 feet of drains unifonnly to drain at 1/8 inch per foot nominal. 3.03 CURING A. Begin initial "moisture curing" of floor surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03 3900 - Concrete Curing, as soon after final troweling as concrete is firm enough to work on. B. Exception: Do not "moisture cure" concrete scheduled for application of chemical hardener; follow manufacturer's recommendations for initial curing. 1. As soon as concrete is hard enough to walk on, apply one even coat of curing compound and hardener; follow manufacturer's directions. Use "MED-CURE" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 3,04 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Preparation: 1. After initial curing (7 days minimum), measure floor surface to verify levelness and HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033513 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 flatness complies with required tolerances. 2. Polish and clean floor surface: a. Using a heavy commercial floor burnishing machine equipped with an abrasive pad (3M or similar type pad), thoroughly polish floor slab until smooth surface, free of ridges and trowel marks, is achieved. b. Following polishing operation, clean concrete surface with neutral pH cleaning agent and clear water. Wet vacuum residue and allow surface to dry. B. Apply hardener to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Ensure floor surface remains wet during entire application and soak-in period required by manufacturer. 2. After soak-in period, wait for surface to become slippery then flush entire surface with water; remove excess material using squeegees and wet vacuum to remove all residue. 3. Apply second coat of hardener to floor surfaces scheduled to remain "exposed". 4. Following application of hardener, reinstall protective covering and retain in place for at least 90 days. Do not allow surface to become stained or damaged. 5. Prior to application of subsequent finish materials, polish floor surface with heavy commercial floor burnishing machine equipped with abrasive pad. a. When floor is scheduled to remain exposed. continue buffing until surface aquires a satisfactory "satin" sheen. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Provide an independent testing agency, approved under provisions specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, to inspect finished slabs for flatness. B. Measure flatness of slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R; identify areas that exceed the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation of surface flatness for interior concrete floors: 3/16 inch in 10ft. 2. Maximum variation of surface from true floor plane: plus 0 inch 1 minus 1/4 inch. C. Correct the slab surface if conditions exceed tolerances specified. D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Apply 1 coat of chemical hardener to concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive adhered, carpet and resilient finish floor materials. B. Apply 2 coats of chemical hardener to concrete floor surfaces scheduled to remain exposed. END OF SECTION o ~:~: "".J = C:::J cr, e=:; rrJ (-j II -- ""..- N \:7 :J;J;:: -n ;'--' \~J ~ -1:- en HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 03 3513 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 033900 - CONCRETE CURING A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. ...-::~ ~C~ .,1~- ,..... 'J7 '.:.i. r-, ..~':r\ ( --) ('f'^~ :::- \~2:, -;5--:'7::'" ,;;. ...- y ~ ,;;:> o~ c::::\ f' L" /' ~ /(\ ~ \ ~..A"\ .. \ ~ ...-\ \~) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A,j ~ A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 03 3513 - High-Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing. 1,03 REFERENCES c.? ..~ ... 6' A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute Intemational; 2001. D. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003. E. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds and moisture-retaining sheet, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 2 - White pigmented. Class B. 1. Dissipating resin type. 2. Provide "L&M CURE R-2" manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171. 1. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 ozlper linear yd, 40 inches wide. 2. Other acceptable products: a. "Transguard 4000" manufactured by Reef Industries,lnc. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. CONCRETE CURING 03 3900 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAM INA TION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3,02 INTERIOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES. MOISTURE CURING A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, moisture cure floor surfaces .in accordance with ACI 308. B. Absorptive Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in damp condition for 7 days, and retain in place thereafter to help protect surface from staining and soiling. 3.03 EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES - MEMBRANE CURING A. Comply with additional requirements in Section 02 7510 for concrete paving. B. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3.04 FORMED SURFACES A. Cure vertical surfaces with forms in place for 7 days unless specifically approved otherwise by Architect. B. If Architect permits removal of forms after 3 days, cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308; begin immediately upon removal of forms. 1. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days. 2. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. a. Exception: Do not apply compound to surfaces scheduled to receive subsequent application of waterproofing and finish coating materials. 3,05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION r-'\ \.......' " ~\ , ....- ..v...,# 'cv ~ /" L -"~ ~-/ 17) 1-~ '-/ _ ....) 7/ /). ....- ~)y/ (-/ 'c) 7:" .;.;{_ ''\........ --.7 (/):. D "2: 1.2:) 9 ..P ~ c:.J ;-----.., ~ ::s ,............. .,;""" \,\/ CONCRETE CURING 03 3900 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 040511 - MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. b ~Cl "c;- ~ '" 'y~ '~t'_ t-;:, (.~ 0- a ,'<\ C' .,/ ~ .....0 ~ /(\ ~ ',/ "'-(\ . .:.-,\ \" I '.........,/' B. Grout for masonry. C) (, ';:\ ';.> S0~, 0,-:/- ?po y <.? t:' ~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 ~ Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. B. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. D. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. E. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2005a. F. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2004. G. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2006. H. ASTM C 1019 - Standard lest Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C 270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortarto property requirements of ASTM C 270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C 780. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1,06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 04 0511 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal; color as required to produce approved color sample. Provide manufactured by B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Bonding Agent: Latex type.. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 1. Interior, load bearing masonry: Type N. 2.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand unifonnly damp immediately before the mixing process. o C. ~ not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. ~ p. ,)~ter is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. ~ -:::p.y ("-\ ".~::e. ~ortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or .......~ \ 0- ~d-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. U-., C'.l .,- 0 :::.:~.04~Rqg! ~}XES \J-- ~,B6rl~ams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide .,g, premJ~d type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. ~ 1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.05 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout pressure.. r-" 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specifie~. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 3.03 GROUTING A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 04 0511 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 limitations of contract documents. B. Low-Lift Grouting: 1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours. C. High-lift Grouting: 1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 01 4000. B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 procedures. C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures. END OF SECTION ~. .0.---" ,,--". ..... .) ..,- $;! r_.-,) , ---c_... .21 1'0 !I'...............~... ! ::<, ~_...,.. r -.-.....t 5> ~ .'..J -..,J MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 040511-3 Riverside Festival stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 042002 - SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES D .,,~O .c__ ;:./" -)_7 /~'/.. r:3, k"'.'._' ~-~ ;::4. ...-(\ ./ ~..-~ ,--;) \<\ . :....,. (~-) .-/ \...;) A. Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. -:.-:" 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Mortar and grout for single wythe -:[nit masonry . B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. c? ~' -..J 1,03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2005a. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. F. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006. G. ASTM C.7 44 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 2005. H. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for decorative masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture. SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2,02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur~O-Wal: www.dur-o-waJ.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: wWw.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Pro~uct Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280) defonned billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than . 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2,03 ACCESSORIES o A. Aoint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self o ~panding; 3 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. " ,.(..Y) :,.. B'1f-)3uilding Paper: ASTM 0 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt. e-,--\ t:. C'~:;~filning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. \ ,.\ C'-' . '---u :., \ PAftT 3 ~~CUTION . .- ( .) --- --.. \)'-3,01:-.EX~I~TION ....;:.? ;.;.- ~ Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING ~. A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to unifonn dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3,04 PLACING AND BONDING A. lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.c SINGLE~WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not pennitted. C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external comers. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perfonn job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. D. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Space anchors at maximum of 24 inches horizontally ~nd 16 inches vertically. A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. (5 -;;~~:9\ r:J \".', 1,,) -n 3.06 LINTELS -....,.. A. Lap splices in reinforcing bars by minimum 24 bar diameters. .~-.. '::'? B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within~2 inch ~ of dimensioned position. C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. r.) ." ,~-\ '-..,.-..-'\ ',,-J 3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Fonn control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance. 3.09 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb. level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1 . Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. C. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.11 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION o o :;r 4. (-) \>~ o ~~ ,..,j -7 ./~-, "'::..-;.\...."/ Cl..-.---- \: -\ -;..::- () t(~~ :::. .4_ 'i.--:::: _~_,. O..::"~ 9 () \,,._. , \J..', I -'~ \3.- ,,-;:- c.- c-J - SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 r.::?> ~c-:,,:~ ..;;; /-, \--',;"\ "\'.""" SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS ...-:: <;?" (} ~y- :~~:~ r) ':./\ ..,.-" , PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1,02 RELATED SECTIONS Y A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04 2002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1,03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS. STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with vac limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. B. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish. 2.03 FINISHES. STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. 2,04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1 ...-(\ ,,~/ ---- r-J ',~<\ .\ ~:..-^""' "-) <-? '~ (-, . \ \.-..-.....-", 'd.-', Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, tree from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and tor sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES :;::"; ~ ~ U- A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. o 4. . c::> C~ / ~ximum Out-ot-Position: 1/4 inch. ~ {f;~.~: END OF SECTION ~ (=~)_\0) <...) ','-: <c:(. \..\,.' ~O.z C':. D -c~. -- c;,;.::' ,,-1 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Built-up structural beams and columns. B. Roof sheathing. C. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. D. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. ~) c;r "'2: :>~. ---"7 -'.-\ ,/ , c"\ -\\ >-- ..~- .....- (\ - ,..., .-:-' \ .--'.' :..j --. .--:-, (,,: /- / v .' -y ..- "_..l 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. B. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AFPA T10 - Wood Frame Construction Manual; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B, ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot~Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2005. E. PS 20 ~ American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. F. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, 6x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance. 1,05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2,01 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 D. Small Beam Framing (2 x 8 through 2 x 12): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-larch. 2. Grade: No.1 & Btr.. 2.02 EXPOSED BOARDS A. Moisture Content: Kiln--dry (15 percent maximum). 8. Surfacing: Rough. C. Species: Western Cedar. D. Grade: No.2, 2 Common, or Construction. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 24/0. 2. Thickness: 518 inch. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. .!reated lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category ~ ~stem for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, .' '/-.~ specific applications. .::r Or c:. _- r-\ :.C B. ~~~ervative Pressure Treatment of lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, v . 0- ~odity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Iblcu ft C"-l re1erltion. --- " .... -,'. (_) t~:::. 'j~i1n dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. \..L- \:; 29 '~at lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. ~?, 3. lieat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. ,-:? PART'3~ EXECUTION 3,01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. 1. Use sheathing clips between roof framing members. 2. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 3. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION Q ~~: () -1....-.. ---""1 /,,~ ---.-, / C-:-J I il C'~\ .' ~ -, \ , -n .--1 '-..-1 ~J ~. - . ( , ...._~.~~ ~ (.,) ~- ~. -J ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry. -0 -2~_ C], -y~ --) c:) , \ -\\ /~ ('J ::--\ _..~. \'.) \--n , "" \_j (e) ".' 1.03 REFERENCES Y A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. B. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002. C. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Truss Plate Institute; 2002 (ANS Irrp I 1 ). ;s D. TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute; 1989. E. WWPA G-5 ~ Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria. B. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: 50 Ibs/sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors. cambers. framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing. 1. Include identification of engineering software used for design. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with TPI1. TPI DSB-89, and BCSI1. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with BCSI1. B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. lumber: 1. Species: Pine. 2. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 3. lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as required. C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking: Softwood lumber, SIPIF species, construction grade, 19 percent maximum and 7 percent minimum moisture content. B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. C. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. ,Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89 and BCSI1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAM INA TION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and BCSI1; maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb. and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. . D. Place permanent bridging and bracing. E. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position. ~ .) ~ .t'-:f I,r, ~-,> '.-;/ "<~\.~;;, (/) "L) END OF SECTION ,- """',/ '0-" c:;, (~> \--< \ '>." v '. /F'~... /' \ \.' ,- v/ ~>/~._ .{S~ \--;-')s,,,, ., ........ t2 t/\ // \,..\' ,r 0.-:> ~, 'c:;' SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 072400 - DIRECT -APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM ...-:'} PART 1 GENERAL ~:, Q, -;;_:'~ ~.:)~ (}j 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ,-:l c::? ~<) .~,. ,~..... c_ /'\ \..., \ \c:i .....-: {....:> -\\ - .~',..- A. Direct Applied Finish System applied directly to concrete masonry units. ......J -,.,"'.. "" :\ '. \ \ ....~~, \'-..) (~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 SUBMITTALS ),7 .-~ "'.J #:~~;."" A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall and soffit joint patterns, joint details, and molding profiles. C. Product Data: Provide data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, and system limitations. D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard range of samples illustrating available coating colors and textures. E. Verification Samples: Submit actual samples of selected coating on specified substrate, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating project colors and textures. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation required, installation techniques, and jointing requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain copy of specified installation standard and manufacturer's installation instructions at project site at all times during installation. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 5' x 5' on actual substrate. B. locate mock-up as indicated on drawings. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with labels intact. Inspect materials and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. B. Storage: Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F. 1. Protect Portland cement based materials from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not prepare materials or apply finish system during inclement weather unless areas of installation are protected. Protect installed finish systemj areas from inclement weather until dry. B. Do not install finish or sealants when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM 07 2400 - 1 (~'\ '''....0''. ., \::v \ /" ,/ 0-" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Project design is based on 'StucNONFlex Perma-Flex System' as manufactured by Stuc-ONFlex International. B. Substitutions: See Seciton 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforcing mesh: Balanced open weave fiberglass reinforcing mesh, treated for compatibility with other materials of the system. The fabric shall not be leass than 4.4 oz per square yard. B. Base Coat: Fiber reinforced 100% acrylic polymer modified cement base coat. C. Finish Coating Top Coat: Water-based, air curing, acrylic or polymer-based finish with integral color and texture. 1. Texture: Medium. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's range of standard colors. D. Water - shall be clean and potable. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Joint Compound: type as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is sound and free of oil, loose materials, or protrusions that could interfere with finish system installation and is of a type and construction that is acceptable to finish system manufacturer. Do not begin work until substrate and adjacent materials are complete and thoroughly dry. B. Verify that substrate surface is flat, with no deviation greater than 1/4 in when tested with a 10ft straightedge. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged. B. Remove excess and waste finish system materials from project site. C. Clean finish system surfaces and work areas of foreign materials resulting from finish system operations. ~, END OF SECTION ~ .~ .6- ---'~ .?-...~ I "-:/"J -::~:'-i~~ '->>~' ...... '. \ -.,....... \,.),y.--. ;~-) c> '7/ ../.. \>~ :? ~""~"" 'v c--> ./' (..," \ \b ..g/\ ~~\ DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM 07 2400 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 225 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2004. t.' {~"-\~ ,-' qn ,A:~~. ';...-\ .Y -..). C~ .~ ~4 \ ~ --- r...;) '. --\"\ \. , \" ---.::~ ( '- ...._,~_. I C.': 'Y 0) B. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2005. C. ASTM 0 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. for additional provisions. B. Provide 100 sq ft of extra shingles of each color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 3. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 4. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscoming.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SHINGLES A. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM 03462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Weight: 245 Ib/1 00 sq ft. 2. Self~sealing type. 3. Style: Square, three tab, 12 x 36 inches. 4. Color: To match existing. ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Underlayment: No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic felt underlayment, complying with ASTM 04869, Type 1. 2.04 ACCESS9RIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type. of hot~dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, asphalt roof cement. C. Ridge Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather entry; flanged to receive shingles; ShingleVent II manufactured by Air Vent Inc. D. Eave Vent: Prefinished, perforated aluminum vent strip: 2" in width. 2.05 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge and gable edge. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ~ A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, orvoids. 3.02 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. B. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. ,-\ t--- ~ , \ " ......,.. , 3.03 IN2: ALLA TION . SHINGLES ~ A. / ~jf"stall shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C0 ~.?_ 10;. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever -:k::' ~\\ -7';; is greater. p.. f.J'tC) Fasten strip shingles uSing 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is c.::. -;;'~ ~ reater. ~ (8 ~~ shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double \::.::; thic~ss over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. -E:' Q~:~l Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails. F. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting. G. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.04 PROTECTION ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION --- C.} . ~:g\ Co:' ~:.... L: ;;- 05.038 l-~j " ": p,) ...."'1 --"".,~ )7 d) v:> ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113-3 ~"l ,.q . '-". ,,"j Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items. including flashings and counterflashings. -;:::') ';::. (J ~J; :c\. r:> /) ~,:') ........... '<';) \. \ \(~') -- \ .J ...\\ ~..~ "\ ';/\\ , ."'\ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. .(l _'C",... \.) ("J .. ,,~ 1.03 REFERENCES -7 'cP A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. C, ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. D. ASTM 04586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. E, SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditio":ling Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer. Zinc chromate type. C. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9005. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to fonn drip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves', ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reg lets in place, and nailing strips located. 'B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure, 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. END OF SECTION LL 6"' I,i") ,:, (-." \..,..-- , \\.\ . \ -::::;. '0--- "'t: '0..- (".J - ,.:!'~-,.. ~:.~ '.~:~~ \~\ 7::. ~:.)\~) ( .:.1 \~ .\ 't:--' ....g" "c;".) c....Jo -"."'" .' \5\;' 9- SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 079005 - JOINT SEALERS rJ C:;;,'7') ".-',." c.1 ---\\ -" ...'-:. PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry: Control joints in masonry. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants at metal flashing. C? 10 ..;~,~~." ~, -"','-",' _.....-\ Y .--(_ r-, ~:.. ~ ,.~ ," -,.\ ~\:<."j u' .. ';';"-; .L-,.....- -y ,,~ '(p C. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. D. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2000. E. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005. F. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; current edition. G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1/4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule NO.1168. , B. :-1': (;;- General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS. Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: "NP 2" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. b. Product: "DYmeric" 511 manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Sealing under thresholds at exterior doors. e. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. E~rior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with ,wa,ler-re pelle nt; ,>'.\...1 ct. ::.:::color: Black. ~\ ::;.~ize as required to provide weathertight seal when installed. N 3.; 'rrovide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use. - 4:;.:- 'A9ceptable products: "~;:':, Product: "Polytite Standard" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. V~j Product: 'Will-Seal 250" manufactured by IIIbruck/ USA. c; Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Applications: Use for: a. Exteriorwall expansion joints. D. Exterior Metal lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Tremco 440 Tape" manufactured by Tremco Incoporated. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Non-compression glazing of vision lights in metal frames. b. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. <"~)1 ~C. (.0 (': \-..' \ \,..) ~- \ --....~. -~....... \ . \.--'- o ...0 c""'" c.'.-:' ,-.15. E. Interior Floor Joint Filler: Semi-flexible epoxy; ASTM 0 638; multi-component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. . Shore A hardness: 80-85. 3. Acceptable products: a. Product:" Joint-loc 80" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Product: "Epolith - P" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 4. Applications: Use for: a. Saw-cut contraction joints in floors. F. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T. I, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: "Sl1" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, 0; single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Dow Coming 795" Silicone Building Sealant manufactured by Dow Coming Corporation. b. Product: "Spectrem 2" manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. Applications: Use for: a. Structural and nonstructural glazing of glass, metal and plastic. b. Weatherproofing perimeter joints around metal frames. 3. 4. 5. 6. -::; (.!. .<::"0 ~----: 2.02 ACCESSORIES Y' A. Primer: Non-staining type. recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1056, sponge or expanded rubber; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 ~ 3 --,:"\ ..---:: - r...) , , -"\ , --0 .."., .--"'''' -'-'"~ \~..J <-P. :;.- cP Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges. and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Pre compressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at comers, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION C1" "..n C0 4_ ....:"~'-... 'c..:. .e:.~_ ...../ 1~-' fc,,'::~ \,J..\ -~-:::, (', '\.----._~., \ \ \ ....\ ~,~~-" u- t .' c-..1 - c) " \ '0 ~':? c:'l ~~ -'.- ..~ ~~~ \:::. ::}~; 0-'-":" 9 JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES "Ci z.0 ~:::" ::;-), ",./ _../.. r..? ~:j ,;> , ---\\ .~ \<:\ 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIIICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. /" \...:> c? .~ -y B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-1 00 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.1 0 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 19~8. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. E. DHI A 115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSIIDHI A115 Series). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special . installation instructions relating to this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSIIICC A 117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A 115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS ,....., A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES C1"' to A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI 4:. A250.8 for level 2 2", ~alvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in i!? ?"c Qccordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. -c:. 3.\ ~,Einish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 4~.: ~ovide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut~outs in frames to be installed in masonry N ~_ 'et to be grouted. L-' 5(::::: gfames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill \,\:~ 0 ~ning without cutting masonry units. c;-~ 6. F.rames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame ~::.~ head, flush with top. ,-\ , I l..-.'.- :::-::~.;. Li- B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded; 14 gage unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Grout for Frames installed in masonry walls: Portland cement grout of maximum 3-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION -l HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INST ALLA liON A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION (-2 ~~i~ 0 ~.._..., ....._~.. rq (-) f'0 1-'\ ;2;~ ",," ~ HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3 -0 w .!;..- co \l " .-:--1 \ "" "->>, '-../ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOORHARWARE SECTION 08710 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow metal doors. B. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and gasketing. D ~~~ 0~, -;;~ -:-<"~ r::;J" \ ' , C--j -\I, .--:.:,. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS r-:> -0 :y::' \ \,--."\-\ "'.---' i ,-.... <.:? A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. -)7 ,,' 'Co "~-:=r" 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC AII7.] -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council 1998. B. DHI (LOCS)-Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute;1990. C. DHI WDHS.3-Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993. D. NFP A 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. E. NFP A I OI-Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association 2000. F. UBC Std. 7-2, Part II-Test Standard for Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997. G. UL lOB-Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies; Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL) H. UL I DC-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. BHMA- Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. J. UL (BMD)-Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. December 12, 2006 Page] of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa 1.04 SUBMITTALS DOOR HARW ARE SECTION 08710 A. See Section 01300-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Submittals: 1. List all doors per set with opening number, opening location, hand, fire rating, size and material. 2. List all hardware required for openings with quantity, description, product number, finish and manufacturer. 3. Include any special installation and operational instructions. 4. For electrical systems to include operational instructions, riser diagrams and point to point wiring diagrams.. 5. Include manufacturer's catalogue information for all products listed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier to be company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware. B. Hardware supplier to have a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as full time employee to oversee submittal completion and be available for consultation during course of project. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Installer and supplier to convene prior to commencing installation of doors and hardware for any special installation instructions, as requested by contractor. 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually, label and identify each package with opening and set number to match hardware submittal. B. Contractor to secure all delivered hardware in a secure, dry location. C. Supplier to deliver hardware to project sight or other locations as directed by contractor. Aluminum door hardware to be delivered to aluminum door supplier as required by aluminum door supplier. C5' 4.. I.:) ~c__ i:'> ('"\, 'l--"" " U-\ -.---,\ ,.--..,'" \J..- ,r'8.- o.~ ("-1 - ~'~~~ o c% ~ (~ ~~.C '..- --,.... 'Oz 9- December 12, 2006 Page 2 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARW ARE SECTION 08710 1.08 COORDINATION A. Hardware supplier to verify cylinder type, finish, quantity etc. with any door manufacturer that hardware supplier is furnishing cylinders for. B. Hardware supplier to verify electrical voltage, amperage requirements etc. with electrician, fire alarm systems and security systems supplier. C. Conduit and wiring provided by electrical contractor D. Hardware supplier to furnish any templates to door and frame manufacturers and installers for door and frame preparation. E. Sequence delivery, installation etc. To ensure utility connections and security are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. F. Hardware supplier to coordinate keying requirements with owner. G. Hardware supplier to visit project to verify any existing conditions for compatibility with new doors and hardware. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Contractor to retain and turn over to owner any special installation and adjustment tools furnished with hardware. B. Contractor to retain and turn over to owner any installation, adjustment and operational directions that are furnished with the hardware. C. Contractor to turn over all exit device dogging wrenches furnished with exit devices to owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. McKinney (Me) 2. Hager 3. Bommer /~ B. Mortise Locks: 1. Sargent (SA), 8200 Series, LNL Design. 2. Corbin/Russwin, ML2000 Series, NSA Design. 3. Yale, 8800 Series, AUR Design. C. Push and Pulls: 1. Trimco (TRIM) 2. Rockwood 3. McKinney 4. Plate material to be 1/8" thick stainless steel. December 12, 2006 Page 3 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARW ARE SECTION 08710 D. Closers: I. Sargent (SA), 351 Series. 2. LeN 4041 Series. 3. Norton 7500 series. 4. Supplier to furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for proper installation. 5. Install closers on side of door for least visibility, unless mounting is required for maximum door swing or to protect from moisture or corrosive materials. 6. Installer to properly adjust all hydraulic and spring adjustments for proper operational of closer and door. 7. All closers to have full plastic covers. E. Protection Plates: 1. Trimco (TRIM) 2. McKinney 3. Material to be .062 stainless steel. 4. Protection plates to be fastened with countersunk, oval head screws. 5. Protection plates to be beveled four sides. 6. Protection plate as noted in hardware sets unless restricted by bottom rail of door. F. Wall and Floor Stops: I. Trimco (TR) 2. McKinney G. Weatherstripping, Gasketing and Threshold: 1. Pemko (PE) 2. Reese 3. McKinney 4. Any weatherstrip aluminum housing attached to metal surfaces to be attached with self drilling TEK screws. S. Any intumescent fire seals, required to meet UL IOC positive pressure fire testing, to be concealed, furnished by wood door manufacturer. H. Silencers: 1. All silencers for hollow metal frames to be furnished and installed in frame by frame supplier. 2. Silencers are not required at frames that are to have gasketing or weatherstripping installed. ........::.': .d. c5"' \.oj c0 "2. 0-- ." ~~5:~:~ <<.v ;"...,)'6 '--.?"" (...- L.1- ~-"? Oz 9- C') -- r""', ....~ -' ,.", . U'\ ~l. \)..- c...:'" 1.,__ '0 -~ ~1 C-l December 12,2006 Page 4 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOORHARWARE SECTION 08710 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Finishes: 1. Dull Chrome (US26D) or Brushed Stainless Steel (US32D) as noted in hardware sets. 2. Closers painted aluminum in color. B. Provide products that comply with the following: I. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and Local Codes. 2. ANSI/ICC AII?I, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions ofNFP A 101, Life Safety Code. 4. NFP A 80, Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Electrical hardware to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 7. Hardware for positive pressure fire and smoke rated doors to comply with UBC Std. 7-2 Part II 1997 and UL 10C. 2.03 KEYING A. Locks and cylinders to be keyed to existing key system per owner's instructions. B. Supplier to verify existing key system with owner. C. Supplier to meet with owners' representative to determine keying details and submit key schedule for approval. D. Furnish 10 copies of each Master and Grand Master keys and 4 copies per door of each change key. E. Stamp keys as required by owner. F. Deliver all keys, with identifYing tags, to owner or contractor, per owners' instructions. Person receiving keys to sign for them with copy ofreceipt to be kept by the receiver and the supplier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware as specified. B. VerifY that frames are level, plum and set at correct dimensioned opening. C. Verify that correct wire gauges are provided to supply correct electrical power to electrically operated devices. D. Supplier to visit project sight to verify all existing conditions with contractors representative, as required. ~ )::;; r",<> C:=i ::,::-.J C~"', c' r",") "I (".-) !l --"'-1 j f'V !-'- .... ,....... ~ ", \""'.-' ~-;: 5> w December 12,2006 Pag~ of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARW ARE SECTION 08710 3.02 INST ALLA TION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Use templates provided with hardware. C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFP A 80. C. Mounting heights ofhardware to be per DHI recommended locations and accessibility codes. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and as specified, as requested by Architect. 1-: - 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth and proper operation. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 0] 700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or other finished products. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE; ATTACHED h. /j/t- : <-/> 0>., -}(//~ -~;.'~ V.f) '<Y).'//)'"- c/,. /~-"') \ ! ~,;..../ "",f" />:;1., V ' / "',/, '-', c" "';/(:} IC}- ( /', / ~ v'.",,,. V;s. '-,,"> ',.) v, y'.!; ~'v 1/'..:;. v v, December 12, 2006 Page 60f7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARW ARE SECTION 08710 Hardware Sets SET #01 Doors: 101 A, 102A 3 Hinge 1 Deadlock ] Pull Plate ] Push Plate ] Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Bumper 1 Door Sweep 1 Threshold T4A33864 1/2 X 4 ]/2 NRP 10 6364 4874 I 195-3J X 1809-4 X 3/8" TYPE E FASTENERS 18096 X 20 X 1/8" 351 P10 KA062 12 X 34 X .062 CTK B4E 1270WX 18041 CNB 36" TEK SCREWS 252 X 3 AFG 40" SET #02 Doors: 103A 3 Hinge 1 Stnn Lock 1 Anti-Vandal Pull 1 Wall Bumper 1 Door Sweep 1 Threshold T4A33864 1/2 X 4 ]/2 NRP 10 63 64 8206 LNL 1096HA 1270WX 18041 CNB 36" TEKSCREWS 252 X 3 AFG 40" December 12, 2006 32D 260 630 630 EN 630 630 32D 26D 630 630 MC SA TRIM TRIM SA TRIM TR PE PE MC SA TR TR PE PE f'-oJ t-..,~ r..... \, j ::l ...:....;,", C~:J ,JJ ~ I"V )'.- -..., ~l ,"--, U <..> co Page 70f7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 089100 - LOUVERS A. louvers, frames, and accessories. .- Q,.--., .c_,_, ) ~~~~;.. ::.:\ / / ....--. (;-~\ f;j, ,,-') Gr' 0, 'C-) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES - ,-..) -\\ -~-::: \ <(\ ...---, -0 \_j 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. c.e -~.- )7 CO 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. c. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall louvers: Project design is based on products manufactured by Greenheck Fan Corporation; www.greenheck.com. B. Other ma nufacturer's: 1. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc: W\IVW.c-sgroup.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching frame. 1. Blades: Straight. 2. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; comer joints mitered and mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 3. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch. 4. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating, finished after fabrication. 5. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. lOUVERS 08 91 00 ~ 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M),. B. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. C. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Coating: Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500/Hylar 500 resin, two coat finish, complying with AAMA 2604. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel. B. Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07 6200. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION l.::-" A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 3.03 CLEANING ;:..-.; A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION 6' J> en b_ ~ ",-;',...,.,. / ,;-"' ..... _; .I .....,.... .......-':.- (~/ ..- ;'.' -? . '/" ....-"<' o c..... \...', .......;. -;,..- \ \...Y c-J -r- , ~ \...-. Lj..~ c--', 6~ \.j 9- ~~ c:<~, ~ lOUVERS 08 9100 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 099000 ~ PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. -0 ?O .....P_..- _" -")-",,' - r:l ~; '0--' ,..-, r::, c") - t" -\\ ..-.~;::. 1.02 RELA TEe SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry units. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Field painted items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2003. B. SSPC (PM1) ~ Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS --(-' ~' \' ,-:~~..\ , ........., '-? ::~- y OJ A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch~up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code forV.O.C. requirements for products and finishes. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The design of the project has been based on products manufactured by Sherwin-Williams Company and indicated under "Paint Systems" below. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 ~ Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS. GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Provide manufacturer's highest quality product for type of coating specified. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS. EXTERIOR C"-', U' A. Paint ME-OP-2l - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Urethane, Gloss Finish: 2 Coats. k Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. Z.;? First coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer (B66-310 series). 110 g/l vac h .......-..... 8">_ l~,:.;:::::Second coat: Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane (B65-700). 66 gll VOC ~ ",.1- 013. 'P~lfil MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Urethane, Gloss Finish: 2 Coats. c-J 1-/(]5irstcoat: Pro-Cry I Universal Metal Primer (B66-31 0 series). 110 g/l vac -- Z(=_ ~cond coat: Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane (B65-700). 66 gll VOC ~~ ( ,..) '''',.....- _. ~ll'" \J.2.04 'eAINt-:S~TEMS - INTERIOR ""c:' _'--- . A~:~Paint CI-OP-2A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, latex, Semi-Gloss Finish: 3 Coats: <: 1. First coat: PrepRite Block Filler (B25W25). 42 gll VaG 2. Two coats: Bath Paint Semi-Gloss (A59 series). B. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, latex, Egg Shell Finish: 3 Coats. 1. First coat: PrepRite Block Filler (B25W25). 42 g/l vac 2. Two coats: Harmony Interior Latex Eg-shel (B9W900 series). 0 g/l VaG C. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Prefinished and Primed, Latex, Semi-Gloss Finish: 3 Coats. 1. First coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer (B66~310 series). 110 g/l vac 2. Two coats: ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-gloss (B31). 141 gll vac D. Paint GI-OP-3l- Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, Egg Shell Finish: 3 Coats. 1. First coat: Harmony Interior Primer (B11W900). 2. Two coats: Harmony Interior Latex Eg-shel (B9W900 series). C"' 'I.l"> '- o g/l VOG o gJl VOC PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materi~not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial qualitY:i- D S\ Patching Material: Latex filler. {-::. (> \') -"\7 .-.r" -') ......- / ,"" ~ (.)::, ..-~ ~ C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. ...-\\ './ .;;/ ',-,\\ \ " B. PART 3 EXECUTION ~'- ~~~ '.-" 3.01 EXAMINATION (:; ~;.-.? A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufactUjer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.02 PREPARATION L? ,,~ /2:> A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. F. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. G. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. H. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks. and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. L Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. c. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop-primed equipment where indicated. B. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. D. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished except as specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. ~ B. ~t the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems. 2>C. ,:::V@anical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. ", -:;y::. \n,-_J'aint all insulated and exposed pipes and conduit occurring in finished areas to match ( \ ~. "-1\ 0- 'r)~ackground surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. ~.,L.', c'; 2: cBaint sho~primed and factory finished items occurring in finished areas. :;:...: -;~ ~.~ ~int interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that \J- ,',.J 0 ~ visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible c~ ':c~aces. ..~;'":"'l SjJU, (' ~ 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS .'~ A. Concrete Block: Finish all surfaces exposed to view, except where subsequent finish materials are applied. 1. Interior: CI-OP-3L, semi-gloss. B. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior Ceilings, Soffits and Bulkheads: GI-OP-3l, flat. 2. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. C. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-3A, gloss. . D. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior: MI-OP-3L, semi-gloss. E. Primed and Prefinished Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. ~..-.::. PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 4 :"'--..1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 1. Finish the following items: a. Exposed surfaces of lintels. b. Access panels. c. Wall louvers. d. Mechanical equipment. e. Electrical panels and equipment. 2. Interior: MI-OP-2l, semi-gloss. END OF SECTION ?'~) '--~ .- .,;;'~ -:r-JP ..."'~ -. \.: S:2 ~~:: ...::..- ):> 05.038 ," .) -, N '-,-'" : ; \ : .,' '-~"';"l '\_---1' -0 C:? .r-- co PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES f_1 /"? ~.:-) \;.-.... A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. <5 2'?(J ...c::.,.- ...-1 -;y~ -':.::. /'') .- - \--J -\\ // r ._~,.._ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry: Masonry backup. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ..-0 /n .-- ....-' \,-) -::-~':. c.." .' ~:_). ?,,, .:-- y ~' "Cp A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Santana Products Co., Inc; Product Poly-Mar HD: www.hinyhider.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 ~ Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels. doors, and pilasters, floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: To be selected. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. 5. Thickness of Pilasters: 1 inch. C. Urinal Screen: Wall mounted with two panel brackets. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel. B. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, polished stainless steel. C. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage. and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid. plumb. and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch.up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. ~" 1- 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position. END OF SECTION (5" ") .... ,:" .6_ ..- ,[~--:t' I .<---... , I .....;;> v-- ~..~_... \5 (-. ,"- '"".... ~'" \, \', . \ ~ V c~ -- c)...'. v' G~,) ~"? C:?., ~ -~,........'" 'c6~6 :;:;-- PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19-2 c..J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES {-:> C?, v:;.", i:..." c? f'.', ( ) ---\\ /. ~': ",." A. Toilet Room Accessories. -;:.:'J '-2,. (; 1'~~ ~\ / ~"/. /", , ) \~ ,/.. / \---' ,-0, :~'.. /,\ \ '. \ \ ....,..-..."\ \ I ,-~-",'" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry. B. Section 102113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. ~:~, ;':'-P <.? y ,.' -(p B. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2006. C. ASTM A 554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2003. D. ASTM F 446 - Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area; 1985 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. D. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this section, and countersigned by Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until insta lIation. 1.07 SEQUENCING TOilET ACCESSORIES 102813-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Supply locating and sizing templates, and other requirements, to fabricators and installers of products referenced in RELATED SECTIONS Article for building in products of this section. B. Supply reinforcing and anchoring devices required for installation of products of this section to fabricators and installers of products referenced in RELATED SECTIONS Article. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in prOduct workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI-American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation, Washroom Accessories Division: www.bradleycorp.com. c:') 3'.::f Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. u ..r~-:->, . ., 'v',/ ~;::,-, (")C. l~ijpply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. C:, 2.6iMA'tt"RiALS LU l) 'c:- j st. StaWess Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304,18-8 alloy. No.4 satin finish. ==-~ (., l::._~_: ~<( \.J-2.03(:JlOIL'Er~CEssORIES Co,) 0 1(3, The fallowing accessories are Bobrick model numbers: ~'-J B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Model 8-254. C. Dual Feminine NapkinlTampon Dispenser: Model B-2800-25. 1. Surface mounted. All moving parts replaceable without removing cabinet from wall. 2. Coin mechanism: 25 cents. D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Provided by owner, installed by contractor. 2.04 MIRRORS A. Metal Mirror: Stainless steel, Type 304, No.8 mirror finish; 24 x 36 inch 2.05 GRAB BARS A. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 0.050 inch, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; formed 1-1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc-welded to minimum 11 gage stainless steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. B. Grab Bars (GB): Series 8-6806. 1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings. C. Grab Bar Snap-on Mounting Flanges: Snap-on stainless steel cover, 3-1/4 inch diameter by 1/2 inch deep, for concealing grab bar mounting flange. 2.06 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES A. Electric Hand Dryer (HND): World Dryer Model A52, surface-mounted. ' 1. Cast iron housing, single-piece construction, 1/4 inch thick, with acid-resistant vitreous TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements "..--") ~8' .? ~C,,"'-<\ o \ ' " .--';;. ~.~, 0S:g)8 \ /(-\ ;' ' \") '>, ,j c? enamel finish. Surface mounted; white color. 2. Operation: Automatic cycle with sensor. 3. Heating element rated 2300 watts (120V, 15 Amps). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ~,:":;7 ~:-:? j - -c9 A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. B. Installer's Examination: 1. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt. 3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. locations for scheduled accessories are indicated on Drawings, quantities listed below: B. WOMEN 102: 1. Mirror: (2). 2. Soap Dispenser: (2). 3. Hand Dryer: (2). 4. Toilet Paper Dispenser: (4). 5. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: (4). C. MEN 101: 1. Mirror: (2). 2. Soap Dispenser: (2). 3. Hand Dryer: (2). 4. Toilet Paper Dispenser: (2). D. Waste receptacles. Toilet Paper Dispensers and Soap Dispensers will be provided by the TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ,'-\ (,.--J L~J I __"vI LL owner. C1"\ 1.0 M <t: -~ lli~ u.. <',) f' ., ''-'' G~.~ b c. ., ......':":')0 C~:. C"',,: C'"...., 05.038 END OF SECTION TOilET ACCESSORIES 102813-4 SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING 05.038 ,-~ c~> 'c::r C', ';:'~I ./\\ . .'-;::' /' \""\\ \....) "", /~\ ....-<1 \' ) "5;" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES -6 7,,0. ~~:~'? ;;~\ , ,..#'..... A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Removal of existing debris. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS u., .' .;..,., ,.;.--'" -!'-? ;- <'~ -',9 A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. D. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil removal. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 3.02 VEGETATION A. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the following limits: 1. 40 feet outside the building perimeter. 2. 10 feet each side of surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utility lines less than 12 inches in diameter. 3. 15 feet each side of roadway curbs and main utility trenches. 4. 25 feet outside perimeter of pervious paving areas that must not be compacted by construction traffic. B. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits. C. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious paving, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil. D. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated. 1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. 2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 18 inches. 3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed. SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - 1 (-".. \.....-". \.\;. ........\ :::.-- \>--- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 E. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. 3.03 DEBRIS A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION ~ ;;-, -;C- 0-- .A. -Z ,ZO &-!- \..I-\7.~, ~'\\"'..., ,""j '0 -.'V"'" ... (..-- ..:::L \~--..., U-Z 9 c-J - c...:\ ~ ~ ~l ......., ~ _..' SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312200 - GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil. r-:"" B. Rough grading and preparing the site for site structures, building pads, and ~gncrete;g~th. C F.. h d' 0 0 . InIS gra Ing. ~ O. \~'. -'-.--- ----' \ \. ~ ...--'\ ....n .. ~~:.:: 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing. S. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling and compaction. c. Section 32 9219 - Seeding: Finish ground cover. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS -- r...) .'-i \ \ \ ......"'1 :9. \.J <-? -7 ~~ ..0 A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil - Soil Type _: Topsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 2323. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-Iandscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-Iandscaped, or re-graded. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. GRADING 312200-1 ~ ("'\ .cY .\............ ~. \J.), \ -;:::> \)..-- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. S. Remove excavated subsoil from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. _.~ E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Place topsoil to nominal depth of 6 inches. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. ~ c.<> .A. ~ -:k. Cl .:/ --- \.->- \..\.) -,..; :) (/' ( .J ',<, U END OF SECTION c-l - v \,-' .(.? -t:?, <=b ~ .-.,... .- {.".;" /..1_ 1.---:: _....." C)"b :;:;--- ~, GRADING 31 2200 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312316 - EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for footings, slabs-on~grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Public Works Standards and other requirements of Municipality of Iowa City, IA. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks. paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. \,-i PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED -q. c? -70 I" ...r_~ -::::'~ ...." ) -\\ "":::::. PART 3 EXECUTION - ,.., -n \J:"'-' A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 8. locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. 3.02 EXCAVATING 1..,..->,-/ 3.01 PREP ARA liON 0) .. )7 ..~ .,- '-" A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 2323. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. J. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 2200. K. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 OVEREXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. When excessively wet materials are encountered while preparing building foundation and pavement subgrades, the Geotechnical representative may require the contractor to remove the unsuitable material and replace it with suitable on site material. EXCAVATION 312316-1 (-" \.............---, \.1". " ..,.--;. ... ,-,'" -" \J-- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Unsuitable materials found in the areas where foundations are to be constructed shall be removed and disposed of. The area requiring removal and depth of removal shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and Architect and/or Geotechnical representative prior to removal. Materials shall be declared unsuitable by the Geotechnical representative when they can not be compacted to within project specifications. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION cP \..(> i!"> ,::. c.. c--l - 4- ,~~ (:;::-- 1.-\-\"/:: ::~'~~ \:::~ ,--' C -/"" c-- .c:f.~ '-;''; ":? '../ D ;.- (-~ ~ ~ (;:::J C-J EXCAVATION 31 2316 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312323 - FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. 1.03 REFERENCES 'C) ,,(\ "'~O "OJ ',:::::::. A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for laboratory Compaction CharacterisjiCs:Qf SojJ.. Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. (-)"., \...;) 'n '~"_~\ c !- .....0 B. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and U nit Weight of Soil in Pla.oo \~ the-:i:;. Sand-Cone Method; 2000.;>::-a v? ~,!. /-. ..,., C. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering pur~s .;~ (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: 6 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site and conforming to the following: 1. Low-plasticity, cohesive typ~. a. Liquid Limit: Less than 45 percent. FILL 31 2323 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 b. Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL B. Structural Fill: Dense graded, processed aggregate. Confonning to State of Iowa DOT standard specification for aggregate base course. C. Granular FiII- Fill Type "Drainage": Angularcrushed washed stone; open-graded, processed aggregate; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; and conforming to the following: 1. ASTM C33, Class Designation 2S, course aggregate for concrete. a. Minimum size: No.8 sieve; 0 to 5 percent passing. . b. Maximum size: 3/4 inch. D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. co 1.a: Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW. 1.0 - o E. ")-.:::~soil: See Section 31 2200. cc-- C~~! 2.Ql s~ QUALITY CONTROL U-\ C"-A. ~~~ection 01 4000 ~ Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and ::':,:.. ::; ~~y"sis of soil material. U- \'il. ~fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard. test and analyze ,-0 2', sa s for compliance before delivery to site. c-J C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements. C. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 8 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, FilL 31 2323 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation. compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 90 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Subgrade Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Scarify and recompact top 8 inches of existing subsoil to 98 percent of its maximum dry density before placing additional fill. 2. Use general fill at optimum moisture as replacement for unsatisfactory subsoil materials. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevations belowcapilliary barrier. 4. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density. C. Capilliary Barrier Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Use granular drainage fill. 2. Depth: 6 inches deep. 3. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density. D. At Foundation Walls and Footings: 1. Use sand. 2. Fill up to capilliary barrier inside building line. 3. Fill to within 18 inches below finish grade outside building line. 4. Compact each lift to 98 percent of maximum dry density. 5. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls~ J>.r;.- 6. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supportSO are in place. '('::, ~~ ,-.. <_-:~~~, -y" ~. c:J ,-..--) ',") 11 .~- -- N """1-1 \ ' , , -r:'! _..J:~... ...., '-.-1 w E. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches: 1 . Bedding and Haunching layers: Use structural fill. 2. Cover with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 5. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. Fill 31 2323 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 F. At lawn Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to 6 inches below finish grade elevations. 3. Compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 31 2200 for topsoil placement. G. Under Monolithic Paving: 1. Scarify and recompact top 8 inches of existing subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density before placing additional fill. 2. Use additional general fill as required to achieve final subgrade elevation. a. Maximum compacted depth of each lift: 8 inches. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3. Use sand base under concrete sidewalks. a. Compacted depth: 2 inches, minimum. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: Comply with recommendations of geotechnical engineer. F. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs..on..grade. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unused materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition, properly prepared for subsequent grading operations. ..J END OF SECTION cP ..p en ~ 0-- L "'2;. ! ?"~ 1':;'~' 1)-\ ("^\ V". . \).-, \ -:;;> \)v- ~ ."',... c...l ...... <..J v::;\ c.? 1%, (..c::..\ iJ "/' ,/~ '.---:: -, O-<Z 9 FILL 31 2323 - 4 T--- - - Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES {); 4 C/) /'::~1 / )" I ~~~?"", '0"" 0<2-, " -_/) "/ ,.::> /)/. ,,/ 'if. .(S' A:'-- /// " ." ". .d'\" "\ /" ,,( ) ,,~ . SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING A. Concrete sidewalks. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving. C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute Intemational; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. . C. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. D. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute Intemational; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). E. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. F. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. G. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. H. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 45 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; flexible, closed-cell foam. 1. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2. Product: "Sealtight Ceramar" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 03 2000. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B. 1. Product: "l&M Cure R-2" manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. ..,." 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. ...... <c' ~: B. J~t Sealer: Self~leveling polyurethane as specified 'in Section 07 9000. C'? ~O ("'-" 2.Oi!t CQiM:CR~TE MIX DESIGN - NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE '\.---'~ 0- '".._J r U." c-J..'~rete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the _' \ f*J~ of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. l.C t::~ '8 $or trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect ~ ~r preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. c' - jIj Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 1. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture (Mid-Range): ASTM C 494, Type A; providing for 12-15 percent reduction of water content in concrete mix. C. Concrete Properties: 1. Cement Content: Minimum 525 Ib per cubic yard. 2. Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Maximum 48 percent by weight. 3. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Slag Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2.06 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 31 2323 for construction of base course for work of this Section. '- r' CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 - 2 ,--' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. r--' C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork dur~ conc(~k placement. :C-';' () f!\ ~:;-::-~ .::.--~ (~-) 3.05 REINFORCEMENT" - - \\ --:::: A. Place reinforcement as indicated. ......-, ~a {'V -0 :s:. ';"4""\ \ '( 'i.'---; \,_.J .' ) 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. B. (~ ,,----:.... ~ "y- Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. <.? Place concrete as specified in Section 03 3000. .:;.- U) C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.07 JOINTS A. Align sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 24 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Provide sawn joints: 1. At 8 feet intervals or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Provide keyed joints as indicated. E. Saw cut contraction joints 1/8 inch wide at an optimum time (not more than 24 hours) after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.08 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Wood float. B. Sidewalk Paving: Ught broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius. C. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Make two applications in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07 9005 for joint sealer requirements. 3.10 TOLERANCES CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures. and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. END OF SECTION 4.. cP v,.., c; .,,;. c- -or ""-" ---<.."(:) ";: f :;:-- .\.\\ -~ . \ -;""'", \".--' (."', \."-"'",,. , \.i-:: -;::;;- \J- (""o.l - t~ \(;:l .g;, (::;? C...l 7.: .-L , --" -7 Db ~ CONCRETE PAVING 321313- 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 329219. SEEDING ~ '::::? ~ C:;\ '-:.;""') - ~ PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 6 'Z,.O .> ~\ ~..... A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Seeding, mulching, and fertilizer. c. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS y A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the landscape Architect andlor the Architect with the following requirements: 1. Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformance with USDA listings and those of established nursery suppliers. B. All quantities of seed listed are for weights and percentages of pure live seed (PlS). 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass, 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product data: Provide manufacturer's data indicating composition and components of commercially prepared fertilizer and other soil amendments. C. Seed bag mix tags 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed mixture. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers Showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. SEEDING 329219- 1 ...-(\ .~ ...,<\ .. ;..-.. > \..__../ 1~ u' .. t"~ ';:.0 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Contractor shall continue to mow, water, fertilize, weed. reseed and repair as necessary until final acceptance of the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture: Proportion of Kentucky Blue Grass. Creeping Red Fescue and Perennial Rye B. Acceptable Mix: cD 1. ......Kentucky Blue Grass: 70 percent. U''') ~ .. 2/3Creeping Red Fescue Grass: 20 percent. C'"'> ~ ~orlea Perennial Rye: 10 percent. ("-" -:- 'JJ .,\2.oiiSol~~ERIALS l~= J); T9PSOn: Excavated from site and free of weeds. 9i03 ~C~IES Ag MUIC~9 Material: Oat or wheat straw. free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant C-" life, and dry. Chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. B. Fertilizer: Granular, controlled release type; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as per soil testing laboratory fertilizer mix recommendations. C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 2200. B. loosen seed bed by lightly discing - minimum working depth 3 inches; repair eroded areas. C. Rake to ensure smooth. uniform surface texture free from rocks, dirt clods and debris. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1000 sq ft. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topSOil. Roll the prepared and fertilized seed bed. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a rate of 5 Ibs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. SEEDING 329219- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. Planting Season: April 15 - May 30 (Spring); August 1 ~ September 15 (Fall). D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. E. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply dry, cereal straw or wood excelsior mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. F. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. G. Following germination, immediately re-seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4 by 4 inches. 3.05 SEED PROTECTION A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string or tape around area periphery. Set string height to 24 inches. Space stakes at 60 inches. Maintain protection throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric and as shown on the drawings. C. lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. D. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. E. lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. F. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Water as necessary to establish a close stand of grasses specified and reasonably free of weeds and undesirable grasses. B. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. c. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities, D. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacture(s instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. E. Immediately re-seed areas which show bare spots. F. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. G. Maintain seed areas by mowing at a maximum height of 3 inches until completion of project. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at anyone mowing. END OF SECTION S1 "0.::.. () )> -'-':i ~-~...::) (::;:;) <.:ro c:J f'i C"") -rl (---.\ \ j N -::; -'J , -'''''''''1 w ....0 SEEDING 329219- 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15014 BACKFfLLlNG SECTION 15015 TRENCHING SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15100 VALVES SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANElBOARDS SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS END OF DOCUM ENT 00011 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r-j ,:::;:S c:":::l -- ;,.::J- S-C' ..._'~;.. ::=\; c::' ~ 'OJ,~' ("'") --n --- -".'----- -,.~-.... --- , -f\ .,.-~..--". "-) \---V -0 :3:".. c.." .. .r- )7 .J:> T ABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00011-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (', ....." ' U-'~ . cO u> ;;, 4- ~ --~,,,, 1iS2 ~ Lj"/: ~; =, \?.:~ C'-1 .--",-~ . --- - \J-- c) \..J (:::.::I ...P C'~-' '-~ c-..t .~=- ~:::: O~ o .....-.. TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00011-2 Division 15 Mechanical Systems l? .~~:: 0, ',>'" --..'. -'._~ r"" ...-.~~') ('-.:-~.., cr -.n . ~;::. - N .'n .-1 ~ ":~,_.J v) .. .r-- '-" ,-, -..---' G.:, \ co u) C!-> :C 0- N - --- \..L- .Q. ~ ~-o (-"'~., ~ t\~:\ - 7' ~ ,.:1'~ \':::. o [Blank Page] - -..- ':C):f: b -- ~~l '6 ....0 C,:I c'::1 ,oJ SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 05.0~ A&J #2B!640.~:; ~.~ .?-;:rO L~ :';::-~ /\ - " ":"" \ ',~:'" \-' ....c ~ .,~:/, Riverside Festival Stage Improvements t.,) .. PART 1. GENERAL ,-' J:> 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all materials and Jabor and all equipment to make complete operating mechanical systems, Place all such equipment in initial operation, make all initial tests to ensure compliance with specifications and their intent, obtain approval in writing from all governing bodies having jurisdiction over this work to ensure compliance with all laws, ordinances and standards in effect. B, Provide all materials and labor to provide utility connections for any Owner furnished equipment. Install any Owner furnished equipment in strict accordance with all requirements of the equipment manufacturers. C. Install all equipment whether Contractor or Owner furnished in accordance with the equipment manufacturer requirements and/or recommendations. D. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide utility hook ups and final conneclions to equipment specified in other specification Divisions to have mechanical utilities. The Division 15 Contractor shall perform the pressure and leak integrity tests as specified in these Sections. E. Participate with the Testing and Balancing Contractor and the Architect in the overall commissioning of the new mechanical systems. This commissioning effort shall include the adjustment of mechanical system components as necessary for the different systems to function together as intended and participation in the demonstration and "shakedown" operations necessary to "debug" the mechanical system operation. The commissioning effort shall be in addition to any system demonstrations specified to be provided by the Contractor. F. Drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the Work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations 01 the Work. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items such as pipe and duct fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be indicated. Where such items are required by Code or by other Sections, or where required for proper installation of the Work, provide such items. G. Equipment SpeCifications may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts. controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Provide such items where required whether or not specifically identified. H, Provide site utilities including materials, trenching, backfilling and utility company coordination as follows: 1. Provide site sanitary drain piping and structure indicated to be installed outside of the building. 2. Provide buried site domestic water piping. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.2. MEASUREMENTS A. All measurements must be verified from actual observations at the project site. The Contractor is responsible for all his work fitting into place in .approved, satisfactory, and workmanlike manner in every particular. 1.3. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. General character and scope of work are illustrated on Drawings and/or listed in Specifications. Drawings and Specifications are complementary one to the other; whatever is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 1.4. LAWS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. Obtain and pay for all licenses and permits, pay all fees andlor charges for meters and associated devices, pay all charges for connection to outside services. Comply with all laws, ordinances, regulations and code requirements applicable to this work. It is assumed that the Contractor is familiar with all laws, codes and ordinances governing his work and that all work done by him will be approved by authorities having jurisdiction over his work. B. All work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable Laws, Codes and Regulation of the governmental Bodies having jurisdiction over the site. c;1 ,-".,,1 o if, c;:;'> ,-.J C. Work not regulated by Governmental Bodies shall be performed in accordance with current issues of the following Codes and Standards. 1. Air Moving and Control Association, Inc. - AMCA. 2. American National Standards Institute - ANSI. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME 4. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM. 5. American Water Works Association - AWWA. ~ 6. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry - MSS. /~ -..{, C) 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA. \~~ft-.-~~. ~: ~:::~~:: ~:~~~~o~~~t~:~ ~:~~~tion - NFPA. .} 10. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - SMACNA. ?:''":i.. 11. Underwriters' laboratories - Ul. '6 'Z' 12. local and State Building Codes; Plumbing, Mechanical, etc. 513. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers- -- ASHRAE. 14. International Mechanical Code - 2003 15. Uniform Plumbing Code - 2000 16. MidAmerican Energy Company. 17. Energy Code for Commercial and High Rise Residential Buildings, ASHRAE 90.1 18. International Fire Code - 2003 cP \.r> (!-> ('\ \.--.-. \.J...' . \ -::::::. \.i- .,:. 0- ~ - D. The Contractor shall have copies of all MSDS sheets lor hazardous items used for construction at the job site and shall train personnel in the use of these substances. 1.5. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Final settlement will not be made with the Contractor until the system has been thoroughly checked and found in good operating condition as determined by the Architect and the Testing and Balancing Contractor. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test by Architect's Representative at any and all times. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.6. COOPERATION AND PROGRESS Architect shall have right to reject defective material and workmanship and require its~~ correction without cost to the Owner. zg. ~ <:) Q /) ,,:;, .c-? L;..-. '- .,?-- /,...-- .,,/ ")7 /I, \....:> A. Keep.informed about the work of all other. trades en~aged in the project and exe~ !he ....0. work In such a manner as not to delay or Interfere wIth the progress of other contra~s~.\ -;0' This Contractor shall schedule his work so that no other contractor is delayed in the .:::=::~':L <B execution of his work. Complete cooperation of all trades is expected. Employ a co~. ent s:~ ~p foreman on job throughout the entire project to ensure that coordination is maintained.y ...-<:'\ \/ /~>, '\\ -'. ~~~ ,.J B. Schedule and coordinate the work of this Division with the schedule of the Contractor to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. C. Examine fully the Drawings and Specifications for other Contractors for other trades, and coordinate the installation of this work with the work of the other Contractors. D. Participate in the coordination of utilities for all areas to coordinate the installation of all mechanical system components with all other trades, including structural and electrical components and electrical trades. Allocate space in the different areas 10 allow for the installation of ductwork, piping, waste and vents and mechanical equipment above ceilings, in walls and in equipment spaces. Recommend rerouting, resizing or relocation of mechanical components, if necessary, so all trades can install their systems in the space allotted. Any proposed changes from the systems layout, on the drawings, shall be done in accordance with the design criteria specified in the applicable codes and shall be subject to the review and acceptance of the Architect. E. Utility installation in congested areas is dependent on the sequence of utility installation as much as it is dependent upon the physical size of the utilities. The contractor shall use the utility coordination process to properly sequence the installation of utilities as appropriate to ensure the above ceiling and congested area utility installation is satisfactory. All Contractors and subcontractors shall participate in the utility coordination process. 1.7. PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect the work from damage or injury by keeping all pipes and waste lines plugged, capped, drained, ductwork sections capped and plugged and all equipment covered or otherwise protected. Damaged material or equipment shall be replaced or repaired without cost to the Owner. All pieces of equipment shall be given suitable protection from injury or damage and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. B. Do not route piping above any electrical equipment unless the piping serves that equipment. When piping is required to be installed in electrical rooms or directly above electrical equipment, provide a corrosion resistant drain pan to protect the electrical equipment. 1.8. SLEEVES AND CHASES A. All pipes that pass through nonrated walls shall have pipe sleeves 1" larger than pipe and pipe covering if covered. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves 1/2" larger than pipe installed of sufficient length to extend 1" above floor line. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Sleeves shall be perfectly plumb and pipe placed concentrically within sleeve; sleeves shall be set during construction. If specifically approved by Architect, sleeves may be set later using carbide tipped hole saws and approved methods of cutting. All MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010~3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (-, " \ .........." \.0, , , :;::::~ u- through penetrations through floors shall be sealed watertight. All ducts passing through non rated walls and floors shall be sealed in a manner similar to that specified for piping. There shall be no unsealed opening around any duct penetrations. B. Sleeves in exterior walls shall be provided with approved waterproofing. Floor sleeves shall be sealed with Permagum or Architect approved equivalent. Piping requiring chases in a wall shall be reported to the Contractor and located so that they can be provided. Failure to provide this coordination will result in Contractor cutting and patching wall to satisfaction of the Architect at no additional expense. C. Non-permanent pipe sleeves may be plastic as manufactured by Spenzel Company to facilitate removal from concrete prior to pipe installation. Verify locations of acceptable use by obtaining approval from Architect. D. All piping and sleeves passing through all nonrated and exterior walls shall be packed in space between piping and sleeve with insulation for full length of sleeve. Calk sleeve air tight at both ends. E. All piping and ducts passing through fire-rated walls, ceilings and floors shall conform to UL standards and be installed as shown in UL listed details. For piping passing through fire- resistive assemblies, sleeves shall extend the length in both directions from structure as detailed in the applicable Ul assembly detail. The piping penetration shall have the equivalent fire resistive rating as the Ul assembly indicated. It is not necessary that the penetration be identical to the UL penetration assembly indicated. Firestopping material shall be as 3M #CP25 or Architect approved equivalent. Ducts passing through rated structure shall meet SMACNA and NFPA 90A requirements for rated structure penetrations. F. j)leeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation '{j-) ~d to allow for free movement of pipe. C!-> ;i. 6 :;:. qF-\ W~terproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing 0- ':;r@1eriaL ()--" ('oJ -0 - H. "?!D fjpished areas where pipes are exposed, terminate sleeves flush with wall, partitions and t:1 \~~s, and extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in ~ are~likely to entrap water. c) c.;.' '1: Pipe to wall penetration closures for underground pipe penetrations shall be: 1. Linkseal by Thunderline Corp. 2. CaJpico Pipe Lerax by Calpico, Inc. 1.9. SITE SERVICES AND UTILITIES A. Provide of site sewer lines, and new underground domestic water lines as indicated. B. The site active utilities have been located as accurately as possible, however, the exact location is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall personally inspect such conditions and determine such locations or coordinate the placement of these site utilities with the site utility installing contractor. Variations from locations indicated will not be basis for additional compensation or contract time extensions. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.1 o. IDENTIFICATION A. Every mechanical device, piece of equipment, starter, control panel, furnished by the Contractor which does not have an identifying name plate shall be stenciled to identify its use. Exact identification words shall be verified on jobsite. Labels shall be located as approved by Architect. Labels shall be 1-1/2" x 3", 18 gage brass tags as manufactured by Mechanical Tag Systems, Cedar Rapids, Iowa, with approved printing. The tags shall be riveted or screwed to equipment. 1.11. ELECTRICAL WORK A. In general, Division 16 will carry service to disconnect and extend wiring to motor starter and then to motor. Wiring over and above this, unless specifically indicated on electrical plans, shall be by Contractor furnishing equipment. B. Any electrical work done by the Division 15 Contractor shall be done in accordance with Division 16 requirements. C. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wiring for equipment furnished, including control system wiring specified under Section 15950. Electrical materials shall meet the requirements of Division 16 Sections. D. Provide motors, motor starters and contactors for equipment specified in DiV~1(1;5~. "'-'i\ sections, except where they are an integral part of a motor control center speGltiefhn Di'Vi!;ion ..::::: 16 sections.~) -< "N"1""I '~-~~ C.'_".), __..~~ E. Coordinate motors and mechanical equipment which require electrical services:'ff1\\ -;: ',j requirements of Division 16 sections. ,5 -;~d:. c....) :2::../ ~_ F. Where motors or equipment furnished require larger services or services of dilfer~ '.:::0 characteristics or configurations than those indicated, provide material and services to fit the molors or equipmenl furnished. G. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for channeling concrete block filled, block walls for conduit if required for interconnecting control and power wiring provided for Division 15 equipment that requires wiring by the Division 15 Contractor. 1.12. SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for general submittal requirements. B. Coordinated shop drawings shall be provided on all equipment specified in Division 15 and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections and general provisions of this specification. Additionally, all shop drawings submitted pertaining to major equipment items shall include the particular item(s) intended for installation drawn on minimum 1/4" scale blue-line backgrounds or reproducible mylars indicating sufficient information to ensure compatibility with physical constraints, manufacturer required maintenance and code clearances. and indication of non-interference with work installed by other trades and other work installed by this trade. Submittals not in accordance with the above noted conditions will be returned to the Contractor without action. Any claims arising from delay in construction scheduling due to submission of non-conforming shop drawings will not be honored. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Substitute Items: 1. Following contract award, modified structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical work or redesign required as a result of the Contractor implementing an approved Alternate, or providing substitute or "approved equal" materials and equipment shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Said costs shall be borne in their entirely by the Contractor, unless specifically stated and included as such in the Contractor's bid submission under Substitute Items bid requirements as outlined in Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Substitute items will be allowed only under the conditions specified in the General Conditions and Division 1 of the specifications. D. The Contractor shall not install or fabricate any items without receiving accepted shop drawings from the Architect for those sections requiring submittals. E. Both Division 15 and Division 16 contractors shall provide written certifications that the electrical services to the mechanical equipment are totally compatible with the mechanical equipment. Certification shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative and the Architect prior to energizing the equipment. F. The Division 15 Contractor shall submit evidence of having transmitted accepted equipment shop drawings to the Division 16 Contractor for use in coordinating the mechanical and electrical system interfaces. The evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner's Representative. 1.13. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide Record Documents (As Built Drawings). Refer to Division 1 lor specific requirements. 1.14. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS c.) \..\-..1 o ..P c:> c~ ,....j k Provide operating and maintenance manuals as required by individual sections. Reier to :c; Division 1 for specific requirements. *(~) "dJ(:-Jnstructions in Operation. (:: \":,.. 1. After all tests and adjustments have been made and the maintenance manual has , C) been completed and given to Owner, furnish one or more full-time qualilied ~.......- ~ ~[;,: personnel as necessary to put mechanical Work in continuous operation lor a period ---':2:0 of not less than one day, 8 hours, during which time the designated personnel's only __ purpose shall be to give complete operating and maintenance instructions to the operating personnel selected by Owner, and furnish all service necessary for the proper operation and protection of mechanical Work. Fuel, power, and other supplies required during this period will be furnished by Owner. C$) \JI C0 r--\ ,~.l. \.i-I, \ I ::;::... \J-- ""?f'"" c::. ('\ - 1.15. USE OF NEW EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. All work shall be kept clean and free of debris as conslruction progresses. Material finishes shall be protected by covers to prevent impingement of corrosive and abrasive elements. Exterior finish damage shall be repaired to original condition. B. All ductwork sections shall be kept clean and free of debris and dust as construction progresses. Individual lengths of ductwork shall have ends capped to prevent the entrance of construction dust, dirt, water and other debris while being stored on site. The interior surfaces of all supply air and return duct pieces shall be wiped clean prior to being installed MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 into the duct system. All duct system openings in unfinished duct systems shall be taped shut or wrapped in plastic to maintain the interior surface cleanliness during the construction period. C. The new HV AC systems shall not be used to ventilate, heat or cool any areas under construction or during periods of interior finishing such as painting. However, the building HVAC may be used for construction period HVAC system start up and check out under the following conditions. 1. The system operation shall be set up so the maximum air feasible from the space is exhausted. 2. The air balancing of the air delivery systems shall not occur whenever there is system finishing such as painting. 3. Precautions shall be taken to keep control elements such as duct probes protected from dust or vapor damage. If these devices cannot be adequately protected during the construction ventilation process, they shall be removed from the duct system and re-inserted after the construction period ventilation process is finished. 4. Each fan shall be run continuously for 24 hours after the system air balance and all construction have been completed to "flush" all dirt from the duct system. 1.16. OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for cutting and patching requirements. B. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for cutting openings in existing walls, floors or ceilings for piping and duct penetrations in these structures. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. <5 1.17. CONCRETE WORK ~~ (~1 r--' 'r,~ C:r C? j--t') '(J ..n -'~'-- A. Refer to Division 3 for concrete requirements. N ..n ,---- 'p ~ B. Concrete equipment bases, retaining walls and equipment pads for all floor and9!i~ ~? mounted equipment shall be provided and installed by the Division 15 Contractor.Z )?" C, The Division 15 contractor shall be responsible coordinating the information concerning sizes, dimensions, and locations for concrete equipment pads and bases. Provide pads and bases for all floor mounted mechanical equipment except terminal units located within the classrooms and other spaces. 'c_--l \._,~,) 0' c:> D. Provide concrete equipment supports or bases for the water chillers. 1.18. ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors where required for access to components and equipment whether or not such access panels are indicated on the drawings. Access panels shall be a minimum size of 24" x 24" unless the Contractor gets specific permission from the Architect to change. Locations shall be approved by the Architect. B. Refer to individual sections for product and installation requirements. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010~7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.19. ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Fit escutcheons around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter to cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 1.20. ANCHORING OF EQUIPMENT A. Secure equipment located on floor slab to the floor with anchor bolts unless it is mounted on wheels and capable of being moved. A minimum of two bolts, but generally four or more, are required per each piece of equipment. Provide bolts of sufficient size to prevent equipment of overturning. 1.21. PAINTING OF MECHANICAL WORK A. Refer to the Painting Section for painting requirements and painting schedule. Painting of mechanical components shall be under the Painting Section, not under Division 15. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate his work with the painting section. B. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for touch up painting and repair of surfaces that are specified to be factory finished. Such surfaces include, but are not limited to, the terminal units and louvers. .... ) 1.22. ENVIRONMENTAL CLASSIFICATIONS A. Refer to Division 16 specifications and the electrical construction drawings for the definitions, location and requirements for electrical equipment located in areas with different environmental requirements (Le. flammable, wet location, outside, dust hazard). B. Electrical and electronic control components and wiring furnished by the Division 15 Contractor shall be suitable for use in the environments specified in electrical specifications and as indicated on the electrical drawings. 1.23. MODEL NUMBERS -::::-:-- 0---- c--l - V v) o ".., ~::;:t ~/.' ~ A. Model numbers are used in some instances to help define the overall characteristics required of a specific component, however, it is recognized that model numbers change from time to time or that the model numbers listed may be incorrect. The Contractor shall provide the components that satisfy the performance requirements specified. rather than providing units meeting the model number requirements in the event there is a discrepancy. A- /13:. The bidders and Contractor shall not rely solely upon the model numbers for selecting the ....t:-~.: appropriate components to be furnished. \ )",', ~.r: '{6~~ is the bidder's sole responsibility to call the attention of the Architect any discrepancies ";>'_ o~tween the performance requirements specified and any model number used during the \:6~ding period prior to issue of the last addendum. II no such notification is made it will be ~med that no such discrepancies exist. ;;;.-- cP \J") C?> ~ 0..- (\ "V".' \}..j., MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-8 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.24. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Safety Devices. Thoroughly check all safety devices to assure proper operation and protection. B. Service. 1. Perform service on all mechanical Work until date of substantial completion including oiling, and greasing, adjustments, cleaning, packing of seals, and other items as recommended by equipment manufacturer in the maintenance manual hereinbefore specified. 2. Strainers. a. Remove, clean and reinstall each strainer screen as specified below alter systems have been flushed as specified in Section 15410, Plumbing Piping. (1) Clean each strainer after all adjustments have been made and system has operated a minimum of 24 hours, but before final test and balancing operation is started. (2) Clean each strainer again, after final test and balancing operation and before substantial completion of the Project. b. Certain screens may remain out of the strainer body alter removal during final cleaning only as directed by Architect. 3. Purge all air from water systems after each servicing. a. Protect all materials and finishes during each servicing operation, and repair or replace to original condition, those damaged as a result of servicing. 4. Replace insulation removed or damaged after each operation. leave insulation as specified in Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. 5. Contractor may coordinate servicing operations with Owners operating personnel so as to coincide with time interval specified for instruction in operation. ~, 6. Put system in full operating condition before substantial completion Qi.Projec~ o c:r- C. Alarms. Test and adjust alarms for satisfactory operation. ~~ 0, 8 -~,.:~ 1.25. FIELD TESTS/COMMISSIONING C) _ _ t rV ~. -0 A. Tests and Adjustments. _._" C;'; ::;;:: 1. Upon completion of the installation and before substantial completion 6l.)fr,Ject,<:'? Contractor shall make all necessary tests and adjustments to place the~stem ir~J' working condition. Systems shall be balanced as specified in Section 15990, C> TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. General operating tests shall occur following completion of final testil1g and balancing, and shall demonstrate that the entire Work is functioning in accordance with Specifications. Furnish all instruments, test equipment, and competent personnel that are required for tests. 2. Final Acceptance Test Inspection. a. Prior to final acceptance of an "Division 15 - Mechanical" equipment, material, systems and subsystems, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Architect or his representative and the Owner's Representative that all equipment, systems and subsystems including accessories, appurtenances, controls, safety devices, control and safety device interlocks, etc., function properly in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the equipment manufacturers specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with the tests and demonstrations, including making available equipment manufacturers service representatives to perform those tests or demonstrations that are beyond his capability, or that he prefers not to perform. 3. Special tests for individual systems may be found specified under the individual specification sections. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS . SECTION 15010-9 " ",,-\ \, \ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.26. JOB CONDITIONS A. Job Conditions: 1. Existing Pipe lines. a. If any water, gas, or other pipes and appurtenances existing or put in service by other contracts are encountered which interfere with the proper installation of new work under this Contract and which will no longer be used after installation of new work, close such appurtenance in a proper manner, and if necessary, move or remove the appurtenances as directed by the Architect. b. Where Work installed by other contracts or existing is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with the Specifications. Materials used shall be same as existing unless otherwise specified. 2. Contract Drawings and Specifications. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only, and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Verify exact locations from field measurements. General character and scope of work are illustrated on the drawings and/or listed in the Specifications. Drawings and Specifications are complimentary one to the other; whatever is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 3. Space Requirements. Consider and coordinate for space, limitations imposed by contiguous work, in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect. 4. Obstructions. a. The drawings may indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which have been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, as to accuracy 01 location or completeness. b. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with the Architect, the Owner, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. Verify locations prior to commencing operations. c. Where unknown obstructions are encountered, alter routing of new work as directed by the Architect. d. Contractor shall assume total responsibility lor and repair any damage to existing known utilities or construction. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Coordination of Work. a. Plan all Work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for installation of Mechanical Work. Provisions shall be made for all special frames, openings, pipe sleeves, and vapor barrier seals as required. b. Verify the Owner's inspection requirements and abide by their rights of inspection before covering or otherwise concealing any piping, wiring, or equipment. c. Order of precedence: the Contractor shall lay out all work well enough in advance to avoid conflicts or interference with other work in progress so that in case of interference the mechanical layout may and shall be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all work and take all action as required to avoid conflicts between the work of this trade and that of other trades, inclusive of all required operating, code and service access clearances. Unless specifically noted otherwise, establish the exact location of mechanical equipment based upon the actual dimensions of equipment furnished. Mechanical and electrical work shall be coordinated so that work may proceed according to the sequence specified in Section 01042 to avoid conflicts. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-10 rP v"" (?J ,L -"" ""-:1'" rY- ":;:.~;.. '::l- \-'-\ -. "v,/ . )~- \0 ~:C- c--- c-.\ ~ (--, "~/ ' 0---\, -:::- V/ --r- / ,-", L".I.-. '\....-< .--.,. U-z <:) v\ \>' c? ..., 'C~ co' l.::....) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Refer to the drawings for specific requirements lor phasing the work to provide joint Contractor/Owner occupancy and use 01 the project spaces. 1.27. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all equipment with factory-installed (wooden) skids end suitable lilting lugs, or deliver equipment, components. and accessories in factory-fabricated protective containers. B. Protect all delivered equipment and materials from foreign matter, weather (rain, snow, wind, dirt/debris) and other damage at all times. C. Inspect all equipment and materials lor damage prior to installation. Remove from the construction site all damaged or corroded materials and equipment. D. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's rigging instructions for unloading and moving equipment to installation locations(s). E. In addition to the above outlined requirements, all piping and shop-fabricated pre-lined and non-lined ductwork sections shall be clear of foreign matter, having temporary end cap enclosures 01 sufficient tightness to prevent foreign matter entry during shipment, storage, and handling prior to installation. 1.28. ENERGY REBATE PROGRAM A. The owner intends on participating in the Mid American Energy 2006 Custom System Program for energy savings rebate. B. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide documentation of actual com'ponents installed and the final cost charged for these components as necessary to complete the rebate submission process. Information required may include, but is not limited to, compiling and submitting model and serial numbers for equipment cuts, showing performance of equipment furnished on the project. END OF SECTION 15010 Q :2:0 'J~~ -' ._~~\ r--) c..:Jl c;;:> 0"' t~ fY'; ':;:-J --n N -0 _t.."- ~'~ -1 J --' c.f? c..n o MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-11 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements {'-.-\ 1.~.'~ LL-', _.J -- Cf::J u'? 8> :C 0.- \J- 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ('oJ ~ ..:~..,.. ...../......-".;::,., -::;; C; C' .",- (j~~ I~\:: ~:,.. () ~::: ~,( 0..;;:;' (:) - - <.-) U.J o ,....<":') ~~;=~ ,--I MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-12 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15014 BACKFILLING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 . SECTION INCLUDES A. Utility trench backfilling for utilities within the scope of work of this contract. B. Consolidation and compaction PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. FilL MATERIALS A. Type A - Crushed Gravel: Pit run, angular, natural stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand, debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 within the following limits: 1. Sieve Size Percent Passinq r."::: a. 2" 100 ,.,.'~", 'is b. 1" 95 6 d' c. 3/4" 95 ?O f:l\ -(\ "':'-~~", 'c-; d. 5/8" 75 -1:;." _--', .- "-- _..r.., -- e. 3/8" 55 r-:> .:,"\ . l. No.4 35 -0 ~.~-\ g. No.16 15 ...;:,. \,.j h. No. 40 10 <--' .. i. No. 200 5 ()"\ c:> B. Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136, to the following: 1. Minimum size: 1/4" 2. Maximum size: 5/8" C. Type C .. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 to the following: 1. Sieve Size Percent Passino a. NO.4 100 b. No.14 10to 100 c. No. 50 5 to 90 d. No. 100 4 to 30 e. No. 200 0 D. Subsoil: Reused, free of gravel larger than 3" size, and debris. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Verily fill materials to be reused are acceptable. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Generally, compact sub-grade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction. Backfill with Type C fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. BACKFILLING SECTION 15014-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at gravel areas, compact subsoil to 95% of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM 0698. o. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at paved areas, compact subsoil to 95% of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM 0698. 3.3. BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. 00 not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" compacted depth. D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 12" compacted depth. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation waterproofing and protective cover, and utilities in trenches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. 00 not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. H. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. I. Remove surplus backfill materials from Site. J. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed. B. Tests and analysis of fill material shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01557, ASTM 0698. C. Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01556, ASTM 01557, ASTM 0698. o. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest. E. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-an-grade, pavers, and paving. END OF SECTION 15014 ~, c--> .6- __-:T ,,?,:';'fI' ~:::~~ ........... \ \ \ \.>- :\ ~ ~ / "x,..... 'p., c-J .,/ 1./"\ \b ,.., "".<>'" c.-::~, ~;j \~::' .'\ -7~4 /,:)\/,/ (/ '0 ~,:-c \6 -:;' '9 BACKFILLING SECTION 15014 - 2 (~\ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15015 TRENCHING PART 1. GENERAL 1,1. SECTION INCLUDES A Excavate trenches for underground utilities within the scope of work of this contract. B. Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to sub-grade elevations C. Backfilling and compaction of trenches. 1.2. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Types A, B, C, and subsoil materials as specified in Section 15014. 2.2, BEDDING MATERIALS A, Type A Material: As specified tor Type A in Section 15014. B. Type B Material: As specified for Type B in Section 15014. 9 ::,''; C"2 C. Type C Material: As specified for Type C in Section 15014. (~) -n ,'--" - 1..+ .' D. Subsoil Material: As specified in Section 15014. ['0 "1 PART 3. EXECUTION ." , ~--"-,"., <,..} 3.1. EXAMINATION /" c.') j; r '"'1 o A. Verify fill material to be reused, is acceptable. 3.2, PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining, which pass through the work area, C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. F. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction. Backfill with Type C fill and TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. 3.3. EXCAVATION A Excavate subsoil required for domestic water and piping, sanitary sewer, and electrical service to points of connection indicated on the Drawings. B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection. C. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 450 bearing splay of foundations. D. Hand trim excavation; Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard, measured by volume. u.- F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner. ~ ~ c..? G< ~orrect areas over-excavated by error. ~:;;C~ t: t9.:.\ ~ckpile excavated material in area designated on the Site and remove excess material not N '..J ~ing used, from the Site. '~.'- ~. BEo~G .;- 0 :;;.. ~g A. sQport pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. e::> <;-..... \-" ~ 1 I ,. I l......'-~,~ ; - -.' 3.5. BACKFILLING A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. ,---' B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" compacted depth. D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 12" compacted depth. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, foundation waterproofing and protective cover, and utilities in trenches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Remove surplus backfill materials from the Site. H. leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed. B. Tests and analysis of fill material shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 0698 C. Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01556, ASTM 01557, TM 0698. o. If tests indicate the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove the Work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION 15015 ~o .~,- ~..,.-~ 1"'- ~ ,:','J c.:;) L:...' ,....L .~"- ..._ (-..-,; -Tl C-) r0 -;1 1 I " , -_/ C",) ..;.....,.- )> ( C1 c:> TRENCHING SECTION 15015 . 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ,-\ , \ \,.-' ", I; , ~i.";""'.'\ i ::::-- \..l- , u.-, i!, 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ~- ~lfli._ 0- C'l '/"'''' \-- .- :.) - ....,.~.- U \;.J o ~.._==- .cJ.: O~ o - ~ ~...,... (:-:.J i.~ .:--I TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 6 ~<- (j ..'" -. ~ .-J c. -~) , ~. .,"' (::: -\\ PART 1. GENERAL -- --- l,j 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES -') 'l \j " ' A. Mechanical basic materials and methods PART 2. PRODUCTS .,.' '.~ /:1" r.:? ( , c::> 2.1. ELECTRIC MOTORS A. All motors provided by the Contractor shall deliver their rated output continuously with temperature rise not to exceed 800C and shall have, class B insulation, withstand a 50% overload momentarily without injurious heating. Motors shall be capable of operating continuously at voltage indicated plus or minus 10 per cent without any failure or loss of performance. Electrical motors specified to be used with variable speed drives shall be suitable for use with variable frequency drives. B. Belt driven equipment to have slide rail bases for belt adjustment. All belt guards shall be four sided fully enclosing all moving parts. C. If mechanical equipment provided by this section requires larger motors and correspondingly larger electrical service including all appurtances, this section shall be responsible for the additional costs over the system costs of the original design of the electrical systems as well as the mechanical systems. D. All combination starters and disconnect switches are to be provided by Division 16 unless specifically noted to be provided by Division 15. E. All electric motors shall meet high efficiency requirements of ASH RAE 90.1 or as follows, whichever requirements are more stringent: 1. Unless otherwise required, provide motors of open dripproof (ODP) construction. For outdoor applications, applications subject to weather, or as specified, provide totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) motors with a corrosion resistant drain plug under each bearing. 2. Efficiency. All motors (except two-speed motors) 3/4 HP and larger shall be of the high efficiency type. Provide General Electric "Energy Saver", Westinghouse "Tee 11 ", U.S. Motors "XB", Baldor "Super-E" motors or A.O. Smith (Century) "High Efficiency". Guaranteed minimum full load efficiencies shall be certified in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Method B, NEMA MG-1-12.53a and shall meet or exceed the values listed in NEMA MG 1, Table 12-6C (March 1991 ) or following minimum efficiency and power factor criteria, whichever is more stringent: MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements MINIMUM NOMINAL EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR FOR OPEN MOTORS RPM HP EFF 900 PF EFF 1200 PF EFF 1800 PF EFF 05.038 A&J #200640.00 .. -- -- -- -- -- -----.. --.. ----.. -- --------- --...... ---.. ---- ----- ---...... --...... ----.......... -- -- -- -- -- - ----.............. ---.... ---- ---..... - .... 3600 PF 3/4 1 81.5 1% 82.5 2 84.0 3 84.0 5 87.5 7% 87.5 10 89.5 15 89.5 20 90.2 25 90.2 30 91.7 40 91.7 r-50 ~1.7 L{ft} ~2.4 '70 :;.~ ~.O ~O t._ -93.0 c... III - 1~5 -=- -' ~3.6 fI'dn f II - ~ '- @.6 >- f.QP ~;~S ~5.9 '--' > 39B, -Q ..-:::':'> (-..I ('... .!.........'-,..} LJ,.\ \ u-- HP 70.5 72.0 78.0 78.0 77.5 78.0 78.0 78.0 84.0 83.5 85.0 84.0 83.5 85.0 84.0 82.5 82.5 81.5 82.5 86.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 91.7 92.4 92.4 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 95.0 95.0 95.4 70.0 74,0 73.0 75.0 71.0 75.0 80.5 80.5 84.0 85.0 83.5 83.5 85.5 85.5 85.5 86.0 85.5 88.5 85.5 86.5 84.0 84.5 86.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 90.2 91.7 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.8 96.2 96.2 96.2 96.5 84.0 85.7 85.7 85.5 88.0 81.7 81.0 86.0 86.5 87.5 88.5 89.0 88.5 88.5 88.5 88.0 88.0 88.0 89.0 83.0 84.0 84.0 85.5 86.5 87.5 89.5 90.2 91.7 92.4 92.4 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.4 95.8 95.8 85.1 87.3 85.7 86.9 88.2 86.3 89.2 89.8 92.0 91.7 88.6 88.7 88.5 88.0 88.0 88.0 88.0 94.0 89.5 MINIMUM NOMINAL EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR FOR TEFC MOTORS RPM EFF 900 PF EFF 1200 PF EFF 1800 PF EFF ----------------.... -- ---.. ---------------.... --.. --- --.. ----- -- - --............ --.. --......... --.......... -- -- --.. --.. ---- -- ---- ---------_...... 3600 PF 3/4 1 1% 2 3 5 7Y2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 81.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 87.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 90.2 91.7 91.7 91.7 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 70.5 72.0 78.0 78.0 77.5 78.0 78.0 78.0 84.0 83.5 85.0 84.0 83.5 85.0 84.0 82_5 82.5 81.5 82.5 86.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 91.7 92.4 92.4 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 95.0 95_0 95.4 70.0 74.0 84.0 84.0 75.5 73.0 84.5 85.7 84.0 85.1 75.0 86.5 85.7 85.5 87.3 71.0 88.5 85.5 86.5 85.7 75.0 88.5 88.0 87.5 86.9 80.5 89.5 81.7 89.5 88.2 80.5 90_2 81.0 90.2 86.3 84.0 91.7 86.0 91.7 89.2 85.0 92.4 86.5 92.4 89.8 83.5 93.0 87.5 92.4 92.0 83.5 93.0 88.5 93.0 91.7 85.5 93.6 89.0 93.0 88.6 85,5 93.6 88.5 94.1 88.7 85.5 94.5 88.5 94.1 88.5 86.0 95.0 88.5 94.1 88.0 85.5 95.4 88.0 94.5 88.0 88.5 95.8 88.0 95.0 88.0 85.5 96.2 88.0 95.4 88.0 86.5 96.2 89.0 95.4 94.0 96.2 83.0 95.8 89.5 96.5 84.0 95.8 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTOR EFFICIENCIES Minimum HP Efficiency (%) ~ - - --........ -..... -- -........... -......... --- ---...-..... --- - - - - -- - --- ------ - - - ----- - -- ----- ------- ---- -- -... -- - - -------- - -- - --... - - -- ---.. - -- -... 1/20 1/10 1/8 1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 35 35 35 35 54 56 60 ~ l.--:_ ,..-. " ), " ,1 -!\ (-~~. f'-.) -, ....,.., ."'\, ',.j c) - ( .., 3. Bearings: Supply motors with antifriction bearings conservatively rated foffong lifeo under the total radial and thrust loads produced by the motor and driven equipment. Bearings in fractional horsepower motors shall be the grease packed, sealed type. Integral motor bearings shall be grease lubricated; include alemite fillings and pressure relief devices in locations suitable lor in-service lubrication. 4. Motors shall have thermal overload protection by this work category. 2.2. PIPE STANDS A. Pipe stands shall consist of two or more sets of pipe columns with the columns of each set joined by pipe beams. All pipe joints made with welded fittings and tank cradles shall be strapped or bolted to pipe beams. Floor loading shall not exceed the safe load for floor on which placed. B. Pipe shall be new, black steel, schedule 40 or heavier, painted same as associated piping. 2.3. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS OR DIVISIONS A. This Section shall make connections to equipment furnished by other Sections providing such accessories as may be specified herein. In all cases furnish ball valves (stops) or gas cocks at all equipment for all services, and complete installation of equipment in building. Inspect other sections of the specifications and plans carefully to determine requirements for this Section. B. The Contractor shall provide rough-ins for Owner furnished and installed equipment as specified in the specific section. The Contractor shall provide all necessary service connections to make systems completely operational. Contractor shall verify all connection requirements from certified shop drawings before beginning construction. 2.4. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. All suspended mechanical equipment shall be supported by structural steel shapes furnished and installed by this Contractor. All supports shall be installed and fabricated in an approved manner coordinated with the equipment manufacturer. All screws, bolts, etc., for mounting exposed to weather shall be brass with lead washers. Where special isolation bases required, they are covered elsewhere in these specifications. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2.5. FLASHING A. All pipes and ductwork passing through the roof or other exterior waterproofing membranes shall be r1ashed to match the roofing water proof membrane or the exterior waterproofing membrane. 2.6.CEllING, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES A. All ceiling, wall and floorplates Crane No. 13-BC or Architect approved equivalent chrome plated pressed steel plates. Floor plates shall be installed around pipe sleeves. Plates shall be installed in all occupied areas. 2.7. FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Provide sufficient flanges or screwed unions in equipment piping to facilitate taking down of piping in easily handled sections at any future time. Sheet packing shall be used on flanged unions and r1anged connections. Bronze to iron unions satisfactory up to 2" size. 2.8. CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMilAR METALS A. Provide flanged and gasketed connections between piping of dissimilar metals. B. DO NOT use Dielectric unions at these connections. 2.9. PIPE SIZE A. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are the minimum sizes required for system hydraulic performance. If the pipe size indicated is not readily available the Contractor shall provide the next larger pipe size available, including valves, fittings and other pipe components at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST AllA TION A. Install all items specified in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15050 ("-~\ '~~ \ \>~"\ .6- --1' ,:~ / /('"' ~::S;,:~>. ~ .~ '. -:g,. <"'"\\/"", \j U ~ _/ ,- .....- -----:;.-0;;. (..:,\. \) .<,? -:::/ \b 9- \.\--- 0 _..~ ~~, c- ~) v c., MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15100 VALVES 'c--' ..~~ --->n ~;..-". ~ .- __c\ PART 1. GENERAL '-'j ,-J-.-_ '.. ; \~,) .\ . -.... 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES .~<-,' '-~ . "\ A. This Section includes all valves within the mechanical systems inside and outsT~ the building if the valves are not specified elsewhere. '. ';>.:.. 7" C.? f 4, o 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. All gate valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened, and shall be equipped with packing suitable for intended service. When valve is fully opened, back seat shall protect the packing and stem threads from fluid. 2. Bronze Valves: a. Valves with steam pressure rating of 125 psig or 150 psig shall have pressure containing parts of a material conforming to ASTM B62. b. Bronze gate and check valves shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) of the valve and linings industry SP-80. 3. Iron Body Valves: a. Pressure containing parts of valves shall be of material conforming to ASTM A 126, Grade B. b. Face.ta-face and end-to-end dimensions shall conform to ANSI B16.10. c. Gate valves shall conform to MSS SP-70. 4. Valve stems shall be copper silicon alloy conforming to ASTM 8371 or ASTM 8584. 5. Wheel handles shall be non-heating style cast from malleable iron with a corrosion resistant epoxy or enamel finish, or commercial aluminum. 6. Butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-67. 7. Check valves shall operate equally well in horizontal or vertical positions. 8. All valves shall be full line size unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 9. Provide valve stem extension of length to suit layout and depth for valves specified on the drawings. 10. Do not use gate valves unless specifically indicated for a specific application. Use ball valves as specified lor water service 2" and under, and butterfly valves for sizes over 2". 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit valve shop drawings for all valves to be supplied. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. General: 1. Insofar as possible, all valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. All gate and swing check valves as a group shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All valves 2" and smaller shall be threaded and have bronze bodies, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 3. All valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body bronze mounted (IBBM) type and shall be flanged. 4. All valves 4" and larger mounted in excess of 7'-0" above the Iloor in mechanical VALVES SECTION 15100-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 rooms shall be equipped with chain operators. Extend chains to within 6'-6" of floor. 5. Mark each valve at the factory with the following minimum information, engraved, stamped, or cast on each valve or metal tag, permanently attached to the valve. a. Manufacturer's Name. b. Catalog or Figure No. c. Size and Pressure Class. d. Arrows to indicate direction of flow on check valves. e. Underwriters' laboratories (UL) approved valves shall bear the Underwriter's label Permanently attached to the valve body. 6. It is understood that valve manufacturers change model numbers from time to time. The Contractor shall supply current valves that have equal characteristics to the old model numbers specified in such an event. , U' C0 d. B. Gate Valves: Where specifically specified on the drawings. 1. Class 125: a. General: Furnish valves 12" and smaller designed for 125 psig steam and 200 psig non-shock water, oil and gas working pressure b. Size 2" and Smaller: (1) Furnish bronze valves with screwed-in bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, and threaded ends. (2) Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (a) Crane 438 (b) Hammond 1 B-645 (c) Jenkins 992 (d) Kennedy 427 (e) lunkenheimer 2129 (f) Milwaukee 105 (g) Nibco T-113 (h) Powell507 (i) Stockham B-1 03 (j) Walworth 4 c. Size 2-1/2" and larger: (1) Furnish iron body bronze mounted (IBBM) valves with bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat rings. (2) Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (a) Crane 461 (b) Hammond 1 RI138 (c) Kennedy 058 (d) lunkenheimer 1428 (e) Milwaukee F2882 (f) Nibco F-619 (g) Powell1787 (h) Stockham G-612 (i) Walworth 8719F/719F (., , j t..--. \ \J-.\ \ (c -~ ~ / ~;-~.... ~b;,,:;:!- \,-~_..\ b: U. \ ").,-=- c.J c.) '~~3 -- ?=- ~J:. ~-:.\ \'0 ~O.:: (:::) ~ ;;;.-- ~:~~ C. Check Valves: 1. Water, Oil, and Steam, Size 2" and SmatJer: a. Furnish swing check valves designed for 200 psig steam and 400 psig nonshock water, oil, and gas working pressures. Valves shall have renewable discs and side plugs and regrindable, integral seats. Discs shall be renewable and seats reground without removing valves from the line. b. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Crane 36 (2) Hammond 18-949 VALVES SECTION 15100 ~ 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (3) Jenkins 762-A (4) Kennedy 444 (5) lunkenheimer 554Y (6) Milwaukee 508 (7) Nibco T-476-B ~ (8) Powell 560Y ~~. (2 (J (9) Stockham 8-345 . _"".-t (~,) (10)Walworth 3420 / ~~) 2. Size 2-1/2" and Larger:/~ -"""',1 a. Water Check Valves: , ,.' . (1) Valves shall be silent type spring loaded 01 the double door -pr, \!\tafer c,) style. Valves shall be designed for 125 psig nonshock watet-W.drRing ; ',. pressure at 250oF. Y c? ""\\ \ ,:.1 " i \ D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Furnish valves designed for 150 psig and 250oF. water service. Valves shall have extended necks. Operator shall be 1 a-position lever lock for sizes 2" through 5" and totally enclosed and sealed worm gear actuators with 4-arm or wheel handle for sizes 6" and larger, Valves shall be bi-directional suitable for drop-tight shut-off at full rated pressure with flow in either direction. 2. Materials: a. Body: Cast or ductile iron. b. Disc: Bronze, aluminum bronze, or stainless steel. c. Stem: Type 416 stainless steel. d. Seat: Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer (EPDM). 3. Manufacturers and Model Numbers: a. Lug Type: Valves shall be full lug type drilled and tapped. (1) Sizes 2" through 12": (2) Centerline L T Jenkins 642 Nibco NL-082 (3) Crane 24N Keystone 122 Powell 3100 (4) DeZurik 660l Lunkenheimer 4717 Stockham LG7 (5) Hammond 3820 Mission 3100 (a) Wafer Type: (i) Sizes 2" through 12": (6) Centerline A Jenkins 632 Nibco WL-082 (7) Crane 22F Keystone 100 or 228 Powell 3000 (8) DeZurik 660W Lunkenheimer 4537 Stockham lG5 (9) Hammond 3800 Mission 3000 E. Relief Valves: 1. Water: a. Domestic water temperature and pressure relief valve: (1) On domestic hot water heater, provide an ASME rated McDonald Miller or Watts Regulator Co., thermostatic, self-closing temperature and pressure relief valve, located in the relief valve openings on the heater. Valve shall have a minimum thermal discharge capacity equal to the input capacity of the heater, standard pressure setting of 125 psig and standard temperature setting of 210F pipe discharge to floor drain. F. Ball Valves: 1. General: Valves shall be non-blowout stem design. Quarter turn of handle shall fully open or close valve. Handle position shall indicate whether valve is open or closed. Handle stops shall be a permanent, integral part of the body. Provide 3" stem extension on all ball valves to allow for installation of 2" of insulation on ball valve. V ALVES SECTION 15100 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements L~".,; _._"1 u_ PART 3. f- l..") (") ~ -.-:> ""'.,. Q 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Size 2" and Smaller: a. Valves shall be standard port, 2-piece construction with screwed ends. Valves shall be designed for 400 psig WOG working pressure at 150oF. b. Valves shall have bronze or brass body, chromium plated or stainless steel ball, steel handle with vinyl grip, and replaceable tellon seats. c. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Apollo 70-100 (2) Crane 2330 (3) Hammond BV711- T (4) Jamesbury 300 (5) Jenkins 901-A (6) Lunkenheimer 708HST (7) Marpac B780T (8) Nibco T-585 (9) Powell 5220 (1 O)Stockham S-214 (ll)Wans G4000 Size 2-1/2" and larger: a. Valves shall be standard port, ANSI Class 150 with flanged ends. Valves shall be designed for 250 psig working pressure at 150oF. b. Valves shall have steel body, chrome or nickel plated steel or stainless steel ball, replaceable teflon seats, and steel stem and handle. c. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Apollo 88-100/200 Jamesbury 5150 (2) Crane 941- TF Jenkins 1001 ~ .dt4-00. 0- N >-- t:.: ". U ,....- t= -<::1 ();;;:~ b -3. Lunkenheimer 713L T Marpac 400/470 G. Pressure/temperature ratings: valves shall have pressure and temperature ratings equal to or greater than the piping system containing the valves. A. Install all valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings. R Flanged valves shall be installed between flanges. C. Valves installed in insulated domestic water shall have extended handle shafts to provide at least 1/2" clearance between the handle and insulation outer surface to afford operation. D. All valves shall be installed such that all handles are accessible, and that handles may be operated from lull open to full closed position without obstruction. 3.2.ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING <.._) L~.J C',.) '-C> ~::;-' ("':::;:J I>.J EXECUTION 3.1.INST AlLA TION A. Valves and stops shall be adjusted, packed, and repacked as may be required to eliminate leaks and produce proper flow. END OF SECTION 15100 --, VALVES SECTION 15100 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM PART 1. GENERAL t-:l 1 '~" 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES ~ Q...-- ..~._;?"- ,--,I, ~-\\ ~---.::" A. Piping tests for all systems as follows: 1. Gravity flow drains(sanitary) 2. Domestic hot and cold water ~' --- r'" .........J '-i " . "., ) .<, '.), (~') B. Additional tests may be specified in other sections. These shall be performed in additiOn to ';. "'7 (.C'1 those specified in this section. y 0 C. Should governing bodies require tests over and above those specified, they shall be performed and certified for approval by such governing bodies or agencies. D. Perform additional tests as may be required by utility companies or agencies supplying the particular service such as potable water. E. Provide certified lest reports for all systems. F. Maintain permanent record of each test indicating system, or portion of system tested, dale of test, results and signature of witness. 1.2. EQUIPMENT A. Provide all devices, equipment and gases necessary to make tests required. Devices installed in the work shall not be used for test purposes. B. Materials shall be subjected to standard tests by manufacturer before shipment. 1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Make tests during installation and after completion. Tests shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Piping concealed in building construction, chases, et~., shall be tested before being concealed. Contractor failing to make such tests must assume all costs of removing and replacing defective piping and shall pay all costs of cutting and repairing building construction made necessary by this neglect to end of guarantee period. C. Take test prior to insulating piping. Contractor failing to make tests prior to insulating of piping must assume all costs of removing and replacing insulation on defective piping. D. Make hydrostatic tests with cold water. The minimum duration shall be lour hours unless specifically indicated otherwise. Do not use air for pressure testing where cold water is specified as the test medium unless the Architect provides written acceptance of the alternate test medium. E. Advise the Architect one work day prior to testing so the Architect may witness the test if he chooses. Contractor shall be responsible for correct testing, observation of results and corrections necessary. The Contractor shall keep written record of test date. time, pressure, duration, results and obtain signature of witness. TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 F. Provisions shall be made so that every item may be thoroughly inspected, and in no case shall any part of construction be obscured. G. Do not apply test pressures to a hot valve. In event such testing is necessary, install temporary block ahead of valve. Final test of connection against hot valve shall be by examination of work under service pressure. H. Any device connected into system which cannot assume the test pressure shall be disconnected and protected from damage. I. All parts of system under test must be under constant supervision with authority to bleed off excess pressure that may develop. No test shall remain on work unless continuously attended. Use care so that excess pressure does not develop because of temperature changes. J. Work shall be completely leak free at any joint, fittings, accessory, or attachment. If repairs are necessary, re-test work after correction. Correct defecls manifested by these tests before proceeding with other work. K. Fluids shall circulate and flow freely without noise, vibration or hammer on either manual or automatic control, with no evidence of leaks, trapping or binding. L. Mechanical and Electrical equipment shall operate satisfactorily at specified capacity without noise, vibration, overheating or evidence of misalignment or insecure mounting. M. After welding, all welded piping shall be subjected 10 a hydrostatic tesl of at least 150% of design pressure, but in no case less than 60 psig. 1.4. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS 2. 3. 4. .6:.. 5. \" .~~. 6. \of> . c?-> ~f~. ()- 7. .~t. \:S\.~~~ 8. t,j(J 9. , \ C'-) '\..,.l '"" "0, .,'" ~:'~: L -;---- c...\ R\.)!itnilthe individual test reports to the Architect for review within two weeks of successfully D-... \:;...l coh$leting the individual tests. ;:=> ~~\ c-~ A. For each system or portion of system tesled, provide a certificate testifying that the system was tested as specified and provide the following data: 1. Identification of system or portion of system tested referencing specific equipment connected to system. Date tested. T est pressure and duration of test. Recorded test pressure at end of test. Media used for testing. list necessary repairs made before the system passed the leak test. Signature of testing contractor. Signature of witness (must be a representative of lhe General Contractor, the Architect or the Owner) Other data as required by the system specification. ......, _..J PART 2. PRODUCTS - NOT USED TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 ~ 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. GRAVITY EQUIPMENT DRAINS (SANITARY PIPING INCLUDED) A. Inspect all new lines over entire length for obstructions with illumination and by rodding entire length. B. Hydrostatically test building work to maximum head of water possible by plugging outlet and filling system to maximum height as specified in the Uniform Plumbing Code. C. Test systems for gas and water tightness as specified in the Uniform Plumbing Code. D. Work developing leaks shall be repaired or replaced at once. E. Refer to Section 15410 for additional requirements -- ,...--.... \. .! :.~~ ~'-': , ,. ...... (. -) -~\ 3.2. OTHER PiPING SYSTEMS ( ..~.c-__~ I'..) , . .-\ A. Test all piping systems not listed in accordance with systems manufacturer's requIrementS: } ...~.<- { . B. In all cases, blow or flush all piping of all sediment and debris in an approved m~~er. )7 C, Refer to specific Site Utility specification sections for tests required for these systems. c? (~.... o D. Refer to Section 15410 for additional testing requirements 3.3. STRAINERS A. It shall be the responsibility of this section to install all strainers as may be required to properly protect all equipment from sediment or debris in the transported media that could damage such equipment. S. Where permanent strainers are not shown, temporary strainers are required for use during the start up period. C. This section must guarantee that no equipment or device will be damaged during the warrantee period by any dirt, sediment or debris transported through the piping system. D. This section shall be responsible for cleaning permanent strainers and removing temporary strainers from the systems after the testing specified has been satisfactorily completed. The permanent strainer shall be cleaned and the temporary strainers removed only after the Contractor receives specified permission to do so by the Architect. 3.4. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Design temperature and pressure: 1. Temperature: 1200F 2. Pressure: 85 psig B, Hydrostatically test at working pressure 01 system but at not less than 85 psig minimum, 15 minute duration. Test medium shall be taken from a potable water source. Comply with UPC requirements. C. After test blow clean with potable water, leave lines clean of all sediment and debris. TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 ~ 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Sterilize all new lines afler successful completion of piping tests. Slerilization shall be performed in accordance wilh method specified in SECTION - Plumbing Piping. END OF SECTION 15101 , \.0 e, A .-';: 0.: ("-~\ \.---', \\ \ ~.~, -;:::: u- c-J c..' v,,, o ~~~ ~....l .',2:- ~(. \ .._.-,._~ ---".,. () 'ti .- - TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1. GENERAL r-' ('," 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES Q .=;~.-- (~2 t' ) -n ,""'-'- .,.- A. This Section includes piping specialties complete, --- /'--" ) I') ", . 1.2. SUBMITTALS . l \, '1 "-'fi , .J ,', ::',- c) A. Submit shop drawings for expansion tanks, strainers, pressure gages, thermome.~(s,'test (. :, plugs (gage adapter) and air vents. y. 0 PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Air vents shall be installed on all drain points. 1, Manual vents: For vents on equipment, furnish Dole NO.9 coin valves. B. Expansion tank: 1. General: Tanks shall be sizes as shown on Drawings, ASME constructed and stamped for 125 psi working pressure. 2, Diaphragm type pre-pressurized tanks: tank shall be provided with an integral butyl rubber diaphragm which shall contain a sealed-in air cushion pre-charged to the minimum system pressure. Tank shall have an air charging valve and shall be designed 10 a maximum operating temperature of 240oF. 3, Tank manufacturer shall be Amtrol, Bell and Gossett, or Taco. 4. Relief pressure and fill pressure shall be as indicated on the drawings. 5. Tanks for use in domestic (potable) water shall be rated for use in chlorinated potable water systems. c. Strainers: 1. Furnish "Y" type strainers throughout the job unless specifically noted otherwise. Furnish hot dip galvanized strainers in galvanized iron pipe. 2. "V" Strainers: Furnish one manufacturer throughout Project a. Strainers shall be designed for 125 psig minimum steam working pressure equipped with blow-off plugs and manufactured by Crane, Mueller Steam Specialty, Armstrong, Spirax Sarco, or Keckley. Service Size Straining (Inches) (inches) Coarse Medium Fine Water 1/4 to 2 1/10 1/16 30 mesh 2-1/2 to 4 1/8 1/16 3/64 5 up 1/4 1/8 1/10 b. Strainers 2" and Smaller: Furnish screwed ends, screwed bronze cap and gasket in sizes 1-1/2" and smaller and with a bolted cap on 2" size. Screens on water service shall be medium made of monel or Type 304 stainless steel. Furnish iron body strainers Mueller No. 251 FBC or 251 BC except furnish bronze strainers in all copper piping Mueller No. 351. PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15120-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Strainers 2-1/2" through 12": Furnish flanged ends, bolted iron cap and gasket. Screens on water service shall be medium in monel or Type 304 stainless steel. Provide Crane No. 989-1/2. D. Unions: 1. All unions in steel pipe shall be 150 psig malleable iron, screwed, with brass to iron ground joints. 2. All unions in copper pipe shall be cast bronze, wrought copper or wrought bronze, Class 125, with threaded or solder-joint tube ends. 3. Do not provide insulating coupling between piping and equipment of different metals PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Provide valves at each piece of equipment to provide for isolation 01 the equipment Irom its connected system. Locate strainers and valves as necessary to provide easy isolation and cleaning of strainers. B. Strainers shall be installed ahead of all automatic valves and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Provide a ball valve in the blow-off opening of each strainer. C. Unions shall be provided adjacent to each screwed type valve and shall be on the outlet side of valve. D. Furnish piping accessories where shown and as necessary for complete installation of mechanical Work. 3.2. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Valves and Specialties: 1. All valves and specialties shall be adjusted to operate smoothly and without binding or leaking. All vents shall be tested and proven to open freely for passage of air. 2. Expansion tanks shall be checked and proper water/air level adjusted and set. 3. locate strainers as necessary to allow easy cleaning. END OF SECTION 15120 ~ -~,-'" ~) v 2> r\ ,,''''''. c.- \:v' \ ---,,/ "~ '0 C'~ -." / -'" (./ ":.:::;. \......./ -,' ,. Co)..,_ 0 ""ZQ ....;,~ '" ~ \'/'\ ;:/ ~ 1./ ~? ~ PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15120-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES: r---:') " ~, '-? A. This ?ection includes piping supports complete for all piping systems except-~ othenkt~€ specIfied. '~'. 0, .., ~..<) ~ /- " r..) ;.\\ ..~< -~;:. PART 2. PRODUCTS ", \, ., .,-'\ , ) ......~'" 2.1. MATERIALS ," ~ cO:: ~~ ,l .. f"'\ A. All hangers, supports, anchors, and guides shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1-~~~31.9 of c? applicable sections of the International Mechanical Code, and Uniform Plumbing Code. Do not hang or support piping from chains, straps, wire or perforated bar hangers or from ductwork. B. Dielectric Protection: Furnish acceptable protection or copper-plated hangers between all ferrous and nonferrous metal pipe and its hangers, clamps, sleeves and saddles on all water piping. C. Horizontal Piping Hangers: 1. Provide one of the following types of hangers for horizontal piping manufactured by Grinnell or Carpenter and Patterson. 2. All Pipe except Copper: a. Except as otherwise specified hereinafter, provide clevis type, Grinnell Figure 260 or Figure 300 as required to keep the clevis nut outside the insulation. b. At Contractor's option, provide adjustable swivel ring steel band hangers for piping 3" and below in lieu of clevis hangers, Grinnell Figure 69. c. Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for Clevis type hangers, furnish steel pipe clamp, Grinnell Figure 216, d. Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same level, and fabricate from structural steel shapes. Use roller chairs, Grinnell Figure 175, or pipe. roll stands, Grinnell Figure 271, where provision for expansion is required. Do not provide trapeze type hangers for piping located in the Hoover classrooms with wood ceiling structure. (1) Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for any size pipe supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to the structure. (2) When trapeze hangers are not shown, furnish shop drawings of installation where there is doubt of the structural capacity for concentrated loads. 3. Copper Tubing Support: a. Hangers Touching Pipe: Provide copper plated hangers, split-ring extension hanger, Grinnell Figure 138R b. Hangers on Outside of Insulation: Furnish same as specified for steel pipe. 4. Floor Supports: Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal piping from [loor. a. Where bottom of piping is less than 1'-6" above finish floor, furnish cast-iron pipe rests, Grinnell Figure 258, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. b. Where bottom of pipe is higher than 1'-6" above finish floor and/or where provision for expansion is required, furnish pipe-roll stands, Grinnell Figure 271, without vertical adjustment, or Grinnell Figure 274 with vertical adjustment as PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 required. Provide concrete piers or Unistrut or B-Line rack and fasten stands to piers or racks. 5. Wall Supports: Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal piping from wall: a. Furnish steel J-hook for pipe located close to wall, up to 3" pipe, Elcen Figure 46, b. For hanger suspension with 750 pound maximum loading, furnish light welded- steel bracket with hole for one rod, 3/4" diameter, Grinnell Figure 191. c. For pipe-roll stand support, furnish light welded-sleel bracket for 700 pound maximum loading, Grinnell Figure 191. D. Vertical Piping Supports: 1 . All Pipe except Copper: a. Vertical pipe supports shall be steel extension pipe-clamps, Grinnell Figure 261. Refer to manufacturer's rated maximum loading for each size pipe. Bolt clamp securely to pipe, rest clamp-end extension on building structure. 2. Copper Tubing Support: a. For un-insulated vertical lines, provide copper finished steel riser clamp, Grinnell Figure CT 121 or plastic coated steel riser clamp, Grinnell CT 121 C. E. Beam Clamps: 1. Non-"C-Style" beam clamps shall be malleable iron, Grinnell Figure 229 for 3/8" hanger rods, forged-steel beam clamp, Grinnell Figure 228 for hanger rod up to 1- 1/2". 2. "C-Style" beam clamps shall be adjustable hanger rod type, malleable iron with set screw, jam nut, retaining clip, FM and Ul approved, Grinnell Figure 61, 92, or 93. 3. Where beam configuration does not allow horizontal movement of C-clamp when set screw and jam nut are positioned, retaining clips may be omitted. F. Inserts: 1. Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms. Provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 3" or equivalent. 2. Concrete inserts shall be as follows: Black malleable iron universal type for threaded connections with lateral adjustment. Grinnell Figure 282 for pipe sizes up to 8". G. Saddles and Shields: 1 . Saddles: a. Heating piping and on all domestic hot water piping where water temperature exceeds 120oF. (1) For all piping 2-1/2" and larger installed on clevis or ring supports, provide Carpenter and Patterson Figures 351 thru 356, Grinnell Figures 160 thru 166A, or Pipe Shields Model CS. (2) For all piping installed on roller supports, use the same saddles as listed above except use Pipe Shields Model CSX. b. Cooling Piping (less than 120oF.): (1) For all piping installed on clevis or ring supports, provide Pipe Shields Model CS-CW. (2) For all piping installed on roller supports, provide Pipe Shields Model CSX-CW. 2. Shields: a. Provide shields to protect insulation in all areas where saddles are not specified to protect insulation at areas of contact with hangers and supports, b. Provide Grinnell Figures 167 or 168. r \i) c"-> .cL ---::::- "'~--- (, :;i: c- \ \ ._,- .C) ~.......- , " \--. [L -C)~ Q. "; ..cO "\ 'i-). ." \ --' ::::-- D-- c-J - c~.., "d o .......0 7::':~) C'~ H. Anchors: 1 . Pipe anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with Jugs and bolts for clamping to PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. pipe and attaching anchor braces. Install anchor braces in the most effective manner to secure desired results. Do not install supports, anchors or similar devices where they will damage construction during installation or because of the weight or the expansion of the pipe. 2. Anchors shall be rigidly attached to substantial structure and shall resist movement, deflection, and bending. Attach anchors to steel structure by welding or bolting, and to concrete structure by cast-in-place insert ties or by an approved expansion anchoring technique. 3. Installation shall conform to anchor details as may be found on the Drawings, and to supplemental requirements specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 4. Provide factory made anchor components unless field conditions require shop- fabricated specials. I. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers with hold-down clamps or U-bolls may be provided for hanging two or more parallel pipes which have a uniform slope throughout their adjoining runs. Each trapeze shall be securely attached to and supported by two steel rods to structure. Each trapeze shall be designed to support the span weight of all piping, insulation, and fluid carried by itself. 2. Provide standard continuous-slot metal channel framing members and appurtenances for pipe support where shown. Provide a system manufactured by Grinnell-Power-Strut, B-line, Unistrut, Mult-A-Frame. or Power-Strut pipe support systems. Hot-dip galvanize all such members and appurtenances. Fittings, clamps, screws, nuts, bolts and washers shall be either hot dip galvanized or cadmium coated. Provide plastic insulating sleeves inside copper tubing clamps. 3. If the Contractor elects to provide trapeze hangers for any portion of the Work, he shall provide engineering design and submit calculations, sealed by a practicing licensed professional engineer, showing accurate weight balance and supporting force at each hanger, suitability of hanger rods and other components, ability of connecting structure to satisfactorily carryall associated point toads, and connection/anchoring requirements to be used and their suitability. 4. Minimum hanger rod sizes and maximum hanger/trapeze spacing for low pressure steam, hot water heating and chilled water systems shall be in accordance witJrANSI B31.1, B31.9 and MSS Standard Practice SP-58. C2 ~:'~ 5. Do not use trapeze hangers for piping located in rooms with exposed~\titDl:>g ancF); beam ceilings, ~L" ,.-, C'} \ .- .-'71 ; I c-. r'J EXECUTION C') -::J , I , <...J 3.1. INSTALLATION ......-- (:1 A. Provide hangers to support the required loads. Where necessary, supports shEttrbe designed to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Where Drawings show details of supports and anchors, conform to details shown, Where details are not shown, conform to requirements of this Section. B. Support piping with hangers in direct contact with the pipe for insulated piping not requiring a vapor barrier except on pipes where pipe saddles are specified. Size hangers to fit on the outside of insulation requiring a vapor barrier and on pipes having pipe saddles. C. Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Piping shall not be hung from other piping or ductwork. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Do not suspend pipe from metal roof deck. D. "C" clamps shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. Where non-insulated pipes, in which vibration may occur, pass through walls, floors, or partitions, encase pipe within acoustical wall sleeves. F. Support piping assemblies in inaccessible chases adequately enough to be rigid and serf- supporting before chase is closed. Provide adequate structural support for piping penetrating chase walls to fixtures. G. When piping is supported from walls, use welded steel brackets and wrought steel clamps. For hot pipes, furnish adjustable steel yoke and cast iron rollers. 3.2. HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Support horizontal piping on threaded hot rolled steel rod. Threaded rod shall not be reduced to sizes smaller than provided for in support thread sizes. B. Steel Pipe: Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports: Nominal Pipe Size, Inches 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2.1/2 3 4 5 6 Maximum Span, Feet 5 6 7 7 9 10 11 12 14 16 17 r- U"> i!> ~ Minimum Rod, Inches """- 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 '~(b \ ~-~- 0:: d-jGe'Pper Tubing: (J\6Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports: >- ~~. :::?}Jominal Tubing Size, Inches (.) tJ2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 -~ Maximum Span, Feet 5 5 6 7 5/8 5/8 ( '" ''-....-~ ...' "J ll-- (~_1 ~_d o ...0 (-:::-1 .;;::J ('"...I 2-1/2 3 4 6 8 8 9 10 12 14 1. Furnish minimum rod size as specified for steel pipe of same pipe size. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Applies to all thermo-plastic piping with either operating or anticipated ambient exposure temperatures up to 100oF. (maximum). 2. For pipe hanging other than included below, the pipe manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. 3. Maximum spacing between single supports for horizontal piping. Nominal Pipe Size, Inches 3/4" 1" 1-114" 1-112" 2" a. PVC (DWV) - (Schedule 40) Maximum Span, Feet 4 4.5 5 5 6 E. The spacing specified herein is included to limit deflection in the pipe to an acceptable minimum. Shorten intervals as necessary so the support manufacturers maximum recommended safe load values in accordance with ANSI 831 are not exceeded. PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 F. Trapeze Hanger: Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for any size pipe supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to the structure. Provide additional framing as required to transfer loads to adequate structure. G. Supporting rods shall be attached to concrete by inserts placed before concrete is poured or to plates installed in the concrete as described above. H. Supporting rods over 18" long shall be braced at every fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to the structure. 3.3. VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORT A. Support vertical piping with wrought steel riser clamps. Make adequate provision for expansion, contraction, and lateral stability. B. Support steel pipe at a minimum of every other floor as required to relieve joint stresses. C. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below, support cJamp- end extension from inserts. 3.4. SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. After installation, saddles shall be filled with the specified pipe insulation. END OF SECTION 15140 c -' -:1 j,.) ,'1 1 l . '-'"1 .\....~...,j /'- c.) :> Cl PIPE, HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ("'\ 1""_. I ~.,- \ r- U.) {-"-> - LL 05.038 A&J #200640.00 :r;= a... ':>-- f-. G >- \~.: .<( o :-2: Q <:'-1 C;l u.l C-J ....P ,:':..:l c:::::"~ (:-.1 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT ~:0 --"\ .." .- PART 1. GENERAL -)~-;> -:~.::\.. --- ~.) A. Vibration isolators for mechanical equipment to prevent the transmission of vibratiOO 13,00 (.,~ mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. It includes adjusting each mounting: system, and measurement of isolator system performance when so requested by t@' Architect. Specific mounting arrangements for each item of mechanical equipment shall be as described and as indicated by schedules and details on the Drawings. ,............. ) 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain from the drawings and confirm from shop drawings the approved manufacturers name, model number, and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate all resilient mounting systems with the exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between the vibration isolation device fabrication and the equipment manufacturer is required. B. Obtain all necessary data in regard to piping systems which are to be resiliently supported so that proper isolators can be selected. Select piping systems isolators for proper coordination with the physical arrangement of pipe lines and with the physical characteristics of the building. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data: 1. Shop drawings shall include specific information as follows: a. Manufacturer's model number for each isolator, the machine or pipeline to which it is to be applied, and the number of isolators to be furnished for each machine or pipeline. b. For steel spring mounts or hangers: free height, deflected height, solid height, isolator loading, and diameter of spring coil. c. For neoprene isolators: free height, deflected height, and isolator loading. d. Dimensional and weight data for concrete inertia bases, steel and rail bases, and details of isolator attachment. e. For curb mounted rooftop equipment: wind resistance details. 1.4. JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing conditions: 1. Notify the Architect of any project conditions which affect vibration isolation system installation or performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated by the Drawings or described by the specifications. Should vibration isolation system installation proceed without such notifications, any remedial Work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall be accomplished by the subcontractor al no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping supports, temperature control connections, drain lines, building construction, etc., and notify the involved contractor as to these problems or potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify the Architect so that preventive or remedial action can take place on a timely basis. Any remedial VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r"'~" \j.\ \ ::- u- PART 2. r- I.n 2> 05.038 A&J #200640.00 measures required shall be undertaken by the subcontractor responsible at no additional cost to the Owner. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Vibration isolators shall be selected by the isolator manufacturer in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Furnish deflections shown. Not all isolator types specified are used. Refer to the drawing schedule for specific requirements. B. Where shown, scheduled, or specified, provide specific vibration isolation equipment, manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., Peabody Noise Control, Korfund Dynamics Corp., or Vibration Mounting and Controls, Inc. Where specific type of vibration isolation equipment is not shown or specified, furnish isolators recommended by one of the isolation manufacturers listed above, compatible with equipment arrangements shown. A single manufacturer for all vibration isolation equipment is required except as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. C. Bases: 1. Base Type A - steel base: bases shall be one of the following types as determined by the isolator manufacturer. a. Integral structural steel base: bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than refrigeration m.achines and pump bases which may be T- shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/1 Oth of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" (360 mm) provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1" (25 mm). Bases shall be Mason Type "WF." b. Steel rail base: bases shall be for equipment having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent stress in the equipment. 1) Bases with spring isolators: bases shall be constructed of steel wide flange members welded to height saving brackets. Base shall be Mason Type "ICS." 2) Bases with neoprene isolators: base shall be steel channel rails, Mason Type "DNR." 4. ~-," .....:...... ..,~::"'- 0: ('.l -..,~ / L) ~- ?'- ,.;- \--: o<L O=~ b - c) ItJ Cl ~, (;~' ,~ c~'::.l c:-J D. Isolators: 1. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. 2, Isolator Type 1 - neoprene mountings: double deflection neoprene mounting shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for those areas where bolting is required. Use Mason Type "NO." 3. Isolator Type 2 - freestanding springs: spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base-plate and the support. All mounting shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Springs shall be Mason Type "SLF." VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 4. Isolator Type 3 - housed spring mounting with limit stop: springs in housings shall be as specified for Type 2. Housing shall include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed as when equipment is drained. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and the installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance 011/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used outside shall be hot dipped galvanized. Use Mason Type "SLR." 5. Isolator Type 4 - vibration hanger: vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Hangers shall be Mason Type "30N." 6. Isolator Type 5 - vibration hangers: vibration hangers shall be specified for Type 4, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Hangers shall be Mason Type "PC30N." 7. Isolator Type 6 - vibration hanger: vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on Ihe neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hanger box lower holes sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to aUach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Hangers shall be Mason Type "W30." 8. Isolator Type 7 - vibration hanger: hanger shall be a double deflection neoprene-in- shear Type 2 having a minimum static deflection of 0.35". Hanger s.b"~lI be M~S,on Type "HO" or "WHD." ~_-~: 0' . ,. -n E. Isolation of piping systems: ..-- 1. All piping which connects to resiliently mounted and/or vibrating equiPalE(nt shilbbe ," suspended with resilient hangers or supported by floor mounted isolatQJ$;'TheJ.!Jst " 1 three supports from the connected machine shall have the same staii.c#flection as C.J indicated for the machine. The nexl two supports shall have static detlfitc)ion at-Jeast equal to one-half of the static deflection indicated for the machine motrij!ing, anj!;ihe remaining pipe supports shall provide static deflection of 0.35" minimu'm. - 2. Where static deflection in excess of 0.35" is required, floor isolators shall be Type 3 and isolation hangers shall be Type 5. Where deflection of 0.35" or less is required, floor isolators shall be Type 1 and isolation hangers shall be Type 7. 3. Flexible connections: a. Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used to connect all piping to all isolated equipment except equipment for which flexible connectors are not permitted by code or at connections to terminal units. For applications where code prohibits using flexible connectors, provide swing connections changing direction a minimum of 3 times before joining isolated equipment. Swing connections should be made within approximately 6 feet of the isolated equipment. b. Connectors to equipment other than terminal units shall be manufactured of multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Connectors up to and including 2" diameter may have threaded ends. Connectors 2-1/2" and larger shall be manufactured with floating steel flanges. All connections shall be rated a minimum 01150 psi at 220oF. All VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r- 0'1 i?> /-... f ) -\0."""" - ~ \..1" --~.). D.- .6_ ~ ...r,,__ '0-- c--l - (..) \ --r- (,..-- ':::.\- \"--',- ---~ 0'1:) S::- C> ~,~ ,.-1 05.038 A&J #200640.00 flanged equipment shall be directly connected to neoprene elbows in the size range 2-1/2" through 6" or any larger available size if the piping makes a 90 degree turn at the equipment; all straight through connections shall be made with either flanged or screwed connectors properly pre-extended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under pressure. Sizes 12" and larger operating at pressures above 100 psi shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated from the anchoring plates by means of 1/2" thick bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi. c. Elbows shall be Mason-flex Type "Mfnec," straight connectors Mason-flex Type "Mftfu" or "Mftnc," and control cable assemblies Type "ACC"; all manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. d. Connectors to terminal units shall be manufactured of double braid stainless steel hose. The connectors shall have an 1/8" offset motion and shall have standard ASA 150 pound flanges at over two inch connector size. The flexible connectors shall be Minnesota Flexible Corporation FFCS Series Pump Connectors or Architect approved equal. The flanged connectors shall have the following live lengths, unless indicated differently on the drawings. e, Connections to terminal units at two inches and less piping sizes shall be double braided, stainless steel hose. The connectors shall have an 1/8" offset and shall have male NPT end connections. The threaded connectors shall have the following minimum live lengths unless indicated differently on the plans for vibration control. Hose Inside Diameter (inches) 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 Minimum Overall Length (inches) 6-1/2 7 8 8-1/2 9 10-1/2 Live Length (inches) 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 4-1/2 Provide flexible, braided steel pipe connectors to the terminal units (Airedale Units) that are at least 18" long. Hose Inside Diameter (inches) 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 Overall Lenath (inches) 9 9 9 9 11 11 12 13 14 Live Lenath (inches) 6-7/8 6-7/8 6-7/8 6-7/8 8-1/4 8-1/4 9 10 11 4. Drain connections form isolated equipment to floor drains shall be at least 1" free from drain. 5. Acoustical sleeves: where piping passes through equipment room walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete shall be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 4 Riverside festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240oF. 10 lb. density fiberglass shall be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Mason Type "SWS." 6. Piping not specified to be supported by resilient hangers but located in mechanical equipment room shall have either fiberglass insulation or a felt strip between the hanger and the pipe wall. 7. Piping smaller than 2" in diameter shall have resilient hangers if specified on the drawings. 8. Vertical pipe risers shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolating expansion hangers. Hangers shall have a minimum rated deflection of four times the anticipated pipe expansion and shall be enclosed in a housing for fail-safe operation. Hangers shall be Type 4. Friction clamps are not permitted. 9. Install resilient hangers on any piping that is not resiliently supported but is causing excessive vibration when in operation. The Architect will decide to what extent resilient hangers shall be used to replace the rigid supports. F. Isolation of fractional horsepower equipment: All fractional horsepower fans, pumps, etc., which are mounted on or suspended from floors that are not on-grade, shall be isolated with neoprene-in-shear isolators furnished by the vibration isolation supplier except where such isolators are furnished as an integral part of the machine. G. Electrical connections to resiliently mounted equipment Electrical connections to equipment which is supported or suspended by vibration isolators shall be made with long lengths of flexible conduit or flexible armored cable. These flexible connections must be located so as to prevent rigid connections between the resiliently mounted equipment and the building structure. H. Replace isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which do not produce the required isolation. Notify the Architect of project conditions which affect vibration isolation system installation or performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated. n J. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping SjiP~s, .:1, ~, '1 electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, building cOristt~ctioo :and.' I notify the involved contractor about these problems or potential problems. Where-such -- . situations cannot be easily resolved, noti1y the Architect so that preventive or rel1le.;11al aBrlon can take place on a timely basis. :<. \ 7 I. '.1 I '''1 '..../ r-'\ ': K. Non-vibrating equipment such as water heaters shall be supported by Type 1 is9~tOrs. 0) y (..:"'1 L. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for the supplementary bases, a tabulation of the design data on the isolators, including outside diameter, free, operating, and solid heights of the springs, free and operating heights of the neoprene or fiberglass isolators, and isolation efficiency based on the lowest operating speed of the equipment supported. M. Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork connections to all air-moving units. The connections shall be neoprene impregnated canvas of approved construction meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A. N. All ductwork, for a minimum distance of 30'-0" from air moving devices such as fans up and downstream shall be isolated from the structure with combination spring and neoprene hangers in the supporting members. Hangers shall be Type 6, as described above and shall have a static deflection of 1/4". VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Vibration isolation hangers: 1. Resilient hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting overhead structure. The machine suspension points shall be in a rigid and heavy portion of the building structure. Suspension of machines from lightweight floor slabs shall be avoided, particularly at the center of structural spans. Do not suspend from metal roof deck. 2. Suspension rods shall be attached to rigid member of the machine structure. When such attachment points do not exist, a heavy steel framework shall be furnished to support the machine with suspension rods attached to this framework. 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted equipment and piping to assure that all vibration isolators are installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace, at no extra cost to the Owner, any isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which in any way do not produce the required isolation. END OF SECTION 15240 ~1 '" (},,> LL _--JII' ('\, '\ ...~.-. , \),.\ ~-~.. ..- 0- ""? I 'r~ ~i~;~~: ( '~) '. L r':.,.-.; '0..- c-~ - c.\ \' " V -~-, ,:-... ~ -..- <' ,-" ,.- ~:-,- \.- .... ~~:" 'C) "Z 9- VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanical equipment insulation and sound attenuating material. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding (unless otherwise specified): 1. Flame Spread: 25 2. Smoke Developed: 50 3. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and flame resistant cloth for fittings shall have the same component rating as listed above. B. All insulation performance (thickness, R-value) shall meet Energy Code Requirements, as a minimum. 1.3. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING --c;; ~.~ ':"1 \ '\,") ...n A. Material shall be furnished to the job bearing manufacturer's label. :; r'~ \ '\ '-c., \.-----, '.j 1.4. SUBMITTALS ~ - ,\ A. Submit shop drawings for duct insulation, pipe insulation, sound attenuating materi~f.ai:Jd (-:: insulation covering. .... ("'\ )7 - PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Tape: Wherever tape is used for sealing purposes, it shall be of type and applied as recommended by the nonconductive covering manufacturer. Where recommendation is lacking, tape used shall be sealed with Minnesota Mining adhesive EC-1329. B. Insulating Cement: Insulating cement shall be Owens-Corning 110 mineral wool, all purpose cement. Where insulating cement is applied to pipe fittings in concealed locations, it shall be "one coat" cement. C. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1. Insulation shall be a one-piece type made from long glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin molded into a hollow cylinder and jacketed with a kraft-reinforced foil all-service vapor barrier jacket (ASJ)_ The jacketing shall have a factory applied double pressure-sensitive adhesive system which provides positive closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. 2. Physical Properties: a. Operating temperature range: -20oF. to +850oF. (-290C. to +4540C). b. Thermal Conductivity: -0.25 BTU-IN/hr-sq.ft. - deg. F (0.036 wattlm-k) at 750F. (240C.) c. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm max. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Certainteed Snap On, Knauf Pipe Insulation, Manville Micro-Lok, or Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II. MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r- \JI cr; (~-', \,- . v-\ - ".,.-~ c- .....:;~:::-.. c-1 - L) V,I C:.l ~,~ " -) 12';> (;-.I \.> 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Fiberglass Duct Wrap Insulation: 1. Insulation shall consist of an inorganic blanket of glass fiber, factory-laminated to a reinforced foil kraft (FRK) vapor barrier facing. A 2" (50 mm) stapling and taping flange shall be provided on one edge. 2. Physical Properties: a. Operating Temperature Range: 40oF. to 2500F (SoC. to 121 oC). b. Density: 0.75 Ib/cu. ft. (12 kg/cu. m). c. Thermal Conductivity: 0.31 BTU-/Nlhr-eq. ft. .. deg. F (0.045 watUm-k). d. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perms max. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Certain teed, Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning. E. Acoustical Duct Liner: 1. General: Acoustical duct liner shall be a bonded mat of glass fiber coated with a black pigmented fire-resistant coating on the airstream side. Liner shall be suitable for operating temperatures up to 250oF. (1210C). Liner shall be manufactured by Certainteed, Knauf, Manville, or Owens Corning. 2. Flexible Liner: Liner shall have a minimum density of 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot (24 kilograms per cubic meter) and shall be suitable for air velocities up to 5000 feet per minute (1525 meters/minute). Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.28 BUT/HR square foot degrees F/lN (0.040 WattlMetre-Kalvin) at 750F. (240C). Sound absorption coefficient shall not be less than 0.65 in the 500 cycles/sec. octave band center frequency for 1 II (2.54 cm) thick material based on No.6 mounting in accordance with ASTM C423-77 test procedure. Air friction correction factor shall not exceed 1.20 at 1500 fpm (458 meters/min) and 1.25 at 5000 fpm (1525 meters/min) based on TIMA Test Method AHS-152. 3. Rigid Duct Liner Board: Liner shall have a minimum density of 3 pounds per cubic foot (48 kilograms per cubic meter) and shalf be suitable for air velocities up to 4000 fpm (1220 meters/min). Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.23 BTUlHR square foot degrees F/IN (0.033 WatUMetre/Kalvin) at 750F. (240C). Sound absorption coefficient shall be not less than 0.64 in the 500 cycle/sec. octane band center frequency for 1" (2.54 cm) thick material based on No.6 mounting in accordance with ASTM C423 test procedure. Air friction correction factor shall not exceed 1.25 at 1500 fpm (458 meters/min) and 1.3 at 3000 fpm (815 meters/min). L ~'- _(.. (~:"J (~;:-F:- Fiber glass semi-rigid board insulation: U " -7:: 1. Board form: \.J a. Insulation shall be made from inorganic glass fibers preformed into boards 7:- /"_ bonded by a thermosetting resin, and furnished with an All-Service Jacket (ASJ) "0:.2 composed of a reinforced white kraft and aluminum foil laminate with the white Q kraft facing out. b. Physical Properties: 1 ) Temperature Limit to 450oF. (2320C). 2) Density; 3 Ibs/cu. fl. (48 kg/cu. m.). 3) Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F (0.036 wattlm-k) at 750F. (240C). 4) Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. c. Manufacturers: Insulation shall be Certainteed 1 B Board, Knauf Insulation Board, Manville 800 Series Spin-Glass, or Owens-Corning 700 Series. 2. Flexible forms: a. Insulation shall be composed of high temperature fiber glass bonded to a flexible jaCket with the end grain of the insulation perpendicular to the jaCket surface. This construction shall provide a product of high compressive strength while permitting the insulation to conform to rounded surfaces without reducing the MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-2 ........, Riverside festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 thickness. Jacket shall be a laminated kraft aluminum foil all service jacket (ASJ) with vapor barrier. b. Physical Properties: 1) Temperature Limit: to 650oF. (3430C). 2) Density: 3 Ibsfcu. fl. (48fcu. m.) 3) Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU-IN/hr-sq. It. - deg. F (0.039 watt/m-k) at 750F. (240C). 4) Water Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perms. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Knauf Flex-Wrap, Manville Pipe and Tank Insulation, or Owens-Corning Pipe Wrap Insulation. G. Insulated piping that is exposed to high moisture conditions, such as exist in the kitchen and dishwashing areas of the church, shall have insulation protected by waterproof PVC jacket except do not install PVC jacket over pipe saddles on high temperature piping. Provide plastic jacketing and fitting covers by Ceel-Co., 12990 W. Cedar Dr., Lakewood, Colorado 80228. Jacket thickness shall be 0.028" (0.71 mm) and shall be suitable for temperatures from -40oF. to 180oF. (-40C. to 830C). Jacketing shall be provided with a minimum 1" (25 mm) overlap. All longitudinal and circumferential seams shall be welded together as recommended by manufacturer. Provide Ceel-Co. Series 330 UVR (Ultraviolet Ray Resistant) PVC plastic jacketing. Provide "hard" inserts at hanger locations that do no~ transmit heat from the pipe surface to PVC jacket. .....") ',. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: \~__.O\ r':~ . \\ H. ./ .; 1. Insulation shall be of closed-cell structure with a smooth surface. Pipe~fUlatior(.)\ shall be factory molded to fit the pipe snugly. / '..., 2. Type E-1 Insulation: v) a. Density: 6 Ibs/cu. ft. (96 kg./cu.m.). 'r'- -', (.) b. Operating Temperature Ranges: -40oF. to +220oF. (-40oC. to 1040C~.:';' ;', c. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 BTU-INfhr-sq. ft. - deg. F (0.040 wattlm-kii2t 750F.'- (240C.). d. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. e. Flame Spread: 25. l. Smoke Density: 50 lor thickness 3/4" (19 mm) and smaller, 100 for 1" (25 mm) thickness. g. Pipe insulation shall be Armstrong AP Armaflex, Halstead InsuJ- Tube, or Rubatex R-180-FS. Sheet insulation shall be Armstrong Armaflex II, Halstead Insul-Tube, or Rubatex R-1800-FS. 3. Type E-2 Insulation: a. Insulation shall be preslit tubular form with a pressure-sensitive adhesive system for closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. b. Density: 4 Ibs/cu. ft. (64 kg.lcu.m.). c. Operating Temperature Ranges: 40oF. to 2000F (4.40C. to 930C). d. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F. e. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. t. Flame Spread: 25. g. Smoke Density: 50. h. Pipe insulation shall be Armstrong Self-Seal Armallex 2000. I. Pre-molded Pipe Fitting Covers: 1. Covers, fiberglass insulation fittings located in equipment rooms and behind ceilings and walls that are not to be painted, shall be factory-premoJded one-piece polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Covers shall have a snow-white finish and shall withstand surface operating temperatures from 350F. to 150oF. (20C. to 650C) continuous usage. All covers shall conform to Federal Specification L-P-535, Composition A, Type II, and MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. ...0 \.0 ,;" r-\ I 1--- . \ \ ' \.oJ>, :7::: 0- -~ -. C'" - L-.Y t"j c..J ",c.'" (:~_',J ~~~:~ \...L- 05.038 A&J #200640.00 shall be Ceel-Co Series 5002, Certainteed "snap-form" or 2eston 2000. 2_ Premolded covers for fiberglass insulation fittings that are specified to be painted - fiberglass fittings with all-service vapor barrier jacket similar to adjacent pipe covering. J. Pipe insulation jackets (fiberglass insulation exposed to outside) 1. Aluminum jacket shall be 0.016" thick, type 3003 or 5005 alloys with 3/16" longitudinal or circumferential corrugations. Jacket shall have an acceptable factory- applied vapor barrier on the inside and shall be applied using aluminum straps over transverse joints. Corrugations shall match from one section of cover to the other. On vertical runs upper cover shaUlap over lower cover and seams shall be toward walls, horizontal seams shall be on the bottom of the run. Fitting and valve jackets shall be factory fabricated and of the same material as the pipe jacket. EXECUTION r-- I 3.1 . INSTALLATION ~'--- A. The insulation and materials shall be applied only by mechanics skilled at such Work. The appearance of the finished Work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical correctness and efficiency. Insulation for heating surfaces and piping shall not be applied until such times as those surfaces are sufficiently heated to properly dry out the insulation. Insulation shall not be applied to a specific system until the system has been pressure and leak tested as specified. '\ B. Installation: 1. Wherever vapor barriers and waterproof covering are specified, all portions of the covering at joints and fittings shall be vapor sealed. 2. Insulation shall be continuous through all walls, floors, and ceilings, unless otherwise specified, or shown. 3. Where insulation is to be painted, all surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive paint. Coordinate the insulation type and associated covering with the painting requirements. Refer to Section 15010 for additional coordination requirements. 4. Insulate unions, flanges, and valve bodies but not operating handwheels or levers. 5. Application of all materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's ()":::-.::-, instructions. -:'_ '--' 6_ The insulation shall be handled in a manner that will not adversely affect its structural or insulating properties. Support shall be provided for the insulation on vertical lines to prevent the insulation from slipping downward. Care shall be taken so as not to place insulation over vent and drain inlets and outlets. 9. Self-sealing laps shall have an additional field applied coat of adhesive applied to the opposite mating surface. a. Both hot and cold pipe self-sealing jacket laps on longitudinal and butt joints shall be stapled at 6" (150 mm) maximum spacing (both exposed and concealed). On cold pipe insulation, the staples and the longitudinal and butt edges shall be sealed with mastic. 10. Fittings and Valves: a. Hot pipelines (above 60oF.) (150C): Flanges, couplings, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be insulated with factory premolded, prefabricated or field fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be provided with not less than three segments. When nesting size sections of insulation are used, all voids shall be filled with insulating cement or mineral fiber. Sections of MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-4 .4. "';'-'"7" ~>(~ t") (L~"> l'\\ - \~- L. ~~::~ Ub? - 8. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 /_-':- insulation shall be secured in place with wire or by joining the sections with adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied over the insulation in two coats with tape embedded between coats. Tape shall overlap itself 1" (25 mm) and adjoining insulation jacket 2" (50 mm). In lieu of above finish, factory-premolded one-piece polyvinyl chloride fitting covers shall be used, where specified hereinafter. Polyvinyl chloride filting covers shall be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding, or taping. When polyvinyl chloride fitting covers are used, factory precut blanket inserts provided by the fitting cover manufacturer may be used. Inserts shall be installed in accordance with the fitting manufacturer's recommendations. (When required, insulated flanges, couplings, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be covered with preformed or field. fabricated sections of aluminum jacket secured with bands in lieu of finishes specified above. When pipe insulation with factory-applied aluminum jacket is provided, flanges, valves and fittings may be insulating with factory-or-field-fabricated sections of the same material and thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and jacket. Sections shall be secured with bands.) Unless otherwise shown, unions will not be insulated and pipe insulation and jacket shall terminate neatly at the ends of unions. All termination points shall be finished with brush coat of adhesive. b. Cold pipelines (-30oF. to +600F) (-340C. to 15DC): Flanges, couplings, unions, valves, anchors and fittings unless otherwise shown shall be insulated with factory pre-molded, prefabricated or field fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Anchors, when secured directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a distance to prevent condensation, but not less than 6" (150 mm) from the surface of the pipe insulation. Insulation and vapor barrier shall be extended to cover glands and stem completely. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be provided with not less than three segments. When nesting size sections of insulation are used, all voids shall be filled with insulating cement or mineral fiber. Sections of insulation shall be secured in place with wire or by joining the sections with adhesive. Vapor barrier coating shall be applied over the insulation in two coats with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape shall overlap itself 1" (25 mm) and adjoining insulation jacket 2" (50 mm). The coating shall be applied to a total dry film thickness of not less than 1/16" (1.6 mm). In lieu of the above vapor barrier coating, factory-pre-molded one piece polyvinyl chloride fitting covers may be used, where specified hereinafter. Polyvinyl chloride fitting covers shall be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding, or taping with vapor barrier tape. Staples or tacks and fittings cover edges shall be sealed with vapor barrier coating, in accordance with the fitting cover manufacturer's recommendations. When polyvinyl chloride fitting covers are u~. factd~ precut blanket i~serts pr~vided by the fitti~g cov~r .manufacture~~ be ~ed. Inserts shall b~ Installed In acco~dan~e With the fitting cover ~a~pf~cJure~~ .'-q recommendatIons. (W hen reqUIred, Insulated flanges, couphng~,uru.ons':"yalves..,:"- anchors, and fittings shall be covered with preformed or filed-fa~t~;;.tt~d seotion$~= of aluminum jacket applied over the vapor barrier and secured witb:.b~ndsb ! i I Where unions are shown to be not insulated, the pipe insulation;an~j~ckei:Shall,-] terminate neatly at the ends of the unions. Ends of pipe insulatiQrtShaIl be,) seated to the pipe with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating at t~inatjol!i:, points, valves, flanges, and fittings. -- 11. Pipe Insulation: a. Plumbing Systems: Insulation shall be fiberglass pipe insulation or flexible elastomeric, Type E-1 or Type E-2, thickness as scheduled below. Cooling coil condensate drain piping shall only have flexible elastomeric insulation, Type E-1 or Type E-2. Plumbing piping that is specified to be painted shall be fiberglass insulation. MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SYSTEM TEMP RANGE PIPE SIZES, inches Non-eire. Runouts 1-1/4 and less 1.1/2 to 2 2-1/2 and up UD to 1 in. Domestic Hol Any 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 water, Domestic cold water inside pipe chases behind walls or above ceilinas c.-, I..D 11) ("") b. Service water piping shall be insulated per Energy Code Requirements. (--', ('P" ) LL: <C ,," ~ 12. Valves and Fitting Jackets: [1:: ~"~ a. Valves and fitting jacket shall be as scheduled below: ,~ ,~ LL w- i \ ,.~ (',J SYSTEM LOCATION JACKET C) L) ,.....:<( Domestic Hot Water All Exposed Pre-molded Cover I 0--'" ::.> ~- ...~ \.-:::> () Domestic Cold Water All Concealed Tape and Vapor Barrier c) (:'I ,....J or Pre-molded Cover 13. Duct Insulation: a. Duct insulation shall be as scheduled below. All flexible ductwork shall be insulated similar to rigid ductwork. SYSTEM LOCATION INSULATION FORM Exhaust Air All from exhaust fan to other terminal Fiberglass Flexible Duct Wrap, 1 W' Acoustical Wrap Flexible 1) Ceiling spaces used as air plenums or lilted with decorative ceiling supports but not tiles, shall be considered as cooled and heated spaces. Ceiling spaces that are not connected to heated occupied areas shall be coupled unheated spaces. 2) Where acoustical duct liner is used, the duct sizes shown on the Drawings shall be net inside dimensions. 3) Refer to the drawings for additional requirements for acoustical lining for transfer ducts. 4) Ceiling spaces in corridor whether titled with decorative support or tiles shall not be considered as cooled or heated space. 14. The insulation subcontractor/Division 15 contractor shall provide all insulation in the field for ductwork and piping systems that are field installed, even if such components are installed inside a terminal unit. END OF SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING GENERAL -s)~. 0 "--/,\ PART 1. .~ --,. ~..--- _/\ ,,/ " \ , \..J A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sanitary and equipment drain piping 2. Potable hot and cold water 3. Pressurized drain systems at pump discharge 4. Underground site sanitary and potable water c;? c:' ./ 1.1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK y 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. It is the intent of this Specification that all Work be acceptable under an applicable standard stated or cited in the Uniform Plumbing Code or accepted as suitable for proposed use under procedures and powers of authority having jurisdiction. 2. Finish Work shall conform as nearly as practicable to essential requirements of this Section. Connection to sewers shall be as required by local authorities. Where existing utilities are shown to be abandoned or removed, perform all Work required and remove or close off as required by local codes. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: furnish to Owner and Architect a certificate of compliance with the chlorination of system paragraph in this Section. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1.MATERIALS .... A. Potable Water Piping: 1. Water service (including softened water and hot circulating) under the floor slab shall be one of the following types: a. Cement-lined ductile cast iron with ductile iron water service fittings having restrained (lock-ring) or push-on mechanical joint type. b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe for domestic water service mains shall conform to AWWA C900, SDR 14, Pressure Class 200 for sizes 4" to 12". 1) Pipe joints shall be through integral bell end with factory installed elastomeric ring. Elastomeric ring shall conform to ASTM F477. 2) Fittings shall be cast iron compatible with pipe specified or shall be PVC manufactured by the same manufacturer as the pipe. a) Underfloor domestic hot and cold water; ASTM B88 Type K, hard temper water tube without any joints under the floor. Insulate this underfloor domestic water piping as specified in Section 15250. 2. Hot and Cold Potable Water Piping inside the building and pressurized drain piping: a. All piping 2" and smaller shall be Drawn copper tubing, Type L, fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper or cast bronze (tinned when brazed). b. All piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be drawn copper tubing, Type L. Fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper or cast bronze (tinned when brazed). PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Exposed piping in finished rooms of the facility used in connection with plumbing fixtures shall be chromium-plated brass pipe with plated cast brass fittings. d. PEX piping shall be in accordance with requirements specified in the Uniform Plumbing Code. ~ l.) B. Sanitary Orainage and Vent Piping: -< --~ <~,.. C) C'J l'- -\, l ~..-.." ' 0- C";J _ L). ,"- '~. G~ Q u- \",.;':J C,:;) (::.) C"-..I PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION 1. Sanitary and vent piping above grade shall be service weight or heavier cast iron soil pipe and fittings. standard weight galvanized steel pipe with black cast iron drainage fittings, or copper drainage tube (DWV) with cast bronze or wrought copper drainage fittings. Within limits of local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction, above ground sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping may be ASS Schedule 40 or PVC DWV Schedule 40 (U.S. Standard) or heavier plastic pipe. Sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping underground outside the building waif shall be service weight or heavier cast iron soil pipe and fittings. Underground joints in cast iron soil pipe to be made with packed oakum and lead. Within limits of local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction, underground sanitary drainage and vent piping may be hard temper copper tube type DWV or heavier, ASS or PVC OWV Schedule 40 (U.S. Standard) or heavier plastic pipe. a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe shall conform to ASTM 03034, SDR 35. 1) Pipe joints shall be through integral bell end with factory installed elastomeric ring. Joint shall be in accordance with ASTM 03212. 2) Fittings shall be cast iron compatible with pipe specified or shall be PVC manufactured by the same manufacturer as the pipe. 3. Vent and re-vent and drainage piping used in the spaces above the ceiling shall be Type M copper (DMV). No PVC or ASS shall be used for this location. .....,,-=- A. Potable Piping: 1. Underground and Under Slab Service Mains: a. Concrete anchor blocks shall be installed on all otherwise non-restrained underground lines at tees and elbows 10 prevent finings from being blown off lines when under pressure. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, they shall be valved, plugged, or capped as shown on Drawings. Where connections are made between new Work and existing mains, connections shall be made by using specials and fittings to suit actual conditions. b. Ductile Iron Service: Install ductile iron pipe in accordance with all applicable requirements of AWWA Standard C600_ c. Copper Service: Clean joining surfaces thoroughly by hand. Apply flux immediately after cleaning. Do not rely on flux for actual cleaning. Fill all voids with solder as flux leaves to ensure a strong joint. Make joints with 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Stay-Brite Solder by J.W. Harris Co., Inc., or by cadmium free brazing. (Lead is not permitted.) Select flux compatible with type joint being made. All joints shall comply with local codes and ordinances. Use Type K copper tubing for underground and under slab service that is taken from a single coil so there are no under floor joints. 2. Above Ground Piping: a. Mains shall be run as shown on Drawings and shall be evenly pitched, 1" in 50 feet (0.2 percent). PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-2 ---'J ... : i ~~ . ---.; ....:.~ ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 b. Allowance lor expansion shall be made in the installation of all piping so the usual variation in temperature will not cause undue stress at any point. Pipes shall be securely anchored where necessary to properly distribute expansion stresses. c. System shall be arranged for complete drainage with 3/4" hose valves at low points. d. Lines and risers shall be anchored as may be necessary to prevent noise or vibration when water is turned on or off. e. Each branch and riser shall be separately valved. and all such valves shall be made accessible. f. Where Drawings indicate fixtures to be furnished by others, provide all rough-in stops and supplies and connect such fixtures to the plumbing system. g. Piping shall be balanced. vented and adjusted to provide proper circulation and to prevent hammer and thumping. h. Joints in copper piping shall be made with 95-5 tin-antimony solder, Stay-Brite Solder by J.W. Harris Co., Inc., or by cadmium free brazing. (Lead is not permitted.) I. Joints in PEX piping shall be metal insert or metal compression fittings complying with UPC requirements. B. Sanitary Piping: 1. Ream all pipe to full diameter alter cutting and thoroughly clean before erection. Run all piping as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets and conceal piping in finished rooms unless shown or specified otherwise. Arrange pipe lines to give ample room for pipe insulation. 2. All horizontal sanitary waste and storm drainage and vent piping of 3" diameter and less shall be installed with a fall of not less than 1/4" per foot (2 percent). All horizontal sanitary drainage and vent piping larger than 3" shall be installed with a fall of not less than 1/8" per foot (1 percent). Where conditions do not permit building drains and sewers to be installed with a fall as great as that specified, then a lesser slope may be permitted provided the computed velocity will not be less than 2 feet per second. 3. All horizontal sewer piping shall be run with a fall not less than 1/4" per foot unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 4. Vent pipes shall extend through the roof full size, with the exception that no vent through roof shall be less than 4" at the roof. Extend vents above roof minimum 12" or as required by local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction. Vents through roof shall be flashed and counter-flashed using a manufactured neoprene rubber modular flashing system or with 4 pounds per square foot sheet lead flashing extending a minimum of 10" in all directions from the pipe and a minimum of 12" above roo!. Counter-flashing shall be turned down inside the top of pipe and overlap lower flashing by 4". To prevent movement in any direction, vent pipes through roof shall be supported both horizontally and vertically above last pipe joint before penetrating roof. 5. All sanitary piping located outside of the building shall have a minimum of 36 inchl't~ of groundcover on top of the piping in all cases. If maintaining that depth ~roundcp,~er is not feasible because of the grades and landscaping specified in other secti~,~ CQnjractor shall install 4'-0" wide by 8'-0", one inch "styrofoam" insulation boards onJop:q th~.Ripin!T-Tl Fill shall be placed on top of the insulation sheets. n -< N 1 1'.-...., A. Piping system leak tests: >::: >.... G,) 1 . Potable water piping: :& (!1 a. After completion of the Work. but before final payment is made, Contractor shaurun a test over a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of all apparatus, etc., and the system as a whole. ....,j"... 1"- ---1 \...j 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 \.0 LO ("') b. Pressure tests: make pressure tests in the presence of Owner's Representative or the General Contractor's Representative. 1) Potable water service (below ground): after buried pipe is laid, joints completed, and trench partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, newly laid piping or any valved section of piping shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected to a pressure test as specified in Section 15101 at points of reading. All pipe. joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined during the open trench test. Joints, fittings or the portion of piping showing visible leakage shall be made tight or repaired. Cracked or defective pipe, fittings, or valves disclosed in the pressure test shall be repaired and retested until test results are satisfactory to Architect. 2) Potable water service (above ground): all above ground piping shall be tested in accordance with Section 15101. Sanitary sewer drainage piping: a. Make pressure tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. b. All waste drainage piping, including branch bends and ferrule joints, shall be tested by closing all openings before any fixtures are set and filling entire system with water, or by air pressure tests as required by Architect. r-\ i.."."J 0- ::< .~~ ::~ :s.. r~-O 1"- --=j :r L_,j _~J LL ('.,J i "..._ i,-.,~"': :.....__ t.. ) 1. , ~ L~',.:} '>0. C) b~~ 6 r V~ c:::::::) C:.:') C'-J B. Chlorination of domestic (potable) water system: 1. Chlorinate all new domestic hot and cold water lines to comply with local or state health officials, and with UPC requirements. 2. This Work shall be witnessed by General Contractor or Owner's Representative. 3. Chlorinating agent shall be applied at the start of a new line and shall be injected through a corporation cock or similar device, 10 insure complete chlorination of all pipe. 4. Calcium hypochlorite shall be used where applicable and shall be commercial products such as H.T.H., Perchloron, or Mexochloron. The calcium hypochlorite must first be mixed to a homogeneous paste. The paste must contain approximately five (5) percent available chlorine by weight. The paste must then be thinned to a slurry and mixed with water to obtain a resultant consistency of 100 parts per million. This mixture must be fed into pipeline and retained for a one-hour contact period. All valves must then be opened in groups of three and water of 100 parts per million calcium chlorite concentration run through for a ten minute interval for each group of valves. 5. After chlorination, all valves shall be opened and water run through to waste for a ten minute period or until the waste water indicated a residual of not over 0.25 parts per million. 6. Have the local utility or an independent testing agency test and certify that the potable water system meets requirements of local health authorities belore using for domestic service and upon completion of the system. A representative sample shall be obtained by the utility or testing agency at random outlets on the Project. If test sample does not prove to be potable, the entire Project's potable water system shall be sterilized again by the Contractor or local utility company and retested, at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall continue to sterilize and recheck system until the test samples prove to be potable. 3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Potable water piping: after piping is erected, thoroughly flush all piping and piping components before running pumps, or sterilizing the potable water system. END OF SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-4 , '0 c I ,I .~ ,'--... r:"i Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Sewage ejector for sanitary sewer lift to site sewer main. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and/or catalog cuts indicating technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment, to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data. B. Submit operating and maintenance manuals for the sump pumps. PART 2. PRODUCTS -- "c) 4':; C) - , / 2.1. MANUFACTURERS (') ---, ./" A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hydromatic 2. Weil 3. Skidmore 4. Architect approved equal (',) -J -" ~ ,(\ I .--i \._j t:? ""'-- .~ ).7 (l"\ - B. Basis of design: Hydromatic 2.2. SEW AGE EJECTOR A. Pumps shall be the Hydromatic Series SK60 or Architect approved equal. Pump shall include an impeller, sealed ball bearings, suction plate, and cast iron pump housing. Bearings shall have moisture proof seal to protect against vapor and moisture from the pump. Pump materials shall be suitable to handle liquids and solid waste materials. B. Duplex sump controls shall be provided in a remote mounted panel (NEMA 3R enclosure) which shall include the following for the sump pump. 1. HOA for pump 2. Motor starter for any pump motor .rated at 460 volt, 3 phase 3. Terminal strip interface with an external off site monitoring system 4. Pump failure alarm indication 5. High level alarm indication 6. Adjustable mercury float switch 7. Pump operation alternator for duplex pump. C. Pumps shall be piped to sewer through check valves and gate valve, all in accordance with plumbing codes and ordinances. Piping shall be schedule 40 galvanized piping. 2.3. CONTROLS A. Pump shall be duplex and shall be automatically controlled by mercury type submersible float switch mounted on the pump. Pump control switch shall be 2-N.O. mercury switch contacts, SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15412 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 encapsulated in epoxy resin. High level alarm service shall be 1-N.O. mercury switch contact, encapsulated in epoxy resin. Provide alarm for high level, power failure and pump failure. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install sewage ejector as recommended by the manufacturer. Make alf piping connections. B. Provide control wiring required to install remote alarm, control panels and building control system interface. The Owner will provide interface wiring between the sump pump control panel and the building conlrof system under a separate contract. C. Provide power wiring to pump motors from the remote control panel. D. Provide disconnect means for pumps. E. General contractor shall provide the concrete basin for the sewage ejector. The Division 15 Contractor shall interface with the contractor concerning dimensions, depth, and inlet and outlet connections for basin or sump. END OF SECTION 15412 ~~-. U? \:' ,;' .L _"'-1* ..';"'.,,? ~~l. l,J ".-' ".-' ~. " ...-~ \,), -7;; r-\ \,.---'" , . \. '\ \...).., "\ l c-J (-:)\:~.. '"-~ C) ~J,'" _"_-,"i \;- ., \- ",<~ C- ) (~~ \,~~.: ~.:.~ '()z 9- ...~ SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15412 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all materials as hereinafter specified or shown and as necessary for the complete Installation of the plumbing specialties. B. Reference Standards: 1. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) Standard PDI-WH201. 1.2. SUBMITTALS () ---;-\ A. Provide submittals for water hammer arrestors and vacuum breakers. .""" ~ . ........ -- .-- ,....- r.) '\ ;\ PART 2. PRODUCTS <-:? ,. - \ . ","'l, ~._/' -<"' 2.1. MATERIALS A. Drains: 1. Provide Josam, Zurn, Wade or J.R. Smith. 2. Roof drain downspout adapters: provide roof drain downspout adapters as manufactured by Plastic Trends or Architect approved equivalent. 3. Floor Drains: a. General Purpose Drains: Provide cast iron body, adjustable nickel bronze strainer, bottom outlet, double drainage flange with weep-holes. Provide with flashing clamp device for all floors above grade. b. Mechanical Room Drain: Provide cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange and weep-holes, square body and loose set, heavy duty grate with removable 4" funnel, sediment bucket, bottom outlet and flashing clamp for all floors above grade. c. Funnel Drains: Provide with an extended rim on strainer. -)7" (~" - B. Water hammer arrestors: 1. Zurn Z-1700 "Shoktrol", Wade "Shokstop," Josam "Absorbo-tron" or J.R. Smith "Hydrotrol" arrestors. Sizes as shown, designed in accordance with P.D.1. Standard WH 201 to prevent hammer in the piping systems. 2. Water hammer arrestors shall be certified to function in accordance with PDI Standard PDI- WH-201 to limit surge pressure to 150 psig from a flow velocity of 10 fps at 60 psig through 50 feet of pipe same size as the water hammer arrestor. a. Water hammer arrestor shall be constructed in one of the following manners. 1) A non-ferrous elastic chamber contained in heavy steel casing with approved recoil dampers. 2) Acetal piston. Three Buna-N O-rings, pressure-lubricated with Dow-Corning III Silicone Compound, FDA approved. Type L copper tube chamber, seamless spin reduction and closure, lead free solder joint. ..,.., C. Vacuum breakers: 1. Vacuum breakers for non-continuous pressure applications shall be Watts Regulator Company, Model No. 288A or Sloane Valve Company, No. V-350A with bronze body, chrome-plated in finished areas. 2. Vacuum breakers for continuious pressure application shall be Watts Regulator No. 800. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430-1 '~ . Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts manufactured by Josam, Zurn, Wade or J.R. Smith. 2. Cleanouts shall be as follows: a. Concealed, or exposed in unfinished area: Josam 58500-22. b. Finished walls: Josam 58710-22 with Nickaloy top and satin finish. c. Finished floors: Josam 58700-22 with Nickaloy top and satin finish. d. Food handling areas: heavy duty, 316 stainless steel covers, J.R. Smith 4313 Series cleanouts. .-:' '-' 0, E. French Drains/Receptors 1. Provide site drain structures for storm drain run off from downspouts. 2. Provide excavation filled with limestone chips as indicated on the drawings. ,,", PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Cleanouls shall be installed where shown and at base of soil or waste stacks 30" above floor, at changes in direction and every 50 feet in horizontal piping. Cleanouts to be same size as pipe up to 4" and 4" to all other piping. B. Vacuum breakers shall be provided on hose outlets and below the rim water supplies of all types, on all fixtures to which hoses and tubing can be connected, and at all locations specified or shown. END OF SECTION 15430 ....0 ~) (0 .6.- -'?' "'~ ~:'" '-r, " ~- \;.1.- _..." ,.--'J." ,..- ~1.r" c--.\ .,..- v" \ . \ c> \ -,; .\ :' --::.-...,~.... (jC} 'r- < ~ .,/ L-._ \~...... -~~.? v~6 :;:::--- , f-, (--:: \."",,, .. \ \ \ ,..', .- -.,~ ""."-.\-'" .1>" Go, .""' (-,~~~ l.c~.) PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430-2 . Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.03~, A&J #2QQ!)40.00co::, o \./, >:." (} , -") .-;-'--~ ..' , .--,\,\ -:'.7 .-/"'~ ./' \" -- \"\ SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER ~.- PART 1. GENERAL ....--::. 7- y '-:? c''''\ /" 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES: A. Domestic hot water heaters. S. Provide drain pan under the water heater which drains to floor drain. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts indicating technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment. Include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data. S. Submit operating and maintenance manual for system. 1.3. WARRANTY A. Submit a ten-year warranty for the coils, pressure vessel and anticipator. The unconditional and non-prorated warranty shall cover failure of the coils due to thermal shock, mechanical failure or erosion of the pressure vessel against leakage due to corrosion and of the anticipator against failure. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS '-- A. Acceptable manufacturers - electric domestic hot water heaters: 1. Lochinvar 2. Architect approved equivalent 3. Design based upon Lochinvar "Junior Electric Water Heaters" 2.2. MATERIALS ./~ A. Electric hot water heaters: 1 . Electric fired water heaters shall be designed for use with 120 V AC and shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories. Heaters with greater than 119 gallons storage or 200,000 Btu/hr input shall have the ASME stamp for 125 psi W. P. Tanks shall be suitable for a working pressure of 150 psig. 2. The water heaters shall be insulated with polyurethane or fiberglass insulation. The energy efficiency of the heaters shall meet NAECA standards and Model Energy Code minimum efficiency standards. The electric storage water heater having a storage capacity of 120 gallons or less and an input rating of 12 KW or less shall have a standby loss not exceeding 4.0 watts/square foot of tank surface area or 43 watts, whichever is greater. 3. The heater tanks interior surface shall have a glass lining fused to it. 4. Provide magnesium anode rod and factory installed dielectric nipples. 5. The jacket shall be embossed steel finished in white acrylic enamel. 6. Provide tin coated, copper sheathed, immersion elements that have low watt density. 7. Provide an unconditional five year warranty and certificate shall be attached to the water heater. 8. Provide a drain valve. DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15434-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 9. Provide adjustable, water temperature control with automatic over-heat safety device for safety protection. 10. Provide unit mounted electrical disconnect switch. B. Provide expansion tank for water heater system that satisfies requirements of the Plumbing Code and Section 15120, Piping Speicialites. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Electric water heaters shall be installed as indicated on the drawings complete with water, power. B. Install heaters and make hot and cold water connections, electrical connections, and safety relief vent connections. C. Connect electrical disconnects to the electrical heater. D. Route temperature pressure safety relief valve discharge to the floor in accordance with International Mechanical and Iowa State Plumbing Code requirements. E. Install domestic water expansion tanks in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. F. Provide for drain pan under the water heater. -,.> END OF SECTION 15434 (~\ \"..-....'. " \. \ \ ,./<"'~.. --- ,- \).-- '-" ..9 I.;~) (0 .6.. --.". 4_~" .....-..... -f , ..--- "0 -;/:-- ./.. \c.,':;::-~ '--"b ;;:;-- ,-...::.~ 1..)......... ~ - --' I> \', , C~) ',?-? 'i~ w -.J DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15434-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all Work as necessary for the complete installation of the plumbing fixtures and trim. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source quality control: plumbing fixtures and trim specified hereinafter shall be provided free of flaws and defects of any sort in material and workmanship and shall operate perfectly when installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. The manufacturer shall agree to replace all or any part of the fixtures which show flaw or defect due to faulty manufacture. ,- B. Reference standards: fixtures shall conform to current commercial standards for sanitary cast iron enameled ware and staple vitreous china plumbing fixtures and trim recommended by the U.S. Department of Commerce. 1.3. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection of fixtures and trim: adequately protect the plumbing fixtures and accessories during construction. Replace at no cost to the Owner any fixture or accessory that is marred, scratched, defaced, or broken. 1.4. SUBMITTALS .c5 ~~i~ C) r'~'J c.) ......, ---~ A. Provide submittals for all plumbing fixtures. r" PART 2. PRODUCTS :-"'.. -a -.n " "i ,~~) oiIr_.~ )7 <-;"? c'"1 2.1. MATERIALS - A. General: 1. Fixtures and associated supply valves and fittings shall be the standard product of one of the manufacturers listed with each fixture and comparable to the model listed. 2. All plumbing fixtures shall be provided complete with all necessary trim and accessories to insure the proper installation and operation of each fixture. Trim and accessories shall include but not be limited to supply pipes, stops, drains, strainers, tailpieces, P-traps and bolt caps. 3. Plumbing fixtures provided for use by the disabled shall be in compliance with the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). B. Water Closets. 1. The following shall apply to standard water closets hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a_ Provide white vitreous china water closets with elongated bowls, manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide black solid plastic seats with concealed hinge, open front elongated seat less cover and with concealed check. Seats shall be manufactured by Olsonite. Church, Beneke, Centoco, Bemis or by fixture manufacturer. c. Wall mounted water closets shall be rated for 1000 pounds. _....:: PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 LL (.~ II C.j <{ --~ n;Q _J >-' U':= .',_ C) r..~ .r u-=> 6 2. Flush Valves a. Provide hidden, electric powered, sensor operated, water closet Royal Flushometer, Optima plus, by Sloan, for floor mounted or wall hung top spud bowls. The electric powered flush valves shall be Low Consumption (1.6 gallons per flush). The valves shall meet the following specifications: (1) Provide quiet, exposed, diaphragm type, chrome plated closet f1ushometer for either left or right hand supply with the following features: (a) ADA compliant OptimaPlus infrared sensor for automatic "no hands" operation. (b) Dual filtered by-pass. (c) Diaphragm, stop seat and vacuum breaker to be molded from Permex rubber compound for chloramine resistance. (d) Engineered plastic cover assembly with integral window. (e) User friendly three second flush delay. (f) Infrared sensor range adjustment screw, (g) Initial set-up range indicator light (first 10 minutes). (h) 1" i.p.s. screwdriver bak-Chek angle stop. (i) Sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange. (j) Adjustable tailpiece. (k) High back pressure vacuum breaker flush connection with one-piece bottom hex coupling nut. (I) Spud coupling and flange for 1-1/2" top spud. (m) Valve body, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with ASTM alloy classification for semi-red brass. Valve shall be in compliance with the application sections of ASSE 1037, ANSIIASME A 112.19.6 and Mil Spec V-29293. Valve shall conform to ADA requirements. (n) Provide electric power and transformer to operate solenoid and electronic sensor flush valve. 3. Water Closet (Handicap). Furnish same as non-handicap, except mount at handicap height. -~ ".. ," \.0 L:) C'J ,...~\ I , l ~......."_,,.J l' . ...1 0- (',j ~. .~\ C. Lavatories. 1. The following shall apply to lavatories hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a. Provide white vitreous china lavatories with front overflows manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide chrome plated brass supply fitting manufactured by Delta. c. Provide with chrome plated brass supply pipes, 1/2" 0.0. flexible risers and wheel handle, quarter turn closed to open, angle stops manufactured by Brasscraft or fixture manufacturer. d. Provide with chrome plated, 1-1/4" cast brass tall pieces and P-traps with C.O. plugs manufactured by Dearborn Brass or fixture manufacturer. e. Provide with flow limiting devices to limit flows to 2-1/2 GPM. f. Lav drains and hot water pipes shall be insulated or protected so that wheel-chair occupants cannot be burned. Provide Truebro Inc. Handi Lav-Guard Kit No. 102 and No. 105 for offset drains. (1) Provide ADA conforming lavatory piping insulation and PVC insulation covers. (2) The guard insulation shall cover the P-traps, hot and cold water valves and piping. (3) The insulation guard kets shall be closed cell vinyl with special UV protection. (4) The covering shall be white and shall be paintable. (5) The kits shall be suitable for protection of wheel chair accessible lavatories. PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-2 ...-, ',--.. , I ----1 iC, '_.-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (6) The kits shall be manufactured by Truebro or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Battery powered handwashing faucet: a. Provide Sloan battery powered, sensor operated, electronic hand washing faucet with metal throat plate, for tempered or hot/cold water operation, or Architect approved equivalent, by Delta, Moen or Bradley b. The unit shall have 0.5 gpm, vandal resistant spray head. c. Unit shall be ADA compliant, chrome plated hand washing faucet with the following features: (1) Splash-proof, circuit control module. (2) Fiber optic, automatic, self-adaptive sensing. (3) Audible tone low battery indicator. (4) Serviceable filter solenoid valve. (5) Chrome plated throat. (6) 4" trim plate with anti-rotation pin. (7) Pressure compensating flow control. (8) Polypropylene optic cable protection. (9) Provide four (4) C-cell alkaline batteries for each faucet. (1 O)Below deck thermostatic mixing valve. (11 )Chrome plated brass grid strainer with a 1-1/4" outlet tube. (12) Unit sensitivity and turn time shall be adjustable in the field. -:c.::") l.o ;::;;'n ~.~~- '::-:- '-"",",..~ : ...... --. \ C) -;1 \ <> ...,., :}; -r", " \ , . ,~"_.-1 '-:? ."';-- y u' - D. Urinals. 1. The following shall apply to urinals hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a. Provide white vitreous china urinals manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane, Toto or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide urinals with chrome plated, exposed battery operated flush valves with vacuum breakers manufactured by Sloan or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Wall-hung urinal. Provide washout type with integral flush spreader, 2" drain connection and 1-114" top spud. 3. Provide Low Water Consumption (1.0 gallons per flush) battery operated flush valves. a. Flush valves b. Flush valve: Battery operated Sloan flush valve as specified for water closets. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner with proper connections to supply and drainage piping. Provide proper grounds for all fixtures requiring same. B. Voids between plumbing fixtures, mounting surfaces (except at ceramic tile surfaces) shall be filled with mildew resistant, latex calk. Self-rimming lavatories shall be set in mildew resistant, latex calk. 1. Mildew resistant calk shall be PV A or PVC material. Provide 'Quick Seal' by DAP or 'Polycaulk' by Pecora. PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-3 - (....... \....../....~ \ \)..-\ , r"'.r'" ",.~ ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 -" C. Mounting heights. Fixture mounting heights shaH be as follows: FIXTURE I STANDARD I HANDICAPPED Waler Closel I 16 inches lIoor 10 seat I 18 inches floor 10 seal Waler Closet Conlrols I I Max 44 inches above floor Urinal I 24 inches floor to rim I 17 inches floor to rim Urinal Controls I Max 44 inches above floor 1 Max 44 inches above lIoor lavalorv I 31 inches floor 10 rim I 34 inches floor to rim Eleclric waler cooler I 40 inches floor to scout I. 36 inches floor 10 sooul 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROUTESTING '-"' A. Plumbing fixture tests: water shall be turned on to all supply lines and all fixtures shall be demonstrated to operate properly. Flush valves shall be tested and adjusted to flush efficiently without undue noise. C- \'--~ \c-" END OF SECTION 15440 S' .J) c:., ,~ .?-? ..'-">,," .0-- c--} ./ ( ) ~ . \ -G-~:' "f\ (",,"", <2 -;-'/ ~,/ ..~)- \)":6 ;::;-- '-- PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-4 '-- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 05.038 A&J #2006~,oO c;'''' -(~ c::, ~~- 0 ~-) ,,:-. ::--- , -" .~ ~ \-...) ,~ -- ~. -- PART 1. GENERAL .\"\ ... .~--~ \-..1 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES c.:? ("\ - y A. Toilet exhaust fans, in line type. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. All tans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fans shall bear the AMCA label. 1.3. SUBMITTALS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Exhaust fans. 2. Submit complete fan performance curves marked to indicate selection points for proposed fans. Data submitted shall also include sound power levels in all octave bands. B. Provide system demonstration for the exhaust fans. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS --;. A. Circulating fans in unit assemblies shall be of the Centrifugal airfoil. Each fan unit shall have an air capacity not less than indicated on Drawings when operating against the external static pressure indicated on Drawings. 1. Fan units shall be installed complete with electric motor and drive equipment. Fans shall be rated and constructed in accordance with AMCA standard test codes. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced at all speeds. Fans shall have externally-mounted, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings. Fan bearings to have 200,000 hour minimum life per AFBMA-9. Fan shafts shall be made of steel, and shall be provided with key seats and keys tor the impeller hubs and tan pulleys or with other equally positive fastening_ V-belt drives shall be designed for at least 50 percent overload capacity and shall be designed to allow adjustment of tan speed without removing the fan or fan motor from the housing. Fan motors shall be equipped with adjustable base or rails for belt tightening. Motor mountings shall be on a resilient base constructed of steel shapes and connected through rubber-in-shear isolators. Contractor shall submit complete fan performance curves marked to indicate selection points for proposed fans. Data submitted shall include sound power levels in all octave bands. 2. Provide grease zurt fitting extensions for all fan bearings that are not easily accessible as part of normal routine maintenance. 3. Motors shall be squirrel cage, general purpose 40oC., high efficiency, polyphase NEMA frame, with electrical characteristics as indicated on Drawings. Also see Section 15010 for supplemental motor requirements. Starters shall be provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL, except where variable speed drives are specified. AIR HANDLING EaUIPMENT SECTION 15850-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 Wiring to the motor lugs is specified under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. Provide motors with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hour minimum life per AFBMA-9. 4. Each unit shall be provided with necessary accessories as indicated on Drawings and as specified. 5. Transition sections, sound attenuator banks and filters shall be either field-fabricated or furnished with unit as shown. 6. Automatic control dampers shall be provided to control the intake of outside air. Dampers shall be airfoil design and shall be either parallel or opposed blade type with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings. Maximum damper blade length shall be 60". Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/square foot at 1 inch (W.G.) and 9 cfm/square foot at 4-inches (W.G.). Operators shall have weatherproof enclosures. 7. Provide unit mounted disconnect switches for the fan motors in a NEMA 1 enclosure for the unit control panel. 8. Provide a unit mounted control panel, NEMA 1 enclosure that houses the fan disconnect switches. control relays, and fuses as required for the fan motors and low voltage components such as interior lights and damper controls. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INSTALLATION A. Install fans and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set up control sequences per Section 15950. ,~ C. Make control and electrical connections. D. Provide vibration isolation for exhaust fan. END OF SECTION 15850 L. L. .p v0 <?> ~;--:r -:!~ <;?/ \,-,/, - \ \.") ~~ '~-~ (~) \/) ~ ("'; \....v~ , \ \ \. V'', '~:,,.... 'cv ,.'~ - \).--- c;-.\ .....- " \:, <..;.) ('") (:'::::\ <~ <' --~ ,..;~}.- '~ --... " ,..::. '-"0 ;;:--- "-'-, AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15850-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640,00 '1\ _, SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK {) /n ~"~-"''' ._;..-./\ ~~:-/, . , 1......_..-.,. C-' (-:;" \.:-1 ~.;'\ ~,- .... " -,," PART 1. GENERAL O. / ..-/ ./\ t') "", ) ..~),.. ( .) - . 1 .1 . SECTION INCLUDES ,-,--~ -7 A. This Section includes furnishing and installing all material for the complete installation of the following: 1. All ductwork shown on the Drawings for the complete heating, air conditioning, exhaust, and ventilating systems. 2. All flexible duct. ""' c.' ./' 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. NFPA gO-A, "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) a. "HV AC Duct Manual" in this Specification shall mean the first edition of the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." b. "Balancing and Adjustment Manual" in this Specification shall mean the first edition of the "Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution System." 3. International National Codes a. Mechanical Code, 2003. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit duct fabrication drawings showing sizes, location, materials and pressure classification as minimum. B. The Contractor shall not fabricate or install any ductwork until the ductwork fabrication drawings have been submitted and reviewed and accepted by the Architect. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Ductwork construction. 1 . General. a. Ductwork construction shall, as a minimum, conform to NFPA Standard gO-A, the International Mechanical Code and the SMACNA HV AC Duct Manual. Ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. b. The size of the ducts indicated on the Drawings shall be net inside dimensions. c. The duct pressure class specifications shown on the Drawings are explained in Figure 1-1 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Manual. d. Ducts shall be sealed in accordance with Table 1-2. All ductwork dishwashing area exhaust shall have a minimum seal Class 'C' rating. e. All ductwork shall be substantially and neatly supported so that horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts are without buckle and all ducts are free from the possibility of deformation, collapse, or vibration. DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 /-',\ ! \ ..---- '. U;\ ~~~ \).- c---l - c....) ,.J (? ...t::' ~ (;-' -;~~~ '6~ 9- 2. Rectangular ductwork. a. Ducts shall be constructed and reinforced in accordance with Tables 1-3 through 1-13. b. Tie rod attachments shall be in accordance with SMACNA Figures 1-2 and t-3. c. Aluminum duct shall be constructed in accordance with Tables 1-14 through 1-16. d. Duct joints and seams shall be in accordance with Figures 1-4 through 1-18. e. Fittings and other construction. 1) Duct fittings, branches, and connections shall be in accordance with Figures 2-1 through 2-11. All square throat elbows shall have turning vanes. A Type RE 4 elbow as shown in Figure 2-2 and a straight tap for rectangular ductwork as shown in Figure 2-8 is not permitted. 2) Duct access doors shall be in accordance with Figures 2-12 and 2-13. Doors shall be adequately sized for ease of maintenance of concealed items. Insulate access doors where ducts are insulated with same insulation as on ductwork. 3) Volume dampers shall be in accordance with Figures 2-14 and 2-15. 4) Grille, register, and diffuser connections shall be in accordance with Figures, 2-16 through 2-18. 5) Flexible connections at fans shall be in accordance with Figure 2-19. f. Flexible duct liner shall be installed in accordance with Figures 2-22 through 2-25. Round and oval ductwork. a. Round ducts shall be constructed in accordance with Tables 3-2 and 3-3. 1) Seams and joints shall be in accordance with Figures 3-1 and 3-2. 2) Fittings shall be in accordance with Table 3-1, Figure 3-3 and the following list of approved fittings shown on Figure 3-4: 900 Tee Fitting, 900 Tap, 900 Tee with Oval to Round Tap, and Figure 3-5: Conical Tee Fitting, Conical Tap, Wye Fitting, Conical Tee and Reducer Fitting, and Alternate Arrangement. 3) Flat oval ductwork construction shall be in accordance with Table 3-4. Fittings shall be in accordance with Figure 3-6, or as manufactured by United McGill, Semco, Norlock, Lindlab or Architect approved equivalent. 4. Hangers and supports. a. Rigid round, rectangular and flat oval metal ducts shall be installed with support systems in accordance with Figures 4-1 through 4-9 and Tables 4-1 through 4-3. Horizontal ducts shall have a support within 24" of each elbow and within 48N of each branch intersection. ....-; ---C- -0..- d.. /-;Z -..:-.0 .'-( ? c-\ _ \,'>---, ....,.... ...-:. / 3 ()~. , c.) ...p \P 8"> ~, B. Flexible ductwork. 1. Provide flexible duct as shown and make connections between ducts and ceiling diffusers with a minimum of 12" of flexible duct. No flexible duct shall be longer than 4'.0". 2. Flexible ductwork shall be of spiral construction composed of a corrosion resistant metal supporting spiral and a coaled fabric with a metal or mineral base. Flexible duct connectors shall be listed by UL and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50. Operating temperature range shall be OOF. to 200oF. Operating pressure shall be negative 0.5 inch to positive 10 inches W.G. 3. Where either acoustical duct liner or exterior insulation is shown or specified for duct systems, provide factory pre-insulated material for all flexible duclwork in the system consisting of a galvanized spring bonded to the interior liner, 1 N (25 ram) thick. 0.75 pounds/cubic foot (12.0 kilograms/cubic meter) fiberglass insulation and a laminated DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 vapor barrier jackel consisting of fiberglass reinforced metalized film or vinyl or synthetic film. Furnish Porter Portoduct Type TK or Thermaflex Type M-KC. ~\ 4. Provide bare flexible duct for systems not requiring acoustical lining or-,exterio~~} insulation, Porter Portoduct Type T, Thermaflex Type S-TL, or Wire~pe 5'l, 5. Flexible duct shall be supported in accordance with Figures 3-9 and 3.:.'jl:fe(;the ,./ HV AC Duct Manual. ~<". \" ~\\ ~.< ,..,,,,- " \ ,~ I' ~~ '-) C. Field erected casing and plenums. \ '. -. 1. Equipment housings shall be provided for the air conditioning system as stl~wh-on t.;~ the Drawings and as hereinafter specified. All sheet metal and steel frami;Yg.materia~~ shall be galvanized, except that G90 coated galvanized steel shall be used iW'all chambers with high probability of moisture presence such as outside air intake plenums or air-handler discharge plenums. a. Entire casings or plenums shall be made airtight, suitably braced with structural iron members and free from breathing or vibration. Housing shall terminate at masonry walls and at floors with angles and a sponge rubber gasket. All welds on casing interiors shall be painted. Casings and plenums shall be constructed to withstand 133 percent of rated pressure without structural failure. Wall and roof deflection at rated pressure shall not exceed 1/8 inch per foot of width. b. Casings or plenums shall be single wall and internally insulated with rigid insulation board to provide an overall U-valve of 0.10 BTU/h/ft2. of. c. Flexible connections shall be placed between tan and casings, where applicable. d. All casings on the suction side of the fan shall be the pressure classification equal to the negative pressure at fan shutoff. Casing on fan discharge shall be of the designated pressure class. 2. Casings and plenums shall be constructed in accordance with Figures 6-1 through 6-8 and Table 6-1 of the HV AC Duct Manual. 3. Pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent air leakage and condensation movement through the seal. Penetrations shall be in accordance with Figure 6-10. I~..l D. Access doors: Access doors shall be provided where shown and as required for access to all mechanical equipment mounted inside ductwork. Doors shall be complete with hinges, gaskets and "Ventlok" No. 260 latches manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Illinois or Young Regulator Company. Doors shall be made airtight and shall swing opposing the plenum pressure. Doors in casings shall be constructed in accordance with Figures 6-11 and 6-12 and Table 6-2. Doors shall be insulated where casings are insulated. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Ductwork construction - general. 1. Adhere to Drawings as closely as possible. The Contractor may vary run and shape of ducts and make offsets during progress of work, if required to meet structural or other interference. 2. Install ductwork in adherence to ceiling height schedules indicated. Consult with other trades, and in conjunction with them, establish necessary space requirements for each trade so as to maintain required clearances. Where no ceiling height is stated, ductwork shall have a minimum clearance of 9'-8", or as high as possible above the floor. DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 -...; 3.2. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Balancing and Adjusting. 1. Make adjustments of the mechanical equipment in accordance with the plans and Specifications as directed by the air balance and testing agency if it is found that any portion of the Work has not been properly installed for accomplishing the testing and balancing as called for in the specifications. B. Clean all duct interiors of all debris during assembly, prior to closing up various sections, and prior to operating any fan associated with a particular duct system in accordance with Section 15010. END OF SECTION 15890 --. ,~: (-> ............./ .. " \;V'.. ~' \).--- ..:e. '0.- ~ ,.,..- v v> i.? ~ ca, ~ L --,. '2: .....~C' .' / ;.;-- (\-- ';),.\7~ /::,~ ',,/ () -~~ 6- '6~ 9- ,-:..... .p V' ;;-, ,-........ DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-4 r~ '--' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes air distribution specialties and ductwork accessories complet~:l9r air distribution systems. ",;' ,;:':) '~'.,0 0"",- \ 1.2. SUBMITTALS ,,- A. Provide submittals on all material furnished. .-IJ \ ,\ 'v) \'.) PART 2. PRODUCTS :.:'"'".. 2.1. MATERIALS c.? Lf\ - y A. Roof curbs: provide wall curbs of prefabricated metal type of aluminum or galvanized steel and designed for mounting wall exhausters. Curb shall be designed for flashing to roof in an acceptable manner. Curb shall have adequate means for mounting dampers with-in fan curb throat where dampers are specified or shown on Drawings. Curbs shall be Penn Ventilator Company "Sonotrol," Carnes, Greenheck, Acme or Cook as applicable for the unit being roof mounted. Curbs shall be the sound attenuating type, B. Turning Vanes. Turning vanes shall be installed in all mitered duct elbows and where shown on Drawings. All turning vanes shall be double thickness type per the SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Manual. -" C. Volume dampers: Volume dampers shall be provided at take off for flex duct and where shown on drawings. Volume dampers shall be two metal gages heavier than the duct in which they are installed and shall be reinforced to prevent vibration and noise. All volume dampers occurring in concealed ductwork, except those above removable ceilings, shall be installed with shafts vertical. In ducts over 14" in width with vertical shaHs, use mullilouvered opposed blade dampers manufactured by Airstream Products, Ruskin, Nailor Industries, NCA Manufacturing or United Aire. For accessible dampers use Young No. 403 damper regulators and No. 656 end bearings. Dampers in rooms with other than removable type ceilings shall have Young No. 301 concealed damper regulators. D. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles: 1. General Requirements. a. Provide all diffusers, registers and grilles as indicated on the Drawings. Neck sizes, face sizes, CFM airflow capacities, maximum allowable noise criteria (NC Level) and air pressure drop shall be as specified on the Drawings. b. Select diffusers and registers which, when adjusted and balanced by the testing and balancing contractor, will provide uniform air distribution over the indicated throw area at the installed height without causing excessive or annoying draflf> in the occupiable zones within their coverage. Maximum terminal velocities in the occupiable zones shall not exceed 75 feet per minute unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 2. Materials. a. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles of corrosion-free steel construction except where noted or specified otherwise. Mitered joints, where required, shall be maintained straight and free from visible gaps, buned tightly together under all DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ..,~ r-\ ro-- .\.-"'~."~ \.\--\ } -:;;:.-- D- J) ...r> 8-> 4- ~ ,.1.-0 rK:- ;;-- '-~0 -/;: / .".-- . -\ > '-j'U ';~ .::i- \../.: :z; 05 ;;-- c:--l ..... (~ \:? ~ c...,.'? c-~ 05.038 A&J #200640.00 possible mounting conditions by concealed tack welding or concealed welded plate connections. b. Provide diffusers, registers and grille of all-aluminum construction only in "wet areas" subject to corrosion; such as locker, kitchen and dishwashing areas. Notwithstanding the above, provide all bar and slot linear devices of extruded aluminum construction, unless noted otherwise. Frames and Borders. a. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles with mounting frames and applicable borders as indicated on the Drawings. b. For grid- T lay-in ceilings, provide diffusers, registers and grilles with suitable outer dimensions compatible with a 24" x 24" ceiling grid module; include extension panels if applicable. c. Provide narrow width (5/8" to 1"), shallow thickness, surface-mounted frames and/or borders for all drywall surface-mounted devices, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. d. Provide flush plaster frames with concealed mounting/fastening for all (wet work) plaster ceiling and wall applications. e. Provide heavy duty reinforced frames and borders for all floor-mounted applications. Such devices shall be capable of incurring normal foot traffic live loads without causing deformation or visible deflection. Frames and/or borders shall be suitable lor the floor surface in which they are to be installed and shall be rigidly attached to prevent "rocking" and slippage movement. f. Frames and borders require approval 01 the Architect. 4. Finishes. a. Unless specified or otherwise indicated, diffusers, registers and grilles shall have an off-white, lactory applied enamel paint finish which blends with a variety of grid-T ceiling suspension systems. Anodized, baked epoxy, and special color/paint finishes shall be as directed by the Architect and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Refer to Architects Drawings to verify color requirements prior to placing factory orders. Notify the Architect regarding any apparent discrepancies on color finishes. 5. Accessories. a. Provide screwdriver or lever operated, worm gear actuated, opposed blade or butterfly volume dampers only on ceiling supply units as specifically noted or indicated on the Drawings and in the necks or branch take-off duct of all single diffusers which ere tapped directly into a main trunk duct. Under conditions such that the diffuser/register branch tap duct is less than one duct diameter provide a diffuser collar-mounted volume damper to permit balancing. Under conditions where the single diffuser branch tap is longer than one duct diameter, provide volume damper in branch takeoff duct as close to main trunk duct as possible. Provide manufactured dampers which either spring clip or screw-mount into the unit collar. Dampers shall be adjustable from the diffuser/register face without removing the core assembly. b_ All volume dampers shall be free from vibration, rattle and other noise when subject to the specified operating range or maximum airflows and indicated velocities. Noisy dampers, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. c. Provide fixed blade or pivot adjustable equalizing grids only on diffusers where specifically indicated or specified on the Drawings. Install equalizing grids, where required, with the blade direction perpendicular to the duct approach direction. d. Provide galvanized steel square-to-round transition collars for all diffusers having square neck patterns which are indicated for connection with round ductwork. e. Provide galvanized steel square-to-round transition collars for all diffusers having DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910.2 3. ~-, --' i__ ---J (---., -" '- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 square neck patterns which are indicated for connection with round ductwork. 6. Quality Assurance and Testing a. All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be either factory and/or independently tested under controlled laboratory conditions in accordance with the applicable section of the Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062 and/or ISO Standard 3741. Testing shall substantiate the published catalogued engineering specifications and ratings. Devices which do not satisfactorily perform per their published ratings shall be subject to replacement by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. b. Provide laboratory test results confirming published rating compliance with shop drawing submission. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products a. Industrial Diffusers, Registers, Grilles and Bars Titus Carnes Krueger Tuttle & Bailey Metal Aire Anemostat b. Square and Round Diffusers ~ Adjustable Grid Carnes Tuttle & Bailey J & J Anemostat Titus Krueger Metal Aire E.H. Price Nailor Industries c. Double Deflection Adjustable Registers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H. Price d. Fixed Curve Registers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H.Price e. Grilles Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H.Price f. Adjustable linear slot diffusers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J &J E.H.Price E.H. Price Nailor Industries Carnes T uWe & Bailey -0 Nailor Industires ~: (j -\l Carnes T utUe & Bailey Nailor Industires -.>j, j fV Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industries ~ t:? en - Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industires g. Do not use perforated plate diffusers on the project, E. Low leakage backdraft dampers. (Mark BOD). 1. Dampers shall be of mill-finished extruded aluminum blades, frame and tie-bar linkage. 2. Dampers shall be of low leakage weatherproof construction having neoprene blade seals and jamb seals suitable for either horizontal or vertical airflow operation up to 3500 fpm without blade deformation, sticking, jamming or vibration chatter. 3. Provide with adjustable counterbalances (0.01 to 0.05 inches (W.G.) on all horizontally mounted dampers. 4. Damper leakage shall be less than 12 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.5 inches (W.G.) pressure differential. 5. Furnish Ruskin .CB" Series, Greenheck, Nailor Industries, NCA Manufacturing or Architect approved equivalent. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-3 r~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 F. Roof Air Outlets 1. Provide roof air intakes and outlets of sizes shown on drawings. Units shall be aluminum construction, with hinged hoods, and mounted on curbs and flashed. Units shall be Penn Ventilator, Carnes, Greenheck, Cook, Acme or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Accessories. Provide the following: a. Birdscreen. b. Anticondensate coating. c. Fiberglass insulation on underside of hood. d. Motorized dampers or gravity backdraft dampers as scheduled on the drawings. G. Air Turns: Double thickness steam line vanes with runners. ELGIN "Air-Tite" or Architect approved shop fabricated equivalent. H. Air Extractors for installation at branch duct take-offs shall be YOUNG REGULATOR CO, No. 890-8 with positioning regulator for mounting on duct. Where positioning regulator is not accessible, air extractors shall be No. 890-A with coupling, extension rod and positioning regulator for installation on wall or ceiling. I. Access Panels: For all duct pressure classes shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gage, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two YOUNG REGULATOR COMPANY No. 1330 latches. Access panels shall not be secured by sheet metal screws or bolts. Only latch type fasteners are acceptable. Access dor or panels shall be by Flexmaster, Nailor Industries, Cesco, Keys or Architect approved equivalent. -, J. Joints: Joints for round, oval and rectangular high velocity and low pressure ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA joint details for the appropriate pressure class. Submit proposed method for joining ducts with fabrication procedures for review and approval. PART 3. EXECUTION r::~ 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Units shall be installed with appropriate valves and unions or flanged connections to allow for removal for maintenance and repair or replacement. ,~, B. Install shut-off cocks, balancing cocks, air vents, control valves, flow meter fittings, gauge adapters, and devices as required for complete installation. C. Coordinate the installation of terminal units with Section 15830. END OF SECTION 15910 h -,,?-A' .9 I 'C"! '.>) -,;'( -/ ..-n . (~/, ...;; l; . '. '_,..J, I ,/ ~ .'r)<0 (""'. (y .< . ~ -f' ~- V"y. /" .<t)~ \ . v;\ .y ~/ 'i'~ \.Y ~ DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-4 SEcnON 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 05~8 A&J 1t?00640&lQ ,.....-., / (j L., .,';:.,n ,.<::.~- ,"::..-".- \.. . .r~\~ " Riverside festival Stage Improvements .....- ,,) 'i'\ ., -,-:1 /~~-. PART 1. GENERAL .,;>--"'\ c~) .' U,AUTOMATIC CONTROLS y ( ':'\ '" "':7 ~ A. Provide the electronic/electric Automatic Control Systems as specified in Section 15950. This project Contractor and subcontractors shall coordinate the control system installation, sequencing, check-out and systems commissioning with the Automatic Control System Contractor. The Contractor and subcontractors shall coordinate with the Automatic Control System Contractor as outlined in this Section. B. The control system shall be a Johnson Controls, Control Installation of Iowa, or Woodman Controls. 1.2. SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic controls. B. The Control Contactor shall provide all necessary control wiring between controllers and operators, except tor control wiring specified to be provided by the equipment manufacturer. C. Provide wall conduit, back boxes above ceiling, conduit from junction above ceiling routed out to controlled device. 0, The Mechanical Contractor shall provide necessary blank off plates (sating) required to install damper that are smaller than duct size. E. Furnish and install all necessary wiring connections required for flow devices valve posilion indicators, etc. F. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all automatic dampers and/or operators specified to be furnished by the Control Contractor in other sections. G. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend requiTed number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors for dampers specified to be furnished. H. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stralification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in places only after stratification problem has been eliminated. I. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide access panel or other approved means of access through ducts lor service to all new control equipment installed under this project. J. Definitions: 1. Control Wiring. Contrpl wiring is defined as all wiring from a piece of controlled or monitored equipment to points of connection on all equipment as shown or specified. 2. Output Signal Conversion. Output signal conversion refers to the changing of one kind of control output into a proportionally related signal appropriate for direct actuation of the controlled device. Signals are converted by a transducer which may be externallo the digital controller originating the output. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 a. Examples in modulating control of pneumatic actuators are conversion of 4-20 ma signals into proportional 3-15 psig signals. b. An example of output signal conversion in on/off or open/close control is a contact closure originating in a digital controller which activates a solenoid air valve which passes main air, thereby forcing a damper to open fully. 3. PID: PID refers to proportional, integral, and derivative control; the three types of action that are used in controlling modulating equipment. 4. Resolution: Refers to the number of possible states an input value or output value can take and is a function of the digital controller I/O circuitry; the ND converter for input and the D/A converter for output. Ten bit resolution has 1024 possible states and eight bit resolution has 256 possible states. 5. Stand-Alone Control: Refers to the digital controller being able to perform required climate control, and energy management functions without connection to another digital controller or central site computer. Digital controller requirements for stand-alone control are a time clock, a microprocessor, microchip resident control 4. programs, PID control, a communications port for interfacing with and programming 'f}., ~ the controller, firmware for interrogation and programming, and I/O for sensing and C?> 7~ Q effecting control of its control environment. C-', ~~ .3.\~~~~ITTALS ll-' ('1 ,.. U _" \ - A?:_S.B9p Drawings and Product Data: u: t:\ \0 ~ 1. All Drawings shall be accompanied with a complete description of sequence of ~ Q. operation. Each control element mentioned in the sequence description shall be '2; identified with same mark as shown on the control diagram. c-...l ~. 1.4. WARRANTY A. Components, parts and assemblies shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after acceptance. Expressed warranties are conditionally based on the requirement that the items covered within the warranty are used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Control system shall also be warranted to perform all functions expressed or implied in the Sequence of Operation. Failure of controls to perform these functions to the satisfaction of the Owner shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. The warranty will not commence until the system is 100% up and running, all punch list items completed to the Owner's satisfaction, and Owner training completed, regardless of time the Owner has received benefit (substantial or otherwise) from the system during construction and installation. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All control devices shall be factory-cleaned, wrapped and packaged in boxes prior to shipping to construction site. ~ 8. Store control devices in original packaging in clean, dry spaces and protecllhem from weather, excessive humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, and other containments. c. Prior to installation, inspect control devices for damage. 1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Products: 1. Material and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such product, using similar materials, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in commercial or industrial AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 use for two years prior to bid opening. The two year use shall include applications of similarly sized equipment and materials used under similar circumstances. The two year experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. 2. The equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. B. Nameplates and Tags 1. Nameplates bearing legends as shown and tags bearing device unique identifiers as shown shall be engraved or stamped. Nameplates shall be permanently attached to HV AC control panel doors. 2. For each field mounted piece of equipment, not in a finished area, a plastic or metal tag with equipment name and point identifier shall be attached. PART 2. PRODUCTS .) l-c ~c~_ ~") I :, '. :) '"' v 2.1. MATERIALS (~") -'n _<:...~ ..-'- -, .~.....- IV A. Sensors and Input Hardware: -':J 1. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). a. Provide RTD sensors with 1000 ohm, or higher, platinum element th~f~e... <:? compatible with the digital controllers. Sensors shaH be encapsulated3n epoxy~)'i series 300 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or copper. TemperatUte sensor-' accuracy shall be 0.1 percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 320F. Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed O.250F. cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers, without transmitters, is preferred provided controller supports direct connection of RTDs. When RTDs are connected directly to the controller, keep lead resistance error to 0.250F. or less. Provide 3 wire sensing circuits to not exceed the 0.250F. lead resistance error. Total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.50F., which includes sensor error, lead resistance error or 4 to 20 milliampere transmitter error, and AID conversion resolution error. Provide manufacturer documentation, and if required due to questionable point(s) data observed during testing, the Contractors engineering calculations which support the proposed RTD circuit will have a total error of OSF. or less for the specified application. 1) Wiring: a) Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for direct connected RTDs. b) Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for RTDs using 4 to 20 milliampere transmitters. 2) Transmitters: Provide 4 to 20 milliampere transmitters for RTDs where: a) Digital controllers do not Support direct connection of RTDs to controllers; and b) Digital controllers do not meet temperature resolution requirement of 0.25DF. 2. Thermistors. a. Precision thermistors may be used in temperature sensing applications below 200oF. Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be O.36DF. or less between the range of 32DF _ to 150oF. Sensor manufacturer shall ulilize 100 percent screening to verify accuracy. Thermistors shall be pre-aged, and inherently stable. Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0.250F. cumulative. Sensor element and leads shall be encapsulated. Bead thermistors are not allowed. AID conversion resolution error shall be kept to 0.1 OF. Total error for a thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.5DF., which includes sensor error and digital controller AID conversion resolution error. Provide AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 3 ',_OJ ,-j Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 .L thermistor and digital controller manufacturer documentation and the Contractor's engineering calculations which support the proposed thermistor input circuit will have a total error of O.soF. or less. Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded cable for thermistors. 3. Temperature Sensorsffhermostats. a. General. Electronic temperature sensors shall be standard resistance type, platinum film element on ceramic chip, for all temperature ranges. All electronic temperature sensors shall be factory calibrated and of tamperproof construction. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be a minimum of:t 1%. b. Room Type: Conceal element behind protective cover matched to the room interior. Provide local temperature adjustment capability. c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging RTDs for ductwork applications shall be 12" in length for each 4 square feet of ductwork cross-sectional area with a minimum length of 6 feet. Probe type duct sensors of 12" length minimum are acceptable in ducts 12 feet square and less. d. Immersion Type: 3" total immersion for use with sensor wells, unless otherwise indicated. e. Sensor Wells: Brass materials as indicated; provide thermal transmission material compatible with the immersion sensor. Provide heat-sensitive transfer agent between exterior sensor surface and interior well surface. f. Outside Air Type: Provide element with sunshade to minimize solar effects. Mount element at least 3" from building outside wall. Sunshade shall not inhibit the flow of ambient air across the sensing element. Shade shall protect sensing element from direct solar incidence, snow, ice, and rain. 4. Transmitters. a. Transmitters shall have 4 to 20 ma output linearly scaled to the temperature, pressure, humidity, or flow range being sensed. Transmitter shall be matched to the sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Total error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of 20 milliampere (0.02 milliampere) at any point across the 4 to 20 ma span. Supply voltage shall be 24 volts ac or dc. Transmitters shalf have non interactive offset and span adjustments. For temperature sensing, transmitter stability shall not exceed O.OsoC. a year. 1) Transmitter spans or ranges shall be the following and shall be suitable for the application: a) Temperature: (i) 50oF. span: Room, chilled water, cooling coil discharge air, return air sensors; range 3soF. to 8soF. (ii) 11 oaF. span: Outside air, heating coil discharge air; range oaF. to 110oF. (iii) 200oF. span: Heating hot water. r' .~ ...p v"") 8'> :;~ -J. 'Cj ,e" ;;0-- ..of(' \~..:\ ~ ..","", ""':"\ (,...... .0-- .' ) \~_ .~.-/ c;. -C a'l. ':"'-:: -z. 00 ;;0-- ,~ r-\ ..........r. \)), ~. V- c"..) \-\) o -& '2 B. Electrical Power and Distribution: 1. Power input from building electrical system shall be 120 volts, 60 hz, two-pole, three wire with ground. Power from the building electrical system to the control system shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. The Control Contractor shall be responsible for all power to individual control devices. 2. Provide control voltage transformers as needed throughout the control system which shall conform to UL 506. Power digital controllers on the highest level LAN from dedicated circuit breakers. Transformers for digital controllers serving terminal equipment on lower level LANs shall be fed from the fan motor leads or fed from the nearest distribution panel board, motor control center, or panelboard, using circuits provided for the purpose or shall be powered from the temperature control power. Provide surge suppressors and transient protection for the control devices powered externally from the control system. Provide a circuit breaker on the secondary side of the transformer. ~, AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 4 Riverside festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 3. Surge and transient protection consist of devices installed externally to digital controllers. 4. Surge suppressors external to digital controller, shall be installed on all incoming AC power. Surge suppressor shall be rated by UL 1449, and have clamping voltage ratings below the following levels: a. Normal Mode (Line to Neutral): 350 Volts b. Common Mode (Line to Ground): 350 Volts 5. Telephone and communications lines directly interfacing the DOC control system shall be protected from surges. Provide metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection, rated for the application, installed at the equipment. 6. Controllers shall have sensor and control wiring surge protection with optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection. 7. Provide complete electric wiring for control apparatus, including wiring to transformer primaries. Control circuit conductors which run in the same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have the same insulation level as power circuit conductors. Circuits operating at more than 100 Volts shall be in accordance with the applicable specification Sections of Division 16. Circuits operating at 100 Volts or less shall be defined as low vol/age and shall be run in rigid or flexible conduit, metallic tubing, metal raceways, wire trays, or suspended above ceilings with "J" or "bridal" hooks in accordance with Division 16 requirements for low voltage cable. Use multiconductor cable for concealed accessible locations only. Provide circuit and wiring protection as required by NFPA 70_ Control wiring in HVAC ductwork shall be in conduit or metallic tubing. Control wiring in equipment rooms shall be in EMT. Protect exposed wiring from abuse and damage. All control wiring located in ceiling plenums shall be in EMT or shall be rated for use in plenums jf not installed in EMT. The Control Contractor shall provide new "J" or "bridal" hooks for supporting new control wiring. a. AC Control Wiring. 1) Control wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 300 VAC service. 2) Wiring for 120 V ac control service shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 V ae service. b. Digital Signal Voltage Wiring: Wiring shall be shielded (2 conductor solid copper) cable. Shielding shall be aluminum/polyester foil or approved equal suitable for high frequency electrical noise shielding. For lines longer than 300 feet, provide #18 AWG shielded, twisted wire pair conductors. For lines with lengths under 300 feet, furnish #22 AWG or #18 AWG shielded, twisted wire pair conductors (Belden, AT&T or Manhattan). c. Analog Signal Wiring: Analog signal wiring for analog inputs and analog outputs shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each pair greater than one shall be 100 percent shielded, and have 20 AWG drain wire. Exception is directly connected RTD wiring which shall be 18 AWG minimum twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, and with 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated to 300 V ac. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation rated to 300 V ac. -:.- "..) C. Components for outside locations: Any control components located in the out$!de air sl6~1I be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures and shall be suitable for operation in this~r@on~t. ~~.- _"_ r r ... .'.1 ..-.,. {" ) -r-1 ~, .~.i ('V ~, w AUTOMATIC TEMPERA1ItlRE CQ~TROL SECTION 15950 - 5 =.? :-/ -"-.-l ',J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Perform installation under supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation of electronic controls. 3.2. ADJUSTMENTS A. Calibrate instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment with a test equipment accuracy. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain conditions indicated, to perform functions indicated, and 10 operate in the sequence specified. 3.3. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ~ .,-,' A. General: Sequence of Operations for all HVAC equipment shall be as indicated on the drawings. Status of all controlled devices, sensors, etc. shall be continuously monitored by the DDC control system, and shall be accessible for display from the respective controller and at the central network computer station. END OF SECTION 15950 -, (-~\ /' \),. '\ ~ V...... ~ ~ 1Y CY ~ ./ V v,;\ C? ..q, ~ 2 A-. ~ -./.. O~ .(-(~..;/ - ,,) -./ ".' ~ / ~ /_)'v.> C./ \~L) '--./ / / "" tf,.J.- \:~,/~ \.../'0 7 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 M 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. HV AC system air balancing and sound measurements for equipment installed under this contract. B. One balance is required. The HVAC systems shall not be balanced in the "off season" of fall or spring. C. Balancing work shall be included under the Division 15 Work for the project. 1.2. SUBM ITT ALS A. Submit the credentials of the balancing agency to the Architect for review. B. Submit a finished balancing report within 20 days after completion of the system balancing. Submit a list of system problems (if any discovered) within one week of completion of the field b~a~cing. C. Submit verification of equipment calibration. -c:s L~ ;~~C;; .~~ .-- '. .i - I 1.3.ASSOCIATED WORK B. Testing, adjustment and balancing of hydronic systems including snow melt. -a f.,,) ,-.' .', i A. Testing, adjustment and balancing of air systems. -.. ~..~~.i ...-..::..;::>> ~ <-:? C..-' rv C. Measurement of final operating condition 01 HV AC systems. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. Qualifications. The independent air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope and shall comply with all standards as set forth by the "Associated Air Balance Council." 2. All Work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating Engineer employed by them. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect, Owner, or their representative. B. Reference Standards: 1 . Comply with applicable procedures and standard of "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total System Balance" by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 2. The testing and balancing contractor shall be certified by AABC, NEBB, or SMART A. The Balancing Contractor shall submit copies of his certification to the Owner and Architect for review and acceptance. C. The bidders shall submit bids for the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing from Balancing Contractor that have been pre-qualified to bid on this part of the work. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r' l-" t I '! -'--: \ LL 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. The following balancers have been pre-qualified at the time the project documents wefe released for bid to do the balancing on the project. <t System Management and Balancing :e: 2873 104lh Street ",/~ ;=;:=. '_.I Des Moines IA 50322 ~'UI:: Phone: 515-270-8755 ~) (-:: Fax: 515-270-8756 :.' [.') Precision Test and Balance (~~( 14241 Elmcrest Court 0::...: Clive, IA 50325 b 515-288-2332 (voice) 515-222-0613 (fax) 3. Fisher Test and Balance Inc. 4523 South Con Caro Street Davenport IA 52802 563-326-5697 (voice) 563-326-2620 (fax) If") Ln M .- 0- N c.:} W C) ..0 C:.,) -C:.::::;' (""-.I 1.5.SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before substantial completion of the project. 1.6. WARRANTY PART 2. A. Testing Agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of test and balance Work, during which time the Architect at his discretion may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, return/exhaust fan or pump as listed in test report. The Testing Agency shall provide technicians to assist the Architect in making any tests he may fequire during this period of time. B. Testing agency shall simulate off season operation to test and balance "off season" components to balance the allected units in the "on seasonft. For example, the agency shall simulate the heating season to balance the heating components if the HV AC system is set up in the cooling season. The contractor have bias to set up systems in the heating mode since the heating system is being modified to the greatest extent. PRODUCTS PART 3. 2.1. NOT USED EXECUTION 3.1. SYSTEM BALANCING A. All costs associated with system balancing and testing shall be included within the Division 15 Work Category. B. The services of an AABC Of NEBB Certified Balancing Contractor shall be used to provide labor, services and test equipment required to adjust and balance heating, ventilating, air conditioning and exhaust systems of mechanical systems as specified. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 2 ,--- (- ~ '..-' ~, '- '-"' r-- ~-.. L. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Personnel involved in the execution of the work under the balancing portion of the work shall be experienced and trained in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the balancing Agency. D. The Division 15 Contractor shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1. Completing all construction including integrity testing prior to the start of balancing. 2. Including balancing dampers and adding dampers requested by the balancing Agency. 3. Putting complete system into operation during duration 01 balancing period. 4. Providing Record Drawings and advise of changes made to the system during construction. 5. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections such as dampers, belts and pulley changes, valves, etc. as required without delay. 6. Providing complete submittal information for mechanical equipment complete with pertinent engineering information. E. The system balancing test shall incorporate the following: 1. Adjust and balance the complete mechanical system as hereinafter specified. 2. Record test data for the air and hydronic systems. All data pertaining to a particular system, including supply, return and exhaust air, shall be submitted in a complete report on that system. Submit one copy each to the Architect, the Owner, and the Record DocQr1>lents file. _ ('.:::'> F. Test equipment shall be furnished by the balancing agency and will remain the ~~~y Of~~~ -n balancing agency. Instruments shall have been calibrated recently.' :. - ~ -- \'0 '(r'\ -- _f'''' -:, , , \ '.-,.., "j 3.2. AIR TEST AND BALANCING PROCEDURE ~,_._..__ t -"' -;""\ A. Measure supply air volumes by means of the duct traverse method. Seal duct acc~s. ~'Q.les Yl:!~h rubber plugs. Duct tape is not an acceptable method of sealing.::::. 0" Y N B. Adjust balancing dampers for required branch duct air quantities to within :t 5% of the individual branch air flow requirements. C. Adjust grilles, registers and diffusers to within :t 5 cfm of individual requirements specified, and also adjust to minimize draft in all areas. D. The total air delivery in any particular fan system shall be obtained by adjustment of the particular fan variable speed drive. E. Changes that are required for the final balancing results as determined by the balancing agency shall be provided for by the respective contractors who supply and install such equipment under their contractual obligations. Such changes may encompass, but are not necessarily restricted to, changing the dampers or adding dampers and access panels. 3.3. TESTING PROCEDURE FOR SOUND LEVELS A. Using recently calibrated instruments, conduct sound level tests in selected areas of the building. Measure sound level readings in decibels on the "A" and "e" scales of the General Radio Company sound level meter, or sound level meter that meets the current American Standard (224 3) based on the acoustic reference power of DB/-RE 10. 13W. Readings shall set forth the total random sound level of the selected rooms or areas with the system in operation, as compared to total background sound level with the system not in operation. The system increase over the background level shall be recorded and reported in decibels on the "A" and "c" scales, and in each octave band. 1. Identify each outlet by room name, room number, and air outlet number. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Measure sound levels in decibels at each diffuser, grille or register in listed areas in each of the 8 octave bands. Measure sound levels approximately five feet above the floor on a line directly below the center of the diffuser, etc., on the "A" and "Cn scales of a general radio company sound level meter. 3. Tabulate data for the following rooms with chiller(s) and respective air-handling equipment in operation. a. Outside of new facility with and without the toilet exhaust fan operating. b. Each toilet room with and without toilet exhaust fan operating. -. \...._~ 3.4. BALANCING DATA A. System report shall include the following information: 1. Terminal heating/cooling coils a. Manufacturer, size and capacity. b. Fan CFM (Design and Final Operating) c. Fan Reference number, name or letter 2. System External to air handling unit - Test Data a. Grille, Diffuser or Hood reference number and manufacturer b. Location (room number and name) c. Design velocity and CFM or GPM d. Flow Factor e. Final condition of balance I '-- B. The testing and balancing agency shall use SMACNA testing and balancing forms for the balancing report. '-- END OF SECTION 15990 4:, -!;~ V~\ -/ ,/\ .f ('-\ /~<)\;t.J \,,/" \ ~ -::~ "'~- 0-- .;" \0// .:::;:;". t:) ~ // "'. \ \../. /, 0;> r , \.... v.-:) \/ -~" CJ ~ en ,"" ,--' TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 4 ...--.--~ Division 16 Electrical ---- Sf. (} "- ;:;~ ..--' 4.._ 7 Division 16 ~-i\ - ., -;-.,.J ..-\-, .-,.~,' :S ,j ,- (:? (J'. r" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.~8 A&J ~0~4&~ "z-(_~, .e\ ' -n ..... --"-,'" ----- " -----\ ~ --0, . /-, \ ..,., } SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ("!. ".--...-' PART 1. GENERAL <:, t." .' 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES y (/'"' {-.."> ..c.:':;, A. Provide all labor and materials and all equipment for electrical demolition, remodeling and new construction. B. Plans are to be considered as schematic, written dimensions shall govern, dimensioned architectural plans shall take precedence over un-dimensioned electrical plans, any questions as to exact location of equipment shall be verified with Architect. All work must be coordinated with all other trades, relocations as a result of this coordination shall be at no expense to the Owner. C. Where noted on the Drawings or where indicated in other sections of the specifications, this Division shall install equipment furnished by others and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. 1.2. JOBSITE VISIT A. The Contractor shall visit the site of work and familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work prior to bidding. Contracts are based upon furnishing all labor and materials required to complete each installation ready for use. No additional allowance granted because of the Contractor's lack of knowledge of jobsite conditions. 1.3. MEASUREMENTS A. All measurements must be verified from actual observation at the building. This Contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting in place in approved, satisfactory, and workman like manner in every particular. 1.4. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. General character and scope of work are illustrated on drawings and lor listed in specifications. Drawings and specifications are complementary one to the other; whatever is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. In cases of inconsistency between drawings and specifications, the one that results in the most complete and highest quality installation shall govern. B. Drawings for the work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and location of the work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, sleeves and access panels may not be indicated. Where such items are required by code or by other specifications sections or where required for the proper installation of the work, such items shall be included. Inclusion of such items shall not be a basis for any contract amount or duration changes. 1.5. LAWS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses and permits. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, regulations, and code requirements applicable to his work. B. Work shall comply with the latest issues of the National Electrical Code, Iowa State Building Code and City of Iowa City Codes. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ~ v i?"> (\ \,./" '\ \' \ ~\ ",....c < .... \'Y 1.6. EXISTING FACILITIES AND SERVICES ,..- A. Where it is necessary to tie into existing services, they have been located as accurately as possible from inspection of building and original plans. The exact location is not guaranteed; Contractor shalt personally inspect the conditions and determine such locations prior to bidding. Variations from locations will not be basis for additional compensation. B. All outages must be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. The Owner reserves the right to require alt outages be done on an overtime basis at the Owner's convenience and expense. All outages shall be arranged for at least one week in advance. All outages shall be kept in a minimum and shall not exceed more than four hours. 1.7. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Final settlement will not be made with Contractor until all systems have been thoroughly checked and found in good operating condition. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by Architect at any and all times. Architect shall have righlto reject any defective material or workmanship and require its correction without cost to the Owner. B. Systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner's Representative and the Architect. C. Perform such tests as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the site. D. Prior to acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's Representative and Architect, all features and functions of all systems and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation of the systems. Each system shall be demonstrated. ...,;:. CY The demonstrations shall consist of not less than the following: 1. Point out the actual location of each component of a system and demonstrate its function and its relationship to other components within the system. 2. Demonstrate the electrical systems by actual "start-stop" operation showing how 10 work controls, how to reset protective devices, how to replace fuses, and what to do in emergency. Demonstrate communication, signal, alarm and detection systems by point to point actual operation of the systems and show how to reset signal, alarm and detection devices. ,~ E. .6.- h -:tr 'Y ';.'(~ -? ;;v "_./ 6 G. Contractor shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and shall arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives present to assist with the demonstrations. H. Contractor shall arrange with the Owner and the Architect the dates and times for performing the demonstrations, at least two weeks in advance. t'- 1.8. COOPERATION AND PROGRESS A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the Owner so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. ,.--. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-2 r-. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. The Contractor shall examine fully the Drawings and the Specifications for other Subcontractors of the other trades, and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other Subcontractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with other Subcontractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Owner reserves the right to determine space priority for the Contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various Subcontractors. C. Installation of new services distribution shall be scheduled and coordinated to minimize disruption. .-., D. Coordination of utilities shall demonstrate the components that will be installed and ho~]he service area is to be maintained to all components. Q ".1""' ~?O E. The Contractor shall provide coordination and phasing of the demolition (or rei~6ati~n) oC. existing services. Installation of new services distribution shall be scheduled aoo:Goordil1a'fed to minimize disruption.': \ - --, - ~ ,\:':_~.~ --- -"'(\ . "",-' . _~--""l, \../ 1.9. PROTECTION OF WORK ~~} .~,>< c:? "':::";'9 (n ,v A. Contractor shall protect his work from damage or injury by keeping all conduits, o.:;t(ets, ducts, etc., plugged, capped, or otherwise protected. Any such injury or damage shall be replaced or repaired without cost to the Owner. All pieces of equipment shall be suitably protected, and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. 1.10. OPERATING MANUALS, INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the project and before acceptance by the Owner and the Architect, the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Operating Instructions, etc., for all equipment furnished by him. He shall furnish complete operating instructions to the designated representative of the Owner for each piece of equipment. B. The manufacturers shall thoroughly instruct the Owner's designated representative in the proper operation of the equipment and its maintenance. Each such manufacturer shall submit a written report of this being done, giving the dates, time spent, and by whom such instruction was given. C. Prior to completion of work and before acceptance by the Owner of substantial completion certification, the Contractor as it applies to his work, shall submit a rough draft of complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals that are properly indexed to identify all submittals. 1.11. EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS A. Note this Contractor to provide wiring for equipment furnished by others. Consult other sections of specifications and plans for exact determination and requirements. B. Whether starters furnished under this Contract or not, this Contractor is responsible for checking overload relays on all starters and equipment to ensure proper motor protection. Any discrepancies to be reported in writing to Contractor furnishing equipment. It is imperative that this Contractor inspect other sections of specifications to determine extent of electrical work required of him in making connections to equipment furnished and installed by others. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. In general, this Contractor shall extend wiring to the disconnect switch, furnish the disconnect switch, extend wiring to the starters, control panel, or other device furnished with the equipment. This Contractor shall make connections to pushbutton stations or other pilot devices at the equipment. This Contractor, in general, shall mount the magnetic starters and pilot devices. Final motor or equipment connections shall be flexible conduit, not more than three feet long. This Contractor must confer with Contractor furnishing equipment to ensure proper roughing-in without conflict. Where combination motor starter units or motor control centers are designated, thiS Contractor shall provide the magnetic motor starters and associated control to be contained in the combination motor starter units or motor control units. D. All work must be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and present a neat appearance when completed. 1.12. W ARRANTY/GUARANTEE: A. Upon written acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall warranVguarantee, and be responsible for, proper operation of the Work for a period of one calendar year following the date of Substantial Project Completion, or the respective date of acceptance of each item of equipment, system, or area of the Work. Any extended warranties to be provided by the Contractor beyond the one calendar year period shall be identified under the specific specification sections. The Contractor shall be held liable lor the Work during the guarantee period, and shall make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to defects or omissions in materials or workmanship. "'---" 1.13. MODEL NUMBERS A. Model numbers are used in some instances to help deline the overall characteristics required of a specific component, however, it is recognized that model numbers change from time to time or that the model numbers listed may be incorrect. The Contractor shall provide the components that satisfy the performance requirements specified, rather than providing units meeting the model number requirements in the event there is a discrepancy. B. The bidder and Contractors shall not rely solely on the model numbers for selecting the appropriate components to be furnished. C. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to call to the attention of the Architect any discrepancies between the performance requirements specified and any model number used during the bidding period prior to issue of the last addendum. If no such notification is made it will be assumed that no such discrepancies exist. 1.14. SUBMITTALS .."-...... (0 " / \ v'\ ) \.> \ A. Coordinated shop drawings shall be provided on all equipment specified in Division 16 and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections and general provisions of this specification. Additionally, all shop drawings submitted pertaining to major equipment items shall include the particular item(s) intended for installation indicating sufficient information to ensure compatibility with physical constraints, manufacturer required maintenance and code clearances, and indication of non-interference with work installed by other trades and other work installed by this trade. Submittals not in accordance with the above noted conditions will be returned to the Contractor without action. Any claims arising from delay in 4.t~ construction scheduling arising from submission of non-conforming shop drawings will not be _1r:cJ1onored. ~~-<~/\ ~; ,vy,> {,/, /)-{~l "-' '-/ .',/ t)- '.~~~ '-() h r.;\ '-7 ,,//' \.\;,'") _ _~_ v~~__ ~-' ~ ~ , ~i~/ C/ ~ ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 1601 D-4 Riverside festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. Substitute Items: 1. Following contract award, modified structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical work or redesign required as a result of the Contractor implementing an approved Alternate, or providing substitute or "approved equal" materials and equipment shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Said costs shall be borne in their entirety by the Contractor. 2. Substitute items will be allowed only under the conditions specified in the General Conditions and Division 1 of the specifications. C. The Contractor shall not install or fabricate any items without receiving accepted shop drawings from the Architect for those sections requiring submittals. 1.15. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Complete excavating necessary for underground wiring, and conduit. Backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Work shall be in accordance with the requirements as follows, and the requirements of DIVISION 15. Care shall be taken in excavating, that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the conduit. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping, if necessary. No greater length of trench shall be left open, in advance of conduit laying, than that which is authorized or directed by the Owner's Representative. B. Roots shall be removed to a level 18" below finished grades and deeper as required for duct runs, manholes, and light pole bases. No roots shall be allowed to remain under the work. C. Backfill about the structures shall be placed, when practicable, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of duct lines shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately 6" above the existing grades. In backfilling around duct lines, fill sand shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than 6" over the top of the duel. Fill, backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers, and shall be brought up to within 6" of finished grades. The final layer of backfill, from 6" below to 6" above grade, shall be done using good quality topsoil. Fill and backfill shall be clean and free from vegetable matter and refuse. D. The Division 16 Contractor shall provide all necessary "de-watering "required for any underground work. There is a "high water table" level at the construction site. The Contractor will not be entitled to any contract time extension or contract extra for any de- watering required to install his work. END OF SECTION 16010 o ...-.-- ::-.':::n N -r, '--J , I ::-=) =::~ ~;: "'-", J;; S> (.Ii N ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r\ \.--" , \ \ , \,...}......' -.- t: .L -7 ~? ....{~ CJ -;-:- ~ ,."' \ \.\-\ '.c''':; -\ .- () \.:- jU \f> u> C?-> \ -::::- D--. c--J - C.,) \ \.,\ o '2'?, C-? (-i '..-- ~L ...-- -/ '02 9 ~-' ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL ~Q "-T~;:l>' '_-' C~\ --(\ 1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES --- t'> A. Conduit systems 1. Metal conduit 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 4. Electrical metallic tubing. 5. Nonmetal conduit. 6. Hangers and supports. --.... --:1 , -- "_,J c...,) .' 'Y C'" (...:J ~:-: B. Outlet and device boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers - boxes: 1 . Raco 2. Steel City 3. Appleton B. Acceptable manufacturers - hangers and supports: 1. Unistrut 2.2 MATERIALS A. The materials used in the fabrication of the conduit system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. Where a manufacturer is named for a particular material, the material of other manufacturer shall be acceptable provided the material meets requirements of the Specification. B. Rigid Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by hot-dip or electro-galvanizing process. Provide thread protective caps and coupling plugs to prevent injury to threads during handling. 1. Use rigid conduit for all conduit regardless of size where installed in exposed exterior locations, or in poured concrete walls, columns, floors or other concrete structures. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thinwall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro-galvanized process. Use for conduit installed in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed in interior locations. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Flexible Metal Conduit (1/2" minimum size, 36" maximum length except for light fixture connections which may be up to 72" long): Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro-galvanized steel strip. Use for: Final connections to motor operated equipment and connections to dry type transformers and connections fro.m junction boxes to lighting fixtures and for wiring within casework and millwork. E. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit (1/2" minimum size, 36" maximum length): Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, with water and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connections to equipment located in wet areas and at all exterior locations. F. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): May be used as approved by Code for 2" and larger where rigid conduit is specified, except shall not be used for conduit buried in earth fill. G. PVC Conduit: Schedule 40 or 80 as called for, 90oC. conduit shall be composed of polyvinyl chloride and shall conform to NEMA Standards. Conduit fittings and cement shall be by the same manufacturer. PVC conduit may be used for 1" and larger installations where buried outside of the building, and where encased in concrete or below concrete slabs. ,-. H. Rigid Conduit Fittings: Threaded, galvanized steel/malleable bushings, and concrete tight. Grounding lug type with nylon insulated bushings for connections at cabinets, boxes and gutters. I. Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, water and concrete tight. Connectors with nylon insulated throats at cabinets, boxes and gutters. Set screw type shall not be permitted. 4- ~xible Metal Conduit Fittings: Screw-in type galvanized malleable iron or steel with nylon 6!,~lated throats. '--~~~.dti9ht Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel with watertight gaskets, \........ . "*, . ~Q~g and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. ',~- -"i... Grih~let Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be Condulet type for sharp turns and tees. Mini~ radius shall be compatible with the cable to be installed. '--' If> I.f'>J. C?-> (~\ \....~-~..\ \ \ I, ~~>'. ~': ~. ('J '--- --' -----.. ll- - c_J 1.,.1 ut.) ......0 C'> c.::? ,-...I M, ,--. Material, size and installation for outlet boxes shall comply with NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370. L... N. Boxes: 1. Surface mounted wall outlets: For single outlet and double outlets use 4" square by 2-1/8" deep box. For more than two ganged outlets use 3-3/4" x 2W' deep multiple gang masonry boxes. Boxes to be provided with 1/2" raised cover as required for device. 2. In suspended ceilings: Use 3-1/2" deep octagon box with fixture studs and steel mounting bars. Q. Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NFPA 70. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370. ~, P. Pull and junction boxes not specifically described in NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370, shall be fabricated of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with screw covers, brass screws and hardware with enamel finish. Q. Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete lIoors shall be flush type, cast iron, CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-2 ~' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.0~ A&J #200640.ol ~,_ t.;;...i (.) t::? ~:;.O \... ~-'-- .-' ~. with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with tile or carpet fk)of.-Gbver~ shall have recessed covers to accommodate the floor covering. ' . -0 -\\ ~-:::::. ~" ........, , \ \ ,-j R. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installations shall be NEMA 3R rated. .... I , "'...<.' v" .. s. Construction, sizes and installation of auxiliary gutters shall comply with NFPA 70 - Na~al Electrical Code (NEC), Article 374. (~ f--:> T. Provide conduit hanger and support devices of approved type for method of supporting required, to include: Structural steel members, suspension rods, conduit clamps, concrete inserts, expansion shields and beam clamps. All devices shall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistant finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows: 1. Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surface of structure: Use conduit clamps mounted on Unistrut channel to maintain 1" (minimum) clearance between conduit and structure. 2. Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead: Use split ring conduit clamp suspended by threaded steel drop rod. 3. Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead: Use split ring conduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of channels, suspended by not less than 3/8" threaded steel drop rod. 4. Where conduit is buried in concrete floor slabs: Anchor conduit to structurallloor with conduit straps, at 10'-0" intervals. 5. Maximum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). Regardless of listed spacing provide additional hangers or supports at not more than 2'-0" from each change of direction and at each side of any box or fitting. 6. Metal straps or tie wires shall not be used to support conduit, box or other raceways. U. Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows: 1. Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete: Use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2. Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete: Use self-drilling expansion anchors. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete. 3. Hangers or supports anchored to structural steel: Use beam clamps andlor steel channels as required by structural system. 4. Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck: Use drill-in expansion anchors. 5. The use of explosive force hammer actuated, booster assist or similar anchoring device will not be permitted. v. Conduits 3" diameter and larger, rigidly secured to building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint shall be provided with expansion and deflection couplings. The couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. W. Conduits smaller than 3" diameter shall be provided with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint and connected by 15" of slack flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above may be installed. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION Certain conduits are permitted to be embedded in structural concrete work: 1 . Reinforcing steel shall be securely anchored in place before installing conduit. 2. No steel reinforcing shall be displaced from plan dimensions without approval of the L Architect. ~ ~ Conduit shall not be placed over top of reinforcing or under bottom of reinforcing. ?> :4:.t? Conduit and fittings shall not displace concrete in columns in excess of 4% of total --:;;. \:'0,y cross-section area of column without approval of the Architect. 0.. (.5) \:::::, Conduit shall not be placed closer than three diameters on center. c--i 6,_cJ Maximum size of embedded conduit or pipe shall not exceed 1/3 thickness of structural -") \~ ~-slab; 2/3 thickness of topping slab. ~;.\ 0 ~Z G::;' Minj~ size conduit shall be 3/4" for power, control and lighting and 1" for communications ~applications. Where specific sizes required by Drawings or Specifications are larger than Code requirements, the larger size shall be provided. Size conduits for type THW insulated wire. --, f \ ...... ' . \ \ ." -'~- ---, \ \ .....---~ :;.....-- \J.- A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard 01 Installation." B. Horizontal runs of conduit shall be installed in ceiling plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shall be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be routed overhead. Conduit shall be supported from the building structure and conduits shall be supported independently from mechanical system components. '~ C. Conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connections to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as otherwise noted. D. Conduit shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. E. No conduit shall be installed less than 6" from piping. ,"---' F. '-- ,-- H. Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically, continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured 10 cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity. I. Where cable trays are installed for communications cables, conduit shall be installed from the equipment junction box to the cable tray. J. Communications conduit bends shall be made so that the radius of the curve of the inner edge is not less than ten times the conduit outside diameter. K. Install a nylon braided polyester or propylene pull cord with 12" minimum slack at the ends for each empty communications conduit. 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be installed for fixtures, switches, receptacles and other devices. B. Approximate location of outlets are shown on lhe plans, but each outlet location shall be checked by the Contractor before installing the outlet box. ----' CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Wall boxes installed flush in common wall shall not be back-to-back or through-wall type. D. Boxes located on opposite sides of a common wall that are closely connected by conduit shall have the conduit openings plugged with duct seal (use fire saling material to plug the nipple in rated fire and/or smoke walls). E. Outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and square with wall face and with front of plaster ring located within 1/8" of face of finish wall. Boxes in masonry shall be set with bottom of the box tight to the masonry unit. F. All outlet boxes shall be securely fastened on at least both sides. G. Outlet and backboxes shall be supported independently of the ceiling material. H. Outlet and backboxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system. 3.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX AND GUTTER INSTALLATION A. Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. B. For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installed in finished ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between box and finished material. c. Pull and junction boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Architect. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. B. Do not support conduit with wife or perfofated pipe straps. Remove wire used tor temporary supports C. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. D. Hangers and supports shall be installed for all conduit and boxes. E. Conduit, fittings, raceways and boxes shall not be attached to or supported from mechanical pipes, plumbing pipes, sheet metal ducts, or suspended ceiling support wires. (5 <:- :::~ END OF SECTION 16111 N -0 :::t:: , .-") ---1 w '. \.....--! r.r"/ N CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 '--' ~, ( } ,,/ \. \;V" \ ,,? V .6- _.....' ~ /--2~ ,j'1 -j/C;:.- o \.<) -yO; \.../ \. / ./ 1/- ..;') \:;'j cY" v' v ~ .~<, .:~ c.'. /6-:r'\ ,,& "? -& ~ ,...., CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE Q", ~7\.."'" tI__-. ..- ...,'.--.... --- /..- (:..~ '" \ .-.,"\ - ' ---~\ ,..- ,.----- ~ \. ---<-\ A. Wiring systems. 600 volls and less ~......., PART 1 - GENERAL . ./ 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (,~) .. y (J'l (....:> PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. This Section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems oJ 600 volts and less. B. Minimum size conductors shall be No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and No. 14 AWG or per manufacturer recommendation for signal and control circuits. C. The material used for the wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the speCified material. Where a manufacturer is named for a particular material, the material of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided the material meets requirements oJ the Specifications. D. Wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity. Power, lighting and control wire and cable shall be insulated to 600 volts. All conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be stranded. E. Type of wire and cable for the various applications shall be as follows: 1. Type THW, THWN or XHHW (750C.): Use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2.2 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through #10 AWG, conductors #8 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with 1/2" band of colored tape at all pull boxes, junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. White Green 277/480 Volt Brown Orange Yellow Grey Green 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Phase "A" conductor - Phase "B" conductor - Phase "C" conductor - Neutral conductor - Grounding conductor- 120/208 Volt Black Red Blue While Green 120/240 Volt Black Red 2.3 CONNECTORS A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller: Use 3M Company "Scotchloc" vinyl insulated spring connectors or Architect approved equivalent. B. In-line connectors for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger: Use Thomas & Betts two way connectors long barrel type, Series 54800 with Interlocking Covers or Architect approved equivalent. WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16120-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Taps for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger: Use Thomas & Betts "c" Taps, Series 54700 or Architect approved equivalent D. Cable terminations to busbars. switch studs and terminal blocks: Use Thomas & Belts two hole lugs, long barrel type, Series 54800 or Architect approved equivalent. E. Insulate splices and taps to thickness 01 conductor insulation with hall-lapped layers of 3M Company "Scotch" brand No. 88 vinyl electrical tape or Architect approved equivalent. Connectors having irregular surfaces: Fill voids and smooth contours with 3M Company "Scotchfil" electrical putty prior to taping. PART 3 - EXECUTION .~ 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION L- A. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panetboards. B. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. C. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. D. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. F. Cable for all feeders shall be continuous from origin to termination. G. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessible junction boxes. H. Power feeder cable shall be pulled with cable lubricating compound suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with. Compound shall not harden or become adhesive. END OF SECTION 16120 ( . ~' \ '\"", \, \\/, .,.' \ ~ V" ~ /-"7 ~() I -r) y -->'";' ~:7' ~ ~ \::,),.of / /'" \/ >\,/~ .../' "-:)'/') ~v "-,~/ \- ~ ""<~,~ (.<~ -D 9- '";?" -'$ WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16120-2 Riverside festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wiring devices and plates 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts and data for switches, receptacles and cover plates necessary to evaluate the proposed devices. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ;;;:.. \. I ..,;/ :::::0 -n PART 2 - PRODUCTS , --~ N .- \- . ~~\ A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Eagle 3. Leviton 4. Pass & Seymour 5. Slater 6. Architect approved equivalent. -,"} -'''' ~... ,c.---1 \......____J <:--? e11 .r:- B. Catalog numbers are based on Hubbell. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All wiring devices shall be Heavy Duty, "Specification Grade" except where otherwise indicated. B. Wall switches shall be white color, Hubbell catalog numbers as follows: 1. Single Pole Toggle Light Switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt, No. CS1221. C. Receptacles shall be "Specification Grade." 1. Duplex receptacle - 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type, side or back wired, 20 amp, 125 volt, No. CS5352 series. 2. Receptacles on shall be white color. 3. Duplex receptacles, GFCI type, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type, 20 amp, 125 volt, No. GFR5352. D. Receptacles for power and special purpose outlets shall have characteristics and NEMA configurations per Electrical drawings. E. Provide stainless steel plates for all switches, receptacles, TV outlets, other outlets and blank plates for unused outlets. F. Provide weatherproof, lockable covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in wet locations. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640,00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A_ Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring oullet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation:' B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. (.", . .___1 1.--- \ \ \ ..' ....- " "-:;; D. ieceptac'es shall be installed with the grounding pole located at the bottom. .. --./h c..-0 E. CE.,m-masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are ~ '~-~~!'iearest mortar joint to indicated height. \...,..../ I~:~) ~. ~:~'n~e light switches are located adjacent to doors, they shall be installed on "knob" side of ::::::: ~.~\ \daof--~mless indicated otherwise. \J..... c:> Vb ~;'. Prior1o roughing-in outlet boxes, verily door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for i:-J counters. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Switches and receptacles shall be installed and located as follows, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 1. Switches: 48" above finished floors. 2. Receptacles: 18" above finished floors generally; 36" above finished floors or 8" above counters and work benches in kitchens, shops, mechanical equipment rooms and similar areas. B. In masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are at nearest mortar joint to specified height. C. Where walls have wainscot finish, switch height shall be adjusted as required, so switch is either all in wainscot or all in wall above wainscot. D. Prior to roughing-in outlet boxes, Contractor shall verify from general construction drawings; door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and work benches. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. For all switches and receptacles, Contractor shall verify and if necessary provide and install an extension to bring back box to within 1/8" of finished surface. F. InstaU in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation: G. Install devices plumb and level. H. Install switches with OFF position down. I. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. J. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. K. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in all areas. L. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. END OF SECTION 16140 (2 ~r9\ -n ..,-.-- N -,.,."" ......... -on .--..-, ",_.) -Q ~) cJ'\ ~ WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements '-"> ~-,.'\ ~~~. , :::::~ \J-- if' 1..1) (!I :;:. 0- c-J - 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ~ -:,. ,~(~ '6 ---(.-" ::=- ;\::\ - \..,- ~ \ -:::- -c) '-' \.....\ o 'c~ '2":::J " .-.- L.1.- ''---:- -..."" 0"5 ;;;;- WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch circuit panelboards 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings including fabrication details, lug and bus arrangement, ampere and voltage rating, breaker frame sizes and interrupting ratings. 1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Fabrication and installation shall comply with applicable Sections of NEC, Article 384, and shall bear UL listing. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS -.:-\ PART 2 - PRODUCTS c> (", ....-:;;, .L-7 :P l-""':> -:J t -,-I \ I '-"~--', , I "---' (~) ----, A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Siemens 4. Architecl approved equivalent -""'"- c.;-? (J"l s.- 2.2 DESCRIPTION A. Panelboards described in this Section shall be dead-front, safety type furnished with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers. B. Panelboards shall be for lighting, receptacle and applicable branch circuit and power distribution applications. Circuil breakers shall have ratings as scheduled on Drawings. c. Branch circuitpanelboards shall be equivalent to Square D type NOOD. 2.3 PANELBOARDS A. Bussing Assembly and Temperalure Rise: 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. 2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard bussing shall be such that any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite polarilies in such a manner that two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. 3. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. 4. Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as scheduled on the plans. Equipment ground bus shall be provided for panels. All bus shall be copper. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160-1 ~ ",0 C' (-~~', "...., , \/\ // /, \.,Y Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. Safety Barriers: The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. c. Cabinets and Fronts: 1. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. 2. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded door pulls. 3. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. 4. Front shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. 5. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 6. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high x 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load type fed by each circuit and room area(s) served. 7. Fronts and cabinets shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. D. Wiring Terminals: 1. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. 2. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. 2. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Circuit breakers rated for 120/208/240 VAC service shall be plug-on type, circuit breakers rated for 2771480 VAG service shall be bolt-on type. The ampere rating of aU circuit breakers shall be visible on the circuit breaker handle. 3. The front laces of circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position (or equip each breaker with a circuit card holder and neatly printed card identifying the circuit). 4. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. 5. Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. F. Integrated Equipment Rating: 1. Each panelboard, as complete unit, shall have a rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule. Such rating shall be established by factory test with the circuit breakers mounted on the panelboard. ~(. --, .z ! 'r~J ~:'~' ~^ ~ '(...,,) \ .~/ ~' .....(. / \/... ';::y -Z~) ".C) c-\ I~ .t~ .;" \:U',..,-:;:;/ L)\ /Q \'.~ > ;?" \..' f!:) (~2) CIRCUIT BREAKER PANElBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 2 ---- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Securely anchor panelboards to structure and make feeder and branch circuit connections. B_ All recessed panelboards shall have a minimum of five 3/4" diameter empty conduit stubs, from the panelboard to the ceiling space above. c. Install typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. END OF SECTION 16160 () :f9, c:J \c"--r-\ '~--:-) .~n ..,~......- --~-- N - ---\ \, \ .-, --0 _Vf" -~-- '---_.J '-? (J'\ .s;- CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r"\ "\...-"' . u...~ ~ C?'> - '":,:';'- p... , -' ::.---- \ \ \...>- C'J - 0:..-: \.':;' c.,) ~:., '221 c 05.038 A&J #200640.00 I _ L -..".. ;/-.b, CS \ ~,.~ U,.'" -:r:: f~l \~~-" \.-.' / ,.".. ~~j,.- 6~ -- L CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 ~ 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES Or) -::~:- \;,:~ "~:<7 ~~'".~~__ \"~? (,::-~3) <6~ q;\ '--1 t. ' ......- ~ ..-::l ?:. ~-\\ ..--::;:. \ PART 1 - GENERAL -'\\ , :~4 I '",-' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .-::: 9~ ,4- Y <f. tJ'I ~ A. Disconnect switches for all equipment and motors 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include catalog cuts, fabrication details, ratings and other pertinent data required to evaluate the proposed equipment. 1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Except where otherwise required by this Section, the following Standards and Codes shall govern : 1. NEC Article 380 2. UL listed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers - Disconnect switches for fractional horsepower motors less than 1/2 horsepower and less than 125 volts: 1. Bussmann B. Acceptable manufacturers - Disconnect switches for integral horsepower motors, 1/2 horsepower and larger: 1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Siemens 4. Architect approved equivalent 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors, less than 1/2 horsepower, and less than 125 volts, and for equipment of similar capacity and voltage shall be Bussman types as follows: 1. Type SRY mounted on 4" square box, for plug-in equipment in unfinished areas. 2. Type SRW mounted on 2-3/4" switch box, for plug-in equipment in finished areas, installed on flush switch box. 3. Type SSY mounted on 4" square box, for direct connected equipment in unfinished areas. 4. Type SSW mounted on 2-3/4" switch box, for direct connected equipment in unfinished areas, installed on flush switch box. B. Disconnects for integral horsepower motors, 1/2 horsepower and larger, and for equipment of similar capacity shall be heavy duty industrial type, fusible or non-fusible as indicated, with solid neutrals where required. At interior locations enclosures shall be NEMA type 1; at exterior locations enclosures shall be NEMA type 3R. c. Disconnects for integral horsepower motors shall have provision for padlocking in the "OFF" DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16170 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 positions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that disconnect switches comply with applicable requirements of NEe and UL standards. B. Install fuses in fusible switches. END OF SECTION 16170 A. \f'> \J) i?> -:--- _.,~ --~? ..:::.-,. ,/ '1'--; -,:~"-- \::-- ~_... ,..,,' \ , , ) - '~~)\i, (-'\ t....-. \).- \ -". (c- i...'-" c--1 -- , ., ':--;..1 ~o "-'~ <p, ,:...; \__ ~L \......'...~ r-.;"7 (.)-5 ;;:;-- ,~ DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16170 - 2 --' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING PART 1. GENERAL ~o ...:- -- ;-- -~7 ------:' ,.,--",.,,- r~^'" \~:gl u'" c;;, C' 0:..>') - "" ..'\\ .-:-:=: 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES n , ...., ',:_J B. Bonding " ~.-. \. \ -- ~/~~J}~ 7:,1 #';.- y ~~ 7 v' .' (~ .\.- A. System grounding: PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1.GROUNDING WIRES A. Grounding wires shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, insulated and color identified green, except where indicated otherwise. B. Wire size shall not be less than that indicated on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC. 2.2. GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Lighting fixtures, receptacles and fixed equipment shall be bonded and grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code or as indicated. B. Ground for 120/208 volt systems shall be obtained by extending insulated ground conductor throughout the system from the service entrance point. Equipment ground conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA T10N A. Grounding shall be in accordance with NEe and indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Metallic conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to a housing of electrical equipment by means of a locknut and bushing or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Bushings shaH be connected with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus. C. Conduit System: 1. Ground all metallic conduit systems 2. Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding conductor shall be bonded 10 that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit. D. Feeders: Install green grounding conductors with all feeders as indicated. E. Boxes, cabinets, enclosures and panelboards: 1. Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass. 2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination. 3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs for terminating the ground wires. GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16450 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 END OF SECTION 16450 U' \.or> r?-> 4.. ''', ( \ 'i-\ ' v...-I. , ::::~. u-- -~;7' z ,,{. ("j :::1'''- ~-::;..,- .~_:'---. L\....\ -~,,-: .-> / ,.,c- '". '........._ ...:- ,iJ.;- ...... (_! \.~ (.....) ...s? C:"J C"') C;,..l l.. G "C:. ~i.. 'u--;f Q. ~ --- r-- GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16450 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Feeder and branch circuits 6 ~~o .~_. ;;.---. ~'\:::-' ~~ , .- ..~"'"" 'e;':;') '2)~-~ c ('\\ c' ...- ~ .-n ---~ \,- .\ \ -.--', \.) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES NOT USED v' .. ~ PART 2 - PRODUCTS "'"' ..-",',.. ".,.::.- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - FEEDER CIRCUITS A. Layout the feeders generally as indicated, but determine the exact location and routing of feeders to best fit the layout of the work. B. Where conductor sizes for feeder circuit are not indicated, provide feeder circuits with conductors sized as follows: 1. Feeders, serving an individual branch circuit panel, or an individual power distribution panel, shall have conductors with ampere capacity of not less than the capacity of the panel mains. 2. Feeders, serving more than one branch circuit panel, or more than one power distribution panel, shall have conductors with ampere capacity of not less than the combined ampere capacity of all panel mains, served by the feeder. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Receptacles and appliances shall be on separate circuits from lighting. B. Branch panel circuits are numbered to match NEMA pole numbering system; poles 1 and 2- Phase A, poles 3 and 4 - Phase B, poles 5 and 6 - Phase C, etc. Actual field numbering 01 circuit directories may vary from pole numbers, but shall be phased and pole connected. C. No. 14 wire will be permitted only on control circuits of relays, contactors, starters. No. 12 wire shall be minimum size for lighting, motor, or general branch circuits. D. Where conductor sizes for such circuits are not indicated, provide branch circuits with conductors sized as follows: 1. Conductors for individual motor branch circuits shall have ampere capacity of not less than 125% of the running current of the motors. 2. Conductors for multiple motor branch circuits shall have ampere capacity of not less than 125% of the running current of the largest motor plus 100% of the running current for each additional motor connected to the circuit 3. Conductors for individual or multiple equipment branch circuits shall have an ampere capacity 01 not less than 125% of the total connected ampere load served by the branch circuit. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16471 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. Conductor sizes for lighting, receptacles and small motor branch circuits, with less than 20 ampere connected load shall be sized as follows: 1 . Conductor size for branch circuits 75'-0" in length from branch circuit panel to center of load shall not be smaller than No. 12; up to 125'-0", not smaller than No.1 0; up to 175'-0", not smaller than NO.8. F. Where specific conductor sizes required are larger than Code requires, the larger sizes shall be installed. G. Circuits may be arranged in 4-wire feeds, 3 circuits and common neutral, in color code previously described. H. Do not use shared neutral conductors for lighting circuits serving light fixtures which are controlled by dimmers. END OF SECTION 16471 A ~ ,;'" z ,/.n "CC\':;:- _ \\.' -..- .~(/ \..~....,: '.~;,-:") ',-, ,. --- l;""'--- r\ \.~......."" " \' ;. ---- ' ...}. 0--~ c.s --- v. V' (? .....!?") ~'..~ ~-J -'7 ./ ( __ ,c..\... \:-:: --:0- 0"2 9- BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16471 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16476 FUSES A. Fuses r-:) , ,'~:;:::~ ~{;r- o \t\ () - r-J ...-0 :;~ ,"-\ ..-' \ 6 7-:.(}' --s;:- ----:.: . .--"--. ~..- . -~.....- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES n , ,......... \......J PART 2 - PRODUCTS v' .. c)\ :; 2.1 FUSES B. Low voltage current-limiting fuses, types as specified below, shall be UL listed in accordance with Standards 198C and 198E and CSA certified HRC in accordance with Standard C22.2 No. 106-M1992. C. Fuses shall be by BUSSMAN, GOULD-SHAWMUT or L1TTLEFUSE, types and ratings as follows: 1. UL Class R, Low-Peak Dual Element Current Limiting, Type LPN-R and LPS-R, 200,000 ampere interrupting rating; use for circuits 600 ampere or less, and motors above one-half horsepower. 2. UL Class S, Fustat Dual element, 10,000 ampere interrupting rating; use for general purpose circuits up to 30 ampere, and fractional horsepower motors, 125 volt or less. D. Fuses for feeders, branch circuits, motors and other equipment shall be selected in types and ratings in accordance with NEe to provide a coordinated system of overcurrent protection, thus in case of a fault or harmful overload, only the fuses nearest the fault or overload will open. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16476 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 .6- .:S \I' c?> ~ .,&,........ ~~"~. ""., ~,L;... (\ ~ ~~\;1 _;:: l.: 6<'6 c--J ."-..-,- /' ,.., ( ,,~'_.\- (,~J ";<, -~;7 , .\,.~ '-""0 "0 :;:-- (.~ (~::1 (~\ \'--J \). , .....-;.. -' \.:Y FUSES SECTION 16476 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Furnish completed bound brochure of all fixtures showing cuts and photometric data properly identified for approval before construction. B. Furnish completed bound brochure of all ballasts used showing types of ballast and laJ'!lps, etc. for approval before construction. ~;~ 5 c :2: g. i:-~ --r-'I C. Submit catalog cuts of alllamps.~v' _- \.' .-::::;. - 1.3. STANDARDS AND CODES N -c ~,.... ~t>,. -n .--, A. The following standards and codes apply: 1. NEC 2. UL Listings f , r- -. \ -' -->") '0::::' //' <<--,. ~=- )7 \....J <-;:? 0'" ~ PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. LIGHTING EQUIPMENT A. Lighting equipment shall be as scheduled and as specified or Architect approved equivalent. Architect's decision final as to all substitute fixtures. B. Mounting as specified in schedule; if question arises, Architect's decision shall govern mounting height, etc. C. All units to bear Underwriters' Laboratories label. 2.2. LAMPS A. All fluorescent lamps shall be 41000 K unless noted otherwise: 1. 48" lamps - GENERAL ELECTRIC F32T8/CW/RS or equivalent. 2. Standard lamps less than 36" length shall be full wattage lamps by GENERAL ELECTRIC or equivalent. B. Approved equivalent products by PHILIPS or SYLVANIA C. Provide lamps for all fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. D. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be 41 aDaK size as scheduled. LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16510-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Contractor responsible for all fixtures and lamps until acceptance by Owner. B. All recessed fixtures in plywood or gypsum board ceilings shall be furnished with plaster frames. C. Fixtures recessed in ceiling shall be installed so that they can be removed from below the ceiling. D. All recessed fixtures shall be installed with metal bar hangers for attaching to ceiling supports. Fixtures shall not be supported directly from ceiling, provide galvanized steel wire as required for supporting fixture from structure. No wood or other combustible material shall be used for supporting fixtures. E. Prior to placing orders for recessed fluorescent fixtures, verify the types of ceilings and suspension that have been approved for this project and order fixtures with flanges as required to fit in the ceilings. END OF SECTION 16510 .6_ .::r \; ) ;.<1 .<'-7 I 1........./ ~C:'..'.? '0),::: :?, ~(':: ( >" ~ ~. U (..........:) t........ " \') ...> ... -;:::.. \Y ~:Y CY ('-\ ,/ c.\ >b ..? ~@~ P -(:"L_ \/= -"7 D~ 9- LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16510-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1_1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric services for equipment furnished by Mechanical Contractor, Equipment Contractor and .the Owner B. In general the equipment to be wired shall include but not be limited to the foll~g: 1_ Mechanical Equipment. :2;. 0 .....:.-. .:-- 2. Equipment furnished by other contractors. )7 ..---; -.......- PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED o f"\'-' ("~-j - r...:> ..-0 ::;. ~~~ "r\ .--::::: , -on 1","."'-' ,-..J )7 v) .. c.f\ ~ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide services and make final connections lor motors and equipment. Make final connections except where noted as "rough-in only" or "final connections by others". Where final connections are to be made by others install outlet box, pull in conductors and leave 8" pigtail for each conductor. Conductors shall be taped and appropriate cover plate installed over box. B. Furnish safety disconnects for motors and equipment not so equipped, make service complete to each item of equipment. C. This section will not be responsible for; internal wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wiring for equipment furnished by others or for temperature control wiring, unless such wiring is specifically indicated or called for in other sections of the Project Manual. D. Electrical drawings identily the locations of motors and equipment and the motor and equipment wiring schedule provide information based upon the mechanical design. Prior to roughing-in conduit, this section shall consult with Mechanical Contractors, Equipment Contractors and Architect, and shari verify with them the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall obtain from the Mechanical and Equipment Contractors and the Owner a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by them. These schedules shall be used for verifying services, motor starters, disconnects, fuses, and overload protection. E. The Division 15 Contractor and the Division 16 Contractor shall provide written certification that the mechanical equipment requiring power and the electrical equipment providing this power have been coordianted and are totally compatible. The certification shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner's Representative prior to energizing any mechanical equipment. F. The Division 16 Contractor shall submit written acknowledgement of having received and reviewed shop drawing information from the Division 15 Contractor and other parties supplying equipment requiring power. This acknowledgement shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner's Representative prior to submitting shop drawings for electrical equipment providing power to mechanical or other equipment. Submittals for such items that do not include evidence of having been coordinated will be returned to the Contractor without being reviewed. WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS SECTION 16660 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 END OF SECTION 16660 r-" 't............~ \ \ L1.\ ~ LP (') ...--,...... u- L- .Q -~ <IC__ ,j ;~ F~<~ ,_-.-I C) "J () ...1 CJ -.,..... ~.~:S u.- ~ (,,:-.-, (_.... ,:- WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS SECTION 16660 - 2 , L PLANS / DRAWINGS ON FILE AT THE CITY CLERK'S OFFICE j/,J) ~ Prepared by: Terry Trueblood, Parks & Ree, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5110 RESOLUTION NO. 06-368 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING FOR JANUARY 9, 2007 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE PARKS AND RECREATION DIRECTOR TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is to be held on the 9th day of January, 2007, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter Cis posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the Parks and Recreation Director in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 1 ? t"h dayo! December '2~_ ck&l- J - MAYOR A~d by ~ ,d'-tltPcJ City Attorney's Office ATTEST: *A~R ~ CITY ERK It was moved by Champion and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: x x x X X Bailev the Resolution be ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn y x Parksreclreslriverside stage imp.doc Printer's Fee $.J'1) ?,;;).. CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED. ID #42-0330670 I, Diana Becicka, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is, hereto attached, was published in said paper' ,time(s), on the following date(s): Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this :J-{ ;-J-1.-... day of A.D.20 Ol,tJ ~. i' '. 0 ry Public . r--'" ~......-,.----...~.....___ '.f"', UNDAKRoTZ_ j I ':.: :,!-. Comrr. .iS$ion.. NUmber 732619 i' "~,jo , My Commission Expires l. ~ 2:1, 2008 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION toIOnCE OF PUBUC HEARING ON PLAf$. SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE ~=S,,~~E TO All TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice Is hereby given that the City Couf)Ci1 of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will Conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and esti- mated cost for the construction of the Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Project in said 'city at 7:00 p.m. on the 9th day of January, 2007, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvet Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street In said city. or If said meeting 'Is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of con- tract and estimated cost are now on file In the ?f!i<:e of the City Clerk in the City Hall In Iowa City, Iowa. and may be inspected by allY interested persons. Any inItirtiiltSd persons may appear at said meeting otthe City Council for the purpoS!l of. making objections to and , commenls.concaming said plans, specifl- catl90s, 'coritnlct oj' the cost. of making said improvement. .' , Ttlj$ notice is glVliltlby order of the City Co~lIof the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as proviQed by law... MARI~K.I<ARFI,(:lTY CLERK 73227 :,' Deqember 22, 2006 ;~Oit t< .: , \r . ~J. SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY PROJECT: ~IVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS NOTICE TO POTENTIAL BIDDERS; - Notice is given hereby that the owner will receive sealed bids for construction of the above project until 2 pm, local Time, on January 31, 2007. The Project is described in general as: a men's and women's restroom with attached open-air shelter and concrete path. The building structure consists of a slab on grade, CMU walls, and wood trusses with asphalt shingle roofing. The Work includes mechanical and electrical. Offers shall be on a stipulated sum basis for a General Construction Contract, including respective mechanical and electrical work; segregated bids will not be accepted. Bid Security in the amount of five percent of the bid must accompany bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bids will be received at: City Clerks Office, City of Iowa City, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240. Bids will be opened and publicly read aloud immediately after the specified closing time. Bids received after that time will not be accepted. AIl interested parties are invited to attend. EXAMINATION OF PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS: As many as 4 sets of printed Procurement Documents may be obtained by PRIME BIDDERS only from the Architect's office upon depositing the sum of $50.00 (refundable) for each set of documents. The deposit amount will be refunded within ten calendar days following bid opening, provided complete sets of documents in satisfactory condition are returned, postpaid, to: Neumann Monson Architects, 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240. Procurement documents may be examined on AE Plans website: www.aeplans.com. Any interested party may log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of documents will not be issued to prospective subcontractors and suppliers; however, printed sets or selected sheets/pages may be purchased through authorized printers (indicated on the website) for the direct cost of printing and postage. Related project infonnation, including addenda, will be available only on AE Plans website; all interested parties, including PRIME BIDDERS must log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of Procurement Documents may be examined at: Neumann Monson Architects 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Construction Update Plan Room 521 3rd Ave. SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 McGraw Hill Dodge Construction 474 First Avenue, Coralville, IA 52241 Dubuque Builders Exchange 801 Cedar Cross Road, Dubuque, IA 52003 Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50309 Construction Update Plan Room 1406 Central Avenue, Box T, Fort Dodge, IA 50501 North Iowa Builders Exchange 25 West State Street, Suite B, Box 1154, Mason City, IA 50401 1II0wa Builders Exchange .520 - 24th Street, Rock Island, IL 61201 Construction Update Plan Room 612 Mulberry, Waterloo, IA 50704 F.W. Dodge Corporation 939 Office Park Road, Suite 121, W. Des Moines, IA 50265 Marshalltown Construction Bureau 709 South Center, Box 1000, Marshalltown, IA 50158 OTHER REQUIREMENTS Products and materials incorporated in the Work of this Project are Exempt from Iowa sales tax and local option sales tax. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond will be required in the full amount of the contract. Work required by the proposed contract shall begin upon ISSUANCE OF THE OWNER'S "NOTICE TO PROCEED"; the Work must be completed with all equipment placed in operation on or before the completion date noted on the contractor's bid form, subject to an extension of time which may be granted by the Owner. Provisions in Articles 73.15 through 73.21 of the Code of Iowa seek to provide opportunities for targeted small businesses to participate in the construction of this project. The Owner has established a goal of five percent of the bid price for certified small businesses. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive irregularity in the bids and in the bidding and to enter into such contract as shall be deemed to be in the Owners best interest. SITE ASSESSMENT: . SITE EXAMINATION Examine the project site before submitting a bid. PREBID CONFERENCE A bidders conference has been scheduled for 10 am on January 25,2007 at the City of Iowa City. All general contract and subcontract bidders are invited. Representatives of the Owner and Architect will be in attendance. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID i I ( '\ ~ . Prepared by: Terry Trueblood, Parks and Recreation, 220 S. Gilbert, Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5110 RESOLUTION NO. 07-12 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project were published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY IOWA, THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above-named project shall be in the amount of 10% of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at City Hall, until 2:00 p.m. on the 31st day of January, 2007, or at a later date as determined by the Director of Parks and Recreation or designee, with notice of said later date to be published as required by law. Thereafter the bids will be opened by the Parks and Recreation Director or designee, and thereupon referred to the Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next meeting to be held at City Hall (in Emma J. Harvat Hall), Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 6th day of February, 2007 or at such later time and place as may be fixed. Passed and approved this 9th dayof ~ MAYOR - .2QL f~ ATTEST: ?/k~ k. ~ CI .LERK Approved by ~ I~/~ Ci~~y'S ~ffiCe --. parksreclreslbrooklyn park. doc Resolution No. Page 2 07-12 It was moved by 0' Donnell and seconded by Bailey adopted, and upon roll call there were: the Resolution be AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x x x x x x x Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn . K~"IS~D PROJECT MANUAL Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, Contract Requirements and Technical Specifications RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS CITY PARK, IOWA CITY SPRING 2007 IOWA CITY, IOWA NEUMANN MONSON ..,.---------.--.---------.---------- ARCHITECTS .0, PRO f E S SIC N A I COR P 0 ~ AT., 0 N II! E. COlleGE ST IOWA CITY. IA. 522<10 .. . ,";" -,.,.. .~: )7 I --r'\ -- .- - --(\ --0 ,..-- j ::.:'''" ' ._~".. ~ o -' Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 000101 . PROJECT TITLE PAGE ;-1, : \-- i 05,038 '). r',7 L. L \.. I /....... \ ,..--., ,-,...-~. / ! "....., \ ~ t ^ l \.J \" \._) 1 I 1.( I ~,.,.1 "i ll,'-\ PROJECT MANUAL FOR RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS CITY PARK, IOWA CITY ISSUE DATE: January 10,2007 NM PROJECT NO: 05.038 THIS PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDES PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 East College Street, Suite 303 Iowa City, IA 52240 BIDDERS' NOTE: Addendum information is ONLY available on AE Plans website. '," II F: f r-- -" PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000101 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 000103 - PROJECT DIRECTORY CITY OF IOWA CITY 220 South Gilbert Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Contact person: Terry Trueblood Telephone: (319) 356-5100 Fax: (319) 356-5487 e-mail: Terry-Trueblood@iowa-city.org NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319) 338-7878 Fax: (319) 338-7879 Principal-in-Charge: Kevin Monson Structural Engineer: Jack Miller Project Manager and Contract Administration: Scott Palmberg e-mail: spalmberg@neumannmonson.com ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS: OWNER: ARCHITECT: Mech Engr: A&J Associates 365 Beaver Kreek Centre, Suite B Telephone: (319) 626-4719 Fax: (319) 626-4941 Project Mechanical Engineer: Vic Amoroso, Doug Green Project Electrical Engineer: John Jurca END OF DIRECTORY 05.038 ., / .~. -j ....'y' *", ..._4 -y PROJECT DIRECTORY 000103-1 /(\ ""' ..",..?"'" ./ <\ , /\ ''._-) ~/ ...-"'" ~..:~ -""' '::"> Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 000107 - SEALS PAGE -~ r'\ "-,"- ,.- -'n -~-:: c ,\.\\ '(-- " (' \ ...- -:~ . ._' \,~J ('~:-: ,;','':'' ........>' (' .~:~ \;? o -..l y SEALS PAGE 00 0107 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 000101 000103 000107 000110 000115 PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT DIRECTORY SEALS PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS ............................. . ............................. . .................................... . ............................. . ......................... . PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 1113 00 2113 00 2213 00 2613 00 4113 004313 004513 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .... . .... SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f" ,', BID FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '~.:' BID BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C~. n BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS .. . .. .. .. .,. ....... .~.;:',:.' )/ -' -n .",,~ " " \ - r\ ~:~S:'\ '- -- ~) .' ,. \.-....~...\, '. ) _.' CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 005100 00 5200 00 5215 00 6500 00 6513 00 6515 007315 SUMMARY 01 1000 'C? ;:;" \:? ,,"? -1 NOTICE OF AWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGREEMENT FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEOUT FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL ......... COMPLETION CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) y SUMMARY .......... .............................. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 01 2100 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ................. ALLOWANCES .................................... ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .................. . 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Page 1 01/10107 r--"j FILtJj QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2001 J~.l~ I I Pt't 2: 26 CITY CLEF{K . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOWA C~TY,. IOWA QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 01 7800 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 03 . CONCRETE L-J 03 3000 03 3513 03 3900 CAST-tN-PLACE CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING . . ... . .. CONCRETE CURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 04 . MASONRY 04 0511 04 2002 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05. METALS 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 . WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 06 1753 ROUGH CARPENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES .................. DIVISION 07. THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2400 073113 07 6200 07 9005 DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . ASPHALT SHINGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOINT SEALERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Page 2 01/10/07 DIVISION 08 . OPENINGS 08 1113 08 7100 08 9100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR HARDWARE ........................ .......... LOUVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 09 . FINISHES 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING .......................... . DIVISION 10 . SPECIALTIES 102113.19 10 2813 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOILET ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL - see below DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL - see below DIVISION 31 . EARTHWORK 31 1 000 31 2200 31 2316 31 2323 SITE CLEARING GRADING EXCAVATION FILL .................................. . ....................................... . .................................... . ............... ............................. DIVISION 32 . EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1313 32 9219 CONCRETE PAVING SEEDING ....................................... . .............................. . 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ...-:. \. t:,_:~-7' J::..? )7 Page 3 01/10/07 , , j C..' -;., - -~ -<::\ -.' \.....- ......\ \ I ',_/ r---' . . c;..? .......l Riverside Festival Stage Improvements DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15014 BACKFILLING SECTION 15015 TRENCHING SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15100 VALVES SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS END OF DOCUMENT 00011 \D ~ ('oJ N ~6 r"', .,;: 'l-- \.ll _ "'-"' Q.. "Jr uj U\:::. i C) ..-' '>- - ~ \-::< LL ..#-- ...-::r.. O?? ~ ...- Q = = c<oo..l 05.038 A&J #200640.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00011-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS G.001 COVER SHEET C-101 SITE PLAN A.101 PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A.501 DETAILS AND SCHEDULES MO MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES M1 MECHANICAL PLANS M2 MECHANICAL PLANS E1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E2 ELECTRICAL PLAN END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS r j _..~.__,l ,.......-~.l "- ._~_'. _J_', "j.:...... -" \ (-" -\\ -- -- ,'\ . I ~, "--.1 7~~\2'~ ........-!-. /' ...::...., ~~ )7 N .. o --1 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS OWNER: CITY OF IOWA CITY PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS NOTICE TO POTENTIAL BIDDERS; Notice is given hereby that the owner will receive sealed bids for construction of the above project until 2 pm, local Time, on January 31,2007. The Project is described in general as: a men's and women's restroom with attached open-air shelter and concrete path. The building structure consists of a slab on grade, CMU walls, and wood trusses with asphalt shingle roofing. The Work includes mechanical and electrical. Offers shall be on a stipulated sum basis for a General Construction Contract, including respective mechanical and electrical work; segregated bids will not be accepted. Bid Security in the amount of five percent of the bid must accompany bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Bids will be received at: City Clerks Office, City of Iowa City, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240. Bids will be opened and publicly read aloud immediately after the specified closing time. Bids received after that time will not be accepted. All interested parties are invited to attend. EXAMINATION OF PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS: As many as 4 sets of printed Procurement Documents may be obtained by PRIME BIDDERS only from the Architect's office upon depositing the sum of $50.00 (refundable) for each set of documents.. The deposit amount will be refunded within ten calendar days following bid opening, provided complete sets of documents in satisfactory condition are returned, postpaid, to: Neumann Monson Architects, 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240. Procurement documents may be examined on AE Plans website: www.aeplans.com. Any interested party may log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of documents will not be issued to prospective subcontractors and suppliers; however, printed sets or selected sheets/pages may be purchased through authorized printers (indicated on the website) for the direct cost of printing and postage. Related project information, including addenda, will be available only on AE Plans website; all interested parties, including PRIME BIDDERS must log-on and register under the project name. Printed sets of Procurement Documents may be examined 8t: Neumann Monson Architects !" 221 E College Street, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Construction Update Plan Room 521 3rd Ave. SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 McGraw Hill Dodge Construction 474 First Avenue, Coralville, IA 52241 Dubuque Builders Exchange 801 Cedar Cross Road, Dubuque, IA 52003 () :Ecl ).> - i \ ~:~~ ~-, ,I ' __ ......0' r"' ,...-." ~ " \' ~ : -- :nl:~} ~_..- '-", /" .c:;. }; '"'1 ...., -.,..... r-".', "-.J 1') o -.I ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 1113 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ("\ t_J UJ i --' LL 05.038 \D N N Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50309 Construction Update Plan Room 1406 Central Avenue, Box T, Fort Dodge, IA 50501 North Iowa Builders Exchange 25 West State Street, Suite B, Box 1154, Mason City, IA 50401 11Ia1&a Builders Exchange '../5 0- C 520 - 24th Street, Rock Island, IL 61201 LL! ij~truction Update Plan Room >_ () 612 Mulberry, Waterloo, IA 50704 5~. Dodge Corporation o 939 Office Park Road, Suite 121, W. Des Moines, IA 50265 Marshalltown Construction Bureau ..,,;~ a.. ~ '""'- < .-;' r-- = ~ t;-...] 709 South Center, Box 1000, Marshalltown, IA 50158 OTHER REQUIREMENTS Products and materials incorporated in the Work of this Project are Exempt from Iowa sales tax and local option sales tax. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond will be required in the full amount of the contract. Work required by the proposed contract shall begin upon ISSUANCE OF THE OWNER'S "NOTICE TO PROCEED"; the Work must be completed with all equipment placed in operation on or before the completion date noted on the contractor's bid form, subject to an extension of time which may be granted by the Owner. Provisions in Articles 73.15 through 73.21 of the Code of Iowa seek to provide opportunities for targeted small businesses to participate in the construction of this project. The Owner has established a goal of five percent of the bid price for certified small businesses. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive irregularity in the bids and in the bidding and to enter into such contract as shall be deemed to be in the Owners best interest. SITE ASSESSMENT: SITE EXAMINATION Examine the project site before submitting a bid. PREBID CONFERENCE A bidders conference has been scheduled for 10 am on January 25,2007 at the City of Iowa City. All general contract and subcontract bidders are invited. Representatives of the Owner and Architect will be in attendance. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. l.. _) ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 001113-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID 'I;:::') '':;:::. f' - '. ",.....- .---" , ').>;> ....-.) (~) .;.......-, ,......; - ;-,' ~(\ ~-- - - -:1 ,- '.-----' \J ..c._;? - r::? ~ y ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 001113- 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 002113 . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS See AlA Document A701 (1997 Edition), Instructions to Bidders, following this page. Modifications and additions to the provisions in the Instruction to Bidders are included in Section 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. -r-:' '-~ ~ -- -of\ -:',::> -- - - :;\~ ,'\\ '.----- \, , j ,.-.... ~r- '~, "'0 \~'\. '...---', ~~ J7 r:-? o -1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113 - 1 SECTION 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART1 GENERAL INTENT ,.::>/ The following supplements change, delete from or add to "Instructions to Bidders", AlA 7 Document A701, 1997 edition. Articles or portions thereof, which are not specifically modified, deleted, or superseded hereby, remain in full effect. ~-?, ..,/<) 05.~R ....<\ ... v~~ '. ~. t:"', r._ '.~~ n ."'.,...... ",-"'. -:~.- '-;.-'.' ./ -,.?') ... / .-' (,;.. (<"') -:;>3,(\ "\~3 'l' -; ,.::.. .r'l ',..,;- I \;9 ......"' ,'\ '(- ) '-'" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF AIA701-1997 Refer to ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS. Add the following subparagraph under 3.2 -INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS: 3.2.4 Conflicts or inconsistencies between referred standards, specifications, drawings or written instructions not clarified by Addendum prior to the date for receipt of Bids will not be construed as sufficient grounds for adjustment of the proposed contract sum. The Architect shall make the necessary clarification upon receipt of the appropriate written request. 3.2.4.1 Clarifications requested in writing by Bidders and received prior to 7 days before bid date shall be addressed in an Addendum. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. . 3.2.4.2 Direct questions to: Scott Palmberg, Neumann Monson Architects; telephone 319-338-7878. Add the following sub-subparagraph under 3.3 - SUBSTITUTIONS: 3.3.2.1 Make request for approval of substitute products on "Substitution Request Form" included at the end of this section. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form for each proposed substitution; verbal or written requests without completed Substitution Request Form will not be considered. The bidder is advised that vagueness of submittal, inadequate warranty, insufficient data and failure to meet project requirements may be cause for rejection of request. Approval is subject to later reconsideration at any time during the life of the contract. Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 3.4 - ADDENDA: 3.4.1.1 Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. Refer to ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES Add the following sub-subparagraph under 4.1 - PREPARATION OF BIDS: 4.1.8 Iowa Sales Tax Exemption. In accordance with provisions of the Code of Iowa and of the Iowa Administrative Rules, "Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates" will be issued for this project. DO NOT include Iowa sales tax or local option sales tax in determining the project bid amount. Ar-Id the following sub-subparagraphs under 4.2 - BID SECURITY: 4.2.2.1 Bid security shall be provided on the form of Bid Bond included in this Project Manual. 4.2.2.2 In-lieu-of a Bid Bond, the required bid security may be U.S. currency or a cashier's or certified check drawn on an Iowa bank or credit union chartered under the laws of the United States and made payable to the order of Treasurer, City of SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2213 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Iowa City. 4.2.2.3 Attach bid security to the Bid in a manner to permit inspection of the bid security without exposing the Bid. Bids accompanied by improper bid security will be construed as "non-responsive" and will be returned unopened. Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 43 - SUBMISSION OF BIDS: 4.3.1.1 Bids submitted via mail shall be clearly marked: "SEALED BID FOR Riverside Festival Stage Improvements" Bids shall be addressed to: City Clerk's Office, City of Iowa City, 410 East Washington S1. Iowa City, Iowa 52240. 4.3.1.2 Attach bid security in separate envelope clearly marked: "BID SECURITY" with bidder's name and project name on the outside. Change subparagraph 4.4.1 under paragraph 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID, to read as follows: 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder for a period of forty five (45) days following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. Refer to ARTICLE 6 - POST-BID INFORMATION Add the following sub-subparagraph under subpagaraph 6.3.1 : .4 The successful bidder, within 48 hours of receipt of "Owner's Notice of Intent to Award a Contract", shall provide to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors selected to perform work on this project. 'The Subcontractor list shall include each firms' name, tax identification number, and address. END OF SECTION \.0 N N cO>""" l_,J uJ _\ - LL- - ..-.:- .d. -") r0- c;;;:;) C;;) ,-..I 4. ::C- 3-01 cc-- t:~\7 ':.:J\- (5 ~')--- t::: 4. O~ o - -:c. 0- SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2213 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 002613 . SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS MAKE SUBMITTAL DURING THE BIDDING PHASE TO: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECT P.C., 111 East College St, Iowa City, IA 52240 BID DATE: ,2007. REQUEST FROM: SPECIFICATION SECTIONITITLE: DATE:_,_'07. Description: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: ;Article/Paragraph: ; Model: ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS AND ATTACHMENTS In submitting this Request, the Undersigned acknowledges and represents that: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in. all respects to specified product. : .... , --~~..-'-~ j Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified produ~: C', (- Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is ava:1m~ -:=. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affectd~ (^) ,.- delay progress schedule. -::--.:_ . r ') -n ,-- .' .,,'- ."\ \ "\ \_-) Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. c=!.0~ Payment will be made for changes to building design, including design, detailing, and ~ construction costs caused by the substitution. Attachments: The following attachments are considered an integral part of this Request: Product Data, descriptions and specifications necessary for evaluation. Drawings necessary to indicate proper installation in the Work. Tests and Reports consistent with specified performance requirements. Samples: {';? o cP SUBMITTED BY: ,(Title) Firm name: Telephone: ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Reviewed by: Date: Fax: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 2613 - 1 ...\'\ ~ s<. \...... ( J J""""") "'.....r" ~. \..;- .~/ .- /' ... \ ,,/\ :;.-,." -,~->." "'./ " \ / ..,- '\ ....-~,..\, C. (-\., r ) .... ':-. \... ,-..0 ,.<),. .~,," *"..,-'" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ., ~~~-! ,...' SECTION 004113. BID FORM GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT. STIPULATED SUM THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES TO (OWNER): City of Iowa City FOR (PROJECT): Riverside Festival Stage Improvements DATE: ,2007 (Bidder to enter date) SUBMITTED BY: (Bidder, enter firm name and address below) /" J' :::'"- ',5>\ ..--::',0:::.,:" (_.J,. / -''-7 ~ BIDDER'S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: In submitting this bid, BIDDER acknowledges and represents that: BIDDER has examined copies of all the Bidding Documents; BIDDER has visited the Place of Work and become familiar with the general, local, and site conditions; BIDDER is familiar with federal, State, and local laws, ordinances and regulations; BIDDER has correlated the information known to BIDDER, observations obtained from examination of the site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents and additional investigations,explorations, tests and data with the Bidding Documents; This bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of an undisclosed person, firm or corporation; BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain an advantage over the OWNER; Contingency Allowance is included in the Bid Price. Local and state sales and use taxes are not included in the Bid Price. BIDDER has received the Addenda indicated below, and all costs resulting from modifications to the Bidding Documents have been considered and included in the Bid Price. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. , Dated , Dated , Dated BASE BID Having examined the Place of The Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by Neumann Monson, P.C. for the above mentioned project, we, the undersigned. hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the Sum of: dollars ($ ). BID FORM 00 4113 - 1 .....) , .' c? 0> Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ALLOWANCES (Refer to Section 01 2100) BIDDER has included the following lump sum allowances in the Base Bid: Contingency Allowance (Lump Sum): $5,000. CONTRACT TIME If this Bid is accepted, Bidder will: Achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work before May 15,2007. ATTACHMENTS The following Supplements are attached to this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form: Bid security in the form of a as required by the Instructions to Bidders is attached to and made a condition of this Bid. Section 00 4513 - Bidders Pre-Bid TSB Contacts: Targeted Small Business Participation Form. ACCEPTANCE This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for forty five days from the bid closing date. If this bid is accepted by the Owner within the time period stated above, we will: Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award. Furnish the required bonds within three days of date of execution of the contract. Commence work within seven days of receipt of the Owner's written Notice to Proceed. If this bid is accepted within the time stated, and we fail to commence the Work or we fail to provide the required Bond(s), the security deposit shall be forfeited as damages to Owner by reasor. of our failure. In the event our bid is not accepted within the time stated above, the required security deposit shall be returned to the undersigned, in accordance with the provisions of the Instructions to Bidders; unless a mutually satisfactory arrangement is made for its retention and validity for an extended period of time. BID FORM SIGNA TURE(S) Firm name: Telephone: Type of business entity: ,Fax: (Corporation, Partnership, Sole Proprietor). \D NBY~ N(A _ d signing officer, Title). (' ..,,- II - '-7~~ EN8:0F ~RM lJ,.....i, _ C) t=: ~ ::..-0 LL ..,- ~- <( ~ 0$ ~ Q = C--.l BID FORM 00 411 3 - 2 "i\ I::>> 0/ ...- j" Riverside Festival Stage Improvements f1~ (?; / \/<> >''; / -\05 O;.j _ ) '7 /' . ~ - A. (. ~~~ .,.;\ \, , / ,. ./;:-., <-/- ; // -i->'! '::<; /.. /~ ~ SECTION 004313 . BID BOND FORM OF BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE, (Firm Name) (Business address) (City, State, Zip Code) as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of hereinafter called the Surety, are firmly bound unto City of Iowa City 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent (5%) of the total Bid, Dollars($ as surety, in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we the said Principal and the said Surety bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, THE PRINCIPAL HAS SUBMITTED THE ACCOMPANYING BID FOR Construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified. within 45 days after said opening, and shall, within the period specified therefore, or, if no period be specified, within seven (7) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, enter into a written contract with the Owner, in accordance with the bid as accepted and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required for the faithful perfomance and proper fulfillment of the contract, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the obligee in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bonds required by the specifications and by law. In witness whereof, the parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by the undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of the governing bodies. Signed and sealed this day of , 2007. (Witness) (Principal) (Title) (seal) (Witness) (Surety) (Title) (seal) BID BOND 004313 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 004513. BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS SUBMIT THE LIST BELOW WITH THE BID FORM 05.038 BIDDER CERTIFIES THAT EVERY EFFORT TO SOLICIT QUOTES OR BIDS FROM TARGETED SMALL BUSINESSES AS EVIDENCE OF AFFIRMATIVE ACTION IN CONTRACTING WAS MADE. THE FOLLOWING TSB'S WERE CONTACTED PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID PROPOSAL: TSB DATE QUOTE REC'VD QUOTE USED IN BID YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES/NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES' NO YES/NO YES / NO YES/NO YES/NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES/NO YES/NO YES' NO A list of Certified Iowa Targeted Small Businesses is available from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at the following website: http://www.iowai.netliowa.dia/tsb/index.cfm. Bidder's name: (Print the full name of your firm) By: (Authorized signing officer) -'n END OF PRE.BID TSB CONTACTS (Title) C~ _..".:.~~ (. . - n :'::"-', .r~'""', -i-:.-- :.'~- ~.-.;-'\ -::::: '-i:"J ( 'C'.,- ":2: /..... :z:. )7 -0 '....--"'j .,-j r:-? C" cP BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS 004513-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 005100 - NOTICE OF AWARD PROJECT: OWNER: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction ARCHITECT: TO (CONTRACTOR): CONTRACT FOR: 05.038 " ~',') ~~;> '" v, "/"l ~.:.. \-/, ('> .- ",-- .?:", . /'. ' /' ~:,.~7 />'"J._ .,' ,. - (-.:" (/) '/,\-;/ //-\;', -f) -:f-- -,;,. -'~ ARCHITECT'S RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby recommends that: The Bid submitted by (Contractor) has been reviewed and found, to the Architect's best information and belief, to be in compliance with procurement provisions for the designated Project. The contract sum of $ is determined on the following basis: Base Bid: $ I recommend that the Bidder's Offer be accepted and a Contract be issued for construction of the Project. Neumann Monson Architects P.C. By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE BID AND INTENT TO ENTER INTO A CONTRACT: The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Bid submitted by your firm pursuant to the procurement requirements of the above referenced Project has been accepted and a Construction Contract has been authorized in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents. By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF SECTION NOTICE OF AWARD 00 51 00 - 1 /\\ /':/ , /\\ 'A " ) '- ..,<) /,--'" ,.. '? <?... VI Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 005215 - AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF AGREEMENT The basis of Contract between the Owner and Contractor is: AlA Document A 107, Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Projects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM, 1997 Edition. A copy of the form of Agreement is bound in the Project Manual following this page. ;:::::: \...1 ~~~?: 1'-'") ". ,,~,., ~.1 S~'.2 ';-"'~ rn -:=: i' q~ <-". ""- )> 05.038 t.,c) C',~' ~~~ ..!i..... -\-\ ',-"1 , -I' .." ....;.;,~ \_--) r;:> C> 0:> AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 5215 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05 038 SECTION 006500 - CLOSEOUT FORMS THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES SUBMITTED BY : RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palm berg (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: -Q~ ~ ~-~'I.... ,'_. "":~,~- ~ ~ -r'~J ___ ' /~ -<::- ---\\ -~::.. PROJECT: OWNER: TO (ARCHITECT): ....... ....... ~." ..~y;~ ""~~"\ \. -\........\ :~j ""' ~:)-~~. \ \; , ,..r, -;:-, .\:, --j;,r ---- y ~ o OJ CERTIFICATES: INSURANCE CERTIFICATES (File with the Owner upon Notice of Final Completion of the Work.) In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit (in duplicate) the following certificates of insurance: Contractor's Completed Operations Insurance on ACORD Form 25-S. Required insurance coverages will be maintained in force for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion of the Work. . CLOSEOUT FORMS: CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit two copies of the fully executed Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion form. CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, and upon satisfactory inspection to determine that the Work is sufficiently complete to permit the Owner to occupy and utilize the Work for its intended purpose. the Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion on AlA Doc. G704-2000 for approval and issuance by the Owner. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, submit two copies of the Contractor's Statement of Final Completion form. The following Supporting Documents are included with this Notice: _FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT (three copies) ~FFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AlA Doc. G706) _AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AlA Doc. G706A) CLOSEOUT FORMS 00 6500 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 _CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AlA Doc. G707) _INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Form 25-S). OWNER'S CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK Upon recommendation from the Architect that the completed Work be accepted and that final payment be made, the Owner will notify the Contractor of the effective date of acceptance of the Work. In accordance with Iowa law, final payment will be made after 31 days following effective date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. END OF SECTION \.,0 '" ~ N fl ::!!:: Vc !._... a: ....!. l..Li 0- Ll.1 __.J )-:" , U!~ __...1 LL :;z >_U ...:s:: t=~ J Os r-- = 0 = f:'-.J CLOSEOUT FORMS 00 6500 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 006513 - CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION FROM: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 East College Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg. (CONTRACTOR) (Address) r':> t:;.-J PROJECT: OWNER: ~::::..) TO (ARCHITECT): 6 .,;c -'.--- ::--.\ -;.~ .-- ~-~ -"-- -n ....-~~.. - - \d'-'!"'-"\ , \ Representative: ~?\ C':" .:::-:::. \:'\ " ~<1 ,-) 7--- ~ )7 '''-'. ? (........ , \_.J r:? o c;:> COMPLETION DATE: ,2007 DECLARATION AND REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As of the above date, the construction of the Work of the above Project has progressed sufficiently that the Project (or designated part thereof) can be occupied by the Owner and utilized for its intended purpose. We understand that occupancy and use of the Work designated as substantially complete shall not constitute Owner acceptance of the Work or portions thereof. The Work to which this Declaration of Substantial Completion applies includes the following: CONTRACTOR'S PRE.INSPECTION AND INITIAL PUNCH LIST: In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, We have conducted an inspection of the designated Work for conformance with the Contract Documents. A comprehensive list of incomplete work and items needing correction includes the following: CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 00 6513 - 1 r'"'\ l.-.J U) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 -~ - LL 'E. .0;( ....... - -".. N ~5-0 I~r- -,c - \ 0... _ \..Lj >-= ;~) t::: -- (..J :>- ~ t:: 4. ~ O~ c::::> (;'-..1 We understand that failure to include an item on the above list does not alter Our responsibility to complete all Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. The above items will be completed or corrected within _ days of the date of this Notice. Please schedule and conduct the Architect's inspection as required to verify the status of the Work. ATTACHMENTS: We have attached evidence of Inspection and Acceptance of the following Authorities having Jurisdiction: Building Inspector: _Y_N CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 006513- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Fire Marshal: _ Y _N _Y N SUBMITTED BY: (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF DOCUMENT ~(J. -,:~~ ~- '\ ,,' r'i , rl~"~~' ':2.. /, z:.. )? CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 006513-3 --. (.,,~, - - c ~..\ '\ - - .-.- \ - .",~ 1 " \ ~ '.."-' -";;' ,_J ~ o CfJ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 006515 - CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION PROJECT: OWNER: RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE City of Iowa City Representative: Terry Trueblood. SUBMITTED BY: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 111 EastCollege Street, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: Scott Palmberg (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction TO (ARCHITECT): CONTRACT FOR: CONTRACT DATE: ,2007 CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION: We, the undersigned, do hereby certify that: The Work provided pursuant to the Contract Documents for the above projec~s.Aeen<- inspected and determined to be complete and in compliance with provisions of~4Pntr~ Documents. ,.' '.:../ - I: '" __ The following Supporting Documents have been fully executed (in duplicate) and::arv included with this Statement: -<. 'Q. -;~ n~;' ~- /"^' .c- )7 -n ..~::: '--1 . \ \ '..-""'" \ <.._I _FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT _AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AlA Doc. G70B) _AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AlA Doc. G706A) _CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AlA Doc. G707) _INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Form 25-S) r::? o d> (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) ARCHITECT'S RECOMMENDATION FOR ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby states that: The Work performed by (Contractor) under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Architect's best knowledge, information and belief, to be in substantial compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The Certificate for Final Payment is a complete and accurate summary of the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all changes and CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION 006515 - 1 ("""", 't..--l, \J.-:: _\ - \..1- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 modifications thereto. The total cost of the Work as completed is $ I recommend, under the provisions of the Contract Documents, that the Work be accepted and that final payment be made. Neumann Monson Architects P.C. By Date (Authorized Representative) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Work performed by pursuant to the above referenced Contract is accepted and final payment has been authorized in accordance with provisions of the Contract. (Title) By Date (Authorized Representative) END OF DOCUMENT (Title) U> 4. ~ ~L3 c~\.- ~ \::.1 ~ _ (,.) [5 - -)'- , ....". \- .::::L ~ O~ G - ~ CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION 006515 - 2 --~-- , Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05,038 SECTION 007315 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) INTENT These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the "General Conditions" included in ~? the Abbreviated Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Document A1:9-J, 199r;:j Edition and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisi~ ~ich (:;:, are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. /'-: -;> '-f. y ~/ - - (-...... ':::\ (-i / \ .~ ~..._~ \~\") Add the following subparagraph under paragraph 6.5: "b 7- ..:? 6.5.1 Copies of the Drawings and Project Manual returned after Bidding will be y furnished, free of charge, to the Contractor for use during the construction of the Work. The Contractor may secure additional copies of Project Manual and Drawings from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for reproduction and handling. Add the following paragraph to Article 6: MODIFICATIONS TO ARTICLES OF AlA DOCUMENT A107, 1997. REFER TO ARTICLE 6 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 6.6 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS: Products: Means new material, machinery. components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. Provide: To furnish or supply, plus install complete in place, tested and approved. Furnish or Supply: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and ready for use. The terms "approved," "required," and "as directed" refer to and indicate the work or materials that may be approved, required, or directed by the Architect acting as the Owner's representative. The terms "shown," "indicated," "detailed," "noted," "scheduled." and terms of similar import, refer to requirements contained in the Contract Documents. REFER TO ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR Add the following subparagraphs under paragraph 8.5 TAXES: 8.5.1 Iowa Sales Tax Exemption. In accordance with provisions of the Code of Iowa and of the Iowa Administrative Rules, "Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates" will be issued for this project. Do NOT include Iowa sales tax or local option sales tax in determining the project bid amount. The successful bidder, within 48 hours of receipt of "Owner's Notice of Intent to Award a Contract", shall provide to the Owner a list of all Subcontractors selected to perform work on this project. The Subcontractor list shall include each firms' name. tax identification number, and address. 8.5.2 Using information provided by the successful bidder, the Owner will apply to the Iowa Department of Revenue and Finance for 1) Authorization Letters and 2) Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Certificates, to be issued to the Contractor and each Subcontractor. These documents may be used by the Contractor and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315-1 r\\ ..-....--- --0 '\\'\ -'-~-';". ".j ~," ~" r;? C o::P Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 designated Subcontractors to purchase materials and products for this project free of sales/use tax and local option taxes that might otherwise apply. Samples of these documents are attached at the end of these Supplementary Conditions. Delete the following from the first sentence of subparagraph 8.13.1 under paragraph 8.13 INDEMNIFICATION: "and to the extent claims, damages, losses, or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 16.3" REFER TO ARTICLE 12 - CHANGES IN THE WORK Delete paragraph 12.2 and substitute the following: 12.2 Adjustment to the Contract Sum resulting from a change in the Work shall be based on mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. The lump sum shall include the expenditures and savings (net cost) of those performing the Work attributable to the change plus a percentage fee for overhead and profit and subsequent markup(s). Expenditures and savings (net cost) attributable to changes in the Work shall be limited to the following: 1) cost of labor, including social security, unemployment insurance, fringe benefits, and workmen's compensation insurance; ~ -, r- = = c-.! <( :L~ C:C- \~ -,..: ()t:: ( ~, 4) cost of field supervision directly attributable to the change. and r........... \- <::1'..":. 5) costs of premimum increases for bonds and insurance; and sales, use or G 6 similar taxes related to the Work. - In case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an allowance for overhead and profit determined as follows: 2) cost of materials, supplies and equipment including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; \..0 N N ,c 0- 3) rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; and r\ \.-j LL\ -"" - U- - 1) Fee for overhead and profit for those performing the Work attributable to the change is fifteen percent of the sum of 1), 2), 3), and 4) above. 2) The Contractor shall be allowed to add a five percent fee to the cost of change order work performed by a subcontractor. 3) A subcontractor shall be allowed to add a five percent fee to the cost of change order work performed by a sub subcontractor. If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment to the Contract Sum based on the method provided in paragraph 12.2, using reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. REFER TO ARTICLE 13 - TIME Add the following subparagraph under paragraph 13.1: 13.1.1 Contract Time is identified in Section 00 4113 - Bid Form. REFER TO ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Add the following to the end of subparagraph 14.1.1: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 The Contractor shall, before the first application, submit to the Architect a "Schedule of Values" of the various parts of the Work, aggregating the total sum of the contract, made out in such form as the Architect may direct, and if required, supported by evidence as to its correctness. This schedule, when approved by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing applications for progress payments. Payments under this contract will be made monthly, by the Owner, to the extent of ninety-five percent (95%) of the value of the Work performed, including materials stored in approved locations at the construction site as certified by the Architect. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for review and approval, an application for each payment on AlA. Form G702 and G703 and, if required, receipts or other vouchers from subcontractors showing the Contractor's previous payment to them for materials and labor. Applications shall reflect the valuation of work completed and materials suitably stored at the construction site through the date of the Application, Payment shall be made by the Owner within 30 days after the Application for Payment is received by the Architect providing the content and format of the application is found to be complete and acceptable by the Architect and all work covered by the current application is determined to be complete and acceptable. Add the following to subparagraph 14.5.2: In accordance with Iowa Law, Final Payment, or remaining retainage (5 percent of the Contract Sum), shall not be released until at least thirty-one (31) days after completion and final acceptance of all Work of the Contract by the Owner. The Fi~J Application for Payment shall not be certified by the Architect until such t~ that atE requirements of the Contract have been fully met, and required Contract ~~ut (-'" documenta~ion (including Final Lien Waivers and Sales Tax Reporting Fo~1::bJas been submitted and approved. . -', ~ - REFER TO ARTICLE 16 -INSURANCE (-~(~-~ :..., ::-- \'\ -y;. Add the following subparagraphs under paragraph 16.1: "511, r;? 16.1.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until all Z 0 insurance required under this article has been obtained and such insurance hag been cP approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor commence work under this contract until similar insurance for all subcontractors has been so obtained and approved. Such policy or policies shall become effective at the commencement of the work and shall remain in force for the full period of construction and until approval of final payment is made for the completed project, unless a longer period is specified herein for a specific coverage. .1 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the Owner. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance shall set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self insured retention. .2 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are cancelled or modified, or in the event that the Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the Owner may at their discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 16.1.2 Prior to start of construction, submit to the Architect for review and forward to the Owner for approval, Certificates of Insurance as evidence of compliance with the -~ - \ \ ;, ",-1'""A,\ , \ " '"...--, \...-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements t.n N N ~ ,,/.3= ceO U.J .....Jr ('...):_- "...., >-L.... 1-- <( 0-- es r-'" 1--; Uj I :E: a.. LL % ~ -, .-- <::::> <::::> "" 05.038 following minimum insurance requirements for the project. The Certificates shall be ACORD Form 25-S and AlA Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S. Furnish copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. .1 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. .2 Except for Workers' Compensation, Contractor's insurance poliCies shall name the Owner, the Architect and their Agents as additional insureds. 16.1.3 Contractor's liability insurance shall be written on an "occurrence" basis; in~urance coverage shall be not less than the following: .1 Workers' Compensation: Statutory. .2 Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Products and Completed Operations; Contractual Liability; and Broad Form Property Damage): Combined Single Limit: $2,000,000 each occurrence. Fire Damage: $250,000 on anyone fire. Medical Expense: $10,000 on anyone person. Personal Injury: $1,000,000 each occurrence. General Aggregate: $2,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to this Project only. Products and Completed Operations: $1,000,000 aggregate; maintain for one year after final payment. .3 Contractual Liability: Same limits as general liability. .4 Personal Injury with Employment Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 aggregate. .5 Comprehensive Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): Combined Single Limit: $1,000,000 each occurrence. .6 Umbrella Excess Liability: $5,000,000 over primary insurance. Delete Paragraph 16.3 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE in its entirety. Refer to Paragraph 16.4 - PROPERTY INSURANCE Add the following sub-subparagraphs under 16.4.1 : .1 Builder's Risk property insurance provided by the Owner shall not cover any tools, appratus, machinery, scaffolding, hoists, forms, staging, shoring. and other similar items commonly referred to as construction equipment, which may be on the Site and the capital value of which is not included in the Work. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for any insurance he may wish to have on such construction equipment. .2 The Contractor shall pay the DEDUCTIBLE for each Claim made against the Owner's Builder's Risk policy. The deductible amount is $1,000. REFERTO ARTICLE 20 - OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS Add the following paragraph to Article 20: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 20.1 BONDS 20.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as follows: Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond on AlA A312. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond on AlA A311. 20.1.2 Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract. END OF DOCUMENT 6 -~,:;;,~ c....,' ~~~~-. ....!. ,.... , .y" -) c...:> c~.::'~ '.;::.. (-- ~:; ~'i'" ----:..... ,-"~ '::-:". r-- ~~J, ~.-.-. ~ '->>, --- ...--\~ ('~." "L';. /', ...:..... )7 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) 007315-5 - - -r\ .-' .-- \ \-r\ -0 '.--0: .-..,'1" -- \\._.....) r:-? o dJ --1 AlA Document A 107" - 1997 Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Projects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a STlPULA TED SUM AGREEMENT made as of the day of (In words, indicate day, month and year) in the year ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AlA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AlA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. This Document includes abbreviated General Conditions and should not be used with other general conditions. BETWEEN the Owner: (Name. address and other informatioll) City of Iowa City. Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert SI Iowa City, IA 52240 and the Contractor: (Name, address alld other illfonnation) the Project is: (Name and location) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City. IA the Architect is: (Name. address and other infonl1ation) This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College St. Iowa City, IA 52240 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. o :.;;: _0 J~> = -,~ l""'",.' ~:jo c:..~-) -..J .r__ ".i".,~'" -- #,- -n -0 ---"'cO .'-r-J i I :'--1 '",....I 0_..,.; -7< :;'> . j> r:i> a co AlA Document A107TM -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951.1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 1 Inlt. ARTICLE 1 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 2 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION S 2.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement. if it differsfrom the date of this Agreement or. if applicable. state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) S 2.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. o UJ -.J LL S 2iH'he Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of aDII1mence~t, or as follows: (Inf!Qlnumbe?iif calendar days. Alternatively. a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of cOrQpJencf!!fiDUnless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Co'i1J'p'etid!!j.fjs.rtain portions of the Work.) C) I-: :>-U ~ r:-<J:' , s~ct t~~tments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents (l1fi(tt provi~s, if any. for liquidated dam aRes relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT SUM S 3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deletions as provided in the Contract Documents. S 3.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any. which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other a'ternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execll1ion of this Agreement. attach a schedu'e of such other a'temates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) S 3.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: Description Units Price ($ 0.00) ARTICLE 4 PAYMENTS S 4.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS S 4.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: Inll AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @ 1936.1951,1958.1961.1963.1966.1970.1974.1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion 01 it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extenl possible under the law. This documenl was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 undel Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 2 ~ 4.1.2 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the third day of a month the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the final day of the same month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than forty-five ( 45) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. ~ 4.1.3 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) per annum (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lend;.'f!, Act. similar state and loca' consumer credit 'aws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principl<; places of business. the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect /0 deletions or modifications. and also regarding requiremellfs sllch as written disclosures or waivers.) ~ 4.2 FINAL PAYMENT ~ 4.2.1 Final payment, constituting the emire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 17.2, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond ~l., final payment; and 0 ';:.::. a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. Z (') c:: ~J? ::-~~ ';'::" ~ 4.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuanct'Q(tfie :::. Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follow: :--\ C!. /\ ::-...." '......-,~" -- \~Lj Q:~/, ""? ARTICLE 5 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS j; ~ 5.1 The Contract Documents are listed in Article 6 and, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: .1 .2 -n .- --- :;t.: ,-n --.....-, ',_J .-,:l N .' o CO ~ 5.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Document AI07-1997. ~ 5.1.2 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated , and are as follows: Document Title Pages ~ 5.1.3 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Section 5. 1.2, and arc as follows: (Either 'ist the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of Specifications exhibit: (Rows deleted) ~ 5.1.4 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either 'ist the Drawings here or refer to all exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of Drawings exhibit: (Rows deleted) ~ 5.1.5 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: Inlt. AlA Document A107TM -1997. Copyright @ 1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protect"d by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion of it, may resullln severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software a116:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 3 Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 5. ! 5.1.6 Other documents, if any. forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List allY additiona' documents which" rc intended to form part of the Contract Documents.) GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS ! 6.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement with Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions). Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. A Modification is (I) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. ! 6.2 THE CONTRACT T~contraciocuments form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated alJ8l'ment been the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or ~1. T~ tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be r......., co~ued~,(.-re-~te a contractual relationship of any kind (I) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the "-, OWDtM' an<tro~ontractor or sub-subcontractor. (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons U-\ or enWies ~ an the Owner and Contractor. . tf,! 6.3iE w6a!J. The teTm "W..:J eans the construction and services required by the Contract Documents. whether completed or partialllloomple , .nd in"nde..1I oth" '''''n', ..."ri.l& eqnipment and ""i"" pro,ided 0' In be pro,ided b, the CdJii'ractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. ! 6.4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. ! 6.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE The Drawings. Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law. statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect Inll. AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @ 1936. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reservec:l. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, UnalJthorized reproduction or distriblJtion of this AlA" Document. or any portion 01 It. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum exlent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and Is not for resale, User Notes: (4012397513) 4 and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and oth..:r documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared hy the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 7 OWNER S 7.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER S 7.1.1 The Owner shall furnish and pay for surveys and a legal description of the site. S 7.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. r-..:> c:? c;.::,' S 7.1.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract D@nents, t~ Owner shall secure and pay for other necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges require~tCta.e :;:>: _~.~ --, --";(1' construction, use 0" occupancy of permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. Y" -:> :: 0.: - s 7.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK :::} S-=; --0 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract DO'cu\~nts, ~ or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may iss~1J. r-.:> written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order is eli~ted; ;; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to e~ise U> this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. --r\ -:::: ,"'C\ \ I ....--, . ._,~) S 7.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to perfonn a provision of the Contract, the Owner, after 10 days' written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. ARTICLE 8 CONTRACTOR S 8.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR S 8.1.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 7.1.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, omissions or inconsistencies discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such fonn as the Architect may require. S 8.1.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. S 8.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES S 8.2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety thereof unless the Contractor gives timely written notice to the Owner and Architect that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe. AlA Document A107T1. -1997. Copyright @ 1936. 1951. 1958. 1961. 1963. 1966. 1970. 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute ot Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion 01 it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not lor resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 5 Init. S 8.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. S 8.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS S 8.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat. utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to bt: incorporated in the Work. S 8.3.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict liiscipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. S 8.3.3 The Contractor shall deliver, handle, store and install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. S 8.3.4 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. S 8.4 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted. and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear and normal usage. ~ ~ . SitTAX~~ ThftontIfiJ:"!Qhall pay sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes which are legally enacted when bids are f'.. rec:Ced or~pations concluded. ' l---', '0:.: .-l f--: U-\S 8.~RMfr~ as AND NOTICES 8 8.6~nle~U!(rwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building \J...Per~nd c@~rmits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and comp\eUon of thO'ork. c:::::> - c::> --.I S 8.6.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner if the Drawings and Specifications are observed by the Contractor to be at variance therewith. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes. and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. S 8. 7 SUBMITTALS S 8.7.1 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve in writing and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. S 8.7.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. S 8.8 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Inll AlA Document A107T11 -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reprc-ductlon or distribution 01 this AlA" Document. or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum exlent possible unde/the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 6 ~ 8.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shalI be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching reqUired to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. ~ 8.10 CLEANING UP The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material. S 8.11 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees; shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. unless the Contractor has reason to believe that there is an infringement of patent or copyright and fails to promptly furnish such information to the Architect. S 8.12 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. S 8.13 INDEMNIFICATION S 8.13.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 16.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,. Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work. provided that such claim, damage. loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness. disease or death. or to injury to or destruction of tan~le prop~ (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Cofjl1lactor, as Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be~") ~.t. regardless of whether or not such claim. damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnifi:ea iiepeun<if.. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge. or reduce other rights or obligations of inden'!fittywhictl would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 8.13.:::::; c;~ - _-<...;\ ,- -0 Gi "";'" S 8.13.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 8.13 by an employee of th~~tractor. a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be ~I€~the r:--? indemnification obligation under Section 8.13.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type oi)JQrnages, C) compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, U) disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 9 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT S 9.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract and will be an Owner's representative (I) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one- year period for correction of Work described in Section 17.2. S 9.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 8.2.1. -n - ..- ;-'"1:\ , I ! 'I~ "-",) Init. 7 AlA Document A107TM -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951.1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute at Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyrighl Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution ot this AlA" Document, or any portion at It. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1000262440_t which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not tor resale, User Notes: (4012397513) lJ') '" ~3 Th~rchitect ~ not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perfonn the Work in accordance with the '~ire~tso~~ntract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be l~pon8iWe fofE~r omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other ~rso~r en~~rforming portions of the Work, LJ ~ - <....) l--.. 9 9.4~sed ~~rchitect' s evaluations of the Work and of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Arc~ct w~r~w and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such am~lts, ~ ~ 0 --.;;. 19.5 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. 19.6 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 19.7 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under. and requirements of, the Contract Documents (,n written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect will make initial decisions on all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor but will not be liable for results of any interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 19.8 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 19.9 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 19.10 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 19.10.1 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to this Contract, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Section 15.2, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. Such matters, except those relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Section 9.11 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the matter to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 19.10.211' a claim, dispute or other matter in question relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such matter may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the matter by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. 19.10.3 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their disputes by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event. mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 19.10.4 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to the Contract that are not resolved by mediation, except matters relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Section 9.11 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association and shall be made within a reasonable time after the dispute has arisen. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Except by written consent of the person or entity sought to be joined, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, any person or entity not a party to the Agreement under which such arbitration arises, unless Inil AlA Document A107T11 -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951. 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970. 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA' Documenl is prolec1ed by U.S. Copyrighl Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or dlslrlbution of this AlA" Document. or any portion of il. may resull in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to Ihe maximum extent POSSible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (4012397513) 8 it is shown at the time the demand for arbitration is filed that (I) sut:h person or entity is substantially involved in a common question of fact or law, (2) the presence of such person or entity is required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbitration, (3) the interest or responsibility of such person or entity in the matter is not insubstantial, and (4) such person or entity is not the Architect or any of the Architect's employees or consultants. The agreement herein among the parties to the Agreement and any other written agreement to arbitrate referred to herein shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. S 9.11 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 19. Nothing contained in this Section 9.11 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 10 SUBCONTRACTORS S 10.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perfonn a portion o~e Work at the site. 5 S .z: r- l'...- .......:'"- ~ ) -,:~.. S 10.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor:p'~n as;;;t:. practicable after award of the Contract. shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the ~s of tRe- Subcontractors for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not contract with aniq C~ - Subcontractor to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. If the proposed ~ -0 rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract~J'"halP' be increased or decreased by the difference. if any. occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Cha~oroer ~ shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall not b)jequiredO to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. \D -n - 1"--'- , "1\ ..-. 1\..........) S 10.3 Contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall (1) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be perfonned by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect, and (2) allow the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress afforded to the Contractor by these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS S 11.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under conditions of the contract identical or substantially similar to these. including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner. the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Section 9,10. S 11.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's activities with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. S 11.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. AlA Document A107TM -1997. Copyright @1936. 1951,1958.1961.1963.1966.1970,1974,1976,1967 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA' Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and international Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion 01 it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 9 Inlt. ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK ~ 12.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Such changes in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, or by written Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner and Architect. ~ 12,2 The cost or credit to the Owner from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties or, in the case of a Construction Change Directive, by the Contractor's cost of labor, material, equipment, and reasonable overhead and profit. ~ 12,3 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. i 12.4 If concealed or unknown physical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 13 TIME ~ 13,blime limits stated in the Contract Documents art' of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the ~tractor ~firms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. N v- f"i 13.2Jhe em besubstantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 14.4.2. t--' ...... W ~ a.. ')-=" , 13.3Jf the G~ctor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by changes ordered in he Werk, byJilllriY disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions not reasonably lJ...antic~tabltf.-ti~oidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control. or by other causes which the Architett d~s may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reaso\iillle time@the Architect may determine, subject to the provisions of Section 9.10. = - c--J ARTICLE 14 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION i 14.1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ~ 14.1.1 Payments shall be made as provided in Article 4 of this Agreement. Applications for Payment shall be in a form satisfactory to the Architect. ~ 14.1.2 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, c1ai ms, security interests or other encumbrances adverse to the Owner's interests. i 14.2 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ~ 14.2.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section ]4.2.3. i 14.2.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance Inlt. AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion aliI. may result in severe civil and criminal penallles. and will be proseculed to Ihe maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007. and is not lor resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 10 of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. S 14.2.3 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 14.2.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application. the Archite'. . will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 14.2.1. The Architect may also withhold a Certitic,'lC for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible. including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 8.2.2, because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment: r-' c::::> reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the c@tract S~ zO ~; damage to the Owner or another contractor; Y "::~' 2:: C) - reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and ttra\ <h-e unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticrpa~del~ ,...,..--\ -- or n::::::. N ....;::!- /....... .. persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~ ~ S 14.2.4 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. .4 .5 -n - ..-- .6 '-'-i \ \ \ '---j \ ' ~j .7 S 14.3 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR S 14.3.1 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. S 14.3.2 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. S 14.3.3 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. S 14.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION S 14.4.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. S 14.4.2 When the Architect determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work AlA Document A107111 -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970.1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U,S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA" Document, or any portion 01 il. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extenl possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (4012397513) 11 Inlt. and insurance, and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Architect will submit it to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. t 14.5 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT t 14.5.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, infonnation and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in' the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions stated in Section 14.5.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. t 14.5.2 Final payment shall not become due until the Contractor has delivered to the Owner a complete release of al] liens arising out of this Contract or receipts in full covering all labor, materials and equipment f(\" which a lien could be filed, or a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien. including costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. t 14.5.3 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. t 14.5.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the U'itte of final.Application for Payment. <'J ~ ARmtE 1~TECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY o t 15;.1:SAFm~ECAUTlONS AND PROGRAMS LL.lThef(:ontrac1dr;::8ftall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs --1in C6ftftecti~ the perfonnance of the Contract. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, LLand Sfiall pfpYi~reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: I :;: \::: <( :2 .1 O~loyees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; g.2 rQWork and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein; and "'.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons and property and their protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 15. 1.2 and 15. I .3, except for damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.13. t 15.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS t 15.2.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner Inlt. AlA Document A107T1l-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyrighl Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or 12 distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penallies, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007, and is not for resale. User Not..: (4012397513) and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Anicle 12 of this Agreement. ~ 15.2.2 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors. Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses. including but not limited to atlorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 15.2.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. ~ 15.2.3 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. ARTICLE 16 INSURANCE ~ 16.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located insurance for protection from claims under workers' compensation acts and other employee benefit acts which are applicable, claims for damages because of bodily injury, including death. and claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, to property which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them. This insurance shall be written for not I~ than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater, and';:"::' shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations. Certificates of In~n$i\ (. acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. Each policyilraHJ, contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior w'iitteiiL -:::. notice has been given to the Owner. (2.. ,,-'\ -.......-' "c> .L. \..\ -:.:~ - _\...~') (~).. ':~r:' 4 ~-- ~ 16.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE Y ~ 16.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability insurance under Section 16. I . ..." --~ ...-(l .,;\ .,~,\ ."'-) ~ 16.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. ~j ." o s> ~ 16.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. ~ 16.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability insurance under Section 16.1. ~ 16.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE ~ 16.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance on an "all-risk" policy form, including builder's risk. in the amount of the initial Contract Sum. plus the value of subsequent modifications and cost of materials supplied and installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained. unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who Inlt. AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951,1958.1961.1963,1966,1970.1974.1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribu1ion of this AlA" Document. or any porI ion of it. may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 13 are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 14.5 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 16.4 to he covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor. Subcontractors and sub- subcontractors in the Project. t 16.4.2 The Owner shall file a copy of each policy with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. S 16.5 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION 116.5.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (I) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 11. if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to Section 16.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor. as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article II, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them. by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A \\'aivcr of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwbe. did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. S 16.5.2 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds ruoived by ~ Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require S8btontract~to make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner. '" ~O r'\ AR;'B:LE ij'CC?RRECTION OF WORK l--'j t 19t:-t The actor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the U-J, requi&:eme~-;,he Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or :::::::~ not fabrica~, Installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and U_ins~ion~~mpensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the ConCfcittor's-c!x se. .-- . c:;::J ...-- S 17.~ addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.4, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 14.4.2, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. t 17.3 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 7.3. S 17.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. t 17.5 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Article 17. Inlt. AlA Document A107'" -1997. Copyright @1936. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963,1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of it. may resull in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order NO,I 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (4012397513) 14 ARTICLE 18 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ~ 18.1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other. t 18.2 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. ~ 18.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate puhlic authority, and shal1 bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. t 18.4 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD As between Owner and Contractor, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any al1eged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued: ARTICLE 19 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT r-' not later than the date of Substantial Completion for acts or failures to act occurring prior to the S relevant date of Substantial Completion; -0 t~ not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment for acts or failures~g~p occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to the issuiijei-of the _ final Certificate for Payment; and (,.-\ -. ....- not later than the date of the relevant act or failure to act by the Contractor for acts or failur~'(;lact ~ occurring after the date of the final Certificate for Payment. ::~- \~~\ ~ __ t.) q~/~ ~ ~ 19.1 TERMINA nON BY THE CONTRACTOR ~;. If the Architect fails to recommend payment for a period of 30 days through no fault of the Contractor, or if the Owner fails to make payment thereon for a period of 30 days, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools. and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages applicable to the Project. .2 --\\ -~~~ .1 .3 \,", ',--'. '.-j r9 o ...0 ~ 19.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER t 19.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. ~ 19.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner. upon certification hy the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have and after giving the Contractor seven days' written notice, terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of 4111 materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem ('xpedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. t 19.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 19.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @ 1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1970. 1974, 1978, 19B7 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: Tllis AIA~ Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of Ihis AlA" Document. or any portion of ii, may resull in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (4012397513) 15 Inlt. S 19.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred hy the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid halance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to he paid to the Contractor or Owner. as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this ohligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 20 OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) Terry Trueblood (Primed name and title) r" o , ,,-----, U-\ -.i - u- lr> ('J ~ -::c. 0- (Primed name and title) - 4. 4- ~b 0::- lJ) - ;o--1~ ,~ -;-:: U ":r / \--4 't5~ o - Inlt. 16 - -rr .&'~ .,f".:.!. ....., r0- c:::::> c:.? ,-..J AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958.1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING; This AlA" Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA" Document, or any portion 01 it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under Ihe law. This document was produced by AlA software a116:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is nollor resale. User Notes: (4012397513) Additions and Deletions Report for @ TM AlA Document A 107 - 1997 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AlA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AlA text. Added text is shown underlined, Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AlA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AlA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007. City of Iowa City. Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City. IA 52240 ..-:~ ~C). ~7. "":) ';j~~) :..-' c.' ......\\ --:--:::- PAGE 1 Riverside Festiv.t1 Stage Improvements Iowa City. IA C) r-' ,...:~~/ (. -.'- . - - n "c~~>~ k-c" ...-'t~ :>- t':? o ...p Neumann Monson PC 22 I E. College St. Iowa City. IA 52240 y PAGE 2 PAGE 3 ~ 4.1.2 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the third day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the final day of the same month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above. payment shall be made by the Owner not later than forty-five ( 45) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. oer annum Title of Specifications exhibit: Se6tioA +itIe Page& Title of Drawings exhibit. Nwmbef +itIe Date PAGE 4 Additions and Deletions Report for AlA Document Al07T1. -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, 1 Unauthorized reproduc1ion or dlstribullon of lhls AlA'" Document. or any portion 01 II. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This documenl was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,1000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007, and is nolfor resale, User Noles: (4012397513) PAGE 16 Terrv Trueblood ll? ~ N .. v-> N r-'\ :c CEO L-l . 11 UJ a.. ::J~ r -"" , '-..J __ __I () '~ LL z " '-<( .,,::( 0- "J 6 ~ c::;l = <:-...l Additions and Deletions Report for AlA Document A107TIl -1997. Copyright @1936. 1951.1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1974,1978.1987 and 1997 by The American Institute 01 Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. C"pyrlght Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA'" Document. or any portion 01 il. may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:11 :12 on 01/0912007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not lor resale. User Notes: (4012397513) Certification of Document's Authenticity AIA@ Document D401™ - 2003 I, Kevin Monson, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 16:] I: 12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No. ]000262440_] from \IA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA@ Document A] 07™ - ] 997 - Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Projects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM, as published by the AlA in its software. other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and De]etions Report. (Siglled) (Tit'e) (Dated) ,.....~ .<' S c) 4n '::;;- -::-!. / ( ".,-~ :~ ,,~ ,4~;..- -n -::: c!_ -.:::\ - - \ ::~.... r:-? C,."" J.:>> u:> -c' ~:,. _-t \~.,J AlA Document 0401 TM - 2003. Copyright @ 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute 01 Architects. All rIghts reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" DOCllment is protected by U.S_ Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution ollhis AlA" Document. or any portion of it. 1 may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted 10 the maximum extent possible under Ihe law. This document was produced by AlA software at16:11 :12 on 01/0912007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/112007, and is not lor resale. User Notes: (4012397513) .AlA Document A70f' -1997 Instructions to Bidders' for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, IA DEFINITIONS ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AlA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AlA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. THE OWNER: (Name and address): City of Iowa City, Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City, IA 52240 THE ARCHITECT: (Name and address): Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College St. Iowa City, IA 52240 TABLE OF ARTICLES 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES ~ .' .._0, ):;;--;::; r-' c.~. t...-' --' <..." --\\ 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS ,~w -----' FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR g;:~-: .:-<~ \~~,~-' \ -r- \ ~7~ :P '\...J 6 POST. BID INFORMATION - 'II ..-n _~~ l 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 ~ o \..0 AlA Document A701'M -1997. Copyright @ 1970,1974.1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reprOduction or distribution of this AIA$ Document. or 1 any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3443652186) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS S 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. S 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the C'Jntract for Construction, AlA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. S 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. S 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. S 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. S 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. S 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials. equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. S 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. S 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS S 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 1(1..1.1 The4idder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such ~ume~, ~tfBn relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any. being ~con~gy or presently under construction. (; ,c \.\_3. _..:: '1--\ \.l S f.:r.2 T~)(!!tis made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. ,j-J _ '-. 0 ~ S 2.lj Th~~r has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be \J.- pe~ed ~'!i!s correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract DoclpllCnts. 0 i;;:) -- ~ S 2.1.Nhe Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS S 3.1 COPIES S 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. AlA Document A701T11 -1997. Copyright @ 1970,1974.1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA" Document. or 2 any portion ot it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible unoer the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 1 t/1/2007. and is not for resale. User Notes: (3443652186) ~ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. ~ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. t 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. '3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS '3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. '3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven day: prior to the date for receipt of Bids. , 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. , 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS , 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of requifj3 function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. ""0- ':..;j z ' (.." '3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval ha~\ ' received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall includ,e..t.he::flame::. of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed ~~!!!itution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A stateptetili\ ~ setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the_~.\~f -;..., other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burdeq'jmlof " of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disa~val of ~ a proposed substitution shall be final. '-\\ --:::-:-. ..n "'.--....'\. \--",j , 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. , 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. , 3.4 ADDENDA '3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. , 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. ~ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. ~ 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued. and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. AlA Document A701T.. -1997. Copyright @1970, 1974. 1978. 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U,S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA~ Document. or 3 any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,'000262440_' which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3443652186) ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES f 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS f 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. f 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. f 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern. f 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. f 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." f 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. f 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy ~hall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. f 4.2 BID SECURITY f 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. f 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AlA Document A31 0, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided iUtle BiddilJ:l[Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the b6IllI a certi~ and current copy of the power of attorney. N ::La r--\ f 4Jt:3 Ttl~~!lr will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered i--'\. I \ unfihithei-4f-Die Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time _.1_\ has_psclHo(!!1j1t Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. ..), - 'r G:-f 4.ft&JBM~~OF BIDS f 4.3:PAII c'<$1 f the Bid, the bid security, if any. and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall~enclose a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall tJeidentified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. f 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. f 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. f 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. f 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID S 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. AlA Document A701''' -1997. Copyright @1970. 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or 4 any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No.l000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3443652186) S 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids. a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn hy notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time- stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. t 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. t 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS t 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. t 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS _ The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied hy a required bid security or hy r;;;\ other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to '-;,,) r~ection. ~ () "";Z- ';/,\ _yo / t 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) S 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been, submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds avaifa.9:\~', (' The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid- ..--::'~""J.1_ which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. r,....;_ ! ~ t 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise speCifica~ provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. /\\ ./ -;::/ \\...\'"~\ /' /' ^'. ,,;..... ,. ~ (:? ;,p ARTICLE 6 POST.BID INFORMATION t 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request. a properly executed AlA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. S 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. S 6.3 SUBMITTALS S 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. S 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. AlA Document A701™ -1997. Copyright @ 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING; Tilis AlA" Document is protected by U.S, Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document. or 5 any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16;07;12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3443652186) S 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation. has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Hidder's option, (I) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. S 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect ha\'e made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architecl. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND S 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS S 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. S 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Hidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. S 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that honds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. S 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS S 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. S 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AlA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. S 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. S 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AlA Document Al 01, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. o UJ. , -.--l -- u-- - - ~ .d ..-, r-- c:::? c:> c-.l 4. 2" './ 20 rr: ) ~.J-...: -- W- '/-, r~ \-:: ",) -- . C) ?- ~ 'r- 4.. O?f o - U"> N N ...,- 0:: AlA Document A701™ -1997. Copyright @ 1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distt'ibution of this AlA" Document, or 6 any portion of iI, may result in severe cil/i1 and criminal penallies, and will be prosecuted 10 Ihe maximum eXlent possible under Ihe law. This document was produced by AlA software al 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,1000262440_' which expires on 1111/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3443652186) Additions and Deletions Report for C1i! TM AlA Document A701 -1997 This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AlA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AlA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AlA text. Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AlA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007. PAGE 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City. IA City of Iowa Citv. Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City, IA 52240 Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College St. Iowa City. IA 52240 PAGE 6 r"'"] ~-~. _.J 7~:j U ~~0,,\ -),~... -' ' - - -.\\ ~~; ~-.::: ,-n '~1 \,j ~\Io.:,.., -0 ~. C" _.'\ --- -' ~ (2 )-, L"';1" .~:- y ~ o \oD Additions and Deletions Report for AlA Document A701T11-1997. Copyright @1970. 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or 1 distribution of this AlA" Document. or any portion of it. may result in severe> civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,l 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3443652186) Certification of Document's Authenticity A/A@ Document 0401 ™ - 2003 I. Kevin Monson. hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 16:07: 12 on 01/0912007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 from AlA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA@ Document A 70 JTM - 1997 - Instructions to Bidders. as published by the AlA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report. (Signed) (Title) (Dated) -;.::; \~ . ~~~?:- C~, -~',>... -- - - --"\\ -- ~-- ..-,"-'''' " '-. -0 -'-.'''' ~'" -r\ ',,~" \_J \.~ _.~-\ \ \..:.. .-;:", -:-). ~ Cz'/' Z )7 r:-? o \.P AlA Document D4011M _ 2003. Copyright @ 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.s. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA'" Document. or any portion of it, 1 may result in severe civil and criminal penalties. and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law, This document was produced by AlA software at 16:07:12 on 01/09/2007 under Order No,10oo262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3443652186) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT 05.038 A. Project Name: Riverside Festival Stage Improvements. B. Owner's Name: City of Iowa City, Iowa. C. Architect's Name: Neumann Monson Architects, Iowa City, IA. D. The Project consists of the construction of a men's and women's restroom with attached open-air shelter. Also included is a concrete pedestrian path. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form. 1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. 1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Do not obstruct roadways. sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. C. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 6 ~~j r......;,. ('::,.:l ~ .--' ~ " - ~C._'~' .<.::.r \ \, ;~~ _:.'c .....~/lo.... ~::>" "'-- )7 SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1 --n ..-' --.---- . --_1'"-'1 \ \ -n ::;:: '....-; ,,,j N " o ...0 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Change procedures. ... r:;;;:> ~ D <::,:~:' :q~O\ 'r ::\7/} "'.., I "",~ .. r () ('-. ...c, -:')'-':'~;::. ~,v ~~~;/.::J~ k--7 y /(\ "?~ \~ , , ..,./. ) ......- SECTION 012000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. ~ ~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period, monetary values of unit prices. B. Document 00 5215 - Agreement with General Conditions. C. Document 007315 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AlA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Present required info'rmation in typewritten form. C. Form: AlA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AlA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. D. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. E. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. F. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. G. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. H. Include the following with the application: 1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 2. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AlA Form G710. B. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a document, signed by Owner. instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ..::r N N Change Order. 1. The document will describe 'changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. C. Proposal Request: Architect may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 7 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 1!if.. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. ~ Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: ~ 0 a. Origin and date of claim. ::\C t:b -- b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. a... ~ r c. Time records and wage rates paid. U ~-; d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts. similarly >_ 1.....- documented. :i b<::r: For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after ;; 0 ~ completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. ~ G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AlA G701. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. E. F. (", t--l UJ I -' LL I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contingency allowance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures. 1.03 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.04 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE A. Contingency Allowance: Include the stipulated sum of $5.000. PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION. NOT USED END OF SECTION o 3:0 -;7 ::.:'\ .--' ,:::; ':.-J (- -,~..... -- - r, -Z ALLOWANCES 012100-1 \\ .~-::::.: .\"\ -0 .,...'-1 -,."vI' -~ ''-., ..J N " - o Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. ~~ ~ & (:-:,;., 00 ':;> ~, ,"'>\ ./ _C..,"II", / t) /- ,..0 < ,j., '~-.' . \<' ~ -/.....--\)" f/-)'~J- ,// -'-? 7 PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, , and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 1 /'(\ ~. \..-1"\ \ ',.A (j ("~ ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 LL 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B. Within 20 days after reVh3W of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: ~ 1. <tProduct data. 2. ~hop drawings. N ~ (:Samples for selection. ~ ~ --Samples for verification. .... _..J.... - -6. Si)~it to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with ii;lfdFFflation given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. ~. ~s will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. $. Afte~view, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES c-.....I article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. r-\ ...- LL\ -j 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AlA Form G810. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. I. J. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. ~-) Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promp!1y report:; any inability to comply with requirements. (.2 -.J -:":""" C) L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. -~; ,- !":.: -n K. END OF SECTION \,- ) -.. t---".:. " .' I"_.~ b: ;.."'. :::'l </' <- ):> -0 'T1 i-I \...../ ~~ c::> ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 014000 . QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance submittals. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection services. ?, o (.;.' --?'"\ '<.~" , '-1'_ /\ '~;;/ ""Z~ ,-;/ " ....- --;/' /",./._. ./ C) ,'., ....0, /' '-' \"~... "''':<f!' ../')- \,/(' ./' ...~-'," ~ ""0 /(\ ;;/ '.-<\ '......." '-' ......, ; .'" />" /)"r ....;::." 7 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test reports are submitted for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM 03740 and ASTM E329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Iowa. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program. under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 2.02 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, .:3' f1aeaings, seals, and finishes. N 72- c:..c. ~pted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. (.....\ 0: - i-J, ~. ~~ mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification UJ ["~ns to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so. I - C.... cE 2.0~O~CES ~. ~r fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable S WorQ Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. <::;) a Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 2.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 2.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect. it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION r~;) ("':_.~ 2:> --' t...... ~ .~-Q ')7 :_\ (j -::.\ / ::~ 'rrl g~~ ;;- -'-- ::P 11 - - --- ,..-- ,--n -0 --<~,. -"!... ,,,---\ , j \.-...,,'" f':? - C> QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telephone service. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. '~ ~/> 9' r'1't- ./ ./ ..<>, ":,~.,,,, /. h- Q.,o ~--""'_.:> -y /~L () (-', ~.../.'";',., '/- '..(;> /;:, ~:~ .~ -y H. Project identification sign. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. Existing facilities may not be used. C. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. 1.03 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1.05 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 FENCING A. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.07 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. B. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. C. Existing parking areas located at site may be used for construction parking. 1.08 WASTE REMOVAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1 ...-(\. // (' '\ ., ''\ \ Af'",...' \~~) ~ ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.09 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION. NOT USED END OF SECTION ..:3' N N :c 0- o UJ _J -- U- z ..a: ....-, ..-- = C::l c-J ~ ~.c. ~O ('"'~ -.-- iI' ,:,j>:- CJt:: '_,_C) \:::4. 03- o -- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 2 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ~q\ y ,:..- 05.038 r?-, C/o, ':;::.> /\'\ t~;;? /;/ ,;~/ \, \ ~ ,/ .... / :. \/. .... '(" ) ...0 '- 'f ~ "0 (J, -"~ ._/)>/ >'...'\S . .... /)-J- '(:}7-' ':t- )7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART1 GENERAL 1,01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.02 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts. maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities speCified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings. product data. and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contrartor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING LL A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of ~ surr~nding areas. CO.' RJ;o~t1y inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are :c lfli)f&2t, and products are undamaged. a.. W E. ~Ytae equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, ~~~rement, or damage. "J- 3i ~e for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically ;2 ~. = 0 3.0$STORAGE AND PROTECTION ('j UJ 1 -~ A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled. enclosures in an environment favorable to product. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. E. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. I. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL r:.:l" 'b :/ D. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. -6 ~0\ "':',-:-.\'7 ./'''' .-/_u (1, (-, / \ \~~ :' ~i_ ,>:\ - '..--() st/~- .?-" -y (~, ~/ ", ./ .-<) ~ ~ '?" .,-(\ . , .~) '-- 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Surveying for laying out the work. C. Cleaning and protection. ~ ", o 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data. warranties and bonds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Iowa and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling. submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. B. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service. such equipment. Coordinate space requirements. supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for D. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual speCification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to ...::r minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. N ~ ~ V~i~hat utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct o ::c I~@ns. lJ..J 'F: P~ptE> Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements ---1 sutJj~ to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, U z a:ss~ conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means - ...a:; ~', ance of existing conditions. '"'"') 0 3.0QREPA TION <= - A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and layout by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil piacement; EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 H. I. utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. Periodically verify layouts by same means. /..; Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresse~:. (I r~.~ ;;;",.') -~ c/." ~ /,/ 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS C' A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer'S-; \ instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for /-- replacement. i ~." B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated'7 C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. -:::~ -~O" ;~-,)_ /' /' ..<', ../ ..,. \ ... -"'" ',-) ~<, .' ....' (/ D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris. and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary. obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.08 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 3 r~ I_J W. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. E. F. G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.09 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. D. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. E. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. F. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. END OF SECTION ..::t N N x: 0- <!. ::2" v02 ~ ..J LL- L.u ..... _ ....J /"" (~) t= ... C) /- '-4:. t5~ Q _..t - LL "Z ~ --, .-- = = (-.../ EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ('_.~_\ 'c~ t ".'" ~ .-# PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~, U/(; p~ ~~ --;~',~-': ',- <',," p ,/ ,/ , (\ A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. .....,~'''-l<- ; !, t -;(~_'I ~ 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 3. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 1 /.,\. .' ,r'.~ // \/.\ , ....'\ <:" ) ....~..... /\ ~~ '0 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. END OF SECTION ..::r N N :'C 0- n 'i--\ u..\ _i -- LL Z -4 -, ...- <= = c-I <( ~~ CL-- uJ _ ...J :,.- Ut:= , C: r c=:<C 03: Q CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ..;) .~ ,oJ) ...~':...) A. Concrete formwork. /C" ,,(\ <:!;::;":/ - B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete foundation walls and footings. D. Concrete reinforcement. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 033513 - High-Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 117 _ Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; 1990 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 211.1 _ Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight. and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). C. ACI 301 _ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. D. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. J. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. K. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2006. L. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. M. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. N. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. O. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. P. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1 /:-\ \ / .// ", ,/ \.<\ "., ./\. '..-) .....<:'. ...." -"~ \~ '0 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Q. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005. R. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. S. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. T. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. U. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a. V. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. W. ASTM 0 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accorQance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of AC1117. .3B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with suffiCient strength to ('oJ wi&tand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. N -..}. :2Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Steel. (-...., x: if garth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations L--l 0- uJ ...,;hat maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms. LLI ~ t:form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with _J " Upplication of coatings. LL ?i ~ <form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete -") O~rface. 2.0~EINFdR?cEMENT c-I A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6. 3. Wire Gage: W 4 x W 4. C. Reinforcement Accessories: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.q38 ~~., ), ,.~..> Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. -() ',' Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate SUp~f\ ./ ....0"'.",/ " " reinforcement during concrete placement. / . ,- ",. /'" C /.. ...- \ 1. 2. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Chemical Hardener: See Section 03 3513. B. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, white pigmented. 1. Acceptable Products: 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. B. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Cement Content: Minimum 525 Ib per cubic yard. 2. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 3. Total Air Content: 5 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify proper installation of vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 3 /\,\ /" /'."~.~' \,_/.~..\ . _/\ . ~. ) "'''. ,._, ~ " "'0 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Separate interior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with approved bond break material. E. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install construction jOint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Se~p to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. Ma,~' in records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, ~st samples taken. ~~concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction j~~ 5~ interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. Pla<€fJoor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 1/8 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 3/16 inch in 10 ft. ..I. N H 0 ~. ::c UJ 0- j ....tl. -' U_ :z ~ ai <= c...., K. L. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of Section 033513. C. D. L In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1: 1 00 nominal. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. ..., CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an independent testing agency to perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with testing agency. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up. repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION r-.) , Y:,O, (. .)-' - --, "\ "..-.~- ",1 'r--:-'1 \ . \ r-j ,-_........ r~ ":"-.:;:0- )? - o CAST-iN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 033513 - HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finishing slabs on grade and monolithic floor slabs. B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener. I,.:~ ,v'\). /'/J' ~. '-./\ 'I.~I/") '- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: joints and joint devices. C. Section 033900 - Concrete Curing. D. Section 079005 - Joint Sealers. ~ .f ,,",, ?(~\:2'. ~.'~ Prepared concrete floors ready to receiJ~\~Q. r~1 .,' ".,.., ,'- " Control and formed expansion and contrac!iol\""\ " /",.". c~ 'C),I' ,.....- ~ 0 7 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 _ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on concrete hardener and sealer, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations. C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing. B. Take appropriate precautions to prevent staining of concrete floor surfaces. Since no satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum and rust stains from concrete, comply with the following: 1. Cover and protect floor surfaces from damage and staining during the construction period. 2. Ensure that construction equipment. particularly components that may drip oil, hydraulic fluid, and other liquids. are provided with suitable diaper. 3. In addition to diaper, equipment such as pipe cutting machines shall be placed on suitable drop cloths. 4. Do not permit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above the floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished. HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033513 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. C. Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS A. Chemical Densifier / Hardener: Penetrating, liquid type. 1. Basis of Design: "Liqui-Hard" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Other approved products: a. "Day-Chem Sure Hard" (J-17) manufactured by Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. <( b. "Sonneborn Kure-N-Harden" manufactured by Degussa Building Systems / 3: Chemrex; www.chemrex.com. N :::::: 0 c. "Euco Diamond Hard" manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company: r-.... :c '-l., - www.euclidchemical.com. W 0... d ~d. "L&M Seal Hard" manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: -.l . " www.lmcc.com. - :>- Ue. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. U_ x t=<C p& 3 exlCUTION r- 0 3.~EXAMIN'ATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. ..:r N 3.02 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R to achieve the required "flatness". B. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, or terrazzo finish system. C. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting or resilient flooring. D. Steel trowel surfaces that are scheduled to be exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces within 2 feet of drains uniformly to drain at 1/8 inch per foot nominal. 3.03 CURING A. Begin initial "moisture curing" of floor surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03 3900 - Concrete Curing, as soon after final troweling as concrete is firm enough to work on. B. Exception: Do not "moisture cure" concrete scheduled for application of chemical hardener; follow manufacturer's recommendations for initial curing. 1. As soon as concrete is hard enough to walk on, apply one even coat of curing compound and hardener; follow manufacturer's directions. Use "MED-CURE" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 3.04 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Preparation: 1. After initial curing (7 days minimum), measure floor surface to verify levelness and flatness complies with required tolerances. 2. Polish and clean floor surface: a. Using a heavy commercial floor burnishing machine equipped with an abrasive pad (3M or similar type pad), thoroughly polish floor slab until smooth surface, free of ridges and trowel marks, is achieved. b. Following polishing operation, clean concrete surface with neutral pH cleaning HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 03 3513 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 agent and clear water. Wet vacuum residue and allow surface to dry. B. Apply hardener to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Ensure floor surface remains wet during entire application and soak-in period required by manufacturer. 2. After soak-in period, wait for surface to become slippery then flush entire surface with water; remove excess material using squeegees and wet vacuum to remove all residue. 3. Apply second coat of hardener to floor surfaces scheduled to remain "exposed". 4. Following application of hardener, reinstall protective covering and retain in place for at least 90 days. Do not allow surface to become stained or damaged. 5. Prior to application of subsequent finish materials, polish floor surface with heavy commercial floor burnishing machine equipped with abrasive pad. a. When floor is scheduled to remain exposed, continue buffing until surface aquires a satisfactory "satin" sheer,. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Provide an independent testing agency, approved under provisions specified in Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, to inspect finished slabs for flatness. B. Measure flatness of slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R; identify areas that exceed the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation of surface flatness for interior concrete floors: 3/16 inch in 10ft. 2. Maximum variation of surface from true floor plane: plus 0 inch / minus 1/4 inch. C. Correct the slab surface if conditions exceed tolerances specified. D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Apply 2 coats of chemical hardener to exposed concrete floor surfaces. END OF SECTION - ') L~ #-~; r"J :'~*~.;" ~~-. . ( .,~ --;\ .-r:: (; - ,_0- - - ,-j r";..\::":'. '...~ /' ~:: t;'? -- y o HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 033513-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 033900 - CONCRETE CURING ',/ <./, t') c.';J. /) .. p/ . ,', / ,/<...' /.;' ~')/ /:.. C'" A ; i ' '~t"! ',/' C::/ ' ..,. ",' " - ,"\.- /' ;;'" ~.>, '\:. /\'\ /'~ // <. ~/~:\ '/' <.,---) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 03 3513 - High-Tolerance Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 _ Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R _ Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. ""'::-,,.'/-;....a 1.....-;.... I .I~..? ..--' :-r ,. '0 C. ACI 308R _ Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. D. ASTM C 171 _ Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003. E. ASTM C 309 _ Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds and moisture-retaining sheet, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 2 - White pigmented, Class B. 1. Dissipating resin type. 2. Provide "L&M CURE R-2" manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171. 1. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet. weighing not less than 10 ozlper linear yd, 40 inches wide. 2. Other acceptable products: a. "Transguard 4000" manufactured by Reef Industries,lnc. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION CONCRETE CURING 03 3900 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3.02 INTERIOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES. MOISTURE CURING A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, moisture cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. B. Absorptive Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in damp condition for 7 days, and retain in place thereafter to help protect surface from staining and soiling. 3.03 EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES. MEMBRANE CURING A. Comply with additional requirements in Section 32 1313 for concrete paving. B. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3.04 FORMED SURFACES A. Cure vertical surfaces with forms in place for 7 days unless specifically approved otherwise by Architect. B. If Architect permits removal of forms after 3 days, cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308; begin immediately upon removal of forms. 1. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days. 2. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. a. Exception: Do not apply compound to surfaces scheduled to receive subsequent application of waterproofing and finish coating materials. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION ~ N N '::C 0- Cl LLl ..-J - LL :;z: ..ct -") r- = = c-J <C. ~ ~O 0:-' ~~ I,,~j ;._":'"~ . U r- \~ G'( G~ o - CONCRETE CURING 03 3900 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 040511. MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. B. Grout for masonry. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS " .;> t} 1:~9> / 'i: (... ....,(\ / /' ...... ( .\ .~~ '(;~) ~ . .-,,' (:";.- / ", ", ^'. A. Section 04 2002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. B. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland.:ement; 2005. D. ASTM C 207 _ Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. E. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2005a. F. ASTM C 404 _ Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2004. G. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinfor,ed Unit Masonry; 2006. H. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2005. \: -,../\. ) .,(~:~.~(- ~+ \;~ /0 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C 270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. C, Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C 270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C 780. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 040511 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal; standard gray color. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 1. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 2.04 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1 . Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.05 GROUT MIXING ~. Mi~out in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PAI:lJ' 3 ~~UTION 1'; 3.0~Rd!f~TION U~ -A. ~bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. --' - Ci U- ::;8. ~9::f!ean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist ~ ~~ut pressure. 3.0~STAL~TION c---J A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 3.03 GROUTING A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of contract documents. B. Low-Lift Grouting: MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 04 0511 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 1. Limit height of pours to 12 inches. 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours. C. High-Lift Grouting: 1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 01 4000. B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 procedures. C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures. END OF SECTION 1'-' c'.... (2 ~~) '::-, r_._ - .-, ~-~\ ::'~ ,', ::,5~;.:.. "-:''' )7 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 04 0511 - 3 -\\ -;:.--- ",'-, "\ \ 1 -., '...---""1 \_.,) ':"~~: t';? o Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 042002 - SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. "\ {... '~ r '... '-;.> /-' <;Ji::. (\ ~-'~? "," ) I' ' ("./ . '\--?~ ...<\ ~;/~ \/\ \. \ /~. /' ,/ B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. C;,(> ('" \~" <~ \ ... '/'-. '" , . ) '-- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: masonry. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. D. Section 089100 - Louvers. Mortar and grout for single wythe un;.(" ,; /- '_./.." ~;... ~~ ~....- '-'7 ':~ ,,-- ./ E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2005a. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006. F. ASTM C 90 _ Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006. G. ASTM C 744 _ Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 2005. H. ASTM 0 226 _ Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for concrete masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1-1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; ;3 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. B. Building Paper: ASTM 0 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt. C. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. .3 PAR!9 EXE~TION ()t01~XA~ION LL! 9r. ~fy.that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. I - ()f"- --' -&- vjri0hat related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. LL :z :Sj "8~hat built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.0~REPAOTION c-.s A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. I.' Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry ~Jaid. SP.?ce anchors at maximum of 24 inches horizontally and 16 inches vertically. C}" c/ ','.,. ',:! -:. ')' -- -- ~'r\ .....:.- 3.06 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. ,', \., ~' -' , -'\ n\ ...-"" \ ..~-, -''''\. ',.--"'''' \_/ B. C. Install lintels over openings as detailed. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. -,~;, .":~ f -' --/..... .....,-~. ,.' .. :.:::: r-;-? 3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Lap splices in reinforcing bars by minimum 24 bar diameters. B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. .)7 -- - C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9005 for sealant performance. 3.09 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 3.10 TOLERANCES SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. C. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.11 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION -;;::.. 4'~ 4- ~ ~O 0--:-- \ \J - '~/- -r )\-- ~\G ."Y (::4 O~ Q. (f") C'-l ~ -- - 0- r'\ ::l.~\ \.1.\ .-i - \J..- - - --) G = ,oJ SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04 2002 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 055000- METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles. sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS. STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Shelf Angles and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of beams; prime paint finish. 2.03 FINISHES. STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. B. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. C) ~-:C) c.. 2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. i Cj ....,"' --f'j r~~--- , ~~<~ -0 r'T1 -"":\'.~ --.:,",... , . \......J ,.-, ~~ ~ N METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1 (~, I~ \ \ \ ~ .. --' - u.- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION C') N N ..".- 0: 4. '2: ;t,6 0::- \ . \ - ~(: C';e, ,..... (--- 4 G~ Q - - ~ ---? ~ METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES f-' (-''"'1.... ';.:> /\\ ~ \/'\ \' \ \ ',_ c"'" ) / A. Built-up structural beams and columns. B. Roof sheathing. C. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. D. Wood posts and trim boards. E. Steel connectors and fasteners. F. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. t.~ !,. () /?[;.~;~'> ,. :- ~/ ", y ...... "...... #>".0-;1' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AFPA T10 - Wood Frame Construction Manual; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2005. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. F. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, 6x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1 000 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 D. Small Beam Framing (2 x 8 through 2 x 12): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch. 2. Grade: No. 1 & Btr.. 2.02 EXPOSED TIMBERS A. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry (20 percent maximum). B. Surfacing: S4S. C. Species: Western Cedar. D. Grade: Select Structural. r-' '8 ~ 2.03 EXPOSED BOARDS A. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry (15 percent maximum). B. Surfacing: Rough. C. Species: Western Cedar. D. Grade: No.2, 2 Common, or Construction. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: APA Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as follows: 1. Span Rating: 24/0. . 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. ~Q (- zO, ~ -V ---) ,- -A_ - () - :::~ 0 ::~ h:. ~ 5~ Z 7'" -(\ -;:::::: '\ '\f\ '...-1 ',,-) ~ rV c...:> B. Sheathing for ceiling application: T-111 plywood, Douglas Fir. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Connectors and Anchors to include: a. Simpson CB 66 Column Base. b. Simpson PC 66 Post Cap and End Post Cap EPC 66. c. Simpson H2.5 and DTC Truss Clip. 2.06 FACTORYWOODTREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1 000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes. fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Ceiling Sheathing: Secure panels perpendicular to truss members, with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. 1. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 2. Nailor screw panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels perpendicular to framing members. with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. 1. Use sheathing clips between roof framing members. 2. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 3. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION o .2; ':..-:~i '..- -r':7 ~.' _.\.\ _.,.~ I~' \., j :::::--=i -n . ;~'1-\ -" \-..-J .::..'..-. \ ;"~' n -;~:'~ '-:"':: /........ :z: ~ -~ t;? ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1 000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART1,GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. B. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002. C. TPI1 _ National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Truss Plate Institute; 2002 (ANSI/TPI 1). D. TPI DSB-89 _ Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute; 1989. r?, ( "" '~;> 0:, ..-'<'\ /:... ':' .,~'" ,/ ',' \ ,/ \. '/" :- ) ........:"1 ,,_..' ..-;:. Q/() .t~(7 ~/;', -',~.~ , 0.- ('.~..) " \ .,,--,... -; ;~:.(S\ t;;i- ~. ~ ~ / ~/ E. WWPA G-5 _ Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria. B. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: 50 Ibs/sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors, cambers, framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing. 1. Include identification of engineering software used for design. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with TPI 1, TPI DSB-89. and BCSI1. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with BCSI 1. B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1 Species: Pine. 2. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 3. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as required. C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking: Softwood lumber. S/P/F species, construction grade. 19 percent maximum and 7 percent minimum moisture content. B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. C. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel. D. Anchors and Clips: Simpson H2.5 and DTC. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION o ~O J;> -=:~. o =40 .:<~ 5~ ~......... '""- '):P' r-;) = = ~ <- ". :z: A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1; maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Place permanent bridging and bracing. E. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum, from true position. END OF SECTION SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06 1753 - 2 -0 -:;l: ~ N CoW -n - \ \-n tJ , ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 072400 - DIRECT -APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Direct Applied Finish System applied directly to concrete masonry units. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042002: Concrete masonry unit backup. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood trim. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall and soffit joint patterns, joint details, and molding profiles. C. Product Data: Provide data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, and system limitations. D. Verification Samples: Submit actual samples of selected coating on specified substrate, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating project colors and textures. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation required, installation techniques. and jointing requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain copy of specified installation standard and manufacturer's installation instructions at project site at all times during installation. ~, Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this sec@.p with minimum five years experience. ::Z:. '.',. -\ '\ B. .> --- r(' '. "'i" \ \ \ ..-' '......) 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 5' x 5' on actual substrate. B. Locate mock-up as indicated on drawings. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original. unopened containers with labels intact. Inspect materials and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. ("--) .~ ' --' '\ --- r:? - - B. Storage: Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90 degrees F. 1. Protect Portland cement based materials from moisture and humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not prepare materials or apply finish system during inclement weather unless areas of installation are protected. Protect installed finish systemj areas from inclement weather until dry. B. Do not install finish or sealants when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM 07 2400 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Project design is based on 'Stuc-O-Flex Perma-Flex System' as manufactured by Stuc-O-Flex International. B. Substitutions: See Seciton 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforcing mesh: Balanced open weave fiberglass reinforcing mesh, treated for compatibility with other materials of the system. The fabric shall not be less than 4.4 oz per square yard. B. Base Coat: Fiber reinforced 100% acrylic polymer modified cement base coat. C. Finish Coating Top Coat: Water-based, air curing. acrylic or polymer-based finish with integral color and texture. 1. Texture: Medium. 2. Color: To match existing ticket booth color. D. Water - shall be clean and potable. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Joint Compound: type as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION. GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is sound and free of oil, loose materials, or protrusions that could interfere with finish system installation and is of a type and construction that is acceptable to finish system manufacturer. Do not begin work until substrate and adjacent materials are complete and thoroughly dry. B. Verify that substrate surface is flat, with no deviation greater than 1/4 in when tested with a 10ft straightedge. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged. B. Remove excess and waste finish system materials from project site. C. Clean finish system surfaces and work areas of foreign materials resulting from finish system operations. END OF SECTION ~ ('oJ N 'S: 0- r"', ''-"' lL\ _\ - U- ~~ ..... ~.o.t -'j r- c:::> = c-.I <( ~3 r-rQ UJ---.:- ,-'/ ( .., 1--- "".J ..- .0 ;~.- \--::<C 03? o -,- DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM 07 2400 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES .. r.-.., (, .- -) Co;'> PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing. B. Section 06 1753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM 0 225 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules; 2004. f~ t"''; .~:;,.~\ I"~ "",,/-~. (J, /;,\ r, :~L. <~>\\ /. >'~~ '0, -/- .?--" ~:..., -y B. ASTM 0 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2005. C. ASTM 04586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 100 sq ft of extra shingles of each color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 3. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SHINGLES A. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM o 3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Weight: 245 Ib/100 sq ft. 2. Self-sealing type. 3. Style: Square, three tab, 12 x 36 inches. 4. Color: To match existing. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 1 /" /' /,\ ..-:/" \ /'\ ';::~)'l "'_/ "'<J, .... ,-,~ " ~ /' ", {"'\ 'L-1 UJ ~ - LL Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Underlayment: No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic felt underlayrnent, complying with ASTM 04869, Type 1. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM 04586, asphalt roof cement. C. Ridge Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather entry; flanged to receive shingles; ShingleVent II manufactured by Air Vent Inc. D. Eave Vent: Prefinished, perforated aluminum vent strip: 2" in width. 2.05 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge and gable edge. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.02 INSTALLATION. METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES ~ A. W.,rther lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. N B. ,Jl~S Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic i~.@ent. :c CD 3.6'3- IN~~~ATION . SHINGLES ~. ,~I shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ~ tb: <.:!fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is ..:., O~reater. ~ 2. ~asten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. = ca. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves. C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards. D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. E. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails. F. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting. G. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION '-', ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 3113 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. MMA 2603 _ Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. D. ASTM 04586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating metal finishrolor. 6. <_' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .0.;,. ("-:', )_/' _' ~ ,<l-",_A A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requfre1T\ents :: and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. '.:c;~:\ C;. zf.e. -~ ::' \\"t, .......',~.. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (,-::\-~,-: t;? A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation.'1H6Pe - metal sheets to ensure drainage. )? - B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating. 1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System. MMA 2603; baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled. 2.02 ACCESSORIES -'\ "\ .,.......,. \'\1 .--'-' \....J A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9005. D. Plastic Cement: ASTM 04586, Type I. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1 (\ t__.J uJ \ -' - U- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs. pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reg lets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. END OF SECTION ~ C'J N c:!. v~ c::7-0 U.....-- U-1. ,,..J >-- ( ) \-::', ~b ~4 O~ o - :c- o- - ::;;r:: ~ -) rc; = c-J SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05~8 /\\ /-/ ", '../",\ ", \ /...~. , ) ,,:'I SECTION 079005 - JOINT SEALERS ...-:-'-) C / /'") s:i;;-~;~) ;~ ",..--'- PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES n ..~ ,-". /~/\ ,",:,,,.. A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ;(~} - '~7 '.~ /' ./ </'-~ A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry: Control joints in masonry. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants at metal flashing. C. Section 321313 - Concrete Paving. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. D. ASTM 0 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2000. E. ASTM 0 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005. F. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; current edition. G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples. 1/4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule NO.1168. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Acceptable products: a. Product: "NP 2" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. b. Product: "DYmeric" 511 manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. ("') <c c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. N ~ d. Sealing under thresholds at exterior doors. N ~ 0 e. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. :f _ 0, ~C. ~~ior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; \J-l. "(J) t:Color: Black. _J ::. ~ c..:Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed. - :;;:e:: ~ .e;frovide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use. . U- ~ .(3 ~cceptable products: b @ Product: "Polytite Standard" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. ~ b. Product: "Will-Seal 250" manufactured by IIIbruckl USA. , c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior wall expansion joints. D. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1 . Acceptable products: a. Product: "Tremco 440 Tape" manufactured by Tremco Incoporated. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Non-compression glazing of vision lights in metal frames. b. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. E. Interior Floor Joint Filler: Semi-flexible epoxy; ASTM 0 638; multi-component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Shore A hardness: 80-85. 3. Acceptable products: a. Product: "Joint-Loc 80" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Product: "Epolith - P" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 4. Applications: Use for: a. Saw-cut contraction joints in floors. JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 F. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920. Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: "SL 1" manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A. G, M, 0; single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-ble~g. _ 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. ..::, ( " .,::" / 2. Acceptable products:'7 --) a. Product: "Dow Corning 795" Silicone Building Sealant manufactured by Dqw(.. Corning Corporation ..'..:~\ s" b. Product: "Spectrem 2" manufactured by Tremco Incorporated. ;::1:._ \3.\ c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1~-;7-- Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent. ':.~ Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. Y Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. Applications: Use for: a, Structural and nonstructural glazing of glass, metal and plastic. b. Weatherproofing perimeter joints around metal frames. --\'\ .--' --: /"~ rO, -:,\-. \'\'\ , ..........'. .......) ...... ", 3. 4. 5. 6. ~ ....... ....... 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type. recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM 0 1056, sponge or expanded rubber; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 3 o tL\ \ - -" U- Riverside F€:stival Stage Improvements 05.038 dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. E. F. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION C""> N N 4- :-t.. ~O CC-- " I !..l-'j ~ () t:: -0 .~ C- <4" ~ ---- ........ 03? o - ~ 0- - - ~ ".:!. -, ~ 0:::::::> C.....! JOINT SEALERS 07 9005 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES '!:--9... ",.'", .....;:..> , <,..-:" 'i,. .... \,-/- n ':;:, ~z:. ';.--:\ ,/ -y './- ,/ ,::! (', ..-0 /' ..... ,4,. / A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. , ~.L-"'-(:~;\ ", --Ii ~F' .........../ .?-'/ 7 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A 117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. E. DHI A 115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSIIICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1 /\\ /~ /<"\ \ .,..-'\ () 10....... ~ -," ./ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.02 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Core: Cardboard honeycomb or polystyrene foam. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. C"-l 4:!. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry N / ~ or to be grouted. c:..s ~ Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill r', ~ \...l.) -.:opening without cutting masonry units. \:D, ~ t:-.Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame ~ ::. ")_ c..J1ead, flush with top. u:.. ::~. ~~r Door Frames: Fully welded; 14 gage unless specifically indicated otherwise. 2.0~CCES~RY MATERIALS i:;:::) 1t' Grout for Frames installed in masonry walls: Portland cement grout of maximum 3-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.1 0, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge. corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION ~~~'::; t,:;":; --' o .' ....., 2\-.:, Y ::~) Or" :::::-\- ) .> r~'''' :" ~~;~-,.'\ (-,- -::-.~,1. ,.")>, 4-.,. ..c..:..._ )? --r\ ---'. . ~.'." - .:-r\ -,) -' r:? - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 SECTION 08 7100 ., r:~> c:;, \......,..> -"\\ ,.- ~:/ DOOR HARDWARE '0\ ;;:;::. (>" ~'7 .... / .. ,,/"--- ./ ,," PART 1 GENERAL --<'. -:/" \/:'\ \ \/0.. - 1 ',-/ A. Hardware for hollow metal doors. B. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and gasketing. ('7;;-~" <~~\~) ......:: ./ / .. """\ .h_ 1_// I ~-;;' /;;7 ~ ./ /" 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC Al17.1-American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council 1998. B. DHI (LOCS)-Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990. C. DHI WDHS.3-Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993. D. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. E. NFPA IOI-Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association 2000. F. UBC Std. 7-2, Part II-Test Standard for Smoke and Draft Control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997. G. UL lOB-Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies; Underwriters laboratories Inc. (UL) H. UL IOC-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) I. BHMA-Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. 1. UL (BMD)-Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. January 10,2007 Page I of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section o 1300-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Submittals: 1. List all doors per set with opening number, opening location, hand, fire rating, size and material. 2. List all hardware required for openings with quantity, description, product number, finish and manufacturer. 3. Include any special installation and operational instructions. 4. For electrical systems to include operational instructions, riser diagrams and point to point wiring diagrams.. 5. Include manufacturer's catalogue information for all products listed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier to be company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware. B. Hardware supplier to have a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as full time employee to oversee submittal completion and be available for consultation during course of project. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Installer and supplier to convene prior to commencing installation of doors and hardware for any special installation instructions, as requested by contractor. 1.07 DELIVER, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually, label and identify each package with opening and set number to match hardware submittal. B. Contractor to secure all delivered hardware in a secure, dry location. C. Supplier to deliver hardware to project sight or other locations as directed by contractor. Aluminum door hardware to be delivered to aluminum door supplier as required by aluminum door supplier. N ('J N ::C 0- :;;r.: ..ar. -") ~ 4- ??: ~O L~-- uJ- :..JT ()\-- '- G >- ~- .c( O~ o - ('..... l_J uJ, \ --..,;;, - \J- - - January 10, 2007 Page 2 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 1.08 COORDINATION A. Hardware supplier to verify cylinder type, finish, quantity etc. with any door manufacturer that hardware supplier is furnishing cylinders for. B. Hardware supplier to verify electrical voltage, amperage requirements etc. with electrician, fire alann systems and security systems supplier. C. Conduit and wiring provided by electrical contractor D. Hardware supplier to furnish any templates to door and frame manufacturers and installers for door and frame preparation. E. Sequence delivery, installation etc. To ensure utility connections and security are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. F. Hardware supplier to coordinate keying requirements with owner. G. Hardware supplier to visit project to verify any existing conditions for compatibility with new doors and hardware. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Contractor to retain and turn over to owner any special installation and adjustment tools furnished with hardware. B. Contractor to retain and turn over to owner any installation, adjustment and operational directions that are furnished with the hardware. C. Contractor to turn over all exit device dogging wrenches furnished with exit devices to owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS C) ~?:. ~~~.2 -}~7 __ ( .." '~~ J' -,\ --::: A. Hinges: 1. McKinney (Me) 2. Hager 3. Bommer - - \.~..-\\ c.'C". ::-.:\ -.}. /' ~--'- . ,-. \ -.;) :~t:,:. I "-.'/ -;:~ '-~ ""'=;,.. '"'-- r" .' -- -y - B. Cylindrical Locks: 1. Schlage ND Series, ND70 Function, Rhodes Design. 2. No Substitute. 3. Furnish locks less cylinder. 4. The general contractor is to have Freeman Lock and Alarm, of Coralville, IA furnish and install the cylinders for these locks. C. Push and Pulls: 1. Trimco (TRIM) 2. Rockwood 3. McKinney 4. Plate material to be 1/8" thick stainless steel. January 10, 2007 Page 3 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 D. Closers: 1. Sargent (SA), 351 Series. 2. LCN 4041 Series. 3. Norton 7500 series. 4. Supplier to furnish all drop plates and mounting brackets as required for proper installation. 5. Install closers on side of door for least visibility, unless mounting is required for maximum door swing or to protect from moisture or corrosive materials. 6. Installer to properly adjust all hydraulic and spring adjustments for proper operational of closer and door. 7. All closers to have full plastic covers. E. Protection Plates: 1. Trimco (TRIM) 2. McKinney 3. Material to be .062 stainless steel. 4. Protection plates to be fastened with countersunk, oval head screws. 5. Protection plates to be beveled four sides. 6. Protection plate as noted in hardware sets unless restricted by bottom rail of door. L- F. Wall and Floor Stops: 1. Trimco (TR) 2. McKinney G. Weatherstripping, Gasketing and Threshold: 1. Pemko (PE) 2. Reese 3. McKinney 4. Any weatherstrip aluminum housing attached to metal surfaces to be attached with self drilling TEK screws. 5. Any intumescent fire seals, required to meet UL 10C positive pressure fire testing, to be concealed, furnished by wood door manufacturer. H. Silencers: 1. All silencers for hollow metal frames to be furnished and installed in frame by frame supplier. 2. Silencers are not required at frames that are to have gasketing or weatherstripping installed. N N C'1 ,......, t_....\ U-"\ .-l - LL Z ..:t: -;) r-- = = ("'o.l <.1:: '/~C"" (i:~ u...\-.,...: .-1 " C)t::. 0, Cl C4. O~ o - ~ 0- January 10,2007 Page 4 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Finishes: 1. Dull Chrome (US26D) or Brushed Stainless Steel (US32D) as noted in hard\.Vare sets. 2. Closers painted aluminum in color. B. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and Local Codes. 2. ANSI/ICC AI17.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions ofNFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 80, Fire Rated Doors. 5. All hardware on fire rated doors to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Electrical hardware to be listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 7. Hardware for positive pressure fire and smoke rated doors to comply with UBC Std. 7-2 Part II 1997 and UL lac. 2.03 KEYING A. Locks are to be furnished less cylinder. B. The general contractor is to contact Freeman Lock and Alarm, of Coralville, IA to have all cylinders furnished, keyed and installed by Freeman Lock and Alarm. . C. Freeman Lock and Alarm to obtain keying information from owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware as specified. B. Verify that frames are level, plum and set at correct dimensioned opening. C. Verify that correct wire gauges are provided to supply correct electrical power to electrically operated devices. D. Supplier to visit project sight to verify all existing conditions with contractors representative, as required. 9 ::~::o )>:- ~ r--~" C-,--':) ~~::;.t -J (~ -on r~-'~ -'. \.. J ::-~ (- -') :< ~:~ i [ --- :).' ,) -. 4'/' :P -~""" _;:rt.... --~-1 '; I I ,~_., \._j -n r;? January 10, 2007 Page 5 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 3.02 INST ALLA TIOl\ A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' instruction~. B. Use templates provided with hardware. C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFPA 80. C. Mounting heights of hardware to be per DHI recommended locations and accessibility codes. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardwar.: Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and as specified, as requested by Architect. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth and proper operation. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or other finished products. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE; ATTACHED ('OJ N N ::.c 0... (.::' UJ I ---' - LL z od:. -"") <( ~?-'.$O cc- ::1 :;,.: C.J t= "-..0 ? \::=< 0--"" Q .- = <::::I c-..J January 10, 2007 Page 6 of7 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, Iowa DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 7100 Hardware Sets SET #01 Doors: 101A, 102A 3 Hinge I Deadlock I Pull Plate I Push Plate I Closer I Kick Plate I Wall Bumper I Door Sweep I Threshold T4A33864 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 1063644874 LC 1195-31 X 1809-4 X 3/8" TYPE E FASTENERS 18096 X 20 X 1/8" 351 PIO KA062 12 X 34 X .062 CTK B4E I 270WX 18041 CNB 36" TEK SCREWS 252 X 3 AFG 40" SET #02 Door: 103A 3 Hinge I Clnn Lock I Wall Bumper I Door Sweep I Threshold T4A33864 1/2 X 41/2 NRP ND70LD RHO I 270WX 18041 CNB 36" TEK SCREWS 252 X 3 AFG 40" January 10, 2007 32D 26D 630 630 EN 630 630 32D 626 630 --) C; ~::: O. ).~ :-:~\ (~ ~':"', f"'---, ~--I ... / r ~'-- t:', -....... (:> :-/~;< 4 .:..- )7 MC SA TRIM TRIM SA TRIM TR PE PE MC SC TR PE PE "", __J c_ :;~ #<.\;- - - Page 7 of7 -\\ -,,--- -- '\\ -0 ....,...-...., "-,j ..,..-.0;:,' ..>>> N .. - - 0!1~8 .--0 v;.~ .// '(I. <A\ // \/\ , / ~~ '"- " Riverside Festival Stage Improvements SECTION 089100 - LOUVERS ~~-.. U (J" % ~/)~- I / ....-... .-' L)\C,> ~/_\<'~<'>., .- ,," / /', /.-". /- '-). #;...-? ~/ --y PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Louvers, frames, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening. B. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and frames. C. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Louvers: Project design is based on products manufactured by Greenheck Fan Corporation; www.greenheck.com. B. Other manufacturer's: 1. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOUVERS A. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate mullions matching frame. 1 . Blades: Straight. 2. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side. 3. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch. 4. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating, finished after fabrication. 5. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 MATERIALS LOUVERS 08 91 00 - 1 ~ // Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M),. B. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh. C. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Coating: Minimum 70 percent Kynar 500/Hylar 500 resin, two coat finish, complying with MMA 2604. . 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel. B. Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07 6200. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install louvers level and plumb. C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to exterior. D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners. 3.03 CLEANING A. Strip protective finish coverings. B. Clean surfaces and components. END OF SECTION ,0- .-;". ~ ....-0') '0 ~ 4:. v~ -:.r 0 tJ - \~:3 ~..= i "'\ (:- , \.-- ~" 0 (:.4- G~ Q N N N ~ 0- f--- \_.1 uJ, ~ - ll-- - - LOUVERS 08 9100 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. t~\ c;.c:> ::.> {~'~~ " --I, '--? n 'S~.'':' " {"" r -;,';i~~~~ "",...<>.; ',ry/_ -/:.., --~ -y 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Single-Wythe Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry units. B. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Field painted items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2003. B. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM 0 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for V.O.C. requirements for products and finishes. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 1 /" ,/ ...0, ....:~i',. A'\ .% >'" \./\ . \/', ~._) ~ ,/ ./ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The design of the project has been based on products manufactured by Sherwin-Williams Company and indicated under "Paint Systems" below. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS. GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Provide manufacturer's highest quality product for type of coating specified. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS. EXTERIOR A. MasonrylConcrete, Opaque, Latex, Satin Finish: 4 Coats. 1. First two coats: Heavy Duty Block Filler (B42W46). 43 gll VOC. 2. Two finish coats: A-100 Exterior Latex Satin (A82 series). 112 gll VOC. B. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Urethane, Gloss Finish: 2 Coats. 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. N 2.c::(First coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer (B66-310 series). 110 g/l VOC N 3.3fSecond coat: Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane (B65-700). 66 g/l VOC N v~ ___, ~ MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Urethane, Gloss Finish: 2 Coats. L-J., a... _!..:..I :;.-first coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer (B66-31 0 series). 110 g/l VOC LLJ 2) t:second coat: Centurian Water Based 2K Urethane (B65-700). 66 gll VOC \ - () ~2,0f1AI~\~STEMS . INTERIOR II lSsl~terior systems. 0:::::::> - 2.05~CESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work, Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3,02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra~sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. F. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. G. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign ma~; ~al c- knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exte!1Of:!, . ' calking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces. .'"- H. -'n g,() ;:-"-: ''0\ 3.03 APPLICATION ~' -CJ (-)~ A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ~/--. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is appliJr.' C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. - - ~;:-=-;::.. I. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. ..-0 ?~ 1\"\ ---"), \,-) ~ - - E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop-primed equipment where indicated. B. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete Block: Finish all surfaces exposed to view, except where subsequent finish materials are applied. 1. Interior: CI-OP-3L, semi-gloss. B. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view, except Glue-Laminated Beams. 1. Exterior timbers and trim: WE- TR-S. 2. Exterior wood paneling: C. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-3A, gloss. D. Steel Fabrications including Connectors and Anchors: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, gloss. END OF SECTION .- ~ ..-") 'c; ~ 4.. ~ ~Q (tj-y ;: ) t::: \.~ 1') L..I -;r \_-~ o~ 6 -- N c-J ~ :e. c- (' 'l.--.J u) d \J- - - PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry: Masonry backup. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Santana Products Co., Inc; Product Poly-Mar HD: www.hinyhider.com. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: To be selected. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. 5. Thickness of Pilasters: 1 inch. ?; .....--:. :%;9, r--' c.c' (,;.? ~ (-- - -r, ~ C. Urinal Screen: Wall mounted with two panel brackets. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Brackets: Polished stainless steel. B. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, polished stainless steel. C. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. '::J ::::::.\ :-:" 7::; ....,~/........ ..t:.....,. )7 -0 :3': r-f' ;{~-'l, \...._,) ~ - N PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position. END OF SECTION N 4- N y;~ .. N r:cQ r\ :C \.:1-r= ,'........~ \_', 0- ~ ()t:: - ~O ~ - - ::;:c (--4 L1- A 0-" -> 6 '= - <= c-: PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES ,-3', G~ ~. <:", ".-:,c,'" PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES D ~(! tI!-';7 /-'~ ~--;' //.... )l' /- A. Toilet Room Accessories. C;<;... !-- \;.~ . ~\.;.,.;::. ...j~ I ~?- -;7 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 2002 - Unit Masonry. B. Section 10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCES A. A TBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. B. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2006. C. ASTM A 554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2003. D. ASTM F 446 - Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area; 1985 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected optIons and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. D. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this section, and countersigned by Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Supply locating and sizing templates, and other requirements, to fabricators and installers of products referenced in RELATED SECTIONS Article for building in products of this section. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813 - 1 "" r ;'\\ /'J ,/ ,/ ..<I, .~, ~;;? ~ ~ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Supply reinforcing and anchoring devices required for installation of products of this section to fabricators and installers of products referenced in RELATED SECTIONS Article. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI-American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bradley Corporation, Washroom Accessories Division: www.bradleycorp.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS ~. Sta~ess Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304,18-8 alloy. No.4 satin finish. ..., 2.0NTOI~~CCESSORIES L: ~. fiJie~lIowing accessories are Bobrick model numbers: LLi -8. ~€o- ispensers: Provided and installed by owner. ----l .. ""'. -"' LL ~. @1~ry Napkin Disposal: Model B-254. -;0. 6J~eminine NapkinlTampon Dispenser: Model B-2800-25. g 1. -~rface mounted. All moving parts replaceable without removing cabinet from wall. C"-J 2. Coin mechanism: 25 cents. E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Provided and installed by owner. 2.04 MIRRORS A. Metal Mirror: Stainless steel, Type 304, No.8 mirror finish; 24 x 36 inch 2.05 GRAB BARS A. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 0.050 inch, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; formed 1-1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc-welded to minimum 11 gage stainless steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. B. Grab Bars (GB): Series B-6806. 1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings. C. Grab Bar Snap-on Mounting Flanges: Snap-on stainless steel cover, 3-1/4 inch diameter by 1/2 inch deep, for concealing grab bar mounting flange. 2.06 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES A. Electric Hand Dryer (HND): World Dryer Model A52, surface-mounted. 1. Cast iron housing, single-piece construction, 1/4 inch thick, with acid-resistant vitreous enamel finish. Surface mounted; white color. 2. Operation: Automatic cycle with sensor. 3. Heating element rated 2300 watts (120V, 15 Amps). TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2.07 DIAPER CHANGING STATION A. Diaper Changing Station (DCS): Model B-2210. ~ 1. Surface mounted. 4 inch projection in closed position. .~ 2. Size: 32 inches wide; 20 inches high. 'Q (1. (~:- 3. Construction: ,</ ;". ;" a. Design to support up to 250 pounds. -Y" /,./ ,/ b. Fabricated from polyethylene (grey) with foam core. Full length, concealed, i~) c:", ...0, stainless steel hinge rod. /) ,//\ "),~ c. Pneumatic cylinder for controlled opening and closing. ::';;;-'. ~ d. Equipped with safety strap and multi-size liner dispenser. C);;;- ~ ~~,- -57 /(\ ~ \/\\ \/' ._) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. B. Installer's Examination: 1. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt. 3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Locations for scheduled accessories are indicated on Drawings, quantities listed below: B. WOMEN 102: 1. Mirror: (2). 2. Soap Dispenser: (2). 3. Hand Dryer: (2). 4. Toilet Paper Dispenser: (4). 5. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: (4). 6. Changing Station: (1). TOILET ACCESSORIES 102813-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 C. MEN 101: 1. Mirror: (2). 2. Soap Dispenser: (2). 3. Hand Dryer: (2). 4. Toilet Paper Dispenser: (2). 5. Changing station: (1). D. Waste receptacles, Toilet Paper Dispensers and Soap Dispensers will be provided and installed by the owner. END OF SECTION . N N <( N ~e3 r, x: 0:- L....J 0- WJ~ - Lq ---?= --1 C.J_ . , C) LL -- ~,,;- """- 1-<:( .a; ---.> 03 r- 0 = = c--J TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 2813 - 4 Division 15 Mechanical Systems f~:-~ ___ ':3 Q,.... c- ~'::--...:", ~,:.~~ ~r'l ____-; /'-~"\ :~\~" ?.='" d;/~ ~ '-~;.. / '. .' z )7 - - -'\\ -,....- r-- ;\\ -c) ..-- \. :::;~ \,,-~;) - tv SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 05.038 A&J #200640.~ <0 --;:, !:?' '-'5- /1 ~;f' ~ s:/) ,/ :7 "I- /" (~;}~\~ ~, c,;". / /--;1' 7' ~ ('" ,,<,\ <, \ " /", ( ) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 1. GENERAL ~ ~ 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all materials and labor and all equipment to make complete operating mechanical systems. Place all such equipment in initial operation, make all initial tests to ensure compliance with specifications and their intent, obtain approval in writing from all governing bodies having jurisdiction over this work to ensure compliance with all laws, ordinances and standards in effect. B. Provide all materials and labor to provide utility connections for any Owner furnished equipment. Install any Owner furnished equipment in strict accordance with all requirements of the equipment manufacturers. C. Install all equipment whether Contractor or Owner furnished in accordance with the equipment manufacturer requirements and/or recommendations. D. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide utility hook ups and final connections to equipment specified in other specification Divisions to have mechanical utilities. The Division 15 Contractor shall perform the pressure and leak integrity tests as specified in these Sections. E. Participate with the Testing and Balancing Contractor and the Architect in the overall commissioning of the new mechanical systems. This commissioning effort shall include the adjustment of mechanical system components as necessary for the different systems to function together as intended and participation in the demonstration and "shakedown" operations necessary to "debug" the mechanical system operation. The commissioning effort shall be in addition to any system demonstrations specified to be provided by the Contractor. F. Drawings are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the Work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of the Work. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items such as pipe and duct fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be indicated. Where such items are required by Code or by other Sections, or where required for proper installation of the Work, provide such items. G. Equipment Specifications may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as requiredto meet the equipment warranties. Provide such items where required whether or not specifically identified. H. Provide site utilities including materials, trenching, backfilling and utility company coordination as follows: 1. Provide site sanitary drain piping and structure indicated to be installed outside of the building. 2. Provide buried site domestic water piping. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.2. MEASUREMENTS A. All measurements must be verified from actual observations at the project site. The Contractor is responsible for all his work fitting into place in approved, satisfactory, and workmanlike manner in every particular. 1.3. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS r, 1-.......1 I-L..i -:--..J [J -- A. General character and scope of work are illustrated on Drawings andlor listed in C\J Specifications. Drawings and Specifications are complementary one to the other; whatever C\J is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. <\i :s( ~1.4~~, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS G... I -!;! i...l.J -'~2::0btain and pay for all licenses and permits, pay all fees andlor charges for meters and - ,.j ;::::-associated devices, pay all charges for connection to outside services. Comply with all laws, .~ I.::: (J ordinances, regulations and code requirements applicable to this work. It is assumed that ::: (}::::r: the Contractor is familiar with all laws, codes and ordinances governing his work and that all ~ g work done by him will be approved by authorities having jurisdiction over his work. ~ B. All work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable Laws, Codes and Regulation of the governmental Bodies having jurisdiction over the site. C. Work not regulated by Governmental Bodies shall be performed in accordance with current issues of the following Codes and Standards. 1 . Air Moving and Control Association, Inc. - AMCA. 2. American National Standards Institute - ANSI. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME 4. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM. 5. American Water Works Association - AWWA. 6. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry - MSS. 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA. 8. National Electrical Code - NEe. 9. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories - UL. 12. Local and State Building Codes; Plumbing, Mechanical, etc. 13. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers - ASH RAE. 14. International Mechanical Code - 2003 15. Uniform Plumbing Code - 2000 16. MidAmerican Energy Company. 17. Energy Code for Commercial and High Rise Residential Buildings, ASH RAE 90.1 18. International Fire Code - 2003 D. The Contractor shall have copies of all MSDS sheets for hazardous items used for construction at the job site and shall train personnel in the use of these substances. 1.5. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Final settlement will not be made with the Contractor until the system has been thoroughly checked and found in good operating condition as determined by the Architect and the Testing and Balancing Contractor. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test by Architect's Representative at any and all times. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-2 b Architect shall have right to reject defective material and workmanship and requir~ (),., correction without cost to the Owner. ..~/. / " . 7 /' 05.038 A&J #200640.002, <&> ::-> ~<~ ~i;<~ J. // ..<l, "7 ~ ~ /(\ .;;/ '\/\ \/'. '.. ) ....... Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 1.6. COOPERATION AND PROGRESS f/"~l I", -..;:.;'-::; ., :~-- (>\ // A. Keep informed about the work of all other trades engaged in the project and execute the -(i;."r work in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with the progress of other contractors. '~ This Contractor shall schedule his work so that no other contractor is delayed in the execution of his work. Complete cooperation of all trades is expected. Employ a competent foreman on job throughout the entire project to ensure that coordination is maintained. B. Schedule and coordinate the work of this Division with the schedule of the Contractor to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. C. Examine fully the Drawings and Specifications for other Contractors for other trades, and coordinate the installation of this work with the work of the other Contractors. D. Participate in the coordination of utilities for all areas to coordinate the installation of all mechanical system components with all other trades, including structural and electrical components and electrical trades. Allocate space in the different areas to allow for the installation of ductwork, piping, waste and vents and mechanical equipment above ceilings, in walls and in equipment spaces. Recommend rerouting, resizin9 or relocation of mechanical components, if necessary, so all trades can install their systems in the space allotted. Any proposed changes from the systems layout, on the drawings, shall be done in accordance with the design criteria specified in the applicable codes and shall be subject to the review and acceptance of the Architect. E. Utility installation in congested areas is dependent on the sequence of utility installation as much as it is dependent upon the physical size of the utilities. The contractor shall use the utility coordination process to properly sequence the installation of utilities as appropriate to ensure the above ceiling and congested area utility installation is satisfactory. All Contractors and subcontractors shall participate in the utility coordination process. 1.7. PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect the work from damage or injury by keeping all pipes and waste lines plugged, capped, drained, ductwork sections capped and plugged and all equipment covered or otherwise protected. Damaged material or equipment shall be replaced or repaired without cost to the Owner. All pieces of equipment shall be given suitable protection from injury or damage and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. B. Do not route piping above any electrical equipment unless the piping serves that equipment. When piping is required to be installed in electrical rooms or directly above electrical equipment, provide a corrosion resistant drain pan to protect the electrical equipment. 1.8. SLEEVES AND CHASES A. All pipes that pass through nonrated walls shall have pipe sleeves 1" larger than pipe and pipe covering if covered. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves 1/2" larger than pipe installed of sufficient length to extend 1" above floor line. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Sleeves shall be perfectly plumb and pipe placed concentrically within sleeve; sleeves shall be set during construction. If specifically approved by Architect, sleeves may be set later using carbide tipped hole saws and approved methods of cutting. All MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r'\ l.-- LU _J - LL through penetrations through floors shall be sealed watertight. All ducts passing through non rated walls and floors shall be sealed in a manner similar to that specified for piping. There shall be no unsealed opening around any duct penetrations. B. Sleeves in exterior walls shall be provided with approved waterproofing. Floor sleeves shall be sealed with Permagum or Architect approved equivalent. Piping requiring chases in a wall shall be reported to the Contractor and located so that they can be provided. Failure to provide this coordination will result in Contractor cutting and patching wall to satisfaction of the Architect at no additional expense. C. Non-permanent pipe sleeves may be plastic as manufactured by Spenzel Company to facilitate removal from concrete prior to pipe installation. Verify locations of acceptable use by obtaining approval from Architect. D. All piping and sleeves passing through all nonrated and exterior walls shall be packed in space between piping and sleeve with insulation for full length of sleeve. Calk sleeve air tight at both ends. N N ('oJ E. All piping and ducts passing through fire-rated walls, ceilings and floors shall conform to UL standards and be installed as shown in UL listed details. For piping passing through fire- resistive assemblies, sleeves shall extend the length in both directions from structure as detailed in the applicable UL assembly detail. The piping penetration shall have the equivalent fire resistive rating as the UL assembly indicated. It is not necessary that the penetration be identical to the UL penetration assembly indicated. Firestopping material shall be as 3M #CP25 or Architect approved equivalent. Ducts passing through rated structure <tall meet SMACNA and NFPA 90A requirements for rated structure penetrations. ~ ~eeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation ~ -anS.d to allow for free movement of pipe. ~) aterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing ?= <(ate rial. I-l? iftinished areas where pipes are exposed, terminate sleeves flush with wall, partitions and ~Iings, and extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water. :lC a.. % ...::( -") r-- = c= C-...l I. Pipe to wall penetration closures for underground pipe penetrations shall be: 1. Linkseal by Thunderline Corp. 2. Calpico Pipe Lerax by Calpico, Inc. 1.9. SITE SERVICES AND UTILITIES A. Provide of site sewer lines, and new underground domestic water lines as indicated. B. The site active utilities have been located as accurately as possible, however, the exact location is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall personally inspect such conditions and determine such locations or coordinate the placement of these site utilities with the site utility installing contractor. Variations from locations indicated will not be basis for additional compensation or contract time extensions. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.1 o. IDENTIFICATION A. Every mechanical device, piece of equipment, starter, control panel, furnished by the Contractor which does not have an identifying name plate shall be stenciled to identify its use. Exact identification words shall be verified on jobsite. Labels shall be located as approved by Architect. Labels shall be 1-1/2" x 3", 18 gage brass tags as manufactured by Mechanical Tag Systems, Cedar Rapids, Iowa, with approved printing. The tags shall be riveted or screwed to equipment. 1.11 . ELECTRICAL WORK A. In general, Division 16 will carry service to disconnect and extend wiring to motor starter and then to motor. Wiring over and above this, unless specifically indicated on electrical plans, shall be by Contractor furnishing equipment. % B. A~~ ~Iectrical w~rk done by the Division 15 Contractor shall be done in accord~ ~h ~_ DIvIsion 16 reqUirements. -;:7 ...- .... ---- /.. ---- (\ .. C. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wi~(~t :S. equipment furnished, including control system wiring specified under Section 15950;'<'" '(1\ ;.? Electrical materials shall meet the requirements of Division 16 Sections. r'?'<. ...-j.l ~"? D. Provide motors, motor starters and contactors for equipment specified in Division 15 y sections, except where they are an integral part of a motor control center specified in Division 16 sections. --\\ ....-::;. {..-. \/\\ ,.,../, ',.j t';? ---- tv E. Coordinate motors and mechanical equipment which require electrical services with requirements of Division 16 sections. F. Where motors or equipment furnished require larger services or services of different characteristics or configurations than those indicated, provide material and services to fit the motors or equipment furnished. G. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for channeling concrete block filled, block walls for conduit if required for interconnecting control and power wiring provided for Division 15 equipment that requires wiring by the Division 15 Contractor. 1.12. SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for general submittal requirements. B. Coordinated shop drawings shall be provided on all equipment specified in Division 15 and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections and general provisions of this specification. Additionally, all shop drawings submitted pertaining to major equipment items shall include the particular item(s) intended for installation drawn on minimum 1/4" scale blue-line backgrounds or reproducible mylars indicating sufficient information to ensure compatibility with physical constraints, manufacturer required maintenance and code clearances, and indication of non-interference with work installed by other trades and other work installed by this trade. Submittals not in accordance with the above noted conditions will be returned to the Contractor without action. Any claims arising from delay in construction scheduling due to submission of non-conforming shop drawings will not be honored. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Substitute Items: 1. Following contract award, modified structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical work or redesign required as a result of the Contractor implementing an approved Alternate, or providing substitute or "approved equal" materials and equipment shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Said costs shall be borne in their entirety by the Contractor, unless specifically stated and included as such in the Contractor's bid submission under Substitute Items bid requirements as outlined in Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Substitute items will be allowed only under the conditions specified in the General Conditions and Division 1 of the specifications. D. The Contractor shall not install or fabricate any items without receiving accepted shop drawings from the Architect for those sections requiring submittals. C:J LLl _.J LL N E. Both Division 15 and Division 16 contractors shall provide written certifications that the N ~ectrical services to the mechanical equipment are totally compatible with the mechanical v 3ftluipment. Certification shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative and the Architect 0: @ior to energizing the equipment. LU ("5 ?:the Division 15 Contractor shall submit evidence of having transmitted accepted equipment '.. @op drawings to the Division 16 Contractor for use in coordinating the mechanical and z ,>-- J:!ectrical system interfaces. The evidence shall be submitted to the Architect and the ~ 0 ~wner's Representative. 6 0 ~ 1.13. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS N :t:: Cl- A. Provide Record Documents (As Built Drawings). Refer to Division 1 for specific requirements. 1.14. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide operating and maintenance manuals as required by individual sections. Refer to Division 1 for specific requirements. B. Instructions in Operation. 1. After all tests and adjustments have been made and the maintenance manual has been completed and given to Owner, furnish one or more full-time qualified personnel as necessary to put mechanical Work in continuous operation for a period of not less than one day, 8 hours, during which time the designated personnel's only purpose shall be to give complete operating and maintenance instructions to the operating personnel selected by Owner, and furnish all service necessary for the proper operation and protection of mechanical Work. Fuel, power, and other supplies required during this period will be furnished by Owner. 1.15. USE OF NEW EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION A. All work shall be kept clean and free of debris as construction progresses. Material finishes shall be protected by covers to prevent impingement of corrosive and abrasive elements. Exterior finish damage shall be repaired to original condition. B. All ductwork sections shall be kept clean and free of debris and dust as construction progresses. Individual lengths of ductwork shall have ends capped to prevent the entrance of construction dust, dirt, water and other debris while being stored on site. The interior surfaces of all supply air and return duct pieces shall be wiped clean prior to being installed MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 into the duct system. All duct system openings in unfinished duct systems shall be taped shut or wrapped in plastic to maintain the interior surface cleanliness during the construction period. C. The new HVAC systems shall not be used to ventilate, heat or cool any areas under construction or during periods of interior finishing such as painting. However, the building HV AC may be used for construction period HV AC system start up and check out under the following conditions. 1 . The system operation shall be set up so the maximum air feasible from the space is exhausted. 2. The air balancing of the air delivery systems shall not occur whenever there is system finishing such as painting. 3. Precautions shall be taken to keep control elements such as duct probes protected from dust or vapor damage. If these devices cannot be adequately protected during the construction ventilation process, they shall be removed from the duct system and re-inserted after the construction period ventilation process is finished. 4. Each fan shall be run continuously for 24 hours after the system air balance and all construction have been completed to "flush" all dirt from the duct system. 1.16. OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.17. CONCRETE WORK A. Refer to Division 1 for cutting and patching requirements. ~ B. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for cutting openings in existing walls, f1~ or ceilings for piping and duct penetrations in these structures. Patching shall Sf.3~ch ~ adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in~O/ ~ respective craft required. ;/~} ~ (..-~\ -- ~ '/!:;. (; ~. . ) '( /, ....,.. :- \)> ~ <., 2;:::.. .' '-.-7 I ---- 'k- ~ B. Concrete equipment bases, retaining walls and equipment pads for all floor and grade Y' mounted equipment shall be provided and installed by the Division 15 Contractor. --"\\ ~.. ... \..-(\ ,~ \:,-) A. Refer to Division 3 for concrete requirements. C. The Division 15 contractor shall be responsible coordinating the information concerning sizes, dimensions, and locations for concrete equipment pads and bases. Provide pads and bases for all floor mounted mechanical equipment except terminal units located within the classrooms and other spaces. D. Provide concrete equipment supports or bases for the water chillers. 1.18. ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors where required for access to components and equipment whether or not such access panels are indicated on the drawings. Access panels shall be a minimum size of 24" x 24" unless the Contractor gets specific permission from the Architect to change. Locations shall be approved by the Architect. B. Refer to individual sections for product and installation requirements. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-7 r...... L-J LL\ l --> LL Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.19. ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Fit escutcheons around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter to cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 1.20. ANCHORING OF EQUIPMENT A. Secure equipment located on floor slab to the floor with anchor bolts unless it is mounted on wheels and capable of being moved. A minimum of two bolts, but generally four or more, are required per each piece of equipment. Provide bolts of sufficient size to prevent equipment of overturning. 1.21. PAINTING OF MECHANICAL WORK A. Refer to the Painting Section for painting requirements and painting schedule. Painting of mechanical components shall be under the Painting Section, not under Division 15. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate his work with the painting section. B. The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for touch up painting and repair of surfaces ~ Jl(at are specified to be factory finishec. Such surfaces include, but are not limited to, the .. ~minal units and louvers. N ~O ;B.22~RONMENTAL CLASSIFICATIONS ~:? ~fer to Division 16 specifications and the electrical construction drawings for the definitions, z I~ 1Ocation and requirements for electrical equipment located in areas with different ~ O~vironmental requirements (Le. flammable, wet location, outside, dust hazard). ~ B. ~ctrical and electronic control components and wiring furnished by the Division 15 Contractor shall be suitable for use in the environments specified in electrical specifications and as indicated on the electrical drawings. 1.23. MODEL NUMBERS A. Model numbers are used in some instances to help define the overall characteristics required of a specific component, however, it is recognized that model numbers change from time to time or that the model numbers listed may be incorrect. The Contractor shall provide the components that satisfy the performance requirements specified, rather than providing units meeting the model number requirements in the event there is a discrepancy. B. The bidders and Contractor shall not rely solely upon the model numbers for selecting the appropriate components to be furnished. C. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to call the attention of the Architect any discrepancies between the performance requirements specified and any model number used during the bidding period prior to issue of the last addendum. If no such notification is made it will be assumed that no such discrepancies exist. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-8 . Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.24. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Safety Devices. Thoroughly check all safety devices to assure proper operation and protection. B. Service. 1. Perform service on all mechanical Work until date of substantial completion including oiling, and greasing, adjustments, cleaning, packing of seals, and other items as recommended by equipment manufacturer in the maintenance manual hereinbefore specified. 2. Strainers. a. Remove, clean and reinstall each strainer screen as specified below after systems have been flushed as specified in Section 15410, Plumbing Piping. (1) Clean each strainer after all adjustments have been made and system has operated a minimum of 24 hours, but before final test and balancing operation is started. (2) Clean each strainer again, after final test and balancing operation and before substantial completion of the Project. b. Certain screens may remain out of the strainer body after removal during final cleaning only as directed by Architect. 3. Purge all air from water systems after each servicing. a. Protect all materials and finishes during each servicing operation, and repair or replace to original condition, those damaged as a result of servicing. 4. Replace insulation removed or damaged after each operation. Leave insulation as specified in Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation. ~.-:; 5. Contractor may coordinate servicing operations with Owners operati~j>ersonnel so as to coincide with time interval specified for instruction in operation. ~ 0 6. Put system in full operating condition before substantial completion of.?-r~t. "."~'""\ \_ J __ - -n - 1""'''-- \ -"--' .1'4'.' ~ t \ c'-1 .._..) C. Alarms. Test and adjust alarms for satisfactory operation. _0' , -1 -() 1.25. FIELD TESTS/COMMISSIONING r:-? -=...,.. A. Tests and Adjustments. ~ 1 . Upon completion of the installation and before substantial completion of Project, Contractor shall make all necessary tests and adjustments to place the system in working condition. Systems shall be balanced as specified in Section 15990, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. General operating tests shall occur following completion of final testing and balancing, and shall demonstrate that the entire Work is functioning in accordance with Specifications. Furnish all instruments, test equipment, and competent personnel that are required for tests. 2. Final Acceptance Test Inspection. a. Prior to final acceptance of all "Division 15 - Mechanical" equipment, material, systems and subsystems, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Architect or his representative and the Owner's Representative that all equipment, systems and subsystems including accessories, appurtenances, controls, safety devices, control and safety device interlocks, etc., function properly in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the equipment manufacturers specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with.the tests and demonstrations, including making available equipment manufacturers service representatives to perform those tests or demonstrations that are beyond his capability, or that he prefers not to perform. 3. Special tests for individual systems may be found specified under the individual specification sections. w MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-9 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.26. JOB CONDITIONS t..-...., L.,l IJJ -l LL A. Job Conditions: 1. Existing Pipe Lines. a. If any water, gas, or other pipes and appurtenances existing or put in service by other contracts are encountered which interfere with the proper installation of new work under this Contract and which will no longer be used after installation of new work, close such appurtenance in a proper manner, and if necessary, move or remove the appurtenances as directed by the Architect. b. Where Work installed by other contracts or existing is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with the Specifications. Materials used shall be same as existing unless otherwise specified. 2. Contract Drawings and Specifications. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only, and do not give fully dimensioned locations of various elements of work. Verify exact locations from field measurements. General character and scope of work are illustrated on the drawings and/or listed in the Specifications. Drawings and Specifications are complimentary one to the other; whatever is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 3. Space Requirements. Consider and coordinate for space, limitations imposed by contiguous work, in selection and location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect. 4. Obstructions. a. The drawings may indicate certain information pertaining to surface and subsurface obstructions which have been taken from available drawings. Such information is not guaranteed, as to accuracy of location or completeness. b. Before any cutting or trenching operations are begun, verify with the Architect, the Owner, and other interested parties that all available information has been provided. Verify locations prior to commencing operations. c. Where unknown obstructions are encountered, alter routing of new work as directed by the Architect. d. Contractor shall assume total responsibility for and repair any damage to existing known utilities or construction. ~ N .. N ~ ~C' CC ---.: LLJ ,..... ' --~ --- C) t:: >_0 i-~ 05 o .",- ...... CI- :.z ~ '""") ,..... = c:::::> t"-..J B. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Coordination of Work. a. Plan all Work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for installation of Mechanical Work. Provisions shall be made for all special'frames, openings, pipe sleeves, and vapor barrier seals as required. b. Verify the Owner's inspection requirements and abide by their rights of inspection before covering or otherwise concealing any piping, wiring, or equipment. c. Order of precedence: the Contractor shall lay out all work well enough in advance to avoid conflicts or interference with other work in progress so that in case of interference the mechanical layout may and shall be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all work and take all action as required to avoid conflicts between the work of this trade and that of other trades, inclusive of all required operating, code and service access clearances. Unless specifically noted otherwise, establish the exact location of mechanical equipment based upon the actual dimensions of equipment furnished. Mechanical and electrical work shall be coordinated so that work may proceed according to the sequence specified in Section 01042 to avoid conflicts. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-10 .. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Refer to the drawings for specific requirements for phasing the work to provide joint Contractor/Owner occupancy and use of the project spaces. 1.27. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all equipment with factory-installed (wooden) skids end suitable lifting lugs, or deliver equipment, components, and accessories in factory-fabricated protective containers. B. Protect all delivered equipment and materials from foreign matter, weather (rain, snow, wind, dirt/debris) and other damage at all times. C. Inspect all equipment and materials for damage prior to installation. Remove from the construction site all damaged or corroded materials and equipment. D. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's rigging instructions for unloading and moving equipment to installation locations(s). E. In addition to the above outlined requirements, all piping and shop-fabricated pre-lined and non-lined ductwork sections shall be clear of foreign matter, having temporary end cap enclosures of sufficient tightness to prevent foreign matter entry during shipment, storage, and handling prior to installation. 1.28. ENERGY REBATE PROGRAM A. The owner intends on participating in the Mid American Energy 2006 Custom System Program for energy savings rebate. B. The Division 15 Contractor shall provide documentation of actual components installed and the final cost charged for these components as necessary to complete the rebate submission process. Information required may include, but is not limited to, compiling and submitting model and serial numbers for equipment cuts, showing performance of equipment furnished on the project. END OF SECTION 15010 o :?;;. C). :-j:; :-- \. (.-....\ '>.:~: ('~'l ~ ~...:> ~~, :-> ,"'; ..,:/"",, - - "Q ::). L__ y MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-11 ~-:} -r\ -- ...~...'-- i . ,"\ \' ~ ~ ,--........., \...J :.,," r-:? ,- v> Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 N <( N .. ee5 N r-., :c t..-J 'JJ a- "'T UJ ..-l , C)t= --' >- C) - U- % t.:.:< ..c:c O~ --, .-- 0 = = C""-..I MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15010-12 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15014 BACKFILLING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Utility trench backfilling for utilities within the scope of work of this contract. B. Consolidation and compaction PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. FILL MATERIALS A. Type A - Crushed Gravel: Pit run, angular, natural stone; free of shale, clay, friable material, sand, debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 within the following limits: 1. Sieve Size Percent Passino a. 2" 100 b. 1" 95 c. 3/4" 95 d. 5/8" 75 e. 3/8" 55 f. No.4 35 g. No. 16 15 f..--; h. No. 40 10 , :.:-> i. No. 200 5 (:::") (..- ':;.~() ,,~'-' ;l> ':,' .., ~.\\ ...-- ~~-7 ~ '-- ..,.... ~.;----- B. Type B - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; ~ra~d in- accordance with ASTM C136, to the following: (j -'" 1. Minimum size: 1/4" .-' ,-o('l '\"\1 '. 2. Maximum size: 5/8" --) O. .'1- t'.-? C. Type C - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble m~erials, -z:, or organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 to the following: Y 1. Sieve Size Percent Passino a. No.4 100 b. No. 14 10 to 100 c. No. 50 5 to 90 d. No. 100 4 to 30 e. No. 200 0 "~dn 'l'---\ '.__.J D. Subsoil: Reused, free of gravel larger than 3" size, and debris. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Generally, compact sub-grade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction. Backfill with Type C fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. BACKFILLING SECTION 15014 - 1 (" ',~ LL\ _i - U- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at gravel areas, compact subsoil to 95% of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM 0698. D. Prior to placement of aggregate base course material at paved areas, compact subsoil to 95% of its maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM 0698. 3.3. BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" compacted depth. D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 12" compacted depth. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation waterproofing and protective cover, and utilities in trenches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. H. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. I. Remove surplus backfill materials from Site. J. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed. B. Tests and analysis of fill material shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01557, ASTM 0698. C. Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01556, ASTM 01557, ASTM D698. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest. E. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, pavers, and paving. END OF SECTION 15014 C'J N N <:( "2 ;L. 20 cc- uJ - ,--.. _.J/ (.)t:: r, ., '--' ,r- 'c::. <C O~ o - BACKFILLING SECTION 15014 - 2 :1C a- - :;;!: ..a: -, r- = = ,-..I Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15015 TRENCHING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 . SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavate trenches for underground utilities within the scope of work of this contract. B. Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to sub-grade elevations c. Backfilling and compaction of trenches. 1.2. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Types A, B, C, and subsoil materials as specified in Section 15014. 2.2. BEDDING MATERIALS A. Type A Material: As specified for Type A in Section 15014. B. Type B Material: As specified for Type B in Section 15014. -0 ~O ,.,-- .,.-"'. ~37 :.L C. Type C Material: As specified for Type C in Section 15014. C)r ~\_- ~' -L_ \~- -"'- --").) f)?~. Z y D. Subsoil Material: As specified in Section 15014. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Verify fill material to be reused, is acceptable. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining, which pass through the work area. C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. F. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction. Backfill with Type C fill and TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 1 ~ (;;;:::") :.;...l c..- -y-#' '_if ...- - - ...-0 ::$ -\\ -;::::- \ --~, , \ ' , ~, C) ~ - v' f".. t____,.f W j -< LL Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. 3.3. EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil required for domestic water and piping, sanitary sewer, and electrical service to points of connection indicated on the Drawings. B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection. C. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 450 bearing splay of foundations. D. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard, measured by volume. . F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner. C"J N G. ~rrect areas over-excavated by error. N ~5 -1""" Et: $ockpile excavated material in area designated on the Site and remove excess material not c: UJ b~ing used, from the Site. __..J r (" \_. ::::3.4. ~1{gjI NG >- ~ .5 ~pport pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. ~ 0 ~.5. BACKFILLING A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" compacted depth. D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 12" compacted depth. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, foundation waterproofing and protective cover, and utilities in trenches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Remove surplus backfill materials from the Site. H. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed. B. Tests and analysis of fill material shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557, ASTM TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 0698 c. Compaction testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM 01556, ASTM 01557, TM D698. D. If tests indicate the Work does not meet specified requirements, remove the Work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION 15015 ~> S -0 (- ?r) -e ~ '::-", .....1 ;::7 ..-,) ..-,~ ....... (j.- - ~~~: ~ 07' ~ /' Z J7 TRENCHING SECTION 15015 . 3 -\\ -;:::::. \ ';~.... \ \ \ .~ " I '-....J - v:> Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C'J <( N ~~ 0, ...- 0:-- -"- UJ _ UJ 0- _...J >-' \ C) \--- -' .U LL ;:]': ./--- ...cc :::: <C -, () "";> .-- 5 = = C'-...I TRENCHING SECTION 15015 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1. GENERAL 6 ~o. y~~:) tc?~ g t-- ~~ -- - - -\\ -;::::- \ , ---\ ;; \ <~l . i '_/ 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES PART 2. PRODUCTS /-, \...::. r- --' 't .1 ';:2_ \;:\ --::-;;"~.!. ~~ /-.. :z. ..-0 ~.,."~ .;~',. A. Mechanical basic materials and methods 2.1. ELECTRIC MOTORS )7 ~ - e;) A. All motors provided by the Contractor shall deliver their rated output continuously with temperature rise not to exceed 800C and shall have, class B insulation, withstand a 50% overload momentarily without injurious heating. Motors shall be capable of operating continuously at voltage indicated plus or minus 10 per cent without any failure or loss of performance. Electrical motors specified to be used with variable speed drives shall be suitable for use with variable frequency drives. B. Belt driven equipment to have slide rail bases for belt adjustment. All belt guards shall be four sided fully enclosing all moving parts. C. If mechanical equipment provided by this section requires larger motors and correspondingly larger electrical service including all appurtances, this section shall be responsible for the additional costs over the system costs of the original design of the electrical systems as well as the mechanical systems. D. All combination starters and disconnect switches are to be provided by Division 16 unless specifically noted to be provided by Division 15. E. All electric motors shall meet high efficiency requirements of ASH RAE 90.1 or as follows, whichever requirements are more stringent: 1. Unless otherwise required, provide motors of open dripproof (ODP) construction. For outdoor applications, applications subject to weather, or as specified, provide totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) motors with a corrosion resistant drain plug under each bearing. 2. Efficiency. All motors (except two-speed motors) 3/4 HP and larger shall be of the high efficiency type. Provide General Electric "Energy Saver", Westinghouse "Tee 11 ", U.S. Motors "XB", Baldor "Super-E" motors or A.O. Smith (Century) "High Efficiency". Guaranteed minimum full load efficiencies shall be certified in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Method B, NEMA MG-1-12.53a and shall meet or exceed the values listed in NEMA MG 1 , Table 12-6C (March 1991 ) or following minimum efficiency and power factor criteria, whichever is more stringent: MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 . 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 MINIMUM NOMINAL EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR FOR OPEN MOTORS RPM 900 1200 1800 3600 HP EFF PF EFF PF EFF PF EFF PF _...-.... --.............. -...- -- -..- ..--..- ............... ---.. ---.. --.. --...- ......... --...-.............. --- --.. -- _.... -- -..-..-.. --...... ---..... -..- --.. --............ --.......... --...- 3/4 81.5 70.0 1 81.5 82.5 74.0 84.0 84.0 11f2 82.5 86.5 73.0 84.5 85.7 84.0 85.1 2 84.0 87.5 75.0 86.5 85.7 85.5 87.3 3 84.0 89.5 71.0 88.5 85.5 86.5 85.7 5 87.5 70.5 89.5 75.0 88.5 88.0 87.5 86.9 71f2 87.5 72.0 89.5 80.5 88.5 81.7 89.5 88.2 10 89.5 78.0 90.2 80.5 90.2 81.0 90.2 86.3 15 89.5 78.0 91.7 84.0 91.7 86.0 91.7 89.2 20 90.2 77.5 92.4 85.0 92.4 86.5 92.4 89.8 25 90.2 78.0 92.4 83.5 93.0 87.5 92.4 92.0 30 91.7 78.0 93.0 83.5 93.0 88.5 93.0 91.7 40 91.7 78.0 93.0 85.5 93.6 89.0 93.0 88.6 50 91.7 84.0 94.1 85.5 93.6 88.5 94.1 88.7 60 92.4 83.5 94.1 85.5 94.5 88.5 94.1 88.5 75 93.0 85.0 94.1 86.0 95.0 88.5 94.1 88.0 100 93.0 84.0 94.1 85.5 95.4 88.0 94.5 88.0 125 93.6 83.5 95.0 88.5 95.8 88.0 95.0 88.0 150 93.6 85.0 95.0 85.5 96.2 88.0 95.4 88.0 200 84.0 95.4 86.5 96.2 89.0 95.4 94.0 --250 82.5 96.2 83.0 95.8 89.5 C'Jl00::<(-- 82.5 -- u 96.5 84.0 95.8 u N v~ [1 =r a: ~INIMUM NOMINAL EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR FOR TEFC MOTORS I_~ - w UJ 0- -1" '. RPM C.) t= 900 1200 1800 3600 --1 -tiP CEFF PF EFF PF EFF PF EFF PF LL ~_u__~_<::(u_u____uuuu___uuuu___u_u__nu_un__uu__uuu___n-uuunuuun___uu__u.._ 0/4 09- -- 81.5 70.0 -- -- -- u 8 01.5 82.5 74.0 84.0 84.0 75.5 .._~ = - e--t1f2 82.5 86.5 73.0 84.5 85.7 84.0 85.1 2 84.0 87.5 75.0 86.5 85.7 85.5 87.3 3 84.0 89.5 71.0 88.5 85.5 86.5 85.7 5 87.5 70.5 89.5 75.0 88.5 88.0 87.5 86.9 71f2 87.5 72.0 89.5 80.5 89.5 81.7 89.5 88.2 10 89.5 78.0 90.2 80.5 90.2 81.0 90.2 86.3 15 89.5 78.0 91.7 84.0 91.7 86.0 91.7 89.2 20 90.2 77.5 92.4 85.0 92.4 86.5 92.4 89.8 25 90.2 78.0 92.4 83.5 93.0 87.5 92.4 92.0 30 91.7 78.0 93.0 83.5 93.0 88.5 93.0 91.7 40 91.7 78.0 93.0 85.5 93.6 89.0 93.0 88.6 50 91.7 84.0 94.1 85.5 93.6 88.5 94.1 88.7 60 92.4 83.5 94.1 85.5 94.5 88.5 94.1 88.5 75 93.0 85.0 94.1 86.0 95.0 88.5 94.1 88.0 100 93.0 84.0 94.1 85.5 95.4 88.0 94.5 88.0 125 93.6 83.5 95.0 88.5 95.8 88.0 95.0 88.0 150 93.6 85.0 95.0 85.5 96.2 88.0 95.4 88.0 200 84.0 95.4 86.5 96.2 89.0 95.4 94.0 250 82.5 96.2 83.0 95.8 89.5 300 82.5 96.5 84.0 95.8 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTOR EFFICIENCIES .--.... --.. -........ --.. --.. -........ -- --.. ---.. --- --- --- ---........................ --.. ..-_.. --.... ---.. --...... --.. --.. -- --........ -- --......... --.. --.... .......... --.... HP Minimum Efficiency (%) rc~l ~ 1/20 1/10 1/8 1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 35 35 35 35 54 56 60 ~ 2. c ~~; -\\ ..c.- ..:--\ -"i~........--.-- -Y" -::; - :--- 0"-- - =:::::.\ C. J. ;g: ;..,L~ \:S~., -'- --.-::., d;:-J. ~ (~ /~. .' ..?-;.'" ,-... ...- <..:> y 3. Bearings: Supply motors with antifriction bearings conservatively rated for long life under the total radial and thrust loads produced by the motor and driven equipment. Bearings in fractional horsepower motors shall be the grease packed, sealed type. Integral motor bearings shall be grease lubricated; include alemite fittings and pressure relief devices in locations suitable for in-service lubrication. 4. Motors shall have thermal overload protection by this work category. 2.2. PIPE STANDS A. Pipe stands shall consist of two or more sets of pipe columns with the columns of each set joined by pipe beams. All pipe joints made with welded fittings and tank cradles shall be strapped or bolted to pipe beams. Floor loading shall not exceed the safe load for floor on which placed. B. Pipe shall be new, black steel, schedule 40 or heavier, painted same as associated piping. 2.3. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS OR DIVISIONS A. This Section shall make connections to equipment furnished by other Sections providing such accessories as may be specified herein. In all cases furnish ball valves (stops) or gas cocks at all equipment for all services, and complete installation of equipment in building. Inspect other sections of the specifications and plans carefully to determine requirements for this Section. B. The Contractor shall provide rough-ins for Owner furnished and installed equipment as specified in the specific section. The Contractor shall provide all necessary service connections to make systems completely operational. Contractor shall verify all connection requirements from certified shop drawings before beginning construction. 2.4. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. All suspended mechanical equipment shall be supported by structural steel shapes furnished and installed by this Contractor. All supports shall be installed and fabricated in an approved manner coordinated with the equipment manufacturer. All screws, bolts, etc., for mounting exposed to weather shall be brass with lead washers. Where special isolation bases required, they are covered elsewhere in these specifications. MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 3 \ --\ ," \ \ . '---' \_J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2.5. FLASHING A. All pipes and ductwork passing through the roof or other exterior waterproofing membranes shall be flashed to match the roofing water proof membrane or the exterior waterproofing membrane. 2.6. CEILING, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES A. All ceiling, wall and floorplates Crane No. 13-BC or Architect approved equivalent chrome plated pressed steel plates. Floor plates shall be installed around pipe sleeves. Plates shall be installed in all occupied areas. 2.7. FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Provide sufficient flanges or screwed unions in equipment piping to facilitate taking down of piping in easily handled sections at any future time. Sheet packing shall be used on flanged unions and flanged connections. Bronze to iron unions satisfactory up to 2" size. 2.8. CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS A. Provide flanged and gasketed connections between piping of dissimilar metals. B. DO NOT use Dielectric l.mions at these connections. 2.9. PIPE SIZE A. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are the minimum sizes required for system hydraulic performance. If the pipe size indicated is not readily available the Contractor shall provide the next larger pipe size available, including valves, fittings and other pipe components at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Install all items specified in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15050 N <( N ~~ 0, ;c 0:- t..-...J Cl- uJ )>-" UJl _...1 - C)t::: ~ () :;.z: ;- U- t::::<C .4 o~ -, .-- Q c::;. = c---I MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15100 VALVES 6 ~Ci ~:;:::~ ~-~\ )-/ - r-.:l = '::3 t-- 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES /] -::=\ C) --z C-",,_..~ A. This Section includes all valves within the mechanical systems inside and outsidi!h'e;-;, building if the valves are not specified elsewhere. 9)<- -7 "'- Y - -n .- ~.,--- \ 'r~r\ '..--, \_) PART 1. GENERAL ~~ ~,.~- - -0 ~, N .- - 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE c...> A. General: 1. All gate valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened, and shall be equipped with packing suitable for intended service. When valve is fully opened, back seat shall protect the packing and stem threads from fluid. 2. Bronze Valves: a. Valves with steam pressure rating of 125 psig or 150 psig shall have pressure containing parts of a material conforming to ASTM B62. b. Bronze gate and check valves shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) of the valve and fittings industry SP-80. 3. Iron Body Valves: a. Pressure containing parts of valves shall be of material conforming to ASTM A 126, Grade B. b. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions shall conform to ANSI B16.10. c. Gate valves shall conform to MSS SP-70. 4. Valve stems shall be copper silicon alloy conforming to ASTM B371 or ASTM B584. 5. Wheel handles shall be non-heating style cast from malleable iron with a corrosion resistant epoxy or enamel finish, or commercial aluminum. 6. Butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-67. 7. Check valves shall operate equally well in horizontal or vertical positions. 8. All valves shall be full line size unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 9. Provide valve stem extension of length to suit layout and depth for valves specified on the drawings. 10. Do not use gate valves unless specifically indicated for a specific application. Use ball valves as specified for water service 2" and under, and butterfly valves for sizes over 2". 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit valve shop drawings for all valves to be supplied. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. General: 1. Insofar as possible, all valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. All gate and swing check valves as a group shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All valves 2" and smaller shall be threaded and have bronze bodies, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 3. All valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body bronze mounted (IBBM) type and shall be flanged. 4. All valves 4" and larger mounted in excess of 7'-0" above the floor in mechanical VALVES SECTION 15100-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements (--..., ; , t---J W -1. u_ B. Gate Valves: Where specifically specified on the drawings. 1 . Class 125: a. General: Furnish valves 12" and smaller designed for 125 psig steam and 200 psig non-shock water, oil and gas working pressure . b. Size 2" and Smaller: (1) Furnish bronze valves with screwed-in bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, and threaded ends. (2) Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (a) Crane 438 (b) Hammond 1 B-645 (c) Jenkins 992 (d) Kennedy 427 (e) Lunkenheimer 2129 (f) Milwaukee 105 (g) NibcoT-113 (h) Powell 507 (i) Stockham B-103 U) Walworth 4 c. Size 2-1/2" and Larger: (1) Furnish iron body bronze mounted (IBBM) valves with bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat rings. (2) Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (a) Crane 461 (b) Hammond 1 RI138 (c) Kennedy 058 (d) Lunkenheimer 1428 (e) Milwaukee F2882 (f) Nibco F-619 (g) Powell 1787 (h) Stockham G-612 (i) Walworth 8719F/719F N v~ 0::0 UJ '~. ot= -_ 0 .;- L<( U3,: o 05.038 A&J #200640.00 rooms shall be equipped with chain operators. Extend chains to within 6'-6" of floor. 5. Mark each valve at the factory with the following minimum information, engraved, stamped, or cast on each valve or metal tag, permanently attached to the valve. a. Manufacturer's Name. b. Catalog or Figure No. c. Size and Pressure Class. d. Arrows to indicate direction of flow on check valves. e. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) approved valves shall bear the Underwriter's label Permanently attached to the valve body. 6. It is understood that valve manufacturers change model numbers from time to time. The Contractor shall supply current valves that have equal characteristics to the old model numbers specified in such an event. C. Check Valves: 1. Water, Oil, and Steam, Size 2" and Smaller: a. Furnish swing check valves designed for 200 psig steam and 400 psig nonshock water, oil, and gas working pressures. Valves shall have renewable discs and side plugs and regrindable, integral seats. Discs shall be renewable and seats reground without removing valves from the line. b. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Crane 36 (2) Hammond 18-949 VALVES SECTION 15100 - 2 .. N ::'C 0- z ...::r; -) r-- <:.-.:t = C'-..J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (3) Jenkins 762-A (4) Kennedy 444 (5) Lunkenheimer 554Y _ (6) Milwaukee 508 Q. 0 (7) Nibco T-476-B 77 -;::::') (8) Powell 560Y --. (9) Stockham B-345 C ( . (1 O)Walworth 3420~.i '2, 2. Size 2-1/2" and Larger: .-,.- '-1=; a. Water Check Valves: 0'7' (1) Valves shall be silent type spring loaded of the double door or~fer style. Valves shall be designed for 125 psig nons hock water wdfking pressure at 250oF. ~ 5 c..- ~~ - - -r\ ;:::::. \ \ . ;\'\ '..-t ',-J -0 ~ ~ - (j\ D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Furnish valves designed for 150 psig and 250oF. water service. Valves shall have extended necks. Operator shall be 10-position lever lock for sizes 2" through 5" and totally enclosed and sealed worm gear actuators with 4-arm or wheel handle for sizes 6" and larger. Valves shall be bi-directional suitable for drop-tight shut-off at full rated pressure with flow in either direction. 2. Materials: a. Body: Cast or ductile iron. b. Disc: Bronze, aluminum bronze, or stainless steel. c. Stem: Type 416 stainless steel. d. Seat: Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer (EPDM). 3. Manufacturers and Model Numbers: a. Lug Type: Valves shall be full lug type drilled and tapped. (1) Sizes 2" through 12": (2) Centerline L T Jenkins 642 Nibco NL-082 (3) Crane 24N Keystone 122 Powell 3100 (4) DeZurik 660L Lunkenheimer 4717 Stockham LG7 (5) Hammond 3820 Mission 3100 (a) Wafer Type: (i) Sizes 2" through 12": (6) Centerline A Jenkins 632 Nibco WL-082 (7) Crane 22F Keystone 100 or 228 Powell 3000 (8) DeZurik 660W Lunkenheimer 4537 Stockham LG5 (9) Hammond 3800 Mission 3000 E. Relief Valves: 1. Water: a. Domestic water temperature and pressure relief valve: (1) On domestic hot water heater, provide an ASME rated McDonald Miller or Watts Regulator Co., thermostatic, self-closing temperature and pressure relief valve, located in the relief valve openings on the heater. Valve shall have a minimum thermal discharge capacity equal to the input capacity of the heater, standard pressure setting of 125 psig and standard temperature setting of 21 OF pipe discharge to floor drain. F. Ball Valves: 1. General: Valves shall be non-blowout stem design. Quarter turn of handle shall fully open or close valve. Handle position shall indicate whether valve is open or closed. Handle stops shall be a permanent, integral part of the body. Provide 3" stem extension on all ball valves to allow for installation of 2" of insulation on ball valve. VALVES SECTION 15100 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 N ~ r) N ~S i,_J x: ;:;....0 ,"""'- - LLJ c.. LU ---1 '>-' -! !' . L ,,~ !..-. [C ;;;;r.: ':- () ...::;: f.:= <r ---:l 03;: .-- = 0 = ...... 3. 2. Size 2" and Smaller: a. Valves shall be standard port, 2-piece construction with screwed ends. Valves shall be designed for 400 psig WOG working pressure at 150oF. b. Valves shall have bronze or brass body, chromium plated or stainless steel ball, steel handle with vinyl grip, and replaceable teflon seats. c. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Apollo 70-1 00 (2) Crane 2330 (3) Hammond BV711- T (4) Jamesbury 300 (5) Jenkins 901-A (6) Lunkenheimer 708HST (7) Marpac B780T (8) Nibco T -585 (9) Powell 5220 (1 0) Stockham S-214 (11 )Watts G4000 Size 2-1/2" and Larger: a. Valves shall be standard port, ANSI Class 150 with flanged ends. Valves shall be designed for 250 psig working pressure at 150oF. b. Valves shall have steel body, chrome or nickel plated steel or stainless steel ball, replaceable teflon seats, and steel stem and handle. c. Manufacturers and Figure Numbers: (1) Apollo 88-100/200 Jamesbury 5150 (2) Crane 941-TF Jenkins 1001 Lunkenheimer 713L T Marpac 400/470 G. Pressure/temperature ratings: valves shall have pressure and temperature ratings equal to or greater than the piping system containing the valves. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install all valves in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings. B. Flanged valves shall be installed between flanges. C. Valves installed in insulated domestic water shall have extended handle shafts to provide at least 1/2" clearance between the handle and insulation outer surface to afford operation. D. All valves shall be installed such that all handles are accessible, and that handles may be operated from full open to full closed position without obstruction. 3.2. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Valves and stops shall be adjusted, packed, and repacked as may be required to eliminate leaks and produce proper flow. END OF SECTION 15100 ,---,< VALVES SECTION 15100 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.~ 2.3 tJ.. c> ~ z:;..-:\ ~ ~ry /'; ~ ,.... " ~ r' "~~\~\ 'J:, ........'l~ \ 6* ~' y SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping tests for all systems as follows: 1. Gravity flow drains(sanitary) 2. Domestic hot and cold water B. Additional tests may be specified in other sections. These shall be performed in addition to those specified in this section. C. Should governing bodies require tests over and above those specified, they shall be performed and certified for approval by such governing bodies or agencies. D. Perform additional tests as may be required by utility companies or agencies supplying the particular service such as potable water. E. Provide certified test reports for all systems. F. Maintain permanent record of each test indicating system, or portion of system tested, date of test, results and signature of witness. 1.2. EQUIPMENT A. Provide all devices, equipment and gases necessary to make tests required. Devices installed in the work shall not be used for test purposes. B. Materials shall be subjected to standard tests by manufacturer before shipment. 1.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Make tests during installation and after completion. Tests shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Piping concealed in building construction, chases, etc., shall be tested before being concealed. Contractor failing to make such tests must assume all costs of removing and replacing defective piping and shall pay all costs of cutting and repairing building construction made necessary by this neglect to end of guarantee period. C. Take test prior to insulating piping. Contractor failing to make tests prior to insulating of piping must assume all costs of removing and replacing insulation on defective piping. D. Make hydrostatic tests with cold water. The minimum duration shall be four hours unless specifically indicated otherwise. Do not use air for pressure testing where cold water is specified as the test medium unless the Architect provides written acceptance of the alternate test medium. E. Advise the Architect one work day prior to testing so the Architect may witness the test if he chooses. Contractor shall be responsible for correct testing, observation of results and corrections necessary. The Contractor shall keep written record of test date, time, pressure, duration, results and obtain signature of witness. TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 1 -"'\\ -;::;- '.,,(\ , .----.. "'-) ~ ~ ()"\ Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 F. Provisions shall be made so that every item may be thoroughly inspected, and in no case shall any part of construction be obscured. G. Do not apply test pressures to a hot valve. In event such testing is necessary, install temporary block ahead of valve. Final test of connection against hot valve shall be by examination of work under service pressure. H. Any device connected into system which cannot assume the test pressure shall be disconnected and protected from damage. I. All parts of system under test must be under constant supervision with authority to bleed off excess pressure that may develop. No test shall remain on work unless continuously attended. Use care so that excess pressure does not develop because of temperature changes. J. Work shall be completely leak free at any joint, fittings, accessory, or attachment. If repairs N ~ necessary, re-test work after correction. Correct defects manifested by these tests N ore proceeding with other work. ~~ C) :!: .1flJ ids shall circulate and flow freely without noise, vibration or hammer on either manual or UJ a.. d ~omatic control, with no evidence of leaks, trapping or binding. --' LL z 1.>.- Wchanical and Electrical equipment shall operate satisfactorily at specified capacity without IIC!~ ~~se, vibration, overheating or evidence of misalignment or insecure mounting. J t-- = M. ~er welding, all welded piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of at least 150% of <= c--J design pressure, but in no case less than 60 psig. 1.4. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS A. For each system or portion of system tested, provide a certificate testifying that the system was tested as specified and provide the following data: 1 . Identification of system or portion of system tested referencing specific equipment connected to system. 2. Date tested. 3. Test pressure and duration of test. 4. Recorded test pressure at end of test. 5. Media used for testing. 6. List necessary repairs made before the system passed the leak test. 7. Signature of testing contractor. 8. Signature of witness (must be a representative of the General Contractor, the Architect or the Owner) 9. Other data as required by the system specification. B. Submit the individual test reports to the Architect for review within two weeks of successfully completing the individual tests. PART 2. PRODUCTS - NOT USED TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. GRAVITY EQUIPMENT DRAINS (SANITARY PIPING INCLUDED) A. Inspect all new lines over entire length for obstructions with illumination and by rodding entire length. B. Hydrostatically test building work to maximum head of water possible by plugging outlet and filling system to maximum height as specified in the Uniform Plumbing Code. 3.2. OTHER PIPING SYSTEMS C. Test systems for gas and water tightness as specified in the Uniform Plumbing..gode. 9:n D. Work developing leaks shall be repaired or replaced at once. ;, ::~'. ,...., '~(;'..'~~), :.... \..,"\", .,<,-- '-:=,\ "0. -;)~-- A. Test all piping systems not listed in accordance with systems manufacturer's require~nts. B. In all cases, blow or flush all piping of all sediment and debris in an approved manner. r..J C:..') :3 (..- --...... ~~,.... .....- - - -f\ -- r~_ .Cr\ \-."-;, '~,) E. Refer to Section 15410 for additional requirements -0 _'1' _-1;0;,. t:-? - <J1 c. Refer to specific Site Utility specification sections for tests required for these systems. D. Refer to Section 15410 for additional testing requirements 3.3. STRAINERS A. It shall be the responsibility of this section to install all strainers as may be required to properly protect all equipment from sediment or debris in the transported media that could damage such equipment. B. Where permanent strainers are not shown, temporary strainers are required for use during the start up period. C. This section must guarantee that no equipment or device will be damaged during the warrantee period by any dirt, sediment or debris transported through the piping system. D. This section shall be responsible for cleaning permanent strainers and removing temporary strainers from the systems after the testing specified has been satisfactorily completed. The permanent strainer shall be cleaned and the temporary strainers removed only after the Contractor receives specified permission to do so by the Architect. 3.4. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Design temperature and pressure: 1. Temperature: 1200F 2. Pressure: 85 psig B. Hydrostatically test at working pressure of system but at not less than 85 psig minimum, 15 minute duration. Test medium shall be taken from a potable water source. Comply with UPC requirements. C. After test blow clean with potable water, leave lines clean of all sediment and debris. TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Sterilize all new lines after successful completion of piping tests. Sterilization shall be performed in accordance with method specified in SECTION - Plumbing Piping. END OF SECTION 15101 N <( N yes r, ::c 0::- i--J 0- i.D LlJ ,,,...:- -" roO" I-- i 'J __ -' ,_0 LL :;;z: ,..' ..0;: t=<( ~ O~ .-- 0 = = c--J TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15101 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ~~~ :;:.> SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES ~c' ~...--, "}7 ~>_ (,.; ~f5:- .....- - ~.--(\ ;:;:;. \('\\ ',.-., \.....J PART 1. GENERAL '---', ~ .; ./'> /-,"'.( .l .--- \ -..~".. I'. "\ :::-(\. "':::J."~ ~). I ,..~ ~/ Y t:-? .....- <.5' .-<I, ?b" 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes piping specialties complete. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for expansion tanks, strainers, pressure gages, thermometers, test plugs (gage adapter) and air vents. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Air vents shall be installed on all drain points. 1. Manual vents: For vents on equipment, furnish Dole No.9 coin valves. B. Expansion tank: 1. General: Tanks shall be sizes as shown on Drawings, ASME constructed and stamped for 125 psi working pressure. 2. Diaphragm type pre-pressurized tanks: tank shall be provided with an integral butyl rubber diaphragm which shall contain a sealed-in air cushion pre-charged to the minimum system pressure. Tank shall have an air charging valve and shall be designed to a maximum operating temperature of 240oF. 3. Tank manufacturer shall be Amtrol, Bell and Gossett, or Taco. 4. Relief pressure and fill pressure shall be as indicated on the drawings. 5. Tanks for use in domestic (potable) water shall be rated for use in chlorinated potable water systems. C. Strainers: 1. Furnish "Y" type strainers throughout the job unless specifically noted otherwise. Furnish hot dip galvanized strainers in galvanized iron pipe. 2. "Y" Strainers: Furnish one manufacturer throughout Project. a. Strainers shall be designed for 125 psig minimum steam working pressure equipped with blow-off plugs and manufactured by Crane, Mueller Steam Specialty, Armstrong, Spirax Sarco, or Keckley. Service Size Straining (Inches) (inches) Coarse Medium Fine Water 1/4 to 2 1/10 1/16 30 mesh 2-1/2 to 4 1/8 1/16 3/64 5 up 1/4 1/8 1/10 b. Strainers 2" and Smaller: Furnish screwed ends, screwed bronze cap and gasket in sizes 1-1/2" and smaller and with a bolted cap on 2" size. Screens on water service shall be medium made of monel or Type 304 stainless steel. Furnish iron body strainers Mueller No. 251 FBC or 251 BC except furnish bronze strainers in all copper piping Mueller No. 351. PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15120-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Strainers 2-1/2" through 12": Furnish flanged ends, bolted iron cap and gasket. Screens on water service shall be medium in monel or Type 304 stainless steel. Provide Crane No. 989-1/2. D. Unions: 1. All unions in steel pipe shall be 150 psig malleable iron, screwed, with brass to iron ground joints. 2. All unions in copper pipe shall be cast bronze, wrought copper or wrought bronze, Class 125, with threaded or solder-joint tube ends. 3. Do not provide insulating coupling between piping and equipment of different metals EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Provide valves at each piece of equipment to provide for isolation of the equipment from its connected system. Locate strainers and valves as necessary to provide easy isolation and cleaning of strainers. B. Strainers shall be installed ahead of all automatic valves and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Provide a ball valve in the blow-off opening of each strainer. C. Unions shall be provided adjacent to each screwed type valve and shall be on the outlet side of valve. D. Furnish piping accessories where shown and as necessary for complete installation of mechanical Work. 3.2. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Valves and Specialties: 1. All valves and specialties shall be adjusted to operate smoothly and without binding or leaking. All vents shall be tested and proven to open freely for passage of air. 2. Expansion tanks shall be checked and proper waterlair level adjusted and set. 3. Locate strainers as necessary to allow easy cleaning. END OF SECTION 15120 f' L_J LL\ \ - - u- N N -:c 0- 4:. 4 :::>~...-cO- "..,- u-- \..L\ - ::..Jr C) t::: ._-() f'::- <.C O~ o - PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15120-2 - -;;::. .-.d: ....., ..- c::> c::> C'.J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS ...-::::: ~0, ).-7 :~~~ ~; S <-- ~~ PART 1. GENERAL - - -(\ --> ....,- ( \-n \:) 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES: ("' '::i (:. ~- ~\'\ A. This Section includes piping supports complete for all piping systems except as ot~ specified. Zl y ...-0 ~: ~ - <1' PART 2. 2.1.MATERIALS PRODUCTS A. All hangers, supports, anchors, and guides shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9 or applicable sections of the International Mechanical Code, and Uniform Plumbing Code. Do not hang or support piping from chains, straps, wire or perforated bar hangers or from ductwork. B. Dielectric Protection: Furnish acceptable protection or copper-plated hangers between all ferrous and nonferrous metal pipe and its hangers, clamps, sleeves and saddles on all water piping. C. Horizontal Piping Hangers: 1 . Provide one of the following types of hangers for horizontal piping manufactured by Grinnell or Carpenter and Patterson. 2. All Pipe except Copper: a. Except as otherwise specified hereinafter, provide clevis type, Grinnell Figure 260 or Figure 300 as required to keep the clevis nut outside the insulation. b. At Contractor's option, provide adjustable swivel ring steel band hangers for piping 3" and below in lieu of clevis hangers, Grinnell Figure 69. c. Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for Clevis type hangers, furnish steel pipe clamp, Grinnell Figure 216. d. Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same level, and fabricate from structural steel shapes. Use roller chairs, Grinnell Figure 175, or pipe-roll stands, Grinnell Figure 271, where provision for expansion is required. Do not provide trapeze type hangers for piping located in the Hoover classrooms with wood ceiling structure. (1) Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for any size pipe supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to the structure. (2) When trapeze hangers are not shown, furnish shop drawings of installation where there is doubt of the structural capacity for concentrated loads. 3. Copper Tubing Support: a. Hangers Touching Pipe: Provide copper plated hangers, split-ring extension hanger, Grinnell Figure 138R. b. Hangers on Outside of Insulation: Furnish same as specified for steel pipe. 4. Floor Supports: Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal piping from floor. a. Where bottom of piping is less than 1 '-6" above finish floor, furnish cast-iron pipe rests, Grinnell Figure 258, with pipe nipples to suit Fasten to floor. b. Where bottom of pipe is higher than 1 '-6" above finish floor andlor where provision for expansion is required, furnish pipe-roll stands, Grinnell Figure 271, without vertical adjustment, or Grinnell Figure 274 with vertical adjustment as PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 '" N r"'\ :c ~_! 1.1..J 0... -l LL :z: .'<:!: -, ..-- = <::::> c-...., required. Provide concrete piers or Unistrut or B-Line rack and fasten stands to piers or racks. 5. Wall Supports: Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal piping from wall: a. Furnish steel J-hook for pipe located close to wall, up to 3" pipe, Elcen Figure 46. b. For hanger suspension with 750 pound maximum loading, furnish light welded- steel bracket with hole for one rod, 3/4" diameter, Grinnell Figure 191. c. For pipe-roll stand support, furnish light welded-steel bracket for 700 pound maximum loading, Grinnell Figure 191. D. Vertical Piping Supports: 1 . All Pipe except Copper: a. Vertical pipe supports shall be steel extension pipe-clamps, Grinnell Figure 261. Refer to manufacturer's rated maximum loading for each size pipe. Bolt clamp securely to pipe, rest clamp-end extension on building structure. 2. Copper Tubing Support: a. For un-insulated vertical lines, provide copper finished steel riser clamp, Grinnell Figure CT 121 or plastic coated steel riser clamp, Grinnell CT 121 C. E. Beam Clamps: ~ 1. Non-"C-Style" beam clamps shall be malleable iron, Grinnell Figure 229 for 3/8" '" $: hanger rods, forged-steel beam clamp, Grinnell Figure 228 for hanger rod up to 1- 0:0 1/2". :J >-- 2. "C-Style" beam clamps shall be adjustable hanger rod type, malleable iron with set ("...) I- screw, jam nut, retaining clip, FM and UL approved, Grinnell Figure 61, 92, or 93. C 0 3. Where beam configuration does not allow horizontal movement of C-c1amp when set ~ ~ screw and jam nut are positioned, retaining clips may be omitted. ~)~erts: - 1. Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms. Provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 3" or equivalent. 2. Concrete inserts shall be as follows: Black malleable iron universal type for threaded connections with lateral adjustment, Grinnell Figure 282 for pipe sizes up to 8". G. Saddles and Shields: 1 . Saddles: a. Heating piping and on all domestic hot water piping where water temperature exceeds 120oF. (1) For all piping 2-1/2" and larger installed on clevis or ring supports, provide Carpenter and Patterson Figures 351 thru 356, Grinnell Figures 160 thru 166A, or Pipe Shields Model CS. (2) For all piping installed on roller supports, use the same saddles as listed above except use Pipe Shields Model CSX. b. Cooling Piping (less than 120oF.): (1) For all piping installed on clevis or ring supports, provide Pipe Shields Model CS-CW. (2) For all piping installed on roller supports, provide Pipe Shields Model CSX-CW. 2. Shields: a. Provide shields to protect insulation in all areas where saddles are not specified to protect insulation at areas of contact with hangers and supports. b. Provide Grinnell Figures 167 or 168. H. Anchors: 1 . Pipe anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping to PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 pipe and attaching anchor braces. Install anchor braces in the most effective manner to secure desired results. Do not install supports, anchors or similar devices where they will damage construction during installation or because of the weight or the expansion of the pipe. 2. Anchors shall be rigidly attached to substantial structure and shall resist movement, deflection, and bending. Attach anchors to steel structure by welding or bolting, and to concrete structure by cast-in-place insert ties or by an approved expansion anchoring technique. 3. Installation shall conform to anchor details as may be found on the Drawings, and to supplemental requirements specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 4. Provide factory made anchor components unless field conditions require shop- fabricated specials. I. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers with hold-down clamps or U-bolts may be provided for hanging two or more parallel pipes which have a uniform slope throughout their adjoining runs. Each trapeze shall be securely attached to and supported by two steel rods to structure. Each trapeze shall be designed to support the span weight of all piping, insulation, and fluid carried by itself. 2. Provide standard continuous-slot metal channel framing members and appurtenances for pipe support where shown. Provide a system manufactured by Grinnell-Power-Strut, B-Line, Unistrut, Mult-A-Frame, or Power-Strut pipe support systems. Hot-dip galvanize all such members and appurtenances. Fittings, clamps, screws, nuts, bolts and washers shall be either hot dip galvanized or cadmium coated. Provide plastic insulating sleeves inside copper tubing clamps. 3. If the Contractor elects to provide trapeze hangers for any portion of the Work, he shall provide engineering design and submit calculations, sealed by a practicing licensed professional en~in~~r, showing accurate weight balance and sup.~orti~ force at each hanger, sUltablhty of hanger rods and other componentsrt~lhty o~ connecting structure to satisfactorily carryall associated point loads, ~O (~ connection/anchoring requirements to be used and their suitability. )7 ::-!\ S:i: 4. Minimum hanger rod sizes and maximum hangerltrapeze spacing for 19Y1(, f'tessUfe" steam, hot water heating and chilled water systems shall be in accorda~(wjth ft:1\fS1 B31.1, B31.9 and MSS Standard Practice SP-58. -< C, -tJ 5. Do not use trapeze hangers for piping located in rooms with exposed wOod~d :::it: beam ceilings. S1. /~. r:-? ""- - J:'" c.J'\ -n --- r-- '-n )',.--..--.. c,._J PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Provide hangers to support the required loads. Where necessary, supports shall be designed to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Where Drawings show details of supports and anchors, conform to details shown. Where details are not shown, conform to requirements of this Section. B. Support piping with hangers in direct contact with the pipe for insulated piping not requiring a vapor barrier except on pipes where pipe saddles are specified. Size hangers to fit on the outside of insulation requiring a vapor barrier and on pipes having pipe saddles. C. Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Piping shall not be hung from other piping or ductwork. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Do not suspend pipe from metal roof deck. D. "C" clamps shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. Where non-insulated pipes, in which vibration may occur, pass through walls, floors, or partitions, encase pipe within acoustical wall sleeves. F. Support piping assemblies in inaccessible chases adequately enough to be rigid and serf- supporting before chase is closed. Provide adequate structural support for piping penetrating chase walls to fixtures. G. When piping is supported from walls, use welded steel brackets and wrought steel clamps. For hot pipes, furnish adjustable steel yoke and cast iron rollers. 3.2. HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Support horizontal piping on threaded hot rolled steel rod. Threaded rod shall not be reduced to sizes smaller than provided for in support thread sizes. B. Steel Pipe: Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports: Nominal Pipe Size, Inches 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 N V'~ Maximum Span, Feet N 5 6 7 7 9 10 11 12 14 16 17 f' ....... 6:0 t......J "'''io.- Minimum Rod, Inches UJ 0- UJ -1 >-= 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 -1 (.) l-- LL z ~ <iopper Tubing: """ b ~ Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports: --, r- = 0 Nominal Tubing Size, Inches = c.....J 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 6 Maximum Span, Feet 5 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 12 14 1. Furnish minimum rod size as specified for steel pipe of same pipe size. D. Plastic Piping: 1 . Applies to all thermo-plastic piping with either operating or anticipated ambient exposure temperatures up to 100oF. (maximum). 2. For pipe hanging other than included below, the pipe manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. 3. Maximum spacing between single supports for horizontal piping. Nominal Pipe Size, Inches 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" a. PVC (DWV) - (Schedule 40) Maximum Span, Feet 4 4.5 5 5 6 E. The spacing specified herein is included to limit deflection in the pipe to an acceptable minimum. Shorten intervals as necessary so the support manufacturers maximum recommended safe load values in accordance with ANSI B31 are not exceeded. PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 F. Trapeze Hanger: Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for any size pipe supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to the structure. Provide additional framing as required to transfer loads to adequate structure. G. Supporting rods shall be attached to concrete by inserts placed before concrete is poured or to plates installed in the concrete as described above. H. Supporting rods over 18" long shall be braced at every fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to the structure. 3.3. VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORT A. Support vertical piping with wrought steel riser clamps. Make adequate provision for expansion, contraction, and lateral stability. B. Support steel pipe at a minimum of every other floor as required to relieve joint stresses. c. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below, support clamp- end extension from inserts. 3.4. SADDLES AND SHIELDS A. After installation, saddles shall be filled with the specified pipe insulation. END OF SECTION 15140 Q.o 7 :::\ r-' c;::::) ':3 c.-- -;>;.. ~ .if'---'''' - - -r\ --- f- \ ---", \ \ ~-''''-'. "-~ .~, :~\ (~:. ~: 'Cre CJ.'7:" :z. --0 :;;~. r:-? y - <.f\ PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 N ~ N f") JC ~C l-..; [1:_ LLi a.. UJ i' .... --' ,,- --1 (:.J t= LL ":!'P :>-0 -- t"-- :5( ,~ J OS: ....... <=;> 0 = e..... PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15140 - 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators for mechanical equipment to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. It includes adjusting each mounting system, and measurement of isolator system performance when so requested by the Architect. Specific mounting arrangements for each item of mechanical equipment shall be as described and as indicated by schedules and details on the Drawings. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain from the drawings and confirm from shop drawings the approved manufacturers name, model number, and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate all resilient mounting systems with the exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between the vibration isolation device fabrication and the equipment manufacturer is required. ~-."t B. Obtain all necessary data in regard to piping systems which are to be resiliently ~p.orted ~ that proper isolators can be selected. Select piping systems isolators for proper e09f~nation. with the physical arrangement of pipe lines and with the physical characteristics 01 the, : . . "...--..... "~ - bUilding. '::: -n ---' ~ "'." -.... (--(~ -~..., 1.3.8UBMITTALS -.-- --1-.-1 s_~~ >~ \_j r' ) A. Shop drawings and product data: 1. Shop drawings shall include specific information as follows: Y ()l a. Manufacturer's model number for each isolator, the machine or pipeline to which it is to be applied, and the number of isolators to be furnished for each machine or pipeline. b. For steel spring mounts or hangers: free height, deflected height, solid height, isolator loading, and diameter of spring coil. c. For neoprene isolators: free height, deflected height, and isolator loading. d. Dimensional and weight data for concrete inertia bases, steel and rail bases, and details of isolator attachment. e. For curb mounted rooftop equipment: wind resistance details. 1.4. JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing conditions: 1 . Notify the Architect of any project conditions which affect vibration isolation system installation or performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated by the Drawings or described by the specifications. Should vibration isolation system installation proceed without such notifications, any remedial Work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall be accomplished by the subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping supports, temperature control connections, drain lines, building construction, etc., and notify the involved contractor as to these problems or potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify the Architect so that preventive or remedial action can take place on a timely basis. Any remedial VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS 05.038 A&J #200640.00 measures required shall be undertaken by the subcontractor responsible at no additional cost to the Owner. A. Vibration isolators shall be selected by the isolator manufacturer in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Furnish deflections shown. Not all isolator types specified are used. Refer to the drawing schedule for specific requirements. B. Where shown, scheduled, or specified, provide specific vibration isolation equipment, manufactured by Mason Industries. Inc., Peabody Noise Control, Korfund Dynamics Corp., or Vibration Mounting and Controls, Inc. Where specific type of vibration isolation equipment is not shown or specified, furnish isolators recommended by one of the isolation manufacturers listed above, compatible with equipment arrangements shown. A single manufacturer for all vibration isolation equipment is required except as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. C. Bases: 1. Base Type A - steel base: bases shall be one of the following types as determined by the isolator manufacturer. a. Integral structural steel base: bases shall be rectangular in shape for all equipment other than refrigeration machines and pump bases which may be T- shaped. Pump bases for split case pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/1 Oth of the longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" (360 mm) provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1" (25 mm). Bases shall be Mason Type "WF." b. Steel rail base: bases shall be for equipment having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent stress in the equipment. 1) Bases with spring isolators: bases shall be constructed of steel wide flange members welded to height saving brackets. Base shall be Mason Type "ICS." 2) Bases with neoprene isolators: base shall be steel channel rails, Mason Type "DNR." ('\oJ ~ N ~O r, :c o:~ L-J 0- W UJ .....Jr Oc -l 0 >- LL z L_< <"C( O~ ""'"') r-- 0 = = C'-..! D. Isolators: 1. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. 2. Isolator Type 1 - neoprene mountings: double deflection neoprene mounting shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for those areas where bolting is required. Use Mason Type "NO." 3. Isolator Type 2 - freestanding springs: spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base-plate and the support. All mounting shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Springs shall be Mason Type "SLF." VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 4. Isolator Type 3 - housed spring mounting with limit stop: springs in housings shall be as specified for Type 2. Housing shall include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed as when equipment is drained. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection and the installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used outside shall be hot dipped galvanized. Use Mason Type "SLR." 5. Isolator Type 4 - vibration hanger: vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Hangers shall be Mason Type "30N.' 6. Isolator Type 5 _ vibration hangers: vibration hangers shall be specified for Type 4, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Hangers shall be Mason Type "PC30N." 7. Isolator Type 6 - vibration hanger: vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short circuiting of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters...9.-nd hanger. box lower holes sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod tO~wing .., through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuitin~th~pring-:-' Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provislonk> attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Hangers shall be Mason Type ~39~" -.::. 8. Isolator Type 7 - vibration hanger: hanger shall be a double deflection ~ne-il1- shear Type 2 having a minimum static deflection of 0.35". Hanger shalfberMaso~'''. Type "HD" or "WHD." C) /.::. r:: or ;;.~... . --\ "\ "" \ ..-~,' 'I, ',,-j E. Isolation of piping systems: :P <..)\ 1. All piping which connects to resiliently mounted andlor vibrating equipment shall be suspended with resilient hangers or supported by floor mounted isolators. The first three supports from the connected machine shall have the same static deflection as indicated for the machine. The next two supports shall have static deflection at least equal to one-half of the static deflection indicated for the machine mounting, and the remaining pipe supports shall provide static deflection of 0.35" minimum. 2. Where static deflection in excess of 0.35" is required, floor isolators shall be Type 3 and isolation hangers shall be Type 5. Where deflection of 0.35" or less is required, floor isolators shall be Type 1 and isolation hangers shall be Type 7. 3. Flexible connections: a. Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used to connect all piping to all isolated equipment except equipment for which flexible connectors are not permitted by code or at connections to terminal units. For applications where code prohibits using flexible connectors, provide swing connections changing direction a minimum of 3 times before joining isolated equipment. Swing connections should be made within approximately 6 feet of the isolated equipment. b. Connectors to equipment other than terminal units shall be manufactured of multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Connectors up to and including 2" diameter may have threaded ends. Connectors 2-1/2" and larger shall be manufactured with floating steel flanges. All connections shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 220oF. All VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements N ~ N " ::":-'::0 i__J :c 0:_ UJ a.. W __J" - --1 Ur:=- r ~, U_ ;>- .....J Z 1"-<( ~.:;:r.: """") Os r-- <::::> 0 = ""' 05.038 A&J #200640.00 flanged equipment shall be directly connected to neoprene elbows in the size range 2-1/2" through 6" or any larger available size if the piping makes a 90 degree turn at the equipment; all straight through connections shall be made with either flanged or screwed connectors properly pre-extended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional elongation under pressure. Sizes 12" and larger operating at pressures above 100 psi shall employ control cables with end fittings isolated from the anchoring plates by means of 1/2" thick bridge bearing neoprene washer bushings designed for a maximum of 1000 psi. c. Elbows shall be Mason-flex Type "Mfnec," straight connectors Mason-flex Type "Mftfu" or "Mftnc," and control cable assemblies Type "ACC"; all manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. d. Connectors to terminal units shall be manufactured of double braid stainless steel hose. The connectors shall have an 1/8" offset motion and shall have standard ASA 150 pound flanges at over two inch connector size. The flexible connectors shall be Minnesota Flexible Corporation FFCS Series Pump Connectors or Architect approved equal. The flanged connectors shall have the following live lengths, unless indicated differently on the drawings. e. Connections to terminal units at two inches and less piping sizes shall be double braided, stainless steel hose. The connectors shall have an 1/8" offset and shall have male NPT end connections. The threaded connectors shall have the following minimum live lengths unless indicated differently on the plans for vibration control. Hose Inside Diameter (Inches) 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1 -1/2 2 Minimum Overall Length (inches) 6-1/2 7 8 8-1/2 9 10-1/2 Live Length (Inches) 2-1/4 2-1/2 3 3 3-1/2 4-1/2 Provide flexible, braided steel pipe connectors to the terminal units (Airedale Units) that are at least 18" long. Hose Inside Diameter (Inches) 2 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 Overall Lenath (Inches) 9 9 9 9 11 11 12 13 14 Live Lenath (inches) 6-7/8 6- 7/8 6- 7/8 6- 7/8 8-1/4 8-1/4 9 10 11 4. Drain connections form isolated equipment to floor drains shall be at least 1" free from drain. 5. Acoustical sleeves: where piping passes through equipment room walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete shall be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240oF. 10 lb. density fiberglass shall be used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Mason Type "SWS." 6. Piping not specified to be supported by resilient hangers but located in mechanical equipment room shall have either fiberglass insulation or a felt strip between the hanger and the pipe wall. 7. Piping smaller than 2" in diameter shall have resilient hangers if specified on the drawings. 8. Vertical pipe risers shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolating expansion hangers. Hangers shall have a minimum rated deflection of four times the anticipated pipe expansion and shall be enclosed in a housing for fail-safe operation. Hangers shall be Type 4. Friction clamps are not permitted. 9. Install resilient hangers on any piping that is not resiliently supported but is causing excessive vibration when in operation. The Architect will decide to what extent resilient hangers shall be used to replace the rigid supports. F. Isolation of fractional horsepower equipment: All fractional horsepower fans, pumps, etc., which are mounted on or suspended from floors that are not on-grade, shall be isolated with neoprene-in-shear isolators furnished by the vibration isolation supplier except where such isolators are furnished as an integral part of the machine. G. Electrical connections to resiliently mounted equipment: Electrical connections to equipment which is supported or suspended by vibration isolators shall be made with long lengths of flexible conduit or flexible armored cable. These flexible connections must be located so as to prevent rigid connections between the resiliently mounted equipment and the building structure. H. Replace isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which do not produce the required isolation. r-.' I. Notify the Architect of project conditions which affect vibration isolation systenUnstallatih~ or performance and which are found to be different from conditions indicated. ::~:: CJ ,. --'J J. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping (appoTts, -- electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, building ood~fr1Jctionand notify the involved contractor about these problems or potential problems. Wner~such :":J situations cannot be easily resolved, notify the Architect so that preventive or ~~ial actlon can take place on a timely basis. :-:~:,/ , r:? )> K. Non-vibrating equipment such as water heaters shall be supported by Type 1 isolators. U1 -.:'1 . --~ ~1. ....j L. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for the supplementary bases, a tabulation of the design data on the isolators, including outside diameter, free, operating, and solid heights of the springs, free and operating heights of the neoprene or fiberglass isolators, and isolation efficiency based on the lowest operating speed of the equipment supported. M. Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork connections to all air-moving units. The connections shall be neoprene impregnated canvas of approved construction meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A. N. All ductwork, for a minimum distance of 30'-0" from air moving devices such as fans up and downstream shall be isolated from the structure with combination spring and neoprene hangers in the supporting members. Hangers shall be Type 6, as described above and shall have a static deflection of 1/4". VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 . 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Vibration isolation hangers: 1 . Resilient hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting overhead structure. The machine suspension points shall be in a rigid and heavy portion of the building structure. Suspension of machines from lightweight floor slabs shall be avoided, particularly at the center of structural spans. Do not suspend from metal roof deck. 2. Suspension rods shall be attached to rigid member of the machine structure. When such attachment points do not exist, a heavy steel framework shall be furnished to support the machine with suspension rods attached to this framework. 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted equipment and piping to assure that all vibration isolators are installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Replace, at no extra cost to the Owner, any isolators which do not produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or which in any way do not produce the required isolation. END OF SECTION 15240 n t...--.-J LU .-J - LL ..'-- ~,.x: -., r- = = c--J v~ fx::O II \ "---l >-- CJ t:: 0, u ,:~- 1-- <l~ O~ o N N .- ~ a.. VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15240 - 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 . SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanical equipment insulation and sound attenuating material. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding (unless otherwise specified): 1. Flame Spread: 25 2. Smoke Developed: 50 3. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and flame resistant cloth for fittings shall have the same component rating as listed above. B. All insulation performance (thickness, R-value) shall meet Energy Code Requirements, as a minimum. 1.3. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Material shall be furnished to the job bearing manufacturer's label. 1.4. SUBMITTALS r',' A. Submit shop drawings for duct insulation, pipe insulation, sound attenuating miJ~rial and..~ insulation covering. :.::~ () c__ )~> =~'1 _.~.., , I PART 2. PRODUCTS C) 2.1. MATERIALS - ,:: -.-, - ! I' . A. Tape: Wherever tape is used for sealing purposes, it shall be of type and appli~:.as" "'.) recommended by the nonconductive covering manufacturer. Where recommerUJ8tion is .- lacking, tape used shall be sealed with Minnesota Mining adhesive EC-1329. Ul ------; ,_.j B. Insulating Cement: Insulating cement shall be Owens-Corning 110 mineral wool, all purpose cement. Where insulating cement is applied to pipe fittings in concealed locations, it shall be "one coat" cement. C. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1. Insulation shall be a one-piece type made from long glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin molded into a hollow cylinder and jacketed with a kraft-reinforced foil all-service vapor barrier jacket (ASJ). The jacketing shall have a factory applied double pressure-sensitive adhesive system which provides positive closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. 2. Physical Properties: a. Operating temperature range: -20oF. to +850oF. (-290C. to +4540C). b. Thermal Conductivity: -0.25 BTU-IN/hr-sq.ft. - deg. F (0.036 wattlm-k) at 750F. (240C.) c. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm max. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Certainteed Snap On, Knauf Pipe Insulation, Manville Micro-Lok, or Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL.II. MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements (\ L-.J UJ _1 LL 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Fiberglass Duct Wrap Insulation: 1. Insulation shall consist of an inorganic blanket of glass fiber, factory-laminated to a reinforced foil kraft (FRK) vapor barrier facing. A 2" (50 mm) stapling and taping flange shall be provided on one edge. 2. Physical Properties: a. Operating Temperature Range: 40oF. to 2500F (50C. to 12PC). b. Density: 0.75Ib/cu. ft. (12 kg/cu. m). c. Thermal Conductivity: 0.31 BTU-IN/hr-eq. ft. - deg. F (0.045 wattlm-k). d. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perms max. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Certainteed, Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning. N E. Acoustical Duct Liner: 1. General: Acoustical duct liner shall be a bonded mat of glass fiber coated with a black pigmented fire-resistant coating on the airstream side. Liner shall be suitable for operating temperatures up to 250oF. (121 OC). Liner shall be manufactured by Certainteed, Knauf, Manville, or Owens Corning. Flexible Liner: Liner shall have a minimum density of 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot (24 kilograms per cubic meter) and shall be suitable for air velocities up to 5000 feet per minute (1525 meters/minute). Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.28 BUT/HR square foot degrees F/IN (0.040 WattlMetre-Kalvin) at 750F. (240C). Sound absorption coefficient shall not be less than 0.65 in the 500 cycles/sec. octave band center frequency for 1" (2.54 cm) thick material based on No.6 mounting in accordance with ASTM C423-77 test procedure. Air friction correction factor shall not exceed 1.20 at 1500 fpm (458 meters/min) and 1.25 at 5000 fpm (1525 meters/min) based on TIMA Test Method AHS-152. Rigid Duct Liner Board: Liner shall have a minimum density of 3 pounds per cubic foot (48 kilograms per cubic meter) and shall be suitable for air velocities up to 4000 fpm (1220 meters/min). Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.23 BTUlHR square foot degrees FIIN (0.033 WattlMetre/Kalvin) at 750F. (240C). Sound absorption coefficient shall be not less than 0.64 in the 500 cycle/sec. octane band center frequency for 1" (2.54 cm) thick material based on No.6 mounting in accordance with ASTM C423 test procedure. Air friction correction factor shall not exceed 1.25 at 1500 fpm (458 meters/min) and 1.3 at 3000 fpm (815 meters/min). N 2. :<C '-../5 ::~o ,L- W -1 >-=. C.)l= 'r-' () 1-:<:( 0$ 03. :c 0... % 4';:;;:( J r-- = c:::> c-..J F. Fiber glass semi-rigid board insulation: 1 . Board form: a. Insulation shall be made from inorganic glass fibers preformed into boards bonded by a thermosetting resin, and furnished with an All-Service Jacket (ASJ) composed of a reinforced white kraft and aluminum foil laminate with the white kraft facing out. b. Physical Properties: 1) Temperature Limit: to 450oF. (2320C). 2) Density: 3 Ibs/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m.). 3) Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F (0.036 wattlm-k) at 750F. (240C). 4) Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. c. Manufacturers: Insulation shall be Certainteed 1 B Board, Knauf Insulation Board, Manville 800 Series Spin-Glass, or Owens-Corning 700 Series. 2. Flexible forms: a. Insulation shall be composed of high temperature fiber glass bonded to a flexible jacket with the end grain of the insulation perpendicular to the jaCket surface. This construction shall provide a product of high compressive strength while permitting the insulation to conform to rounded surfaces without reducing the MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 thickness. Jacket shall be a laminated kraft aluminum foil all service jacket (ASJ) with vapor barrier. b. Physical Properties: 1) Temperature Limit: to 650oF. (3430C). 2) Density: 3lbs/cu. ft. (48/cu. m.) 3) Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F (0.039 wattlm-k) at 750F. (240C). 4) Water Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perms. 3. Manufacturer's insulation shall be Knauf Flex-Wrap, Manville Pipe and Tank Insulation, or Owens-Corning Pipe Wrap Insulation. G. Insulated piping that is exposed to high moisture conditions, such as exist in the kitchen and dishwashing areas of the church, shall have insulation protected by waterproof PVC jacket except do not install PVC jacket over pipe saddles on high temperature piping. Provide plastic jacketing and fitting covers by Ceel-Co., 12990 W. Cedar Dr., Lakewood, Colorado 80228. Jacket thickness shall be 0.028" (0.71 mm) and shall be suitable for temperatures from -40oF. to 180oF. (-40C. to 830C). Jacketing shall be provided with a minimum 1" (25 mm) overlap. All longitudinal and circumferential seams shall be welded together as recommended by manufacturer. Provide Ceel-Co. Series 330 UVR (Ultraviolet Ray Resistant) PVC plastic jacketing. Provide "hard" inserts at hanger locations that do not transmit heat from the pipe surface to PVC jacket. H. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Insulation shall be of closed-cell structure with a smooth surface. shall be factory molded to fit the pipe snugly. C) 2. Type E-1 Insulation: -, a. Density: 6lbs/cu. ft. (96 kg.lcu.m.). _ -, ,., b. Operating Temperature Ranges: -40oF. to +220oF. (-40oC. to 1040C).< .' c. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F (0.040 watVm-k)~~i5QF. r:? (240C.). .;~ d. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. e. Flame Spread: 25. f. Smoke Density: 50 for thickness 3/4" (19 mm) and smaller, 100 for 1" (25 mm) thickness. g. Pipe insulation shall be Armstrong AP Armaflex, Halstead Insul-Tube, or Rubatex R-180-FS. Sheet insulation shall be Armstrong Armaflex II, Halstead Insul- Tube, or Rubatex R-1800~FS. 3. Type E-2 Insulation: a. Insulation shall be preslit tubular form with a pressure-sensitive adhesive system for closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal joint. b. Density: 4 Ibs/cu. ft. (64 kg.lcu.m.). c. Operating Temperature Ranges: 40oF. to 2000F (4.40C. to 930C). d. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 BTU-IN/hr-sq. ft. - deg. F. e. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.20 perm-in. f. Flame Spread: 25. g. Smoke Density: 50. h. Pipe insulation shall be Armstrong Self-Seal Armaflex 2000. ,. " , C." --' -,':' r Pipe i~sPQ~n .- -"n -- '. ., ....__.,~..- , \_j .' (..n I. Pre-molded Pipe Fitting Covers: 1. Covers, fiberglass insulation fittings located in equipment rooms and behind ceilings and walls that are not to be painted, shall be factory-premolded one-piece polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Covers shall have a snow-white finish and shall withstand surface operating temperatures from 350F. to 150oF. (20C. to 650C) continuous usage. All covers shall conform to Federal Specification L-P-535, Composition A, Type II, and MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r......, L.....J LLJ _I LL PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 shall be Ceel-Co Series 500Z, Certainteed "snap-form" or Zeston 2000. 2. Premolded covers for fiberglass insulation fittings that are specified to be painted _ fiberglass fittings with all-service vapor barrier jacket similar to adjacent pipe covering. J. Pipe insulation jackets (fiberglass insulation exposed to outside) 1. Aluminum jacket shall be 0.016" thick, type 3003 or 5005 alloys with 3/16" longitudinal or circumferential corrugations. Jacket shall have an acceptable factory- applied vapor barrier on the inside and shall be applied using aluminum straps over transverse joints. Corrugations shall match from one section of cover to the other. On vertical runs upper cover shall lap over lower cover and seams shall be toward walls, horizontal seams shall be on the bottom of the run. Fitting and valve jackets ~hall be factory fabricated and of the same material as the pipe jacket. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. The insulation and materials shall be applied only by mechanics skilled at such Work. The appearance of the finished Work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical correctness and efficiency. Insulation for heating surfaces and piping shall not be applied until such times as those surfaces are sufficiently heated to properly dry out the insulation. Insulation shall not be applied to a specific system until the system has been pressure and leak tested as specified. N B. Installation: :;; 1. Wherever vapor barriers and waterproof covering are specified, all portions of the 'j >- covering at joints and fittings shall be vapor sealed. 8J 0 2. Insulation shall be continuous through all walls, floors, and ceilings, unless otherwise _.J >-:- specified, or shown. c.J l-: 3. Where insulation is to be painted, all surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive ,() paint. Coordinate the insulation type and associated covering with the painting r.= ~,.. requirements. Refer to Section 15010 for additional coordination requirements. o ~ 4. Insulate unions, flanges, and valve bodies but not operating handwheels or levers. o 5. Application of all materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. The insulation shall be handled in a manner that will not adversely affect its structural or insulating properties. 7. Support shall be provided for the insulation on vertical lines to prevent the insulation from slipping downward. . 8. Care shall be taken so as not to place insulation over vent and drain inlets and outlets. 9. Self-sealing laps shall have an additional field applied coat of adhesive applied to the opposite mating surface. a. Both hot and cold pipe self-sealing jacket laps on longitudinal and butt joints shall be stapled at 6" (150 mm) maximum spacing (both exposed and concealed). On cold pipe insulation, the staples and the longitudinal and butt edges shall be sealed with mastic. 10. Fittings and Valves: a. Hot pipelines (above 60oF.) (150C): Flanges, couplings, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be insulated with factory premolded, prefabricated or field fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be provided with not less than three segments. When nesting size sections of insulation are used, all voids shall be filled with insulating cement or mineral fiber. Sections of MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-4 N x: a.. z ~ J r-- <= C:::;:) ,....., Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 insulation shall be secured in place with wire or by joining the sections with adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied over the insulation in two coats with tape embedded between coats. Tape shall overlap itself 1" (25 mm) and adjoining insulation jacket 2" (50 mm). In lieu of above finish, factory-premolded one-piece polyvinyl chloride fitting covers shall be used, where specified hereinafter. Polyvinyl chloride fitting covers shall be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding, or taping. When polyvinyl chloride fitting covers are used, factory precut blanket inserts provided by the fitting cover manufacturer may be used. Inserts shall be installed in accordance with the fitting manufacturer's recommendations. (When required, insulated flanges, couplings, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be covered with preformed or field-fabricated sections of aluminum jacket secured with bands in lieu of finishes specified above. When pipe insulation with factory-applied aluminum jacket is provided, flanges, valves and fittings may be insulating with factory-or-field-fabricated sections of the same material and thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and jacket. Sections shall be secured with bands.) Unless otherwise shown, unions will not be insulated and pipe insulation and jacket shall terminate neatly at the ends of unions. All termination points shall be finished with brush coat of adhesive. b. Cold pipelines (-30oF. to +600F) (-340C. to 150C): Flanges, couplings, unions, valves, anchors and fittings unless otherwise shown shall be insulated with factory pre-molded, prefabricated or field fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. Anchors, when secured directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a distance to prevent condensation, but not less than 6" (150 mm) from the surface of the pipe insulation. Insulation and vapor barrier shall be extended to cover glands and stem completely. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be ,;:..', provided with not less than three segments. When nesting size secticCQ) of ' insulation are used, all voids shall be filled with insulating cement or nilffetal fiber. Sections of insulation shall be secured in place with wire or by joi'riiriifthe sections with adhesive. Vapor barrier coating shall be applied over tha::jqs~Iation:. in two coats with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape shall overkW~it$elf 1" (25 mm) and adjoining insulation jacket 2" (50 mm). The coating shall~ \ :.,~ applied to a total dry film thickness of not less than 1/16" (1.6 mm). In l~eu)o!1he 1".' above vapor barrier coating, factory-pre-molded one piece polyvinyl chlor1Q.e ' .' fitting covers may be used, where specified hereinafter. Polyvinyl chloridMitting -c:;, covers shall be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding, or taping with vapor barrier tape. Staples or tacks and fittings cover edges shall be sealed with vapor barrier coating, in accordance with the fitting cover manufacturer's recommendations. When polyvinyl chloride fitting covers are used, factory precut blanket inserts provided by the fitting cover manufacturer may be used. Inserts shall be installed in accordance with the fitting cover manufacturer's recommendations. (When required, insulated flanges, couplings, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be covered with preformed or filed-fabricated sections of aluminum jacket applied over the vapor barrier and secured with bands). Where unions are shown to be not insulated, the pipe insulation and jacket shall terminate neatly at the ends of the unions. Ends of pipe insulation shall be seated to the pipe with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating at termination points, valves, flanges, and fittings. 11. Pipe Insulation: -'-Il r---- '.. ..., \ -~ '~--1 ,-j a. Plumbing Systems: Insulation shall be fiberglass pipe insulation or flexible elastomeric, Type E-1 or Type E.2, thickness as scheduled below. Cooling coil condensate drain piping shall only have flexible elastomeric insulation, Type E-1 or Type E.2. Plumbing piping that is specified to be painted shall be fiberglass insulation. MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvement~ 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SYSTEM TEMP RANGE PIPE SIZES, inches Non-eire. Runouts 1-1/4 and less 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 and up UP to 1 in. Domestic Hot Any 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 water, Domestic cold water inside pipe chases behind walls or above ceilinas w ~ N (....., Vo ::c CC_-:f.. t_, 0- U.J LU ....J >=' I (.) c:: -, '--- (.) LL z f:-~ "'::t ....., Os r-- <.::::> 0 = C"-J b. Service water piping shall be insulated per Energy Code Requirements. 12. Valves and Fitting Jackets: a. Valves and fitting jacket shall be as scheduled below: SYSTEM LOCATION JACKET Domestic Hot Water All Exposed Pre-molded Cover Domestic Cold Water All Concealed Tape and Vapor Barrier or Pre-molded Cover 13. Duct Insulation: a. Duct insulation shall be as scheduled below. All flexible ductwork shall be insulated similar to rigid ductwork. SYSTEM LOCATION INSULATION FORM Exhaust Air All from exhaust fan to other terminal Fiberglass Flexible Duct Flexible Wrap, 1 W' Acoustical Wrap 1) Ceiling spaces used as air plenums or fitted with decorative ceiling supports but not tiles, shall be considered as cooled and heated spaces. Ceiling spaces that are not connected to heated occupied areas shall be coupled unheated spaces. 2) Where acoustical duct liner is used, the duct sizes shown on the Drawings shall be net inside dimensions. 3) Refer to the drawings for additional requirements for acoustical lining for transfer ducts. 4) Ceiling spaces in corridor whether fitted with decorative support or tiles shall not be considered as cooled or heated space. 14. The insulation subcontractor/Division 15 contractor shall provide all insulation in the field for ductwork and piping systems that are field installed, even if such components are installed inside a terminal unit. END OF SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15250-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING f"' , ~...~ ..., ..1 PART 1. GENERAL c) ...~~::-~. Cl c~_.. -1,\ _.---,; 1.1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK ,.- ,-, A. This Section includes the following: 1 . Sanitary and equipment drain piping 2. Potable hot and cold water 3. Pressurized drain systems at pump discharge 4. Underground site sanitary and potable water -q ......../ --- ( ~:? ~-..", ~::..- y r:? --- u' 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. It is the intent of this Specification that all Work be acceptable under an applicable standard stated or cited in the Uniform Plumbing Code or accepted as suitable for proposed use under procedures and powers of authority having jurisdiction. 2. Finish Work shall conform as nearly as practicable to essential requirements of this Section. Connection to sewers shall be as required by local authorities. Where existing utilities are shown to be abandoned or removed, perform all Work required and remove or close off as required by local codes. 1 .3. SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: furnish to Owner and Architect a certificate of compliance with the chlorination of system paragraph in this Section. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Potable Water Piping: 1. Water service (including softened water and hot circulating) under the floor slab shall be one of the following types: a. Cement-lined ductile cast iron with ductile iron water service fittings having restrained (lock-ring) or push-on mechanical joint type. b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe for domestic water service mains shall conform to AWWA C900, SDR 14, Pressure Class 200 for sizes 4" to 12". 1 ) Pipe joints shall be through integral bell end with factory installed elastomeric ring. Elastomeric ring shall conform to ASTM F477. 2) Fittings shall be cast iron compatible with pipe specified or shall be PVC manufactured by the same manufacturer as the pipe. a) Underfloor domestic hot and cold water; ASTM B88 Type K, hard temper water tube without any joints under the floor. Insulate this underfloor domestic water piping as specified in Section 15250. 2. Hot and Cold Potable Water Piping inside the building and pressurized drain piping: a. All piping 2" and smaller shall be Drawn copper tubing, Type L, fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper or cast bronze (tinned when brazed). b. All piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be drawn copper tubing, Type L. Fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper or cast bronze (tinned when brazed). PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Exposed piping in finished rooms of the facility used in connection with plumbing fixtures shall be chromium-plated brass pipe with plated cast brass fittings. d. PEX piping shall be in accordance with requirements specified in the Uniform Plumbing Code. N N B. Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping: 1 . Sanitary and vent piping above grade shall be service weight or heavier cast iron soil pipe and fittings, standard weight galvanized steel pipe with black cast iron drainage fittings, or copper drainage tube (DWV) with cast bronze or wrought copper drainage fittings. Within limits of local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction, above ground sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping may be ABS Schedule 40 or PVC DWV Schedule 40 (U.S. Standard) or heavier plastic pipe. Sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping underground outside the building wall shall be service weight or heavier cast iron soil pipe and fittings. Underground joints in cast iron soil pipe to be made with packed oakum and lead. Within limits of local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction, underground sanitary drainage and vent piping may be hard temper copper tube type DWV or heavier, ABS or PVC DWV Schedule 40 (U.S. Standard) or heavier plastic pipe. a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe shall conform to ASTM 03034, SDR 35. 1) Pipe joints shall be through integral bell end with factory installed elastomeric ring. Joint shall be in accordance with ASTM 03212. 2) Fittings shall be cast iron compatible with pipe specified or shall be PVC manufactured by the same manufacturer as the pipe. 3. Vent and re-vent and drainage piping used in the spaces above the ceiling shall be Type M copper (DMV). No PVC or ABS shall be used for this location. ~ va CC~ W ........1 [!i' f.... . , ~ .,_.- -.....-.1_ 0'0- () (~ Os Q r"'" t_..J U.J i ---.. x: a.. LL z .~ J r- = = '" PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Potable Piping: 1. Underground and Under Slab Service Mains: a. Concrete anchor blocks shall be installed on all otherwise non-restrained underground lines at tees and elbows to prevent fittings from being blown off lines when under pressure. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, they shall be valved, plugged, or capped as shown on Drawings. Where connections are made between new Work and existing mains, connections shall be made by using specials and fittings to suit actual conditions. b. Ductile Iron Service: Install ductile iron pipe in accordance with all applicable requirements of AWWA Standard C600. c. Copper Service: Clean joining surfaces thoroughly by hand. Apply flux immediately after cleaning. Do not rely on flux for actual cleaning. Fill all voids with solder as flux leaves to ensure a strong joint. Make joints with 95-5 tin-antimony solder, Stay-Brite Solder by J.w. Harris Co., Inc., or by cadmium free brazing. (Lead is not permitted.) Select flux compatible with type joint being made. All joints shall comply with local codes and ordinances. Use Type K copper tubing for underground and under slab service that is taken from a single coil so there are no under floor joints. 2. Above Ground Piping: a. Mains shall be run as shown on Drawings and shall be evenly pitched, 1" in 50 feet (0.2 percent). PLUMBING PIPING ' , SECTION 15410-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 b. Allowance for expansion shall be made in the installation of all piping so the usual variation in temperature will not cause undue stress at any point. Pipes shall be securely anchored where necessary to properly distribute expansion stresses. c. System shall be arranged for complete drainage with 3/4" hose valves at low points. d. Lines and risers shall be anchored as may be necessary to prevent noise or vibration when water is turned on or off. e. Each branch and riser shall be separately valved, and all such valves shall be made accessible. f. Where Drawings indicate fixtures to be furnished by others, provide all rough-in stops and supplies and connect such fixtures to the plumbing system. g. Piping shall be balanced, vented and adjusted to provide proper circulation and to prevent hammer and thumping. h. Joints in copper piping shall be made with 95-5 tin-antimony solder, Stay-Brite Solder by J.w. Harris Co., Inc., or by cadmium free brazing. (Lead is not permitted.) i. Joints in PEX piping shall be metal insert or metal compression fittings complying with UPC requirements. B. Sanitary Piping: 1 . Ream all pipe to full diameter after cutting and thoroughly clean before erection. Run all piping as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets and conceal piping in finished rooms unless shown or specified otherwise. Arrange pipe lines to give ample room for pipe insulation. ,.~~, 2. All horizontal sanitary waste and storm drainage and vent piping of 3" dia~er and lejs shall be installed with a fall of not less than 1/4" per foot (2 percent). All han;~al s~,tary . drainage and vent piping larger than 3" shall be installed with a fall of not Ie!s tb~n 1/a": per ~ foot (1 percent). Where conditions do not permit building drains and sewer~tp-be installed \,- with a fall as great as that specified, then a lesser slope may be permitted p~oviged the . computed velocity will not be less than 2 feet per second. - . .,', - ,"'I 3. All horizontal sewer piping shall be run with a fall not less than 1/4" per foot upl(l~$~ r:? '- ~ specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings. '.;:..~ . 4. Vent pipes shall extend through the roof full size, with the exception that no v~ throug'b.... roof shall be less than 4" at the roof. Extend vents above roof minimum 12" or as required by local codes and ordinances or authority having jurisdiction. Vents through roof shall be flashed and counter-flashed using a manufactured neoprene rubber modular flashing system or with 4 pounds per square foot sheet lead flashing extending a minimum of 10" in all directions from the pipe and a minimum of 12" above roof. Counter-flashing shall be turned down inside the top of pipe and overlap lower flashing by 4". To prevent movement in any direction, vent pipes through roof shall be supported both horizontally and vertically above last pipe joint before penetrating roof. 5. All sanitary piping located outside of the building shall have a minimum of 36 inches of groundcover on top of the piping in all cases. If maintaining that depth of groundcover is not feasible because of the grades and landscaping specified in other sections, the Contractor shall install 4'-0" wide by 8'-0", one inch "styrofoam" insulation boards on top of the piping. Fill shall be placed on top of the insulation sheets. .....-....\ 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping system leak tests: 1. Potable water piping: a. After completion of the Work, but before final payment is made, Contractor shall run a test over a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of all apparatus, etc., and the system as a whole. PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r"", i---.i lJj '" N ~ 'V'S -~C 0: __:: L.U -___I '>-~ C) f::: , ... ";- ,-. ( :=sc ()< 6 b. Pressure tests: make pressure tests in the presence of Owner's Representative or the General Contractor's Representative. 1) Potable water service (below ground): after buried pipe is laid, joints completed, and trench partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, newly laid piping or any valved section of piping shall, unless otherwise specified, be subjected to a pressure test as specified in Section 15101 at points of reading. All pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined during the open trench test. Joints, fittings or the portion of piping showing visible leakage shall be made tight or repaired. Cracked or defective pipe, fittings, or valves disclosed in the pressure test shall be repaired and retested until test results are satisfactory to Architect. 2) Potable water service (above ground): all above ground piping shall be tested in accordance with Section 15101. 2. Sanitary sewer drainage piping: a. Make pressure tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. b. All waste drainage piping, including branch bends and ferrule joints, shall be tested by closing all openings before any fixtures are set and filling entire system with water, or by air pressure tests as required by Architect. ...... a: _J fI -:::>~ -- 'l;1r;~ J r-. <:::. c:::l C''-J B. Chlorination of domestic (potable) water system: 1. Chlorinate all new domestic hot and cold water lines to comply with local or state health officials, and with UPC requirements. 2. This Work shall be witnessed by General Contractor or Owner's Representative. 3. Chlorinating agent shall be applied at the start of a new line and shall be injected through a corporation cock or similar device, to insure complete chlorination of all pipe. 4. Calcium hypochlorite shall be used where applicable and shall be commercial products such as H.T.H., Perchloron, or Mexochloron. The calcium hypochlorite must first be mixed to a homogeneous paste. The paste must contain approximately five (5) percent available chlorine by weight. The paste must then be thinned to a slurry and mixed with water to obtain a resultant consistency of 100 parts per million. This mixture must be fed into pipeline and retained for a one-hour contact period. All valves must then be opened in groups of three and water of 100 parts per million calcium chlorite concentration run through for a ten minute interval for each group of valves. 5. After chlorination, all valves shall be opened and water run through to waste for a ten minute period or until the waste water indicated a residual of not over 0.25 parts per million. 6. Have the local utility or an independent testing agency test and certify that the potable water system meets requirements of local health authorities before using for domestic service and upon completion of the system. A representative sample shall be obtained by the utility or testing agency at random outlets on the Project. If test sample does not prove to be potable, the entire Project's potable water system shall be sterilized again by the Contractor or local utility company and retested, at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall continue to sterilize and recheck system until the test samples prove to be potable. 3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Potable water piping: after piping is erected, thoroughly flush all piping and piping components before running pumps, or sterilizing the potable water system. END OF SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15410-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Sewage ejector for sanitary sewer lift to site sewer main. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings andlor catalog cuts indicating technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment, to include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data. B. Submit operating and maintenance manuals for the sump pumps. r'".:') PART 2. PRODUCTS cj 4=. (). ._..,..1 2.1. MANUFACTURERS , -...\ -ri A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hydromatic 2. Weil 3. Skidmore 4. Architect approved equal 0' .- .- n .'0 -1 .. \-.....J -- :::~\. :- r:.;> ""'.:.. )::> Cf\ B. Basis of design: Hydromatic 2.2. SEWAGE EJECTOR A. Pumps shall be the Hydromatic Series SK60 or Architect approved equal. Pump shall include an impeller, sealed ball bearings, suction plate, and cast iron pump housing. Bearings shall have moisture proof seal to protect against vapor and moisture from the pump. Pump materials shall be suitable to handle liquids and solid waste materials. B. Duplex sump controls shall be provided in a remote mounted panel (NEMA 3R enclosure) which shall include the following for the sump pump. 1. HOA for pump 2. Motor starter for any pump motor rated at 460 volt, 3 phase 3. Terminal strip interface with an external off site monitoring system 4. Pump failure alarm indication 5. High level alarm indication 6. Adjustable mercury float switch 7. Pump operation alternator for duplex pump. C. Pumps shall be piped to sewer through check valves and gate valve, all in accordance with plumbing codes and ordinances. Piping shall be schedule 40 galvanized piping. 2.3. CONTROLS A. Pump shall be duplex and shall be automatically controlled by mercury type submersible float switch mounted on the pump. Pump control switch shall be 2-N.0. mercury switch contacts, SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15412-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 encapsulated in epoxy resin. High level alarm service shall be 1-N.O. mercury switch contact, encapsulated in epoxy resin. Provide alarm for high level, power failure and pump failure. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install sewage ejector as recommended by the manufacturer. Make all piping connections. B. Provide control wiring required to install remote alarm, control panels and building control system interface. The Owner will provide interface wiring between the sump pump control panel and the building control system under a separate contract. C. Provide power wiring to pump motors from the remote control panel. D. Provide disconnect means for pumps. E. General contractor shall provide the concrete basin for the sewage ejector. The Division 15 Contractor shall interface with the contractor concerning dimensions, depth, and inlet and outlet connections for basin or sump. END OF SECTION 15412 (1 IJ.J -1 - LL N N <{ -:::> '-/> :.:::;::0 \J.- - 11\ ~'.=-J >: i.:..) t:: c") "'">- r':- <( 0< Q :c a... -.". ~- Il;:.~ ..., .-- = = c--l SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15412 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all materials as hereinafter specified or show" and as necessary for the complete installation of the plumbing specialties. B. Reference Standards: 1. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (POI) Standard PDI-WH201. c) :~~: (j :f"";~ =- .~ , ~-_I L_ 1.2. SUBMITTALS -'\1 --...' " A. Provide submittals for water hammer arrestors and vacuum breakers. c~ :Cl /' ,- -...- - -. (' i' ....-. ~'l l- 1 PART 2. PRODUCTS ~~2 ~'-< <.-- ;; , \.....j r-.) 2.1. MATERIALS 0"\ A. Drains: 1. Provide Josam, Zurn, Wade or J.R. Smith. 2. Roof drain downspout adapters: provide roof drain downspout adapters as manufactured by Plastic Trends or Architect approved equivalent. 3. Floor Drains: a. General Purpose Drains: Provide cast iron body, adjustable nickel bronze strainer, bottom outlet, double drainage flange with weep-holes. Provide with flashing clamp device for all floors above grade. b. Mechanical Room Drain: Provide cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange and weep-holes, square body and loose set, heavy duty grate with removable 4" funnel, sediment bucket, bottom outlet and flashing clamp for all floors above grade. c. Funnel Drains: Provide with an extended rim on strainer. B. Water hammer arrestors: 1. Zurn Z-1700 "Shoktrol", Wade "Shokstop," Josam "Absorbo-tron" or J.R. Smith "Hydrotrol" arrestors. Sizes as shown, designed in accordance with P.D.1. Standard WH 201 to prevent hammer in the piping systems. 2. Water hammer arrestors shall be certified to function in accordance with POI Standard PDI- WH-201 to limit surge pressure to 150 psig from a flow velocity of 10 fps at 60 psig through 50 feet of pipe same size as the water hammer arrestor. a. Water hammer arrestor shall be constructed in one of the following manners. 1) A non-ferrous elastic chamber contained in heavy steel casing with approved recoil dampers. 2) Acetal piston. Three Buna-N a-rings, pressure-lubricated with Dow-Corning III Silicone Compound, FDA approved. Type L copper tube chamber, seamless spin reduction and closure, lead free solder joint. C. Vacuum breakers: 1. Vacuum breakers for non-continuous pressure applications shall be Watts Regulator Company, Model No. 288A or Sloane Valve Company, No. V-35OA with bronze body, chrome-plated in finished areas. 2. Vacuum breakers for continuious pressure application shall be Watts Regulator No. 800. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts manufactured by Josam, Zurn, Wade or J.R. Smith. 2. Cleanouts shall be as follows: a. Concealed, or exposed in unfinished area: Josam 58500-22. b. Finished walls: Josam 58710-22 with Nickaloy top and satin finish. c. Finished floors: Josam 58700-22 with Nickaloy top and satin finish. d. Food handling areas: heavy duty, 316 stainless steel covers, J.R. Smith 4313 Series cleanouts. E. French Drains/Receptors 1. Provide site drain structures for storm drain run off from downspouts. 2. Provide excavation filled with limestone chips as indicated on the drawings. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts shall be installed where shown and at base of soil or waste stacks 30" above floor, at changes in direction and every 50 feet in horizontal piping. Cleanouts to be same size as pipe up to 4" and 4" to all other piping. B. Vacuum breakers shall be provided on hose outlets and below the rim water supplies of all types, on all fixtures to which hoses and tubing can be connected, and at all locations specified or shown. END OF SECTION 15430 01 t....--' LLJ . -. - LL o C'J N :c 0.. <:( >~~ c.c -- LU ''': .:-j t=- c)_ <-) ~4: 0$ o ~ 1Ii,,~.. ~ r-- <::::> = C"-.J PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15430-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER PART 1. GENERAL \2 :~~:::o ~ .,r' _.~. ('..J -.-..1 --\', 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES: c -<. - ; ..... .. A. Domestic hot water heaters. B. Provide drain pan under the water heater which drains to floor drain. -....~ -' . \ I \ .n"""'~l. '-_oJ 1'.' 1.2. SUBMITTALS ,. ):;>- 0'\ A. Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts indicating technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment. Include dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data. B. Submit operating and maintenance manual for system. 1.3. WARRANTY A. Submit a ten-year warranty for the coils, pressure vessel and anticipator. The unconditional and non-prorated warranty shall cover failure of the coils due to thermal shock, mechanical failure or erosion of the pressure vessel against leakage due to corrosion and of the anticipator against failure. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers - electric domestic hot water heaters: 1 . Lochinvar 2. Architect approved equivalent 3. Design based upon Lochinvar "Junior Electric Water Heaters" 2.2. MATERIALS A. Electric hot water heaters: 1 . Electric fired water heaters shall be designed for use with 120 V AC and shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories. Heaters with greater than 119 gallons storage or 200,000 Btu/hr input shall have the ASME stamp for 125 psi W.P. Tanks shall be suitable for a working pressure of 150 psig. 2. The water heaters shall be insulated with polyurethane or fiberglass insulation. The energy efficiency of the heaters shall meet NAECA standards and Model Energy Code minimum efficiency standards. The electric storage water heater having a storage capacity of 120 gallons or less and an input rating of 12 KW or less shall have a standby loss not exceeding 4.0 watts/square foot of tank surface area or 43 watts, whichever is greater. 3. The heater tanks interior surface shall have a glass lining fused to it. 4. Provide magnesium anode rod and factory installed dielectric nipples. 5. The jacket shall be embossed steel finished in white acrylic enamel. 6. Provide tin coated, copper sheathed, immersion elements that have low watt density. 7. Provide an unconditional five year warranty and certificate shall be attached to the water heater. 8. Provide a drain valve. DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15434-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 9. Provide adjustable, water temperature control with automatic over-heat safety device for safety protection. 10. Provide unit mounted electrical disconnect switch. B. Provide expansion tank for water heater system that satisfies requirements of the Plumbing Code and Section 15120, Piping Speicialites. EXECUTION 3.1. IN~ T ALLA TION A. Electric water heaters shall be installed as indicated on the drawings complete with water, power. B. Install heaters and make hot and cold water connections, electrical connections, and safety relief vent connections. C. Connect electrical disconnects to the electrical heater. D. Route temperature pressure safety relief valve discharge to the floor in accordance with International Mechanical and Iowa State Plumbing Code requirements. E. Install domestic water expansion tanks in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION 15434 F. Provide for drain pan under the water heater. 0 ('oJ ~ ,/5: ' . N r"'\ .,.... -.-0 i~ ~-- cc_ LU 0- w ..-J)>-=' i :~l- --' U LL z >- <II.: L=<c ......, 0$ r-- c:=> 0 = ('-..l ~ DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15434-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements fC~-~ --- 05.038::::' A&J #~~.O(}- _;_: '~,~\ r~" ~ --r\ ..----..... ...-- r" -,- SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES -',1 -1. "../ (c~:, ";--~. /...... {:-? PART 1. GENERAL )7 u' 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide all Work as necessary for the complete installation of the plumbing fixtures and trim. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source quality control: plumbing fixtures and trim specified hereinafter shall be provided free of flaws and defects of any sort in material and workmanship and shall operate perfectly when installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions. The manufacturer shall agree to replace all or any part of the fixtures which show flaw or defect due to faulty manufacture. B. Reference standards: fixtures shall conform to current commercial standards for sanitary cast iron enameled ware and staple vitreous china plumbing fixtures and trim recommended by the U.S. Department of Commerce. 1.3. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection of fixtures and trim: adequately protect the plumbing fixtures and accessories during construction. Replace at no cost to the Owner any fixture or accessory that is marred, scratched, defaced, or broken. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for all plumbing fixtures. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. General: 1 . Fixtures and associated supply valves and fittings shall be the standard product of one of the manufacturers listed with each fixture and comparable to the model listed. 2. All plumbing fixtures shall be provided complete with all necessary trim and accessories to insure the proper installation and operation of each fixture. Trim and accessories shall include but not be limited to supply pipes, stops, drains, strainers, tailpieces, P-traps and bolt caps. 3. Plumbing fixtures provided for use by the disabled shall be in compliance with the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). B. Water Closets. 1 . The following shall apply to standard water closets hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a. Provide white vitreous china water closets with elongated bowls, manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide black solid plastic seats with concealed hinge, open front elongated seat less cover and with concealed check. Seats shall be manufactured by Olsonite, Church, Beneke, Centoco, Bemis or by fixture manufacturer. c. Wall mounted water closets shall be rated for 1000 pounds. PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 0 N V~ N 0 ::c ~-C\ cr:: ~ UJ 0- w __..J 2:-~ __J C) '-= u.. ',-U ;2: ?' OC( ;-- ::::( J 0;: r-- <:::!) 0 = c-....t 2. Flush Valves a. Provide hidden, electric powered, sensor operated, water closet Royal Flushometer, Optima plus, by Sloan, for floor mounted or wall hung top spud bowls. The electric powered flush valves shall be Low Consumption (1.6 gallons per flush). The valves shall meet the following specifications: (1) Provide quiet, exposed, diaphragm type, chrome plated closet flushometer for either left or right hand supply with the following features: (a) ADA compliant OptimaPlus infrared sensor for automatic "no hands" operation. (b) Dual filtered by-pass. (c) Diaphragm, stop seat and vacuum breaker to be molded from Permex rubber compound for chloramine resistance. (d) Engineered plastic cover assembly with integral window. (e) User friendly three second flush delay. (f) Infrared sensor range adjustment screw, (g) Initial set-up range indicator light (first 10 minutes). (h) 1" Lp.s. screwdriver bak-Chek angle stop. (i) Sweat solder adapter with cover tube and cast set screw wall flange. (j) Adjustable tailpiece. (k) High back pressure vacuum breaker flush connection with one-piece bottom hex coupling nut. (I) Spud coupling and flange for 1-1/2" top spud. (m) Valve body, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with ASTM alloy classification for semi-red brass. Valve shall be in compliance with the application sections of ASSE 1037, ANSI/ASME A 112.19.6 and Mil Spec V-29293. Valve shall conform to ADA requirements. (n) Provide electric power and transformer to operate solenoid and electronic sensor flush valve. 3. Water Closet (Handicap). Furnish same as non-handicap, except mount at handicap height. ~..J C. Lavatories. 1. The following shall apply to lavatories hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a. Provide white vitreous china lavatories with front overflows manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide chrome plated brass supply fitting manufactured by Delta. c. Provide with chrome plated brass supply pipes, 1/2" 0.0. flexible risers and wheel handle, quarter turn closed to open, angle stops manufactured by Brasscraft or fixture manufacturer. d. Provide with chrome plated, 1-1/4" cast brass tall pieces and P-traps with C.O. plugs manufactured by Dearborn Brass or fixture manufacturer. e. Provide with flow limiting devices to limit flows to 2-1/2 GPM. f. Lav drains and hot water pipes shall be insulated or protected so that wheel-chair occupants cannot be burned. Provide Truebro Inc. Handi Lav-Guard Kit No.1 02 and No.1 05 for offset drains. (1) Provide ADA conforming lavatory piping insulation and PVC insulation covers. (2) The guard insulation shall cover the P-traps, 'hot and cold water valves and piping. (3) The insulation guard kets shall be closed cell vinyl with special UV protection. (4) The covering shall be white and shall be paintable. (5) The kits shall be suitable for protection of wheel chair accessible lavatories. PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 (6) The kit~; shall be manufactured by Truebro or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Batte,y powered handwashing faucet: a. Provide Sloan battery powered, sensor operated, electronic hand washing faucet with metal throat plate, for tempered or hot/cold water operation, or Architect approved equivalent, by Delta, Moen or Bradley b. The unit shall have 0.5 gpm, vandal resistant spray head. c. Unit shall be ADA compliant, chrome plated hand washing faucet with the following features: (1) Splash-proof, circuit control module. (2) Fiber optic, automatic, self-adaptive sensing. (3) Audible tone low battery indicator. (4) Serviceable filter solenoid valve. (5) Chrome plated throat. (6) 4" trim plate with anti-rotation pin. (7) Pressure compensating flow control. (8) Polypropylene optic cable protection. - ~ (9) Provide four (4) C-cell alkaline batteries for each faucet. (.~'_~ (1 O)Below deck thermostatic mixing valve. . ~ (11 )Chrome plated brass grid strainer with a 1-1/4" outlet tube. ):> (12) Unit sensitivity and turn time shall be adjustable in the field. 'f' ., c--, S3 ~. \" .) ~,_,_..i -oo;. , \ c\ r ...--;."-) \ rOOt ";$-"'-'1. ',-j r:-? 0" D. Urinals. 1. The following shall apply to urinals hereinafter specified unless noted otherwise. a. Provide white vitreous china urinals manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Crane, Toto or Eljer or Architect approved equivalent. b. Provide urinals with chrome plated, exposed battery operated flush valves with vacuum breakers manufactured by Sloan or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Wall-hung urinal. Provide washout type with integral flush spreader, 2" drain connection and 1-1/4" top spud. 3. Provide Low Water Consumption (1.0 gallons per flush) battery operated flush valves. a. Flush valves b. Flush valve: Battery operated Sloan flush valve as specified for water closets. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner with proper connections to supply and drainage piping. Provide proper grounds for all fixtures requiring same. B. Voids between plumbing fixtures, mounting surfaces (except at ceramic tile surfaces) shall be filled with mildew resistant, latex calk. Self-rimming lavatories shall be set in mildew resistant, latex calk. 1. Mildew resistant calk shall be PV A or PVC material. Provide 'Quick Seal' by DAP or 'Polycaulk' by Pecora. PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements <<:::> N N r'1 :C t.....-i 0- UJ i -, LL :;Z~ <1'l::t; -:> r-- <:::;:) = ~ 05.038 A&J #200640.00 c. Mounting heights. Fixture mounting heights shall be as follows: FIXTURE I STANDARD I HANDICAPPED Water Closet I 16 inches floor to seat I 18 inches floor to seat Water Closet Controls I I Max 44 inches above floor Urinal I 24 inches floor to rim I 17 inches floor to rim Urinal Controls I Max 44 inches above floor I Max 44 inches above floor Lavatorv I 31 inches floor to rim I 34 inches floor to rim Electric water cooler I 40 inches floor to spout I 36 inches floor to spout 3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROUTESTING A. Plumbing fixture tests: water shall be turned on to all supply lines and all fixtures shall be demonstrated to operate properly. Flush valves shall be tested and adjusted to flush ~ficiently without undue noise. ,,/> ceO W .--1 r CJI- ( ., _ ....J /- t=<C ()~ o END OF SECTION 15440 ..--., PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15440-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640. ocr~ C) ::=~ > ::~,.. L_ /"'" - -n SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT C) -I ~ !-~"- I -'1 r''''''' ..... PART 1. GENERAL \,_J ./', r'.) 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES :P c' A. Toilet exhal!st fans, in line type. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. All fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fans shall bear the AMCA label. 1.3. SUBMITTALS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Exhaust fans. 2. Submit complete fan performance curves marked to indicate selection points for proposed fans. Data submitted shall also include sound power levels in all octave bands. B. Provide system demonstration for the exhaust fans. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 . MATERIALS A. Circulating fans in unit assemblies shall be of the Centrifugal airfoil. Each fan unit shall have an air capacity not less than indicated on Drawings when operating against the external static pressure indicated on Drawings. 1. Fan units shall be installed complete with electric motor and drive equipment. Fans shall be rated and constructed in accordance with AMCA standard test codes. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced at all speeds. Fans shall have externally-mounted, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball bearings. Fan bearings to have 200,000 hour minimum life per AFBMA-9. Fan shafts shall be made of steel, and shall be provided with key seats and keys for the impeller hubs and fan pulleys or with other equally positive fastening. V-belt drives shall be designed for at least 50 percent overload capacity and shall be designed to allow adjustment of fan speed without removing the fan or fan motor from the housing. Fan motors shall be equipped with adjustable base or rails for belt tightening. Motor mountings shall be on a resilient base constructed of steel shapes and connected through rubber-in-shear isolators. Contractor shall submit complete fan performance curves marked to indicate selection points for proposed fans. Data submitted shall include sound power levels in all octave bands. 2. Provide grease zurt fitting extensions for all fan bearings that are not easily accessible as part of normal routine maintenance. 3. Motors shall be squirrel cage, general purpose 40oC., high efficiency, polyphase NEMA frame, with electrical characteristics as indicated on Drawings. Also see Section 15010 for supplemental motor requirements. Starters shall be provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL, except where variable speed drives are specified. AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15850-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 Wiring to the motor lugs is specified under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. Provide motors with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hour minimum life per AFBMA-9. 4. Each unit shall be provided with necessary accessories as indicated on Drawings and as specified. 5. Transition sections, sound attenuator banks and filters shall be either field-fabricated or furnished with unit as shown. 6. Automatic control dampers shall be provided to control the intake of outside air. Dampers shall be airfoil design and shall be either parallel or opposed blade type with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings. Maximum damper blade length shall be 60". Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfmlsquare foot at 1 inch (W.G.) and 9 cfmlsquare foot at 4-inches (W.G.). Operators shall have weatherproof enclosures. 7. Provide unit mounted disconnect switches for the fan motors in a NEMA 1 enclosure for the unit control panel. 8. Provide a unit mounted control panel, rJEMA 1 enclosure that houses the fan disconnect switches, control relays, and fuses as required for the fan motors and low voltage components such as interior lights and damper controls. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Install fans and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set up control sequences per Section 15950. C. Make control and electrical connections. END OF SECTION 15850 D. Provide vibration isolation for exhaust fan. r" , , t--"'" UJ _J - LL c:> N N <!. y3: .._~O o -- UJy.- __.I. C) 1::::. C) :.~- ':::: <C O~ o ~ - 0- -'\I''''' ..~ ..'~..:: -, ~ = = c--.J AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15850-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r"",-" t:,;.:1 6 05.03fL A&J #~~o.o~ ~ ..-'" ~Il c} .-~--- """"4, SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK ," r:' , . -1'] ~ -."- '. '......J r:-? PART 1. GENERAL p Cj-'" 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes furnishing and installing all material for the complete installation of the following: 1. All ductwork shown on the Drawings for the complete heating, air conditioning, exhaust, and ventilating systems. 2. All flexible duct. 1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). R. NFPA 90-A, "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) a. "HV AC Duct Manual" in this Specification shall mean the first edition of the "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." b. "Balancing and Adjustment Manual" in this Specification shall mean the first edition of the "Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution System." 3. International National Codes a. Mechanical Code, 2003. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit duct fabrication drawings showing sizes, location, materials and pressure classification as minimum. B. The Contractor shall not fabricate or install any ductwork until the ductwork fabrication drawings have been submitted and reviewed and accepted by the Architect. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Ductwork construction. 1 . General. a. Ductwork construction shall, as a minimum, conform to NFPA Standard 90-A, the International Mechanical Code and the SMACNA HV AC Duct Manual. Ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. b. The size of the ducts indicated on the Drawings shall be net inside dimensions. c. The duct pressure class specifications shown on the Drawings are explained in Figure 1-1 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Manual. d. Ducts shall be sealed in accordance with Table 1-2. All ductwork dishwashing area exhaust shall have a minimum seal Class 'C' rating. e. All ductwork shall be substantially and neatly supported so that horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts are without buckle and all ducts are free from the possibility of deformation, collapse, or vibration. DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Rectangular ductwork. a. Ducts shall be constructed and reinforced in accordance with Tables 1-3 through 1-13. b. Tie rod attachments shall be in accordance with SMACNA Figures 1-2 and t-3. c. Aluminum duct shall be constructed in accordance with Tables 1-14 through 1-16. d. Duct joints and seams shall be in accordance with Figures 1-4 through 1-18. e. Fittings and other construction. 1) Duct fittings, branches, and connections shall be in accordance with Figures 2-1 through 2-11. All square throat elbows shall have turning vanes. A Type RE 4 elbow as shown in Figure 2-2 and a straight tap for rectangular ductwork as shown in Figure 2-8 is not permitted. 2) Duct access doors shall be in accordance with Figures 2-12 and 2-13. Doors shall be adequately sized for ease of maintenance of concealed items. Insulate access doors where ducts are insulated with same insulation as on ductwork. 3) Volume dampers shall be in accordance with Figures 2-14 and 2-15. 4) Grille, register, and diffuser connections shall be in accordance with Figures, 2-16 through 2-18. 5) Flexible connections at fans shall be in accordance with Figure 2-19. f. Flexible duct liner shall be installed in accordance with Figures 2-22 through 2-25. Round and oval ductwork. a. Round ducts shall be constructed in accordance with Tables 3-2 and 3-3. 1) Seams and joints shall be in accordance with Figures 3-1 and 3-2. 2) Fittings shall be in accordance with Table 3-1, Figure 3-3 and the following list of approved fittings shown on Figure 3-4: 900 Tee Fitting, 900 Tap, 900 Tee with Oval to Round Tap, and Figure 3-5: Conical Tee Fitting, Conical Tap, Wye Fitting, Conical Tee and Reducer Fitting, and Alternate Arrangement. 3) Flat oval ductwork construction shall be in accordance with Table 3-4. Fittings shall be in accordance with Figure 3-6, or as manufactured by United McGill, Semco, Norlock, Lindlab or Architect approved equivalent. 4. Hangers and supports. a. Rigid round, rectangular and flat oval metal ducts shall be installed with support systems in accordance with Figures 4-1 through 4-9 and Tables 4-1 through 4-3. Horizontal ducts shall have a support within 24" of each elbow and within 48" of each branch intersection. 0 N ~ N v,S r'" :l: ;;;y:: C) ,_1 L-L- ____ UJ a.. UJ ~~ -..... '-' l- ee ~-- () :z: .- "<::I.; I-~ J Os .-- = 0 = C-..J 3. B. Flexible ductwork. 1 . Provide flexible duct as shown and make connections between ducts and ceiling diffusers with a minimum of 12" of flexible duct. No flexible duct shall be longer than 4'-0". 2. Flexible ductwork shall be of spiral construction composed of a corrosion resistant metal supporting spiral and a coated fabric with a metal or mineral base. Flexible duct connectors shall be listed by UL and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 50. Operating temperature range shall be OOF. to 2000F. Operating pressure shall be negative 0.5 inch to positive 10 inches W.G. 3. Where either acoustical duct liner or exterior insulation is shown or specified for duct systems, provide factory pre-insulated material for all flexible ductwork in the system consisting of a galvanized spring bonded to the interior liner, 1" (25 ram) thick. 0.75 pounds/cubic foot (12.0 kilogramslcubic meter) fiberglass insulation and a laminated DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 vapor barrier jacket consisting of fiberglass reinforced metalized film or vinyl or synthetic film. Furnish Porter Portoduct Type TK or Thermaflex Type M-KC. 4. Provide bare flexible duct for systems not requiring acoustical lining or exterior insulation, Porter Portoduct Type T, Thermaflex Type S-TL, or Wiremold Type 57. 5. Flexible duct shall be supported in accordance with Figures 3-9 and 3-10 of the HV AC Duct Manual. C. Field erected casing and plenums. 1. Equipment housings shall be provided for the air conditioning system as shown on the Drawings and as hereinafter specified. All sheet metal and steel framing material shall be galvanized, except that G90 coated galvanized steel shall be used in all chambers with high probability of moisture presence such as outside air intake plenums or air-handler discharge plenums. a. Entire casings or plenums shall be made airtight, suitably braced with structural iron members and free from breathing or vibration. Housing shall terminate at masonry walls and at floors with angles and a sponge rubber gasket. All welds on casing interiors shall be painted. Casings and plenums shall be constructed to withstand 133 percent of rated pressure without structural failure. Wall and roof deflection at rated pressure shall not exceed 1/8 inch per foot of width. b. Casings or plenums shall be single wall and internally insulated with rigid insulation board to provide an overall U-valve of 0.10 BTUlh/ft2. of. c. Flexible connections shall be placed between fan and casings, where applicable. d. All casings on the suction side of the fan shall be the pressure classification equal to the negative pressure at fan shutoff. Casing on fan discharge shall be of the designated pressure class. 2. Casings and plenums shall be constructed in accordance with Figures 6-1 through 6-8 and Table 6-1 of the HVAC Duct Manual. 3. Pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent air leakage and condensation movement through the seal. Penetrations shall be in accordance with Figure 6-10. D. Access doors: Access doors shall be provided where shown and as required for access to all mechanical equipment mounted inside ductwork. Doors shall be complete with hinges, gaskets and "Ventlok" No. 260 latches manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Illinois or Young Regulator Company. Doors shall be made airtight and shall swing opposing the plenum pressure. Doors in casings ~hall be constructed .in accor~ance with F~res 6-1~~nd 6-12 and Table 6-2. Doors shall be Insulated where casings are Insulated. ..2: __ -_.j :'~; ~) ~.- PART 3. EXECUTION o --Tl 3.1. INSTALLATION -..., . ii A. Ductwork construction - general. ".. /< r,,) 1. Adhere to Drawings as closely as possible. The Contractor may vary L:YE and shape of ducts and make offsets during progress of work, if required to meer'Structurc\!Ar other interference. 2. Install ductwork in adherence to ceiling height schedules indicated. Consult with other trades, and in conjunction with them, establish necessary space requirements for each trade so as to maintain required clearances. Where no ceiling height is stated, ductwork shall have a minimum clearance of 9'-8", or as high as possible above the floor. f""""'-'"" 1 <J DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 3.2. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Balancing and Adjusting. 1. Make adjustments of the mechanical equipment in accordance with the plans and Specifications as directed by the air balance and testing agency if it is found that any portion of the Work has not been properly installed for accomplishing the testing and balancing as called for in the specifications. B. Clean all duct interiors of all debris during assembly, prior to closing up various sections, and prior to operating any fan associated with a particular duct system in accordance with Section 15010. END OF SECTION 15890 C <:'\J ~ r-- N '''' S , 1 ~ ceO 1--.J LLI a.. W .._J >-' -J (.)I ,- ce :2:: >-() 1-- ~ O~ ...., r--- <::::> 0 <:::::) C'-I DUCTWORK SECTION 15890-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES 1'--'~ A. . This Section includes air distribution specialties and ductwork accessories cO'Mlete for~!l distribution systems. .;:::-~ ,.--, '-- :;-- \.. .' ~. : ,..,:t> _. _....\ --r1 , . 1.2. SUBMITTALS CJ -. PART 2. PRODUCTS , . ---- -, \ t........'; .- - .- ':;..(~ /" N ,--~- \ -'1 , \ '''-'''''-''-'. \. ..J , ....---, A. Provide submittals on all material furnished. .:::-- :;> CJ\ 2.1. MATERIALS A. Roof curbs: provide wall curbs of prefabricated metal type of aluminum or galvanized steel and designed for mounting wall exhausters. Curb shall be designed for flashing to roof in an acceptable manner. Curb shall have adequate means for mounting dampers with-in fan curb throat where dampers are specified or shown on Drawings. Curbs shall be Penn Ventilator Company "Sonotrol," Carnes, Greenheck, Acme or Cook as applicable for the unit being roof mounted. Curbs shall be the sound attenuating type. B. Turning Vanes. Turning vanes shall be installed in all mitered duct elbows and where shown on Drawings. All turning vanes shall be double thickness type per the SMACNA-HVAC Duct Construction Manual. C. Volume dampers: Volume dampers shall be provided at take off for flex duct and where shown on drawings. Volume dampers shall be two metal gages heavier than the duct in which they are installed and shall be reinforced to prevent vibration and noise. All volume dampers occurring in concealed ductwork, except those above removable ceilings, shall be installed with shafts vertical. In ducts over 14" in width with vertical shafts, use multilouvered opposed blade dampers manufactured by Airstream Products, Ruskin, Nailor Industries, NCA Manufacturing or United Aire. For accessible dampers use Young No. 403 damper regulators and No. 656 end bearings. Dampers in rooms with other than removable type ceilings shall have Young No. 301 concealed damper regulators. D. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles: 1. General Requirements. a. Provide all diffusers, registers and grilles as indicated on the Drawings. Neck sizes, face sizes, CFM airflow capacities, maximum allowable noise criteria (NC Level) and air pressure drop shall be as specified on the Drawings. b. Select diffusers and registers which, when adjusted and balanced by the testing and balancing contractor, will provide uniform air distribution over the indicated throw area at the installed height without causing excessive or annoying drafts in the occupiable zones within their coverage. Maximum terminal velocities in the occupiable zones shall not exceed 75 feet per minute unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 2. Materials. a. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles of corrosion-free steel construction except where noted or specified otherwise. Mitered joints, where required, shall be maintained straight and free from visible gaps, butted tightly together under all DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements r~ " \ ; , iIJ ---: fI: =e ~ ....... iiS C'-J c C\J ~ :u:: CL ~ ~$ frO 11]-- I)... .~3~' ~- u i- O~ Q - - 05.038 A&J #200640.00 possible mounting conditions by concealed tack welding or concealed welded plate connections. b. Provide diffusers, registers and grille of all-aluminum construction only in "wet areas" subject to corrosion; such as locker, kitchen and dishwashing areas. Notwithstanding the above, provide all bar and slot linear devices of extruded aluminum construction, unless noted otherwise. 3. Frames and Borders. a. Provide diffusers, registers and grilles with mounting frames and applicable borders as indicated on the Drawings. b. For grid-T lay-in ceilings, provide diffusers, registers and grilles with suitable outer dimensions compatible with a 24" x 24" ceiling grid module; include extension panels if applicable. c. Provide narrow width (5/8" to 1 "), shallow thickness, surface-mounted frames andlor borders for all drywall surface-mounted devices, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. d. Provide flush plaster frames with concealed mounting/fastening for all (wet work) plaster ceiling and wall applications. e. Provide heavy duty reinforced frames and borders for all floor-mounted applications. Such devices shall be capable of incurring normal foot traffic live loads without causing deformation or visible deflection. Frames andlor borders shall be suitable for the floor surface in which they are to be installed and shall be rigidly attached to prevent "rocking" and slippage movement. f. Frames and borders require approval of the Architect. 4. Finishes. a. Unless specified or otherwise indicated, diffusers, registers and grilles shall have an off-white, factory applied enamel paint finish which blends with a variety of grid- T ceiling suspension systems. Anodized, baked epoxy, and special color/paint finishes shall be as directed by the Architect and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Refer to Architects Drawings to verify color requirements prior to placing factory orders. Notify the Architect regarding any apparent discrepancies on color finishes. 5. Accessories. a. Provide screwdriver or lever operated, worm gear actuated, opposed blade or butterfly volume dampers only on ceiling supply units as specifically noted or indicated on the Drawings and in the necks or branch take-off duct of all single diffusers which ere tapped directly into a main trunk duct. Under conditions such that the diffuser/register branch tap duct is less than one duct diameter provide a diffuser collar-mounted volume damper to permit balancing. Under conditions where the single diffuser branch tap is longer than one duct diameter, provide volume damper in branch takeoff duct as close to main trunk duct as possible. Provide manufactured dampers which either spring clip or screw-mount into the unit collar. Dampers shall be adjustable from the diffuserlregister face without removing the core assembly. b. All volume dampers shall be free from vibration, rattle and other noise when subject to the specified operating range or maximum airflows and indicated velocities. Noisy dampers, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. c. Provide fixed blade or pivot adjustable equalizing grids only on diffusers where specifically indicated or specified on the Drawings. Install equalizing grids, where required, with the blade direction perpendicular to the duct approach direction. d. Provide galvanized steel square-to-round transition collars for all diffusers having square neck patterns which are indicated for connection with round ductwork. e. Provide galvanized steel square-to-round transition collars for all diffusers having DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 square neck patterns which are indicated for connection with round ductwork. 6. Quality Assurance and Testing a. All diffusers, registers and grilles shall be either factory andlor independently tested under controlled laboratory conditions in accordance with the applicable section of the Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062 and/or ISO Standard 3741. Testing shall substantiate the published catalogued engineering specifications and ratings. Devices which do not satisfactorily perform per t1eir published ratings shall be subject to replacement by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. b. Provide laboratory test results confirming published rating compliance with shop drawing submission. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products a. Industrial Diffusers, Registers, Grilles and Bars Titus Carnes Krueger Tuttle & Bailey Metal Aire Anemostat b. Square and Round Diffusers - Adjustable Grid Carnes Tuttle & Bailey J & J Anemostat Titus Krueger Metal Aire E.H. Price Nailor Industries c. Double Deflection Adjustable Registers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H. Price d. Fixed Curve Registers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H.Price e. Grilles Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H.Price f. Adjustable linear slot diffusers Anemostat Titus Metal Aire Krueger J & J E.H.Price E.H. Price Nailor Industries Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industires Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industires (:2 :;'> (1 jc-= =::1 r"_' ;;- ,~.., L..::J "~_..J Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industries C") .--- -Tl Carnes Tuttle & Bailey Nailor Industires r-.'....., -":J !-T1 '.~J f'j en g. Do not use perforated plate diffusers on the project, E. Low leakage backdraft dampers. (Mark BOD). 1. Dampers shall be of mill-finished extruded aluminum blades, frame and tie-bar linkage. 2. Dampers shall be of low leakage weatherproof construction having neoprene blade seals and jamb seals suitable for either horizontal or vertical airflow operation up to 3500 fpm without blade deformation, sticking, jamming or vibration chatter. 3. Provide with adjustable counterbalances (0.01 to 0.05 inches (W.G.) on all horizontally mounted dampers. 4. Damper leakage shall be less than 12 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.5 inches (W.G.) pressure differential. 5. Furnish Ruskin "CB" Series, Greenheck, Nailor Industries, NCA Manufacturing or Architect approved equivalent. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ("~l I_I [I ' -L...I EC ~d:: ~ r--.. c::::. ~ PART 3. 05.038 A&J #200640.00 <::> C\J N F. Roof Air Outlets 1. Provide roof air intakes and outlets of sizes shown on drawings. Units shall be aluminum construction, with hinged hoods, and mounted on curbs and flashed. Units shall be Penn Ventilator, Carnes, Greenheck, Cook, Acme or Architect approved equivalent. 2. Accessories. Provide the following: a. Birdscreen. b. Anticondensate coating. c. Fiberglass insulation on underside of hood. :x:: ~ d. Motorized dampers or gravity backdraft dampers as scheduled on the drawings. &] ~ Turns: Double thickness steam line vanes with runners. ELGIN "Air.Tite" or Architect ,::---::! ~proved shop fabricated equivalent. '.j L- j:t:t. Gir Extractors for installation at branch duct take-offs shall be YOUNG REGULATOR CO, C3 ~o. 890-B with positioning regulator for mounting on duct. Where positioning regulator is not ~ccessible, air extractors shall be No. 890-A with coupling, extension rod and positioning -regulator for installation on wall or ceiling. :c Q.. - I. Access Panels: For all duct pressure classes shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gage, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two YOUNG REGULATOR COMPANY No. 1330 latches. Access panels shall not be secured by sheet metal screws or bolts. Only latch type fasteners are acceptable. Access dor or panels shall be by Flexmaster, Nailor Industries, Cesco, Keys or Architect approved equivalent. J. Joints: Joints for round, oval and rectangular high velocity and low pressure ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA joint details for the appropriate pressure class. Submit proposed method for joining ducts with fabrication procedures for review and approval. EXECUTION 3.1.INST ALLA TION A. Units shall be installed with appropriate valves and unions or flanged connections to allow for removal for maintenance and repair or replacement. B. Install shut-off cocks, balancing cocks, air vents, control valves, flow meter fittings, gauge adapters, and devices as required for complete installation. C. Coordinate the installation of terminal units with Section 15830. END OF SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15910-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements ";": (~~ ~::- :c.~38:". A&J #2 Ot)64Q 00:: (; -1\ SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL -~ r-- \--'\"-\ ';.-.~) ~'..._...) -""1 (-) r:": ...:'.....;. PART 1. GENERAL )? <:1' 1.1. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS A. Provide the electroniclelectric Automatic Control Systems as specified in Section 15950. This project Contractor and subcontractors shall coordinate the control system installation, sequencing, check-out and systems commissioning with the Automatic Control System Contractor. The Contractor and subcontractors shall coordinate with the Automatic Control System Contractor as outlined in this Section. B. The control system shall be a Johnson Controls, Control Installation of Iowa, or Woodman Controls. 1.2. SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic controls. B. The Control Contactor shall provide all necessary control wiring between controllers and operators, except for control wiring specified to be provided by the equipment manufacturer. C. Provide wall conduit, back boxes above ceiling, conduit from junction above ceiling routed out to controlled device. D. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide necessary blank off plates (safing) required to install damper that are smaller than duct size. E. Furnish and install all necessary wiring connections required for flow devices valve position indicators, etc. F. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all automatic dampers and/or operators specified to be furnished by the Control Contractor in other sections. G. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors for dampers specified to be furnished. H. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation and affix and seal permanently in places only after stratification problem has been eliminated. I. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide access panel or other approved means of access through ducts for service to all new control equipment installed under this project. J. Definitions: 1. Control Wiring. Control wiring is defined as all wiring from a piece of controlled or monitored equipment to points of connection on all equipment as shown or specified. 2. Output Signal Conversion. Output signal conversion refers to the changing of one kind of control output into a proportionally related signal appropriate for direct actuation of the controlled device. Signals are converted by a transducer which may be external to the digital controller originating the output. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C 3. C\] .--. ~~. r"'l C\,J i--.f :c 0:0 l...LJ 0- LU - -_.1 - --.1 >-... C[" - Of- ~ ,(3 5. .->- ~ 1-- C3~ ,...., gs 0 ~ - a. Examples in modulating control of pneumatic actuators are conversion of 4-20 ma signals into proportional 3-15 psig signals. b. An example of output signal conversion in on/off or open/close control is a contact closure originating in a digital controller which activates a solenoid air valve which passes main air, thereby forcing a damper to open fully. PID: PID refers to proportional, integral, and derivative control; the three types of action that are used in controlling modulating equipment. Resolution: Refers to the number of possible states an input value or output value can take and is a function of the digital controller I/O circuitry; the ND converter for input and the D/ A converter for output. Ten bit resolution has 1024 possible states and eight bit resolution has 256 possible states. Stand-Alone Control: Refers to the digital controller being able to perform required climate control, and energy management functions without connection to another digital controller or central site computer. Digital controller requirements for stand-alone control are a time clock, a microprocessor, microchip resident control programs, PIO control, a communications port for interfacing with and programming the controller, firmware for interrogation and programming, and I/O for sensing and effecting control of its control environment. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. All Drawings shall be accompanied with a complete description of sequence of operation. Each control element mentioned in the sequence description shall be identified with same mark as shown on the control diagram. 1.4. WARRANTY A. Components, parts and assemblies shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after acceptance. Expressed warranties are conditionally based on the requirement that the items covered within the warranty are used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Control system shall also be warranted to perform all functions expressed or implied in the Sequence of Operation. Failure of controls to perform these functions to the satisfaction of the Owner shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. The warranty will not commence until the system is 100% up and running, all punch list items completed to the Owner's satisfaction, and Owner training completed, regardless of time the Owner has received benefit (substantial or otherwise) from the system during construction and installation. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All control devices shall be factory-cleaned, wrapped and packaged in boxes prior to shipping to construction site. B. Store control devices in original packaging in clean, dry spaces and protect them from weather, excessive humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, and other containments. C. Prior to installation, inspect control devices for damage. 1.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Products: 1. Material and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of. such product, using similar materials, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in commercial or industrial AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 use for two years prior to bid opening. The two year use shall include applications of similarly sized equipment and materials used under similar circumstances. The two year experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. 2. The equipment items shall be supported by a service organization. B. Nameplates and Tags 1. Nameplates bearing legends as shown and tags bearing device unique identifiers as shown shall be engraved or stamped. Nameplates shall be permanently attac~ to HV AC control panel doors. ("; ~-=, 2. For each field mounted piece of equipment, not in a finished area, a ~tiS'Pr m:~t?1 tag with equipment name and point identifier shall be attached. :\;:.> :-' : ~\l C) .or" PART 2. PRODUCTS -\'""~ ....\ \ ' ,,'_c~1 \....J 2.1. MATERIALS r\ ,. ..-::~ f:? A. Sensors and Input Hardware: 1. Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). a. Provide RTD sensors with 1000 ohm, or higher, platinum element that are compatible with the digital controllers. Sensors shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or copper. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1 percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 320F. Temperature sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.250F. cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers, without transmitters, is preferred provided controller supports direct connection of RTDs. When RTDs are connected directly to the controller, keep lead resistance error to 0.250F. or less. Provide 3 wire sensing circuits to not exceed the 0.250F. lead resistance error. Total error for a RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.50F., which includes sensor error, lead resistance error or 4 to 20 milliampere transmitter error, and AID conversion resolution error. Provide manufacturer documentation, and if required due to questionable point(s) data observed during testing, the Contractors engineering calculations which support the proposed RTD circuit will have a total error of 0.50F. or less for the specified application. 1) Wiring: a) Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for direct connected RTDs. b) Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded pair cable for RTDs using 4 to 20 milliampere transmitters. 2) Transmitters: Provide 4 to 20 milliampere transmitters for RTDs where: a) Digital controllers do not Support direct connection of RTDs to controllers; and b) Digital controllers do not meet temperature resolution requirement of 0.25oF. 2. Thermistors. a. Precision thermistors may be used in temperature sensing applications below 200oF. Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0.360F. or less between the range of 320F. to 150oF. Sensor manufacturer shall utilize 100 percent screening to verify accuracy. Thermistors shall be pre-aged, and inherently stable. Stability error of the thermistor over five years shall not exceed 0.250F. cumulative. Sensor element and leads shall be encapsulated. Bead thermistors are not allowed. AID conversion resolution error shall be kept to 0.10F. Total error for a thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.50F., which includes sensor error and digital controller AID conversion resolution error. Provide 0<;::::" J:> 0' AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950.3 f\ \~~de Festival Stage Improvements ?" 2~ 2\} 1~~1 j~\\ \ \ ,el 1'\1' .\'("'{ 'v \.-'2.. 'OItJ~ C\ \ C\"\'{ \ \O\N~\ J 05.038 A&J #200640.00 thermistor and digital controller manufacturer documentation and the Contractor's engineering calculations which support the proposed therm istor input circuit will have a total error of 0.50F. or less. Provide 18 gage twisted and shielded cable for thermistors. 3. Temperature Sensors/Thermostats. a. General. Electronic temperature sensors shall be standard resistance type, platinum film element on ceramic chip, for all temperature ranges. All electronic temperature sensors shall be factory calibrated and of tamperproof construction. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be a minimum of :t 1 %. b. Room Type: Conceal element behind protective cover matched to the room interior. Provide local temperature adjustment capability. c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging RTDs for ductwork applications shall be 12" in length for each 4 square feet of ductwork cross-sectional area with a minimum length of 6 feet. Probe type duct sensors of 12" length minimum are acceptable in ducts 12 feet square and less. d. Immersion Type: 3" total immersion for use with sensor wells, unless otherwise indicated. e. Sensor Wells: Brass materials as indicated; provide thermal transmission material compatible with the immersion sensor. Provide heat-sensitive transfer agent between exterior sensor surface and interior well surface. f. Outside Air Type: Provide element with sunshade to minimize solar effects. Mount element at least 3" from building outside wall. Sunshade shall not inhibit the flow of ambient air across the sensing element. Shade shall protect sensing element from direct solar incidence, snow, ice, and rain. 4. Transmitters. a. Transmitters shall have 4 to 20 ma output linearly scaled to the temperature, pressure, humidity, or flow range being sensed. Transmitter shall be matched to the sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Total error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of 20 milliampere (0.02 milliampere) at any point across the 4 to 20 ma span. Supply voltage shall be 24 volts ac or dc. Transmitters shall have noninteractive offset and span adjustments. For temperature sensing, transmitter stability shall not exceed 0.050C. a year. 1) Transmitter spans or ranges shall be the following and shall be suitable for the application: a) Temperature: (i) 50oF. span: Room, chilled water, cooling coil discharge air, return air sensors; range 350F. to 850F. (ii) 110oF. span: Outside air, heating coil discharge air; range OOF. to 11 OOF. (iii) 200oF. span: Heating hot water. B. Electrical Power and Distribution: 1. Power input from building electrical system shall be 120 volts, 60 hz, two-pole, three wire with ground. Power from the building electrical system to the control system shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. The Control Contractor shall be responsible for all power to individual control devices. 2. Provide control voltage transformers as needed throughout the control system which shall conform to UL 506. Power digital controllers on the highest level LAN from dedicated circuit breakers. Transformers for digital controllers serving terminal equipment on lower level LANs shall be fed from the fan motor leads or fed from the nearest distribution panel board, motor control center, or panelboard, using circuits provided for the purpose or shall be powered from the temperature control power. Provide surge suppressors and transient protection for the control devices powered externally from the control system. Provide a circuit breaker on the secondary side of the transformer. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.03&-_, A&J #2~40.0~~ ..,..,:~_ r' c_._. 3. Surge and transient protection consist of devices installed externally to ~fta'.. :.> controllers. C" -,:. ~- 4. Surge suppressors external to digital controller, shall be installed on alll~jng P\C power. Surge suppressor shall be rated by UL 1449, and have clamping..-v6ltage \' . ratings below the following levels: ?~',~: a. Normal Mode (Line to Neutral): 350 Volts '.:,., /" r:? b. Common Mode (Line to Ground): 350 Volts ); 0'\ 5. Telephone and communications lines directly interfacing the DOC control system shall be protected from surges. Provide metal oxide varistor (MOV) protection, rated for the application, installed at the equipment. 6. Controllers shall have sensor and control wiring surge protection with optical isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices. Fuses are not permitted for surge protection. 7. Provide complete electric wiring for control apparatus, including wiring to transformer primaries. Control circuit conductors which run in the same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have the same insulation level as power circuit conductors. Circuits operating at more than 100 Volts shall be in accordance with the applicable specification Sections of Division 16. Circuits operating at 100 Volts or less shall be defined as low voltage and shall be run in rigid or flexible conduit, metallic tubing, metal raceways, wire trays, or suspended above ceilings with "J" or "bridal" hooks in accordance with Division 16 requirements for low voltage cable. Use multiconductor cable for concealed accessible locations only. Provide circuit and wiring protection as required by NFPA 70. Control wiring in HVAC ductwork shall be in conduit or metallic tubing. Control wiring in equipment rooms shall be in EMT. Protect exposed wiring from abuse and damage. All control wiring located in ceiling plenums shall be in EMT or shall be rated for use in plenums if not installed in EMT. The Control Contractor shall provide new "J" or "bridal" hooks for supporting new control wiring. a. AC Control Wiring. 1) Control wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 300 VAC service. 2) Wiring for 120 V ac control service shall be 14 AWG minimum and shall be rated for 600 V ac service. b. Digital Signal Voltage Wiring: Wiring shall be shielded (2 conductor solid copper) cable. Shielding shall be aluminum/polyester foil or approved equal suitable for high frequency electrical noise shielding. For lines longer than 300 feet, provide #18 AWG shielded, twisted wire pair conductors. For lines with lengths under 300 feet, furnish #22 AWG or #18 AWG shielded, twisted wire pair conductors (Belden, AT&T or Manhattan). c. Analog Signal Wiring: Analog signal wiring for analog inputs and analog outputs shall be 18 AWG single or multiple twisted pair. Each pair greater than one shall be 100 percent shielded, and have 20 AWG drain wire. Exception is directly connected RTD wiring which shall be 18 AWG minimum twisted pair, 100 percent shielded, and with 20 AWG drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated to 300 V ac. Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield tape, overall 20 AWG tinned copper cable drain wire, and overall cable insulation rated to 300 V ac. -n ----- \" \ \--...j C. Components for outside locations: Any control components located in the outside air shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures and shall be suitable for operation in this environment. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Perform installation under supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation of electronic controls. 3.2. ADJUSTMENTS A. Calibrate instrumentation and controls and verify the specified accuracy using test equipment with a test equipment accuracy. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain conditions indicated, to perform functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. 3.3. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. General: Sequence of Operations for all HVAC equipment shall be as indicated on the drawings. Status of all controlled devices, sensors, etc. shall be continuously monitored by the DDC control system, and shall be accessible for display from the respective controller and at the central network computer station. END OF SECTION 15950 ~o ~~ -<.. 9\(') :<F, -- -J:~ ~7^ :P' ~ c:;;;;> -i <- ::>'" ~ - - --n - r-- 'r-n t.___1 i j ,-.... -0 ~ ~ N C) AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 - 6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. HVAC system air balancing a"d sound measurements for equipment installed under this contract. B. One balance is required. The HV AC systems shall not be balanced in the "off season" of fall or spring. C. Balancing work shall be included under the ~ivision 15 Work for the project. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Submit the credentials of the balancing agency to the Architect for review. B. Submit a finished balancing report within 20 days after completion of the system balancing. Submit a list of system problems (if any discovered) within one week of completion of the field balancing. ';'.,,,..j C. Submit verification of equipment calibration. c5 ~~~ (.- C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. -") :: --'" ri' ~ 55J~ ~;. 'p -eon ~-;\ i, I 1.3.ASSOCIATED WORK r - A. Testing, adjustment and balancing of air systems. --:"1 \,.../ B. Testing, adjustment and balancing of hydronic systems including snow melt. f:-;' 0" 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. Qualifications. The independent air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope and shall comply with all standards as set forth by the "Associated Air Balance Council." 2. All Work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating Engineer employed by them. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the "rchitect, Owner, or their representative. B. Reference Standards: 1. Comply with applicable procedures and standard of "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total System Balance" by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 2. The testing and balancing contractor shall be certified by AABC, NEBB, or SMART A. The Balancing Contractor shall submit copies of his certification to the Owner and Architect for review and acceptance. C. The bidders shall submit bids for the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing from Balancing Contractor that have been pre-qualified to bid on this part of the work. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. The following balancers have been pre-qualified at the time the project documents were released for bid to do the balancing on the project. 1 . System Management and Balancing 2873 104th Street Des Moines IA 50322 Phone: 515-270-8755 Fax: 515-270-8756 2. Precision Test and Balance 14241 Elmcrest Court Clive, IA 50325 515-288-2332 (voice) 515-222-0613 (fax) 3. Fisher Test and Balance Inc. 4523 South Con Caro Street DavenportlA 52802 563-326-5697 (voice) 563-326-2620 (fax) ~ ~O :::A )7, -"- o c--" ..--\ ,...:!. :-',('rY'\ """, .-::-0 ~ '" /..... Z -po ~ e;;:;> ::;,.,,) (...- ~ -:$- - - -r\ -;:::::: \ 1\"\ '.---1. '.......J -0 ~ r:? r" o 1.5. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before substantial completion of the project. 1.6. WARRANTY A. Testing Agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of test and balance Work, during which time the Architect at his discretion may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, return/exhaust fan or pump as listed in test report. The Testing Agency shall provide technicians to assist the Architect in making any tests he may require during this period of time. B. Testing agency shall simulate off season operation to test and balance "off season" components to balance the affected units in the "on season". For example, the agency shall simulate the heating season to balance the heating components if the HVAC system is set up in the cooling season. The contractor-have bias to set up systems in the heating mode since the heating system is being modified to the greatest extent. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.1. NOT USED PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. SYSTEM BALANCING A. All costs associated with system balancing and testing shall be included within the Division 15 Work Category. B. The services of an AABC or NEBB Certified Balancing Contractor shall be used to provide labor, services and test equipment required to adjust and balance heating, ventilating, air conditioning and exhaust systems of mechanical systems as specified. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Personnel involved in the execution of the work under the balancing portion of the work shall be experienced and trained in the total balancing of mechanical systems, as well as being regular employees of the balancing Agency. D. The Division 15 Contractor shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1. Completing all construction including integrity testing prior to the start of balancing. 2. Including balancing dampers and adding dampers requested by the balancing Agency. 3. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 4. Providing Record Drawings and advise of changes made to the system during construction. 5. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections such as dampers, belts and pulley changes, valves, etc. as required without delay. 6. Providing complete submittal information for mechanical equipment complete with pertinent engineering information. E. The system balancing test shall incorporate the following: 1. Adjust and balance the complete mechanical system as hereinafter specified. 2. Record test data for the air and hydronic systems. All data pertaining to a particular system, including supply, return and exhaust air, shall be submitted in a complete report on that system. Submit one copy each to the Architect, the Owner, and the Record Docurrsnts file. F. Test equipment shall be furnished by the balancing agency and will remain the pf;1e~ of fb~ balancing agency. Instruments shall have been calibrated recently. ~y:. ::'i 3.2.AIR TEST AND BALANCING PROCEDURE c;~\C; ....<"' :~-_._~, ~) A. Measure supply air volumes by means of the duct traverse method. Seal duct accEi~ ~~es V'Ath rubber plugs. Duct tape is not an acceptable method of sealing. (-)'::>~ f--) ...<~..;. # .... B. Adjust balancing dampers for required branch duct air quantities to within :t 5% of thlfndividu~ branch air flow requirements. -n .,-- r--- ~",..!"".., '; i \ ,...-..." \__..1 C. Adjust grilles, registers and diffusers to within :t 5 cfm of individual requirements specified, and also adjust to minimize draft in all areas. D. The total air delivery in any particular fan system shall be obtained by adjustment of the particular fan variable speed drive. E. Changes that are required for the final balancing results as determined by the balancing agency shall be provided for by the respective contractors who supply and install such equipment under their contractual obligations. Such changes may encompass, but are not necessarily restricted to, changing the dampers or adding dampers and access panels. 3.3. TESTING PROCEDURE FOR SOUND LEVELS A. Using recently calibrated instruments, conduct sound level tests in selected areas of the building. Measure sound level readings in decibels on the "A" and "C" scales of the General Radio Company sound level meter, or sound level meter that meets the current American Standard (Z24 3) based on the acoustic reference power of DB/-RE 10. 13W. Readings shall set forth the total random sound level of the selected rooms or areas with the system in operation, as compared to total background sound level with the system not in operation. The system increase over the background level shall be recorded and reported in decibels on the "A" and "C" scales, and in each octave band. 1. Identify each outlet by room name, room number, and air outlet number. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 2. Measure sound levels in decibels at each diffuser, grille or register in listed areas in each of the 8 octave bands. Measure sound levels approximately five feet above the floor on a line directly below the center of the diffuser, etc., on the "A" and "C" scales of a general radio company sound level meter. 3. Tabulate data for the following rooms with chiller(s) and respective air-handling equipment in operation. a. Outside of new facility with and without the toilet exhaust fan operating. b. Each toilet room with and without toilet exhaust fan operating. 3.4. BALANCING DATA A. System report shall include the following information: 1. Terminal heating/cooling coils a. Manufacturer, size and capacity. b. Fan CFM (Design and Final Operating) c. Fan Reference number, name or letter 2. System External to air handling unit - Test Data a. Grille, Diffuser or Hood reference number and manufacturer b. Location (room number and name) c. Design velocity and CFM or GPM d. Flow Factor e. Final condition of balance B. The testing and balancing agency shall use SMACNA testing and balancing forms for the balancing report. END OF SECTION 15990 r-.,) c:::> *Q = --' <- :P-~ -n )>:2 -':V" ....... - 0' - __~ (J en - r -0 CJ .. f"i'J 3: -- :lJ ~~ ~ N )> 0 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 . 4 ~ Division 16 Electrical '-2 ..1 5;~?, ()-'" ::.=-\ (", i, '1 .F ,."_" " ~\fl N~J )> Division 16 --;1 r~.-- -.l Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ("i 40 &"'::"',...:.. .);7 ::_) (J-- ::)~2 ,:,'",", ~- '\ \ I. ~ . --'\ PART 1. GENERAL -'0 ......:,.. '- 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES - ,.--"'1 "-... :~ t;? 4-7 A. Provide all labor and materials and all equipment for electrical demolition, remod€ji9g and -1 new construction. B. Plans are to be considered as schematic, written dimensions shall govern, dimensioned architectural plans shall take precedence over un-dimensioned electrical plans, any questions as to exact location of equipment shall be verified with Architect. All work must be coordinated with all other trades, relocations as a result of this coordination shall be at no expense to the Owner. C. Where noted on the Drawings or where indicated in other sections of the specifications, this ~ivision shall install equipment furnished by others and shall make required service connections. Verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. 1.2. JOBSITE VISIT A. The Contractor shall visit the site of work and familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work prior to bidding. Contracts are based upon furnishing all labor and materials required to complete each installation ready for use. No additional allowance granted because of the Contractor's lack of knowledge of jobsite conditions. 1.3. MEASUREMENTS A. All measurements must be verified from actual observation at the building. This Contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting in place in approved, satisfactory, and workman like manner in every particular. 1.4. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. General character and scope of work are illustrated on drawings and lor listed in specifications. Drawings and specifications are complementary one to the other; whatever is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. In cases of inconsistency between drawings and specifications, the one that results in the most complete and highest quality installation shall govern. B. Drawings for the work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and location of the work. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as conduit fittings, sleeves and access panels may not be indicated. Where such items are required by code or by other specifications sections or where required for the proper installation of the work, such items shall be included. Inclusion of such items shall not be a basis for any contract amount or duration changes. 1.5. LAWS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses and permits. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, regulations, and code requirements applicable to his work. B. Work shall comply with the latest issues of the National Electrical Code, Iowa State Building Code and City of Iowa City Codes. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 1.6. EXISTING FACILITIES AND SERVICES A. Where it is necessary to tie into existing services, they have been located as accurately as possible from inspection of building and original plans. The exact location is not guaranteed; Contractor shall personally inspect the conditions and determine such locations prior to bidding. Variations from locations will not be basis for additional compensation. B. All outages must be coordinated with the Owner's Representative. The Owner reserves the right to require all outages be done on an overtime basis at the Owner's convenience and expense. All outages shall be arranged for at least one week in advance. All outages shall be kept in a minimum and shall not exceed more than four hours. 1.7. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Final settlement will not be made with Contractor until all systems have been thoroughly checked and found in good operating condition. All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by Architect at any and all times. Architect shall have right to reject any defective material or workmanship and require its correction without cost to the Owner. B. Systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to the Owner's Representative and the Architect. C. Perform such tests as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the site. D. Prior to acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's Representative and Architect, all features and functions of all systems and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation of the systems. Each system shall be demonstrated. E. The demonstrations shall consist of not less than the following: ~ 1. Point out the actual location of each component of a system and dem~trate ite; function and its relationship to other components within the system. ~() ~ 2. Demonstrate the electrical systems by actual "start-stop" operation sh~t:1gjho~ -n work controls, how to reset protective devices, how to replace fuses, ~ ~at tciao r I in emergency. -I () r 3. Demonstrate communication, signal, alarm and detection systems by-p6imo paiBt [-n actual operation of the systems and show how to reset signal, alarm aes d:electi&1 0 devices. ~ ^ r::-? )> N F. Systems to be demonstrated shall include the following: <::) 1. Lighting and lighting controls systems. G. Contractor shall furnish the necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions, and shall arrange to have the manufacturer's representatives present to assist with the demonstrations. H. Contractor shall arrange with the Owner and the Architect the dates and times for performing the demonstrations, at least two weeks in advance. 1.8. COOPERATION AND PROGRESS A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the Owner so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. The Contractor shall examine fully the Drawings and the Specifications for other Subcontractors of the other trades, and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other Subcontractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with other Subcontractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Owner reserves the right to determine space priority for the Contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various Subcontractors. C. Installation of new services distribution shall be scheduled and coordinated to minimize disruption. D. Coordination of utilities shall demonstrate the components that will be installed and how the service area is to be maintained to all components. E. The Contractor shall provide coordination and phasing of the demolition (or relocation) of existing services. Installation of new services distribution shall be scheduled and coordtnl;lted to minimize disruption. - .~ C) -II 1.9. PROTECTION OF WORK -J-.:>, ~:"-j- :~---- r~. -..'. ---. A. Contractor shall protect his work from damage or injury by keeping all conduits,:g~tt~'l,S, -- ducts, etc., plugged, capped, or otherwise protected. Any such injury or damage snaU be :? replaced or repaired without cost to the Owner. All pieces of equipment shall be~i1cably ~.."~ protected, and upon completion of project shall be equal to new condition. ~::;. /~ .n ',--1 , I '...../ 7 -1 1.1 O. OPERATING MANUALS, INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the project and before acceptance by the Owner and the Architect, the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Operating Instructions, etc., for all equipment furnished by him. He shall furnish complete operating instructions to the designated representative of the Owner for each piece of equipment. B. The manufacturers shall thoroughly instruct the Owner's designated representative in the proper operation of the equipment and its maintenance. Each such manufacturer shall submit a written report of this being done, giving the dates, time spent, and by whom such instruction was given. C. Prior to completion of work and before acceptance by the Owner of substantial completion certification, the Contractor as it applies to his work, shall submit a rough draft of complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals that are properly indexed to identify all submittals. 1.11. EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS A. Note this Contractor to provide wiring for equipment furnished by others. Consult other sections of specifications and plans for exact determination and requirements. B. Whether starters furnished under this Contract or not, this Contractor is responsible for checking overload relays on all starters and equipment to ensure proper motor protection. Any discrepancies to be reported in writing to Contractor furnishing equipment. It is imperative that this Contractor inspect other sections of specifications to determine extent of electrical work required of him in making connections to equipment furnished and installed by others. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. In general, this Contractor shall extend wiring to the disconnect switch, furnish the disconnect switch, extend wiring to the starters, control panel, or other device furnished with the equipment. This Contractor shall make connections to pushbutton stations or other pilot devices at the equipment. This Contractor, in general, shall mount the magnetic starters and pilot devices. Final motor or equipment connections shall be flexible conduit, not more than three feet long. This Contractor must confer with Contractor furnishing equipment to ensure proper roughing-in without conflict. Where combination motor starter units or motor control centers are designated, this Contractor shall provide the magnetic motor starters and associated control to be contained in the combination motor starter units or motor control units. O. All work must be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and present a neat appearance when completed. 1.12. WARRANTY/GUARANTEE: A. Upon written acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall warrant/guarantee, and be responsible for, proper operation of the Work for a period of one calendar year following the date of Substantial Project Completion, or the respective date of acceptance of each item of equipment, system, or area of the Work. Any extended warranties to be provjged by tKe5 Contractor beyond the one calendar year period shall be identified under the!Cific ::.3 specification sections. The Contractor shall be held liable for the Work durin Ouar~ee period, and shall make good any faults or imperfections that may arise due to e~ts 0iiZ= omissions in materials or workmanship. 0 c-: = --\ ) -< r"' -0 1.13. MODEL NUMBERS ___ Cp :x 0-".' A. Model numbers are used in some instances to help define the overall characte~~ req~ed of a specific component, however, it is recognized that model numbers change~m tim~ time or that the model numbers listed may be incorrect. The Contractor shall provide the components that satisfy the performance requirements specified, rather than providing units meeting the model number requirements in the event there is a discrepancy. B. The bidder and Contractors shall not rely solely on the model numbers for selecting the appropriate components to be furnished. C. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to call to the attention of the Architect any discrepancies between the performance requirements specified and any model number used during the bidding period prior to issue of the last addendum. If no such notification is made it will be assumed that no such discrepancies exist. 1.14. SUBMITTALS A. Coordinated shop drawings shall be provided on all equipment specified in Division 16 and shall be in accordance with the applicable sections and general provisions of this specification. Additionally, all shop drawings submitted pertaining to major equipment items shall include the particular item(s) intended for installation indicating sufficient information to ensure compatibility with physical constraints, manufacturer required maintenance and code clearances, and indication of non-interference with work installed by other trades and other work installed by this trade. Submittals not in accordance with the above noted conditions will be returned to the Contractor without action. Any claims arising from delay in construction scheduling arising from submission of non-conforming shop drawings will not be honored. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-4 11 - r :~-n 1---1 i...._) ,--, Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. Substitute Items: 1. Following contract award, modified structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical work or redesign required as a result of the Contractor implementing an approved Alternate, or providing substitute or "approved equal" materials and equipment shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Said costs shall be borne in their entirety by the Contractor. 2. Substitute items will be allowed only under the conditions specified in the General Conditions and Division 1 of the specifications. C. The Contractor shall not install or fabricate any items without receiving accepted shop drawings from the Architect for those sections requiring submittals. 1.15. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFilLING A. Complete excavating necessary for underground wiring, and conduit. Backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Work shall be in accordance with the requirements as follows, and the requirements of DIVISION 15. Care shall be taken in excavating, that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the conduit. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping, if necessary. No greater length of trench shall be left open, in advance of conduit laying, than that which is authorized or directed by the Owner's Representative. B. Roots shall be removed to a level 18" below finished grades and deeper as required for duct runs, manholes, and light pole bases. No roots shall be allowed to remain under the work. C. Backfill about the structures shall be placed, when practicable, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of duct lines shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately 6" above the existing grades. In backfilling around duct lines, fill sand shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than 6" over the top of the duct. Fill, backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers, and shall be brought up to within 6" of finished grades. The final layer of backfill, from 6" below to 6" above grade, shall be done using good quality topsoil. Fill and backfill shall be clean and free from vegetable matter and refuse. D. The ~ivision 16 Contractor shall provide all necessary "de-watering "required for any underground work. There is a "high water table" level at the construction site. The Contractor will not be entitled to any contract time extension or contract extra for any dja.:, watering required to install his work. 5 ~.~.~ ~o {- ~--- - .':'." .~~ ;~~-.. \ -n END OF SECTION 16010 C) -"'~"', .....---, ;-s , I -"-\ :<. -n , .......-.....1 '-.J r<) p -....J ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ~o ):> :::-~ -< C)~ -Ie; ~< C;:, I. I -::0 ~7' )> 1"'-.3 = = --' c- :e> :;;;l: -u :x. -n - \ In .----, \..,..; N .. N o ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16010-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 ,1 SECTION INCLUDES c5 ::;:-: C) ):.0' =' _.c.,_l - ' ",A- -,'\ .--- A. Conduit systems 1 . Metal conduit. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 4. Electrical metallic tubing. 5. Nonmetal conduit. 6. Hangers and supports. B. Outlet and device boxes. ""-.... - t ' ':'."\ :::-) .:- ~ ~~ 7', 'i'. "'-:;:.:. ;/...~ ::;. :P r~-- . ,- '1 , I ;~,~) r:-? -l C. Pull and junction boxes 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers - boxes: 1 . Raco 2. Steel City 3. Appleton B. Acceptable manufacturers - hangers and supports: 1 . Unistrut 2.2 MATERIALS A. The materials used in the fabrication of the conduit system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. Where a manufacturer is named for a particular material, the material of other manufacturer shall be acceptable provided the material meets requirements of the Specification. B. Rigid Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by hot-dip or electro-galvanizing process. Provide thread protective caps and coupling plugs to prevent injury to threads during handling. 1 . Use rigid conduit for all conduit regardless of size where installed in exposed exterior locations, or in poured concrete walls, columns, floors or other concrete structures. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thinwall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro-galvanized process. Use for conduit installed in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed in interior locations. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 D. Flexible Metal Conduit (1/2" minimum size, 36" maximum length except for light fixture connections which may be up to 72" long): Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro-galvanized steel strip. Use for: Final connections to motor operated equipment and connections to dry type transformers and connections from junction boxes to lighting fixtures and for wiring within casework and millwork. E. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit (1/2" minimum size, 36" maximum length): Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, with water and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connections to equipment located in wet areas and at all exterior locations. F. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): May be used as approved by Code for 2" and larger where rigid conduit is specified, except shall not be used for conduit buried in earth fill. G. PVC Conduit: Schedule 40 or 80 as called for, 90oC. conduit shall be composed of polyvinyl chloride and shall conform to NEMA Standards. Conduit fittings and cem.ent shall be by the same manufacturer. PVC conduit may be used for 1" and larger installations where buried outside of the building, and where encased in concrete or below concrete slabs, ~ ~ Rigid Conduit Fittings: Threaded, galvanized steel/malleable bushings, and co~te tight~ Grounding lug type with nylon insulated bushings for connections at cabinets, bo~d ~ gutters. Y" -=2 _ o -~ - Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, wat~ -0 concrete tight. Connectors with nylon insulated throats at cabinets, boxes and gutters.~t :;l::' screw type shall not be permitted. 5 ~ r:? Z Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Screw-in type galvanized malleable iron or steel with ~Ion insulated throats. -r\ -::::: l' \(n ',---1, ',-..J H. I. J. - ....p K. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel with watertight gaskets, "0" ring and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. L. Condulet Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be Condulet type for sharp turns and tees. Minimum radius shall be compatible with the cable to be installed. M. Material, size and installation for outlet boxes shall comply with NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370. N. Boxes: 1. Surface mounted wall outlets: For single outlet and double outlets use 4" square by 2-1/8" deep box. For more than two ganged outlets use 3-3/4" x 2W' deep multiple gang masonry boxes. Boxes to be provided with 1/2" raised cover as required for device. 2. In suspended ceilings: Use 3-1/2" deep octagon box with fixture studs and steel mounting bars. O. Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NFPA 70- National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370. P. Pull and junction boxe~ not specifically described in NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 370, shall be fabricated of minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel with screw covers, brass screws and hardware with enamel finish. Q. Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete floors shall be flush type, cast iron, CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-2 with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with tile or carpet f~r EQver~,"'n shall have recessed covers to accommodate the floor covering. -::--). '\< :? \::J r"~ 05.03a; --~ > A&J #~6~?0q--.. .1:___ __'- _ :' ,," -,r.:o' --...\ ",.~., -n ---- ~"'''-- Riverside Festival Stage Improvements R. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installations shall be NEMA 3R rated. ::.:_ r;? - s. Construction, sizes and installation of auxiliary gutters shall comply with NFPA 70 - N'"illional Electrical Code (NEC), Article 374. ..J T. Provide conduit hanger and support devices of approved type for method of supporting required, to include: Structural steel members, suspension rods, conduit clamps, concrete inserts, expansion shields and beam clamps. All devices shall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistant finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows: 1. Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surface of structure: Use conduit clamps mounted on Unistrut channel to maintain 1" (minimum) clearance between conduit and structure. 2. Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead: Use split ring conduit clamp suspended by threaded steel drop rod. 3. Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead: Use split ring conduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of channels, suspended by not less than 3/8" threaded steel drop rod. 4. Where conduit is buried in concrete floor slabs: Anchor conduit to structural floor with conduit straps, at 10'-0" intervals. 5. Maximum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). Regardless of listed spacing provide additional hangers or supports at not more than 2'-0" from each change of direction and at each side of any box or fitting. 6. Metal straps or tie wires shall not be used to support conduit, box or other raceways. U. Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows: 1. Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete: Use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2. Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete: Use self-drilling expansion anchors. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete. 3. Hangers or supports anchored to structural steel: Use beam clamps and/or steel channels as required by structural system. 4. Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck: Use drill-in expansion anchors. 5. The use of explosive force hammer actuated, booster assist or similar anchoring device will not be permitted. V. Conduits 3" diameter and larger, rigidly secured to building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint shall be provided with expansion and deflection couplings. The couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. W. Conduits smaller than 3" diameter shall be provided with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint and connected by 15" of slack flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above may be installed. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Horizontal runs of conduit shall be installed in ceiling plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shall be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be routed overhead. Conduit shall be supported from the building structure and conduits shall be supported independently from mechanical system components. C. 3. 4. Conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connections to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as othe~ noted. _ '3 ~O i;. Y' :::::i. :;::; ..-<: - ('-\ '-/ , ::::::\Cl Certain conduits are permitted to be embedded in structural concrete work: ~ g; 1 . Reinforcing steel shall be securely anchored in place before installing condu~l?' 2. No steel reinforcing shall be displaced from plan dimensions without approv~ the _ Architect. \D Conduit shall not be placed over top of reinforcing or under bottom of reinforcing. Conduit and fittings shall not displace concrete in columns in excess of 4% of total cross-section area of column without approval of the Architect. Conduit shall not be placed closer than three diameters on center. Maximum size of embedded conduit or pipe shall not exceed 1/3 thickness of structural slab; 2/3 thickness of topping slab. Conduit shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. 1\ - ,..- \-n \ I o D. E. No conduit shall be installed less than 6" from piping. F. -0 ::;:. N .' 5. 6. G. Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4" for power, control and lighting and 1" for communications applications. Where specific sizes requir~d by Drawings or Specifications are larger than Code requirements, the larger size shall be provided. Size conduits for type THW insulated wire. H. Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically, continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured to cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity. I. Where cable trays are installed for communications cables, conduit shall be instaIJed from the equipment junction box to the cable tray. J. Communications conduit bends shall be made so that the radius of the curve of the inner edge is not less than ten times the conduit outside diameter. K. Install a nylon braided polyester or propylene pull cord with 12" minimum slack at the ends for each empty communications conduit.. 3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be installed for fixtures, switches, receptacles and other devices. B. Approximate location of outlets are shown on the plans, but each outlet location shall be checked by the Contractor before installing the outlet box. CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Wall boxes installed flush in common wall shall not be back-to-back or through-wall type. D. Boxes located on opposite sides of a common wall that are closely connected by conduit shall have the conduit openings plugged with duct seal (use fire safing material to plug the nipple in rated fire and/or smoke walls). E. Outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and square with wall face and with front of plaster ring located within 1/8" of face of finish wall. Boxes in masonry shall be set with bottom of the pqx tight to the masonry unit. C) ~-~ :~C) --\-..~. .'~-, F. All outlet boxes shall be securely fastened on at least both sides. ",. - -,--i G. Outlet and backboxes shall be supported independently of the ceiling material. H. Outlet and backboxes shall be supported independently of the conduit system. "'--'" _-___, \.., ~i .'''' .----- :"'rn 3 :J~~ ~/'" ,~ ""'-- )> {',) -0 i"f1 ,--...., ',-.J 3.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX AND GUTTER INSTALLATION A. Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. -..J B. For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installed in finished ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between box and finished material. C. Pull and junction boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Architect. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. B. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports C. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. D. Hangers and supports shall be installed for all conduit and boxes. E. Conduit, fittings, raceways and boxes shall not be attached to or supported from mechanical pipes, plumbing pipes, sheet metal ducts, or suspended ceiling support wires. END OF SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-5 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 o ~.O )>~ ../ C") .... ~C) :<r rn -:::D 07' ~ ~ = = ~ c:....... ~""' % -n -0 ::;t r- rn r\ ......J r:-? \00 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16111-6 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE --- Q ~=-~ ....~:...- '~l/ ,;' r'.~~ ,,:'::,.J _,J (~,- PART 1 - GENERAL -\1 C) A. Wiring systems, 600 volts and less .- ,-~ , , .:2: :f; -0 ';'Tl \ I--~ '_J 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .., ...-,_1, .../ - - f.,? PART 2 - PRODUCTS --' 2.1 MATERIALS A. This Section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems of 600 volts and less. B. Minimum size conductors shall be No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and No. 14 AWG or per manufacturer recommendation for signal and control circuits. C. The material used for the wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. Where a manufacturer is named for a particular material, the material of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided the material meets requirements of the Specifications. D. Wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity. Power, lighting and control wire and cable shall be insulated to 600 volts. All conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be stranded. E. Type of wire and cable for the various applications shall be as follows: 1. Type THW, THWN or XHHW (750C.): Use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2.2 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through #10 AWG, conductors #8 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with 1/2" band of colored tape at all pull boxes, junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Phase "A" conductor - Phase "B" conductor - Phase "C" conductor - Neutral conductor - Grounding conductor - 120/208 Volt Black Red Blue White Green 120/240 Volt Black Red 277/480 Volt Brown Orange Yellow Grey Green White Green 2.3 CONNECTORS A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller: Use 3M Company "Scotchloc" vinyl insulated spring connectors or Architect approved equivalent. B. In-line connectors for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger: Use Thomas & Betts two way connectors long barrel type, Series 54800 with Interlocking Covers or Architect approved equivalent. WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16120-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 C. Taps for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger: Use Thomas & Betts "C" Taps, Series 54700 or Architect approved equivalent. D. Cable terminations to busbars, switch studs and terminal blocks: Use Thomas & Betts two hole lugs, long barrel type, Series 54800 or Architect approved equivalent. E. Insulate splices and taps to thickness of conductor insulation with half-lapped layers of 3M Company "Scotch" brand No. 88 vinyl electrical tape or Architect approved equivalent. Connectors having irregular surfaces: Fill voids and smooth contours with 3M Company "Scotchfil" electrical putty prior to taping. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wire. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. B. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. C. Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles. D. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. F. Cable for all feeders shall be continuous from origin to termination. G. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessible junction boxes. H. Power feeder cable shall be pulled with cable lubricating compound suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with. Compound shall not harden or become adhesive. END OF SECTION 16120 o ~O _J ; o -<- -Ie) ..:-<r rn 0.2'2 ~"^ )> \.Q WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16120-2 f'o,,) = = -..l L ):>l. 2: -n ,- 1'-1 r-l \......,1 -0 :x ':'? Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wiring devices and plates 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts and data for switches, receptacles and cover plates necessary to evaluate the proposed devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS c~ ~:;q .... -; -11 A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Eagle 3. Leviton 4. Pass & Seymour 5. Slater 6. Architect approved equivalent. 0" ;.2, ;=2 -D - '7'-1 l \ , t----' , ' 1,"-,...--1' - ,- ..,."." S(7< :t> r;;> -.J B. Catalog numbers are based on Hubbell. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All wiring devices shall be Heavy Duty, "Specification Grade" except where otherwise indicated. B. Wall switches shall be white color, Hubbell catalog numbers as follows: 1. Single Pole Toggle Light Switch - 20 amp, 120-277 volt, No. CS 1221. C. Receptacles shall be "Specification Grade." 1. Duplex receptacle - 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type, side or back wired, 20 amp, 125 volt, No. CS5352 series. 2. Receptacles on shall be white color. 3. Duplex receptacles, GFCI type, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding type, 20 amp, 125 volt, No. GFR5352. D. Receptacles for power and special purpose outlets shall have characteristics and NEMA configurations per Electrical drawings. E. Provide stainless steel plates for all switches, receptacles, TV outlets, other outlets and blank plates for unused outlets. F. Provide weatherproof, lockable covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in wet locations. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION B. Install devices plumb and level. ~ - <:3 0 ?Z.o t- 'J,'J"'" --n )> :::( -'/'" ..- -t?._ 4I..~ - - \- 1__) ...... - -:,( . en ~~1, -0 ',~l, .-.,. \......J -::0 -"'"' 0--- ~ z/' - 'Y" \.D A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Receptacles shall be installed with the grounding pole located at the bottom. E. In masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are at nearest mortar joint to indicated height. F. Where light switches are located adjacent to doors, they shall be installed on "knob" side of door, unless indicated otherwise. G. Prior to roughing-in outlet boxes, verify door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Switches and rvceptacles shall be installed and located as follows, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 1. Switches: 48" above finished floors. 2. Receptacles: 18" above finished floors generally; 36" above finished floors or 8" above counters and work benches in kitchens, shops, mechanical equipment rooms and similar areas. B. In masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are at nearest mortar joint to specified height. C. Where walls have wainscot finish, switch height shall be adjusted as required, so switch is either all in wainscot or all in wall above wainscot. D. Prior to roughing-in outlet boxes, Contractor shall verify from general construction drawings; door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and work benches. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. For all switches and receptacles, Contractor shall verify and if necessary provide and install an extension to bring back box to within 1/8" of finished surface. F. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." G. Install devices plumb and level. H. Install switches with OFF position down. I. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. J. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. K. Install cover plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in all areas. L. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. END OF SECTION 16140 (~2 :;'- (-) --J ,;~... ==:~-' i c') rv -.J WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 3 II ;'"'rl t \ . '----1 '....J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r-- r---:> ~O = = -... C- );>~ ):lo" Il -,.<" :;e: 0 ~- -(' -1", rTl .:<r -0 rn 0 -::0 :x 0--- ~/' ~ ):> I.D -~_.~ WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16140 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Branch circuit panelboards 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings including fabrication details, lug and bus arrangement, ampere and voltage rating. breaker frame sizes and interrupting ratings. 1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES A. Fabrication and installation shall comply with applicable Sections of NEC, Article 384, and shall bear UL listing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS r ., , -, I A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1 . General Electric 2. Square D 3. Siemens 4. Architect approved equivalent () -....,.1 -Tl 1-'- ""D :"'1'"1 DESCRIPTION 1:-' 02.,;' .,.- ......'"' "'> :"-. )> ~--, ,-,,/ 2.2 r'V .. -..J A. Panelboards described in this Section shall be dead-front, safety type furnished with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers. B. Panelboards shall be for lighting, receptacle and applicable branch circuit and power distribution applications. Circuit breakers shall have ratings as scheduled on Drawings. C. Branch circuit panelboards shall be equivalent to Square 0 type NQOD. 2.3 PANELBOARDS A. Bussing Assembly and Temperature Rise: 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. 2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard bussing shall be such that any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite.polarities in such a manner that two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. 3. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. 4. Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as scheduled on the plans. Equipment ground bus shall be provided for panels. All bus shall be copper. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL BOARDS SECTION 16160-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 B. Safety Barriers: The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. C. Cabinets and Fronts: 1. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. 2. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded door pulls. 3. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. 4. Front shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. 5. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 6. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high x 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load type fed by each circuit and room area(s) served. 7. Fronts and cabinets shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting~imer and baked enamel finish. 0 5 W" T . I ~O 3;: -n Iring ermma s: ? :::.:\ + I l 1. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral s~l-be ULJJSted F suitable for the type of conductor specified. ::::i (", - r-n 2. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be U~~ as~itab~~ for the type of conductor specified. - 9J :> .....J 07' N Circuit Breakers: ~ .::.. 1. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic, trip mdicatinl)fhnd have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. 2. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Circuit breakers rated for 120/208/240 V AC service shall be plug-on type, circuit breakers rated for 277/480 VAC service shall be bolt-on type. The ampere rating of all circuit breakers shall be visible on the circuit breaker handle. 3. The front faces of circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position (or equip each breaker with a circuit card holder and neatly printed card identifying the circuit). 4. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. 5. Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. D. E. F. Integrated Equipment Rating: 1. Each panelboard, as complete unit, shall have a rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panel board schedule. Such rating shall be established by factory test with the circuit breakers mounted on the panelboard. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Securely anchor panelboards to structure and make feeder and branch circuit connections. B. All recessed panelboards shall have a minimum of five 3/4" diameter empty conduit stubs, from the panelboard to the ceiling space above. C. Install typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. END OF SECTION 16160 < -.'.-"; (j "j.:' ::: . ~?-\c; :::<'Q'; '(_:.::; ::: '--....-:. /-..... -s. ~ CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 3 ~~Tl ~......~- ~.~.'-'-- -0 ,-C\ ("-' ,_./ .,-"-. -1/'" r:? -J Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 r-. ,....:> 0 ~ :z.O <- \l V' ~_.... -;z;. y-\ - -< - \ 0 :::\ (J - en r"" ::< 'rn -0 r--i, -':JJ ::J(.. \..J Q--- N Z/' .. - :P' \.D CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disconnect switches for all equipment and motors 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include catalog cuts, fabrication details, ratings and other pertinent data required to evaluate the proposed equipment. 1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES f--~~ ~~~:~~:where otherwise required by this Section, the following Standards and c~s shall~il NEC A . I 380 <"-' () c.- ;: ULlist:~ce ):-:=1 )': -n Ci ,-' PART 2 - PRODUCTS~- \Tl hi -':J~1 """,:: "1.' -'. \....J 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ~d:>::: r-,J <: .. A. Acceptable manufacturers - Disconnect switches for fractional horsepower motor~ess thaQ..!/2 horsepower and less than 125 volts: 1. Bussmann A. B. Acceptable manufacturers - Disconnect switches for integral horsepower motors, 1/2 horsepower and larger: 1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Siemens 4. Architect approved equivalent 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors, less than 1/2 horsepower, and less than 125 volts, and for equipment of similar capacity and voltage shall be Bussman types as follows: 1. Type SRY mounted on 4" square box, for plug-in equipment in unfinished areas. 2. Type SRW mounted on 2-3/4" switch box, for plug-in equipment in finished areas, installed on flush switch box. 3. Type SSY mounted on 4" square box, for direct connected equipment in unfinished areas. 4. Type SSW mounted on 2-3/4" switch box, for direct connected equipment in unfinished areas, installed on flush switch box. B. Disconnects for integral horsepower motors, 1/2 horsepower and larger, and for equipment of similar capacity shall be heavy duty industrial type, fusible or non-fusible as indicated, with solid neutrals where required. At interior locations enclosures shall be NEMA type 1 ; at exterior locations enclosures shall be NEMA type 3R. C. Disconnects for integral horsepower motors shall have provision for padlocking in the "OFF" DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16170-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 positions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that disconnect switches comply with applicable requirements of NEC and UL standards. B. Install fuses in fusible switches. END OF SECTION 16170 ,...., 5 = = --' ~o c- >~ :;po 1\ % C)-< -- \ ==\ c) In -<1- -0 - rTl C"J -::JJ z Q7' ~ <:: )> \D DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16170 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING r) ~. ~~.. ~~-- -- Co.."... PART 1. GENERAL .'-r-\ A. System grounding: "',"1 \ i I :S ~"----1, -, ,- "_..J r:? 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES B. Bonding PART 2. -J PRODUCTS 2.1. GROUNDING WIRES A. Grounding wires shall be UL and NEC approved types, copper, insulated and color identified green, except where indicated otherwise. B. Wire size shall not be less than that indicated on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC. 2.2. GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Lighting fixtures, receptacles and fixed equipment shall be bonded and grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code or as indicated. B. Ground for 120/208 volt systems shall be obtained by extending insulated ground conductor throughout the system from the service entrance point. Equipment ground conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC. PART 3. 3.1. INSTALLATION EXECUTION A. Grounding shall be in accordance with NEC and indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Metallic conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to a housing of electrical equipment by means of a locknut and bushing or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Bushings shall be connected with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus. C. Conduit System: 1 . Ground all metallic conduit systems 2. Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding conductor shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit. D. Feeders: Install green grounding conductors with all feeders as indicated. E. Boxes, cabinets, enclosures and panelboards: 1. Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass. 2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination. 3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs for terminating the ground wires. GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16450 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 END OF SECTION 16450 ~ 6 c:;::;. --' zO t- :P" Il "Y':::::::i :;r.. 0-<' - - r- ::::; CJ \-r\ -<r -0 {'.'~ - ,1', :; --J'1 '.....J o~ N .e;. .. ~- ~ \J:) GROUNDING & BOND.ING SECTION 16450 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.,038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES ~} :'.::(j (-~- -n ;,./ --': ~,---- __'c.... A. Feeder and branch circuits (~) :::<\ t'-~ ;.,~.~'~ ?~ -:\,-.~ ,,-:;!- ::>, ~-;:.o :P -0 PART 2 - PRODUCTS _......" ~,... ."'n 'f \; , ~.--- I, ",-J ~ NOT USED - --1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - FEEDER CIRCUITS A. Layout the feeders generally as indicated, but determine the exact location and routing of feeders to best fit the layout of the work. B. Where conductor sizes for feeder circuit are not indicated, provide feeder circuits with conductors sized as follows: 1. Feeders, serving an individual branch circuit panel, or an individual power distribution panel, shall have conductors with ampere capacity of not less than the capacity of the panel mains. 2. Feeders, serving more than one branch circuit panel, or more than one power distribution panel, shall have conductors with ampere capacity of not less than the combined ampere capacity of all panel mains, served by the feeder. 3.2 INSTALLATION - BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Receptacles and appliances shall be on separate circuits from lighting. B. Branch panel circuits are numbered to match NEMA pole numbering system; poles 1 and 2 _ Phase A, poles 3 and 4 - Phase B, poles 5 and 6 - Phase C, etc. Actual field numbering of circuit directories may vary from pole numbers, but shall be phased and pole connected. C. No. 14 wire will be permitted only on control circuits of relays, contactors, starters. No. 12 wire shall be minimum size for lighting, motor, or general branch circuits. D. Where conductor sizes for such circuits are not indicated, provide branch circuits with conductors sized as follows: 1. Conductors for individual motor branch circuits shall have ampere capacity of not less than 125% of the running current of the motors. 2. Conductors for multiple motor branch circuits shall have ampere capacity of not less than 125% of the running current of the largest motor plus 100% of the running current for each additional motor connected to the circuit. 3. Conductors for individual or multiple equipment branch circuits shall have an ampere capacity of not less than 125% of the total connected ampere load served by the branch circuit. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16471 -1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 E. Conductor sizes for lighting, receptacles and small motor branch circuits, with less than 20 ampere connected load shall be sized as follows: 1. Conductor size for branch circuits 75'-0" in length from branch circuit panel to center of load shall not be smaller than No. 12; up to 125'-0", not smaller than No. 10; up to 175'-0", not smaller than NO.8. F. Where specific conductor sizes required are larger than Code requires, the larger sizes shall be installed. G. Circuits may be arranged in 4-wire feeds, 3 circuits and common neutral, in color code previously described. H. Do not use shared neutral conductors for lighting circuits serving light fixtures which are controlled by dimmers. END OF SECTION 16471 ,....." ~O = = -.I <-.. )> --j ~ 11 (j-< z .- =iCi r ,:-<r m rn -0 1-" O:lJ ::n: \_J ~^ N .. )> \.0 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16471 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16476 FUSES r=; '-" ~C) -....1_.._....-. -"",. -.- _.J PART 1 - GENERAL ):~".. :"1;.= -11 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES C) -", --J' ":-'~...... -0 in ,-I. \.J A. Fuses I'-~ '-, <-,.. ". );; N .. PART 2 - PRODUCTS -..J 2.1 FUSES B. Low voltage current-limiting fuses, types as specified below, shall be UL listed in accordance with Standards 198C and 198E and CSA certified HRC in accordance with Standard C22.2 No. 106-M1992. C. Fuses shall be by BUSSMAN, GOULD-SHAWMUT or LITTLE FUSE, types and ratings as follows: 1. UL Class R, Low-Peak Dual Element Current Limiting, Type LPN-R and LPS-R, 200,000 ampere interrupting rating; use for circuits 600 ampere or less, and motors above one-half horsepower. 2. UL Class S, Fustat Dual element, 10,000 ampere interrupting rating; use for general purpose circuits up to 30 ampere, and fractional horsepower motors, 125 volt or less. D. Fuses for feeders, branch circuits, motors and other equipment shall be selected in types and ratings in accordance with NEC to provide a coordinated system of overcurrent protection, thus in case of a fault or harmful overload, only the fuses nearest the fault or overload will open. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16476-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 f-' 0 <:::) <:::) -' ~O C- >::~ ).,. 11 ::;Y- O-<~ - \ -C' ~~ -0 m r-"\ -::0 3 \..../ Or: ~ ~ \.0 FUSES SECTION 16476 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS PART 1. GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Furnish completed bound brochure of all fixtures showing cuts and photometric data properly identified for approval before construction. B. Furnish completed bound brochure of all ballasts used showing types of ballast and lamps, etc. for approval before construction. C. Submit catalog cuts of all lamps. A. The following standards and codes apply: 1. NEC 2. UL Listings C) ~~~ C',: -n r:..:~,' 1.3. STANDARDS AND CODES t.. PRODUCTS ---.-1..-....., ~.' "\ '.' _~".. r'-- - "-. b_"'! 0=:"' <:':'" ,/ " .,.. <-- )> _.)";,.. ;-1. -,./ -0 rTl PART 2. N 2.1. LIGHTING EQUIPMENT -.I A. Lighting equipment shall be as scheduled and as specified or Architect approved equivalent. Architect's decision final as 10 all substitute fixtures. B. Mounting as specified in schedule; if question arises, Architect's decision shall govern mounting height, etc. C. All units to bear Underwriters' Laboratories label. 2.2. LAMPS A. All fluorescent lamps shall be 41000 K unless noted otherwise: 1. 48" lamps - GENERAL ELECTRIC F32T8/CW/RS or equivalent. 2. Standard lamps less than 36" length shall be full wattage lamps by GENERAL ELECTRIC or equivalent. B. Approved equivalent products by PHILIPS or SYLVANIA C. Provide lamps for all fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. D. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be 41 OooK size as scheduled. LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16510-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Contractor responsible for all fixtures and lamps until acceptance by Owner. B. All recessed fixtures in plywood or gypsum board ceilings shall be furnished with plaster frames. ' C. Fixtures recessed in ceiling shall be installed so that they can be removed from below the ceiling. D. All recessed fixtures shall be installed with metal bar hangers for attaching to ceiling supports. Fixtures shall not be supported directly from ceiling, provide galvanized steel wire as required for supporting fixture from structure. No wood or other combustible material shall be used for supporting fixtures. E. Prior to placing orders for recessed fluorescent fixtures, verify the types of ceilings and suspension that have been approved for this project and order fixtures with flanges as required to fit in the ceilings. END OF SECTION 16510 ,..,..:z <5 = = --J -Zo (...... ""'" II :r~ :::::i Z ~'"-< - (j r- :::j C) II' ::< ~1 -0 '~1 -::0 :x l.J O~ ~ ~ \..0 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16510-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric services for equipment furnished by Mechanical Contractor, Equipment Contractor and .the Owner B. In general the equipment to be wired shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Mechanical Equipment. 2. Equipment furnished by other contractors. PART 3 - EXECUTION C) ;~~ () )> :~"-; ~",- -n PART2-PRODUCTS- NOT USED 3.1 INSTALLATION ~:-~.: ~.~ n' -r::; Provide services and make final connections for motors and equipment. Make fi@ ~~_ :3;;: connections except where noted as "rough-in only" or "final connections by other~ W'henf.f.mal connections are to be made by others install outlet box, pull in conductors and le~ 8" pigtftH for each conductor. Conductors shall be taped and appropriate cover plate installed over b~. -'I ~ I I ,---j .1....../ A. B. Furnish safety disconnects for motors and equipment not so equipped, make service complete to each item of equipment. C. This section will not be responsible for; internal wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wiring for equipment furnished by others or for temperature control wiring, unless such wiring is specifically indicated or called for in other sections of the Project Manual. D. Electrical drawings identify the locations of motors and equipment and the motor and equipment wiring schedule provide information based upon the mechanical design. Prior to roughing-in conduit, this section shall consult with Mechanical Contractors, Equipment Contractors and Architect, and shall verify with them the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall obtain from the Mechanical and Equipment Contractors and the Owner a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by them. These schedules shall be used for verifying services, motor starters, disconnects, fuses, and overload protection. E. The Division 15 Contractor and the Division 16 Contractor shall provide written certification that the mechanical equipment requiring power and the electrical equipment providing this power have been coordianted and are totally compatible. The certification shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner's Representative prior to energizing any mechanical equipment. F. The Division 16 Contractor shall submit written acknowledgement of having received and reviewed shop drawing information from the Division 15 Contractor and other parties supplying equipment requiring power. This acknowledgement shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner's Representative prior to submitting shop drawings for electrical equipment providing power to mechanical or other equipment. Submittals for such items that do not include evidence of having been coordinated will be returned to the Contractor without being reviewed. WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS SECTION 16660 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements END OF SECTION 16660 05.038 A&J #200640.00 ,....., 0 C:~ c:::> -..l ~O c:.... )>j "", TI :ce 0--- r- --r: :j) nl ". ,( -0 rTl f'-l 6~ :x '-......1 ~ " ~ )> \D WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS SECTION 16660 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Removal of existing debris. 6 ~C) )-...... ::::, 0-' --', ,- ~<c., \: \ -I' Q ~/'~"'~ ""> 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS )> A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING r<' c::1: c.::J --' {-.. -11 -0 ::~ r;? ,,-.-\ l i ,,-1 , . ',-...,,1 -..J C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. D. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil removal. PART 2 PRODUCTS.. NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 3.02 VEGETATION A. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the following limits: 1. 40 feet outside the building perimeter. 2. 10 feet each side of surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utility lines less than 12 inches in diameter. 3. 15 feet each side of roadway curbs and main utility trenches. 4. 25 feet outside perimeter of pervious paving areas that must not be compacted by construction traffic. B. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 3 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation to remain: 1. At vegetation removal limits. C. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated. 1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. 2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove stumps and roots to depth of 18 inches. 3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed. D. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 3.03 DEBRIS A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION 05.038 t-..:J ~O = = --.I <- )>-i ~1;lIlo 11 0-< z -Ie) r- .:<r -0 in rTi !-1 -- :JJ :it 07~ "",.) ~ '. N .. ~ ~ SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312200 - GRADING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. Removal of topsoil. r--,' Rough grading and preparing the site for site structures, building pads, and conc~ path. g, . . . ;-~ r-l <- Finish grading. :~-- \>~ :::d );;> .... , -r\ .---- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling and compaction. C. Section 32 9219 - Seeding: Finish ground cover. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS C.J -~ ~-. (-----..1 --- \ ,,- j /,' :: ~ ('11 012 .<;:/' :P -0 ,- I '--n , ....P-, ',-j _.ililoo t;? co A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Friable loam; imported borrow. 1. Graded. 2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 2323. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-Iandscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-Iandscaped, or re-graded. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL GRADING 31 2200 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. B. Remove excavated subsoil from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Place topsoil to nominal depth of 6 inches. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. o ;Eo )> j 0-''-. .IC) -:-< I ril 0:1"] ~7' )> END OF SECTION 05.038 ......, => => -...I Co- :I"'" 2: II r- :-r1 r! \_.-J -0 :x N .. \D GRADING 31 2200 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312316 - EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Public Works Standards and other requirements of Municipality of Iowa City, IA. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks.,.,paving, ~::,; and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. (] =.:: ::: (j '- PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED -'''' .'~ -ll PART 3 EXECUTION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. -". Ii] :.'~J \...J 3.01 PREPARATION -0 r:-:? co 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 2323. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. J. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 2200. K. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 OVEREXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. When excessively wet materials are encountered while preparing building foundation and pavement subgrades, the Geotechnical representative may require the contractor to remove the unsuitable material and replace it with suitable on site material. EXCAVATION 312316-1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Unsuitable materials found in the areas where foundations are to be constructed shall be removed and disposed of. The area requiring removal and depth of removal shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and Architect and/or Geotechnical representative prior to removal. Materials shall be declared unsuitable by the Geotechnical representative when they can not be compacted to within project specifications. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION N = - = 0 --' ~O c..- .).~ :::\ !:~ -\1 .,a~ - -< - \ 0 ~r'\ h1 ?~~ -0 'r-' , ' - ,_.J --~ -- O~ r:-? ~/' - ~ \D EXCAVATION 312316-2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 312323 - FILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site struc~~es, an~ utilities within the building. 0 -' B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connecti~g\ <-- - -n -' I.--~- 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. <;;l,r - -~ ~- 'c,'" '".:-1 '-.) ~:t~.\ Q7~ Z 1.03 REFERENCES );> A. ASTM 0698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. -0 r;? - CJ) B. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2000. C. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System): 2000. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: 6 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements. for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Imported borrow and conforming to the following: 1. Low-plasticity, cohesive type. a. Liquid Limit: Less than 45 percent. b. Plasticity Index: Less than 23 percent. FILL 31 2323 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL. B. Structural Fill: Dense graded, processed aggregate. Conforming to State of Iowa DOT standard specification for aggregate base course. C. Granular Fill - Fill Type "Drainage": Angular crushed washed stone; open-graded, processed aggregate; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; and conforming to the following: 1. ASTM C33, Class Designation 2S, course aggregate for concrete. a. Minimum size: NO.8 sieve; 0 to 5 percent passing. b. Maximum size: 3/4 inch. D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW. E. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. PART 3 EXECUTION C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. 1'<) c:> c:> -..1 c..- ,~ -:e. '6 3.01 EXAMINATION ~g\ ...~.i~ A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. gr" B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements. ::< ~\ C. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspecte(Q ~ D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. ~ - - -r\ - ,-- \ r-n \ CJ --0 ~ ~ - Cf.) 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 8 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. FILL 31 2323 - 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 100 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 90 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Subgrade Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Scarify and recompact top 8 inches of existing subsoil to 98 percent of its maximum dry density before placing additional fill. r--; 2. Use general fill at optimum moisture as replacement for unsatisfactory subs.oil mater~. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevations below capilliary barrier. 9 ~ 4. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density. i~ 0', -"~- -,,~-' i -\1 Capilliary Barrier Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Use granular drainage fill. 2. Depth: 6 inches deep. 3. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density. D. At Foundation Walls and Footings: 1. Use sand. 2. Fill up to capilliary barrier inside building line. 3. Fill to within 18 inches below finish grade outside building line. 4. Compact each lift to 98 percent of maximum dry density. 5. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. 6. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches: 1. Bedding and Haunching Layers: Use structural fill. 2. Cover with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 5. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. -- <,.--- C. C) " _..,o~_', _'~'''' .', 'iT1 , .,.''''''''"'t '.,..J --1. J -<r - C- ?) -^; '<.7.... "-. y -0 -.,.. -~ r:-? 0:> E. F. At Lawn Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to 6 inches below finish grade elevations. 3. Compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 31 2200 for topsoil placement. G. Under Monolithic Paving: FILL 312323-3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 1. Scarify and recompact top 8 inches of existing subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density before placing additional fill. 2. Use additional general fill as required to achieve final subgrade elevation. a. Maximum compacted depth of each lift: 8 inches. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3. Use granular base under concrete sidewalks. a. Compacted depth: 6 inches, minimum. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: Comply with recommendations of geotechnical engineer. F. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unused materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition, properly prepared for subsequent grading operations. END OF SECTION I'-:l 0 =, C:::' -.J ~O c- )> --1 :1> 11 0""< z -jC) ! .:-... r -0 ;-n rTl - I"'! O:D ..:;~:. .'--' ~7' ~ )> ex> FILL 31 2323 - 4 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Q :2:0 )~=.:- r-.... , ~~,~ --' --n A. Concrete sidewalks. i.'-.....~ ~ A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving. C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.03 REFERENCES :=.J C'~ /~ r- ';:-', \-r, -Xi 9;:::: <: )> -'0 ::r; r:? ....,-1 \ i I <,"-''''''j \,,_J 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS co A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. D. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). E. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. F. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005. G. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. H. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 45 degrees F. or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS CONCRETE PAVING 32 1 313 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 Cement Content: Minimum 525 Ib per cubic yard. Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Maximum 48 percent by weight. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight- ~ Slag Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 0 ~ Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173~([3M. i:; Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. ::.P ---,I :;e 0-" =~l (-) -=-< ~l -0 3 021 :z:. /' ~ )> 2.06 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 31 2323 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1 313 - 2 11 \- rn \1, ,-..J a:> Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as indicated. Q *(") ....;,."... -'-"\ r-~,' c::::: ('~""" --' C- :;:'.:'01''' ~~: -~n 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE I . ,~..< .-', A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03 3000. =--) '~! ,;..--.....IC. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed dU~~; concrete placement. < :;;'" c::... C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predeterml11'ed construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. -0 J:.: r:? '\1 ,"-'1 \...J co 3.07 JOINTS A. Align sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 24 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Provide sawn joints: 1. At 8 feet intervals or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Provide keyed joints as indicated. E. Saw cut contraction joints 1/8 inch wide at an optimum time (not more than 24 hours) after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 3.08 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Wood float. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius. C. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Make two applications in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07 9005 for joint sealer requirements. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CONCRETE PAVING 32 1 313 - 3 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. 1 . Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. END OF SECTION ~ <.:3 <- :D" ~ Q ~g ;;.-.... --) ')-'~ '5, C) --<.. C\_. - \ \ -'.:0 Or- Z :P CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 - 4 - --r\ - r- \n1 \...-,. \....J - -0 $ ~ - Cf) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION 329219 - SEEDING r--) c:;:.) S PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ~ ~O 'Y>::) <.- --n - .,- A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Seeding, mulching, and fertilizer. C. Maintenance. --~. '':'-::,r'" ~~\t;~, '2: :/''- ."....:::, P --v -........ _:,"'" '. ---1 \ " \ .......--..1 '",-..",; r;? 0:> 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the Landscape Architect and/or the Architect with the following requirements: 1. Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformance with USDA listings and those of established nursery suppliers. B. All quantities of seed listed are for weights and percentages of pure live seed (PLS). 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product data: Provide manufacturer's data indicating composition and components of commercially prepared fertilizer and other soil amendments. C. Seed bag mix tags 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of seed mixture. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. Deliver seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintain seeded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a vigorous growing condition. B. Contractor shall continue to mow, water, fertilize, weed, reseed and repair as necessary until final acceptance of the project. SEEDING 32 9219 - 1 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE A. Seed Mixture: Proportion of Kentucky Blue Grass, Creeping Red Fescue and Perennial Rye' B. Acceptable Mix: r~ % 1. Kentucky Blue Grass: 70 percent. -- ~ 2. Creeping Red Fescue Grass: 20 percent. ~O ~ 3. Norlea Perennial Rye: 10 percent. J7 ::::\ ~ .....(..~, --- ~ - ''::~\r'-'-' r_I....~ ,I ~~.'\ ~ \ ::.;::~ --~) 2.03 ACCESSORIES 0 7:' ~ ~ A. Mulching Material: Oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental ~Iant CP life, and dry. Chopped cornstalks are not acceptable. A. Topsoil: Imported and free of weeds. --n - ,-- \\\ '.~ \...J ,.... 2.02 SOIL MATERIALS - B. Fertilizer: Granular, controlled release type; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as per soil testing laboratory fertilizer mix recommendations. C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 31 2200. B. Loosen seed bed by lightly discing - minimum working depth 3 inches; repair eroded areas. C. Rake to ensure smooth, uniform surface texture free from rocks, dirt clods and debris. 3.03 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 5 pounds per 1000 sq ft. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. Roll the prepared and fertilized seed bed. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a rate of 5 Ibs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Planting Season: April 15 - May 30 (Spring); August 1 - September 15 (Fall). D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. E. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply dry, cereal straw or wood excelsior mulch to a thickness of 118 inches. Maintain clear of shrubs and trees. SEEDING 329219- 2 Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 F. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. G. Following germination, immediately re-seed areas without germinated seeds that are larger than 4 by 4 inches. 3.05 SEED PROTECTION A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string or tape around area periphery. Set string height to 24 inches. Space stakes at 60 inches. Maintain protection throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric and as shown on the drawings. C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6 inch deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide 12 inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill trench and rake smooth, level with adjacent soil. O. Secure outside edges and overlaps at 36 inch intervals with stakes. E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. F. At sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Water as necessary to establish a close stand of grasses specified and reasonably free of weeds and undesirable grasses. B. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. C. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. O. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. E. Immediately re-seed areas which show bare spots. F. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. G. Maintain seed areas by mowing at a maximum height of 3 inches until completion of project. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at anyone mowing. END OF SECTION o ,~O -,> -.::, ~" c:~ ~: c:::) '--" ~--) '=-1("' _,..,r ,.::......: ..... ..., j 1.1,! V r) 7' ..... '-- '::-_' :~. -t;" ~../.'\. ~ r:-v. ):> --n - --"1 . I jr--t '.~_.J co SEEDING 32 9219 - 3 o. 1 2 3 4 5 ------- N 4 5 ~ 1 2 3 NEUMANN MONSON ~ ~ ~ ARCHITECTS o o f : . " SHELTER i lAP R 0 F E 5 5 ION ALe 0 R P 0 RAT ION ~ . ; , ':I ASPHALT PARKING 111 E. COLLEGE 5T. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 . . , : <1'1 011/:1 ~ : ----- _- - 0 319338-7878 319338-7879 FAX ~ : <; D o :. . p , ~ · D --- 0 ' ," 0' , " ,,,,,'6 \ V. ~', r ,D \ ~ . ~ -';';0 ~ ""~, ~~_,____ I / \ Consultants. ~ '--~-- " '.tr " , " , i', I I ' " ~ - - - -', ' 'i', , ".. , , , , ' : ' I" ^ 'Y'o lit] , ! :: ,"'___, v /i, I !~ i : I ! i PO NO J ~ 1 __647 -- .--l-JI I I I I / v ;z I I I I I ! 'I .' '" , '.-_ I " , :' " I / J' I / I ,I r \ I , ! !' I 00 r l I ' l 7'.: I ! ::: / 01 ;:f'.~ !_ __ I . 'I ! 1 / ~ 1-' I I J ; I r I I d .. ',~ ~ " 'I ,I,... /. , : g '_,__ ___ "I I \ f' ~ ,'-' -d ' I I! I I" , ..~ c' I I I I I' '/ ' ~ '" I I " W : I I I : I I ~. "~WATER FOUNTAIN " , , I I I .......... /' WATER MH , 'I I I ............'" " SHEL TER Iii I I " .., / WITH I I 1 I O()* ~ , " 'CONCRETE . ',! I' : " . CHARCOAL' FLOOR , 'I ", I I, I. '.,'--.__---., -642__ )0, : '"LFlRE HXORANT / GRILL (TYP.) 1" '\ 'I 'I: I, i:' '.--- ,,--':--- /-:: j~ " , --645--(/'-----------, I 1 " ~, , , I: I I .' : " , 1 ' I 1 I I, I , '--643-- ::; :1111 m ~ C I I I ........ '\ , :: I I " '~" "', ~ ,______' C ' !, I I I '-. " ',_ _ ... , I i _, ',,' '(') '\ ' ~ ~~_ ___ J - - ------- / , "" </'1 6' ~---O'. ' I - / . , <1> " .' I 1 1 ~~'., -.\ v, . " I " , I I I 1 ' "- , "\ _" --645--___ .', "" ',,"' ~ ~ - - - - - I I , "'_'\ 6'v^ \,,_ ,,"_______ -_u"\_ I ,,' v ~ I r _'\ "\, ' ''''-------------- ',,' --.- -- __, Project Title: \ (,,,," / _0 --\ ", 6"-> \~, RIVERSIDE "'.: Ii ,/--64 \ ' , " Y 9 -, .'_ \ ' , 0' ) -. / /-\' .- ,- 1 , -I '- " / \ ' \ , " ,: 1'/0."-- };:/ FESTIVAL I ,r ",) ,\' ......- // ,I I AS~,/ ...;', \ \ " // q / (.) \ :1 PROl\OSED, / . " '/ II CO~CFETE~~TH ,/ 4 // STAGE >,) \0 I \ / '" / 1\ \, \ \ // </ / 1 I i - ... ~!, \ i. \\/ ::<'.. // IMPROVEMENTS \ " k "--, ,i' 6" / li'i f '- -e :'t', :~\; </ //7 . fONCRET , ,ill.. I ! ,:', ~?/ , ". I / I I V ,.I I / i \1]\ , h ',' II / j/ 6"CONCRETESLAB i I, __ ~t ./' J <1 / ','...... / .1 \ --, , I i )ir' '. i / I / EXPANSION JOINT, Owner: I / j , I / / [ Y." WIDE BITOMINOUS i ((' \ / /1 I FABRIC ( I I / / ,', 1 , / I'. I / l' I " ,I "\ \ "0) / I I <::J \> ',I "'W'" I '/ I B \ \ \1 ~ / , \ \, \ ' " \ i / : I Project No.: 05,038 B 1 '. \ I / ' I> I " " \ \ \, <J I, ',\ \ \ \ . i VIl. / :! / ".. \~ I~.J I,-.,,{ ". '-l \ '11' Drawn by: \ \ '\ \ \ I / -- I I /~-, C/ ---;\----4 't\ ,J I~A l' v , " ',,- I" \ 'I \ \ \ \ '''---./ .,~''O 1/ ~j.f...")~.~. i.CC-';(. fr2J &D. C-/;r.Jc;::/j~ Checked by: \ \ \, ", " " //~VIl' ,/ . " (r-~/-')(~"\'tf.\icIJ'(-:;1/J'tyY )'(::.Y '.' \, I, I "-"---. v /-{ y ={ / '1:'-//\ (IiI. OIJQ\_ \ \ \ \ \ .\ r -,/^ ~u <14 q ~ ~:;l----::;';;'-,,:--i<--;:"==;:l (~-:)r-<---I---\r~o.~--=:..r-- Issue: " " \ " \ \ \ \ I" ge ., / \ I '. '. \ I " \ \.......... ! I " Dote Description I, ,( .......... " S I 6 GRANULAR BASE \ \ \ \ \\\ \ \ ( og............ 4 ) 12.12.06 \\ \' \\ \ ~ ) \ \, \ '\ \ ~ "9e. 4 <1 " I I / \, ,\\, \. \' ~ "0 . ! 1(/ 85 EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL \ I I, \, ,\ \ ' ! U 1 1/2" = 1'.0" EXPANSION JOINTS EVERY 24'.0' . '.. "0 I , . I \ \ I, A " ,\ \ " \ \ -., \ , '\ Note: \ A fiELD VERifY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES. \ DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND \ \ COORDINA TE ALL WORK PRIOR TO IN5T ALLA TlON \ , '" fOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER " ',- TRADES, READ PROJECT MANUAL. --- , ..., , \ '... ','. 6"CONCRETESLAB @COPYRIGHT " " \ " UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION " \ \ \" PROPOSED f" WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC ", ......, \ ...... -.... SHELTERJRESTROOMS \ \ [CONTROL JOINT, IS PROHIBITED. ',', -... "',', I, ' \ SAWCUTYa PAVING ' ,'\~\:; '<" " ~ II \ THICKNESS Sheet Title: " -.... , ---"', ',,"--.. ~ I ',' '" "" ',- " "-. "...... \ ] .....~:;'>>, ,,~'<>\~ \, \---~" " <J SITE PLAN I " '- ," ............. -...... "" A ", '-. "-. '-" -................................. \ " " """," ............ .~7 A '1 . .' ~,.. <J 8 2 SITE PLAN;,;! l.kJ.I.'1".{;L1.2~u ~:1 1" = 30'-0" ......~.I...(.....\.' C'~ ....'!.) \_ _. ,.,.r...... ). '-..:0. i.. .,) (-)z. ) C. j-(..'-i._(oc5(. ,} \ .~~o{ -jClJ~. }-'~/ )(:-{/ -r'i'Ll )q )L.J )\, ,t::j\~rM )jCI' ~:o-~L-:\i-'-70_;[~___::'lL~f > --':---=--f -\.c..~\,:-:.~~- 6" GRANULAR BASE A5 CONTROL JOINT DETAIL Sheet Number: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" CONTROL JOINTS EVERY 6'-0' C -1 01 5 1 2 3 4 12345 ~ NEUMANN MONSON ~ 15 073113; ASPHALT : A->O' SHINGLES VjJ i ~\) ~ (/\' (8) o I (2) 2x10 27'-4" ARC HIT E C T S ,___ _______ B~M " ' ! f 061000;WPLYWOOD G>-- 1 CJ T ,1 In-l-~ ____ L:~~- u~~-_- In-1 A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION ;;: I 061000' (4)2><.8 I r,----T, "_1-_,, r,---,' I . ' II1I11 ' I"" "'" "" I' ~. I HEADER : : : : : :: : :: : : : : :" 111 E, COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 ::I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I a ~ 1'/ 08 9100' LOUVER I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I : cO ::l I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I ~ I - - ill I - ' ~ I' " "'" II II ~ ' : 1,/ I ~ CJ : _ u-r~o .,_ c~-t-~~ _ U_n~O__ _ : 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX : D I 061000; 1xTREATED @-- 2 2 i - [- ----; i D ~ 2'-0" I 3'-0"-' I WOOD BLOCKING - - - : 'I TABLES BY : 'I : ~ I (3)2x10 (2)2x10 SLOPE~'/1'-0" SLOPE~'/1'-O' : OWNER: : b ...,j ---- ---- .. ... I I I cO Consultants: ~ I I BEAM BEAM I r,---" r'-T-T' ,,---T' I m , 042002' 8"CMU - - - - - - - - - - , ' " , , ",' , , , " , , I ' '--+ II II II I II II 14 ' , ">",.. C.J I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ fill' @---- 3 . @----- - I --I I - t-+-- - 1-+--1 - f---t - -+-f-- I V I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I __,~. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _____ _____ I I II II II II II II I #4@32VERT.'N'L..J..._-_..l..-.JL...L-T'_..J...JL..J...---..L.JI" I~~ b GROUTEDCMU ----- ----- - '~5' -' I I I co I TYP. I A-501 I _____ _____ I I ,.... I CJ, ' ' 'TYP. I' \ , @r--- 4 4 ~ -r : -- -, -t -r-;- I rT-~-T' rT-+-T' rT---T,"" I _____ _____ s::- I II II II I II II II I Y I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I = W ~ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ ---------0 ----- o~ I II I II I II II II I f..,. Q c\i..J I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ ____~ ____ '"i 3:w -; '"i I II I II I II II II I AS C.J." ,0 -------~k_-------~-----------------5;>1-1C.J... : ~l ~ ~l I ~J ~l lJ : MOT @-- ---------------------- 5 - '-1-' ----+; - -, :~i ~:: : I ,-----~~---- ------------- -----, l : I~ :v , \ ' _____ _____4, , ' , , . . I 5'-4" , . I I I :11 I : : I :? J I ~ I Irt----- -----tTl I I I I '"i I I I <0 LO I co I I 033000;4'CONC. :ij' f': :1' L. ~~_____J : : I SLAB ' - - - - - - - --,,"':::::::::::' ': 4'CONC. ,CJ, I I I r I I SLAB I r-----I_J r\ II II I 'I ' I ----- -----rr- I I I I I. III I I I I I I I I 5-4 Iii 6" GRANULAR FILL '~----- __----1,__j , I : ' , I y" / ,,"" v I L___________________________-.J I I I \/1'%/ I>:y~ ~^"'~/")'. :;; I r-----------------------------, I C.J. I I I cJ X&0x/, {;:0:!(<0(/!(&<,<(./';'-; ~0 I I.,.... . . . " '>:%~~i~~"y~");;;~A"/~)';~}>>:;; 1 - - - - - - - ----+ l- - ,.... I IC.J I I co.,... 9 co 0 <:;:<<<0#.<<<<1f('?f('cf/,<<:<' 1 A A /, I I I I :r I ' "_, - - _I _, ~~<~<?~'<<<~~~~ III I I I ~ I I' I, ", I ~ ~ ~ I ~ re //<):>-//<::;>\;.'/,/";>::)"''>'/: 'W- - - - - - -,... - ~ ' I 'I I //;('{'/'-////'J,k<<-,</-..X/ ------------- ------ ______-1, I , ,,">:y)0">>>;::::>~>>>> 11------------ ------- -----1 I I I ~~%%%~'<<> I ----1. I i I I. ! ~%~~~~~V 11--- --- 11-- -,;jl W2.0 W2.0 I... . ~..J~~~'~i:/ #4@12EACHWAY. :4__ 'l.._..l , '~L(-4'"0') EL(-4'-O")'1 1. ' . ~ ~t7">>~"0~' BEND HORIZ. BARS 1'.4"@ I I I Jt~_____ I I I ------lC.J. C,~~~:>2~" CORNERS. I I ~ , I I S If:" I ~V:{!:5~ I I I _, L -----, ~ I o ,,;/.::::;;2:~<0 I I v I I , II ., I C ~~~y : I I : t:? ~ : I Co / ~ (5-4 \ I 00 C >:;-/)::Y>;:;):- TI I I C\J ..J I I I , / _, 1-' "'_/ //'<1 I I I I -:i 3: w -; I Co It) \ I (0 I I ~___________~ ___~~_~_____ti _____J : \" I - 2#5CONT ' , CJ, !. d 'CJ, . ' ' .', . ~ L I------------------~,,---------------I J r\ ,,- : b:: " -J 2'-0" ~ -; I -; j ~n4" '" nnnnn __:_nn __nnn_ n _"nJ ,:, 000 C 1 WALL SECTION LEGEND" 28'-0' 28'-0" Project Title: I' (,) 1/2" = 1'-0" ========== WALLBELOW ROOF ABOVE RIVERSIDE _ _ _ TRUSS, 24'O.C.-TYP. 033000; CONCRETE SLAB ~ i"> C3 ~~,~FRAMING PLAN C4 ;;'~~DATION & FOOTING PLAN C5 ;.~?~: PLAN ~~;~~ AL IMPROVEMENTS 06 1000; y," EXTERIOR PLYWOOD, PAINTED-TYP. b 06 1000; 6x6 WOOD POST cO Owner: ~ G:. SLOPE )1,'/1 '-0' ~ SLOPE )1,'/1 '-0' B . 6 6. B Project No.: 05.038 , , , , Drawn by: I I I I : : : : Checked by: I I I I I I I I I I I I , , , , Issue: L_I_ _I_~ "" '^' Date Description 83 5 4 3 2 I \B; \A; BUILDING SECTION @ SHELTER _ _ _____ _ ' 12.12.06 1/4"= 1'-0" 07311\~~~~~~~ ~ -=- ~ _ ~ -=- _~ ~ -=- 07311\~~~~~~~ 1 ~~~~~~=;;~_-cc.~__ ." 1 - - - ~- - --_..._---.- - --- -- - - --- - ----- - - - ___ _____ ___ .....u___ ------..---,---- - ----- - -- - --" ---- - --..------ ---- - - - - - . . __'____ ~ _____.._.. '__n_ _, _____ - - -- -- '- ------ --- _ _ _ _ _ _____ __ _ ----- ----cc-- ------ -- -- ..--- --- - - - - - -------- ----- 089100; LOUVER " 1 " ,,--- ' ---- 072400; EXTERIOR ' 06 1000, 6x6 __ FINISH SYSTEM ' WOOD POST ---,,-, ,'! d CHANGING 061000; 1x6 CEDAR I , TABLE GRAB TRIM. TYP. I Note: LOUVER LOUVER BAR 1 FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES, ---" DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS g g ~ I AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS. LAY OUT AND ~ COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTAllATION DRINKING FOUNTAIN FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE "nH OTHER WEST NORTH EAST SOUTH 84 NORTH ELEVATION 85 WEST ELEVATION TRADES, READ PROJECT MANUAL 1/8.=1'.()" 1/8"=1'-0" @COPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYlNG, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC 81 IS~OOIBlrrD. MEN'S RESTROOM - 101 I 2 3 4 5 (A' (8) 1/8" = 1'-0" Sheet Title: - " ----- ~ ~ ~-~~ _ 073113: ASPHALT I I 073113; ASPHALT - ~ ~ ~ -=- _ -- ~ - ~ _ SHINGLES==-, ' SHINGLES PLANS A - -~~ -~ ~- A ' ~~~-~ d~~:~GING ~ --- ,I --- ~~::- ~ =-----=- ~ 089100; LOUVER __"::C~-~~-'::--~~-= -- ELEVATIONS, LOUVER J S:B LOUVER i,i :11" 072400; EXTERIOR- n - 072400; EXTERIOR AND SECTIONS I! FINISH SYSTEM FINISH SYSTEM 'V' ,1 \I 'V' '1 '1"1 I. I 061000;1x6CEDAR 061000;1x6CEDAR - n _ , 'I \ TRIM. TYP. TRIM. TYP. ': \ EAST NORTH WEST SOUTH I I \ ., , A 1 ~~~;N'S RESTROOM -102 A4 ~8?=~~()"H ELEVATION A5 ~:~~o~LEVATION Sheet Number: A -101 1 2 3 4 5 , 1 2 3 4 5 ~ NEUMANN MONSON ~ ~ . A R C H I T E C T S ~ 1 2 3 4 5 I I I I NEUMANN MONSON MECHANICAL SYMBOLS A R C H I T E C T S (NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT) PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION A PIPING SYMBOLS (APPLIES TO ALL SYSTEMS) PLUMBING SYSTEMS PIPING SYSTEMS SHEETMETAL MISCELLANEOUS/ ABBREVIATIONS 111 E. COLLEGE ST, IOWA CITY, IA 52240 --to ELBOW TURNED ~ STRAINER --W-- SANITARY SEWER -FOS- FUEL OIL SUPPLY HEATING HOT - CWS- CHILLED + - + DIRECTION OF FLOW SA -- SUPPLY AIR WC -- WATER CLOSET 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX D UP OR TOWARDS BELOW GRADE - HWS- WATER SUPPLY WATER SUPPLY D -----f-E) ELBOW TURNED '----/ PIPE GUIDE - - AW- - ACID WASTE HEATING HOT CHILLED + + DUCT SIZE, FIRST FIGURE IS SIDE SHOWN RA -- RETURN AIR DOWN OR AWAY ,----.., BELOW GRADE - FOR- FUEL OIL RETURN - HWR - WATER RETURN - CWR- WATER RETURN 18X6 UR -- URINAL Consultants: ---j-@- TEE TURNED ~ PIPE ANCHOR ---H---<<- STORM SEWER - FOV- FUEL OIL VENT -HPS-l0D- HIGH PRESSURE - HRR- HEAT RECOVERY ..a -R G-- CHANGE OF ELEVATION, RISE (R), DROP (D) EA -- EXHAUST AIR FD -- FLOOR DRAIN UP OR TOWARDS BELOW GRADE STEAM (PSI) SUPPLY It] r & J Associates PC I@I TEE TURNED C) STEAM DRIP SANITARY SEWER MEDIUM PRESSURE HEAT RECOVERY + 13 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER Mechanical/Electrical Engineers DOWN OR AWAY ASSEMBLY I I ABOVE GRADE - AIR - COMPRESSED AIR - MPS-65- STEAM (PSI) - HRS- RETURN OA -- OUTSIDE AIR FS -- FLOOR SINK lIJ 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suite B . ~ North Liberty, IA 52317 DIRECTION I-E-l EXPANSION ACID WASTE _ LPS-15 _ LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE It J ,-a: (319) 626-4719 voice -- -AW- -OX- OXYGEN -0- SPLITTER DAMPER SR -- SUPPLY REGISTER SK -- SINK (319) 626-4941 fax OF FLOW COMPENSATOR ABOVE GRADE STEAM (PSI) DRAIN LINE b: ajpcosDuthslopenet DIRECTION FLEXIBLE PIPE STORM SEWER STEAM CONDENSATE REFRIGERANT Fe FIRE DAMPER - FD .----. IlIIIlIIIlI II II -VAC- VACUUM -LPR- + : ~ SMOKE DAMPER - SO RR -- RETURN REGISTER JS -- JANITOR SINK OF PITCH CONNECTION ABOVE GRADE (LPR, MPR, HPR) -RS- SUCTION GAS COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER FD/SD ~ PRESSURE ~ CIRCUIT SETTER --D-- CONDENSATE - SV- SCAVENGER -CP- CONDENSATE -RL- REFRIGERANT 'CW TRANSITION PIECE ER -- EXHAUST REGISTER LAV -- LAVATORY REGULATING VALVE DRAIN LINE VACUUM PUMP DISCHARGE LIQUID - c*J GATE VALVE c*r-OO BALANCING VALVE ----- VENT -VPD- VACUUM PUMP - HCS- HOT AND CHILLED - RHG- REFRIGERANT E:II:::::3- FLEXIBLE DUCT SG -- SUPPLY GRILLE SH -- SHOWER - AND FLOW METER DISCHARGE WATER SUPPLY HOT GAS [:e:J GLOBE VALVE , AIR VENT - -AV-- ACID VENT -ACI- AIR COMPRESSOR _ HCR _ HOT AND CHILLED - RRS- REMOTE RADIATOR rrr.1 + ELBOW WITH VANES RG -- RETURN GRILLE EWC -- ELECTRIC WATER INTAKE WATER RETURN SUPPLY [4J COOLER t*J PLUG VALVE ~ VACUUM BREAKER - to VTR VENT THRU NITROUS OXIDE CONDENSER - RRR- REMOTE RADIATOR 2XR~ RADIUS ELBOW - WITH VANES FOR EG -- EXHAUST GRILLE ROOF (VTR) -NO- - CS - WATER SUPPLY RETURN 1/2 x R DUCT WITH 'R' 30" OR MORE !J ANGLE GATE VALVE III UNION OR FLANGED - to AVTR ACID VENT THRU -MA- MEDICAL AIR CONDENSER - HPLS- HEAT PUMP LOOP + + GRILLE OR REGISTER IN SIDE OF DUCT. CD -- CEILING DIFFUSER ROOF (AVTR) (OIL FREE) - CR - WATER RETURN SUPPLY SUPPL iFn RETURN, OR EXHAUST AS "----' INDICAT. ~ ANGLE GLOBE VALVE ~ GAUGE ADAPTOR --- COLD WATER (CW) -N- NITROGEN SAFETY RELIEF - HPLR- HEAT PUMP LOOP d ! MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER SUPPLY, LD -- LINEAR DIFFUSER - SR - VALVE DISCHARGE RETURN + RETURN, EXHAUST, OR OUTSIDE AIR AS ~ INDICATED m <?! + C!j r~~ EXHAUST OR RETURN AIR REGISTER OR - BALL VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE ---- HOT WATER (HW) -CO- CARBON DIOXIDE FR -- FLOOR REGISTER -.) "I .~ GRILLE AS INDICATED IN BOTTOM OF DUCT .'-'1 c*J ~ HOT WATER PLUMBING FIXTURES ~ DIFFUSER IN BOTTOM OF DUCT - SQUARE OR , BALANCING VALVE THERMOMETER ----- -HE- HELIUM FG -- FLOOR GRILLE CIRCULATING (HWC) ROUND AS INDICATED (,.) C C .. >..'" ,- I r I [;fJ WATER HAMMER 00 WATER CLOSET 0 COUNTERTOP + G + AIR EXTRACTOR FULL DEPTH OF BRANCH ,,,, BUTTERFLY VALVE ARRESTOR -SCW- SOFT WATER -H- HYDROGEN WITH TANK MOUNTED SINK TG -- TRANSFER GRILLE DUCT, GRILLE OR REGISTER ~ WATER CLOSET bJd COUNTERTOP I -I SUPPLY OR DISCHARGE AIR DUCT. SOLID SOLENOID VALVE <J) THERMOSTAT -TW- TEMPERED WATER -NO- NITROUS OXIDE OJ CROSS UP OR TOWARDS. DASHED CROSS WITH FLUSH VALVE MOUNTED SINK DOWN OR AWAY ~ 2 WAY AUTOMATIC IE] WALL HUNG 18:1 ELECTRIC 1..:;:::>-- -I EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS CONTROL VALVE @ HUMIDISTAT -DW- DISTILLED WATER LAVATORY WATER COOLER UP OR TOWARDS, DASHED CROSS DOWN Pro ject Title: OR AWAY ~ 3 WAY AUTOMATIC OCCUPANCY (0 COUNTERTOP 1--1 RETURN OR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT. SOLID ~ NEW TO EXISTING RIVERSIDE CONTROL VALVE @ SENSOR -01- DE-IONIZED WATER MOUNTED LAVATORY ~ SHOWER HEAD I CROSS UP OR TOWARDS, DASHED CROSS CONNECTION POINT DOWN OR AWAY L1:l RELIEF OR OFMCO FLOOR MOUNTED -DIC- DE-IONIZED WATER 4j URiNAL WITH I2SI JANITOR SINK ~ DUCT PRESSURE CLASS. DESIGNATION IN (!) TERMINAL AIR BOX SAFETY VALVE CLEANOUT (FMCO) CIRCULATING FLUSH VALVE INCHES OF W.G. NUMBER FESTIV AL ~ PRESSURE CLEANOUT (CO) GAS (NATURAL 0 --t-J <ill> POINT OF CHANGE IN DUCT CONSTRUCTION REDUCING VALVE ---llco -GAS- OR MANUFACTURED) FLOOR DRAIN WALL HYDRANT (B~~c:~;~J~ PR~~~g~E CLASS OR OPERAr~NG ( 15000 ) EQUIPMENT NUMBER PR R IN A RnANr:1" WITH <:MAr:NA STAGE - N ~ VACUUM PIPE L1QUIFIED (0- D> "N" SUPERSCRIPT INDICATES NEGATIVE @ - CHECK VALVE CLEANOUT -LP- PETROLEUM ",I) ROOF DRAIN I HOSE BIBB PRESSURE DUCT REFERENCED NOTE ~ d CONTROL DAMPER - SUPPLY. & INDICATES CHANGE IMPROVEMENTS GAS COCK VALVE --t€>-+ WALL GAS OUTLET r + RETURN, EXHAUST, OR OUTSIDE TO DRAWING AIR AS INDICATED B BACKFLOW @ BENCHMARK AIR PREVENTER READING POINT Owner: GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: GENERAL HVAC NOTES: B B 1. VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE 1. ALL DUCTWORK IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. DUCT RISES AND Project No.: 200640.00 START OF CONSTRUCTION. DROPS ARE NOT SHOWN, PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER Drawn by. D. 6REEN 2. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF ALL TRADES. EXACT LOCATION OF THE DUCTWORK MAY VARY ACCORDING Checked by: V.AMOROSO EQUIPMENT. TO THE COORDINATED SPACE REQUIREMENTS. EACH TRADE SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. Issue: 3. PIPING IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. ROUTE PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR CLEARANCE WITH STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS. COORDINATE WITH OTHER 2. DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTER LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED Date Description TRADES AS REQUIRED. WITH LOCATIONS OF LIGHTS, EXIT LIGHTS, ETC. 4. ROUGH-IN AND CONNECT ALL PLUMBING REQUIRED TO EQUIPMENT 3. DIFFUSERS WITH NO SHADING INDICATING THROW SHALL BE 4-WAY. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. 4. DIFFUSER, GRILLE AND REGISTER NOMENCLATURE SHALL BE 5. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AT 1/4" PER FT. MINIMUM AS FOLLOWS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ~ INDICATES CONNECT NEW TO EXISTING. CDA - TYPE 6. 524 - 5" ROUND NECK, 24" SQUARE MODULE - 100 - CFM - 5. PROVIDE RIGID METAL DUCT, WITH NO EXCEPTION, WHERE FIRE WALLS Nate: AND/OR SMOKE WALLS ARE PENETRATED. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES. 6. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ALL RETURN, DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP ORAWlNGS SUPPLY, AND EXHAUST BRANCH DUCTS. AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWINGS, LAY OUT AND COOROINA TE All WORK PRIOR TO INST ALlA nON FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER 7. ALL DUCTWORK NOT OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 1/2" PRESSURE TRADES. READ SPECIfiCATIONS. 8. ~ INDICATES CONNECT NEW TO EXISTING. @COPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COP"NG. DISClOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON, p,e. IS PROHIBITED. Sheet Title: A A MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES Sheet Number: MO I I I I 1 2 ,3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION NOTE: AlL WATER PIPING If V ON III E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 2" CW CURB VALVE AND SHALL BE SLOPED BACK TO DRAIN BOX, BOX SHALL BE TO DRAIN PIT PIT INSTALLED WITH COVER 319-338-7878 319-338.7879 FAX D FLUSH TO GRADE LEVEL / It IJ' " 2" CW ON TO BELOW D -::) >~I:XJ~? 15430 FLR., SEE PLAN lA3 ft<</j:,,'Y~:' THIS SHEET Consultants: I -'--" II::J r & J AsSQC~tes P.C. -- MechanicaVElectrical Engineers ~ 15451 ) /11 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suite B ii ~~ ,~ North Liberty, IA 52317 11<ENO<, IlAOOlLL '"' ---I -~ loa; (319) 626-4719 voice 2" '" ", (TYP. 2) (319) 626-4941 fax PATCH SURFACE TO MATCH ,/' , EXIST ADJACENT GRADE AS ajpcosouthslope.net i i ~ " i REQUIRED TO INSTALL I , /0;--' 'i>_, ET -1<;: ! ,,- PIPING I "._-,-- -----.,.---- '0 / ",- , " ' / I - """' /<:~<.,;,< , " ,i ",< ~~;! i , .. ; , ( 15535 ; i / d ,,/,1/ , " , ",.f";, ' / 1'- CUT. ,Ell,"" AND PATCH (TYP. 3) i" cw ad" !,.J)/ ")9 ''\'." \ .__ HW TO WH-f ! ! /'/,,;/' '\//\/. 1 !f /, fl" i .. / SIDEWALK TO lAATCH 15572 WH-l ~ " / ,'" g/, r \, / EXISTING ADJACENT <" ;/ "/7 \~, L "- , I' "~ /', .- SIDEWALK SURFACE AS ~/ ' L~;t'_/ iI_"f~~~~wjt\/ " REQUIRED TO INSTALL I PIPING l' I'" i'"i"i~;t \ i ' i 15521 ! !;,:', JJ:!.,-~~,' \1:// , ~ 11 'i!l<-!!+- _ ," - \, 'I' </ ._ - : , I!., :!i!: i : ";_'o'__c.'.f;;~:c:::-- -'-- (TYP. 2) 1 .., 11':11"'" ! ! II :1, t-!jj!,/>,/,III, ---". '- I : ,1,,/ I~ JH / !, , " r" +1\ , ~","'o///~ / ' \ "- -"-'! : i \'.:\ \" \\;~:7~:~~'/ / ;' \, I" CW AND 2" V I ' ; \ \\ _.A 1 I', '~ / ON TO UR, TYP i ~; 'I' J'~ i I " -~ . , .,j.... ,. :, C I i /'f-. / C <f" 1 \ ",/ " 1" CW TO \ , ,'" /~<M; ,/ -. --..-- - 'n .~:/ '~ .,,' i - ...-. ' /",' we, TYP. ' \, -- e , . .- 1 " (~/ ,0 n 1 \ \"' ",_ .-.-/ .'''0 ~ 1 i \, 2" CW , SEE PLAN '-j SE -I, COVER SUITABLE 15533 ) (:: FOR FOOT TRAFFIC -- ,-". Pro ject Title: :;~~ ...~ 1 \ lA3 THIS SHEET FOR r-.J ~ CONn~","" M2 MECHANICAL PLAN RIVERSIDE " 1/4. = 1'-()" CUT, REMOVE, AND PATCH FESTIV AL \ SIDEWALK TO lAATCH EXISTING ADJACENT \ SIDEWALK SURFACE AS STAGE 3" W, SEE PLAN 1.13 REQUIRED TO INSTALL PIPING \ THIS SHEET 1.E.=I'-O. IMPROVEMENTS BELOW '--.J \ GRADE EXISTING MANHOLE, VERIFY i-::___/ Owner: \ \ EXACT LOCATION " , " 2" CW SEE PLAN 1.1 1 , , 'I THIS SHEET FOR ~ ",', , ~ ""'" CONTINUATION I, " '-, B ~'" - B M1 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN Project No.: 200640.00 11_301-()" 3" W UP Drown by: D. GoREEN (Ft.4CO) Checked by: V.AMOROSO --- ,- Issue: VALVE ACCESS Dote Description PIT, SEE DETAIL SHEET 1.13 2" W UP (LAV, TYP) PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 3" W UP (UR, TYP) WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR WATER CLOSETS (FLUSH VALVE) .~ J.R. SMITH 'HYDROTROL' SERIES 5010, STAINLESS STEEL. INSTALL IN AN (15533) KOHLER 'HIGHCLlFF' K-4368, VITREOUS CHINA, FLOOR MOUNTED, ELONGATED (5 "- Note: (15202) UPRIGHT POSITION. FIXTURE UNIT RATING: 12-32. BOWL, SIPHON JET, RIM 18" ABOVE FLOOR FOR WHEELCHAIR USE, K-4670-SC -_,.l ~ 0 FIELD VERIFY AU. O/MENSlONS AND CLEARANCES. 00 NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS (15203) J.R. SMITH 'HYDROTROL' SERIES 5020, STAINLESS STEEL. INSTALL IN AN WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT WITH SELF-SUSTAINING CHECK HINGE. SLOAN OPTIMA ...... "- AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRA'MNGS, LAY OUT ANO 8111 BATIERY OPERATED FLUSH VALVE, ANGLE STOP, VACUUM BREAKER AND COORDINATE AU. WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION UPRIGHT POSITION. FIXTURE UNIT RATING: 33-60. DIVERTER VALVE, (ADA COMPLIANT) 2" V UP, FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE 'MTH OTHER TRAOES. REAO SPECIFlCA TlONS. TYP AT WC LAVATORIES (15535) @COPYRIGHT (15451) KOHLER "WELLCOMME" K-4350, VITREOUS CHINA, FLOOR MOUNTED, ELONGATED UNAUTHORIZEO COP'!1NG. OISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION KOHLER 'CHESAPEAKE' K-1729, 20" X 18", VITREOUS CHINA, WALL HUNG. BOWL, SIPHON JET, K-4670-SC WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT WITH WITHOUT WRITTEN PERUISStON BY NEUMANN MONSON. P .c. SLOAN EBF-187 BATIERY OPERATED FAUCET, 4" CENTERS. OPEN GRID SELF-SUSTAINING CHECK HINGE. SLOAN OPTIMA 8111 BATTERY OPERATED IS PROHIBITEO, STRAINER DRAIN, CHROME FINISH, VANDAL RESISTANT SPRAY HEAD, BELOW SINK FLUSH VALVE, ANGLE STOP, VACUUM BREAKER. , ---., ~2"WUP MOUNTED MIXING VALVE AND ELECTRIC MODULE. SUPPLIES WITH WHEEL HANDLE (FD) Sheet Title: ANGLE STOPS. FLOOR MOUNTED CARRIER WITH CONCEALED ARMS. ADJ. C.P. 1-1/2" V CAST BRASS TRAP W/C.O.. ADA COMPLIANT. PROVIDE TRUEBRO LAV SHIELD UP MECHANICAL UNDERSINK PROTECTIVE COVER. ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A (15543) HALSEY TAYLOR 'BARRIER-FREE' BI-LEVEL MODEL OVL-II, ADA COMPLIANT, A PLANS URINALS STAINLESS STEEL BOWLS, STAINLESS STEEL CABINET, FRONT PUSH BUTTONS, .<>.~ (15521) KOHLER 'STANWELL' K-4972- T, VITREOUS CHINA, WALL HUNG, WASHOUT 8.3 GPH OF 50 DEGREE F WATER, 120V, 1 PHASE, 60 Hz. CHICAGO 45-LK 4" W UP LOOSE KEY STRAIGHTWAY STOP. ADJ. CAST BRASS TRAP W/C.O. (WC. TYP) ACTION. SLOAN OPTIMA 8180-1.0 BATTERY OPERATED FLUSH VALVE WITH ANGLE STOP AND VACUUM BREAKER. (ADA COMPLIANT - MOUNT AT ADA SPECIFIED HIEGHT). SEE MECHANICAL SITE FLOOR DRAINS PLAN THIS SHEET FOR WALL HYDRANTS (15572) J.R. SMITH 2010-A, 5" DIAMETER, DUCO CAST IRON BODY. NICKEL BRONZE CONTINUATION ( 15430) WOODFORD B65 CONCEALED BOX SELF DRAINING WALL HYDRANT WITH ANTI STRAINER HEAD. NICKEL BRONZE GRATE, FLASHING COLLAR, ADJUSTABLE CAST SIPHON VACUUM BREAKER, FREEZELESS, AUTOMATIC DRAINING, LOOSE KEY BRASS TRAP Sheet Number: OPERATION. KEY FURNISHED WITH HYDRANT, M3 UNDERFLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M1 1/4' = 1'.()" 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 I I T I NEUMANN MONSON ~~ ~ M~~_ ARCHITECTS ,/ J. THE WORD "WATER" CONCRffi COllAR ' ,/ ,/ /'" I CAST IN THE MEfAL / GRAVIlY RELIEF VENTIlATOR A PRO F E 5 5 ION A L COR P 0 RAT ION ~~L~ATER 0 ~ffi 111 E, COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 D / / / //I / / / / / / / / / / / / 319-338-7878 319.338-7879 FAX PRESSURE TEMPERATURE ~::\ PREFABRICATED ROOF / / / / / / / / / /' D RELIEf WiVE I ~ ~ CURB BY UNIT // / / / / / / // FlASHING FURNISHED r" PlAN MANUFACTURER BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR,,, Consultants: ~ ~~ i , <:!> I '\ COI<<:REIE. · "'""ED -. .. ,. 'ER~l '"'' .. I (bl. r & J Associates P.C. COLLAR t 6 t t 6 t I v "/'-1 ~ I ,12xl0 '\ Mechanical/Electrical Engineers < t> . - 335 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suhe B ElECTRIC WATER . .~. '. . . . . ~. I' < > j;. . 6" BELOW . -I North Liberty, IA 52317 TO INDIRECT DRAIN __.... "' ~ / V HEATER . .. . . . ~ . ..'~ ':.0 {' 7 1 f "'j ~ CLNG. , \~ (319) 6264719 voice AT MOP SNK .... . ". , r / - - - - I ,I !/~" ,,"'--,/'''' " '!',' (319) 6264941 fax AUTOMATIC .--/ ;/ /~ ,'.',.' ,.j. .........~.! r'-j:J, " ajpcosouthslope.net CONTROL PHlEl - BACKDRAFT DAMPER ,/ ,<. " ,,~ ./'.I~ POINT OF CONNECTION ^ '-- DUCT THRU ROOF /. ,/O~ ,/00/",,/, ... ~tf' / ."" --- ER-l ~ FOR ELECTRIC POWER v' 'I.:s: /," /, f' ' G! 'd ~ 12xl0 /'" ) .:.:::i;; ", ! ,i" '" ~I "-, 335 . """ if',. SA-I" .' --....;:::::1 ~ 6" BELOW f- ./ CAST IRON _____ ' . CLNG. .,/ VALVE BOX ---- J . 12xl0 - G.y~ .....~ ~ \. / ~~~llRELlEF VENTILATOR DETAIL. . /'i ...,'."... EF~;X10 >,' J VALVE r- -- ~l---:- (i? '0 ~,..'.,~~~' ~ '," ,..' OUCT, ",,:5; ,0 / ,... TYP. -"" r"",- SECTION / J SA-I EXHAUST FAN OPERATION I:'-...... .', "., '., GEH-1 ON ROOF b-.?' ..." ~ LEVEL ABOVE EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED I' ~ 4~..'~~A \ .'... ~JLECTRIC WATER HEATER DETAIL WHEN LIGHTS ARE ENERGIZED. ' 1"/. ~12x12 EA ", c \ / SCALE! NO SCALE ~WATER VALVE AND BOX DE '-"" ,'i UP TO ' - 'n '-./ r \ TAIL KEYED SWITCH FOR LIGHTS PROVIDED /~ GEH-1 C ~:::;-~, '-J SCAlE: NONE CSD-l BY DIVISION 16 CONTRACTOR. SEE is DIVISION 16 PLANS . ;) c,) .. , .. :-,. - ~ j; ~v Pro ject Title: CONTROL T M 1 MECHANICALPLAN RIVERSIDE PANEL rVENT V PIT VENT 1/4' = 1'-0. GAS TIGHT : /WATER SUPPLY TO FESTIVAL COVER I PUMPED PRECAST BUILDING - ~: ~AI1f CONCRETE WAlL ~ i'- - STAG E I I FLOOR I ... f..' INL~'~ ~. . . ~.., :., · : ..~. ~':" .", .. GRAVITY EXHAUST HOOD SCHEDULE IMPROVEMENTS I- ~ I- ~ " ~' / _ 4'-0" MIN STATIC THROAT HOOD ~ ~ ~ '~~ I, 30 DIA %<..'0 PLAN PRESSURE SIZE SIZE '7 7. HIGH LIQUID ~ ' , ~ BALL VALVE MARK CFM (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) MANUFACTURER REMARKS ;ii G^TE VALVE --J~ --c.J... ~ 8 AlARM flOAT GRAVIlY N.C, BALL~~ I'T"1 ~ / SHUT-OFF, GEH-l 670 0.09 12x12 24 DIA GREEN HECK GRS " (TYP,) -7 '- _ SANITARY VALVE DRAIN ~" (...,u.-' /' ~ TYP Owner: 5' PUMP 'OFF' VALVE ~~ n n ~ :>>;::; ..., CHECK VALVE . ... r- ~ ...,... CONTROL flOAT SEWER ~ ' II II - K.<'~ (!YP.) I "- 6" MIN:~ ~ ' "'" PUMP 'ON' CRUSHED STONE ~ ~ ~~ B CONTROL FLOAT % ~ y ~~ 77. ~ WATER SERVICE B ~~fth'%-~~' FROM SITE DIFFUSER AND REGISTER SCHEDULE Project No.: 200640.00 ., .., ,'-(,(-.,'\(&&<<<:'0,'(/.('0/' Drawn by: D. ~EN REFER TO PLANS FOR PLAN MANUFACTURER, MODEL - FINISH MOUNTING (*) REMARKS Checked by: Y. AMOROSO CONTINUATION OF PIPES MARK NUMBER ANO lYPE BASIN AND ALSO SIZES OF PIPES. ER-l TITUS MODEL 355RL. WHITE WALL BLADES SHALL BE Issue: 35 DEG. DEFLECTION HORIZONTAL ON ALL (-', DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR DETAIL 8 ~T~RscERAIN ACCESS PIT DETAIL """" Dot. D~";plioo \ / SCALE' NO SCALE PSD 19A (*)COORDINATE THE lYPE OF MOUNTING OF GRILLES AND REGISTERS WITH THE '-./ . _ ARCHITECTURAL CONDITIONS. - VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE - EQIUPMENT SPEC. TYPE STATIC MINIMUM RATIO OF "'EIGHT OF PLAN LENGTH X DIA. CAPACllY Note: (BASE/ISOLATION) DEFLECTION INERTIA BLOCK TO TOTAL MARK LOCATION SYSTEM (INCHES) (GAL) REMARKS MOTOR <INCHES) "'EIGHT OF SUPPORTED LOAD . STATIC OUTlET FIELD VERIFY AU. OIMENSlONS AND CLEARANCES. P' .., PRESSURE VELOCITY 0 / 00 NOT SCALE ORAWlNGS, CONSULT SHOP ORAWlNGS AMTROL '""" NO. F MANUFACTURER ANO OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAlIlNGS LAY OUT AND ET-l JANITORS CLOSET HOT WATER. WH-l 10.4" X 10". 2.1 MODEL ST-5-C MARK CFM (INCHES) (FPM) RPM HP VOLTS PH. SPEEDS MOUNTING lYPE OF UNIT REMARKS COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLAllON EF -1 (NOND/TYPE 4 10 ___ ROOM 115 POTABLE WATER USE FOR ACCURACY ANO NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER , lRAOES. REAO SPECIFlCA liONS, EF-l 670 0.5 --- 855 1/6 120 1 1 SUSPENDED COOK @COF>YRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COP'l1NG. OISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCllON WITHOUT WRITTEN PERlAlSSION BY NEUMANN MONSON. P ,c. IS PROHIBllEO. (1) FILL PRESSURE- 12 PSIG / REUEF PRESSURE- 30 PSIG Sheet Title: A SOUND ATTENUATOR SCHEDULE SEWAGE EJECTOR SCHEDULE WATER HEATER SCHEDULE A MECHANICAL DYNAMIC INSERTION LOSS IN OECIBELS PLAN CAPACITY EWT LWT ELECTRICAL PLANS PRESSURE DIAMETER PLAN MOTOR MARK (GALLONS) (F) (F) MOUNTING MANUFACTURER REMARKS ~~~ CFM (IN.0:2iER) SERVES (i*~~J~) W1D(~~~~rT 6~ 1~5 2;0 5&0 1900 2~OO 7600 8~0< MARK GPM FT. HEAD HP VOLTS PH. MANUFACTURER BASIN REMARKS VOLT PH. AMPS SA-I 670 0.01 EF-l 48 25x25 7 10 15 25 27 23 19 18 SE-1 35 25 6/10 120 1 HYDROMATIC SK60 30"\ll X 48" DEEP (1) WH-1 19 40 120 120 1 13 FLOOR LOCHIVAR SOUND ATTENUATOR REQUIRED ON INLET ANO OUTLET OF EF-l WH-1 SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WH-1 SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MOUNTING SHELF FROM UNIT MANUFACTURER Sheet Number: (1) SE-1 SHALL BE DUPLEX SYSTEMS. EACH SYSTEM SHALL HAVE TWO PUMPS, EACH PUMP SIZED AT HORSEPOWER SHOWN IN SCHEDULE. EACH SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DUPLEX CONTROL AND ALARM PANEL. M 2 I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 '~, NEUMANN MONSON "<" :-::. ,~\ T' ,~ i"J '<\. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS \'(;LLE'(U:'.,i_, /;' A R C H I T E C T S // C:"'IIJP '1 t://:~~'>' , ,':< 1\\ (NOTE' NOT ALL SYMBOLS SHOIIN MAY BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT> ";:;., , ,~''';,~:..-: ~':\ /{~~~--?- A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION ,-" -f ~~ 0 RECESSED DOWNUGHT o-@ 111 E. COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 POLE MOUNTED UGHT AXTURE CCi~',~cTTC 0 I 0 I flUORESCENT AXTURE - SURFACE MOUNTED \"','::1,\ 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX :::{d 0 12345 I I I I NEUMANN MONSON LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ARC HIT E C T S Ii ~:~~~;~~D SP-SUSPENDED A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION " - "ALL MOUNTED NOTE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE PROPER FIXTURE IQJNTING TRIM TYPES \lITH ARCHITECTLIlAL III E, CO LL E G EST, IOWA C I T Y, I A 52240 DRAVINGS AND CEILING SPECIFICATIONS cT---'---- -,-- ,--' -, , ' --+-q ---... -.--- I u..c----... -,--. - -- ,'-' TYPE LAMPS MANS ACTLIlER AND TYPE HTG. VOLT REMARKS i I I I ' I ' , o II !! F'B~oFa,O. 319.338.7878 319-338.7879 FAX O 2/T8 NEW STAR S 120 2 lAMP. 48 LENGlll. POLYCARBONATE LENS. I I I I 0 0" 0 FA 2-FJ 51C-142 ElECTRONIC BAL1AST i i! A~9 ' A-9 ' I ' I , : l-J2W KIRLIN ,c, i. L""" ----' Fa lRlPLE TUllE 9906501 R 120 RECESSED ROUND, POlYCARBONATE LENS ,~' . -i4'- - ' --- - Consultants: FC 2/T8 OAY-BRITE S 120 ~. ~ ~ ~ i ~O m,O I ~b1. IA & J Associates PC 2-F3 T-2J2 BAL1AST '0 0 . . I 1 Mechanical/Electrical Engineers 1-15OW FIXTURE: STERNER POST TOP, SQUARE. BRONZE TONE FINISH. l\1TH ARIA AND, ' I" rr-'A"'9 . A...;9 ''''' 365 Beaver Kreek Centre SU~e B HA HPS #EXE~ 5019 lSOPHS 3S 208 C POlE 208 HEX1OO'W- FITTER, 1YPE III O1STRIBUnON i I I: . ~ North Uberty, IA 52317 POLE. SIRESSCRETE. fOAGONAL, CONCRETE .~ i' I I ' i \~ (319) 626 '719 . IllRECT BURIED IE190-APHOG-S90 WITH HEX RING \3' ,,- , "-'I $- 1-, -, t : ' ... VOice . , i i : I : ' ' . ' (319) 6264941 fax !: IL -00 _ 8'0 i ajpcosouthslopanet [, ~9 A~ i! , ' (4}---- . ----{--jf1n- ....--. , ' : I i------ -'-, ,- I :! ! i Fa,a I FB,o I 'I " O' 0 '4@ I- E 1 iA-2 J ! . .A- ~ E 1 - @ ,+24 i' A"';9 I A-9 ,.+24. (f;J n_ _. uJ ,l,~~~,~,,~~-',,: ,,_ ' . 'rw ViP , I i1i Iii' ! ili .." ", \j\jOKiF~~ MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT WIRING SCHEDULE EF-l !i!l,-..~; g~1 di5" I g.bl; ..,., U' KEY NOTES. CD i :' !," A-9 \., . ',: A-9 A-9 IP\~ HAND 'I' ,. .... DRYER A . START-STOP PUSH BUTTON ON DOOR D - OfF-AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH ON DOOR 1 [. ": ", .- II ' B = AUTO-OFF-HAND SELECTOR SVITCH ON DOOR G _ GREEN PILOT LIGHT ON DOOR SE-l~, , : 'i' A-13 C - WO SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH OHI-OFF-LOO R - RED PILOT LIGHT ON DOOR a> [j .~" .L I - , Fa b ' WO SPEED STARTER fT- CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER ' A-'i 1 :' A,-9._ ('H:kt:9 f5 d A-9 STARTER/DISCONNECT . _;_~FC'C I---O-IFC,c EWCJ ITEM X=FURNISHED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR I ~,<\ ,,-, 1 ,- 1 - . @:~; NUMBER SW FUSE NEMA KEY E2 " , ' I , ' DESRICPTION HP/KW VOLTS PH. CONDUIT a. WIRE PANELIHCC STR DISC AMPS AMPS SIZE NOTES REMARKS i , " : :. SE i 1:(1 (lr----- HADRYERND , "~ C ' I I ~. -J c' ' / PANEL A I,! V 'I/ll\' " ..' G) EXHAUST FAN EF-l ~p6 120 1 ~/t"~' l-f/12GND A-I __ -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO EH !"'''t:&5 W~~A,b I :~.b I A-15 -,_ (~) C?) 13 2-f/12 1 f/12GND I iA-9 A-9 I , A-9 );> N 2 WATER HEATER WH-l 120 1 " . A-3 -- -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO WIH I- FlA 1/2 C, I' f3\ 206/10 2-f/12, I-f/12GND __ __ __ __ __ __ BRANCH CIRCUIT TO CONTROL i. \:::/ SEWAGE EJECTOR SE-l HP 120 1 1/2"C. A-5 PANa FROM CONTROL PANa TO PUMP L:,~- ----:::::-::: 8) WATER COOLER EWC ~ 120 1 ~/t"~' 1 f/12GND A-7 -- -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO EWe Project Title: RIVERSIDE ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN FESTIVAL 1/811 = 11-0" ~ - STAGE PANEL NO A MAINS 60A MCB 3P 4W ELECTRICAL REFERENCED NOTES SERVICEVOLTAG~ 120/208 V. 3P. 4W VOLTS MOUNTING SURFACE ~ WEATHERPROOF,LOCKABLECOVERFOREXTERIORDUPLEXRECEPTACLES. IMPROVEMENTS SHORT CKT RATING 10,000 A. I. C, V HUBBEll IWP826MP, POLYCARBONATE WITH PADLOCK HOLES. DESCRIPTION BREAI<ER V1LT AII'S 00. BUS 00. V1LT AII'S IlREAI<ER DESCRIPTION @ DISCONNECT SWITCH - 30A/2P. NF - FOR ON/OFf CONTROL OF SITE UGHTS. PllEAII' ABC tIllllNN.tIl ABC PllENtP Ef 1 1 20 600 1 2 180 1 20 ::jQJ 0 wner: WH 1 1 20 1560 3 4 180 1 20 ::jQJ SE 1 1 20 1200 5 6 1250 2 30 SITE LIGHTS EWe 1 20 480 7 8 1250 "-[7 LIGHTS 1 20 1060 9 10 ./ "'" B ::(d 1 20 180 11 12 1 20 SPACE B HAND DRYER 1 20 1500 13 14 1 20 SPACE Project No.: :200640.00 HAND DRYER 1 20 1500 15 16 1 20 SPACE Drown by: L. GOOLEY Checked by: J. JURGA Issue: Dote Description DISCONNECT SWITCH 60A/3P FUSE AT 60 AMPS liM' PANEL / MAINS0 I- ~ - PANEL 1""/ EXISTING Note: A MAIN DISTRIBUTION REiD VERIFY AU. DIMENSIONS AND a.E:ARANCES. 00 NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP ORA"NGS PANEL AND OTHER APPROPRIATE ORA"NGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTAU.ATlON FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES, READ SPEClFlCA TlONS. @OOPYRIGHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTlON "THOUT WIlITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON. P.C. tS PRDHIIlITED. ^ ~, Sheet Title: ~=I; GND A ELECTRICAL A H/20C. UNDERGROUND PLAN EB ~ -~lNE POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM Sheet Number: E2 I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 NEUMANN MONSON A R C H I T E C T S A 'ROFESSIOf'.-AL COR'ORldION III E, COLLEGE ST, IOWA CITY, IA 52240 319-338-7878 319.338-7879 FAX D D Consultants: IOWA CITY, IOWA SPRING, 2007 ... c eO'. , c>~ . ..':,.- - ,..--' '/. MATERIAL SYMBOLS --' INDEX OF DRAWINGS Q. ~ FOSTER RD .... ~ COMPACTED EARTH ~ PRECAST CONCRETE SPEEOW"Y loJ III GENERAL DRAWINGS III T"n ;:;: COVER SHEET c:::. C> WHITING AVE G-001 ,// ~ Z - 4 o~;5 loJ ~ ITIllJIIIII[] RIGID INSULATION V, WHITE OAK P % PROOFROLLED EARTH <.: (.j 0 CIVIL DRAWINGS (\\ ::> C-101 SITE PLAN C c C 0 3 KIt.tBAIJ, SITE LOCATION: AVE !!: ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS RIfBJ POROUS FILL ~ STEEL LOWER CITY PARK IOWA CITY A-101 PLANS, ELEVATIONS, AND SECTIONS A-501 DETAILS AND SCHEDULES ~ BRICK 1$ @'I PLYWOOD X MECHANICAL DRAWINGS Project Title: MO MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATION, AND NOTES ~ 1><1 RIVERSIDE c Kllo\B"LL M1 MECHANICAL PLANS CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT ROUGH WOOD i M2 MECHANICAL PLANS ::i Q. :2 FESTIVAL '" >- I:, ':.:~ ": .~ : ,I CONCRETE ... ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ~ GROUT PARK PARK 0 ~ E1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN '" '" loJ ~ ... ~ ~ GROVE ST ST E2 ELECTRICAL PLAN STAGE III '" ST ~ t.tCL Z RONAL ST 0 0 III Z Z Z IMPROVEMENTS ~ Z ~ 0 0 % III 9 REFERENCE INDICATIONS "- Z "" --'",- 0 ~ '" '" HURC ST 0>)( ... "- lD o -c ~ ::> :2 ... ST ~ RIVE :!: ST Iii ... ... Iii ... III Iii Iii ... III III III III AIRCHI 0 S N ~ SECTION IDENTIFICATION t.tARK Z SQ '" '" '" '" STz 0 SHEET WHERE SHOWN BAYARD ST 0 lD III ~ '" Owner: 0 ::> z g '" OPEN ~Oly", ... lD :!: 3 > BUILDING SECTION OFFICE ~ ROOM NAME z 8 0 ::J ::> STQ C> CITY OF IOWA CITY Cr ND 0 Q 8_RooM NUMBER 10 ~ SECTION IDENTIFICATION Iii t.tARKE ST H SHEET WHERE SHOWN ROOM IDENTIFICATION B z WALL SECTION B 0 III EFFER ON ST S'-o. $- Project No.: 05.038 ~SECTION IDENTIFICATION FlN.FlR. Drown by: N ELEVATIONS Checked by: H SHEET WHERE SHOWN SITE LOCATION MAP CD DETAIL @J- Issue: 1.1 = 6O'~0" WALL TYPE ~ ElEVATION IDENTIFICATION Dote Description HE SHEET WHERE SHOWN (0) 1-10-07 BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR ELEVATION DOOR NUMBER ~ e WINDOW TAG EQUIPMENT TAG Note: FIELD \'ERIFY ALl DIUENSIONS AND CLEARANCES, DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAVt1NGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE AU WORK PRIOR TO INST AllA TlON FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE Vt1TH OTHER TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL 0 AT FTG FOOTING @COPYRIGHT ALT ALTERNATIVE GA GAGE A.F.F ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR H.M. HOLLOW METAL UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DiSClOSURE OR CONSTRUC1l0N WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION By NEUMANN MONSON PC BEJ BRICK EXPANSION JOINT HORIZ HORIZONTAL IS PROHIBITED. BNT BENT JT JOINT B.O. BOTTOM OF LW LONG WAY Sheet TItle: BRNG BEARING MAX MAXIMUM CJ CONTROL JOINT MIN MINIMUM ~ CENTER LINE O.C, ON CENTER COVER A I hereby ~hot the portIon of thIs technlcol CLG CEILING O.D. OUTSIDE DIAMETER A IUbmIaIOn herein _ .....Il:lnod by me or under CLR CLEAR OPP OPPOSITE SHEET my dIrect 8upervlslon and rupon ble cha~. I am a COL COLUMN PTD PAINTED duly regl8leted Architect under the Ia.. of 8 state of CONC CONCRETE REF REFERENCE Iowa. KEVIN W. MONSON DBL DOUBLE REFR REFRIGERA TOR DIA DIAMETER REINF REINFORCEMENT DO AUTO DOOR OPERATOR SIM SIMILAR Sienet\le D.. EA EACH S.S. STAINLESS STEEL ReglotralIan explrw June 3D. 2007 E.H.O. ELECTRIC HOLD OPEN STD STANDARD Ptlg8sO'sl1eetscover8dbyltisse!ll E.J. EXPANSION JOINT SUS SUSPENDED EL ELEVATION T&B TOP AND BOTTOM EQ EQUAL T.O. TOP OF DaI8 Iooued: EXP EXPANSION T.O.M. TOP OF MASONRY Sheet Number: FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET TYP TYPICAL F.F. FINISHED FLOOR VERT VERTICAL G-001 FLR FLOOR WI WITH 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 I:XI::; IINli'iluWI:H 5 , m:J V POL , , NEUMANN MONSON -------~ , ,.:,"- , 81-0" X 81_011 X 411 . r[) CONCRETE SLAB A R C H I T E C T S . , REMOVE EXISTING EXISTING ASPHALT PARKING LOT SHELTER , CONCRETE SLAB , , 'ROFESSIO"AL COR'ORATION . , , A , GRADE EXISTING BERM THIS AREA , , . ' , \\ , \ TO ACHIEVE 1:20 (5%) MAX, SLOPE , , , , , : , , , " 111 E. COLLEGE ST, IOWA CITY, IA 52240 ...., .0,-- -0 ------ (<) 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX D , , D , " - , - - , , , Oti.fQl , , '" , - <t , Consultants: on , .- , , , , , , , \) , , , , ~.... Jm , , EXIS~)t;.I~\CHAReOAL 12345 073113; ASPHALT SHINGLES NEUMAN N MONSON AC;, 06100o;PLYWOODSHEAlHING f W12X22STEELBEAM if I, n 3B'-O" I') i, it 27'-4' 'l: ARC HIT E C T S I I ] [ I I , I I 061000;y''' PLYWOOD, r r",::: A 'ROFESSIOr--.AL COR'ORATION PAINTED, lYP. CD-- IT C,J, " ,IT~t- -, - - - - ----' - - - - - : , I \.../ \.. ' r r,---,' r,--'--" r,---,' I' J I] 1 I 1 I I I I I I J I J I 061000; (3)2xBHEADER 4'CONCRElESLAB: :::: ::::: :: :: : _ III L COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 I 6X6 W1 4 X W1 4 '''^'F I I I " "I" "" I 0 . . vvvv I 1 I I I I I ] I I I I I I I I I fu I I I I 11 11 I I I I I I] I - - - - 1--$]1 11 II I II ]1 I~ I I DB 9100; PREFINISHED " I ".---~" "~--'--~" "~---~" I 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX A4 I LOUVER tn\ =, C,J r, r '?'~ I 1-' I D I A sa, I W-- '6 \.../ \..1 '& t--: -L--~----- -, D I ~7'-B" 061000;2xTREAlED ___ ____ : TABLES BY : : '" I T.O.M_A':L?UVER WOOD BLOCKING SLOPEYa'/1'-0" SLOPEYs"/1'-0" I I OWNER I I I 0 2-0 3-0 I ---- ---- - I , I, C It t BEAM BEA'. 0 I 3' 0" , I Co onsu an s: 099000' PAINTFINISH (3) 2x12 (3) 2x12 M ,:. ~- r,---,' r'-T-T' rT---n I I ' ----- ----- C") II I]. 11 III II 11 I I II II 11,11 II 1+$ I , 042002' B" CMU ""---- ~, C,J, r, r I' ,-, I ' I I I 'I,' , I I , I I " w-- 3 \ \ I l3 -++-- - +-+-- - -++--; - H-- - ++-- -, T , .... ,J ......./ ~: I I I I I I I J I I I I I I ' ________ __ I I I I I I I , 11 I I II I ----- ----- I I II II II I II II 11 I I #4@32VERT.IN ----- ----- C.J.=CONTROLJOINT :5'-4" ~ "~---~. ".-T-~. "@~~ I : c,> GROUTED CMU _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ E,J_ = EXPANSION JOINT !lYp,1! MO', ...! co CJ r, ,,'~I I lYP. ~' , I @---4 " \. \..1,.) q; -: ----~----- 71 /./ I , r,---T' r,-i--,' r....---T'" ~ I _____ f----- - [ 1 I I I I I I I I. I I I I .,. I Z 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I ] I I W W ~ _ I I II II II I II II II I I co ---------el :;---.---- 0..2..- c;: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ' i'- 9 W N..J f1: I II I I II I I I II II I ____~ C!) ____ ""i $: w""i ""i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ " -_" " 1 , I I'" "I I' 'I " I, 0:: r:=- C_J_.. r -------...J~-----------r.r------------- lC.J .. -..' I...., I I--..J.....J.....J L..J... _-i..- ..J.....J L..J.....J.....J 1..1 '" '" ~3 @-l2i - ~11'l" (5 I .1'1' r _....:::~. 1,1 ..., I ~r I I' 1 CHANGlljG I 1',- -, lo::rr A-fj()1 LLl I I / , I _____ _____ a.. I I '" TABLE - L' 5'_4" \ - I - .. _, 0 I co ~ o::r v co .J , \ 033513; FLOOR FINISH NOTCH 2 x12 BEAM AT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ NOTCH 2 x12 BEAM A- ! 4" CONC SLAB @ -; : .: <D ~ f;, 1',1 'r WOM~N rD -I' -; rD : <0 I I LOUVER OPENINGS LOUVER OPENINGS I' ~ _____0 : \ A-'" ) , ' I \ ~ 11,02,!1 ~ ~ \',-j ~: I 033000 4"CONC ----- --~- r ' I ;C,J "--/ ;"'1- = , rr?!fJ1 <+ , I ; . ", r ,- I ---- J I '" '1'" '" 1'1 r---, 102 I I' I SLAB I I I I 5' LJ.J I ~ I ADA "',1 ,\,1 "y :ADA: A I , " :" ----- ------r:- I ~ I 15: 1~5'-4" I, : 10 ~\ - 0' 0: [JUI rq II ;;'B31'.. : '. . '. 't' 1 j I --' I I~ -' I I ~ I: "" . . . . _____ __~_ EJ : C/) I.,. -; I ~. I I ~~~~i1~FILL i ~~=.:'~=.:'~= ~=.:'===1 ~ IFW : ,CJ i .~F FW '" ~ c,> c,> I 1 'r i CHASE 1bD~! ~ c,> _. II] ____ _ _ I I I I I I 1 ~ I Ii: I ~ ~ ~ ] A "" I 11031 (10" I I ~ ~ '~------------- ------ ___=r- ~ I I I ' I r------------- ------- -----l I 0 EI I W A-SOl I I I = I : : - - - - - - ---tt L "W20 115 ~ 20 i I. : 10 .. g I ~ I nO ~ : :4 GIRDEIiTRU _ _ _ '~ " 1'1 EL (-4'-0") @ EL (-4'-0")': "____ : ADA /\ : 'ADA' 101': #4@12EACHWAY. :: I Tl IT I : : I iCJ , 1-, / 'J , L__J A' BENDHORIZ,BARS1'-4"@ 'co ' , = L -----, I :"'1- i'" MEI'f -'~ I, /---,::>~ l' I IX I I"V I I' -' [ill)] r' I C CORNERS, fr'C\l , : ~C! --':: : I Co .,. ~ 101, "It 5'-4' \ " 'Co C , 1 M ' ' , 0 C\l -' , ' -' f~ -' 'I' -' I -' 033000; CONCRElE FOOllNG & ' 1- : I J -'~ LJ.J J ': CD f' ICHANG"lGI" ,\ I" I CD FOUNDATION ' ~------------ - Ql~k-------- ------' , : TABLE' I " -' -,kl . . G C.J.. .II iC.J_ "" .... , . '. Fl' ,W2 ' L S"" 1-'1..-- J I. I' I I I' I' ,,:0 .' 2 #5 CONT. I' 1'- 0.,' l__ ___t____________L____ ___________ n_J 4" 4" J 2'-0" ~ ,,3'-0" I, J J J. .. ~ - l<'- LEGEND ~ I. 5'-0" 2B'-O" I~ 5'-0' I, I' 2B'-O" " Project Title: C 1 WALL SECTION ---------- WALLBELOW 'I ' , 'I ~ -, _________, ROOF ABOVE 1/2" = 11-111 ___ TRUSS, 24" O,C,-lYp, L-n::<::<nnn'r.()Nr.RFTF~'AR RIVERSIDE 073113; ASPHALT SHINGLES FESTIVAL 061000;PLYWOODROOFSHEAlHING~ C3 ROOF FRAMING PLAN C4 FOUNDATION, FOOTING & SLAB PLAN C5 FLOOR PLAN \ 1/8" = 1'-0" 1/8" = 1'-0" 1/8" = 1'-0" STAGE IMPROVEMENTS 06 1753; WOOD TRUSSES 06 1000; y''' EXTERIOR PLYWOOD, PAINlED-lYP. I Cj> 061000;6x6CEDAR 061000; 1 X 6 CEDAR o WOOD POST, lYP. TRIM. lYP. Owner: ~ - SIMPSON POST ANCHOR, lYP. 072400: EXlERIOR CITY OF IOWA CITY (-) " FINISH SYS1EM lYP 081113; H,M, DOOR AND ~~~- CONCRETE FTG, lYP. ' ' FRAME, PAINlED, lYP. :~' ::... SLOPEYs"/1'-0" SLOPEYs" I 1'-0" 061ooo;1x6CEDAR - - B A' TRIM. lYp_ ' , B _u - ._ < ,,'... ,. Project No.: 05.038 -, I I Drawn by. "" I I --- .-, j j 83 ELEVATION AT RR DOORS Checked by. )> i~ I I 1/8" = 1'-0" _. I I Issue: L_L.J 8 2 5 4 2 cp ~ ~ Date Description ~4~~~.~,ING SECTION @ SHELTER 073113; ASPHALT SHINGLES _ _ _ _----=- _ -=- --=- --=- I 073113; ASPHALT SHINGLES I _ _ __ I 1-10-07 BID DOCUMENTS _---_-=- -_, -=--- ---=-_ _ I r ~- _ I -- -- -- - - - 099000; PAINT FINISH, lYP. DB 9100; PREFINISHED LOUVER - - ~- - ~ - ~-- - -- - - - - -- ---=- - - 102113' PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENlS 102813; BABY CHANGING TABLE DB 9100; LOUVER 061000; 6x 6 CEDAR , 072400; EXlERIOR WOOD POST, lYp_ /1' 072400; EXlERIOR FINISH SYSlEM, lYp, // FiNISH SYS1EM // 061000; 1x6 CEDAR i //" 061000; 1 x 6 CEDAR D / GRAB 1 TRIM lYP '// ' TRIM lYP Note: / ' . I OU1LET lYP'- .. . // // D II ~ BAR' ' - ;;'I Ii FlELD VERIFY All D]~ENSIONS AND CLEARANCES. / ,/ / II )) ____ _ DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SI-IOP DRAWiNGS , " 0 0" " I AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRAWlNGS_ LAY OUT AND e== =-=>.... ~ ~ '\ COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION :J ' :J.:;, " DRINKING FOUNTAIN, CEN1ERED FOR ACCURACY AND NON-'NTERFERENCE "nH OTHER \,5'-01/2"\,~ WE~T NORTH EAST SOUTH 84 NORTH ELEVATION 85 WEST ELEVATION TRADES_READPROJECT~ANUAL ~ 1/8"=1'-0" 1/8"=1'-0" @COPYRIGHT UNAUlHORIZED COPYING, DISCLOSURE OR CONSlRUCnON 8 1 WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON PC MEN'S RESTROOM - 101 's PROHIB'TED. 1/8"=1'-0" I l 3 4 I 099000; PAINT FiNISH, lYp, DB 9100; PREFINISHED LOUVER _ _ _ _ 4 ~ Sheet Title: _ ~_ =~ _ _ 073113; ASPHALT 102113; PLASTIC TOILETCOMPARTMENlS 102B13;BABYCHANGINGTABLE I _ _ -~ --=- =- -=- _ _!--_ _ - _ I SHII~GLES PLANS A - - - - - - - -- A' - - - - , GRA - - ----c_ - - ----- ,- DB 9100; LOUVER ,~~ -- - ,-- - - - - ' ELEVATIONS, \\\ D D ',',', rl E~ ',' / 072400; EXlERIOR '--, - "" 072400; EXlERIOR AND SECTIONS , , " ' l ) / FINISH SYSTEM FINISH SYSTEM " "'5' "'5' /./ / ~ ~~ ' : ./ 061000' 1x6 CEDAR 061000' 1 x 6 CEDAR I ~ ~ / C I I ' ' " .. .. ~ / , , TRIM, lYP. , , TRIM, lYP. , , , EAST NORTH WEST SOUTH ,,-,,- "",- - ',',' "..- A1 WOMEN'S RESTROOM-102 A4 SOUTH ELEVATION OB1113;H.M_DOOR A5 EAST ELEVATION AND FRAME, Sheet Number: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1/8" = 1'-0" PAINlED, lYp, 1/8" = 1'-0" A-101 J 1 2 3 4 5 12345 T J I I NEUMANN MONSON 061000; 1RUSS ANCHOR, SIMPSON H2.5 OR EQ~~ --- I ' SAW CUT, lYp, @ CORNERS ARC HIT E C T S 03 3000; 1/2" 1/ . X '>() ~ EXPANSION JOINT A' R 0 F E S S I 0 '" Ale 0 R ' 0 RAT I C N X X X X A,' 072400' DIRECT APPLIED EXlERIOR -~ 073113; ASPHALT SHINGLES 'X 'X j FINISH SYSlEM '\. , \ I I>< , " , WOOD "",n, m. 061000; PLYWOOD ROOF ...- - ...- 1><, ",;;" 'X 061000; 1 X 6 CEDAR 1RIM,lYP, , SHEATHING \ =$BRNG __' I>:~'.>< cg} 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX D 073113' METAL EDGE 10'-0" "- ~TOP t X X xX D , \ ~ "-- 061000; 1/2' PLYWOOD, 7'-4" . 079005; SEALANT, BOTH SIDES \ V i PAINlED ---. - 08110; SlEELFRAME _ ^ 061000; (3) 2X8 'N I I T:,: Consultants: ~BTM 061000; 1/2" PLYWOOD ~, 061000; 2X BLOCKING '-"9'-41/2'" ../' I, I, '" SIMPSON CB 66 OR / -- 061000; PLYWOOD, I, I, I, EQUAL COL, BASE, l'r 061000; 1X CEDAR FASCIA . 7 076200; FLASHING , V PAINlED 11'1 '1 II ::;;--- ~ 089100; PREFINISHED V EO. EQ, 073113; PREFINISHED LOUVER r ./ . S1RIP VENT V ,- 089100; BIRD SCREEN 24" D. X 4'-0' DEEP CONC, 061000' PLYWOOD PAINlED N V I POSTFOUNDA1l0N,lYP. , , ;:=' ~ V PROVIDE SLOPED TOP ~ '" "- V D4 DETAIL@DOORHEAD D5 PLANDETAIL@POST ~ 042002; SOLID CMU AT 089100; FLASHING ~\ V I JAMBS 11/2"=1'-0" 11/2"=1'-0" - 1/ - 061000; 1 X 6 CEDAR 1RIM I ~I ~SILL , \ '.I1f><1I-' I 061000; 2X BLOCKING, '-"7'-8" , \' ~ D< PAINlED,lYP. I>< I)< , 042002; CMU; PAINlED 061000; 1 X 6 CEDAR 1RIM ~B,O, TRIM t::.: 7'-4" ~ ~ 079005; SEALANT, FULL I>< PERIMETER, BOTH SIDES ;; 081113; SlEEL FRAME, GROUT 061000; 1x6 CEDAR 1RIM, STAINED SOLID r 072400: DIRECT-APPLIED EXlERIOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE U..:. 081113;SlEELDOOR I FINISHSYSlEM,(STUC-O,FLEX) x x X X X X x f '1 VVV"v VVV"v:> WALLS >> ~ X XX?< "'1.',<<>; C ROOM CEILING R ;:<x~x::'>' 081113;ANCHOR~'7 #4@32VERTlYP C FLR Base NORTH SOUTH EAST WEST NOTES ~~ ~~J 'V vvvv Y1 ",'~ ^ NO. NAME MAT, FIN. MAT. FIN. MAT. FIN. MAT. FIN. MATL HT. u'. 2 L- 04 2002' 8" CMU 101 MEN CONC V CMU PNT CMU PNT CMU PNT CMU PNT PLY 10' -0" -- 102 WOMEN CONC V CMU PNT CMU PNT CMU PNT CMU PNT PLY 10'-0" __ Project Title: 103 CHASE CONC -- CMU -- CMU -- CMU -- CMU -- PLY 10'-0" -- C3 ~1~~~~_~N DETAIL@LOUVER C4 ~~~~~_;,@ DOORJAMB C5 ;1~~1._~ETAIL@TRIM RIVERSIDE LEGEND NOTES: FESTIVAL ':...: -T' 1. ALL PLYWOOD EXPOSED TO VIEW TO BE PAINTED 072400; DIRECT APPLIED FINISH ^ -- ,~== ~ ~~ ~ ~ - V VINYL 076200; FLASHING ' STAGE -, CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT - - '.'--: PNT PAINlED 061000; 1 X 6 CEDAR 1RIM ~ f''''' PLY PLYWOOD . 042002; CMU; PAINlED IMPRO'llEMENTS j; ~.:; EXP EXPOSED 076200' FLASHING ' llt>< 'Y , ~ ' ~ 033000; EXPANSION I \ I JOINTMAlERIAL ~ I )( ~' ,j ~ )( ., , I ~),'C()fr't:~~, ;h)C~r-5nq ~BRNG ~BRNG , Owner: ")~oo'1:2().Qc <'-:b6---GlJ~ '-"10'-o",:>~ 061000;2XBLOCKlNG '-'10'.0" ~~ -:><:;;::: 061000;2XBLOCKING CITY OF IOWA CITY J.~~~m'(--.~':c ,1:t;1~1"'",'''!:?' TOP PLAlE ffi 111 TOP PLAlE ) )~ - ---4' ,,, .~_-/ ~1._ > ,.-----... r--i ~ r=::r )~..- ~, Co => >~ ~V~V~'Y;. L::;/~V.;:<{~ ~ III1 . -- /~~~~ ,,>>;;/>j)/;/, ~ 055000;W12X22 <( 061000,(3)2X12_ B ~~~<<~~ ~ ,j (~~~'A 'r -'~ '" B DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE <<>::<~'0'Y; ',::<,A:, ;;~>>::<~,'~,//> ;, ~~~g~~:SM ~ WI\ Project No.: 05.038 ... ~ ~ ~ ~,~~ ,> ;<\ ' 061000; PLYWOOD, ~ - 061000; PLYWOOD, Drawn by. DOOR FRAM E :// ~/ ~/ ~ . %, . / >;;// >/?<,// ' lYP., PAINlED .I lYp" PAINlED Ch k d b ./~/~~-!/,~ <~/~--::"/'" . ~BTM,.I 1 ec e y. NO. ROOM SIZE-PR WxH TYPE MAT. FIN. GLAZ. TYPE MAT. FIN. ~~'Y;r ~/-"':;';>>/;0 ~BTM ~ 061000,2XBLOCKlNG 8-101/2 l' I ~ J-- 061000;CEDAR,lYP. . ...'-..~'-..V'-..~ 0:, ''::,,~~'.,'>''., '-"8'-8".1 I 061000' SIMPSON PC 66 Issue. 1 01A MEN 3' -0" x 7'-2" A HM PNT - I HM PNT / / /, / V "/... , , I 061000; CEDAR, lYp, POSTCAP lYp, D t D' t' . 061000;6X6CEDAR 5 I'Z' .' a e escnp Ion 102A WOMEN 3'-0" X 7'-2" A HM PNT - I HM PNT _{ 51/2" -r POST,lYP. 'I 1-10-D7 BID DOCUMENTS 103A CHASE 3'-0" x 7'-2" A HM PNT - I HM PNT 83 ~4~~~~~N DETAIL 84 ~1:~=~~cy~EAM SECTION DETAIL 85 ~/~?1~cy,BEAM SECTION DETAIL LEGEND - HM HOLLOW METAL # DOWELS~~ Note: PNT PAINlED 1~16 @ 8 FJELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSJONS AND CLEARANCES, DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS ,#4 @ 8 EA WAY _ AND OTHER APPROPRIATE DRA..,NGS. LAY DUT AND \ . COORDINATE AU WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE "'TH OTHER .....:..........- ...",/1 ....., ~ '.~. ~. ,.__ .4, ._c.. ~..-.. .. TRADES. READ PROJECT MANUAL . . . ."..". -1<,' ' ~. @COPYRIGHT ~'~~:. " 1Yz"20GA, ' '.." 061000;1 X 6 CEDAR 055000:4X1/2X1'-O" ';:~~~,i0, . \ FORM DECK. x x x x X X ~ 1RIM / I SlEEL P'LAlE UNAUTHORIZED COP't1NG, DISCLOSURE OR CONSlRUCnON 1>>'<( ~{ . z R1 (X x -$ BRNG WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUtJANN tJONSON PC ;<.,,~~~.. " " . ~ < X X X X >< IS PROHIBITED. ~!<<:0" , 4 X 4 X 1/4 SlEEL ANGLE ?Q<~x 0. V 076200 METAL FLASHING 10'-0" , 061000: 2X BLOCKING SEE 2" SEE f ,;,,,,',,'" ' ' ' " ,to < X X X X~X ; ", , ' ~ W/3I4 EXPANSION . ~ _, >< MATCH LOUVER COLOR TOP PLA lE tSCHEDULEt 1'SCHEDULE ANCHORS @ 2'-0" . '" <.J<0 x;y XX >< _ ! I Sheet Title: I~ "'~~ 8"FROSTWALL ._______.. W x;y <><: ><J:><-- IIIIII.J. 061000; (3)2X12 " WI (3) #4 . ~089100'LOUVER::;; DETAILS AND A . " ~ 055000; 3 1/2 X 31/2 X 8 X" A _ 8" I lii ~ ~:uS:'~~NGLEW/(2)3/4 SCHEDULES ~ ~ NIL- 061000; PLYWOOD, ! -" = = = = T . . lYp" PAINlED , ~ - 061000; SIMPSON EPC 66 END POST CAP, lYP. AT CORNERS I-'~ ~" A I 5 12", -- 7[' Sheet Number: ~4?=~,~,TYPE ~4?=~,~,FRAME A3 ~;~1~~~NDETAILATSTOOP,TYP. A4 ~~.~~~~JAMBDETAIL A5 ~~~~._~CORNER A-501 I I I I 12 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 I I I I NEUMANN MONSON MECHAN CAL SYMBOLS A R C H I T E C T S (NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY BE REQUII3ED FOR THIS PROJECT) A PROFESSIONA_ CORPORA-ION PIPING SYM BOLS (APPLIES TO ALL SYSTEMS) PLUMBING SYSTEMS PIPING SYSTEMS SHEETMETAL , MISCELLANEOUS/ ABBREVIATIONS 111 E, COLLEGE ST. IOWA CITY, IA 52240 --to ELBOW TURNED ~ STRAINER _ _ W _ _ SANITARY SEWER - FOS- FUEL OIL SUPPLY HEATING HOT CHILLED + - + DIRECTION OF FLOW SA -- SUPPLY AIR WC -- WATER CLOSET 319-338-7878 319-338.7879 'AX D UP OR TOWARDS BELOW GRADE - HWS - WATER SUPPLY - CWS- WATER SUPPLY D -t€> ELBOW TURNED '---/ PIPE GUIDE _ _ AW- _ ACID WASTE - FOR- FUEL OIL RETURN _ HWR _ HEATING HOT CHILLED + + DUCT SIZE, FIRST FIGURE IS SIDE SHOWN RA -- RETURN AIR UR -- URINAL DOWN OR AWAY ,---. BELOW GRADE WATER RETURN - CWR - WATER RETURN 18X6 Consultants: ~ TEE TURNED )l( PIPE ANCHOR -1----1- STORM SEWER - FOV - FUEL OIL VENT -HPS-l00- HIGH PRESSURE _ HRR _ HEAT RECOVERY ..a -R 1:3-- CHANGE OF ELEVATION, RISE (R), DROP (D) EA -- EXHAUST AIR FD -- FLOOR DRAIN - UP OR TOWARDS BELOW GRADE STEAM (PSI) SUPPLY 1-6, r & J Assoc~tes P.C. TEE TURNED STEAM DRIP SANITARY SEWER , _ HRS _ HEAT RECOVERY 0- MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER Mechanical/Electrical Engineers I@I () I I - AIR - COMPRESSED AIR _ MPS'-65- MEDIUM PRESSURE + OA -- OUTSIDE AIR FS -- FLOOR SINK K1 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suite B DOWN OR AWAY ASSEMBLY ABOVE GRADE STEAM (PSI) RETURN . rt!- North Uberty. IA 52317 DIRECTION I-E-I EXPANSION _ AW- ACID WASTE -LPS-15 - LOW PRESSURE _ 0 _ CONDENSATE I+- I \ (319) 626-4719 voice .. -OX- OXYGEN SPLITTER DAMPER SR -- SUPPLY REGISTER SK -- SINK (319) 626-4941 fax OF FLOW COMPENSATOR ABOVE GRADE STEAM (PSI) DRAIN, LINE b::l ajpcosou1hsiopenet I DIRECTION FLEXIBLE PIPE STORM SEWER _ LPR _ STEAM CONDENSATE REFRIGERANT "" FIRE DAMPER FD ,..........-.. , IIIIIIIIllI H II -VAC- VACUUM + : 3-' SMOKE DAMPER - SD RR -- RETURN REGISTER JS -- JANITOR SINK , OF PITCH CONNECTION ABOVE GRADE (LPR, MPR, HPR) - RS - SUCTION GAS COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER - FD/SD ~ PRESSURE ~ CIRCUIT SETTER - - 0 _ _ CONDENSATE -SV- SCAVENGER CONDENSATE _ RL _ REFRIGERANT ~ TRANSITION PIECE ER -- EXHAUST REGISTER UN -- LAVATORY REGULATING VALVE DRAIN LINE VACUUM - CP - PUMP DISCHARGE LIQUID - [;J<] GATE VALVE ~ BAlANCING VALVE ----- VENT -VPD- VACUUM PUMP _ HCS- HOT AND CHILLED - RHG - REFRIGERANT ~ FLEXIBLE DUCT SG -- SUPPLY GRILLE SH -- SHOWER - I AND FLOW METER DISCHARGE WATER SUPPLY HOT GAS [:<<] I GLOBE VALVE . AIR VENT --AV-- ACID VENT -ACI- AIR COMPRESSOR _ HCR- HOT AND CHILLED _ RRS _ REMOTE RADIATOR Irr,,1 -+ ELBOW WITH VANES RG -- RETURN GRILLE EWC -- ELECTRIC WATER , INTAKE WATER RETURN SUPPLY q;J COOLER r:*J , ~ VENT THRU CONDENSER _ RRR- REMOTE RADIATOR vi : :~ RADIUS ELBOW - WITH VANES FOR PLUG VALVE VACUUM BREAKER - to VTR - NO- NITROUS OXIDE EG -- EXHAUST GRILLE ROOF (VTR) - CS - WATER SUPPLY RETURN DUCT WITH 'R' 30" OR MORE ~ ANGLE GATE VALVE III UNION OR FLANGED - to AVTR ACID VENT THRU _ MA- MEDICAL AIR _ CR _ CONDENSER _ HPLS- HEAT PUMP LOOP + + GRILLE OR REGISTER IN SIDE OF DUCT. CD -- CEILING DIFFUSER ROOF (AVTR) (OIL FREE) WATER RETURN SUPPLY SUPPLY, RETURN, OR EXHAUST AS . . INDICATED. !:l ANGLE GLOBE VALVE ~ GAUGE ADAPTOR - - - COLD WATER (CW) - N- NITROGEN SAFElY RELIEF _ HPLR- HEAT PUMP LOOP d ! MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER - SUPPLY, LD -- LINEAR DIFFUSER - SR - VALVE DISCHARGE RETURN + RETURN, EXHAUST, OR OUTSIDE AIR AS '---I- INDICATED ~ BALL VALVE ~ PRESSURE GAUGE - - - - HOT WATER (HW) -CO- CARBON DIOXIDE +~ f'3-' EXHAUST OR RETURN AIR REGISTER OR FR -- FLOOR REGISTER .~ GRILLE AS INDICATED IN BOTTOM OF DUCT ~ BALANCING VN"VE ~ THERMOMETER _ HOT WATER -HE- HELIUM PLUMBING FIXTURES ~ DIFFUSER IN BOTTOM OF DUCT - SQUARE OR FG -- FLOOR GRILLE C - - - - ' CIRCULATING (HWC) ROUND AS INDICATED C I r I BUTTERFLY VALVE f1J WATER HAMMER -SCW- SOFT WATER - H - HYDROGEN oD WATER CLOSET 0 COUNTERTOP + ~ + AIR EXTRACTOR FULL DEPTH OF BRANCH TG -- TRANSFER GRILLE ARRESTOR WITH TANK MOUNTED SINK DUCT, GRILLE OR REGISTER ~ WATER CLOSET bid COUNTERTOP I I SUPPLY OR DISCHARGE AIR DUCT. SOLID SOLENOID VALVE (i) THERMOSTAT -TW- TEMPERED WATER -NO- NITROUS OXIDE 01 CROSS UP OR TOWARDS, DASHED CROSS WITH FLUSH VALVE MOUNTED SINK I J DOWN OR AWAY ~ 2 WAY AUTOMATIC [] WALL HUNG 181 ELECTRIC 1.->' I EXHAUST OR RELIEF AIR DUCT. SOLID CROSS @ HUMIDISTAT - OW - DISTILLED WATER UP OR TOWARDS, DASHED CROSS - DOWN Pro ject Title: CONTROL VALVE LAVATORY WATER COOLER I J OR AWAY ~ 3 WAY AUTOMATIC OCCUPANCY CO COUNTERTOP 1---1 RETURN OR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT. SOLID ~ NEW TO EXISTING RIVERSIDE @ -01- DE-IONIZED WATER ~ SHOWER HEAD CROSS UP OR TOWARDS, DASHED CROSS CONTROL VALVE SENSOR MOUNTED LAVATORY DOWN OR AWAY CONNECTION POINT aJ RELIEF OR aFMCO FLOOR MOUNTED -DIC _ DE-IONIZED WATER 4J URINAL WITH I8l JANITOR SINK ~ DUCT PRESSURE CLASS. DESIGNATION IN C!) TERMINAL AIR BOX SAFElY VALVE CLEANOUT (FMCO) CIRCULATING FLUSH VALVE INCHES OF W.G. NUMBER FESTIV AL Jj PRESSURE GAS (NATURAL 0 ----fJ <W> POINT OF CHANGE IN DUCT CONSTRUCTION REDUCING VALVE ---jlco CLEANOUT (CO) - GAS - OR MANUFACTURED) FLOOR DRAIN WALL HYDRANT (BY STATIC PRESSURE CLASS OR OPE~r~NG ( 15000 ) EQUIPMENT NUMBER PRESSURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACN - N ~ VACUUM PIPE -LP- L1QUIFIED ((1 I D> "N" SUPERSCRIPT INDICATES NEGATIVE @ - STAGE CHECK VALVE CLEANOUT PETROLEUM ",1) ROOF DRAIN HOSE BIBB PRESSURE DUCT REFERENCED NOTE ~ CONTROL DAMPER SUPPLY, & INDICATES CHANGE IMPROVEMENTS GAS COCK VALVE --t€>-t- WALL GAS OUTLET d f + RETURN, EXHAUST, OR OUTSIDE TO DRAWING '---I- AIR AS INDICATED ~ BACKFLOW @ BENCHMARK AIR PREVENTER READING POINT , Own er: ~ '_0. i! - ----'- -- -- - GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES: GENERAL HVAC NOTES: _u !-~-i ~ B B ~= f',) 1. VERIFY EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE 1. ALL DUCTWORK IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. DUCT RISES AND Project No.: 200640.00 ,.~ 0 START OF CONSTRUCTION. DROPS ARE NOT SHOWN" PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED TO MEET C~I SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER Drawn by: D.GREEN 2. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF ALL TRADES. EXACT LOCATION OF THE DUCTWORK MAY VAAY ACCORDING Checked by: V.AMOROSO EQUIPMENT. TO THE COORDINATED SPACE REQUIREMENTS. EACH TRADE SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. Issue: 3. PIPING IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. ROUTE PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR CLEARANCE WITH STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS. COORDINATE WITH OTHER 2. DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTER LOCATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED Dote Description TRADES AS REQUIRED. WITH LOCATIONS OF LIGHTS, EXIT LIGHTS, ETC. DIFFUSERS WITH NO SHADING INDICATING THROW SHALL BE 4-WAY. 1-10-07 BID DOCUMENTS 4. ROUGH-IN AND CONNECT ALL PLUMBING REQUIRED TO EQUIPMENT 3. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DTHERS. 4. DIFFUSER, GRILLE AND REGISTER NOMENCLATURE SHALL BE 5. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AT 1/4" PER FT. MINIMUM />oS FOLLOWS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ~ INDICATES CONNECT NEW TO EXISTING. CDA - TYPE 6. 524 - 5" ROUND NECK, 24" SQUARE MODULE - 100 - CFM - 5. PROVIDE RIGID METAL DUCT, WITH NO EXCEPTION, WHERE FIRE WALLS Note: AND/OR SMOKE WALLS ARE PENETRATED. FIElD VERIFY AU. DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES. 6. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ALL RETURN, 00 NOT SCALE ORA\lINGS. CONSULT SHOP ORA\lINGS SUPPLY, AND EXHAUST BRANCH DUCTS. AND OTHER APPROPRIATE ORA\lINGS. LAY OUT AND COOROlNATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION fOR ACCURACY AND NON-INTERFERENCE \liTH OTHER 7. ALL DUCTWORK NOT OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 1/2" PRESSURE lRAllES. READ SPECIFICATIONS. 8. ~ INDICATES CONNECT NEW TO EXISTING. @COPYRIOHT UNAUTHORIZED COPI1NG, OIsa.OSURE OR CONSTRUCTION \lITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION ey NEuMANN MONSON, P.C. IS PROHIIllTED. Sheet Title: A A MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIA TIONS AND NOTES Sheet Number: MO I I I I 1 2 .3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS . A. P,OFESSIONAl CORPORA-ION i I 2 CW CURB VflLVE AND ,--r ;/ BOX, BOX SHALL BE ______ / INSTAlLED WITH COVER / ; . ~ I flUSH TO GRADE LEVEL -* NOTE: AlL WATER PIPING / / 111 E. CO LL E \J EST, IOWA CITY, I A 52240 . I / SHALL BE SLOPED BACK : / II I \ TO DRAIN PIT // ;' /" / / 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX D I / ~c I / / 2. CN ON TO BELOW D . t'f..-" ~~~ / / FlR., SEE PLAN 1.13 W' ",:,~ " J // II /7 '1 R,,-;,Jf.w / FILL flOOR DRAIN :' / Consultants: I / j</ \ ;q,~~ /" ,"~ - ( ~A & J A . t PC i I / / f' / ~. ~ -----=== ssocla as . . / ;' / / \ / ~- ~,,-)' ----==-~= ~ MechanicaVElectrical Engineers / / i / ./ , ~ :J In 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suite B I ,/ ! ( / : . -R! North Uberty, IA 52317 . I/,/ ~ Ie: (319) 626-4719 voice I / I TRENCH BACKFILL AND, (319) 626-4941 fax ; / / \ -. PATCH SURFACE TO MATCH , ' ajpcosouthslopenet / / EXIST ADJACENT GRADE AS _---o--r . , FILL flOOR DRAIN I / / \ REQUIRED TO INSTAlL ~- \ \ \ \ \ ! / TRAP WITH I / PIPING ---\"''''\ \ \ ',,- \ ! ! -'--~ /: MINERAlL OIL II ?\! / r rD-~L~L----~ ! / I III I ~~---c, II q / I ""1''''''' I '" \ \/J-~~ A ' \ ,/ \ I I ~\ ~ "'"\ " //.P / / 11:f1(,Y' '\ ~f-.~ 0/ Ii) ~~ /y ,,//\:\ \ ~ FILL FLOOR DRAIN , /'/ /' >>\1 . ~ \ \ ,v. \/ TRAP WITH / ! 1 ("! /:1 ';: 1/ I / ", / _ \ ~ \ "~ BACKFILL AS REQUIRED -/ \ '\ )// MINERAlL OIL ;~"'> f"''''_ ,',' 1 I II' /." I;{', / -~ ) TO COORDINATE WITH j(', \',. " "i' '--.,,' f . wi I /./' // '\. '\ ,\/ / 8 i l - - " \, /. I I I / \P 0) \ INSTALLATION OF NEW /Z ",', ./ / ' 1 I ' =',' '~\ / ,1' ~: SIDEWflLK /'" ~ ""./ /~ ----- Jil, I '\," I! \- f"r, ,>- ~ , ! 1 15521 , .. i Ii ,'!!~, I 4'-0" BELOW ./ "")./ // { / ! (TYP. 2) 1 ; '[V1,/,4/1\\' ! b~ i GRADE, MINIMUM /~,.. '" 'v .//' ''-.'~II / -- 'Ii 1'- ! " 1-' / ~ / ' , , /i))jf,', ~'~' ! ~ ,/ .,/ , I " -------0Y./ I \ Z ; . / / ' ~ ,/" I' I r . . 1 ': I \ ~ iI ! \ / ,/ / / 1. c:tI AND 2" V 1 ~\ /~ / ! \ \ /IA/ J~"';( ~I // ",',:: ON TO UR, TYP l ,/"~ ! \ .. I { / ~ 'y / 1 ' c 1 ,/ ---. '~/I\:/' r \ /~ / / 1. CW TO / / C ~ / 0 --- '- ~ t / . , ' ---/;.;' ! 1 '- \ l / we TYP ! / 1 \ I \./ / ,.\" ~ (:::::;/ ~/' I" " ;/ 15572, ',!..,. FILL flOOR DRAIN ! \9 .. I j I, TRAP WITH , I / II! ! MINERAlL OIL I' \. \ II I 1 , ,@) \ \ 2" CW j~ / / / 1 (~ \ \- 1::)/ / M2 MECHANICALPLAN ,/1 RProJI.eVct TEitle:RSIDE "9. \ \ ,! ,/ 1/40 = 11-0" ~ ' " , \, #' ! \\ # i ! Op,~ 1 \ \!~ ! CUT REMOVE AND PATCH FESTIVAL \ 2. CW , SEE PLAN ~'9o L 1/~ / SIDEwALK TO' MATCH 1.13 THIS SHEET FOR . J J EXISTING ADJACENT \ CONTINUATION ~o ~/ I~ ! SIDEWALK SURFACE AS STAGE .~ ge----... / II----.. I I REQUIRED TO INSTAlL A (; .\( 1/ I PIPING " ,\ , 9., L f .(" V' Ip.!---------i ' IMPROVEMENTS \ @i"'." ,,) {,-<!,@ ,,)'.} I / 3. W, SEE PLAN M3@w ".{~" ,,0 \ /'-. Y I~" I THIS SHEET \ .{' " ,\ \ r /'-. ./ I i \ @',).... ..-\' \').il>; ",...-( Y: j \ ~\_~# 'v !i I ' @"A,5t,' ,,/ ['. \. 'M'" "~; I, , ~ ' BACKFILL AS REQUIRED :', i TO COORDINATE WITH I ' _ II.. INSTALlATION OF NEW / / Owner: U , / ~"-.,. -~, / / BELOW '\ 1 / / -- - -1'1 II I , ' GRADE I, / / --_', ] I -- ;' .: EXISTING i / . MANHOLE, VERIFY / / 2 W UP /~ " B EXACT LOCATION / / (EWe) / :~~ B ~c'; f'.l C T R"..O E / ! /~~~----.",_ Project No.: 200640.00:;;: c' U, [.M V , AND PATCH .. I / ' '-- ----.~ _, (7', SIDEWALK TO MATCH EXISTING MI'. '--":"~!r--.. Drown by. D. 6REEN ADJACENT SIDEWALK SURFACE AS 1 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN to;,. 2 c:tI UP, SEE PLAN '--4 i Checked by. Y. AMOROSO REQUIRED TO INSTAlL PIPING l' = 30'-0" 1.12 THIS SHEET, .' f ~~~ 1-1/2. V ! i VALVE ACCESS ,', Dote Description PIT, SEE DETAIL SHEET 1.13 1-10-07 BID DOCUMENTS f 2. W UP ! (FD) i PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 2.WUP // (FD) / / !} 3.WUP // WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR, , WATER CLOSETS (FLUSH VALVE)t, <- /----.----. (UR~ TYP) // / Note: (15202) J.R. SMITH HYDROTROL SERIES 5010, ~TAIN:.ESS STEEL. INSTALL IN AN (15533) KOHLER 'HIGHCLlFF' K-4368, VITREOUS CHINA, FLOOR MOUNTED, ELONGATED i"~\ 0 !".7 ./~ / / UPRIGHT POSITION. FIXTURE UNIT RATING. 12 32. BOWL SIPHON JET RI" 18" ABOVE FLOOR FOR WHEELCHAIR USE K-4670-SC ! : ,i ~ /0 f : I! FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS ANa CLEARANCES. . . M. " ,'__~.: i " I i / DO NOT SCALE DRAWNGS. CONSULT SHOP DRAWINGS WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT WITH SELF-SUSTAINING CHECK HINGE. SLOAN OPTIMA .' ' "'-' i" i i / :' ANa OTHER APPROf'RlATE ORAIIlNGS. LAY OUT ANa (15203) J.R. SMITH 'HYDROTROL' SERIES 5020, STAINLESS STEEL. INSTALL IN AN 8111 BAlTERY OPERATED FLUSH VALVE, ANGLE STOP, VACUUM BREAKER AND ' . (----., ,," , / / ~~~1l'A~AN~ON~,~rJ~~~~ONOTHER UPRIGHT POSITION. FIXTURE UNIT RATING: 33-60, DIVERTER VALVE. (ADA COMPLIANT) 1-1/2. V ~,~kV A~PWC " ~'" / ,:' TRADES. READ SPEaFlCA11ONs. LAVATORIES UP ,~~j ! @COF>YRIGHT (15535) KOHLER "WELLCOMME" K-4350, VITREOUS CHINA, FLOOR MOUNTED, ELONGATED 'i, 1 1/2. V i / UNAUTHORIZED CXlPYlNG. Olsa.OSIJRE Cll CONSTRUC11ON (15451) KOHLER 'CHESAPEAKE' K-1729, 20" X 18", VITREOUS CHINA, WALL HUNG. BOWL, SIPHON JET, K-4670-SC WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT WITH UP :' ! WITHOUT WRITTEN PERIotISSlON BY NEUMANN MONSON, P.c. SLOAN EBF-187 BAlTERY OPERATED FAUCET, 4. CENTERS, OPEN GRID SELF-SUSTAINING CHECK HINGE. SLOAN OPTIMA 8111 BAlTERY OPERATED , f IS PROHIBITED. STRAINER DRAIN, CHROME FINISH, VANDAL RESISTANT SPRAY HEAD, BELOW SINK FLUSH VALVE, ANGLE STOP, VACUUM BREAKER. / / MOUNTED MIXING V/>J...VE AND ELECTRIC MODULE. SUPPLIES WITH WHEEL HANDLE 1 1/2. V <~ 2. W Up,i / Sheet Title: ANGLE STOPS. FLOOR MOUNTED CARRIER WITH CONCEALED ARMS, ADJ. C.P. UP "\ (FD) / i! CAST BRASS TRAP WjC.O., ADA COMPLIANT. PROVIDE TRUEBRO LAV SHIELD ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS \ : f MECHANICAL UNDERSINK PROTECTIVE COVER. ; ! A (15543) HALSEY TAYLOR 'BARRIER-FREE' BI-LEVEL MODEL OVL-II, ADA COMPLlANT,./ / / A PLANS URINALS STAINLESS STEEL BOWLS, STAINLESS STEEL CABINET, FRONT PUSH BUlTONS, , 8.3 GPH OF 50 DEGREE F WATER, 120V, 1 PHASE, 60 Hz. CHICAGO 45-LK (15521) KOHLER 'STANWELL' K-4972-T, VITREOUS CHINA, WALL HUNG, WASHOUT LOOSE KEY STRAIGHTWAY STOP. ADJ. CAST BRASS TRAP wjC.O. ACTION. SLOAN OPTIMA 8180-1.0 BAlTERY OPERATED FLUSH VALVE WITH ANGLE STOP AND VACUUM BREAKER. (ADA COMPLIANT - MOUNT AT />DA SPECIFIED HIEGHT). SEE MECHANICAL SITE FLOOR DRAINS PLAN THIS SHEET FOR CONTINUATION WALL HYDRANTS (15572) J.R. SMITH 2010-A, 5" DIAMETER, DUCO CAST IRON BODY, NICKEL BRONZE (15430) WOODFORD B65 CONCEALED BOX SELF DRAINING W/>J...L HYDRANT WITH ANTI STRAINER HEAD, NICKEL BRONZE GRATE, FLASHING COLLAR, ADJUSTABLE CAST SIPHON VACUUM BREAKER, FREEZELESS, AUTOMATIC DRAINING, LOOSE KEY BRASS TRAP Sheet Number: OPERATION, KEY FURNISHED WITH HYDRANT. M 3 UNDERFLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN 1/4' = 1'-0" M1 I 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 I I I I NEUMANN MONSON ~TS~~,..A THE COVER SHALl.HAVE /j~,~ ARC HIT E C T S '" ~ THE WORD "WATER CONCRffi COUAR ,I . ~<"" '" CAST IN THE METAL '! / '--;::::-:::::---, '" / GRAVI1Y REUEf VENTIlATOR //1/ '~~t"? Pc P < 0 F E S S ION Pc l COR P 0 R A. ~ ION ~~l~AlER 0 ~~ //:::c:!:....,,\ 111 E COLLEGE ST, IOWA CITY, IA 52240 D V///////////////// / / \, 319-338-7878 319-338-7879 FAX ~ { / . 1 PRESSOOE illIPERAlURE ~ ~ PREFABRICATED ROOF / / / / / / / / h ! / /"'-';'~ i D RElJEF VN..'tf: 'f! . ~ CURB BY UNIT 0/'// / / / / // ~ FlASHING FURNISHED /, / ~ '<~"",i ',' " i"-.. ---""...-1 PLAN MANUFACTURER / BY GENERAl. CONTRACTOR / / ~~ '''-.. :"~~<"""" . ;-2"~" Consultants: ..::;;;Lr ROORNG I / ~~~~~,;. \~:J ~~ / ~,,,--,~ <) COLlAR t f -r f ,v" '/'1- / / 12xl0 J ~-!i/'-'>'~ ~ ,;".: Mechanical/Electrical Engi~eers ~ :/ . . .' > -7 - > I I 335 '~'i ./ I I I"~, '~ ~ I I (I) 365 Beaver Kreek Centre SUite B - ElECTRIC WAlER . . ~'. .... I' < , ' ,'~ 6" BELOW '''-..,__ ,.' / II' ~ '-s, / . . ~ North Ubmy, IA 52317 TO 1l0lRECT ORAtl - ~ "' "... HEAlER ~.. ~ ". . ~ ..~> <0 _ _ _ l ./,' ! ":::::,. CLNG. I", i~i /,'l~ ------~.:::..'J7 / i ,-0: (319) 626-4719 voice AT YO? SINK . -' .! ./ ;::; ~ ... ,-'__ / I i, f .,~, '" ',I i ,I (319) 626-4941 fax AUTOMATIC ./ / ! / ~ . <t - '14'" , ,..!.../.j / J "f /' / / ajpcosouthslopenet CDN1RlX. Pilla ~ BACKDRAfT DAMPER .......-' / / / ~ /~, ~ ~~i.,~ r~;) /I~,,,;/ / i" ~ ~ POINT Of CONNECTION ^ '-- DUCT THRU ROOF ,/ i~ /& /2f/ \ ''''''''- /' ~~~,'i'/~, ' , ER-1 / i FOR ElECTRIC POVrER V! / ~~. / ,,/ -0<-/ "'<~. ) <;.JI..,--::.~ 12xl0 .' ! ) / ; (/r /----....\ ~.:..7/' 't .,-. Ii 335 . ' " / --.......... /,4 ; "- / ~'7..j/ -'~',,- ~ . ! CAST IRON ....... / / -... ~~~-1,/ ..........-; /l'~/ 6 BELOW ,/ - ./ ' , "'- ' . . "'"'" CLNG., , ,/ VALVE BOX ~ / / _7) '''',,// // ,:-"',~ 12xl0 / ,/ - I GRAVITY RELIEF VENTILATOR DETAIL // ~ (~''''-// ,',',~//;)' 24xl0 /i;, ~ DRAIN VN..'tf: ~ \ SCALE NO SCALE ' i " ""'- '----~,'! I /'~~ " . <'" " : / / ", '''''-~- ,I : 4J, !,'.'~ EF 1 "":::,.. , / ' .... '- J / \./ / .' ,.. '.:.", - oc:::::::- j......, .. ,/ VALVE D - i ; -y-~' , , , " (j) i ---- "-.. ! ,. " ~;:::::; ...---........ .. /:.;' '\ / .':' ,. .' , -/! , ',' ; Ukf;J7' {'~, FLEX ~ ."!. ~,," , / / ."".......c;- \" Ii,.!.:. . ... , " I ! / ~'-,'>- _ "'-,;!' i ',>i DUCT /0 : i " / / ,/' ''''' ~-----,Y ,/ ... ,... "-S--' lYP . ;/ """'- ,/./ ./ . / i / ~ ! I ;' /"':.,,0::..... . ,1 I~,/ .1 /, ",- ~ 'I ). "~:::::"'" ......... '. f , ,'-"';; "'-":;,.... !, .'! ........... ......... I ,. / / J"'~ ~"'i /.' ......";:"'. SA,-1 ~ ,/ / SECTION '-. r~', / I ~~., '---... ''''''- !, , ~~ "-~ 7' ..--.// // ~\ ) ~~~, ~--......../- 1/ EXHAUST FAN OPERATION ~ J'/"" i/i I'~'''';' ',_./ -\ GEIH ON ROOF ,/ / ELECTRIC WATER HEATER DETAIL EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE ENERGIZED ~~~ '~'::i/,I" _i/';; <,,'-,.\lEVEL, ABOVE ,/,/ , WHEN LIGHTS ARE ENERGIZED. ~,_, ""~ (i / \ ""/1' _12x12 EA "'-'C":; / / C \ SCALE: NO SCALE WATER VALVE ND BOX DE ~ ----Jj --' //-l UP TO ~ / / , I. A TAl L KEYED SWITCH FOR LIGHTS PROVIDED ~ //J~---) GEH-l \\ / /i C SCALE. NONE CSD-l BY DIVISION 16 CONTRACTOR. SEE ;/ II ~,~ ~ \ / / DIVISION 16 PLANS // ./ ~ ~'''' .;'-", i / / C____-/// ~,.::~~~/t -~<>~. ...-/ /' -'-'--f~ / / '--...,<::::--, .' /' Project Title: '-, ......... -........... ; CONTROL T M 1 M~C,H"ANICALPLAN -~~'~,j' RIVERSIDE PANEL r VENT ' 1/4 - 1 -0 GAS TIGHT : /WATER SUPPLY TO FESTIVAL COVER I PUMPED PRECAST BUILDING - "\: ~~~Y CONCRETE WALL ~ - ST AGE , I FLOOR, ~ ,. IN~'~"" ;@"......:.... ; ~' ~~~.. ~~~~ GRAVITY EXHAUST HOOD SCHEDULE IMPROVEMENTS I- ~ - >. ~ " ~,~ _ 4'-0. MIN STATIC THROAT HOOD ~ I-- ' I-- ~ ~ I, 30 DIA ~'-0 plJ\N PRESSURE SIZE SIZE , ~ '7 ~ HIGH LIQUID ~ ' , ~ BALL VALVE MARK CFM (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) MANUFACTURER REMARKS ~ GATE VALVE --~~ -{"""l ~ 8 AlARM FLOAT GRAVllY N.C. BAL~~ r.....~./ SHUT-OFF, GEH-1 670 0.09 1M2 24 DIA GREENHECK GRS 'b (TYP.) -7 '-:: .... " SANITARY - VALVE DRAIN ~ ........ u.... ,/ ~ TYP Owner: ::_, I -PUMP OFF VALVE ~ ~ n n~ ~~ II ....., CHECK VALVE ' .J."" -Q.J. - CONTROL FLOAT SEWER ~ I ~ II II K<< I,. GEH-l SHAll. BE PROVlOED WITH FACTORY FINISH IN COLOR SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S '-,-' --- (lYP.) '-- 6" MIN.<<~ [Jmrnr ~' STANDARD COLORS ", ~',. ..... PUMP 'ON' CRUSHED STONE ~ "'~ ~~ ~:::: ",,-j B CONTROL FLOAT '~ ~~ ~ WATER SERVICE B .3> a=; ~~%%~~~-0~~; FROM SITE DIFFUSER AND REGISTER SCHEDULE Project No.: 200640.00 , , <<~'<<\.'<<,<.,,<.,,<.,,<,,,( Drown by: D. 6REEN I ~ REFER TO PlANS FOR plJ\N MANUFACTURER, MODEL - FINISH MOUNTING (0) REMARKS Checked by: V. AMOROSO CONTINUATION OF PIPES MARK NUMBER ANO lYPE BASIN AND ALSO SIZES OF PIPES. ER-l TITUS MODEl. 355RL, WHITE WALl BLADES SHALL BE Issue: 35 DEG. DEFLECTION HORIZONTAL ON All ....---....... DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR DETAIL ,r'\, WATER DRAIN ACCESS PIT DETAIL GRILLES Dote Description ( \ \ ) SCALE: NO SCALE HO-07 BID DOCUMENTS \ ISCAI C. NO SCALE PSD 19A '- (.)COORDINATE THE lYPE OF MOUNTING OF GRILLES AND REGISTERS WITH THE '\.. ./ nu:;. - ARCHITECTURAL CONDITIONS. --- - VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE EXPANSION TANK SCHEDULE EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE - mIUPMENT SPEC. TYPE STATIC MINIMUM RATIO OF WEIGHT OF plJ\N LENGTH X DIA. CAPACIlY Note: (BASE/ISOLATION) DEFLECTION INERTIA BLOCK TO TOTAL MARK LOCATION SYSTEM (INCHES) (GAL) REMARKS MOTOR CINCHES) WEIGHT OF SUPPORTED LOAD . STATIC OUTLET REID \ffiJFY AU. OIMENSlONS ANO CLEARANCES. P' ... PRESSURE VELOCllY NO OF / 00 NOT SCALE DRAWNGS. CONSULT SHOP DRA\IINGS AMTROL u-.. . MANUFACTURER ANO OTHER APPROPRlA TE ORAWNGS. LAY OUT ANO ET -1 JANITORS CLOSET HOT WATER, WH-l 10.4" X 10.' 2.1 MODEL ST -5-C MARK CFM (INCHES) (FPM) RPM HP VOLTS PH. SPEEDS MOUNTING lYPE OF UNIT ROAARKS COOROINATE AU. WalK PRIOR TO INSTAU.ATlON EF -1 (NOND/TYPE 4 10 ___ ROOM 115 POTABLE WATER USE FOR ACCURACY ANO NON-INTERFERENCE \11TH OTHER , lRAllES. READ SPEQRCA TlONS. EF-l 670 0.5 --- 855 1/6 120 1 1 SUSPENDED COOK , @COPYRIGHT , UNAUTHORIZED CllP'tING, OlSCLOSURE OR CONSlRUCTlON \IITHOUT \llIITTEN PERNISSlON BY NEUMANN MONSON, P.C. IS PROHleITED. (1) FILL PRESSURE= 12 PSIG / RELIEF PRESSURE= 30 PSIG Sheet Title: A SOUND ATTENUATOR SCHEDULE SEWAGE EJECTOR SCHEDULE WATER HEATER SCHEDULE A MECHANICAL DYNAMIC INSERTION LOSS IN DECIBELS ' PLAN CAPACI1Y EWT LWT ELECTRICAL PLANS PRESSURE DIAMETER PLAN MOTOR MARK (GALLONS) (F) (F) MOUNTING MANUFACTURER REMARKS plJ\N DROP LENGTH WIDTH/HEIGHT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GPM FT HEAD MANUFACTURER BASIN REMARKS VOLT PH AMPS MARK CFM (IN. WATER) SERVES (INCHES) (INCHES) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 7000 8000 MARK . HP VOLTS PH. . SA-I 670 0.01 EF-l 48 25.25 7 10 15 25 27 23 19 18 SE-1 35 25 6/10 120 1 HYDROMATIC SK60 30"(Il X 48" DEEP (1) WH-1 19 40 120 120 1 13 FLOOR LOCHIVAR SOUND ATTENUATOR REQUIRED ON INLET AND OUTLET OF EF-l WH-1 SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT WH-1 SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MOUNTING SHELF FROM UNIT MANUFACTURER Sheet Number: (1) SE-l SHALL BE DUPLEX SYSTEMS. EACH SYSTEM SHALL HAVE lWO PUMPS, EACH PUMP SIZED AT HORSEPOWER SHOWN IN M SCHEDULE. EACH SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DUPLEX CONTROL AND AlARM PANEL. 2 I I I I 1 2 3-- 4 5 1 2 3 4 ~ 5 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS '> //~;;>~ NEUMANN MONSON (/ ./ .", ',,- ..If' /// '" ARC H I '\. , ..?" ./ / '\. ~ .~. / / ' o "''''''' """"'" ,,// / / " TEe T S "-'" //' i .I " ~'l Ii'\. o-@ POLE MOUNTEO UGHT FIXTURE ~ /'~/ "',,- ", A PRO F : 5 S ION i'. 1 COR P 0 RAT ION D I '" ,,'; , o I FLUORESCENT FIXTURE - SURFACE MOUNTEO ,,,, ~ / / ""-, -A ' ~ ~ II' '" 1ll E, COLLEGE ST IOWA CITY, IA 52240 ->d DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ~, ~ "- ~I '."'" -'G' '" 00,,", "",.'^", I, ~ ",,, 319,3 ' 8 7 ~ WP = WEATHERPROOF ! I " D ,~ - 878 319-338-7879 FAX I I ' f':Z:\ ' ! I ' \V MOTOR CONNECTION I I I ' ", i'" ~ ; Iii <Sl EQUIPMENT TERMINAL POINT CONNECTION / II 'I \ '- Consultants: II II '---~'~ ", ; i ,I '--- '''-, ~ . $ ,_ """ ~ ""''' ! I ! i ~, A & J Ass"'!,.!.. P,C, i ! I ~'--- '...., Mecharical/Electrical Engineers $ , '" "''''''' """" ""-' "'"' """'" I I , I " ~ " · 3~""'''' """ ... , ;' / I I '---... ~ ',,- it/! North Liberty, IA 52317 / ; 17">1 ii' '. / (319) 6264719 voice _ '''"'" ,."" ""''''''''' ; ,~ ' , " " , ..) 62" 'n'l f SURFACE MOUNTED ! ~) i '" "" /' / . 1I'"t'"' ax , , ' ~ ' 'v / aJllCesoothslopllJlel i "1 I .,- " @ ""'""" """''''' "'" ' ! I '" V \ I ,," / / l i I I \ 1 " '" "'\, /F / , \ I 1'1 .... ", ,/ /~ . : I ~-, "" '-'( " ..' _ _ _ _ _ UNDERGROUND CONDUIT i \ I; 'i 1 " \ '){ // ~ I \,' i 'I \ \ / ',~/ / lEI- TIME SWITCH \ \ I ' i ,'\ j", /'" /' / ; \ I ; i I / ""/ / \ \. ! I,' \ i---/ ''\.//' /" I " " I \ ~-, ',/ / i 'I r I I ~, / \ \ Iii ! I' \\\ '.- ~HA '.,/. // ; i, :' , \ \. "-./ i ill i II:~ \ _---1 "v/./ , \, L !' ' ' ,'\ ' ,-," \ \1 ~~' ~ ,',' \ \ I \t '\." -,/" ,/" ,\' I: \ '. ,~ J Y ./ ' I I A ~: \ \ i \ \/ / '\ (/ "-....--_-;' \\ \ .____ ' j'v' // I ' ' ---: '.... ' / I \ {J / . <> \ \ < /, \ '--y/ // i I ~!;' <"')\, \ HA~, '--." J '-"--./ ,/ 1 I . ' \ ' ...', / ,/ ./ ' , I ' \ ' \ - '" " ' I ' ' /\ ' "- ,/ \ i \ ''(' ,/ ,( I I ! ~,..l, \ ,. , ." c \ \ ,V\ \- ~ -~;;..:... '\'.,(/ /"/, /----~ , \ . \ . \ ,-'/ / i \ ~/ ,iV'\ \ '/ ,,/ I , ' \ \ " / I I )\ )/HA \ '. ,! , \ ~./'~', v' I \ \ , 1 '\..,' , ~ ; .- \,' / \ , , ,/ ,/ ,/ \, \ I I /",/'" \\ C\ C , I -< \,/ \ \ v . /, J \ . i j <> ~,/ "v_/ '" \ \\ , I --~' l I --<:, \/ \ . I f 1/( :-',,,.,/ \ \ I I 1'-/ "\., \ ' ii' Y o(\'i- \ \ , , '1' / \ ; J A' ",,/ \ \ II ;' ) HA.-( i>/' \ I ' I /~' )/ \ \ Project Title: , , " " \ \ / ! .....'"'-....... '. \ RIVE , ,,~"v \' II / / ~"'>~,<'/' /~') \ \ RSIDE ;/ . i ,'! 'y/ / \ ' 'I /</~-~' , ~:(>';;{ / \ \ FESTIVAL / '/' 1/, v' / \ , ..' ''-, ,/' // /" \ \ ~ l'h /(y / / \\ 'I I /i v HA ./,/ \./ / / / \ \ STAGE ,! ' " 1/ " . , ! I; / /~' /~"" \ \ II / / /~/ "=~=----/~ rg~~YO-" ">' IMPROVEMENTS II! I ,/ ~/( , ':Y / I I!\....- /~/\ V HA ,/ II ! HA,'1 \ ,,/ / ' I / DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR _~-~\ --;'~IY-Y c::, If CONTROL OF POLE LIGHT HA '" - \ , I ,; RXTURES _ SEE W --- 'lQ': /',-1": "l-'/ 0 ' ,',- - 1'1 B 1 I 0 /" cb : ,L;~'i ' ,,-' HA ~", " - II \ .i-. 3 ~ ~-' --- ---'- ,", I \;' I '\,,~~------' --- " " I ' '~/' ". '" _- .' -- --.- :i> i~ " ' ~ ' ~ ~ .......... _~__ 8 II ' / <"\ I ';. , ::', -- P,ojoct No" 2006<0,00 . I ," '. ,,. Dm~ b, U;OOlEY , I ~____/-,,;'; "" :' ChKk.d b, ~ .IRGA , ~-- .:.. . .:' ....- """"'..._ ....: . . Issue' - I // ............... :;'.. ' ..-....- . /" am: PUIN'r---- . .. MOIJNO - 1 ,// .......- .,,:.. '.' .......- I I " ' ." ,::;;::,~ ::' " ' Dot. D""."M " ' /' T ',. ',.. .... .' .. .. , > I //' ,. '/ :-:~:.'>:. ..: >/'.X'O'''''''' . ,. ",- .'.:" 1-10-07 SID DOCUMENTS \ ' ., .,:,,'r.:", ".. IlIlO 24' KIN. . '.' .:': .... 'o" I I / ; '0," - ':,,, -', ' , I' / '. ,]" " b \ I / --V I"~': ':<" ': , ~\ \., 2-#8 // ELEVATION I \\\ \ , 1-#8/GND I \ \ ' 1" I?VC \! -,,__ S I \ \ I 'rEO""' BO - 1'IPlCAL FOR SITE UGHllNG ----- Not., I \ \ I / .~.~~- ~~~_.~._~ J \ \\ \ 1 t~' / !! BURIED UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE P\IC ~oNg~SCAU: ORAOING$, CONSULT SHOP ORAWlNGS I \, !t I SCHEDULE 80, SIZE I>S CAUED FOR COORDlNAER APPROPRIATE llRAWlNGS. LAY OUT ANO \ ~' ' .~__m~~~ I \ ---.! ! ~~-~._~- J \ \ \J 1 ________/ / ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN NORTH BACKFILL PER SPECIFICATIONS READ SPEClRCATIONS. , \ \/\ f~! ... ffi SECTION @COPYRIGHT ~ ' \ " \ I~;! SCAlE; 1 - 3D ~~~~--~~~ p ~ Ii 'illlHOUT l\RITTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MONSON P C A I II C'--_J . .-.~ ' " ~ge _______, \ ~ ';h' f II DETAIL-GRADE LEVEL LIGHT POLE BASE . , /-;\;,/~ ""L HA " , "". "'" CD BURIED CONDUIT Sh..t TIll, \/ /"",\ \ 1 ~ /, I El '~~'Y.A' : ""'7;''"' I~J I ""."'" A ELECTRICAL \ ,.> '('~_~ I y;><-"I~~-i I SITE PLAN ~\'\~/~\>:'1. ~A)/ :,1 I I "'~'!.~'/ G' I \ 0'?^'. ~ r \ " ! I I ': ~~~~,"~,\,\ II Ii \ .\~'. II 1 "" '...... ~ ,~ 't /~':/ ' SEE FLOO~,I \ " ...... \ / ;/ ON SHEET E2' \ ", v' ~ ~ " ' ' 'h..t N"mb~ 1 ' " 2 - 3 E1 4 5 12345 I I l' I NEUMANN MONSON LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ,~s, ARC HIT E C T S ~ ~J S - SI.RF ACE SP - SUSPENDED R-RECESSED -... PROFeSSIONAL CORPORATION \I - \lALL MIl~TED , NOTE. TtE CONTRACTOR SHALL CDORDINA TE PROPER FIXTURE MIlUNTING TRIM TYPES \11TH ARCHITECTURAL 111 E C 0 LL E G EST IOWA C I T Y I A 5 2 2 4 0 DRA\lINGS AND CEILING SPECITICA TIrtlS ~ ,-., , . , ' ' , lV : ,--. j :]! \.. r" ' '-- TYPE LAMPS NANLf' ACTURER AND TYPE MTG. VOLT REMARKS I 'A-9 : ' A-9l A-~ , i iA,o A,b i A,d, . 3'9,338,7878 319-338-7879 FAX D .. ",./rQ NEW STAR S 120 2 WlP, 48" lENGTH, POlYCo\RBllNAlE 1lNS, 1:0 I 0 i 0 D ,n 2-,,,,,(.u 51C-142 ELECTRONIC B.\llAST : i · i i I Lu ! 1, _ DAY -1lRI1E 48. STRIP AXTURE, ELECTRONIC ,0' ,/"'\ -- .<rl Fa 2 F32/f8 T-232 S 120 B.\llAST \,S' ~: <1:-/ -~ Consultants: I ~trl. I^ & J Associates P.C Mecharical/Electrical Engineers HOOW NEW STAR 2 RECESSED SQUARE, POlYC.lRBONAlE i, i A-9 '. i i . A-9i i, i A-~" C/) 365 Beaver Kreek Centre Suite B A INC. 85-150 INC. RIO WlS i i A,o ,i I ' A.b i ii' A,q: . ~ North Uberty, IA 52317 ,'\', (~ '0 : ; 0' I 'e0 \'a= (319)62" '719 . 1-7OW ARCHITECTURAl. AREA UGHONG POST TOP, WITH ARM, BlACK ANISH ,,' \.:-/ !, ' : i ! , i , i, ',,-, ..... VOICe HA IIETAl. HAUDE UCS-BEl.-7ll11H208-RAl7021-SPEaAL ARM/ POlE 208 Iii I ! i , I ' (~9) 6264941 lax PR4 4R14-125-RAl.-7021 LL----'--" L....--.-L: ' , I ajpcosouthslopanet ..........: /'-"\ /'''T\ (.:~i}~--- \ ~ ; -'---~---~--TI .; MOT 0 RAN 0 E QUIP MEN T WI R I N G S C H ED U LEv ! I A-9 i I I A-91 I i: A-~ 'Y' , ,A,o " Ab I , '. A,Q _ I: :! I I II !: i i - KEYNOTES, 1:0 WPWP i 011 wpWP q: A = START-STOP PUSH BUTTON ON DOOR D = OFF-AUTO SELECTOR S\lITCH ON DOOR ! i~;~ijlgl:;112 iA';"10~A-4 Ii' B = AUTO-OFF -HAND SELECTOR S\lITCH ON DOOR G = GREEN PILOT LIGHT ON DOOR ' , , . -, 4' _'_I:L~ - '-.1094.' , C = T\lO SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH .HI-OFF -LO. R = RED PILOT LIGHT ON DOOR 0:: -- , ' , T\lO SPEED STARTER FT= CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER ' , ' I i "i _ 1 I: STARTER/DISCONNECT I ! r--... \tVOIV1 E N i ! ITEM X=FURNISHED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ": I FA fA---,' FA t:!' NUMBER S'W FUSE NEMA KEY -, c:::c::J ~ c:::c:::J ~ KYj" DESRICPTlON HP/K'W VOLTS PH. CONDUIT L 'WIRE PANEL/MCC STR DISC AMPS AMPS SIZE NOTES REMARKS '; A-I:, iT, ~-, A-6: ~ AND ! ~ vi ")'~' , ,EF-1 <<1-," -H 1/6 2-#12. 1-#12GND 1 r i ,-... ' [~ ; r '(j)., ----, , 'DRYER@ CD EXHAUST FAN EF-1 HP 120 1 1/2"C. A-1 -- -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO EF-I SE-1- ~: \;' \A,~11 \ G~: "~:i ; ,~/ A-13 @ 13 2-#12 1-1112GND a> -- - (b --- - Ad 2 WATER HEATER WH-1 120 1 " ' A-3 -- -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO VIti-! :- A,-6 CrlM'fli Ii';'; 0' A-9 FlA 1/2 C. E ,""1"1 FBc ~FBc:., "-- -" , 1'10~ . 'I C f3\ SEWAGE EJECTOR SE-1 206/10 2-112, 1-1112GND __ __ __ __ __ __ BRANCH CIRCUIT TO CONTROL ~- ,~-=----_! , \::V" HP 120 1 1/2.C. A-5 PANEl. FROM CONTROL PANEl. TO PUIIP , . 7 ~ .:TlQ!r~C" - R i :;:'1:@: O 40 2-112 1-1112GND E2 -t '-' ",j : . ,I ,~j~~, ~HAND tE\ 4 WATER COOLER EWC . 120 1 . A-7 -- -- -- -- -- -- BRANCH CIRCUIT TO EWe ' " . -" WH 1 1Iio!, DRYER'->lI C FlA 1/2"C. ' I : "'" - : \ C @) # II PANEL A ~' "A ./' "@'''A : ~ '---:- A-15 200 2- 10 1- 10GND p----' r, '" .^ 1-1 r, ~ -F 5 HAND DRYER . 120 1 1/2"' A-13,15 -- ---- -- -- -- BRANCHClRCUITSTOIWlDIlRYERS i,:,i ~ I "E'fA I {} I K1I'. FlA 1 2 C. iil ry6 M~ A-6 Ii d ;------~--1 _ __E , PANEL NO. ' A HAINS 100A MCB-3P-4W Project Title: SERVICE VOLTAGE 120/208 V. 3P. 4W VllTS H[JJNTING SURFACE IVE SID SH[]RT CKT RATING 10.000 A. 1. C. R R E DESCRIPTION IIlEAKER YILT AM'S CKT. illS CKT. \I1.T AM'S BREAKER DESCRIPTION PILE AM' ABC NO. ClIfi III ABC I'lILI AM' ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN FESTIVAL EF 1 1 20 600 1 2 180 1 20 :::@] l/B" = 1'-0" WH 1 1 20 1560 3 4 180 1 20 :::@] f- SE 1 1 20 1200 5 6 900 2 30 SITE UGHTS - STAGE EWC 1 20 480 7 B 900 ELECTRICAL REFERENCED NOTES LIGHTS 1 20 1060 9 10 180 1 20 :::@] IMPROVEMENTS ~ 1 20 180 II 12 180 1 20 :::@] "E'f. TIME SWITCH - 24 HOUR. MECHANICAl. DIAL lYPE, EQUAL TO INTERI.IATlC HAND DRYER 1 20 1500 13 14 1 20 SPACE 'C.Y IT2oo6. HAND DRYER 1 20 1500 15 16 1 20 SPACE SPACE 1 20 17 18 1 20 SPACE @ DISCONNECT SWITCH - 3OA/2P. NF - FOR ON/OFF CONTROL OF SITE UGHTS. C2 '"~, SPACE 1 20 19 16 1 20 SPACE ::', Owner: _ -~~ \-\ ) f'-.) ,-"; B B m Project No.: 200640.00 Drawn by. L. GOOLEY Checked by. J. JJRc.A Issue: Dote Description DISCONNECT 1-10-07 BID DOCUt.lENTS SWITCH 6OA/3P FUSE AT 60 AMPS TIME SWITCH ) ;TAP PANEL 3OA/2P I.WNS NF DISC. SW. 208V-1P-3W FROM PANEL I ,... I I W 1/ - PANEL EXISTING Note: A t.lAlN DISTRIBUTION FIElD 'oERIFY AlL OIMENSlONS AND CLEARANCES. 20BV-1P-3W 00 NOT SCAIL ORA.....NGS, CooSULT SHOP DRA.....NGS TO POLE PANEL ANO OTHER APPROPRIATE llRA.....NGS. LAY OUT AND COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ,UGHTlNG FOR ACCURACY ANO Noo-INTERfERENCE .....TH OTHER TRADES. REAl) SPECIFICATIONS. @COPYRIOHT UNAUTHORIZED COPYING. DISCLOSURE OR CONSTRUCTION .....THOUT 'ORlTTEN PERMISSION BY NEUMANN MooSON, P.C, I 2 POLE LIGHT CONTROL SCHEMATIC . IS PRDtlI~TEO. \ E2 I SCAlE: NONE ~ , Sheet Title: ~=::GND ELECTRICAL A H/2"C. A , UNDERGROUND PLAN EB?! -,MNE POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM I Sheet Number: E2 I I I I 12345 January 31, 2007 Mr. Terry Trueblood Director of Parks and Recreation City of Iowa City 220 South Gilbert St. Iowa City, Iowa 52240 RE: Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 2007 NM 0.5038 Dear Terry: Bids were submitted on Wednesday, January 31, 2007 for the referenced project. The results are listed on the attached Bid Tabulation Form. Each bidder submitted a base bid; the base bid includes all the work shown on the contract documents. Selzer Werderitsch Construction ofIowa City submitted the low base bid of$2ll,200.00. Selzer Werderitsch Construction is a well established contractor with a good reputation. They have worked on projects for the City of Iowa City previously and are a responsible bidder. There were no irregularities during bidding and we understand Selzer Werderitsch Construction is ready to proceed upon receiving a contract and the Notice to Proceed. Therefore, we recommend awarding the contract to Selzer Werderitsch Construction in the total amount of$2ll,200. Respectfully, Neumann Monson Architects Scott Palmberg, AlA Attachments: Bid Tabulation Form ("') C;::;J I ' ' l.L\ ~'- -"" -' r..., \......1 PROJECT: Riverside Festival Stage Improvements LOCATION: Iowa City, IA NM 05.038 Bid Opening Date: Jan. 31, 2007 TIME: 2:00 P.M. BID SECURITY 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% RECEIVED ADDENDA NO.1 BASE BID .J .J .J .J .J .J .J $249,900 $229,825.00 $245,103 $226,000 $225,100 $272,900 $211,200 BID SECURITY 5% 5% 5% 5% RECEIVED ADDENDA NO.1 BASE BID .J .J .J .J $247,330 $221,765 $262,731 $246,200 NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS ESTIMA TE: $227,485.00 'k\{j\ ~)\ 'I COt.l...IJOttA-T'.\iI' ".DC.1SS "'t:;.." n."AN er:'.).I..',.f"f'1c_'j,.,.,. '" \,\\:\ \ '.\:;<" \ '" . /\' ,.\ /,~ ,\ \..) ( \':;' \""'$:" '1 \ \ \"~\ '" ((:') ~.' \... ' ,,' ~~0 .~ u....J Prepared by: Terry Trueblood, Parks & Rec, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5110 RESOLUTION NO. 07-40 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT FOR THE RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT. WHEREAS, Sezler Werderitsch Associates of Iowa City, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $211 ,200.00 for construction of the above-named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1 . The contract for the construction of the above-named project is hereby awarded to Selzer Werderitsch Associates, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. Passed and approved this 6th day of February ,20 07 ~ ~ J. ~. MAYOR '--' - ---- ATTEST: ~~:~-) ~ ~~ CITY ERK Approved by ~ ~. tity At orne s Office ,t." / ()7 It was moved by Vanderhoef and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: Bailey the Resolution be AYES: x x x x x X X NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn parksreclres/riverside improve.doc Printer's Fee $~ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN FED. ID # 42-0330670 I, Diana Becicka, being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): ~IV\U~lA~ 1;J,~7 'J)ll>A1A' ~ ~"~~f-j;~, Legal Clerk Subscribed and sworn to before me this-' 5 ~ A.D. 20 0 q... y~ '~.'. Notary Public -~..--:' r:~\Al~" Ur~DAI(RO~"", "I i Y '~....i',' ~ CommIssIon Numb;3r I ~~.,1.,! I .}i'!ftj.L. My CommlssiOn expires, .".... JanuarY 27, 20CSl _....'... _..d i...-_ .1-.....i:_.. ~ OFFICIAL PUBLICATION SECTION 001113 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS OWNER: CiTY OF iOWA CITY PROJECT: RIVERSIDE FEStiVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS NOTICE TO POTENtiAL BIDDERS; Notice is given hereby that the . owner will receive sealed bids forconslruction of.the above project urrtil2 pm, IQcal Time, on January 31, 2007. The Project is. c:lescribed In general as: a men's and women's restroom with attached operrair' Sheller. arid conct'8te path. The building structure. conSists of a slab on gradE!, CMU walls,' and wood trusses with asphalt $!lingle roofll'lg. 1'he Work includE!s mechanical end eleclriCal. Offers shall be on a stipulated sum baSis for a' General Construction. Contract, including reSpective' mechanical and electrical work; segregated bids-will not be accepted. Bid Security in the amount of five percent of the bid must aocompany bid in accor- .dance with the InslructlOt1s to Bidders. Bids will be ,received at: . CItY Clerks Office', City of Iowa CItY, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa CItY, IOWa 52240. Bids will be opened. andpubUcly read aloud Immediately after the specified ctoslng time. Bids r~ed after that time will not be accepted., All interested par- tias are 11lYiled to att8nd. '. . EXAMlt<iATJON OF PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS: As many as 4 sets of printed PrQ(:urement. . Do~uments ,'may. . be obtained b)' PRI~EBiODERSl#ilyftOm theArchItecl'sofflc8~pondepOSllit'lg the sum of $50.00 (l'efundabIe)fQr ~ set of doCuments. The deposit amOunt will berafunded wilhin ten calendar <!llYl!fol- lowing bid. opening, . provided complete sets of doCuments in satisfactory condi- tion are retumed, postpaid,to: Neumann Monson Architects, 221 E College Stfee!, Suite 303, Iowa. CilSI. ,IA 52240. . .,' Procurement doCumer'lts may be.9Xl1m- Ined OR AE. Plan. .. w.et:>SIte: www.aeplaris.COIT\..Myinterest8<S patty may log'On and register Ul'lder~project , name. Printed sets of documentS will not be 1ssuSc:! to prosr;lectlve subcontract~ and suppliers; ho\i@ver, printed sets or select. ~~~~~..~~e~i~~8~~ the wel:J$lle) for the direct t:osl. of prlllling and postage...,. .,.. '. Related p.roject. lriform~tion, inClUding addenda, wilt be aV8ilable only onAE in~~~in:e~~;~ ~:oP~~~$t~~~~ and register under the p(Oject narne. Printedse~otP~nt DocUments may be el<8n1lr'led a,t: .... '. . Neumann MonSon Architects . 221 E CoII!lge StreEtt,' Suite 303, 'Iowa City, IA 52240 Construction UpdlllePlan Room 521 3rdAve. SW, C9dar ,Rapids. iA 52404 McGraw Hill Dodg8Consttuctlor'l 474 First Avenue, CoraMlle,IA 52241 ~uque BuHders Exchal)g6 801 Cedar CrossRoad, Oubuque, IA 52003 Master Builders ot Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Bo,( 695 Des Moines, IA 50309 Construction Updllte Plan Room 1406 Central Avelllle, Box T, Fort Dodge,IA50501 . North Iowa Buildelll Exchange 25 W8tlt State Street, Suite B, BOx 1154, Mason CIty,IA50401 IIIOWa Builders Exchange 520 - 24th Street, ROCklsl8nd,IL $1201 COnsl.ruction UPdate Plan Room 612 Mulberry, Waterl()(),IA50704 F. W.Dodge Corporation 939 Office Park.~. Suite 121, W. Des Moines, IA502S5 . Marshalllown CorIStruclionBureau 709 South Center, Box '1000, MarshaJIlown,IA50158 OTHER.. REQUIt;lEMENTS Products and' materials incorporated In the WOr!( of Itlis Project are Exempt from Iowa sales tax and local option sales tax. Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payrilent Bond will be required in the full amount ot the contract. Work requited by the proposed contract shall begin upon ISSUANCE OF THE OWNER'S.NOTICE TO PROCEEO'; the Work must be completed with all equip- ment placed in operation on or before the comptetion date. noted on the contractor's bid form, 84bjectto an extension of time which may .be granted by the Owner. Provislonsln ArltOie$ 13.15 through 73.21 of the (;()de of . IOwa seek to provide opportunities tor targeted small business- es to parti'clpate In thll constnJctloh of this project. The Owrl$r has established a goal of five peroeqt of the bid price for certlfiedsmall.bus~s. The ~r~rV811the. right to re/tel any Or ~II ~.towiJlvejrregular1ly in the bids andi(l theb~!l9 and to enter into SUch ~(:!lI$S/l!iIIbe deemed to be in the OwrJeI'llll!lSl,!nterest. SITE.ASSESSM~ . SITE ~NATlON Examlne.tne project site before submit- ting a bid.. . PREBID CONFERENCE A blc!d8rscorifarencehas.bgen sched- uled for 1 0. am OIl January 25, 2007 at the Cllyof Iowa CItY. All genei'lllcontract and subcontract bid- ders are inVited. ." . Rl!P'esen~~lI$.. of. the OW/'!er' and AiCtiI<<lct WlIIbe in attendance. Information "relevlInt 'to . the . Bid POCl.ll\18nts. . will.be recorded..' in . an AdC/8ndurn, issued to Bid Document recipients. END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID 73249 January 12, 2007 .AlA Document A107'" -1997 Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Projects of Limited Scope where the basis of payment is a STlPULA TED SUM AGREEMENT made as of the Sixth day of February in the year Two Thousand Seven (In words, indicate day, month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name, address and other information) City of Iowa City, Parks and Recreation Dept. 220 S. Gilbert St. Iowa City, IA 52240 and the Contractor: (Name, address and other information) Selzer Werderitsch Associates 2222 Heinz Road Iowa City, IA 52240 the Project is: (Name and location) Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Iowa City, IA the Architect is: (Name, address and other information) Neumann Monson PC 221 E. College St., Suite 303 Iowa City, IA 52240 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AlA standard fonn. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AlA text. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. This Document includes abbreviated General Conditions and should not be used with other general conditions. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Inlt. 1 AlA Document A107™ -1997. Copyright @1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA"' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA"' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) ARTICLE 1 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 2 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~ 2.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement, if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date will be fIXed in a notice to proceed.) ~ 2.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. ~ 2.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of commencement, or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than May 15, 2007 None , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents (Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) None ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT SUM ~ 3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Two Hundred Eleven Thousand Two Hundred Dollars and Zero Cents ($ 211,200.00 ), subject to additions and deletions as provided in the Contract Documents. ~ 3.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.) None ~ 3.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: Description None Units Price ($ 0.00) ARTICLE 4 PAYMENTS ~ 4.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS ~ 4.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: Inlt. AlA Document A107111-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 2 ~ 4.1.2 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the Third day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the final day of the same month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than Forty-five ( 45 ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. ~ 4.1.3 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) 12.00% per annum (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) ~ 4.2 FINAL PAYMENT ~ 4.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Section 17.2, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. ~ 4.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follow: Final payment, including 5% retainage, to the contractor can be made 31 days after the final acceptance of the project by the owner, provided all documents listed in the General Conditions have been submitted. ARTICLE 5 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ~ 5.1 The Contract Documents are listed in Article 6 and, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: ~ 5.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Abbreviated Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contrac.tor, AlA Document Al 07 -1997. ~ 5.1.2 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated January 01, 2007 , and are as follows: Document None Title Pages ~ 5.1.3 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Section 5.1.2, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of Specifications exhibit: Please see attached Table of Contents (Table deleted) ~ 5.1.4 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated January 10,2007 unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Title of Drawings exhibit: See attached List of Drawings (Table deleted) ~ 5.1.5 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: Inlt. AlA Document A107TU -1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 3 Number I Date 1/25/2007 Pages 3 Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 5. ~ 5.1.6 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List any additional documents which are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.) None GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS ~ 6.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement with Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. ~ 6.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. ~ 6.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. ~ 6.4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. ~ 6.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for Inlt. AlA Document A107'" -1997. Copyright iCl1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 4 additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 7 OWNER ~ 7.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER ~ 7.1.1 The Owner shall furnish and pay for surveys and a legal description of the site. ~ 7.1.2 The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. ~ 7.1.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for other necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. ~ 7.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order is eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. ~ 7.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to perform a provision of the Contract, the Owner, after 10 days' written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's services made necessary thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. ARTICLE 8 CONTRACTOR ~ 8.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR ~ 8.1.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 7.1.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, omissions or inconsistencies discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. ~ 8.1.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. ~ 8.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES ~ 8.2.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall be fully and Init. AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software atll :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 5 solely responsible for the jobsite safety thereof unless the Contractor gives timely written notice to the Owner and Architect that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe. ~ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. ~ 8.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS ~ 8.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. ~ 8.3.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. ~ 8.3.3 The Contractor shall deliver, handle, store and install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. ~ 8.3.4 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. ~ 8.4 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear and normal usage. ~ 8.5 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded. ~ 8.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES ~ 8.6.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. ~ 8.6.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner if the Drawings and Specifications are observed by the Contractor to be at variance therewith. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. ~ 8.7 SUBMmALS ~ 8.7.1 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve in writing and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. ~ 8.7.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright <C> 1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 6 Inlt. ~ 8.8 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. ~ 8.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. ~ 8.10 CLEANING UP The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material. ~ 8.11 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees; shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect, unless the Contractor has reason to believe that there is an infringement of patent or copyright and fails to promptly furnish such information to the Architect. ~ 8.12 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. ~ 8.13 INDEMNIFICATION ~ 8.13.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 16.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of orresulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. ...suc.b.q1>ligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 8.13. ~ 8.13.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 8.13 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation.IIoIIdAr ~irtv-n 8.13.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 9 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT .,A~,1,TJJ,e ~~,admWs~\ig,g.gf.tOO..G.on.traaNmd will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final pay~t irt 'JnA.and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, ~~~~ year period for correction of Work described in Section 17.2. ~ 9.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the .....,Contra<:tor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the p,rogress and quality ofthe portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defecfSra~d deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work i~,being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordan~e)Vith the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will n,eitbeFhave control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, te~que~que-T1~es or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, sihC'e ""'".... AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution 01 this AlA" Document, or any portion 01 It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order NO.1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 7 Inlt. these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 8.2.1. ~ 9.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. ~ 9.4 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. ~ 9.5 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. ~ 9.6 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. ~ 9.7 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect will make initial decisions on all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and Contractor but will not be liable for results of any interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. ~ 9.8 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. ~ 9.9 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. ~ 9.10 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ~ 9.10.1 Claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to this Contract, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Section 15.2, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. Such matters, except those relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided forin Section 9.11 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the matter to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to n_L.'~ . the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. ~ 9.10.2 If a claim, dispute or other matter in question relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such matter may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the matter by the Architect, by mediation.i t J t. L_L.~. ~ 9.10.3 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their disputes by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to this Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association. 1'1_ --"1-_&[ "'-J t. -'J '[1 [L fiT I:> f' .. " u.... '. L. M'__., mediation shall proceed in advance of f ' . legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. . s disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to the Contract that are by mediation, ex elating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as r . ectIon 9.11 and Sections 14.5.3 and 14.5.4, sha arbitration which, u mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Indus s of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arb' I ed in writing witli t this Agreement and with the American oClation and shall be made within a reasonable time after . sen. The award y the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accor a Inlt. AlA Document A107T1l-1997. Copyright <C> 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent pOSSible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02107/2007 under Order No.l000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 8 . ble law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Except by written consent of the person or entity s be joine , 'tration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, b lon, joinder or in any other ma erson or entity not a party to the Agreement unde' arbitration arises, unless it is shown at the time the de arbitration is filed that (1) or entity is substantially involved in a common question of fact or law, (2) die e of n or entity is required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbitration, (3) the int of such person or entity in the matter is not insubstantial, and (4) such person or e . e Architect or any of t . ect's employees or consultants. The agreement herein am les to the Agreement and any other written agree bitrate referred to herein shall be cally enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction the ~ 9.11 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 19. Nothing contained in this Section 9.11 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 10 SUBCONTRACTORS ~ 10.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. ~ 10.2 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of the Subcontractors for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. ~ 10.3 Contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors shall (1) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect, and (2) allow the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress afforded to the Contractor by these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS ~ 11.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under conditions of the contract identical or substantially similar to these, including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Section 9.10. ~ 11.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's activities with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. Init. AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA'" Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'" Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 9 ~ 11.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable t(t~ separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the ~t1Or. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor beca9~e,ofdetays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separatec9Dtractor. ::'- ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK ~ 12.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Co,nU'act,mity order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, d~letions'or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being.adlllsted accordingly. Such changes Wtft€'Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Owner, '.,,,",, Contractor and Architect, or by written Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner and Architect. ~ 12.2 The cost or credit to the Owner from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties or, in the case of a Construction Change Directive, by the Contractor's cost of labor, material, equipment, and reasonable overhead and profit. ~ 12.3 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ~ 12.4 If concealed or unknown physical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 13 TIME ~ 13.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. ~ 13.2 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 14.4.2. ~ 13.3 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine, subject to the provisions of Section 9.10. ARTICLE 14 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ~ 14.1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ~ 14.1.1 Payments shall be made as provided in Article 4 of this Agreement. Applications for Payment shall be in a form satisfactory to the Architect. ~ 14.1.2 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or other encumbrances adverse to the Owner's interests. ~ 14.2 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ~ 14.2.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 14.2.3. ~ 14.2.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluations of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to Inlt. AlA Document A107T1l-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of II, may result In severe civil and criminal penallies, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 10 . an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. ~ 14.2.3 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 14.2.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 14.2.1. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 8.2.2, because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~ 14.2.4 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. ~ 14.3 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR ~ 14.3.1 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to sub-subcontractors in similar manner. ~ 14.3.2 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. ~ 14.3.3 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~ 14.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~ 14.4.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. AlA Document A107TU _ 1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of il, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11:55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 11 Inlt. ~ 16.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE ~ 16.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance on an "all-risk" policy form, including builder's risk, in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus the value of subsequent modifications and cost of materials supplied and installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 14.5 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 16.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and sub- subcontractors in the Project. ~ 16.4.2 The Owner shall file a copy of each policy with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. ~ 16.5 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION ~ 16.5.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 11, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to Section 16.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article II, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. ~ 16.5.2 A loss insured under the Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner. ARTICLE 17 CORRECTION OF WORK ~ 17.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. ~ 17.2 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 8.4, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 14.4.2, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. ~ 17.3 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 7.3. Inlt. AlA Document A107111-1997. Copyright (C) 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA- Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.10oo262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 14 ~ 17.4 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. ~ 17.5 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Article 17. ARTICLE 18 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ~ 18.1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract without written consent of the other. ~ 18.2 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. ~ 18.3 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. ~ 18.4 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD As between Owner and Contractor, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued: .1 not later than the date of Substantial Completion for acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion; .2 not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment for acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant4ate ~f Substantial Completion and prior to the issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and '., ,. . .3 not later than the date of the relevant act or failure to act by the Contractor for acts or failures to act occurring after the date of.the final Certifili:ate for Payment. ARTICLE 19 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT ~ 19.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR If the Architect fails to recommend payment for a period of 30 days through no fault of the Contractor, or if the Owner fails to make payment thereon for a period of 30 days, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages applicable to the Project. ~ 19.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER ~ 19.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. ~ 19.2.2 When any of the above reasons exists, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have and after giving the Inlt. AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @ 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlAe Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA- Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No. 1 000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 15 Contractor seven days' written notice, terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. ~ 19.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 19.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. ~ 19.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 20 OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS None ThisC{ement entered itr~ of the day and year first written ab~ t Q... t . '\...,.... _?fJ..-.-, ~ OwNER (Signature) CONTRACTO (Signature) Ross Wilburn. Mavor (Printed name and title) Thomas F. Werderitsch, President/CEO (Printed name and title) J1(t$f.' ~ ~ ~ mY ~ z; d~slrTJ , City !tomey's OffIce Inlt. AlA Document A107T11-1997. Copyright @ 1936, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AlA" Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA" Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AlA software at 11 :55:51 on 02/07/2007 under Order No.1000262440_1 which expires on 11/1/2007, and is not for resale. User Notes: (235639827) 16 I I I I I ~ " I c t I ~c w I ~: ~ I. ~1.;. 'I ,. TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 0101 00 Q103 00 0107 00 0110 000115 PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT DIRECTORY SEALS PAGE " TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS ........... ................... ............................. . ..................... ................ ............................. . ......................... . PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 00 1113 00 2113 002213 00 2613 00 4113 004313 004513 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ... ... . ... .,. .... . .. . . .. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BID FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BID BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIDDERS PRE-BID TSB CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 005100 00 5200 00 5215 00 6500 006513 006515 00 7315 SUMMARY 01 1000 NOTICE OF AWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGREEMENT FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEOUT FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTRACTOR'S DECLARATION OF SUBSTANTIAL ......... COMPLETION CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR AlA DOCUMENT A107 (1997) SUMMARY ....................................... . P~CEANDPAYMENTPROCEDURES 01 2000 01 21 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ................. ALLOWANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 1 ! Page 1 01/10/07 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 01 7800 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 03 3513 03 3900 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH-TOLERANCE CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING ........ CONCRETE CURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 040511 04 2002 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS ........... .......... ........ DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1 000 06 1753 ROUGH CARPENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES . . ... ..... ........ DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2400 073113 07 6200 07 9005 DIRECT-APPLIED EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . ASPHALT SHINGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOINT SEALERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 1 Page 2 01/10/07 .. ". DIVISION 08 . OPENINGS 08 1113 08 71 00 08 9100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR HARDWARE ................................. LOUVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 102113.19 1 0 2813 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOilET ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL - see below DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL - see below DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 31 2200 31 2316 31 2323 SITE CLEARING GRADING EXCAVATION Fill DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1313 329219 CONCRETE PAVING SEEDING 05.038 Table of Contents Riverside Festival Stage Improvements .'.r"- lrr: II, I ': , ! I . ,I I I' I" :1 r ! ! {I' 'I' II:i: ""I ", 1)11 , I~ j "I :1 Iii I ii, "I, 1/: I II i Ii' L Page 3 01/10/07 .. Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 A&J #200640.00 . DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15014 BACKFILLING . SECTION 15015 TRENCHING SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15190 VALVES SECTION 15101 TESTS - PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15140 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS SECTION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15412 SUMP PUMPS/SEWAGE EJECTORS SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES SECTION 15434 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16111 CONDUIT SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES SECTION 16160 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS SECTION 16170 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 16450 GROUNDING & BONDING SECTION 16471 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SECTION 16476 FUSES SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES & LAMPS SECTION 16660 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHER SECTIONS END OF DOCUMENT 00011 TABLE OF CONTENTS DOCUMENT 00011-1 - F .. I i~.'. ~ I f r. I I I l I r I I Riverside Festival Stage Improvements 05.038 SECTION '000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS G-001 COVER SHEET C-101 SITE PLAN A-101 PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS . , A.501 DETAILS AND SCHEDULES MO MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES M1 MECHANICAL PLANS M2 MECHANICAL PLANS E1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E2 ELECTRICAL PLAN END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 000115-1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Bond Number lAC 77105 AlA Document A372 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): Selzer Werderitsch Associates 2222 Heinz Road Iowa City IA 52240 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 2100 Fleur Drive Des Moines IA 50321 r<' ,":-~"'" w~.> ,._,.,_ = _J ....., f"'t '~ 1'::'/,) --.'1 \ , OWNER (Name and Address): City of Iowa City, Park and Recreation Dept 220 S Gilbert Street Iowa City IA 52240 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Feburary 6,2007 Amount: Two Hundred Eleven Thousand Two Hundred & no/100ths($211 ,200.00) Description (Name and Location): Riverside Festival Stage Improvements o <- .,::0 r'-..) C;') i i ~.'-1 , ',",-.-;'" )> o w BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Febuary 13, 2007 Amount: Two Hundred Eleven Thousand Two Hundred & no/100ths($211 ,200.00) Modifications to this Bond: l::& None o See Page 3 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: Selzer Werderitsch (Corporate Seal) Associates Signature: ~-i-raJ~~ Name and Title: omas F. Werderitsch President/CEO (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) SURETY Company: Merchants Bonding ComRany (Mutual) Signature: L Name and Title: N (Corporate Seal) rney-in-Fact (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or LaMair-Mulock-Condon Co. other party): Neumann Monson PC 4200 University Avenue #200 West Des Moines IA 50266 221 E College St., Suite 303 Iowa City IA 52240 AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND' DECEMBER 1984 ED. . AlA ,~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE" N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 1 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, succes- sors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contrac- tor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Con- tract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construc- tion Contract itself, through its agents or through inde- pendent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to t~e Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Con- tract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Own- er's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with rea- sonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practible after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered orthe Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without fu rther notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is ob- ligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND' DECEMBER 1984 ED, . AlA I8i THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., NW., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 2 able to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Con- MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOllOWS: tractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, re- duced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Con- tract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to per- form or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND, DECEMBER 1984 ED, . AlA. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 17:15 NEW YORK AVE.. NW.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20011(, A312-1984 3 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS . Bond' Number lAC 77105 AlA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): Selzer Werderitsch Associates 2222 Heinz Road Iowa City fA 52240 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 2100 Fleur Drive Des Moines IA 50321 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Iowa City, Park and Recreation Dept 220 S Gilbert Street Iowa City IA 52240 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Feburary 6, 2007 Amount: Two Hundred Eleven Thousand Two Hundred & no/100ths($211,200.00) Description (Name and location): Riverside Festival Stage Improvements BOND Date (Not ear/ier than Construction Contract Date): Febuary 13, 2007 Amount: Two Hundred Eleven Thousand Two Hundred & no/100ths($211 ,200.00) Modifications to this Bond: [2g None o See Page 6 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company:Selzer Werderitsch Associates Signature: ~~.....e Name and Title: Thomas F. Werderitsch President/CEO (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) (Corporate Seal) SURETY Company: Merchants Bonding Com pan (Mutual) (Corporate Seal) ey-in-Fact (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTA T/VE (Architect. Engineer or LaMair-Mulock-Condon Co. other party): Neumann Monson PC 4200 University Avenue #200 221 E College St., Suite 303 West Des Moines IA 50266 Iowa City IA 52240 AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 19M ED. . AlA · THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. NW.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 2(J{)(Jb A312-1984 4 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from all claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor,materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construc- tion Contract, provided the Owner has promptly noti- fied the Contractor and the Surety (at the address de- scribed in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, di- rectly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with sub- stantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Con- tractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the mate- rials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received with- in 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. S If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compli- ance. 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Para- graph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's ex- pense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for chal- lenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Payor arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. , 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the perfor- mance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelat- ed to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obliga- tions to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, includ. ing changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obliga- tions. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a c~urt of competent jurisdic- tion in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Sub- paragraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last mate- rials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applica- ble. 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the sig- nature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be suffi- cient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions con- forming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND, DECEMBER 1984 ED. . AlA A THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.w.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312.1984 5 Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this. Bond, the Contrac~or shall promptly furnish a copy of thIs Bond or shall permIt a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equip- ment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limita- tion in the terms "'abor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, 'telephone service or rental equipment used in the MODifiCATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the sig- nature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Qwner Default: Failu re of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Con- tractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Address: AlA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECEMBER 1984 ED. . AlA ~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N,W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312.1984 6 Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Persons By These Presents, that the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL). a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Stale of Iowa, and having its principal office in the City of Des Moines. County of Polk. State of Iowa, hath made, constituted and appointed, and does by these presents make, constitute and appoint F, Melvyn Hrubetz, Greg T. LaMair, Joyce O. Herbert, Nancy D. Schwarz, Mark E. Keaimes, Patrick K. Duff, Jeffrey R. Baker of Des Moines and State of Iowa its true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf as surety any and all bonds. undertakings, recognizances or other written Obligations in the nature thereof, subject to the limitation that any such instrument shall not exceed the amount of: FIVE MILLION (55,000,000.00) DOLLARS and to bind the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL). and all the acts of said Attorney-in-Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power-of-Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following Amended Substituted and Restated By- Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) on November 16. 2002. ARTICLE II. SECTION 8 - The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and authority to appoint Auorneys.in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company. and aUach the Seal of the Company thereto. bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. ARTICLE II. SECTION 9 . The signature of any authorized officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the executioo and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed. In Witness Whereof, MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) has caused these presents to be signed by its President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, this 16th day of January, 2006. ....... ..~,"G CO~.. .. ~~.........:,.,.,o.. . ~..~\\PO.9..;...,~.. . . <.) ....""'..;.L. .C'4:~ 11"'. :~:- -0- 0:-- ..,.~. 1933 Ii:: . L_. . c::. . -".:".... .. ::-to . "<<' . j,~. .. ~ii''''''''\'\'''.. ... -ct .- ....... STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK 55. MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) BY~~ President On this 16th day of January, 2006, before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), the corporation described in the foregoing instrument, and that the Seal affixed to the said instrument is the Corporate Seal of the said Corporation and that the said Instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first above written. ~. CINDY SMYTH . ' l. Commission Number 173504 o My Commission EXj)lres March 16,2009 STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK 55. &,~ Notary Public. Polk County, Iowa I, William Warner, ,Jr., Secretary of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER-OF-A TTORNEY executed by said MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL). which is still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. In Witness Vv'hereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the Company on this 13th day of February 2007 POA 0001 (1/06) ....... ..~"G CO.. o. ~~.... .... "'to". ...~~..f::, ~P0.9:;..1.;.. . ,_:~ ""'.;.L. -~.... ~.. :~:- -0- 0:-' : .,.... 1933 .::: '~";" ...~: . V.L~. 'j,~. '0 "'.:Iii....... '\(\".. '.. tl .. ....... ~~4.~~~~. Secretary P('o~ r:::o Prepared by: Terry Trueblood, Parks & Rec. Department, 220 S. Gilbert St., Iowa City, IA 52240,356-5110 RESOLUTION NO. 07-243 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE RIVERSIDE FESTIVAL STAGE IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT. WHEREAS, the Parks and Recreation Department has recommended that the work for the construction of the Riverside Festival Stage Improvements Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Selzer Werderitsch Associates of Iowa City, dated February 6th, 2007, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the performance and payment bond has been filed in the City Clerk's office. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 21.tdaYm~ /:0) M~~ ~ -MAYOR ATTEST: ~~~..J c/!. ~~ CIT . ERK Approved by ~<<-~. ~of) ~ City Attorney's Office ~(I"\( '" It was moved by Champion and seconded by adopted, and upon roll call there were: Vanderhoef the Resolution be AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x x x x x X X Bailey Champion Correia Elliott O'Donnell Vanderhoef Wilburn P&R1res/riverside accept.doc